MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

MELSEC FX Series

Programmable Logic Controllers

Programming Manual
(Basic & Applied Instructions Edition)

FX3U/FX3UC/FX3G

Art. no. 168591

01 11 2008 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION
JY997D16601
Version E
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable

Controllers
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction
Edition

Manual No. JY997D16601

Revision E
Date 11 / 2008

Foreword
This manual contains text, diagrams and explanations which will guide the reader through the safe and
correct installation, use, and operation of the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series programmable controller. It should be
read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit.
Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary. Always forward
it to the end user.

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses.
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which
may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.

© 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

1
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

Outline Precautions
• This manual provides information for the use of the FX3U Series Programmable Controllers. The manual
has been written to be used by trained and competent personnel. The definition of such a person or
persons is as follows;
a) Any engineer who is responsible for the planning, design and construction of automatic equipment
using the product associated with this manual should be of a competent nature, trained and qualified
to the local and national standards required to fulfill that role. These engineers should be fully aware of
all aspects of safety with regards to automated equipment.
b) Any commissioning or service engineer must be of a competent nature, trained and qualified to the
local and national standards required to fulfill that job. These engineers should also be trained in the
use and maintenance of the completed product. This includes being completely familiar with all
associated documentation for the said product. All maintenance should be carried out in accordance
with established safety practices.
c) All operators of the completed equipment should be trained to use that product in a safe and
coordinated manner in compliance to established safety practices. The operators should also be
familiar with documentation which is connected with the actual operation of the completed equipment.
Note: the term 'completed equipment' refers to a third party constructed device which contains or uses
the product associated with this manual
• This product has been manufactured as a general-purpose part for general industries, and has not been
designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life.
• Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power, electric power, aerospace, medicine
or passenger movement vehicles, consult with Mitsubishi Electric.
• This product has been manufactured under strict quality control. However when installing the product
where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails, install appropriate backup or failsafe
functions in the system.
• When combining this product with other products, please confirm the standard and the code, or regulations
with which the user should follow. Moreover, please confirm the compatibility of this product to the system,
machine, and apparatus with which a user is using.
• If in doubt at any stage during the installation of the product, always consult a professional electrical
engineer who is qualified and trained to the local and national standards. If in doubt about the operation or
use, please consult the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor.
• Since the examples indicated by this manual, technical bulletin, catalog, etc. are used as a reference,
please use it after confirming the function and safety of the equipment and system. Mitsubishi Electric will
accept no responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples.
• This manual content, specification etc. may be changed without a notice for improvement.
• The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, you
have noticed a doubtful point, a doubtful error, etc., please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric
distributor.

Registration
• Microsoft® and Windows® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
• The company name and the product name to be described in this manual are the registered trademarks or
trademarks of each company.

2
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions Edition Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Related manuals...................................................................................................................... 14
Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals .......................................................... 21

1. Introduction 23

1.1 Programming Language in PLCs .................................................................................................. 23

1.1.1 Types of programming languages ................................................................................................. 23
1.1.2 Compatibility among programs...................................................................................................... 24

2. Overview (Sequence Program) 25

2.1 Introduction of Convenient Functions............................................................................................ 25

2.1.1 Convenient functions for input processing..................................................................................... 25
2.1.2 Convenient functions for output processing .................................................................................. 26
2.1.3 Functions for supporting sequence control.................................................................................... 26
2.2 Introduction of Applied Instructions ............................................................................................... 27
2.2.1 Major applied instructions.............................................................................................................. 28
2.3 Analog/Positioning Special Control ............................................................................................... 30
2.4 Link and Communication............................................................................................................... 30
2.5 Introduction of Devices Constructing PLC .................................................................................... 32
2.5.1 Relationship among devices.......................................................................................................... 32
2.5.2 Device list ...................................................................................................................................... 33
2.6 Program Memory and Devices...................................................................................................... 35
2.6.1 Memory structure........................................................................................................................... 35
2.6.2 Memory operations and latched (battery backed) (power ON/OFF and RUN/STOP)................... 37
2.6.3 Types of backup methods against power failure ........................................................................... 42
2.6.4 Change between general devices and latched (battery backed) devices ..................................... 43
2.6.5 How to initialize devices (battery backed) ..................................................................................... 43
2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters.................................................................................................. 44
2.7.1 Parameter list ................................................................................................................................ 44
2.7.2 Parameter initial values and available tools for changing parameter values................................. 46
2.7.3 Memory capacity setting range...................................................................................................... 48
2.7.4 Compatible optional memory model .............................................................................................. 49
2.7.5 Keyword (entry code) .................................................................................................................... 50
2.7.6 Special unit initial value setting [GX Developer Ver.8.23Z or later] ............................................... 55
2.7.7 Positioning setting [for TBL (FNC152) instruction] [GX Developer Ver.8.23Z or later].................. 55
2.7.8 Built-in CC-Link/LT Setup (dedicated to FX3UC-32MT-LT-2) ....................................................... 55
2.7.9 Parameter settings by GX Developer ............................................................................................ 55

3. Instruction List 68

3.1 Basic Instructions .......................................................................................................................... 68

3.2 Step Ladder Instructions ............................................................................................................... 70
3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC Number......................................................... 70

4. Devices in Detail 84

4.1 Device Number List....................................................................................................................... 84

4.2 I/O Relays [X, Y]............................................................................................................................ 89
4.2.1 Numbers of I/O relays.................................................................................................................... 89
4.2.2 Functions and roles ....................................................................................................................... 90
4.2.3 Operation timing of input relays..................................................................................................... 91
4.3 Auxiliary Relay [M] ........................................................................................................................ 92
4.3.1 Numbers of auxiliary relays ........................................................................................................... 92

3
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions Edition Table of Contents

4.3.2 Functions and operation examples................................................................................................ 92

4.4 State Relay [S] .............................................................................................................................. 94
4.4.1 Numbers of state relays................................................................................................................. 94
4.4.2 Functions and operation examples................................................................................................ 95
4.5 Timer [T]........................................................................................................................................ 97
4.5.1 Numbers of timers ......................................................................................................................... 97
4.5.2 Functions and operation examples................................................................................................ 98
4.5.3 Set value specification method...................................................................................................... 99
4.5.4 Cautions on routines...................................................................................................................... 99
4.5.5 Details of timer operation and timer accuracy ............................................................................. 100
4.5.6 Program examples [off-delay timer and flicker timer] .................................................................. 100
4.5.7 Handling timers as numeric devices............................................................................................ 102
4.6 Counter [C].................................................................................................................................. 103
4.6.1 Numbers of counters ................................................................................................................... 103
4.6.2 Features of counters.................................................................................................................... 103
4.6.3 Related devices (to specify counting direction) [32-bit counter] .................................................. 104
4.6.4 Functions and operation examples.............................................................................................. 104
4.6.5 Set value specification method.................................................................................................... 106
4.6.6 Response speed of counters....................................................................................................... 106
4.6.7 Handling counters as numeric devices........................................................................................ 107
4.7 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC).............................................................................. 108
4.7.1 Types and device numbers of high speed counters .................................................................... 108
4.7.2 Input assignment for high speed counters................................................................................... 111
4.7.3 Handling of high speed counters ................................................................................................. 112
4.7.4 Current value update timing and comparison of current value .................................................... 114
4.7.5 Related devices ........................................................................................................................... 115
4.7.6 Changing the logic of external reset input signal......................................................................... 116
4.7.7 Assignment of counter input terminal and switching of function.................................................. 116
4.7.8 How to use 2-phase 2-count input counters C251 to C255 with 4 edge counting....................... 117
4.7.9 Conditions for hardware counters to be handled as software counters....................................... 118
4.7.10 Response frequency of high speed counters ............................................................................ 119
4.7.11 Cautions on use......................................................................................................................... 121
4.8 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3G PLCs)........................................................................................ 123
4.8.1 Types and device numbers of high speed counters .................................................................... 123
4.8.2 Input assignment for high speed counters................................................................................... 125
4.8.3 Handling of high speed counters ................................................................................................. 126
4.8.4 Current value update timing and comparison of current value .................................................... 126
4.8.5 Related devices ........................................................................................................................... 126
4.8.6 Assignment of counter input terminal and switching of function.................................................. 127
4.8.7 Response frequency of high speed counters .............................................................................. 128
4.8.8 Cautions on use........................................................................................................................... 129
4.9 Data Register and File Register [D] ............................................................................................ 131
4.9.1 Numbers of data registers and file registers................................................................................ 131
4.9.2 Structures of data registers and file registers .............................................................................. 132
4.9.3 Functions and operation examples of data registers................................................................... 133
4.9.4 Functions and operation examples of file registers ..................................................................... 135
4.9.5 Cautions on using file registers ................................................................................................... 138
4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER] ......................................................... 139
4.10.1 Numbers of extension registers and extension file registers ..................................................... 139
4.10.2 Data storage destination and access method ........................................................................... 139
4.10.3 Structures of extension registers and extension file registers ................................................... 140
4.10.4 Initialization of extension registers and extension file registers................................................. 140
4.10.5 Functions and operation examples of extension registers ........................................................ 141
4.10.6 Functions and operation examples of extension file registers................................................... 142
4.10.7 Cautions on using extension file registers ................................................................................. 145
4.10.8 Registration of data in extension registers and extension file registers..................................... 146
4.11 Index Register [V and Z] ........................................................................................................... 150
4.11.1 Numbers of index registers........................................................................................................ 150
4.11.2 Functions and structures ........................................................................................................... 150
4.11.3 Indexing of devices.................................................................................................................... 151
4.12 Pointer [P and I] ........................................................................................................................ 152
4.12.1 Numbers of pointers .................................................................................................................. 152
4.12.2 Functions and operation examples of pointers for branch......................................................... 153

4
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions Edition Table of Contents

4.12.3 Functions and operation examples of pointers for interrupt ...................................................... 154

5. How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions 158

5.1 Numeric Values Handled in PLCs

(Octal, Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Numbers)................................................................ 158
5.1.1 Types of numeric values.............................................................................................................. 158
5.1.2 Conversion of numeric values ..................................................................................................... 159
5.1.3 Handling of numeric values in floating point operations .............................................................. 160
5.2 Specification of Constants K, H and E (Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Number).................... 162
5.2.1 Constant K (decimal number)...................................................................................................... 162
5.2.2 Constant H (hexadecimal number).............................................................................................. 162
5.2.3 Constant E (real number) ............................................................................................................ 162
5.3 Character Strings ........................................................................................................................ 163
5.3.1 Character string constant ("ABC") ............................................................................................... 163
5.3.2 Character string data ................................................................................................................... 163
5.4 Specification of Digits for Bit Devices (Kn[ ]***)........................................................................... 164
5.5 Bit Specification of a Word Device (D[ ].b) .................................................................................. 165
5.6 Direct Specification of Buffer Memory (U[ ]\G[ ]) ......................................................................... 165
5.7 Indexing....................................................................................................................................... 166
5.7.1 Indexing in basic instructions....................................................................................................... 166
5.7.2 Indexing in applied instructions ................................................................................................... 167
5.7.3 Indexing example for instruction with limited number of use. ...................................................... 169

6. What to Understand before Programming 171

6.1 How to Read Explanation of Instructions .................................................................................... 171

6.2 Cautions on Creation of Fundamental Programs........................................................................ 174
6.2.1 Programming procedure and execution order ............................................................................. 174
6.2.2 Double output (double coil) operation and countermeasures...................................................... 175
6.2.3 Circuits which cannot be programmed and countermeasures .................................................... 176
6.3 I/O Processing and Response Delay .......................................................................................... 177
6.4 Mutual Relationship Among Program Flow Control Instructions................................................. 178
6.5 General Rules for Applied Instructions........................................................................................ 180
6.5.1 Expression and operation type of applied instructions ................................................................ 180
6.5.2 Handling of general flags............................................................................................................. 182
6.5.3 Handling of operation error flag ................................................................................................... 184
6.5.4 Handling functions of extension flag............................................................................................ 185
6.5.5 Limitation in number of instructions ............................................................................................. 185

7. Basic Instruction 187

7.1 LD, LDI ........................................................................................................................................ 189

7.2 OUT............................................................................................................................................. 191
7.3 AND, ANI..................................................................................................................................... 194
7.4 OR, ORI ...................................................................................................................................... 197
7.5 LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF ......................................................................................... 200
7.6 ORB ............................................................................................................................................ 206
7.7 ANB............................................................................................................................................. 207
7.8 MPS, MRD, MPP ........................................................................................................................ 208
7.9 MC, MCR .................................................................................................................................... 213
7.10 INV ............................................................................................................................................ 216
7.11 MEP, MEF................................................................................................................................. 217
7.12 PLS, PLF................................................................................................................................... 219
7.13 SET, RST .................................................................................................................................. 221
7.14 NOP .......................................................................................................................................... 224
7.15 END........................................................................................................................................... 225

5
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions Edition Table of Contents

7.16 Number of Instruction Steps and Specified Devices ................................................................. 226

8. Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09 227

8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump................................................................................................. 228

8.1.1 CJ instruction and operations of contact and coil ........................................................................ 232
8.1.2 Relationship between master control instruction and jump instruction........................................ 234
8.2 FNC 01 – CALL / Call Subroutine ............................................................................................... 235
8.2.1 Cautions on subroutines and interrupt routines........................................................................... 237
8.3 FNC 02 – SRET / Subroutine Return .......................................................................................... 239
8.4 FNC 03 – IRET / Interrupt Return ............................................................................................... 240
8.5 FNC 04 – EI / Enable Interrupt.................................................................................................... 242
8.6 FNC 05 – DI / Disable Interrupt................................................................................................... 243
8.7 FNC 06 – Main Routine Program End ........................................................................................ 244
8.8 FNC 07 – WDT / Watchdog Timer Refresh................................................................................. 246
8.9 FNC 08 – FOR / Start a FOR/NEXT Loop .................................................................................. 249
8.10 FNC 09 – NEXT / End a FOR/NEXT Loop................................................................................ 250

9. Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19 253

9.1 FNC 10 – CMP / Compare .......................................................................................................... 254

9.2 FNC 11 – ZCP / Zone Compare.................................................................................................. 256
9.3 FNC 12 – MOV / Move................................................................................................................ 259
9.4 FNC 13 – SMOV / Shift Move ..................................................................................................... 262
9.5 FNC 14 – CML / Complement..................................................................................................... 264
9.6 FNC 15 – BMOV / Block Move.................................................................................................... 266
9.6.1 Function of transfer between file registers and data registers..................................................... 268
9.7 FNC 16 – FMOV / Fill Move ........................................................................................................ 271
9.8 FNC 17 – XCH / Exchange ......................................................................................................... 274
9.9 FNC 18 – BCD / Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal .............................................................. 276
9.10 FNC 19 – BIN / Conversion to Binary ....................................................................................... 279

10. Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29 282

10.1 FNC 20 – ADD / Addition .......................................................................................................... 283

10.2 FNC 21 – SUB / Subtraction ..................................................................................................... 286
10.3 FNC 22 – MUL / Multiplication .................................................................................................. 289
10.4 FNC 23 – DIV / Division ............................................................................................................ 292
10.5 FNC 24 – INC / Increment......................................................................................................... 295
10.6 FNC 25 – DEC / Decrement...................................................................................................... 297
10.7 FNC 26 – WAND / Logical Word AND ...................................................................................... 298
10.8 FNC 27 – WOR / Logical Word OR........................................................................................... 300
10.9 FNC 28 – WXOR / Logical Exclusive OR.................................................................................. 302
10.10 FNC 29 – NEG / Negation....................................................................................................... 304

11. Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39 306

11.1 FNC 30 – ROR / Rotation Right ................................................................................................ 307

11.2 FNC 31 – ROL / Rotation Left ................................................................................................... 309
11.3 FNC 32 – RCR / Rotation Right with Carry ............................................................................... 311
11.4 FNC 33 – RCL / Rotation Left with Carry .................................................................................. 313
11.5 FNC 34 – SFTR / Bit Shift Right................................................................................................ 315
11.6 FNC 35 – SFTL / Bit Shift Left................................................................................................... 317
11.6.1 Replacement of SFT instruction in F1 and F2 Series ................................................................ 320

6
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions Edition Table of Contents

11.7 FNC 36 – WSFR / Word Shift Right .......................................................................................... 321

11.8 FNC 37 – WSFL / Word Shift Left ............................................................................................. 323
11.9 FNC 38 – SFWR / Shift Write [FIFO/FILO Control]................................................................... 325
11.10 FNC 39 – SFRD / Shift Read [FIFO Control] .......................................................................... 328

12. Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49 330

12.1 FNC 40 – ZRST / Zone Reset................................................................................................... 331

12.2 FNC 41 – DECO / Decode ........................................................................................................ 334
12.3 FNC 42 – ENCO / Encode ........................................................................................................ 337
12.4 FNC 43 – SUM / Sum of Active Bits.......................................................................................... 339
12.5 FNC 44 – BON / Check Specified Bit Status............................................................................. 342
12.6 FNC 45 – MEAN / Mean ........................................................................................................... 344
12.7 FNC 46 – ANS / Timed Annunciator Set................................................................................... 346
12.8 FNC 47 – ANR / Annunciator Reset.......................................................................................... 348
12.9 FNC 48 – SQR / Square Root................................................................................................... 349
12.10 FNC 49 – FLT / Conversion to Floating Point ......................................................................... 351

13. High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59 353

13.1 FNC 50 – REF / Refresh ........................................................................................................... 354

13.1.1 What should be understood before using the REF instruction .................................................. 357
13.2 FNC 51 – REFF / Refresh and Filter Adjust.............................................................................. 358
13.2.1 What should be understood before using REFF instruction ...................................................... 360
13.3 FNC 52 – MTR / Input Matrix .................................................................................................... 361
13.3.1 Operation and cautions for MTR instruction .............................................................................. 364
13.4 FNC 53 – HSCS / High Speed Counter Set.............................................................................. 365
13.4.1 Common cautions on using instructions for high speed counter ............................................... 368
13.5 FNC 54 – HSCR / High Speed Counter Reset.......................................................................... 371
13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High Speed Counter Zone Compare .............................................................. 374
13.6.1 Program in which comparison result is set to ON when power is turned ON
[ZCP (FNC 11) instruction] ..................................................................................................... 378
13.6.2 Table high speed comparison mode (M8130) ........................................................................... 380
13.6.3 Frequency control mode (HSZ and PLSY instructions) (M8132) .............................................. 383
13.7 FNC 56 – SPD / Speed Detection............................................................................................. 386
13.8 FNC 57 – PLSY / Pulse Y Output ............................................................................................. 390
13.9 FNC 58 – PWM / Pulse Width Modulation ................................................................................ 395
13.10 FNC 59 – PLSR / Acceleration/Deceleration Setup ................................................................ 399

14. Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69 404

14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State ....................................................................................................... 405

14.1.1 IST instruction equivalent circuit................................................................................................ 407
14.1.2 Example of IST instruction introduction (example of workpiece transfer mechanism) .............. 408
14.2 FNC 61 – SER / Search a Data Stack ...................................................................................... 416
14.3 FNC 62 – ABSD / Absolute Drum Sequencer........................................................................... 419
14.4 FNC 63 – INCD / Incremental Drum Sequencer ....................................................................... 422
14.5 FNC 64 – TTMR / Teaching Timer............................................................................................ 424
14.6 FNC 65 – STMR / Special Timer............................................................................................... 426
14.7 FNC 66 – ALT / Alternate State ................................................................................................ 428
14.8 FNC 67 – RAMP / Ramp Variable Value .................................................................................. 430
14.9 FNC 68 – ROTC / Rotary Table Control ................................................................................... 432
14.10 FNC 69 – SORT / SORT Tabulated Data ............................................................................... 435

7
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions Edition Table of Contents

15. External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79 438

15.1 FNC 70 – TKY / Ten Key Input ................................................................................................. 439

15.2 FNC 71 – HKY / Hexadecimal Input.......................................................................................... 443
15.3 FNC 72 – DSW / Digital Switch (Thumbwheel Input)................................................................ 447
15.4 FNC 73 – SEGD / Seven Segment Decoder ............................................................................ 450
15.5 FNC 74 – SEGL / Seven Segment With Latch.......................................................................... 452
15.5.1 How to select a seven-segment display unit ............................................................................. 455
15.5.2 How to select parameter "n" based on seven-segment display specifications.......................... 455
15.6 FNC 75 – ARWS / Arrow Switch ............................................................................................... 457
15.7 FNC 76 – ASC / ASCII Code Data Input................................................................................... 462
15.8 FNC 77 – PR / Print (ASCII Code) ............................................................................................ 464
15.9 FNC 78 – FROM / Read From A Special Function Block ......................................................... 467
15.9.1 Common items between FROM instruction and TO instruction (details)................................... 470
15.10 FNC 79 – TO / Write To A Special Function Block ................................................................. 472

16. External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89 474

16.1 FNC 80 – RS / Serial Communication....................................................................................... 475

16.2 FNC 81 – PRUN / Parallel Run (Octal Mode) ........................................................................... 477
16.3 FNC 82 – ASCI / Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion ................................................................ 479
16.4 FNC 83 – HEX / ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion ................................................................. 482
16.5 FNC 84 – CCD / Check Code ................................................................................................... 485
16.6 FNC 85 - VRRD / Volume Read................................................................................................ 488
16.7 FNC 86 - VRSC / Volume Scale ............................................................................................... 490
16.8 FNC 87 – RS2 / Serial Communication 2.................................................................................. 492
16.9 FNC 88 – PID / PID Control Loop ............................................................................................. 495

17. Data Transfer 2 – FNC100 to FNC109 499

17.1 FNC102 – ZPUSH/Batch Store of Index Register..................................................................... 500

17.2 FNC103 – ZPOP/Batch POP of Index Register ........................................................................ 503

18. Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139 504

18.1 FNC110 – ECMP / Floating Point Compare.............................................................................. 506

18.2 FNC111 – EZCP / Floating Point Zone Compare ..................................................................... 508
18.3 FNC112 – EMOV / Floating Point Move ................................................................................... 510
18.4 FNC116 – ESTR / Floating Point to Character String Conversion............................................ 511
18.5 FNC117 – EVAL / Character String to Floating Point Conversion ............................................ 517
18.6 FNC118 – EBCD / Floating Point to Scientific Notation Conversion......................................... 522
18.7 FNC119 – EBIN / Scientific Notation to Floating Point Conversion .......................................... 524
18.8 FNC120 – EADD / Floating Point Addition................................................................................ 526
18.9 FNC121 – ESUB / Floating Point Subtraction........................................................................... 527
18.10 FNC122 – EMUL / Floating Point Multiplication ...................................................................... 528
18.11 FNC123 – EDIV / Floating Point Division................................................................................ 529
18.12 FNC124 – EXP / Floating Point Exponent .............................................................................. 530
18.13 FNC125 – LOGE / Floating Point Natural Logarithm .............................................................. 532
18.14 FNC126 – LOG10 / Floating Point Common Logarithm.......................................................... 534
18.15 FNC127 – ESQR / Floating Point Square Root ...................................................................... 536
18.16 FNC128 – ENEG / Floating Point Negation ............................................................................ 537
18.17 FNC129 – INT / Floating Point to Integer Conversion............................................................. 538
18.18 FNC130 – SIN / Floating Point Sine........................................................................................ 540
18.19 FNC131 – COS / Floating Point Cosine.................................................................................. 542

8
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions Edition Table of Contents

18.20 FNC132 – TAN / Floating Point Tangent ................................................................................ 543

18.21 FNC133 – ASIN / Floating Point Arc Sine............................................................................... 544
18.22 FNC134 – ACOS / Floating Point Arc Cosine ......................................................................... 546
18.23 FNC135 – ATAN / Floating Point Arc Tangent........................................................................ 548
18.24 FNC136 – RAD / Floating Point Degrees to Radians Conversion .......................................... 550
18.25 FNC137 – DEG / Floating Point Radians to Degrees Conversion .......................................... 552

19. Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149 554

19.1 FNC140 – WSUM / Sum of Word Data..................................................................................... 555

19.2 FNC141 – WTOB / WORD to BYTE ......................................................................................... 557
19.3 FNC142 – BTOW / BYTE to WORD ......................................................................................... 559
19.4 FNC143 – UNI / 4-bit Linking of Word Data .............................................................................. 562
19.5 FNC144 – DIS / 4-bit Grouping of Word Data........................................................................... 564
19.6 FNC147 – SWAP / Byte Swap .................................................................................................. 566
19.7 FNC149 – SORT2 / Sort Tabulated Data 2............................................................................... 567

20. Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159 571

20.1 FNC150 – DSZR / Dog Search Zero Return............................................................................. 572

20.2 FNC151 – DVIT / Interrupt Positioning...................................................................................... 574
20.3 FNC152 – TBL / Batch Data Positioning Mode......................................................................... 576
20.4 FNC155 – ABS / Absolute Current Value Read........................................................................ 577
20.5 FNC156 – ZRN / Zero Return ................................................................................................... 578
20.6 FNC157 – PLSV / Variable Speed Pulse Output ...................................................................... 580
20.7 FNC158 – DRVI / Drive to Increment........................................................................................ 582
20.8 FNC159 – DRVA / Drive to Absolute ........................................................................................ 584

21. Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169 586

21.1 FNC160 – TCMP / RTC Data Compare.................................................................................... 587

21.2 FNC161 – TZCP / RTC Data Zone Compare ........................................................................... 589
21.3 FNC162 – TADD / RTC Data Addition ...................................................................................... 592
21.4 FNC163 – TSUB / RTC Data Subtraction ................................................................................. 594
21.5 FNC164 – HTOS / Hour to Second Conversion........................................................................ 596
21.6 FNC165 – STOH / Second to Hour Conversion........................................................................ 598
21.7 FNC166 – TRD / Read RTC data ............................................................................................. 600
21.8 FNC167 – TWR / Set RTC data................................................................................................ 601
21.9 FNC169 – HOUR / Hour Meter ................................................................................................. 604

22. External Device – FNC170 to FNC179 606

22.1 FNC170 – GRY / Decimal to Gray Code Conversion ............................................................... 607

22.2 FNC171 – GBIN / Gray Code to Decimal Conversion .............................................................. 608
22.3 FNC176 – RD3A / Read form Dedicated Analog Block ............................................................ 609
22.4 FNC177 – WR3A / Write to Dedicated Analog Block................................................................ 610

23. Introduction of Alternate Instructions – FNC180 611

23.1 Instruction correspondence table .............................................................................................. 611

9
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions Edition Table of Contents

24. Others – FNC181 to FNC189 612

24.1 FNC182 – COMRD / Read Device Comment Data .................................................................. 613

24.2 FNC184 – RND / Random Number Generation........................................................................ 616
24.3 FNC186 – DUTY / Timing Pulse Generation ............................................................................ 618
24.4 FNC188 – CRC / Cyclic Redundancy Check ............................................................................ 621
24.5 FNC189 – HCMOV / High Speed Counter Move ...................................................................... 625

25. Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199 630

25.1 FNC192 – BK+ / Block Data Addition ....................................................................................... 631

25.2 NFC193 – BK– / Block Data Subtraction ................................................................................. 634
25.3 FNC194~199 – BKCMP=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Block Data Compare......................................... 637

26. Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209 642

26.1 FNC200 – STR / BIN to Character String Conversion .............................................................. 643

26.2 FNC201 – VAL / Character String to BIN Conversion............................................................... 648
26.3 FNC202 – $+ / Link Character Strings ...................................................................................... 653
26.4 FNC203 – LEN / Character String Length Detection ................................................................ 656
26.5 FNC204 – RIGHT / Extracting Character String Data from the Right ....................................... 658
26.6 FNC205 – LEFT / Extracting Character String Data from the Left ............................................ 661
26.7 FNC206 – MIDR / Random Selection of Character Strings ...................................................... 664
26.8 FNC207 – MIDW / Random Replacement of Character Strings ............................................... 667
26.9 FNC208 – INSTR / Character string search.............................................................................. 671
26.10 FNC209 – $MOV / Character String Transfer ......................................................................... 673

27. Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219 676

27.1 FNC210 – FDEL / Deleting Data from Tables........................................................................... 677

27.2 FNC211 – FINS / Inserting Data to Tables ............................................................................... 679
27.3 FNC212 – POP / Shift Last Data Read [FILO Control] ............................................................. 681
27.4 FNC213 – SFR / Bit Shift Right with Carry................................................................................ 684
27.5 FNC214 – SFL / Bit Shift Left with Carry................................................................................... 686

28. Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249 688

28.1 FNC224~230 – LD =, >, <, <>, <=, >= / Data Comparison ....................................................... 690
28.2 FNC232~238 – AND=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison .................................................... 693
28.3 FNC240~246 – OR=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison ...................................................... 696

29. Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269 699

29.1 FNC256 – LIMIT / Limit Control ................................................................................................ 700

29.2 FNC257 – BAND / Dead Band Control ..................................................................................... 704
29.3 FNC258 – ZONE / Zone Control ............................................................................................... 707
29.4 FNC259 – SCL / Scaling (Coordinate by Point Data) ............................................................... 710
29.5 FNC260 – DABIN / Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion ............................................................. 715
29.6 FNC261 – BINDA / BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion ............................................................. 718
29.7 FNC269 – SCL2 / Scaling 2 (Coordinate by X/Y Data)............................................................. 722

10
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions Edition Table of Contents

30. External Device Communication

(Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC274 727

30.1 FNC270 – IVCK / Inverter Status Check................................................................................... 728

30.2 FNC271 – IVDR / Inverter Drive................................................................................................ 730
30.3 FNC272 – IVRD / Inverter Parameter Read.............................................................................. 732
30.4 FNC273 – IVWR / Inverter Parameter Write ............................................................................. 734
30.5 FNC274 – IVBWR / Inverter Parameter Block Write................................................................. 737

31. Data Transfer 3 – FNC275 to FNC279 740

31.1 FNC278 – RBFM / Divided BFM Read ..................................................................................... 741

31.1.1 Common items between RBFM (FNC278) instruction and WBFM (FNC279) instruction ......... 743
31.2 FNC279 – WBFM / Divided BFM Write..................................................................................... 746

32. High Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289 748

32.1 FNC280 – HSCT / High Speed Counter Compare With Data Table......................................... 749

33. Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299 754

33.1 FNC290 – LOADR / Load From ER .......................................................................................... 755

33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER ............................................................................................... 759
33.3 FNC292 – INITR / Initialize R and ER....................................................................................... 768
33.4 FNC293 – LOGR / Logging R and ER ...................................................................................... 772
33.5 FNC294 – RWER / Rewrite to ER............................................................................................. 778
33.6 FNC295 – INITER / Initialize ER ............................................................................................... 784

34. SFC Program and Step Ladder 787

34.1 SFC Program ............................................................................................................................ 787

34.1.1 Outline ....................................................................................................................................... 787
34.1.2 Explanation of function and operation ....................................................................................... 787
34.1.3 SFC program creating procedure .............................................................................................. 788
34.1.4 Handling and role of initial state relay........................................................................................ 792
34.1.5 Latched (battery backed) type state relays................................................................................ 793
34.1.6 Role of RET instruction.............................................................................................................. 793
34.1.7 Preliminary knowledge for creating SFC program..................................................................... 793
34.1.8 SFC flow formats ....................................................................................................................... 801
34.1.9 Program of branch/recombination state relays.......................................................................... 804
34.1.10 Rule for creating branch circuit................................................................................................ 805
34.1.11 Program examples .................................................................................................................. 810
34.2 Step Ladder............................................................................................................................... 819
34.2.1 Outline ....................................................................................................................................... 819
34.2.2 Explanation of function and operation ....................................................................................... 819
34.2.3 Expression of step ladder .......................................................................................................... 820
34.2.4 Creation of step ladder program (SFC program → STL program) ............................................ 821
34.2.5 Preliminary knowledge for creating step ladder programs ........................................................ 822
34.2.6 Program with state relays in branches and recombination........................................................ 825
34.2.7 Program examples .................................................................................................................... 829

11
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions Edition Table of Contents

35. Interrupt Function and Pulse Catch Function 835

35.1 Outline....................................................................................................................................... 835

35.2 Common Items.......................................................................................................................... 836
35.2.1 How to disable interrupt function and pulse catch function ....................................................... 836
35.2.2 Related items............................................................................................................................. 837
35.2.3 Cautions on use (common) ....................................................................................................... 838
35.3 Input Interrupt (Interrupt Triggered by External Signal) [Without Delay Function] .................... 840
35.3.1 Input interrupt (interrupt triggered by external signal) [without delay function] .......................... 840
35.3.2 Examples of practical programs (programs to measure short pulse width)............................... 844
35.4 Input interrupt (Interrupt by External Signal) [With Delay Function] .......................................... 846
35.5 Timer Interrupt (Interrupt in Constant Cycle)............................................................................. 847
35.5.1 Timer interrupt (interrupt in constant cycle) ............................................................................... 847
35.5.2 Examples of practical program (timer interrupt programs using applied instruction)................. 848
35.6 Counter Interrupt - Interrupt Triggered by Counting Up of High Speed Counter....................... 851
35.7 Pulse Catch Function [M8170 to M8177] .................................................................................. 852
35.8 Pulse width/Pulse period measurement function [M8075 to M8079, D8074 to D8097] ............ 854

36. Operation of Special Devices (M8000 -, D8000 -) 858

36.1 Special Device List (M8000 -, D8000 -) .................................................................................... 858

36.1.1 Special Auxiliary Relay (M8000 to M8511)................................................................................ 858
36.1.2 Special Data Register (D8000 to D8511) .................................................................................. 875
36.2 Supplement of Special Devices (M8000 - and D8000 -) ........................................................... 894
36.2.1 RUN monitor and initial pulse [M8000 to M8003] ...................................................................... 894
36.2.2 Watchdog timer [D8000]............................................................................................................ 895
36.2.3 Battery voltage low detection [M8005 and M8006].................................................................... 896
36.2.4 Power failure detection time [D8008, M8008 and M8007]......................................................... 896
36.2.5 Scan time (monitor) [D8010 to D8012] ...................................................................................... 896
36.2.6 Internal clock [M8011 to M8014] ............................................................................................... 897
36.2.7 Real time clock [M8015 to M8019 and D8013 to D8019] .......................................................... 897
36.2.8 How to set real time clock.......................................................................................................... 899
36.2.9 Input filter adjustment [D8020]................................................................................................... 901
36.2.10 Battery [BATT (BAT)] LED and [ALM] LED OFF command [M8030] ...................................... 902
36.2.11 Built-in analog volume [D8030 and D8031] ............................................................................. 903
36.2.12 Clear command [M8031 and M8032] ...................................................................................... 904
36.2.13 Memory hold stop [M8033] (output hold in STOP mode) ........................................................ 904
36.2.14 All outputs disable [M8034] ..................................................................................................... 904
36.2.15 Individual operation for RUN/STOP input [M8035 to M8037].................................................. 905
36.2.16 Constant scan mode [M8039 and D8039] ............................................................................... 906
36.2.17 State control in program with STL instruction/SFC chart [M8040]........................................... 906
36.2.18 Analog expansion boards [M8260 to M8279 and D8260 to D8279]....................................... 907
36.2.19 Analog special adapters [M8260 to M8299 and D8260 to D8299] .......................................... 909

37. Error Check Method and Error Code List 917

37.1 States and Colors of LEDs PLC Operation Status.................................................................... 917

37.1.1 POWER (POW) LED [lit, flickering or unlit] [FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC].............................................. 917
37.1.2 RUN LED [lit or unlit] [FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC]................................................................................ 918
37.1.3 BATT (BAT) LED [lit or unlit] [FX3U/FX3UC] .............................................................................. 918
37.1.4 ALM LED [lit or unlit] [FX3G] ...................................................................................................... 918
37.1.5 ERROR (ERR) LED [lit, flickering or unlit] [FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC] ............................................... 919
37.1.6 L RUN LED [FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)] ............................................................................................ 920
37.1.7 L ERR LED [FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)]............................................................................................. 920
37.2 Error Code Check Method and Indication ................................................................................. 921
37.2.1 Error code check method by display module............................................................................. 921
37.2.2 Error code check method by GX Developer .............................................................................. 922
37.2.3 Error indication .......................................................................................................................... 923

12
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instructions Edition Table of Contents

37.3 Supplementary Explanation of Devices for Error Detection ...................................................... 923

37.3.1 Error detection (M8060 to/D8060 to) ......................................................................................... 923
37.3.2 Operations of special devices for error detection ...................................................................... 924
37.3.3 Error detection timing ................................................................................................................ 924
37.4 Error Code List and Action ........................................................................................................ 925

Appendix A: Programming Tool Applicability and Version Upgrade History 933

Appendix A-1 Programming Tool Applicability.......................................................................... 933

Appendix A-1-1 Programming tool applicability.................................................................................... 933
Appendix A-1-2 Cautions on writing during RUN ................................................................................. 935
Appendix A-1-3 Precautions on Use of (Built-in USB) Programming Port ........................................... 938
Appendix A-1-4 Cautions on using transparent function by way of USB in GOT1000 Series.............. 939
Appendix A-1-5 Cautions on using transparent (2-port) function of GOT-F900 Series ........................ 940
Appendix A-2 Peripheral product applicability (except programming tools).............................. 941
Appendix A-2-1 Peripheral product applicability................................................................................... 941
Appendix A-3 Version Upgrade History .................................................................................... 942
Appendix A-3-1 Version check ............................................................................................................. 942
Appendix A-3-2 How to look at the manufacturer’s serial number ....................................................... 943
Appendix A-3-3 Version upgrade history [FX3G].................................................................................. 943
Appendix A-3-4 Version upgrade history [FX3U] .................................................................................. 943
Appendix A-3-5 Version upgrade history [FX3UC]................................................................................ 944

Appendix B: Instruction Execution Time 945

Appendix B-1 Basic Instruction Execution Time ....................................................................... 945

Appendix B-2 Step Ladder Instruction Execution Time ............................................................ 951
Appendix B-3 Label (P/I) Execution Time ................................................................................. 951
Appendix B-4 Applied Instruction Execution Time .................................................................... 952
Appendix B-5 Execution Time of Pulse Generation Instruction P in Each Applied Instruction . 964
Appendix B-6 Execution Time on Combination of Applicable Devices and Indexing ............... 966
Appendix B-6-1 Basic instruction (LD/LDI/AND/ANI/OR/ORI) execution time ..................................... 966
Appendix B-6-2 Applied instruction execution time .............................................................................. 966

Appendix C: Applied Instruction List [by Instruction Type/in Alphabetic Order] 969

Appendix C-1 Applied instructions [by instruction type] ............................................................ 969

Appendix C-2 Applied instructions [in alphabetical order] ........................................................ 973

Appendix D: Discontinued models 977

Warranty................................................................................................................................. 978

Revised History ..................................................................................................................... 979

13
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers Related manuals
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

Related manuals
For detailed explanation of programming (basic instructions, applied instructions and step ladder instructions)
in FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, refer to this manual.
For hardware information on the PLC main unit, special extension units, etc., refer to each associated
manual.
For acquiring manuals, contact the distributor you have purchased the product from.
~Essential manual
{Manual required depending on application
UManual with additional manual for detailed explanation
Manual Model
Manual name Contents
number name code
Manuals for PLC main unit
„FX3G PLC main unit
I/O specifications, wiring and installation of the
Supplied PLC main unit FX3G extracted from the FX3G
FX3G Series
U with JY997D33401 Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition. For −
Hardware Manual
product detailed explanation, refer to the FX3G Series
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
Details about the hardware including I/O
Additional FX3G Series User’s Manual
~ JY997D31301 specifications, wiring, installation and 09R521
Manual - Hardware Edition
maintenance of the FX3G PLC main unit.
„FX3U PLC main unit
I/O specifications, wiring and installation of the
Supplied PLC main unit FX3U extracted from the FX3U
FX3U Series
U with JY997D18801 Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition. For −
Hardware Manual
product detailed explanation, refer to the FX3U Series
User’s Manual - Hardware Edition.
Details about the hardware including I/O
Additional FX3U Series User’s Manual
~ JY997D16501 specifications, wiring, installation and 09R516
Manual - Hardware Edition
maintenance of the FX3U PLC main unit.
„FX3UC PLC main unit
I/O specifications, wiring and installation of the
PLC main unit FX3UC (D, DSS) extracted from
Supplied
FX3UC(D, DSS)Series the FX3UC Series User’s Manual - Hardware
U with JY997D28601 −
Hardware Manual Edition. For detailed explanation, refer to the
product
FX3UC Series User’s Manual - Hardware
Edition.
I/O specifications, wiring and installation of the
PLC main unit FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 extracted
Supplied
FX3UC-32MT-LT-2 from the FX3UC Series User’s Manual -
U with JY997D31601 −
Hardware Manual Hardware Edition. For detailed explanation,
product
refer to the FX3UC Series User’s Manual -
Hardware Edition.
Details about the hardware including I/O
Additional FX3UC Series User’s
~ JY997D28701 specifications, wiring, installation and 09R519
Manual Manual - Hardware Edition
maintenance of the FX3UC PLC main unit.
„Programming
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Items related to programming in PLCs
Additional Programming Manual - including explanation of basic instructions,
~ JY997D16601 09R517
Manual Basic & Applied Instruction applied instructions and various devices in
Edition (this manual) FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
„Terminal block
Supplied
FX INPUT AND OUTPUT
{ with JY992D50401 Terminal block handling procedures. −
TERMINAL BLOCKS
product

14
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers Related manuals
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

~Essential manual
{Manual required depending on application
UManual with additional manual for detailed explanation
Manual Model
Manual name Contents
number name code
Manuals for communication control
„Common
FX Series User’s Manual - Details about simple N : N link, parallel link,
Additional
{ Data Communication JY997D16901 computer link and no-protocol communication 09R715
Manual
Edition (RS instruction and FX2N-232IF).
FX3U Series User’s Manual
Additional Explains the MODBUS serial communication
{ - MODBUS Serial JY997D26201 −
Manual network in FX3U PLCs.
Communication Edition
„Communication via RS-232C/RS-422/RS-485/USB
When using each product, refer also to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit to which each
product is connected.
Items about the system configuration of USB
Supplied communication expansion board and the
FX3U-USB-BD
U with JY997D13501 driver installation method. −
User’s Manual
product For use, refer to the FX Series User’s Manual -
Data Communication Edition.
Handling procedures of the RS-232C
Supplied
FX3G-232-BD communication expansion board.
U with JY997D32001 −
Installation Manual For use, refer to the FX Series User’s Manual -
product
Data Communication Edition.
Handling procedures of the RS-232C
Supplied
FX3U-232-BD communication expansion board.
U with JY997D12901 −
Installation Manual For use, refer to the FX Series User’s Manual -
product
Data Communication Edition.
Handling procedures of the RS-232C
Supplied
FX3U-232ADP communication special adapter.
U with JY997D13701 −
Installation Manual For use, refer to the FX Series User’s Manual -
product
Data Communication Edition.
Handling procedures of the RS-232C
communication special adapter.
For the MODBUS serial communication
network, refer to the FX3U Series User’s
Supplied
FX3U-232ADP-MB Manual - MODBUS Serial Communication
U with JY997D26401 −
Installation Manual Edition.
product
For computer link or non-protocol
communication by RS and RS2 instructions,
refer to the FX Series User’s Manual - Data
Communication Edition.
Handling procedures of the RS-232C
Supplied
FX2N-232IF communication special function block.
U with JY992D73501 −
Hardware Manual For use, refer to the FX Series User’s Manual -
product
Data Communication Edition.
Handling procedures of the RS-422
Supplied
FX3G-422-BD communication expansion board.
U with JY997D32101 −
Installation Manual For use, refer to the FX Series User’s Manual -
product
Data Communication Edition.
Handling procedures of the RS-422
Supplied
FX3U-422-BD communication expansion board.
U with JY997D13101 −
Installation Manual For use, refer to the FX Series User’s Manual -
product
Data Communication Edition.
Handling procedures of the RS-485
Supplied
FX3G-485-BD communication expansion board.
U with JY997D32201 −
Installation Manual For use, refer to the FX Series User’s Manual -
product
Data Communication Edition.
Handling procedures of the RS-485
Supplied
FX3U-485-BD communication expansion board.
U with JY997D13001 −
Installation Manual For use, refer to the FX Series User’s Manual -
product
Data Communication Edition.

15
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers Related manuals
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

~Essential manual
{Manual required depending on application
UManual with additional manual for detailed explanation
Manual Model
Manual name Contents
number name code
Handling procedures of the RS-485
Supplied
FX3U-485ADP communication special adapter.
U with JY997D13801 −
Installation Manual For use, refer to the FX Series User’s Manual -
product
Data Communication Edition.
Handling procedures of the RS-485
communication special adapter.
For the MODBUS serial communication
network, refer to the FX3U Series User’s
Supplied
FX3U-485ADP-MB Manual - MODBUS Serial Communication
U with JY997D26301 −
Installation Manual Edition.
product
For N:N link, parallel link, computer link or non-
protocol communication by RS and RS2
instructions, refer to the FX Series User’s
Manual - Data Communication Edition.
Handling procedures of the RS-232C/RS-485
Supplied
FX-485PC-IF conversion interface.
U with JY992D81801 −
Hardware Manual For use, refer to the FX Series User’s Manual -
product
Data Communication Edition.
„CC-Link, MELSEC I/O LINK and AS-i system
When using each product, refer also to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit to which each
product is connected.
Handling procedures of the CC-Link master
Supplied
FX2N-16CCL-M special function block.
U with JY992D93201 −
Hardware Manual For use, refer to the FX2N-16CCL-M User’s
product
Manual.
Additional FX2N-16CCL-M Details about the CC-Link master special
{ JY992D93101 09R710
Manual User’s Manual function block.
Handling procedures of the CC-Link interface
Supplied
FX3U-64CCL special function block.
U with JY997D29801 −
Installation Manual For use, refer to the FX3U-64CCL User’s
product
Manual.
Additional FX3U-64CCL Handling procedures of the CC-Link interface
{ JY997D30401 09R718
Manual User’s Manual special function block.
Supplied
FX2N-32CCL Handling procedures of the CC-Link remote
{ with JY992D71801 09R711
User’s Manual device station special function block.
product
Supplied Remote I/O Stations and
For remote I/O stations and remote device stations for
{ with remote device stations for
CC-Link, refer to each manual and the related data.
product CC-Link
Handling procedures of the CC-Link/LT master
Supplied FX2N-64CL-M
special function block.
U with User’s Manual JY997D05401 −
For use, refer to the FX2N-64CL-M User’s
product [Hardware Volume]
Manual [Detailed Volume].
FX2N-64CL-M
Additional Details about the CC-Link/LT master special
{ User’s Manual JY997D08501 −
Manual function block.
[Detailed Volume]
Supplied Remote device For remote device stations, remote I/O stations, power adapter
{ with Remote I/O and dedicated power supply for CC-Link/LT, refer to each
product Power Adapter manual and the related data.
Supplied
FX2N-16LNK-M Handling procedure of the master special
{ with JY992D73701 09R709
User's Manual function block for the MELSEC I/O LINK
product
Supplied
FX2N-32ASI-M Handling procedure of the master special
{ with JY992D76901 −
User’s Manual function block for the AS-i system.
product

16
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers Related manuals
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

~Essential manual
{Manual required depending on application
UManual with additional manual for detailed explanation
Manual Model
Manual name Contents
number name code
Manuals for analog control
„Common
Detaileds about the analog special function
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC
Additional block (FX3U-4AD, FX3U-4DA, FX3UC-4AD)
{ User’s Manual JY997D16701 09R619
Manual and analog special adapter
- Analog Control Edition
(FX3U-∗∗∗∗-ADP).
„Analog input, temperature input and temperature control
When using each product, refer also to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit to which each
product is connected.
Handling procedures of the 2-channel analog
Supplied
FX3G-2AD-BD input expansion board.
U with JY997D33501 −
Installation Manual For use refer to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series
product
User’s Manual - Analog Control Edition.
Supplied
FX2N-2AD Handling procedures of the 2-channel analog
{ with JY992D74701 −
User’s Guide input special function block.
product
Handling procedures of the 4-channel analog
Supplied
FX3U-4AD input special function block.
U with JY997D20701 −
Installation Manual For use refer to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series
product
User’s Manual - Analog Control Edition.
Handling procedures of the 4-channel analog
Supplied
FX3U-4AD-ADP input special adapter.
U with JY997D13901 −
Installation Manual For use, refer to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series
product
User’s Manual - Analog Control Edition.
Handling procedures of the 4-channel analog
Supplied
FX3UC-4AD input special function block.
U with JY997D14901 −
Installation Manual For use refer to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series
product
User’s Manual - Analog Control Edition.
Supplied
FX2N-4AD Handling procedures of the 4-channel analog
{ with JY992D65201 −
User’s Guide input special function block.
product
Supplied
FX2NC-4AD Handling procedures of the 4-channel analog
{ with JY997D07801 −
User’s Manual input special function block.
product
Supplied Handling procedures of the 8-channel analog
FX2N-8AD
{ with JY992D86001 input (and thermocouple input) special function 09R608
User’s Manual
product block.
Handling procedures of the 4-channel Pt100
Supplied
FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP temperature sensor input special adapter.
U with JY997D14701 −
User’s Manual For use, refer to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series
product
User’s Manual - Analog Control Edition.
Handling procedures of the 4-channel Pt100
Supplied
FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP temperature sensor input special adaptor.
U with JY997D29101 −
User’s Manual For use, refer to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series
product
User’s Manual - Analog Control Edition.
Supplied
FX2N-4AD-PT Handling procedures of the 4-channel Pt100
{ with JY992D65601 −
User’s Guide temperature sensor input special function block.
product
Supplied Handling procedures of the 4-channel
FX3U-4AD-PNK-ADP
U with JY997D29201 Pt1000/Ni1000 temperature sensor input −
User’s Manual
product special adaptor.
Handling procedures of the 4-channel
Supplied
FX3U-4AD-TC-ADP thermocouple input special adapter.
U with JY997D14801 −
User’s Manual For use, refer to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series
product
User’s Manual - Analog Control Edition.
Supplied
FX2N-4AD-TC Handling procedures of the 4-channel
{ with JY992D65501 −
User’s Guide thermocouple input special function block.
product

17
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers Related manuals
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

~Essential manual
{Manual required depending on application
UManual with additional manual for detailed explanation
Manual Model
Manual name Contents
number name code
Supplied Handling procedures of the 2-channel
FX2N-2LC
U with JY992D85601 temperature control special function block. −
User’s Guide
product For use, refer to the FX2N-2LC User’s Manual
Additional FX2N-2LC Details about the 2-channel temperature
{ JY992D85801 09R607
Manual User’s Manual control special function block.
„Analog output
When using each product, refer also to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit to which each
product is connected.
Handling procedures of the 1-channel analog
Supplied
FX3G-1DA-BD output expansion board.
U with JY997D33601 −
Installation Manual For use, refer to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series
product
User’s Manual - Analog Control Edition.
Supplied
FX2N-2DA Handling procedures of the 2-channel analog
{ with JY992D74901 −
User’s Guide output special function block.
product
Handling procedures of the 4-channel analog
Supplied
FX3U-4DA output special function block.
U with JY997D20801 −
Installation Manual For use, refer to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series
product
User’s Manual - Analog Control Edition.
Handling procedures of the 4-channel analog
Supplied
FX3U-4DA-ADP output special adapter.
U with JY997D14001 −
User’s Manual For use, refer to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series
product
User’s Manual - Analog Control Edition.
Supplied
FX2N-4DA Handling procedures of the 4-channel analog
{ with JY992D65901 −
User’s Guide output special function block.
product
Supplied
FX2NC-4DA Handling procedures of the 4-channel analog
{ with JY997D07601 −
User’s Manual output special function block.
product
„Analog I/O (mixed)
When using each product, refer also to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit to which each
product is connected.
Supplied Handling procedures of the 2-channel analog
FX0N-3A
{ with JY992D49001 input/1-channel analog output special function −
User’s Guide
product block.
Supplied Handling procedures of the 4-channel analog
FX2N-5A
{ with JY997D11401 input/1-channel analog output special function 09R616
Users Manual
product block.
Manuals for high speed counter
„High speed counter
When using each product, refer also to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit to which each
product is connected.
Supplied
FX3U-4HSX-ADP Handling procedure of the special high speed
U with JY997D16301 −
Installation Manual input adapter.
product
Supplied
FX2N-1HC Handling procedures of the 1-channel high
{ with JY992D65401 −
User’s Guide speed counter special function block.
product
Supplied
FX2NC-1HC Handling procedures of the 1-channel high
{ with JY997D30701 −
User’s Manual speed counter special function block.
product

18
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers Related manuals
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

~Essential manual
{Manual required depending on application
UManual with additional manual for detailed explanation
Manual Model
Manual name Contents
number name code
Manuals for positioning control
„Common
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series
Additional Details about the positioning function built in
{ User’s Manual - JY997D16801 09R620
Manual the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series.
Positioning Edition
„Pulse output and positioning
When using each product, refer also to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit to which each
product is connected.
Handling procedure of the special high speed
Supplied
FX3U-2HSY-ADP output adapter.
U with JY997D16401 −
Installation Manual For use, refer to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series
product
User’s Manual - Positioning Edition.
Supplied
FX2N/FX-1PG-E Handling procedures of the 1-axis pulse output
{ with JY992D65301 09R610
User’s Manual special function block.
product
Supplied Handling procedures of the 1-axis pulse output
FX2N-10PG
U with JY992D91901 special function block. −
Installation Manual
product For use, refer to the FX2N-10PG User’s Manual.
Additional FX2N-10PG Details about the 1-axis pulse output special
{ JY992D93401 09R611
Manual User’s Manual function block.
Handling procedures of the 1-axis
Supplied
FX2N-10GM positioning special extension unit.
U with JY992D77701 −
User’s Guide For use, refer to the FX2N-10GM/FX2N-20GM
product
Hardware/Programming Manual
Handling procedures of the 2-axis
Supplied
FX2N-20GM positioning special extension unit.
U with JY992D77601 −
User’s Guide For use, refer to the FX2N-10GM/FX2N-20GM
product
Hardware/Programming Manual
FX2N-10GM, FX2N-20GM
Additional Details on the 1-axis/2-axis positioning special
{ Hardware/Programming JY992D77801 09R612
Manual extension unit.
Manual
„Programmable cam switch
When using each product, refer also to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit to which each
product is connected.
Supplied
FX2N-1RM-E-SET Handling procedures of the programmable
{ with JY992D71101 09R614
User’s Manual cam switch special extension unit.
product
Manuals for FX3U-20SSC-H positioning Block
Handling procedures of the 2-axis positioning
Supplied
FX3U-20SSC-H special function block.
U with JY997D21101 -
Installation Manual For use, refer to the FX3U-20SSC-H
product
User's Manual.
Separate FX3U-20SSC-H Describes FX3U-20SSC-H Positioning block
{ JY997D21301 09R622
volume User's Manual details.
Supplied
FX Configurator-FP Describes operation details of FX
{ with JY997D21801 09R916
Operation Manual Configurator-FP Configuration Software.
product

19
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers Related manuals
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

~Essential manual
{Manual required depending on application
UManual with additional manual for detailed explanation
Manual Model
Manual name Contents
number name code
Other manuals
When using each product, refer also to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit to which each
product is connected.
„Connector conversion
Supplied
FX3G-CNV-ADP Handling procedures of the conversion
U with JY997D32301 −
Installation Manual adapter for special adapter connection.
product
Supplied Handling procedures of the connector
FX3U-CNV-BD
U with JY997D13601 conversion expansion board for special −
Installation Manual
product adapter connection.
„Analog volume
Handling procedures of the 8-channel analog
Supplied volume expansion board.
FX3G-8AV-BD
U with JY997D33701 For use, refer to the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series −
Installation Manual
product Programming Manual - Basic and Applied
Instructions Edition.
„Battery (maintenance option)
Supplied
FX3U-32BL Battery
U with JY997D14101 Battery life and handling procedures −
Hardware Manual
product
„Display module
Supplied
FX3G-5DM Procedures for mounting and handling the
U with JY997D33801 −
Installation Manual display module
product
Supplied
FX3U-7DM Procedures for mounting and handling the
U with JY997D17101 −
User's Manual display module
product
„Display module holder
Supplied
FX3U-7DM-HLD Procedures for mounting and handling the
U with JY997D15401 −
User's Manual display module holder
product
„Memory cassette
Supplied Memory cassette
Specifications and operating procedures of the
U with FX3G-EEPROM-32L JY997D32401 −
memory cassette
product Installation Manual
Supplied Memory cassette
Specifications and operating procedures of the
U with FX3U-FLROM-16/64/64L JY997D12801 −
memory cassette
product Hardware Manual
„Extension power supply unit
Supplied
FX3U-1PSU-5V Specifications and operating procedures of
U with JY997D22501 −
Installation Manual the extension power supply unit
product
Supplied
FX3UC-1PS-5V Specifications and operating procedures of
U with JY997D12201 −
Installation Manual the FX3UC-1PS-5V
product

20
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals

Abbreviation/generic name Name

Programmable controllers
FX3G Series Generic name of FX3G Series PLCs
FX3G PLC or main unit Generic name of FX3G Series PLC main units
FX3U Series Generic name of FX3U Series PLCs
FX3U PLC or main unit Generic name of FX3U Series PLC main units
FX3UC Series Generic name of FX3UC Series PLCs
FX3UC PLC or main unit Generic name of FX3UC Series PLC main units
FX2N Series Generic name of FX2N Series PLCs
FX2NC Series Generic name of FX2NC Series PLCs
FX1N Series Generic name of FX1N Series PLCs
Generic name of FX1NC Series PLC main units
FX1NC Series
Only manuals in Japanese are available for these products.
FX1S Series Generic name of FX1S Series PLCs
Expansion boards
Generic name of expansion boards (The models shown below):
FX3G-232-BD, FX3G-422-BD, FX3G-485-BD, FX3G-2AD-BD, FX3G-1DA-BD,
Expansion board
FX3G-8AV-BD, FX3U-232-BD, FX3U-422-BD, FX3U-485-BD, FX3U-USB-BD,
and FX3U-CNV-BD
Special adapters
Generic name of special high speed I/O adapters, special communication adapters, and
special analog adapters
Special adapter
Connectable equipment may vary depending on the main unit. For connectable
equipment, refer to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the main unit.
Generic name of special high speed I/O adapters (The models shown below):
Special high speed I/O adapter
FX3U-2HSY-ADP and FX3U-4HSX-ADP
Special communication Generic name of special communication adapters (The models shown below):
adapter FX3U-232ADP(-MB) and FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
Generic name of special analog adapters (The models shown below):
Special analog adapter FX3U-4AD-ADP, FX3U-4DA-ADP, FX3U-4AD-PT-ADP, FX3U-4AD-PTW-ADP, and FX3U-
4AD-TC-ADP
Generic name of special adapter connection conversion adapter (The models shown
Connector conversion adapter below):
FX3G-CNV-ADP
Extension equipment
Generic name of I/O extension equipment and special extension equipment
Extension equipment Connectable equipment may vary depending on the main unit. For connectable
equipment, refer to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the main unit.
Generic name of FX2N Series I/O extension units, FX2N Series I/O extension blocks, FX2N
Series I/O extension blocks, and FX0N Series I/O extension blocks
I/O extension equipment
Connectable equipment may vary depending on the main unit. For connectable
equipment, refer to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the main unit.
Generic name of special extension units and special function blocks
Special function unit/block or
Connectable equipment may vary depending on the main unit. For connectable
special extension equipment
equipment, refer to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the main unit.
Generic name of special extension units
Special extension unit Connectable equipment may vary depending on the main unit. For connectable
equipment, refer to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the main unit.
Generic name of special function blocks
Special function block Connectable equipment may vary depending on the main unit. For connectable
equipment, refer to the User’s Manual - Hardware Edition of the main unit.
FX3UC Series special
FX3UC-4AD
function block

21
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers Generic Names and Abbreviations Used in Manuals
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

Abbreviation/generic name Name

Open field networks CC-Link and CC-Link/LT
CC-Link equipment Generic name of CC-Link master station and CC-Link remote stations
Generic name of CC-Link master station (having following model name):
CC-Link master (station)
FX2N-16CCL-M
CC-Link remote station Generic name of remote I/O stations and remote device stations
CC-Link intelligent device Generic name of CC-Link interface block (having following model name):
station FX3U-64CCL
Generic name of CC-Link/LT master station, CC-Link/LT remote I/O stations, CC-Link/LT
CC-Link/LT equipment
remote device stations, power supply adapters, and dedicated power supplies
CC-Link/LT master Generic name of built-in type CC-Link/LT master and (additional) CC-Link/LT master
Built-in type CC-Link/LT
Generic name of built-in type CC-Link/LT master built in FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)
master
(Additional) CC-Link/LT Generic name of CC-Link/LT master station (having following model name):
master FX2N-64CL-M
Power supply adapter Generic name of units connected to supply the power to the CC-Link/LT system
Dedicated power supply Generic name of power supplies connected to supply the power to the CC-Link/LT system
AS-i system
Generic name of AS-i system master station (having following model name):
AS-i master
FX2N-32ASI-M
MELSEC I/O LINK
Generic name of MELSEC I/O LINK master station (having following model name):
MELSEC I/O LINK master
FX2N-16LNK-M
Options
Extension power supply unit FX3UC-1PS-5V (for FX3UC series), FX3U-1PSU-5V (for FX3G, FX3U series)
Memory cassette FX3G-EEPROM-32L, FX3U-FLROM-16, FX3U-FLROM-64, and FX3U-FLROM-64L
Battery FX3U-32BL
Peripheral equipment
Peripheral equipment Generic name of programming software, handy programming panels, and display units
Programming tools
Programming tool Generic name of programming software and handy programming panels
Programming software Generic name of programming software
Generic name of programming software packages SW…D5C-GPPW-J and SW…D5C-
GX Developer
GPPW-E
FX-PCS/WIN(-E) Generic name of programming software packages FX-PCS/WIN and FX-PCS/WIN-E
Handy programming panel
Generic name of programming panels FX-20P(-E) and FX-10P(-E)
(HPP)
RS-232C/RS-422 converter FX-232AW, FX-232AWC, and FX-232AWC-H
RS-232C/RS-485 converter FX-485PC-IF-SET and FX-485PC-IF
Display units
GOT1000 Series Generic name of GT15, GT11 and GT10
GOT-900 Series Generic name of GOT-A900 and GOT-F900 Series
GOT-A900 Series Generic name of GOT-A900 Series
GOT-F900 Series Generic name of GOT-F900 Series
Generic name of ET-940 Series
ET-940 Series
Only manuals in Japanese are available for these products.
Manuals
FX3G Hardware Edition FX3G Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition
FX3U Hardware Edition FX3U Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition
FX3UC Hardware Edition FX3UC Series User’s Manual - Hardware Edition
Programming Manual FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition
Communication Control Edition FX Series User’s Manual - Data Communication Edition
Analog Control Edition FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series User’s Manual - Analog Control Edition
Positioning Control Edition FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series User’s Manual - Positioning Edition

22
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1.1 Programming Language in PLCs

Introduction
1. Introduction
This chapter explains basic items related to programming in FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC programmable 2
controllers (PLCs).

Overview
1.1 Programming Language in PLCs
This section explains the features of programming in FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.
3

List
Instruction
1.1.1 Types of programming languages
FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs support the following three types of programming languages:

1. List programming
4
This method is the basis of programs.

in Detail
Devices
1) Features
In this method, sequence instructions are input in the form of instruction words such as "LD", "AND" and
"OUT".
This input method is the basis of sequence programs.
2) Example of list display 5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Step Instruction Device number
0000 LD X000
0001 OR Y005
0002 ANI X002
0003 OUT Y005 6

Programming
Before
…

2. Circuit programming
In this method, ladder formats are drawn on the graphic screen.
1) Features 7
In a circuit program, a sequence circuit is drawn on the graphic screen by sequence formats and device

Instruction
Basic
numbers. Because a sequence circuit is expressed with contact symbols and coil symbols, the contents
of a program can be understood easily.
In the circuit display status, the PLC operations can be monitored.
2) Example of circuit display
X000 X002 8
Y005
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Y005

The above list program is expressed in

the circuit diagram.
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

3. SFC (STL <step ladder>) programming

This input method allows sequence design in accordance with the flow of machine operations.
1) Features
In an SFC (sequential function chart) program, sequences can be designed in accordance with the flow of
machine operations. 10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

2) Compatibility between SFC programs and other programs

SFC programs can be converted into another program format. And when list programs and circuit
programs are created according to certain rules, they can be converted inversely into SFC programs.

23
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 1 Introduction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 1.1 Programming Language in PLCs

1.1.2 Compatibility among programs

All sequence programs created by the aforementioned three types are stored in the form of instruction words
(contents as at the time of list program) in the program memory inside the PLC.
• Programs created by these three types of input methods can be converted mutually, and then displayed
and edited as shown in the figure below.

List

Circuit SFC

24
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.1 Introduction of Convenient Functions

Introduction
2. Overview (Sequence Program)
This chapter explains the basic functions of FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs. 2
This chapter includes not only the features of PLCs but also introduction of representative functions,

Overview
parameters and memory to utilize the functions of PLCs. Read this chapter before designing sequences.

2.1 Introduction of Convenient Functions

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs have the following instruction functions.
3

List
Instruction
2.1.1 Convenient functions for input processing

1. "High speed counter" function of one phase or two phases for counting high speed inputs
One-phase high speed counters can execute counting at up to 100 kHz (or 200 kHz when a special high 4
speed input adapter*1 is used) in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs and up to 60 kHz in FX3G PLCs regardless of the

in Detail
Devices
operation time because they process high speed pulses from specific input relays as interrupts.
(Two-phase high speed counters can execute counting at up to 50 kHz (or 100 kHz when a special high
speed input adapter*1 is used) in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs and up to 30 kHz in FX3G PLCs.)
The counting result can be immediately handled as high speed counter output interrupts by specific program
processing and high speed counter counted values by comparison instructions dedicated to high speed 5
counters.

Constant
Device &
Specified the
*1. Can only be connected to the FX3U PLC.
→ Related instructions: High speed counter compare;
HSCS (FNC 53), HSCR (FNC 54) and HSZ (FNC 55)

If the number of high speed counters is insufficient, special extension equipment (high speed counter
blocks) can be connected.
6

Programming
Before
By extending hardware counters in the high speed counter block*2, high speed pulses at up to 50 kHz can be
received (except 1 and 4 edge count).
*2. Can only be connected to the FX3U/FX3UC PLC.
→ FX2N(C)-1HC high speed counter block

2. "I/O refresh" function for receiving the latest input information 7

Instruction
Basic
The input terminal information of the PLC in the batch refresh method is input all at once by the input image
memory before step 0. The output information is output at one time when END instruction is executed.
I/O refresh instruction can get the latest input information and immediately output the operation result during
sequence operation.
→ Related instruction: Refresh REF (FNC 50)
8
3. "Input filter adjustment" function for changing the time constant of input relays
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Input relays in the PLC are equipped with a C-R filter of approximately 10 ms as countermeasures against
chattering and noise in input signals. Because a digital filter is adopted for the input relays X000 to X017*1,
however, the filter value can be changed in sequence programs.
→ Related instruction: Refresh and filter adjust instruction REFF (FNC 51)
*1. X000 to X007 in the FX3G, FX3U-16M… and FX3UC-16M…. 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

4. "Pulse catch" function

The pulse catch function is provided as a method to receive short-time pulse signals.
The pulse catch function monitors signals from specific input relays, and sets special auxiliary relays in the
interrupt processing as soon as signals are input.
The pulse catch function can be used in a wide range of applications because even narrow pulses can be
easily received.
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

When complicated operations should be processed with high priority as interrupt by using specific trigger
signals, the "interrupt" function described later is suitable.
→ Refer to Section 35.7.

25
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.1 Introduction of Convenient Functions

5. Three types of "interrupt" functions for receiving short-period pulses and priority
processing
→ Refer to Chapter 35.
1) Input interrupt
Signals from specific input relays are monitored. At the rising edge or falling edge of the monitored input,
a specified interrupt routine is executed with highest priority.
2) Timer interrupt
Specified interrupt routines are executed with highest priority at every specified time.
3) Counter interrupt *1
Depending on the present value of a high speed counter, a specified interrupt routine is executed with
highest priority.
*1. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

6. Pulse width/Pulse period measurement function*1

The pulse width or pulse period of pulses input from input terminals (X000, X001, X003 and X004) of the main
unit can be measured in units of 10µs.
The pulse width/pulse period measurement function is available in a wide range of applications because the
pulse width or pulse period can be easily taken in accordance with the setting of special auxiliary relays.
The input signal delay time can be measured using two or more input terminals.
→ Refer to Section 35.8.
*1. This function is supported only in FX3G PLCs.

2.1.2 Convenient functions for output processing

1. "I/O refresh" function for outputting the latest input information

The input terminal information of the PLC in the batch refresh method is input at one time by the input image
memory before operation in the step 0. The output information is output at one time when END instruction is
executed.
I/O refresh instruction can get the latest input information and immediately output the operation result during
sequence operation.
→ Related instruction: Refresh REF (FNC 50)

2. "Pulse output" function for pulse train output control

→ Related instructions: Pulse Y Output PLSY (FNC 57) and
Acceleration/Deceleration Setup PLSR (FNC 59)

3. "Positioning" function for positioning control

→ Related instructions: DOG Search Zero Return DSZR (FNC150),
Interrupt Positioning DVIT (FNC151), Zero Return (FNC156),
Variable Speed Pulse Output PLSV (FNC157),
Drive to Increment DRVI (FNC158) and
Drive to Absolute DRVA (FNC159)

2.1.3 Functions for supporting sequence control

1. "Constant scan" mode for making the operation cycle of the PLC constant
The operation cycle in the PLC adopting the cyclic operation method varies depending on the contents of the
program execution.
In the constant scan mode (M8039 and D8039), the operation cycle can be made constant. As a result,
instructions executed in synchronization with the operation can be processed in a constant cycle.

2. "All outputs disable" mode for turning OFF all output signals
When the special auxiliary relay M8034 is driven, the output latch memory is cleared. Accordingly, all output
relays (Y) turn OFF while the PLC is continuing its operation.
However, the status of output relays (Y) in each device image memory is not cleared. As a result, when
devices are monitored using a programming tool, they may be regarded as the ON status.

26
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.2 Introduction of Applied Instructions

1
3. "Memory hold stop" function for holding the output status during the RUN mode even in the

Introduction
STOP mode
When the special auxiliary relay M8033 is driven, the PLC stops and holds the output status during the RUN
mode.

4. Registration of "entry code" for protecting programs

The entry code can be registered to prevent erroneous read/incorrect write protection of created sequence
2

Overview
programs.
With regard to online operations from GX Developer (Ver.8.23Z or later) and handy programming panels, the
program protection level can be set by the entry code specification method. In this case, such specification
that "changes of a program are disabled, but monitoring and changes of present values are enabled" is
available.
→ Refer to the manual of the used programming tool. 3

List
Instruction
5. Addition of "comments" for a sequence program
By setting parameters, the device comment area (where Katakana, Kanji and alphanumeric characters are
available) can be secured in the program memory.
→ Refer to the manual of the used programming tool.

6. Writing programs in the RUN mode 4

in Detail
Devices
Programs can be changed while the PLC is operating (RUN mode).
By this function, programs can be adjusted and changed efficiently without stopping the machine.
→ Refer to the manual of the used programming tool.

2.2 Introduction of Applied Instructions 5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
1. Excellent fundamental performance
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs are equipped with not only fundamental applied functions for data transfer, data
comparison, arithmetic operations, logical operations, data rotation, and data shift but also high speed
processing instructions for I/O refresh, interrupt, comparison dedicated to high speed counters, and high
speed pulse output as well as initial state instructions by which standard operations for machine control are 6
made into packages in the SFC control. In this way, FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs have the specifications offering

Programming
Before
fundamental functions, high speed processing, and good operability.

2. Advanced control available easily

In addition, FX PLCs offer many handy instructions by which complicated sequence control is made into
packages to mitigate the load for creating sequence programs and save the number of I/O points.
FX PLCs also offer floating point arithmetic operations and PID operations to cope with more advanced
7

Instruction
Basic
control.

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

27
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.2 Introduction of Applied Instructions

2.2.1 Major applied instructions

This subsection introduces representative ones among many applied instructions.

1. Program flow • Rotation left (ROL/FNC 31)

• Conditional jump (CJ/FNC 00) • Rotation right with carry (RCR/FNC 32)
• Call subroutine (CALL/FNC 01) • Rotation left with carry (RCL/FNC 33)
• Enable interrupt (EI/FNC 04) • Bit shift right (SFTR/FNC 34)
• Disable interrupt (DI/FNC 05) • Bit shift left (SFTL/FNC 35)
• Start a FOR/NEXT loop (FOR/FNC 08) • Word shift right (WSFR/FNC 36)
→ Refer to Chapter 8. • Word shift left (WSFL/FNC 37)
→ Refer to Chapter 11.
2. Move and compare
• Compare (CMP/FNC 10) 5. Data operation
• Data comparison (FNC224 to FNC246) • Zone reset (ZRST/FNC 40)
• Floating point compare • Decode (DECO/FNC 41)
(ECMP/FNC110 and EZCP/FNC111) • Encode (ENCO/FNC 42)
• Zone compare (ZCP/FNC 11) • Sum of active bits (SUM/FNC 43)
• High speed counter compare • Mean (MEAN/FNC 45)
(FNC 53 to FNC 55)
• Word to byte (WTOB/FNC141) and byte to
• High speed counter compare with data table word (BTOW/FNC142)
(HSCT/FNC280)
• 4-bit linking/grouping of word data
• Move (MOV/FNC 12) (FNC143 and FNC144)
• Floating point move (EMOV/FNC112) • Limit control (LIMIT/FNC256)
• High speed counter move (HCMOV/FNC189) • Dead band control (BAND/FNC257)
• Conversion to binary-coded decimal • Zone control (ZONE/FNC258)
(BCD/FNC 18)
• Block data operation (FNC192 to FNC199)
• Conversion to binary (BIN/FNC 19)
• Character string control (FNC200 to FNC209)
• Decimal to gray code conversion (FNC170) → Refer to Chapter 12, Chapter 19,
and gray code to decimal conversion Chapter 25, Chapter 26 and Chapter 29.
(FNC171)
→ Refer to Chapter 9, Chapter 13, Chapter 18, 6. High speed processing
Chapter 22, Chapter 24, Chapter 28 and
• Refresh (REF/FNC 50)
Chapter 32.
• Refresh and filter adjust (REFF/FNC 51)
3. Arithmetic and logical operations • Speed detection (SPD/FNC 56)
• Addition (ADD/FNC 20) • Pulse Y output (PLSY/FNC 57)
• Subtraction (SUB/FNC 21) • Pulse ramp (PLSR/FNC 59)
• Multiplication (MUL/FNC 22) → Refer to Chapter 13.
• Division (DIV/FNC 23) 7. Handy instructions and instructions for
• Increment (INC/FNC 24) external devices
• Square root (SQR/FNC 48) • Initial state (IST/FNC 60)
• Trigonometry (FNC130 to FNC135) • Teaching timer (TTMR/FNC 64)
• Conversion from/to floating point • Alternate state (ALT/FNC 66)
(FNC 49, FNC118, FNC119 and FNC129)
• Ramp variable value (RAMP/FNC 67)
• Floating point arithmetic operations
• Rotary table control (ROTC/FNC 68)
(FNC120 to FNC123)
• Ten-key input (TKY/FNC 70)
• Floating point square root (ESQR/FNC127)
→ Refer to Chapter 10, Chapter 12 and • Digital switch (thumbwheel input)
Chapter 18. (DSW/FNC 72)
• Seven-segment decoder (SEGD/FNC 73)
4. Rotation and shift operation
• Seven-segment with latch (SEGL/FNC 74)
• Rotation right (ROR/FNC 30)

28
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.2 Introduction of Applied Instructions

1
• ASCII code data input (ASC/FNC 76)

Introduction
• BFM Read, BFM Write(FNC 78, FNC 79,
FNC278, and FNC279)
• Serial communication (FNC 80 and FNC 87)
• Analog volume (FNC 85 and FNC 86)
2
• Inverter communication (FNC270 to FNC274)

Overview
• Hexadecimal to ASCII conversion
(ASCI/FNC 82)
• ASCII to hexadecimal conversion
(HEX/FNC 83)
• Cyclic redundancy check (CRC/FNC188)
3

List
Instruction
• Random number generation (RND/FNC184)
• Real time clock control (FNC160 to FNC167)
• Hour meter (HOUR/FNC 169)
• Timing pulse generation (DUTY/FNC186)
• Logging R and ER (LOGR/FNC293)
4

in Detail
Devices
→ Refer to Chapter 14, Chapter 15,
Chapter 16, Chapter 21, Chapter 24, Chapter
30, Chapter 31 and Chapter 33.

8. Complicated control
• Search a data stack (SER/FNC 61) 5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
• Sort tabulated data (FNC 69 and FNC149)
• PID control loop (PID/FNC 88)
→ Refer to Chapter 14, Chapter 16 and
Chapter 19.

9. Positioning control 6

Programming
Before
• Dog search zero return (DSZR/FNC150)
• Interrupt positioning (DVIT/FNC151)
• Batch data positioning mode (TBL/FNC152)
• Absolute present value read (ABS/FNC155)
• Zero return (ZRN/FNC156)
7

Instruction
Basic
• Variable speed pulse output (PLSV/FNC157)
• Drive to increment (DRVI/FNC158)
• Drive to absolute (DRVA/FNC159)
→ Refer to Chapter 20.
→ Refer to the Positioning Control Manual. 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

29
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.3 Analog/Positioning Special Control

2.3 Analog/Positioning Special Control

For the details, refer to the manual of each product.

1. Analog I/O control 3. High speed counter

• Analog input • High speed counter (hardware counter
• Analog output equipped with multiplication function)
→ Refer to the respective product manual.
• Pt100 temperature sensor input
• Thermocouple temperature sensor input
• Block dedicated to temperature control
→ Refer to the respective product manual.

2. Positioning control
• SSCNETΙΙΙ - Positioning Block.
• Pulse output block (controlled by sequence
program)
• Positioning unit (controlled by instructions
dedicated to positioning)
• Cam switch (resolver detection)
→ Refer to the respective product manual.

2.4 Link and Communication

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs support the following communication functions:

1. CC-Link 3. MELSEC I/O LINK

The CC-Link system can be constructed with an The MELSEC I/O LINK is a remote I/O system
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC working as the master whose master station is an FX3U/FX3UC (D, DSS)
station. PLC.
An A or QnA PLC can work as the master Units for MELSEC I/O LINK remote I/O system
station, and FX PLCs can be connected as (A PLCs) can be used as remote units.
remote device stations. → Refer to the included manual.
A Q PLC can work as the master station, and FX
PLCs can be connected to remote device 4. AS-i system
stations or intelligent device stations. A network system at the actuator or sensor level
The CC-Link is an open network allowing can be constructed with an FX3U/FX3UC PLC
connection of not only FX PLCs but also working as the master station in the AS-i system.
inverters, AC servo systems, and sensors. → Refer to the included manual.
→ Refer to the included manual.
5. Simple N : N link
2. CC-Link/LT Up to eight FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs are
The CC-Link/LT system can be constructed with connected, and data are automatically
an FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC working as the master transferred among them.
station. → Refer to the Data Communication Edition.
General X (input) and Y (output) devices are
assigned to remote I/O units, and operated by 6. Parallel link
programs for general-purpose I/O. Two PLCs are connected, and data are
→ Refer to the FX3UC Hardware Edition for the automatically transferred between them.
built-in type CC-Link/LT master. → Refer to the Data Communication Edition.
→ Refer to the product manual for the FX2N-
64CL-M.

30
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.4 Link and Communication

1
7. Computer link

Introduction
A computer such as personal computer works as the master station, up to sixteen FX and A PLCs are
connected to the master station, the master station directly specifies devices in the PLCs, and then data are
transferred.
Protocols in the computer link support the formats 1 and 4.
By using MX Component and MX Sheet, monitoring and logging for the PLC system can be easily set by
Microsoft Excel.
2

Overview
→ Refer to the Data Communication Edition.
→ For MX Component and MX Sheet, refer to the respective product manual.

8. No-protocol communication
No-protocol serial communication is available between an FX PLC and interface equipment in accordance
with RS-232C/RS-485 such as bar code reader, printer, personal computer and measuring instrument. 3
→ Refer to the Data Communication Edition.

List
Instruction
9. Inverter communication
An FX PLC can control up to eight inverters via communication in accordance with RS-485.
→ Related instructions: IVCK (FNC270)
IVDR (FNC271)
IVRD (FNC272)
4

in Detail
Devices
IVWR (FNC273)
IVBWR (FNC274)
→ Refer to the Data Communication Edition.

Constant
Device &
Specified the
6

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

31
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.5 Introduction of Devices Constructing PLC

2.5 Introduction of Devices Constructing PLC

Many relays, timers, and counters are built into an FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC, with many NO (normally open)
contacts and NC (normally closed) contacts.
These contacts and coils are connected to make a sequence circuit.
A PLC is also equipped with data registers (D) and extension data registers (R) functioning as memory
devices to store numeric data values.

2.5.1 Relationship among devices

Arrows show transfer of signals.

Input terminal or
input connector

Input relay: X
Input relays function as receiving ports when the PLC receives signals from external
input switches.
The assigned device mnemonic is "X".
The PLC has built-in input relays in accordance with its scale.

1234

Counter: C
Auxiliary relay: M Output relay: Y
There are many
There are many counters inside the Output relays
auxiliary relays PLC. function as ports
inside the PLC. when the PLC
The assigned drives external
The assigned device mnemonic loads.
device mnemonic is "C".
is "M". Timer: T There are many
There are many output relays inside
timers inside the the PLC.
State relay: S The assigned
PLC.
There are many device mnemonic
state relays inside The assigned
device mnemonic is "Y".
the PLC.
is "T".
The assigned
device mnemonic
is "S".

Contact for external output from output relay

(one NO contact)
Output terminal
or output The PLC has built-in output contacts in accordance with its
scale.
connector

32
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.5 Introduction of Devices Constructing PLC

1
2.5.2 Device list

Introduction
1. Input relays (X) and output relays (Y) 4. Timers (T)
→ Refer to Section 4.2. → Refer to Section 4.5.
• Input relay numbers and output relay numbers
in octal are assigned to each main unit in the
• A timer adds and counts clock pulses of 1, 10
or 100 ms, and its output contact turns ON or
2

Overview
way "X000 to X007, X010 to X017 …, Y000 to OFF when the counted result reaches a
Y007, Y010 to Y017 …" specified set value.
The input relay (X) numbers and output relay A timer can count from 0.001 to 3276.7
(Y) numbers in extension units and extension seconds depending on the clock pulse.
blocks are also serial numbers in octal
respectively in the order of connection to the
• The timers T192 to T199 are dedicated to
subroutines and interrupt routines.
3
main unit.

List
Instruction
The timers T250 to T255 are retentive type
• A digital filter is applied to the input filter of base clock timers for 100 ms pulses. It means
specific input relays, and the filter value can that the present value is retained even after
be changed by a program. Accordingly, for a the timer coil drive input turns OFF. And when
purpose requiring high speed receiving, the drive input turns ON again, a retentive type
assign such input relay numbers. timer will continue its counting from where it 4
(Refer to explanation of filter adjustment, input left off.

in Detail
Devices
interrupt, high speed counter, various applied
instructions, etc.) 5. Counters (C)
The following types of counters are provided, and
2. Auxiliary relays (M) can be used in accordance with the purpose or
→ Refer to Section 4.3. application.
5
• Relays built into the PLC are auxiliary relays, 1) For latched (battery backed up) counters

Constant
Device &
Specified the
and are used for programs. Different from I/O → Refer to Section 4.6.
relays, auxiliary relays cannot receive external Counters are provided for internal signals of
inputs or directly drive external loads. the PLC, and their response speed is usually
• There are latched (battery backed) type relays tens of Hz or less.
whose ON/OFF status is stored even if the
PLC turns OFF.
- 16-bit counter: Provided for up-counting,
counting range: 1 to 32767
6

Programming
Before
- 32-bit counter: Provided for up-counting
3. State relays (S) and down-counting, counting range:
→ Refer to Section 4.4. −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
• State relays are used in the step ladder or as 2) For latched (battery backed up) high speed
process numbers in the SFC expression.
• When a state relay is not used as a process
counters
→ Refer to Section 4.7.
7

Instruction
Basic
number, it can be programmed as a general High speed counters can execute counting at
contact/coil in the same way as an auxiliary several kHz without regard to operations in
relay. the PLC.
- 32-bit counter: Provided for up-counting
• State relays can be used as annunciators for
and down-counting, counting range:
external fault diagnosis.
−2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 (1- 8
phase 1-counting, 1-phase 2-counting and
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

2-phase 2-counting), assigned to specific

input relays

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

33
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.5 Introduction of Devices Constructing PLC

6. Data registers (D) 10.Constants (K)(H)(E)

→ Refer to Section 4.9. → Refer to Chapter 5.
Data registers store numeric data values. Constant numerical values used in the PLC, "K"
All data registers in FX PLCs are 16-bit type indicates a decimal integer value, "H" indicates a
(whose most significant bit is positive or hexadecimal value, and "E" indicates a real
negative). When two consecutive registers are number (floating point data).
combined, they can handle 32-bit numeric value Constants are used as set values or present
(whose most significant bit is positive or values of timers and counters, or operands for
negative). applied instructions.
(For the numeric value range, refer to "Counter"
on the previous page.)
In the same way as other devices, data registers
are classified into general type and latched type
(battery backed).

7. Extension registers (R) and extension file

registers (ER)
→ Refer to Section 4.10.
Extension registers (R) are the extended form of
data registers (D). They are protected by the
battery against power failure in FX3U/FX3UC
PLCs.
In FX3G PLCs, general type devices can be
protected against power failure when the optional
battery is connected.
In FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, the contents of
extension registers (R) can be stored in
extension file registers (ER).
In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, extension file registers
(ER) can be used only while a memory cassette
is mounted.

8. Index registers (V)(Z)

→ Refer to Section 4.11.
Among registers, there are index type registers V
and Z used for modification.
A data register V or Z is added to another device
as follows:
[In the case of "V0, Z0 = 5"]
D100V0 = D105, C20Z0 = C25 ← Device
number + V… or Z… value
Data registers and index registers are used for
indirectly specifying the set value of timers and
counters, or used in applied instructions.

9. Pointers (P)(I)
→ Refer to Section 4.12.
Pointers are classified into branch pointers and
interrupt pointers.
• A branch pointer (P) specifies the jump
destination of the conditional jump CJ (FNC
00) or the call subroutine CALL (FNC 01)
instruction.
• An interrupt pointer (I) specifies the routine of
an input interrupt, timer interrupt or counter
interrupt.

34
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices

1
2.6 Program Memory and Devices

Introduction
2.6.1 Memory structure

1. In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
2

Overview
FX3U/FX3UC PLCs are equipped with the RAM memory as standard.
By mounting a memory cassette, the memory type can be changed.
1) When using the built-in memory (without attached memory cassette)

CPU System ROM 3

List
Instruction
Built-in device memory (RAM)
[Bit device memory] [Data memory]
Contact image memory • Data register (D)
• Input relay (X) • Output relay (Y) • Timer present value register (T) 4
• Auxiliary relay (M) • State relay (S) • Counter present value register (C)

in Detail
Devices
Timer contact and time counting coil • Index register (V, Z)
Counter contact, counting coil, and reset coil
• Extension register (R)

Built-in program memory

Memory cassette
(Flash memory) 5
(RAM)

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Parameter

Sequence program
Not attached
Comment
File register (D) 6

Programming
Before
2) When using an attached memory cassette (without using the built-in program memory)

CPU System ROM

7

Instruction
Basic
Built-in device memory (RAM)
[Bit device memory] [Data memory]
Contact image memory
• Input relay (X) • Output relay (Y)
• Data register (D)
• Timer present value register (T)
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

• Auxiliary relay (M) • State relay (S) • Counter present value register (C)
Timer contact and time counting coil • Index register (V, Z)
Counter contact, counting coil, and reset coil • Extension register (R)
Transfer and initialization by

Built-in program memory Memory cassette 9

(RAM) (Flash memory)
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
instructions

Parameter

Sequence program
Not used

10
Comment
The PLC automatically recognizes attachment of a
File register (D)
memory cassette (when the power is turned ON),
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

and disconnects the built-on program memory.

(The priority is given to the memory cassette.) Extension file register (ER)

35
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices

2. In FX3G PLCs
FX3G PLCs are equipped with the EEPROM memory as standard.
1) When using the built-in memory (without attached memory cassette)

CPU System ROM

Built-in device memory (RAM, EEPROM)

[Bit device memory] [Data memory]
Contact image memory • Data register (D)
• Input relay (X) • Output relay (Y) • Timer present value register (T)
• Auxiliary relay (M) • State relay (S) • Counter present value register (C)
Timer contact and time counting coil • Index register (V, Z)
Counter contact, counting coil, and reset coil
• Extension register (R)

Built-in program memory Memory cassette

Transfer and initialization by

(EEPROM)
(EEPROM)
Parameter instructions
Sequence program
Not attached
Comment
File register (D)

Extension file register (ER)

2) When using an attached memory cassette (without using the built-in program memory)

CPU System ROM

Built-in device memory (RAM, EEPROM)

[Bit device memory] [Data memory]
Contact image memory • Data register (D)
• Input relay (X) • Output relay (Y) • Timer present value register (T)
• Auxiliary relay (M) • State relay (S) • Counter present value register (C)
Timer contact and time counting coil • Index register (V, Z)
Counter contact, counting coil, and reset coil • Extension register (R)
Transfer and initialization by

Built-in program memory Memory cassette

(EEPROM) (EEPROM)
instructions

Parameter

Sequence program
Not used
Comment
The PLC automatically recognizes attachment of a
memory cassette (when the power is turned ON), File register (D)
and disconnects the built-on program memory.
(The priority is given to the memory cassette.) Extension file register (ER)

36
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices

1
2.6.2 Memory operations and latched (battery backed)

Introduction
(power ON/OFF and RUN/STOP)

1. Backup operation
The operations of the data memory, bit device memory and program memory in FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs are
classified as shown below: 2

Overview
1) Types of program memory
Power
Item Power OFF STOP→RUN RUN→STOP
OFF→ON
Parameter Does not change.*1
Sequence program Does not change.*1 3
change.*1

List
Instruction
Comment Can be secured by Does not
File register parameter setting. Does not change.*1

2) Types of word device memory

a) FX3U/FX3UC PLC
Power
4
Item Power OFF STOP→RUN RUN→STOP

in Detail
Devices
OFF→ON
Does not change. Cleared.
General type Cleared.
Does not change while M8033 is ON.
latched (battery
Does not change.*2
Data register (D) backed) type
5
File type Does not change.*1

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Set to initial
Special type Cleared. Does not change.*3
values.*3
Extension register latched (battery
(R) backed) type Does not change.*2

Extension file
File type Does not change. 6
register (ER)*4

Programming
Before
Index register (V, Z) V, Z Cleared. Does not change.
Does not change. Cleared.
For 100 ms Cleared.
Does not change while M8033 is ON.
Does not change. Cleared.
Timer present value
For 10 ms Cleared.
Does not change while M8033 is ON. 7
register (T)

Instruction
Basic
Retentive type for 100 ms
(battery backed) Does not change.*2

Retentive type for 1 ms

(battery backed) Does not change.*2

Does not change. Cleared.

General type Cleared.
Does not change while M8033 is ON. 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Counter present latched (battery

value register (C) backed) type Does not change.*2

High speed type

(battery backed) Does not change.*2

Present value
Clock data
(battery backed) Does not change.*2 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

*1. The contents of the program memory and device values are not backed up correctly in FX3U/FX3UC
PLCs when the battery voltage becomes lower than the holding voltage if a memory cassette is not
attached.
*2. Device values are not backed up correctly when the battery voltage becomes lower than the holding
voltage.
*3. Some devices are cleared when the PLC status switches from STOP to RUN. 10
→ For special data registers, refer to Chapter 36.
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

*4. An optional memory cassette is required.

37
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices

b) FX3G PLCs
Power
Item Power OFF STOP→RUN RUN→STOP
OFF→ON
Does not change. Cleared.
General type Cleared.*1
Does not change while M8033 is ON.
latched (battery
backed) type Does not change.
Data register (D)
File type Does not change.
Set to initial
Special type Cleared. Does not change.*2
values.*2
Extension register
(R)
General type Cleared.*1 Does not change.

Extension file
File type Does not change.
register (ER)
Index register (V, Z) V, Z Cleared. Does not change.
Does not change. Cleared.
For 100 ms Cleared.
Does not change while M8033 is ON.
Does not change. Cleared.
For 10 ms Cleared.
Does not change while M8033 is ON.

Timer present value For 1 ms Does not change. Cleared.

Cleared.
register (T) Does not change while M8033 is ON.
Retentive type for
100 ms (battery Does not change.
backed)
Retentive type for 1
ms(battery backed) Does not change.

Does not change. Cleared.

General type Cleared.
Does not change while M8033 is ON.
Counter present latched (battery
value register (C) backed) type Does not change.

High speed type

(battery backed) Does not change.

Present value
Clock data
(battery backed) Does not change.*3

*1. These registers can be changed from the general type to the latched (battery backed) type by the
parameter setting when the optional battery is installed.
*2. Some devices are cleared when the PLC status switches from STOP to RUN.
→ For special data registers, refer to Chapter 36.
*3. The clock data is held by the electricity charged in the large-capacity capacitor built in the PLC.
When the voltage of the large-capacity capacitor becomes low, the clock data is not held correctly.
The capacitor can hold the clock data for 10 days (when the ambient temperature is 25°C) in the full
charge state (achieved by powering ON the PLC for 30 minutes or more).
The clock data is backed up by the battery when the optional battery is installed and the battery mode is
selected in the parameter setting.

38
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices

1
3) Types of bit device memory

Introduction
a) FX3U/FX3UC PLC

Power
Item Power OFF STOP→RUN RUN→STOP
OFF→ON
Does not
change.
Cleared. 2
Input relay (X) Cleared.

Overview
Does not change while M8033
is ON.
Does not
Cleared.
change.
Output relay (Y) Cleared.
Does not change while M8033
is ON.
3

List
Instruction
Does not
Cleared.
Contact image General type auxiliary relay change.
memory Cleared.
(M) Does not change while M8033
(X, Y, M, S) is ON.
latched (battery backed) type
auxiliary relay (M)
Does not change. 4

in Detail
Devices
Special type auxiliary Set to initial
Cleared. Does not change.*1
relay (M) values.*1
General type state relay (S) Does not change.
latched (battery backed) type
Does not change.
state relay (S) 5
Annunciator (S) Does not change.

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Does not
Cleared.
change.
For 100 ms Cleared.
Does not change while M8033
is ON.
Timer contact Does not
Cleared. 6
Time counting coil change.

Programming
Before
For 10 ms Cleared.
(T) Does not change while M8033
is ON.
Retentive type for
Does not change.
100 ms
Retentive type for 1 ms Does not change. 7
Does not

Instruction
Basic
Cleared.
change.
General type Cleared.
Does not change while M8033
is ON.
Does not
Cleared.
Counter contact
Counting coil latched (battery backed) type Cleared.
change. 8
Reset coil (C) Does not change while M8033
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

is ON.
Does not
Cleared.
change.
High speed type Cleared.
Does not change while M8033
is ON.
9
*1. Some devices are cleared when the PLC status switches from STOP to RUN.
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

→ For special auxiliary relay names and definitions, refer to Chapter 36.

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

39
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices

b) FX3G PLCs

Power
Item Power OFF STOP→RUN RUN→STOP
OFF→ON
Does not
Cleared.
change.
Input relay (X) Cleared.
Does not change while M8033
is ON.
Does not
Cleared.
change.
Output relay (Y) Cleared.
Does not change while M8033
is ON.
Does not
Cleared.
Contact image General type auxiliary relay change.
memory (M) Cleared.*1
Does not change while M8033
(X, Y, M, S) is ON.
latched (battery backed) type
Does not change.
auxiliary relay (M)
Special type auxiliary Set to initial
Cleared. Does not change.*2
relay (M) values.*2
General type state relay (S) Cleared.*1 Does not change.
latched (battery backed) type
Does not change.
state relay (S)
Annunciator (S) Does not change.
Does not
Cleared.
change.
For 100 ms Cleared.
Does not change while M8033
is ON.
Does not
Cleared.
change.
For 10 ms Cleared.
Timer contact Does not change while M8033
Time counting coil is ON.
(T) Does not
Cleared.
change.
For 1 ms Cleared.
Does not change while M8033
is ON.
Retentive type for
Does not change.
100 ms
Retentive type for 1 ms Does not change.
Does not
Cleared.
change.
General type Cleared.
Does not change while M8033
is ON.
Does not
Counter contact Cleared.
change.
Counting coil latched (battery backed) type Cleared.
Reset coil (C) Does not change while M8033
is ON.
Does not
Cleared.
change.
High speed type Cleared.
Does not change while M8033
is ON.

*1. These registers can be changed from the general type to the latched (battery backed) type by the
parameter setting when the optional battery is installed.
*2. Some devices are cleared when the PLC status switches from STOP to RUN.
→ For special data registers, refer to Chapter 36.

40
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices

1
Caution

Introduction
Programs (when a memory cassette is not attached), latched (battery backed) type device values and clock
data are not backed up correctly when the battery voltage becomes low due to expiration of the battery life or
another reason.
In such a case, clear latched (battery backed) type devices, transfer programs again (when a memory
cassette is not attached), and then set initial values and clock data if necessary. 2
→ For a rough guide to the life and replacement of the battery, refer to the respective PLC User’s

Overview
Manual [Hardware Edition].
→ For the latched type device initialization method, refer to Subsection 2.6.5.

List
Instruction
4

in Detail
Devices
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
6

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

41
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices

2.6.3 Types of backup methods against power failure

There are following types of latch (battery backup) for the program memory and built-in devices in the PLC.

1. Battery backup method

a) FX3U/FX3UC PLC

Item Description
Latched (battery The battery backs up the RAM memory built in the PLC, latched (battery backed) type devices and
backed) contents clock data.
The battery life is around 5 years, (when the ambient temperature is 25°C).
Maintenance
For replacement information, refer to the Users Manual [Hardware Edition] of each PLC.
1) When the battery voltage becomes low, sequence programs and other latched (battery backed)
contents are lost.
Cautions
2) When an optional memory cassette (flash memory) is mounted, it is not necessary to back up
sequence programs by the battery.

b) FX3G PLCs

Item Description
Latched (battery
The optional battery backs up the RAM memory built in the PLC and clock data.
backed) contents
The battery life is around 5 years, (when the ambient temperature is 25°C).
Maintenance
For replacement information, refer to the Users Manual [Hardware Edition] of each PLC.
When the optional battery voltage becomes low, the RAM memory built in the PLC and clock data are
Cautions
lost.

2. Memory cassette backup method

a) FX3U/FX3UC PLC

Item Description
Latched (battery 1) The flash memory built into the memory cassette backs up sequence programs.
backed) contents 2) A battery is required to back up latched (battery backed) devices and clock data from failure.
Maintenance Maintenance is not necessary.
The upper limit is set to the number of times for overwriting.
Cautions
(Refer to the Hardware Edition of the main unit.)

b) FX3G PLCs

Item Description
Latched (battery
The EEPROM memory built in the memory cassette backs up sequence programs.
backed) contents
Maintenance Maintenance is not necessary.
The upper limit is set to the number of times for overwriting.
Cautions
(Refer to the Hardware Edition of the main unit.)

3. EEPROM memory (built in PLC) backup method

a) FX3G PLCs

Item Description
Latched (battery The EEPROM memory built in the PLC backs up latched (battery backed) type devices and sequence
backed) contents programs.
Maintenance Maintenance is not necessary.
The upper limit is set to the number of times for overwriting.
Cautions
(Refer to the Hardware Edition of the main unit.)

42
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.6 Program Memory and Devices

1
2.6.4 Change between general devices and latched (battery backed) devices

Introduction
1. When using latched (battery backed) type devices as non-latch type devices
In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, some latched (battery backed) type devices can be changed into non-latch type
devices by the parameter settings.
Devices dedicated to latched type cannot be changed into non-latch type devices even by the parameter 2
settings. Such devices can be handled as non-latch type devices by clearing all latched (battery backed) type

Overview
devices by the initial pulse (M8002) in a program.

2. When using non-latch type devices as latched (battery backed) type devices
In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, non-latch type devices can be changed into latched (battery backed) type devices by
the parameter settings. 3
In FX3G PLCs, non-latched type devices can be changed to latched (battery backed) type devices when the

List
Instruction
optional battery is installed and the battery mode is selected in the parameter setting.

2.6.5 How to initialize devices (battery backed)

Latched type devices can be initialized by clearing the entire PLC memory using peripheral equipment,
clearing all latched memory using the special auxiliary relay M8032, or executing the ZRST instruction.
4

in Detail
Devices
This subsection describes two major methods.

1. M8032 (latch memory all clear)

When M8032 is turned ON, all latched type devices*1 (including reset coils of timers and counters) are
cleared.
M8032 can be turned ON and OFF using the forced ON/OFF operation from peripheral equipment or within 5
the sequence program. Note that latched type devices cannot be turned ON while M8032 is ON.

Constant
Device &
Specified the
When turning ON M8032 within the sequence program, note that latched type devices are cleared during
END processing after M8032 is turned ON.
Program example: This program clears all latched type devices.
M8002

Initial pulse
M8032 6

Programming
Before
→ For details, refer to Subsection 36.2.11.
*1. Includes general type devices in FX3G PLCs whose type is changed to the latched (battery backed)
type when the optional battery is installed.

2. ZRST (FNC 40) instruction (zone reset) 7

The ZRST instruction can clear multiple devices all at once.

Instruction
Basic
(Because only a limited device range can be specified for the ZRST instruction, only a part of the latched type
devices can be cleared at a time.)
Program example: This program clears latched (battery backed) type devices in the ranges shown in the table
below in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
Clear input FNC 40 M500 M7679 Latched (battery backed) type
8
ZRST
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

device range
FNC 40 S500 S4095 Auxiliary relay M500~M7679
ZRST
State S500~S4095
FNC 40 T246 T255 Timer T246~T255
ZRST
C100~C199,
9
FNC 40 Counter
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

C100 C199 C220~C255

ZRST
Data register D200~D7999
FNC 40 C220 C255
ZRST

FNC 40
ZRST
D200 D7999 10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

→ For details on the ZRST (FNC 40) instruction, refer to Section 12.1.
→ For details on latched type devices, refer to Subsection 2.6.2 and Chapter 4.

43
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

Setting of parameters means setting the environment where the PLC operates.
Almost all FX PLCs can be used with factory default values.
However, when it is necessary to attach a memory cassette, set the comment capacity, set the
communication condition for serial ports, etc., the parameter settings must be changed using a programming
tool such as personal computer.

2.7.1 Parameter list

The following items may be set in the parameter settings.

Classification Item Description

This parameter specifies the maximum value for the number of steps to which a
sequence program can be input.
Memory 1) The upper limit is determined by the capacity of the built-in memory or optional
capacity memory.
2) The program memory, file register, comment area, and other special setting
capacities are contained in this memory capacity.
This parameter incorporates comments into the program memory.
1) Because comments remain in the PLC, the contents can be easily understood at the
Comment time of maintenance.
area 2) Up to 50 comments can be input when one block is specified, but the program
memory capacity is reduced because the comment area requires 500 steps in the
memory capacity.
This parameter incorporates data registers into the program memory.
1) A sequence program and control data such as machining set values can be handled
Memory
together, which is convenient.
capacity File register
2) Up to 500 file registers can be created when one block is specified, but the program
memory capacity is reduced because file registers require 500 steps in the memory
capacity.
1) This parameter sets whether or not the special block/unit initial value setting
function is used.
When this function is used, the program memory capacity is reduced because this
function requires 4000 steps (8 blocks) in the memory capacity.
Other special 2) This parameter sets whether or not the positioning setting (constants and setting
setting table) in TBL (FNC152) instruction is used. When this setting is used, the program
capacity memory capacity is reduced because this setting requires 9000 steps (18 blocks) in
the memory capacity.
3) This parameter sets whether or not the built-in CC-Link/LT function is used*2.
When this function is used, the program memory capacity is reduced because this
function requires 500 steps (1 block) in the memory capacity.
Latch range This parameter enables to change the latched (battery backed) device range and the
Device setting
setting non-latch device range inside the PLC.
I/O This setting is not written to the PLC.
assignment When the I/O range is set according to the system configuration, however, inputs and
setting outputs are checked by the program check in GX Developer.
This parameter sets the initial values of the buffer memory (BFM) for each special block/
I/O assignment Special unit unit number.
setting setting
It is necessary to set the memory capacity.
Built-in Built-in CC-Link/LT Setup*3
CC-Link/LT This parameter sets the transmission speed, point mode and station information. The
Setup*3 memory capacity setting is required to set the station information.

44
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

1
Classification Item Description

Introduction
This parameter sets the PLC operation mode without a battery.
Batteryless When the baterryless mode is set, detection of battery voltage low level error is stopped
mode*1 automatically, and consequently, contents of latched devices becomes inconsistent and
are initialized automatically.

Battery This parameter sets the PLC operation mode with a battery. 2
When the check box "Use Battery" is checked, general type devices are changed to
mode*4

Overview
latched (battery backed) type devices.
PLC system
setting (1) Modem This parameter automatically sends a specified AT command as an initialization
[PLC mode] initialization command to a modem connected to the serial port.
RUN terminal
This parameter sets whether one input terminal in the PLC is used for RUN input.
input setting
This parameter specifies the input number of the RUN input described above.
3

List
Instruction
RUN terminal X000 to X017
input number (X000 to X007 in FX3U-16M…, FX3UC-16M… and 14-point type FX3G PLCs)
(X000 to X014 in 24-point type FX3G PLCs)
This parameter corresponds to the following settings by specifying each contents on the
PLC system
Serial port PC screen:
setting (2)
[Serial
operation Setting of communication format (D8120, D8400 and D8420) 4
setting Setting of station number (D8121 and D8421)

in Detail
Devices
communication]
Setting of timeout check (D8129, D8409 and D8429)
This parameter sets interrupt inputs for the maximum speed, bias speed, creep speed,
Constant
setting zero return speed, acceleration time, deceleration time, and DVIT instruction.*1
Positioning
It is necessary to set the memory capacity.
setting
Detailed
setting
This parameter sets the operation table.
It is necessary to set the memory capacity.
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
This parameter sets protection to prevent erroneous read/incorrect write protection of a
sequence program. The keyword and second keyword*5 can each be specified in 8
Keyword characters among A to F and 0 to 9.
Others
In FX3G PLCs, the customer keyword (16 characters) and permanent PLC lock can be
specified in addition to the keyword (8 characters) and second keyword (8 characters).
Program title This parameter enables to set a character string to be used as the program title.
6

Programming
Before
*1. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
*2. This item is supported only in the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2).
*3. This item is supported only in the FX3UC-32MT-LT-2.
*4. This function is supported only in FX3G PLC.
*5. The second keyword is supported in all FX3G PLCs and FX3U/FX3UC PLCs Ver. 2.20 or later.
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

45
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

2.7.2 Parameter initial values and available tools for changing parameter values

1) FX3U/FX3UC PLC

Programming tool Display unit

GX GOT-F900
Setting
Item Developer FX-10P(-E)*1 FX-PCS/ GOT Series*2
range
Initial value *1 1000 ET-940
FX-20P(-E)*1 WIN(-E)
Series*3
Program capacity 16000*4 2000 8000 16000 8000
Katakana character
0 0 0 – –
comment capacity
File register capacity 0 0 0 0 0
Memory Refer to
capacity Special unit initial Subsection
Not used – – – –
(steps) value setting*5 2.7.3.

Positioning setting*5 Not used – – – –

Built-in CC-Link/LT
Not used – – – –
Setup*6
Auxiliary relay [M] 500 to 1023 0 to 1023 500 to 1023
Latch State relay [S] 500 to 999 0 to 999 500 to 999
range
Counter [C] (16 bits) 100 to 199 0 to 199 100 to 199
(battery
backed) Counter [C] (32 bits) 220 to 255 200 to 255 220 to 255
Data register [D] 200 to 511 0 to 511 200 to 511
Program title Not registered – Not registered – –
Entry code Not registered Not registered Not registered – –
Batteryless mode OFF Refer to – OFF – –
Subsection
Modem initialization specification Not set 2.7.1. – Not set – –
RUN terminal input OFF Not used Not used (X0) OFF –
Serial port operation setting Not set – Not set – –

*1. These programming tools are not applicable to FX3U/FX3UC PLCs. The initial values in FX2N PLCs are
shown above.
*2. Parameter values can be changed only by the F940WGOT, F94…GOT and F94… handy GOT.
*3. Only manuals in Japanese are available for the ET-940 Series.
*4. The initial value is 8000 steps in GX Developer Ver.8.13P to Ver.8.22Y.
*5. GX Developer Ver.8.23Z or later is applicable.
*6. This item is supported only in the FX3UC-32MT-LT-2, and can be set using GX Developer Ver. 8.68W
or later.

46
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

1
2) FX3G PLCs

Introduction
Programming tool Display unit
GX GOT-F900
Setting
Item Developer FX-10P(-E)*1 FX-PCS/ GOT Series*1*2
range
Initial value
FX-20P(-E)*1 WIN(-E)*1 1000 ET-940
Series*1*3
2

Overview
Program capacity 8000 2000 8000 8000 8000
Memory Katakana character Refer to
0 0 0 – –
capacity comment capacity Subsection
(steps) File register capacity 0 2.7.3. 0 0 0 0
Positioning setting Not used – – – – 3

List
Instruction
Auxiliary relay [M] – – –
Latch State relay [S] – – –
range
Counter [C] (16 bits) – – –
(battery
backed) Counter [C] (32 bits) – – –
Data register [D] – – – 4
Program title Not registered – Not registered – –

in Detail
Devices
Entry code Not registered Not registered Not registered – –
Batteryless mode OFF Refer to – OFF – –
Subsection
Modem initialization specification Not set 2.7.1. – Not set – –
RUN terminal input OFF Not used Not used (X0) OFF –
5
Serial port operation setting Not set – Not set – –

Constant
Device &
Specified the
*1. These programming tools are not applicable to FX3G PLCs. The initial values in FX1N PLCs are shown
above.
*2. Parameter values can be changed only by the F940WGOT, F94…GOT and F94… handy GOT.
*3. Only manuals in Japanese are available for the ET-940 Series. 6

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

47
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

2.7.3 Memory capacity setting range

~ Built-in memory capacity 3 Can be set by changing parameter.
Memory capacity setting Special unit
Comment File register Positioning Built-in CC-
initial value
Number of FX3U capacity setting capacity setting setting*2 Link/LT Setup*3
FX3G Unit: Block Unit: Block setting*1
steps FX3UC Unit: Block Unit: Block
Unit: Block
2000 steps 3 3 0 to 3 0 to 3 – – 1
4000 steps 3 3 0 to 7 0 to 7 – – 1
8000 steps 3 3 0 to 15 0 to 14 8 – 1
16000 steps 3 3 0 to 31 0 to 14 8 18 1
32000 steps 3 ~ 0 to 63 0 to 14 8 18 1
64000 steps ~ – 0 to 127 0 to 14 8 18 1

Cautions on setting the memory capacity

When one block is set in each capacity setting, the memory capacity is reduced by 500 steps.
Each setting should satisfy the following expression:

Memory capacity Comment File register Special unit initial Positioning Built-in CC-Link/LT
≥ + + + +
setting range capacity setting capacity setting value setting*1 setting*2 Setup *3

1) With regard to the comment capacity, up to 50 device comments can be set in one block.
2) With regard to the file register capacity, up to 500 (16-bit) file registers can be set in one block.
3) In the special unit initial value setting*1, 8 blocks (4000 steps) are used.
4) In the positioning setting*1, 18 blocks (9000 steps) are used.
5) In the built-in CC-Link/LT setup*2, 1 block (500 steps) are used.
*1. This item is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, and can be set using GX Developer Ver. 8.23Z or
later.
*2. This item can be set using GX Developer Ver. 8.23Z or later in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, and using GX
Developer Ver. 8.72A or later in FX3G PLCs.
*3. This item is supported only in the FX3UC-32MT-LT-2, and can be set using GX Developer Ver. 8.68W
or later.
Caution

• After changing the memory capacity setting, make sure to write both the programs and parameters to the
PLC.
If only the parameters are written to the PLC, program errors (such as parameter error, circuit error and
grammar error) may occur in the PLC.
• FX3G PLCs operate in the extension mode when the program capacity (which is available for sequence
programs, and excludes the comment capacity, file register capacity, etc.) is 16,001 steps or more, and
operate in the standard mode when the program capacity is 16,000 steps or less. The instruction execution
time is shorter in the standard mode than in the extension mode.

Example: Time required to execute the basic instruction "LD"

Standard mode: 0.21 µs Extension mode: 0.42 µs

48
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

1
2.7.4 Compatible optional memory model

Introduction
1. FX3G PLCs

Maximum number Allowable number of

Model name
of steps
Memory type
times of writing
Remarks
2
EEPROM Write-protect switch and loader

Overview
FX3G-EEPROM-32L 32000 10000 times
memory function are provided.

2. FX3U/FX3UC PLC

Model name
Maximum number
of steps
Memory type
Allowable number of
times of writing
Remarks 3

List
Instruction
FX3U-FLROM-64 64000 Flash memory 10000 times Write-protect switch is provided.
FX3U-FLROM-16*1 16000 Flash memory 10000 times Write-protect switch is provided.
Write-protect switch and loader
FX3U-FLROM-64L*1 64000 Flash memory 10000 times
function are provided.

*1. Can be used with FX3UC PLCs Ver.2.20 or later. 4

in Detail
Devices
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
6

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

49
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

2.7.5 Keyword (entry code)

By registering the entry code in a PLC, the functions of programming tools, display modules, and display units
to change programs, monitor devices, and current value changing function in the PLC can be restricted
(access restriction).
→ For the operations and restricted functions of display modules,
refer to the PLC main unit Hardware Edition.
→ For the operations and restricted functions of display units,
refer to the respective display unit manual.

1. Differences in operations caused by the entry code type

The operations to change, cancel (delete) and reset the registered entry code vary depending on the entry
code type.
Registered Entered entry
Change Cancel Disable Outline
entry code code
Permanent The permanent PLC lock cannot be changed, canceled or
– – – –
PLC lock reset.
Entry code Entry code 3 3 3 The entry code can be changed, canceled and reset.
Entry code +
Entry code + The entry code and second entry code can be changed,
Second entry 3 3 3
Second entry code canceled and reset.
code
Entry code + Entry code + The entry code, second entry code and customer entry code
3 3 3
Second entry Second entry code can be changed, canceled and reset.
code +
Customer Customer keyword – – 3 The entry code can be reset.
keyword

2. Correspondence between PLC and peripheral equipment

Number of GOT-F900 FX-10P (-E) FX-PCS
Available GX
registered Applicable PLC GOT1000
characters
characters
Developer ET-940 *3 FX-20P (-E) /WIN (-E)

Permanent FX3G Ver. 8.72A Not Not Not Not

– –
PLC lock (Ver. 1.00 or later) or later applicable applicable applicable applicable
FX3U/FX3UC Only reset
0 to 9 and (Ver. 1.00 or later) Ver.2.00A of entry
Entry code 8 Applicable Applicable Applicable
A to F FX3G or later*1 code is
(Ver. 1.00 or later) allowed
FX3U/FX3UC
8 (16 total
Second 0 to 9 and (Ver. 2.20 or later) Ver.8.23Z Not Not Not
including entry Applicable
entry code A to F
code)
FX3G or later*2 applicable applicable applicable
(Ver. 1.00 or later)
Customer 0 to 9 and FX3G Ver. 8.72A Applicable Not Not Not
16
keyword A to F (Ver. 1.00 or later) or later *4 applicable applicable applicable

*1. GX Developer Ver. 2.00A or later is applicable to FX Series PLC.

However, Ver. 8.13P or later is required in FX3UC PLCs, Ver. 8.23Z or later is required in FX3U PLCs,
and Ver. 8.72A or later is required in FX3G PLCs.
*2. GX Developer Ver. 8.23Z or later is applicable to FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, and Ver. 8.72A or later is
applicable to FX3G PLCs.
*3. Only manuals in Japanese are available for the ET-940 Series.
*4. GT Designer2 Ver. 2.85P or later supports the customer keyword.
The security provided by the entry code, second entry code and customer keyword is limited, and is not
always perfect.

50
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

1
3. Entry code setting and access restriction

Introduction
Setting status Peripheral equipment and access restriction
The programming tool performs the following operations in accordance with the selected
registration condition:
Once the permanent PLC lock is set, it cannot be reset.
To reset the permanent PLC lock or write programs again to the PLC, all-clear the PLC
memory.
2

Overview
When the permanent PLC lock Program Present value
is selected Registration condition Monitoring
Read Write change
Write prohibited 3 – 3 3
Read and write prohibited – – 3 3
All online operations prohibited – – – – 3

List
Instruction
The programming tool performs the following operations in accordance with the selected
registration condition:
It is not possible to cancel the entry code using the customer keyword.
Program Present value
Registration condition Monitoring
When the customer keyword is
set
Read Write change
4
Write prohibited 3 – 3 3

in Detail
Devices
Read and write prohibited – – 3 3
All online operations prohibited – – – –

The programming tool performs the following operations in accordance with the selected
registration condition:
5
Program Present value

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Registration condition Monitoring
When both the entry code and Read Write change
second entry code are set Write prohibited 3 – 3 3
Read and write prohibited – – 3 3
All online operations prohibited – – – –
6
1) When using handy programming panel FX-10P(-E)/FX-20P(-E)

Programming
Before
The programming tool performs the following operations in accordance with the head
character of the entry code (in 8 characters):
Head Program
Present value
character of Monitoring
Read Write change

All operations
entry code
7
A,D to F,0 to 9 – – – –

Instruction
Basic
When only the entry code is prohibited
set Read/Incorrect
write B – – 3 3
protection
Erroneous
write prohibited
C 3 – 3 3
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

2) When using any programming tool, data access unit or GOT other than the FX-10P(-E)/
FX-20P(-E)
Read/Incorrect write protection is set for all entry codes.
When no entry code is set All operations are enabled.

Caution on selecting the permanent PLC lock 9

Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

• Once the permanent PLC lock is set, it cannot be reset.

To reset the permanent PLC lock or write programs again to the PLC, all-clear the PLC memory.
Caution on registering the entry code

• The entry codes are provided to restrict access from peripheral equipment to programs created by the
user. Take care to save/remember the entry codes. 10
If a registered entry code is forgotten, the online operations from the programming tool to the PLC are
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

disabled depending on the programming tool type and the contents of the registered entry code.

51
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

Registering and changing the entry codes

This section explains the operating procedure of GX Developer (Ver.8.72A)
→ For the entry code registration/change procedure in FX-10P(-E), FX-20P(-E), and FX-PCS/WIN(-E),
refer to the manual of each product.

1. Select [Online]-[Keyword setup]-[Register...] to open "New keyword register" dialog box.

2. Set the function selection (for the protection type), entry code, second entry code, customer
entry code and protection level.

Set item Contents of setting Remarks

Function Select either one. When "Permanent PLC lock" is selected, it cannot be reset.
• Keyword protection To reset the permanent PLC lock or write programs again to the
selection*1 • Permanent PLC lock PLC, all-clear the PLC memory.
Input 8 characters. Available
Keyword
characters are A to F and 0 to 9.
Input 8 characters. Available
2nd Keyword*1 characters are A to F and 0 to 9.
Before setting the second entry code, set the entry code first.

Customer Input 16 characters. Available Before setting the customer keyword, set the entry code and
keyword*1 characters are A to F and 0 to 9. second entry code first.
Select either of the following:
• Read/Write protection Before setting the protection level, set the second entry code or
Protection level*1 • Write protection select "Permanent PLC lock" in "Function selection".
• All online operation protection
*1. The function selection and customer keyword can be set only in FX3G PLCs.
*2. The second entry code and protection level can be set in all FX3G PLCs and FX3U/FX3UC PLCs Ver.
2.20 or later.
Caution on registering the entry code

• The entry codes are provided to restrict access from peripheral equipment to programs created by the
users. Keep the entry codes carefully.
If a registered entry codes is forgotten, the online operations from a programming tool to the PLC are
disabled depending on the programming tool type and the contents of the registered entry code.

3. Click [Execution] button to open "Keyword confirmation" dialog box.

4. Input the entry codes again.

5. Click [OK] to register the entry codes to the PLC.

52
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

1
Reading/writing a program from/to a PLC with the entry codes registered

Introduction
This section explains the operating procedure of GX Developer (Ver.8.72A)
→ For the program reading/writing procedure in FX-10P(-E), FX-20P(-E), and FX-PCS/WIN(-E),
refer to the manual of each product.

1. Select [Online]-[Read from PLC...]/[Write to PLC...] to open "Input current keyword." dialog 2
box.

Overview
2. Input the keyword, 2nd keyword or customer keyword currently registered in the PLC.

List
Instruction
4

in Detail
Devices
Set item Contents of setting Remarks
Input 8 characters. Available characters When the customer keyword*2 is set in the FX3G PLC, its
Keyword
are A to F and 0 to 9. former 8 characters are available. 5
*2

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Input 8 characters. Available characters When the customer keyword is set in the FX3G PLC, its latter
2nd Keyword*1 are A to F and 0 to 9. 8 characters are available.
*1. The second entry can be set in all FX3G PLCs and FX3U/FX3UC PLCs Ver. 2.20 or later.
*2. The customer keyword can be set only in FX3G PLCs.

3. Click [Execution] button to verify the keywords you have input with the keywords currently 6
registered in the PLC.

Programming
Before
• When the entry code inputs are verified, the PLC executes "Read from PC" or "Write to PC".
• When the entry code inputs are not verified, the PLC does not execute "Read from PC" or "Write to PC".

Canceling the entry codes 7

This section explains the operating procedure of GX Developer (Ver.8.23Z)

Instruction
Basic
→ For the entry code canceling (deletion) procedure in FX-10P(-E), FX-20P(-E), and FX-PCS/WIN(-E),
refer to the manual of each product.

1. Select [Online]-[Keyword setup]-[Delete...] to open "Keyword cancel" dialog box.

2. Input the keyword and 2nd keyword currently registered in the PLC. 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

Set item Contents of setting Remarks

Keyword Input 8 characters. Available characters are A to F and 0 to 9. It is not possible to cancel the entry
2nd Keyword Input 8 characters. Available characters are A to F and 0 to 9. code using the customer keyword.

3. Click [Execution] button to verify the entry codes you have input with the entry codes
currently registered in the PLC. 10
• When the entry code inputs are verified, the PLC executes "Keyword Cancel".
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

• When the entry code inputs are not verified, the PLC does not execute "Keyword Cancel".

53
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

Resetting the entry codes, and validating the reset entry codes (Keyword Protect)
This section explains the operating procedure of GX Developer (Ver.8.72A)
→ For the entry code reset procedure in FX-10P(-E), FX-20P(-E), and FX-PCS/WIN(-E),
refer to the manual of each product.

1. Select [Online]-[Keyword setup]-[Disable...] to open "Keyword Disable" dialog box.

2. Input the keyword, 2nd keyword or customer keyword currently registered in the PLC.

Set item Contents of setting Remarks

*2
Input 8 characters. Available characters When the customer keyword is set in
Keyword the FX3G PLC, its former 8 characters
are A to F and 0 to 9.
are available.
Keyword Disable
*2
*1 Input 8 characters. Available characters When the customer keyword is set in
2nd Keyword are A to F and 0 to 9. the FX3G PLC, its latter 8 characters are
available.
Keyword Protect*1 Reset entry codes are made valid again.

*1. The second entry can be set in all FX3G PLCs and FX3U/FX3UC PLCs Ver. 2.20 or later.
*2. The customer keyword can be set only in FX3G PLCs.

3. Click [Execution] button to reset the entry codes or validate the reset entry codes again.

54
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

1
2.7.6 Special unit initial value setting [GX Developer Ver.8.23Z or later]

Introduction
The initial values of the buffer memory (BFM) in special function blocks/units connected to an FX3U/FX3UC
PLC (Ver.2.20 or later) can be set as a parameter in GX Developer (Ver.8.23Z or later).
2

Overview
When this parameter is used, it is not necessary to execute initial setting in a user program for special
function blocks/units requiring initial setting. The special unit initial value setting uses 4000 steps (8 blocks) in
the memory capacity.
→ For the setting procedure, refer to Subsection 2.7.8.

2.7.7 Positioning setting [for TBL (FNC152) instruction] [GX Developer Ver.8.23Z or later] 3

List
Instruction
In the positioning setting available in all FX3G PLCs and FX3U/FX3UC PLCs Ver. 2.20 or later, a table and
constants for added TBL (FNC152) instruction can be set. Make sure to set this parameter when using TBL 4
(FNC152) instruction.

in Detail
Devices
The positioning setting for TBL (FNC152) instruction uses 9000 steps (18 blocks) in the memory capacity.
→ For details on TBL (FNC152) instruction, refer to the Positioning Control Manual.

2.7.8 Built-in CC-Link/LT Setup (dedicated to FX3UC-32MT-LT-2)

The set item "Built-in CC-Link/LT Setup" is dedicated to the FX3UC-32MT-LT-2.
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
The CC-Link/LT setting (transmission speed, point mode and station information) is available in the
parameter setting using GX Developer Ver. 8.68W or later.
The built-in CC-Link/LT setup uses 500 steps (1 block) in the memory capacity.
→ For the setting procedure, refer to the FX3UC Hardware Manual or Subsection 2.7.9.

2.7.9 Parameter settings by GX Developer 6

Programming
Before
This subsection explains the parameter setting procedures by GX Developer (Ver.8.72A).
→ For details on entry codes, refer to Subsection 2.7.5.

1 Opening the parameter setting screen

7
In the project tree area provided on the left side of the screen, double-click [Parameter] →

Instruction
Basic
[PLC parameter].
If the project tree is not displayed, select [View] → [Project data list] from the toolbar.

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

55
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

2 Setting memory capacity

This example shows a window in an

FX3U/FX3UC PLC.

Set item Contents of setting Setting range

Memory capacity Set the program memory capacity. Initial value: 16000*1
Set the capacity of comments to be stored in the PLC. Initial value: 0
Comments capacity Refer to
50 device comments/block (500 steps)
Subsection
Set the file register capacity. Initial value: 0 2.7.3.
File register capacity
500 file registers/block (500 steps)
Program capacity The number of steps available for sequence program is displayed here.
Special Function Select whether the special unit initial value settings and positioning settings will be
–
Memory capacity used or not.
Special Function
Block Settings Selects the initial value setting function for special function block/unit. (When this
–
function is valid, the special unit setting is displayed on "I/O assignment" tab.)
(8 Blocks)*2
Positioning
Validates the TBL (FNC152) instruction setting function.
Instruction Settings –
(When this function is valid, the "Positioning" tab is displayed.)
(18 Blocks)
Built-in CC-Link/LT
Validates the CC-Link/LT station information setting function.
Setup*3
*1. The initial value is 8000 steps in GX Developer Ver. 8.22 or earlier and FX3G PLCs.
*2. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
*3. This item is supported only in the FX3UC-32MT-LT-2.

Caution
FX3G PLCs operate in the extension mode when the program capacity (which is available for sequence
programs, and excludes the comment capacity, file register capacity, etc.) is 16,001 steps or more, and
operate in the standard mode when the program capacity is 16,000 steps or less.
The instruction execution time is shorter in the standard mode than in the extension mode.

Example: Time required to execute the basic instruction "LD"

Standard mode: 0.21 µs Extension mode: 0.42 µs

56
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

1
3

Introduction
Setting devices
1. Click "Device" tab, and set devices.
The "Device" tab is available only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Overview
3

List
Instruction
4

in Detail
Devices
This example shows a window in an
FX3U/FX3UC PLC.

Set item Contents of setting Setting range 5

Supplemental relay Set the latched (battery backed) auxiliary relay range. Initial value: 500 to 1023 0 to 1023

Constant
Device &
Specified the
State Set the latched (battery backed) state relay range. Initial value: 500 to 999 0 to 999
Timer The setting displayed here cannot be changed. –
Counter (16bit) Set the latched (battery backed) 16-bit counter range. Initial value: 100 to 199 0 to 199
Counter (32bit) Set the latched (battery backed) 32-bit counter range. Initial value: 220 to 255 220 to 255
Data register Set the data register range (battery backed). Initial value: 200 to 511 0 to 511 6
All extension registers are latched (battery backed).

Programming
Before
Extended register –
This setting is fixed, and cannot be changed.

4 Setting the PC name

1. Click "PLC name" tab, and input the program title.
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

Set item Contents of setting Setting range

Input the program title in up to 32 half-width characters 32 half-width characters
Title
(or 16 full-width characters). (or 16 full-width characters)

57
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

5 Assigning I/Os, setting the initial values for special units, and setting built-in
CC-Link/LT
1. Click the "I/O assignment" tab, and then set the I/O assignment, special function block/unit
names and built-in CC-Link/LT.
In order to use the "Special Unit" field, the "Special Function Block Settings" box in the
"Memory capacity" tab must be checked first.
When setting the station information in "Built-in CC-Link/LT Setup", it is necessary to put a
check mark to "Built-in CC-Link/LT Setup" on the "Memory capacity" tab.

This example shows a window in an

FX3U/FX3UC PLC.

Set item Contents of setting Setting range

FX3U/FX3UC:
0 to 377
Input relay
FX3G:
When the I/O range is set here according to the system configuration, 0 to 177
I/O
those inputs and outputs are checked in programming by GX Developer. FX3U/FX3UC:
0 to 377
Output relay
FX3G:
0 to 177
Unit No. This is the unit number of each special function block/unit. –
32 half-width
Set the name of each special function block/unit whose initial values are characters
Unit Name
to be set. (or 16 full-width
Special Unit*1 characters)
(It is Up This button moves the cursor to the upper line (transposes the upper line). –
necessary Down This button moves the cursor to the lower line (transposes the lower line). –
to set the
This button displays "Special Function Block Settings" dialog box of the
memory
Set... selected unit number. –
capacity.)
→Refer to the next page.
Delete This button deletes the setting of the selected unit number. –
Delete All This button deletes all existing setting in "Special Unit" field. –
Read PLC data This button reads "Special Unit" field from the connected PLC. –
Built-in
CC-Link/LT Set... This button displays the "Built-in CC-Link/LT Setup" dialog box. –
Setup*2
*1. This area can be set only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
*2. This item can be set only in the FX3UC-32MT-LT-2.

58
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

1
2. On "Special Function Block Settings" dialog box, set the initial values of special function

Introduction
blocks and units.
The "Special Function Block Settings" tab is available only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Overview
3

List
Instruction
This example shows a 4
window in an FX3U/FX3UC

in Detail
Devices
PLC.

Set item Contents of setting Setting range

"Unit No." tab Select the unit number of a special function block/unit to be set. – 5
32 half-width

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Set the name of a special function block/unit whose initial values are to
characters
Unit Name be set.
(or 16 full-width
(The contents set on "I/O assignment" tab are displayed.)
characters)
This column indicates the order of initial value setting in the selected unit
No. number.
Numbers 1 to 98 can be set.
–
6

Programming
Before
Set the buffer memory address (BFM number) in a decimal value whose
Address *1
initial value is to be set.
This column is displayed when device comments are registered.
Comment On the above screen, "Input mode of CH1 to CH4" is registered as the –
device comment for "U0\G0" (unit No. 0, BFM #0).
Set a value to be set as the initial value of the buffer memory address 7
Value (BFM number). *2

Instruction
Basic
Set the data length and type of the set value in "Size/Type" column.
Select the size and type of a value set to the buffer memory among the
following:
16bit/DEC
Size/Type –
32bit/DEC
16bit/HEX 8
32bit/HEX
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Insert This button inserts a line in the currently selected position. –

Delete This button deletes the currently selected line. –
Up This button moves the cursor to the upper line (transposes the upper line). –
Down This button moves the cursor to the lower line (transposes the lower line). –
Check the identification code Put a check mark to check the model code of the special function block/
9
–
before initializing unit before initialization.
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

Identification code Set the model code of the special function block/unit. *3
*1. Input buffer memory addresses (BFM numbers) that in the connected special function block/unit hold.
*2. To each buffer memory address (BFM number), set a value within the allowed range in the connected
special function block/unit. 10
*3. Refer to the manual of the connected special function block/unit.
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

59
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

3. Click [End] button to finish the setting and close "Special Function Block Settings" dialog
box.

4. Set the built-in CC-Link/LT on the "Built-in CC-Link/LT Setup" dialog box.
This item can be set only in the FX3UC-32MT-LT-2.

Set item Contents of setting Setting range

Select one of the following supported built-in CC-Link/LT transmission
rates:
Baud Rate 2.5Mbps –
625kbps
156kbps
Select one of the following supported point modes:
Point Mode 16-point mode –
4-point mode
This item indicates the station number of the built-in CC-Link/LT
No. module. –
Station numbers 1 to 64 are available.
Select one of the following station type:
Remote I/O station (Input)
Station type Remote I/O station (Output) –
Remote I/O station (Input/Output)
Remote device station*1
Select one of the following supported I/O point counts for each remote
I/O pts 1 to 16, 32, 48, 64*2
I/O and remote device station: 1 to 16, 32, 48, 64*2
Select whether or not the Built-in CC-Link/LT station is specified as a
Reserve station select –
reserved station.
This button moves the cursor to the upper line (transposes the upper
Up –
line).
This button moves the cursor to the lower line (transposes the lower
Down –
line).
Insert This button inserts a line in the currently selected position. –
Delete This button deletes the currently selected line. –
Click this button to read the transmission rate, point mode and station
Read Buffer memory –
information of the built-in CC-Link/LT module.

*1. Select 16-point mode when using remote device stations. Remote device stations cannot be set in 4-
point mode.
Only station numbers 40 to 64 are available for remote device stations.
*2. The station numbers 32, 48 and 64 are available when a remote device station is selected in Station
type.

5. Click the [OK] button to finish the setup and close the "Built-in CC-Link/LT Setup" dialog
box.

60
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

1
6

Introduction
Setting the PLC system (1)
Click on the "PLC system (1)" tab to setup "Battery less mode", "MODEM initialized", and "RUN ter-
minal input."
1) FX3U/FX3UC PLC 2

Overview
3

List
Instruction
4

in Detail
Devices
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
6

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

61
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

2) FX3G PLCs

Set item Contents of setting Setting range

Select this to operate the PLC without using the battery.
When a check mark is put here, the battery error indicator lamp is
Battery less mode*1 automatically turned off and devices in the latched (battery backed) area
–
are automatically cleared.
Battery mode*2 Select this item to operate the PLC with the battery. –
Set this item to automatically initialize a connected modem when the
MODEM initialized –
PLC power is turned ON.
Set this item to use an input terminal (X) to switch the PLC between None
RUN terminal input
STOP and RUN. X000 to X017*3
*1. This area can be set only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
*2. This area can be set only in FX3G PLCs.
*3. X000 to X007 in the FX3U-16M…, FX3UC-16M… and 14-point type FX3G PLCs
X000 to X014 in 24-point type FX3G PLCs

62
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

1
7

Introduction
Setting the PLC system (2)
1. Click "PLC system (2)" tab.

2. Only when a latch (battery backed) area for a serial port exists through an extended PLC,
select a channel to be set and put a check mark to "Operate communication setting." 2
When not performing the communication setting for a serial port, do not put a check mark

Overview
to "Operate communication setting."

Channel selection 3

List
Instruction
4

in Detail
Devices
This example shows a window
in an FX3U/FX3UC PLC.
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Set item Contents of setting Setting range
Channel selection Select a channel in which a serial port is set. CH1,CH2
Put a check mark when using the selected serial port in "computer link",
Operate communication
"no-protocol communication" or "inverter communication". 6
Do not put a check mark when transferring and monitoring sequence –
setting

Programming
Before
programs in GX Developer or when using the selected serial port in
simple N : N link or parallel link.
Protocol
Data length
Parity
7
Stop bit

Instruction
Basic
Transmission speed
Header
Terminator
Set each item in accordance with application.
Control line → For details on each item, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.
H/W type 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Control mode
Sum check
Transmission control
procedure
Station number setting
Time out judge time
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

63
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

8 Setting positioning
The positioning setting function is available in all FX3G PLCs and FX3U/FX3UC PLCs Ver. 2.20 or
later.

1. Click "Positioning" tab.

"Positioning" tab is displayed when a check mark is put to "Positioning" on "Memory
capacity" tab.

2. Set the positioning constants in TBL (FNC152) instruction.

→ For TBL (FNC152) instruction, refer to the Positioning Control Manual.

This example shows a window in

an FX3U/FX3UC PLC.

64
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

Introduction
Set item Contents of setting Set range
Set the bias speed for each output number of pulse. 1/10 or less of the
Bias speed [Hz]
Initial value: 0 maximum speed
Set the maximum speed for each output number of pulse.
Max. speed [Hz] *1
Initial value: 100,000
Set the creep speed in DSZR (FNC150) instruction for each output
2
Creep speed [Hz] number of pulse. *2

Overview
10 to 32767
Initial value: 1000
Set the zero point return speed in DSZR (FNC150) instruction for each
Zero return speed [Hz] output number of pulse. *1
Initial value: 50000

Acceleration time [ms]

Set the acceleration time for each output number of pulse.
Initial value: 100
50 to 5000 3

List
Instruction
Set the deceleration time for each output number of pulse.
Deceleration time [ms] 50 to 5000
Initial value: 100
Set the interrupt input*3 for DVIT (FNC151) instruction for each output
number of pulse. Specify a user interrupt command device (M) for a

Interruption input of DVIT

pulse output destination device not used in DVIT instruction.
Initial setting: Setting range: As shown on the 4
*4 Pulse output destination Y000: X000 X000 to X007, M8460 left

in Detail
Devices
instruction
Pulse output destination Y001: X001 X000 to X007, M8461
Pulse output destination Y002: X002 X000 to X007, M8462
Pulse output destination Y003*6: X003 X000 to X007, M8463
Y0 They are set items for the pulse output destination Y000. –
Y1 They are set items for the pulse output destination Y001. – 5
*5 They are set items for the pulse output destination Y002. –

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Y2
*6 They are set items for the pulse output destination Y003. –
Y3
This button displays "Positioning instruction settings" dialog box for
Individual setting setting the table used in TBL (FNC152) instruction. –
→For the setting procedure, refer to the next step.
*1. The setting range is from 10 to 100,000 Hz in FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
6

Programming
Before
The setting range is from 10 to 200,000 Hz in FX3U PLCs when the pulse output destination is the
FX3U-2HSY-ADP.
*2. The creep speed should satisfy the relationship "Bias speed ≤ Creep speed ≤ Maximum speed."
*3. An interrupt input set here cannot be used jointly with a high speed counter, input interrupt, pulse
catch input, input in SPD (FNC 67) instruction, or interrupt input in DVIT (FNC151) instruction. 7
*4. This area can be set only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Instruction
Basic
*5. Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.
*6. Note that this item can only be set if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are connected to the FX3U PLC.

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

65
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

3. Click [Individual setting] button to display "Positioning instruction settings" dialog box.
In this dialog box, set the positioning table for each pulse output destination.

This example shows a window

in an FX3U/FX3UC PLC.

Set item Contents of setting Setting range

Y0 Set the positioning table for the pulse output destination Y000. –
Y1 Set the positioning table for the pulse output destination Y001. –
Y2*1 Set the positioning table for the pulse output destination Y002. –
Y3*2 Set the positioning table for the pulse output destination Y003. –
FX3U/FX3UC:
Set the relay number of the rotation direction output signal. Y000 to Y357
Initial setting: Pulse output destination Y000: Y010 M0 to M7679
Pulse output destination Y001: Y011 S0 to S4095
Rotation direction signal
Pulse output destination Y002*1: Y012 FX3G:
Pulse output destination Y003*2: Y013 Y000 to Y177
→Refer to the Positioning Control Manual. M0 to M7679
S0 to S4095
Set the head number of devices storing the set data (pulse number and FX3U/FX3UC:
frequency). D0 to D6400
1600 devices (FX3U and FX3UC) or 1200 devices (FX3G) are occupied R0 to R31168
Head Address starting from the head device number set here without regard to the
number of axes. FX3G:
Initial setting: R0 D0 to D6400
→Refer to the Positioning Control Manual. R0 to R22800

This column shows the table number.

No. –
Numbers 1 to 100 can be set.
Select the positioning type among the following:
DDVIT (Interrupt positioning instruction)*3
Positioning Instruction DPLSV (Variable speed output pulse instruction) –
DDRVI (Relative positioning instruction)
DDRVA (Absolute positioning instruction)
→Refer to the Positioning Control Manual.
Set the pulse number output by the operation (instruction) set in Refer to the
Pulse "Positioning Instruction" column. Positioning Control
→Refer to the Positioning Control Manual. Manual.
Set the speed (pulse frequency) output by the operation (instruction) set Refer to the
Frequency [Hz] in "Positioning Instruction" column. Positioning Control
→Refer to the Positioning Control Manual. Manual.
Up This button transposes the selected line to the upper line. –
Down This button transposes the selected line to the lower line. –
Insert This button inserts a line in the currently selected position. –
Delete This button deletes the currently selected line. –
This button deletes the entire setting of the positioning table for the
Delete all lines –
selected pulse output destination.

66
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 2 Overview (Sequence Program)
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 2.7 Types and Setting of Parameters

1
Set item Contents of setting Setting range

Introduction
A check mark here means not to transfer the positioning setting when
PLC turns ON.
Positioning table settings will
Put a check mark when changing the positioning setting from a display
not be initialized when the –
unit, etc., and then using the changed contents even after restoring the
PLC is powered on
power. At this time, set a latched (battery backed) type device to "Head
Address". 2

Overview
This button writes the contents of the positioning table created here to
Write up to 1600 devices (FX3U and FX3UC) or 1200 devices (FX3G) starting –
from "Head Address".
This button reads the contents of the existing positioning table from all
pulse output destinations, up to 1600 devices (FX3U and FX3UC) or 1200
Read –
devices (FX3G) starting from "Head Address", but does not read device
numbers without the "positioning instruction" setting.
3

List
Instruction
*1. Y002 is not available 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.
*2. Note that this item can only be set if two FX3U-2HSY-ADP adapters are connected to the FX3U PLC.
*3. This area can be set only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

9 Transferring parameters (and sequence program) to the PLC

4

in Detail
Devices
1. Select [Online]-[Write to PLC...] from the tool menu to display "Write to PLC" dialog box.

FX3U(C)*1
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
6

Programming
Before
This example shows a window in an
FX3U/FX3UC PLC.
7

Instruction
Basic
*1. For Ver. 8.13P to 8.24A of GX Developer, the PLC type is FX3UC.

2. Put a check mark to "Parameter", and click [Execute] button.

The selected contents are transferred to the PLC.
The transferred parameters become valid when the PLC switches from RUN to STOP.
When the communication setting is changed in step 7 "PLC system (2)", restore the PLC power.
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Caution
After changing the memory capacity setting, make sure to write both the programs and parameters to the
PLC.
If only the parameters are written to the PLC, program errors (such as parameter error, circuit error and 9
grammar error) may occur in the PLC.
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

67
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.1 Basic Instructions

3. Instruction List
This chapter introduces a list of instructions available in programming.

3.1 Basic Instructions

The basic instructions are provided in the following series. The table below shows differences in applicable
devices.

Applicable PLC FX3U FX3UC FX3G FX1S FX1N FX2N FX1NC FX2NC
Basic instructions other than MEP
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
and MEF instructions
Ver.2.30 Ver.2.30
MEP and MEF instructions 3 – – – – –
or later or later
Absence/presence of applicable devices
3 3 – – – – – –
(D…. b)
Absence/presence of applicable
3 3 3 – – – – –
devices (R)

Mnemonic Name Symbol Function Applicable devices Reference

Contact Instruction
Initial logical operation
Applicable devices
LD Load contact type NO X,Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.1
(normally open)
Initial logical operation
LDI Load Inverse Applicable devices contact type NC X,Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.1
(normally closed)

Applicable devices Initial logical operation of

LDP Load Pulse X,Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.5
Rising edge pulse

Applicable devices Initial logical operation of

LDF Load Falling Pulse X,Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.5
Falling/trailing edge pulse

Applicable devices Serial connection of NO

AND AND X,Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.3
(normally open) contacts

Applicable devices Serial connection of NC

ANI AND Inverse X,Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.3
(normally closed) contacts

Applicable devices Serial connection of Rising

ANDP AND Pulse X,Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.5
edge pulse

Applicable devices Serial connection of

ANDF AND Falling Pulse X,Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.5
Falling/trailing edge pulse

Parallel connection of NO
OR OR X,Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.4
Applicable devices (normally open) contacts

Parallel connection of NC
ORI OR Inverse X,Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.4
Applicable devices (normally closed) contacts

Parallel connection of
ORP OR Pulse X,Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.5
Applicable devices Rising edge pulse

Parallel connection of
ORF OR Falling Pulse X,Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.5
Applicable devices Falling/trailing edge pulse

68
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.1 Basic Instructions

Introduction
Mnemonic Name Symbol Function Applicable devices Reference

Connection Instruction

Serial connection of
ANB AND Block – Section 7.7
multiple parallel circuits
2

Overview
Parallel connection of
ORB OR Block – Section 7.6
multiple contact circuits

Stores the current result of

Memory Point
MPS the internal PLC Section 7.8
Store
MPS operations
Reads the current result of
3

List
Instruction
MRD Memory Read MRD the internal PLC – Section 7.8
operations
Pops (recalls and
MPP Memory POP MPP removes) the currently Section 7.8
stored result

INV Invert the current result of 4

INV Inverse the internal PLC – Section 7.10

in Detail
Devices
operations
Conversion of
MEP MEP operation result – Section 7.11
to leading edge pulse

Conversion of operation
5
MEF MEF – Section 7.11
result to trailing edge pulse

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Out Instruction

Applicable devices Final logical operation type

OUT OUT Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.2
coil drive
6

Programming
Before
SET SET SET Applicable devices SET Bit device latch ON Y,M,S,D….b Section 7.13

Y,M,S,D….b,T,C,
RST Reset RST Applicable devices RESET Bit device OFF Section 7.13
D,R,V,Z

PLS Pulse PLS Applicable devices Rising edge pulse Y,M Section 7.12 7

Instruction
Basic
PLF Pulse Falling PLF Applicable devices Falling/trailing edge pulse Y,M Section 7.12

Master Control Instruction

Denotes the start of a
MC Master Control MC N Applicable devices
master control block
Y,M Section 7.9
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Master Control Denotes the end of a

MCR MCR N – Section 7.9
Reset master control block
Other Instruction

NOP No Operation No operation or null step – Section 7.14

End Instruction
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

Program END, I/O refresh

END END END – Section 7.15
and Return to Step 0

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

69
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.2 Step Ladder Instructions

3.2 Step Ladder Instructions

Mnemonic Name Symbol Function Applicable devices Reference

STL Step Ladder STL Applicable devices Starts step ladder S Chapter 34

RET Return RET Completes step ladder – Chapter 34

3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC Number

Applied instructions such as Arithmetic operation, Rotation and Shift, Handy instructions etc. are used
especially when numeric data is handled.

*1: The instruction is provided in the FX2N/FX2NC Series Ver.3.00 or later. *4: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.
*2: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *5: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.
*3: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver.1.10 or later.
Applicable PLC

FX3UC
FX3G
FX3U
FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
Program Flow

Section
00 CJ CJ Pn Conditional Jump 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
8.1

Section
01 CALL CALL Pn Call Subroutine 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
8.2

Section
02 SRET SRET Subroutine Return 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
8.3

Section
03 IRET IRET Interrupt Return 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
8.4

Section
04 EI EI Enable Interrupt 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
8.5

Section
05 DI DI Disable Interrupt 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
8.6

Section
06 FEND FEND Main Routine Program End 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
8.7

Section
07 WDT WDT Watchdog Timer Refresh 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
8.8

Section
08 FOR FOR S Start a FOR/NEXT Loop 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
8.9

Section
09 NEXT NEXT End a FOR/NEXT Loop 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
8.10

Move and Compare

Section
10 CMP CMP S1 S2 D Compare 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
9.1

Section
11 ZCP ZCP S1 S2 S D Zone Compare 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
9.2

70
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC

1
*1: The instruction is provided in the FX2N/FX2NC Series Ver.3.00 or later. *4: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.

Introduction
*2: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *5: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.
*3: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver.1.10 or later.
Applicable PLC

FX3UC
FX3G
FX3U
FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
2

Overview
Section
12 MOV MOV S D Move 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
9.3

Section
13 SMOV SMOV S m1 m2 D n Shift Move 3 3 3 – – 3 – 3
9.4

Section
3
14 CML CML S D Complement 3 3 3 – – 3 – 3

List
Instruction
9.5

Section
15 BMOV BMOV S D n Block Move 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
9.6

in Detail
Devices
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
6

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

71
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC

*1: The instruction is provided in the FX2N/FX2NC Series Ver.3.00 or later. *4: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.
*2: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *5: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.
*3: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver.1.10 or later.
Applicable PLC

FX3UC
FX3G
FX3U
FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
Move and Compare

Section
16 FMOV FMOV S D n Fill Move 3 3 3 – – 3 – 3
9.7

Section
17 XCH XCH D1 D2 Exchange 3 3 – – – 3 – 3
9.8

Conversion to Binary
Section
18 BCD BCD S D Coded 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
9.9
Decimal

Section
19 BIN BIN S D Conversion to Binary 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
9.10

Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, –, ×, ÷)

Section
20 ADD ADD S1 S2 D Addition 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
10.1

Section
21 SUB SUB S1 S2 D Subtraction 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
10.2

Section
22 MUL MUL S1 S2 D Multiplication 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
10.3

Section
23 DIV DIV S1 S2 D Division 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
10.4

Section
24 INC INC D Increment 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
10.5

Section
25 DEC DEC D Decrement 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
10.6

Section
26 WAND WAND S1 S2 D Logical Word AND 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
10.7

Section
27 WOR WOR S1 S2 D Logical Word OR 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
10.8

Section
28 WXOR WXOR S1 S2 D Logical Exclusive OR 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
10.9

Section
29 NEG NEG D Negation 3 3 – – – 3 – 3
10.10

Rotation and Shift Operation

Section
30 ROR ROR D n Rotation Right 3 3 3 – – 3 – 3
11.1

Section
31 ROL ROL D n Rotation Left 3 3 3 – – 3 – 3
11.2

Section
32 RCR RCR D n Rotation Right with Carry 3 3 – – – 3 – 3
11.3

Section
33 RCL RCL D n Rotation Left with Carry 3 3 – – – 3 – 3
11.4

Section
34 SFTR SFTR S D n1 n2 Bit Shift Right 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
11.5

72
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC

1
*1: The instruction is provided in the FX2N/FX2NC Series Ver.3.00 or later. *4: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.

Introduction
*2: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *5: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.
*3: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver.1.10 or later.
Applicable PLC

FX3UC
FX3G
FX3U
FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
2

Overview
Rotation and Shift Operation

Section
35 SFTL SFTL S D n1 n2 Bit Shift Left 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
11.6

Section
36 WSFR WSFR S D n1 n2 Word Shift Right 3 3 3 – – 3 – 3
11.7 3

List
Instruction
Section
37 WSFL WSFL S D n1 n2 Word Shift Left 3 3 3 – – 3 – 3
11.8

Shift write [FIFO/FILO Section

38 SFWR SFWR S D n 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
control] 11.9

Section
4
39 SFRD SFRD S D n Shift Read [FIFO Control] 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

in Detail
Devices
11.10

Data Operation

Section
40 ZRST ZRST D1 D2 Zone Reset 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
12.1

Section
5
41 DECO DECO S D n Decode 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Constant
Device &
Specified the
12.2

Section
42 ENCO ENCO S D n Encode 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
12.3

43 SUM SUM S D Sum of Active Bits 3 3 3 – – 3 – 3

Section
12.4 6

Programming
Before
Section
44 BON BON S D n Check Specified Bit Status 3 3 3 – – 3 – 3
12.5

Section
45 MEAN MEAN S D n Mean 3 3 3 – – 3 – 3
12.6
7
Section

Instruction
Basic
46 ANS ANS S m D Timed Annunciator Set 3 3 3 – – 3 – 3
12.7

Section
47 ANR ANR Annunciator Reset 3 3 3 – – 3 – 3
12.8

48 SQR SQR S D Square Root 3 3 – – – 3 – 3

Section
12.9
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Conversion to Floating Section

49 FLT FLT S D 3 3 *6 – – 3 – 3
Point 12.10

High Speed Processing

50 REF REF D n Refresh 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Section
13.1
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

Section
51 REFF REFF n Refresh and Filter Adjust 3 3 – – – 3 – 3
13.2

Section
52 MTR MTR S D1 D2 n Input Matrix 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
13.3
10
Section
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

53 HSCS HSCS S1 S2 D High Speed Counter Set 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

13.4

73
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC

*1: The instruction is provided in the FX2N/FX2NC Series Ver.3.00 or later. *4: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.
*2: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *5: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.
*3: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver.1.10 or later.
Applicable PLC

FX3UC
FX3G
FX3U
FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
High Speed Processing

Section
54 HSCR HSCR S1 S2 D High Speed Counter Reset 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
13.5

High Speed Counter Zone Section

55 HSZ HSZ S1 S2 S D 3 3 3 – – 3 – 3
Compare 13.6

Section
56 SPD SPD S1 S2 D Speed Detection 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
13.7

Section
57 PLSY PLSY S1 S2 D Pulse Y Output 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
13.8

Section
58 PWM PWM S1 S2 D Pulse Width Modulation 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
13.9

Acceleration/Deceleration Section
59 PLSR PLSR S1 S2 S3 D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Setup 13.10

Handy Instruction

Section
60 IST IST S D1 D2 Initial State 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
14.1

Section
61 SER SER S1 S2 D n Search a Data Stack 3 3 3 – – 3 – 3
14.2

Section
62 ABSD ABSD S1 S2 D n Absolute Drum Sequencer 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
14.3

Incremental Drum Section

63 INCD INCD S1 S2 D n 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Sequencer 14.4

Section
64 TTMR TTMR D n Teaching Timer 3 3 – – – 3 – 3
14.5

Section
65 STMR STMR S m D Special Timer 3 3 – – – 3 – 3
14.6

Section
66 ALT ALT D Alternate State 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
14.7

Section
67 RAMP RAMP S1 S2 D n Ramp Variable Value 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
14.8

Section
68 ROTC ROTC S m1 m2 D Rotary Table Control 3 3 – – – 3 – 3
14.9

Section
69 SORT SORT S m1 m2 D n SORT Tabulated Data 3 3 – – – 3 – 3
14.10

External FX I/O Device

Section
70 TKY TKY S D1 D2 Ten Key Input 3 3 – – – 3 – 3
15.1

Section
71 HKY HKY S D1 D2 D3 Hexadecimal Input 3 3 – – – 3 – 3
15.2

Digital Switch Section

72 DSW DSW S D1 D2 n 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
(Thumbwheel Input) 15.3

74
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC

1
*1: The instruction is provided in the FX2N/FX2NC Series Ver.3.00 or later. *4: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.

Introduction
*2: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *5: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.
*3: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver.1.10 or later.
Applicable PLC

FX3UC
FX3G
FX3U
FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
2

Overview
External FX I/O Device

Section
73 SEGD SEGD S D Seven Segment Decoder 3 3 – – – 3 – 3
15.4

Section
74 SEGL SEGL S D n Seven Segment With Latch 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
15.5 3

List
Instruction
Section
75 ARWS ARWS S D1 D2 n Arrow Switch 3 3 – – – 3 – 3
15.6

Section
76 ASC ASC S D ASCII Code Data Input 3 3 – – – 3 – 3
15.7

Section
4
77 PR PR S D Print (ASCII Code) 3 3 – – – 3 – 3

in Detail
Devices
15.8

Read From A Special

Section
78 FROM FROM m1 m2 D n Function 3 3 3 – 3 3 3 3
15.9
Block

79 TO TO m1 m2 S n
Write To A Special Function
Block
3 3 3 – 3 3 3 3
Section
15.10
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
External FX Device

Section
80 RS RS S m D n Serial Communication 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
16.1

81 PRUN PRUN S D Parallel Run (Octal Mode) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Section
16.2
6

Programming
Before
Hexadecimal to ASCII Section
82 ASCI ASCI S D n 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Conversion 16.3

ASCII to Hexadecimal Section

83 HEX HEX S D n 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Conversion 16.4
7
Section

Instruction
Basic
84 CCD CCD S D n Check Code 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
16.5

Section
85 VRRD VRRD S D Volume Read – – *6 3 3 3 3 3
16.6

86 VRSC Volume Scale – – *6 3 3 3 3 3

Section 8
VRSC S D 16.7
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Section
87 RS2 RS2 S m D n n1 Serial Communication 2 3 3 3 – – – – –
16.8

Section
88 PID PID S1 S2 S3 D PID Control Loop 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
16.9 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

89 to 99 – –

Data Transfer 2

100,
101
– –
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

Batch Store of Index Section

102 ZPUSH ZPUSH D 3 *5 – – – – – –
Register 17.1

75
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC

*1: The instruction is provided in the FX2N/FX2NC Series Ver.3.00 or later. *4: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.
*2: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *5: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.
*3: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver.1.10 or later.
Applicable PLC

FX3UC
FX3G
FX3U
FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
Data Transfer 2

Batch POP of Index Section

103 ZPOP ZPOP D 3 *5 – – – – – –
Register 17.2

104 to
– –
109

Floating Point

Section
110 ECMP ECMP S1 S2 D Floating Point Compare 3 3 *6 – – 3 – 3
18.1

Floating Point Zone Section

111 EZCP EZCP S1 S2 S D 3 3 – – – 3 – 3
Compare 18.2

Section
112 EMOV EMOV S D Floating Point Move 3 3 *6 – – – – –
18.3

113 to
– –
115

Floating Point to Character Section

116 ESTR ESTR S1 S2 D 3 3 – – – – – –
String Conversion 18.4

Character String to Floating Section

117 EVAL EVAL S D 3 3 – – – – – –
Point Conversion 18.5

Floating Point to Scientific Section

118 EBCD EBCD S D 3 3 – – – 3 – 3
Notation Conversion 18.6

Scientific Notation to
Section
119 EBIN EBIN S D Floating 3 3 – – – 3 – 3
18.7
Point Conversion

Section
120 EADD EADD S1 S2 D Floating Point Addition 3 3 *6 – – 3 – 3
18.8

Section
121 ESUB ESUB S1 S2 D Floating Point Subtraction 3 3 *6 – – 3 – 3
18.9

Section
122 EMUL EMUL S1 S2 D Floating Point Multiplication 3 3 *6 – – 3 – 3
18.10

Section
123 EDIV EDIV S1 S2 D Floating Point Division 3 3 *6 – – 3 – 3
18.11

Section
124 EXP EXP S D Floating Point Exponent 3 3 – – – – – –
18.12

Floating Point Natural Section

125 LOGE LOGE S D 3 3 – – – – – –
Logarithm 18.13

Floating Point Common Section

126 LOG10 LOG10 S D 3 3 – – – – – –
Logarithm 18.14

Section
127 ESQR ESQR S D Floating Point Square Root 3 3 *6 – – 3 – 3
18.15

Section
128 ENEG ENEG D Floating Point Negation 3 3 – – – – – –
18.16

Floating Point to Integer Section

129 INT INT S D 3 3 *6 – – 3 – 3
Conversion 18.17

76
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC

1
*1: The instruction is provided in the FX2N/FX2NC Series Ver.3.00 or later. *4: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.

Introduction
*2: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *5: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.
*3: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver.1.10 or later.
Applicable PLC

FX3UC
FX3G
FX3U
FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
2

Overview
Floating Point

Section
130 SIN SIN S D Floating Point Sine 3 3 – – – 3 – 3
18.18

Section
131 COS COS S D Floating Point Cosine 3 3 – – – 3 – 3
18.19 3

List
Instruction
Section
132 TAN TAN S D Floating Point Tangent 3 3 – – – 3 – 3
18.20

Section
133 ASIN ASIN S D Floating Point Arc Sine 3 3 – – – – – –
18.21

Section
4
134 ACOS ACOS S D Floating Point Arc Cosine 3 3 – – – – – –

in Detail
Devices
18.22

Section
135 ATAN ATAN S D Floating Point Arc Tangent 3 3 – – – – – –
18.23

136 RAD RAD S D

Floating Point Degrees to
Radians Conversion
3 3 – – – – – –
Section
18.24 5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Floating Point Radians to Section
137 DEG DEG S D 3 3 – – – – – –
Degrees Conversion 18.25

138,
– –
139

Data Operation 2
6

Programming
Before
Section
140 WSUM WSUM S D n Sum of Word Data 3 *5 – – – – – –
19.1

Section
141 WTOB WTOB S D n WORD to BYTE 3 *5 – – – – – –
19.2
7
Section

Instruction
Basic
142 BTOW BTOW S D n BYTE to WORD 3 *5 – – – – – –
19.3

Section
143 UNI UNI S D n 4-bit Linking of Word Data 3 *5 – – – – – –
19.4

144 DIS DIS S D n

4-bit Grouping
Data
of Word
3 *5 – – – – – –
Section
19.5
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

145,
– –
146

Section
147 SWAP SWAP S Byte Swap 3 3 – – – 3 – 3
19.6
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

148 – –

Section
149 SORT2 SORT2 S m1 m2 D n Sort Tabulated Data 2 3 *5 – – – – – –
19.7

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

77
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC

*1: The instruction is provided in the FX2N/FX2NC Series Ver.3.00 or later. *4: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.
*2: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *5: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.
*3: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver.1.10 or later.
Applicable PLC

FX3UC
FX3G
FX3U
FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
Positioning Control

Section
150 DSZR DSZR S1 S2 D1 D2 DOG Search Zero Return 3 *4 3 – – – – –
20.1

*2, Section
151 DVIT DVIT S1 S2 D1 D2 Interrupt Positioning 3 – – – – – –
4 20.2

Batch Data Positioning Section

152 TBL TBL D n 3 *5 3 – – – – –
Mode 20.3

153,
– –
154

Absolute Current Value * Section

155 ABS ABS S D1 D2 3 3 3 3 3 3 *1
Read 1 20.4

Section
156 ZRN ZRN S1 S2 S3 D Zero Return 3 *4 3 3 3 – 3 –
20.5

Variable Speed Pulse Section

157 PLSV PLSV S D1 D2 3 3 3 3 3 – 3 –
Output 20.6

Section
158 DRVI DRVI S1 S2 D1 D2 Drive to Increment 3 3 3 3 3 – 3 –
20.7

Section
159 DRVA DRVA S1 S2 D1 D2 Drive to Absolute 3 3 3 3 3 – 3 –
20.8

Real Time Clock Control

Section
160 TCMP TCMP S1 S2 S3 S D RTC Data Compare 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
21.1

Section
161 TZCP TZCP S1 S2 S D RTC Data Zone Compare 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
21.2

Section
162 TADD TADD S1 S2 D RTC Data Addition 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
21.3

Section
163 TSUB TSUB S1 S2 D RTC Data Subtraction 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
21.4

Section
164 HTOS HTOS S D Hour to Second Conversion 3 3 – – – – – –
21.5

Section
165 STOH STOH S D Second to Hour Conversion 3 3 – – – – – –
21.6

Section
166 TRD TRD D Read RTC data 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
21.7

Section
167 TWR TWR S Set RTC data 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
21.8

168 – –

* Section
169 HOUR HOUR S D1 D2 Hour Meter 3 3 3 3 3 3 *1
1 21.9

78
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC

1
*1: The instruction is provided in the FX2N/FX2NC Series Ver.3.00 or later. *4: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.

Introduction
*2: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *5: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.
*3: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver.1.10 or later.
Applicable PLC

FX3UC
FX3G
FX3U
FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
2

Overview
External Device

Decimal to Gray Code Section

170 GRY GRY S D 3 3 3 – – 3 – 3
Conversion 22.1

Gray Code to Decimal Section

171 GBIN GBIN S D Conversion
3 3 3 – – 3 – 3
22.2 3

List
Instruction
172 to
– –
175

Read form Dedicated * Section

176 RD3A RD3A m1 m2 D 3 3 – – 3 3 *1
Analog Block 1 22.3

Write to Dedicated Analog * Section

4
177 WR3A WR3A m1 m2 S 3 3 – – 3 3 *1
Block 1 22.4

in Detail
Devices
178,
– –
179

Extension Function

External ROM Function *

5
180 EXTR EXTR S SD1 SD2 SD3 – – – – – – *1 –

Constant
Device &
Specified the
(FX2N/FX2NC) 1

Others

181 – –

Read Device Comment Section 6

182 COMRD COMRD S D 3 *5 – – – – – –
Data 24.1

Programming
Before
183 – –

Random Number Section

184 RND RND D Generation
3 3 – – – – – –
24.2 7

Instruction
Basic
185 – –

Section
186 DUTY DUTY n1 n2 D Timing Pulse Generation 3 *5 – – – – – –
24.3
8
187 – –
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Section
188 CRC CRC S D n Cyclic Redundancy Check 3 3 – – – – – –
24.4

Section
189 HCMOV HCMOV S D n High Speed Counter Move 3 *4 – – – – – –
24.5 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

Block Data Operation

190,
– –
191

Section
192 BK+ BK+ S1 S2 D n Block Data Addition 3 *5 – – – – – –
25.1 10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

Section
193 BK- BK- S1 S2 D n Block Data Subtraction 3 *5 – – – – – –
25.2

79
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC

*1: The instruction is provided in the FX2N/FX2NC Series Ver.3.00 or later. *4: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.
*2: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *5: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.
*3: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver.1.10 or later.
Applicable PLC

FX3UC
FX3G
FX3U
FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
Block Data Subtraction
Block Data Compare Section
194 BKCMP= BKCMP= S1 S2 D n 3 *5 – – – – – –
S1 = S2 25.3

Block Data Compare Section

195 BKCMP> BKCMP> S1 S2 D n 3 *5 – – – – – –
S1 > S2 25.3

Block Data Compare Section

196 BKCMP< BKCMP< S1 S2 D n 3 *5 – – – – – –
S1 < S2 25.3

Block Data Compare Section

197 BKCMP<> BKCMP<> S1 S2 D n 3 *5 – – – – – –
S1 ≠ S2 25.3

Block Data Compare Section

198 BKCMP<= BKCMP<= S1 S2 D n 3 *5 – – – – – –
S1 ≤ S2 25.3

Block Data Compare Section

199 BKCMP>= BKCMP>= S1 S2 D n 3 *5 – – – – – –
S1 ≥ S2 25.3

Character String Control

BIN to Character String Section

200 STR STR S1 S2 D 3 *5 – – – – – –
Conversion 26.1

Character String to BIN Section

201 VAL VAL S D1 D2 3 *5 – – – – – –
Conversion 26.2

Section
202 $+ $+ S1 S2 D Link Character Strings 3 3 – – – – – –
26.3

Character String Length Section

203 LEN LEN S D 3 3 – – – – – –
Detection 26.4

Extracting Character String Section

204 RIGHT RIGHT S D n 3 3 – – – – – –
Data from the Right 26.5

Extracting Character String Section

205 LEFT LEFT S D n 3 3 – – – – – –
Data from the Left 26.6

Random Selection of Section

206 MIDR MIDR S1 D S2 3 3 – – – – – –
Character Strings 26.7

Random Replacement of Section

207 MIDW MIDW S1 D S2 3 3 – – – – – –
Character Strings 26.8

Section
208 INSTR INSTR S1 S2 D n Character string search 3 *5 – – – – – –
26.9

Section
209 $MOV $MOV S D Character String Transfer 3 3 – – – – – –
26.10

Data Operation 3

Section
210 FDEL FDEL S D n Deleting Data from Tables 3 *5 – – – – – –
27.1

Section
211 FINS FINS S D n Inserting Data to Tables 3 *5 – – – – – –
27.2

Shift Last Data Read Section

212 POP POP S D n 3 3 – – – – – –
[FILO Control] 27.3

80
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC

1
*1: The instruction is provided in the FX2N/FX2NC Series Ver.3.00 or later. *4: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.

Introduction
*2: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *5: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.
*3: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver.1.10 or later.
Applicable PLC

FX3UC
FX3G
FX3U
FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
2

Overview
Data Operation 3

Section
213 SFR SFR D n Bit Shift Right with Carry 3 3 – – – – – –
27.4

Section
214 SFL SFL D n Bit Shift Left with Carry 3 3 – – – – – –
27.5 3

List
Instruction
215 to
– –
219

Data Comparison

220 to
223
– –
4

in Detail
Devices
Load Compare Section
224 LD= LD= S1 S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
S1 = S2 28.1

Load Compare Section

225 LD> LD> S1 S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
S1 > S2 28.1

Load Compare Section

5
226 LD< LD< S1 S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Constant
Device &
Specified the
S1 < S2 28.1

227 – –

Load Compare Section

228 LD<> LD<> S1 S2 S1 ≠ S2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
28.1 6

Programming
Before
Load Compare Section
229 LD<= LD<= S1 S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
S1 ≤ S2 28.1

Load Compare Section

230 LD>= LD>= S1 S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
S1 ≥ S2 28.1
7
231 – –

Instruction
Basic
AND Compare Section
232 AND= AND= S1 S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
S1 = S2 28.2

233 AND> AND> S1 S2

AND
S1 > S2
Compare
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Section
28.2
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

AND Compare Section

234 AND< AND< S1 S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
S1 < S2 28.2

235 – –
9
AND Compare Section
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

236 AND<> AND<> S1 S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

S1 ≠ S2 28.2

AND Compare Section

237 AND<= AND<= S1 S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
S1 ≤ S2 28.2

238 AND>= AND>= S1 S2

AND
S1 ≥ S2
Compare
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Section
28.2
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

239 – –

81
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC

*1: The instruction is provided in the FX2N/FX2NC Series Ver.3.00 or later. *4: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.
*2: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *5: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.
*3: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver.1.10 or later.
Applicable PLC

FX3UC
FX3G
FX3U
FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
Data Comparison

Section
240 OR= OR Compare S1 = S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
28.3
OR= S1 S2

Section
241 OR> OR Compare S1 > S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
OR> S1 S2 28.3

Section
242 OR< OR Compare S1 < S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
OR< S1 S2 28.3

243 – –

Section
244 OR<> OR Compare S1 ≠ S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
28.3
OR<> S1 S2

Section
245 OR<= OR Compare S1 ≤ S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
28.3
OR<= S1 S2

Section
246 OR>= OR Compare S1 ≥ S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
OR>= S1 S2 28.3

247 to
– –
249

Data Table Operation

250 to
– –
255

Section
256 LIMIT LIMIT S1 S2 S3 D Limit Control 3 3 – – – – – –
29.1

Section
257 BAND BAND S1 S2 S3 D Dead Band Control 3 3 – – – – – –
29.2

Section
258 ZONE ZONE S1 S2 S3 D Zone Control 3 3 – – – – – –
29.3

Scaling Section
259 SCL SCL S1 S2 D 3 3 – – – – – –
(Coordinate by Point Data) 29.4

Decimal ASCII to BIN Section

260 DABIN DABIN S D 3 *5 – – – – – –
Conversion 29.5

BIN to Decimal ASCII Section

261 BINDA BINDA S D 3 *5 – – – – – –
Conversion 29.6

262 to
– –
268

Scaling 2 Section
269 SCL2 SCL2 S1 S2 D 3 *3 – – – – – –
(Coordinate by X/Y Data) 29.7

82
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 3 Instruction List
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 3.3 Applied Instructions ... in Ascending Order of FNC

1
*1: The instruction is provided in the FX2N/FX2NC Series Ver.3.00 or later. *4: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.

Introduction
*2: The function is changed in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *5: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.2.20 or later.
*3: The instruction is provided in the FX3UC Series Ver.1.30 or later. *6: The instruction is provided in the FX3G Series Ver.1.10 or later.
Applicable PLC

FX3UC
FX3G
FX3U
FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

FX1NC
FX2NC
FX1N
FX2N
FX1S
2

Overview
External Device Communication (Inverter Communication)

Section
270 IVCK IVCK S1 S2 D n Inverter Status Check 3 3 *6 – – – – –
30.1

Section
271 IVDR IVDR S1 S2 S3 n Inverter Drive 3 3 *6 – – – – –
30.2 3

List
Instruction
Section
272 IVRD IVRD S1 S2 D n Inverter Parameter Read 3 3 *6 – – – – –
30.3

Section
273 IVWR IVWR S1 S2 S3 n Inverter Parameter Write 3 3 *6 – – – – –
30.4

Inverter Parameter Block Section

4
274 IVBWR IVBWR S1 S2 S3 n 3 3 – – – – – –

in Detail
Devices
Write 30.5

275 to
– –
277

Data Transfer 3

Section
5
278 RBFM RBFM m1 m2 D n1 n2 Divided BFM Read 3 *5 – – – – – –

Constant
Device &
Specified the
31.1

Section
279 WBFM WBFM m1 m2 S n1 n2 Divided BFM Write 3 *5 – – – – – –
31.2

High Speed Processing 2

High Speed Counter
6
Section

Programming
Before
280 HSCT HSCT S1 m S2 D n Compare 3 3 – – – – – –
32.1
With Data Table

281 to
– –
289

Extension File Register Control

7
Section

Instruction
Basic
290 LOADR LOADR S n Load From ER 3 3 3 – – – – –
33.1

Section
291 SAVER SAVER S m D Save to ER 3 3 – – – – – –
33.2

292 INITR INITR S n Initialize R and ER 3 3 – – – – – –

Section 8
33.3
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Section
293 LOGR LOGR S m D1 n D2 Logging R and ER 3 3 – – – – – –
33.4

Section
294 RWER Rewrite to ER 3 *3 3 – – – – –
RWER S n 33.5
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

Section
295 INITER INITER S n Initialize ER 3 *3 – – – – – –
33.6

296 to
– –
299

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

83
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.1 Device Number List

4. Devices in Detail
This chapter explains how numeric values are handled in the PLC as well as the roles and functions of
various built-in devices including I/O relays, auxiliary relays, state relays, counters and data registers.
The following content provides a basis for handling the PLC.

4.1 Device Number List

Device numbers are assigned as shown below.
For input relay numbers and output relay numbers when I/O extension equipment and special extension
equipment are connected to the PLC main unit, refer to the FX3U Hardware Edition.
1) FX3U/FX3UC PLC

Device name Description Reference

I/O relay
Input relay X000 to X367*1 248 points Device numbers are octal.
The total number of inputs and outputs is Section 4.2
Output relay Y000 to Y367*1 248 points 256.
Auxiliary relay
General type [variable] M0 to M499 500 points The setting can be changed between the
Latched (battery backed) latched (battery backed) type and the non-
M500 to M1023 524 points latched type using parameters.
type [variable] Section 4.3
Latched (battery backed)
M1024 to M7679 6656 points
type [fixed]
Special type*2 M8000 to M8511 512 points Chapter 36
State relay
Initial state (general type
S0 to S9 10 points
[variable])
General type [variable] S10 to S499 490 points
The setting can be changed between the
Latched (battery backed) latched (battery backed) type and the non-
S500 to S899 400 points
type [variable] latched type using parameters. Section 4.4
Annunciator
(latched (battery backed) S900 to S999 100 points
type [variable])
Latched (battery backed)
S1000 to S4095 3096 points
type [fixed]
Timer (on-delay timer)
100 ms T0 to T191 192 points 0.1 to 3,276.7 sec
100 ms [for subroutine or
T192 to T199 8 points 0.1 to 3,276.7 sec
interrupt routine]
10 ms T200 to T245 46 points 0.01 to 327.67 sec Section 4.5
Retentive type for 1 ms T246 to T249 4 points 0.001 to 32.767 sec
Retentive type for 100 ms T250 to T255 6 points 0.1 to 3,276.7 sec
1 ms T256 to T511 256 points 0.001 to 32.767 sec

84
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.1 Device Number List

1
Device name Description Reference

Introduction
Counter
General type up counter
C0 to C99 100 points Counts 0 to 32,767
(16 bits) [variable]
The setting can be changed between the
Latched (battery backed)
type up counter C100 to C199 100 points
latched (battery backed) type and the non-
latched type using parameters.
2
(16 bits) [variable]

Overview
General type Section 4.6
bi-directional counter C200 to C219 20 points −2,147,483,648 to
(32 bits) [variable] +2,147,483,647 counts
Latched (battery backed) The setting can be changed between the
type
bi-directional counter
C220 to C234 15 points
latched (battery backed) type and the non-
latched type using parameters. 3

List
Instruction
(32 bits) [variable]
High speed counter
8 points maximum can be used among C235 to C255
1-phase 1-counting input
C235 to C245 [latched (battery backed) type].
Bi-directional (32 bits)
The setting can be changed between the latched (battery

1-phase 2-counting input

backed) type and the non-latch type using parameters. 4
C246 to C250 −2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 counts

in Detail
Devices
Bi-directional (32 bits)
Hardware counter*3
1 phase: 100 kHz × 6 points, 10 kHz × 2 points Section 4.7
2 phases: 50 kHz (1 edge count),
50 kHz (4 edge count)
2-phase 2-counting input Software counter
C251 to C255
Bi-directional (32 bits) 1 phase: 40 kHz 5
2 phases: 40 kHz (1 edge count),

Constant
Device &
Specified the
10 kHz (4 edge count)
Data register (32 bits when used in pair form)
General type (16 bits)
D0 to D199 200 points
[variable] The setting can be changed between the
latched (battery backed)
type (16 bits) D200 to D511 312 points
latched (battery backed) type and the non-
latched type using parameters.
6

Programming
Before
[variable] Section 4.9
Among the 7488 fixed latched (battery
latched (battery backed) D512 to D7999 7488 points
backed) type data registers, D1000 and later
type (16 bits) <D1000 to <7000
can be set as file registers in units of 500
[fixed] <file register> D7999> points>
points.
Special type (16 bits)*2 D8000 to D8511 512 points Chapter 36 7

Instruction
Basic
Index type (16 bits) V0 to V7, Z0 to Z7 16 points Section 4.11
Extension register/Extension file register
Extension register 32768
R0 to R32767 latched (battery backed)
(16 bits) points
Section 4.10
Extension file register
(16 bits)
ER0 to ER32767
32768
points
Available only while a memory cassette is
mounted 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Pointer
For jump and branch call P0 to P4095 4096 points For CJ and CALL instructions
Input interrupt
I0…… to I5…… 6 points
Input delay interrupt Section 4.12
Timer interrupt
Counter interrupt
I6…… to I8……
I010 to I060
3 points
6 points For HSCS instruction
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

Nesting
For master control N0 to N7 8 points For MC instruction

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

85
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.1 Device Number List

Device name Description Reference

Constant
16 bits −32768 to +32767
Decimal (K)
32 bits −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
16 bits 0 to FFFF
Hexadecimal (H)
32 bits 0 to FFFFFFFF
−1.0 × 2128 to −1.0 × 2−126, 0, 1.0 × 2−126 to 1.0 × 2128 Chapter 5
Real number (E) 32 bits Both the decimal point expression and the exponent
expression are available.
Specify characters by quotation marks.
Character string (" ") Character string In a constant of an instruction, up to 32 half-width
characters are available.

*1. Available device numbers vary depending on the PLC. For details, refer to Section 4.2.
*2. For supported functions, refer to Chapter 36.
For handling of the latched (battery backed) area, refer to Section 2.6.
*3. When the FX3U-4HSX-ADP is connected to an FX3U PLC, the maximum input frequency is set as
follows:
1 phase: 200 kHz
2 phases: 100 kHz (1 edge count). 100 kHz (4 edge count)

86
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.1 Device Number List

1
2) FX3G PLCs

Introduction
Device name Description Reference
I/O relay
Input relay X000 to X177 128 points Device numbers are octal.

Output relay Y000 to Y177 128 points

The total number of inputs and outputs is
128.
Section 4.2 2

Overview
Auxiliary relay
General type M0 to M383 384 points
EEPROM keep type M384 to M1535 1152 points Section 4.3
*1 M1536 to M7679 6144 points
General type
Special type*2 M8000 to M8511 512 points Chapter 36 3

List
Instruction
State relay
Initial state type
S0 to S9 10 points
(EEPROM keep)
EEPROM keep type S10 to S899 890 points
Section 4.4
Annunciator type
(EEPROM keep)
S900 to S999 100 points 4

in Detail
Devices
General type*1 S1000 to S4095 3096 points
Timer (on-delay timer)
100 ms T0 to T191 192 points 0.1 to 3,276.7 sec
100 ms [for subroutine or
interrupt routine]
T192 to T199 8 points 0.1 to 3,276.7sec
5
10 ms T200 to T245 46 points 0.01 to 327.67 sec

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Retentive type for 1 ms Section 4.5
T246 to T249 4 points 0.001 to 32.767 sec
(EEPROM keep)
Retentive type for 100 ms
T250 to T255 6 points 0.1 to 3,276.7 sec
(EEPROM keep)
1 ms T256 to T319 64 points 0.001 to 32.767 sec 6
Counter

Programming
Before
General type up counter
C0 to C15 16 points Counts 0 to 32,767
(16 bits)
EEPROM keep type up
C16 to C199 184 points Counts 0 to 32,767
counter (16 bits)
General type Section 4.6
7
bi-directional counter C200 to C219 20 points −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 counts

Instruction
Basic
(32 bits)
EEPROM keep bi-
directional counter C220 to C234 15 points −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 counts
(32 bits)

*1. When the optional battery is installed, general type devices can be changed to latched (battery 8
backed) type devices by the parameter setting. However, the latched range cannot be set.
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

*2. For applicable functions, refer to Chapter 36.

For handling of the latched area, refer to Section 2.6.

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

87
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.1 Device Number List

Device name Description Reference

High speed counter
1-phase 1-counting input
Bi-directional (32 bits) C235 to C245
(EEPROM keep)
−2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 counts
1-phase 2-counting input
Software counter
Bi-directional (32 bits) C246 to C250 Section 4.8
1 phase: 60 kHz × 4 points, 10 kHz × 2 points
(EEPROM keep)
2 phases: 30 kHz × 2 points, 5 kHz × 1 point
2-phase 2-counting input
Bi-directional (32 bits) C251 to C255
(EEPROM keep)
Data register (32 bits when used in pair form)
General type (16 bits) D0 to D127 128 points
EEPROM keep type
D128 to D1099 972 points
(16 bits)
General type (16 bits)*1 D1100 to D7999 6900 points Section 4.9
Among 7000 latched type data registers
EEPROM keep type backed up by the EEPROM, D1000 and later
D1000 to D7999 7000 points
(16 bits) <file register> can be set as file registers in units of 500
points by the parameter setting.
Special type (16 bits)*2 D8000 to D8511 512 points Chapter 36
Index type (16 bits) V0 to V7, Z0 to Z7 16 points Section 4.11
Extension register/Extension file register
Extension register
R0 to R23999 24000 points
(16 bits)*1
Extension file register Section 4.10
(16 bits) ER0 to ER23999 24000 points
(EEPROM keep)
Pointer
For jump and branch call P0 to P2047 2048 points For CJ and CALL instructions Section 4.12
Input interrupt I0…… to I5…… 6 points
Timer interrupt I6…… to I8…… 3 points
Nesting
For master control N0 to N7 8 points For MC instruction
Constant
16 bits −32,768 to +32,767
Decimal (K)
32 bits −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
16 bits 0 to FFFF
Hexadecimal (H)
32 bits 0 to FFFFFFFF Chapter 5
128 −126 −126 128
−1.0 × 2 to −1.0 × 2 , 0, 1.0 × 2 to 1.0 × 2
Real number (E)*3 32 bits Both the decimal point expression and the exponent
expression are available.

*1. When the optional battery is installed, general type devices can be changed to latched (battery
backed) type devices by the parameter setting. However, the latched range cannot be set.
*2. For applicable functions, refer to Chapter 36.
For handling of the latched area, refer to Section 2.6.
*3. Supported in Ver.1.10 or later.

88
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.2 I/O Relays [X, Y]

1
4.2 I/O Relays [X, Y]

Introduction
Some input relays and output relays are secured in the main unit, and others are assigned to extension
devices according to the connection order. Because I/O replays are numbered in octal, numeric values such
as "8" and "9" do not exist.
2
4.2.1 Numbers of I/O relays

Overview
The table below shows input relay (X) and output relays (Y) numbering (Relay numbers are assigned in
octal.)

Model
FX3UC-16M FX3UC-32M FX3UC-64M FX3UC-96M
When 3
name extended

List
Instruction
256
X000 to X007 X000 to X017 X000 to X037 X000 to X057 X000 to X367
FX3UC (D, DSS) PLC Input points
8 points 16 points 32 points 48 points 248 points
in total
Y000 to Y007 Y000 to Y017 Y000 to Y037 Y000 to Y057 Y000 to Y367
Output
8 points 16 points 32 points 48 points 248 points

Model FX3UC-32MT-LT When

4

in Detail
Devices
name (-2) extended
256
X000 to X017 X000 to X357
FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) PLC Input points
16 points 240 points
in total
Y000 to Y017 Y000 to Y357
Output
16 points 240 points
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Model When
FX3U-16M FX3U-32M FX3U-48M FX3U-64M FX3U-80M FX3U-128M
name extended
X000 to X000 to X000 to X000 to X000 to X000 to X000 to
256
FX3U Input X007 X017 X027 X037 X047 X077 X367
points
PLC 8 points 16 points 24 points 32 points 40 points 64 points 248 points
in total
Y000 to Y000 to Y000 to Y000 to Y000 to Y000 to Y000 to 6
Output Y007 Y017 Y027 Y037 Y047 Y077 Y367

Programming
Before
8 points 16 points 24 points 32 points 40 points 64 points 248 points

Model When
FX3G-14M FX3G-24M FX3G-40M FX3G-60M
name extended
FX3G
PLC
Input
X000 to X007
8 points
X000 to X015
14 points(16)*1
X000 to X027
24 points
X000 to X043
36 points(40)*1
X000 to X177
128 points
128
points 7
in total

Instruction
Basic
Y000 to Y005 Y000 to Y011 Y000 to Y017 Y000 to Y027 Y000 to Y177
Output
6 points(8)*1 10 points(16)*1 16 points 24 points 128 points

*1. A number inside ( ) indicates the number of occupied points. The difference from the number of valid
points is unused.
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

89
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.2 I/O Relays [X, Y]

4.2.2 Functions and roles

Examples of terminal names and wiring (sink input) are for the FX3U Series PLC.

0V
External power
supply
24V COM1
Program example
S/S
Input X000 X001
signal Y000 Y000
X000 X000
Load
Y000
X000 Y000
Input NO contact
terminal X000 Y000 Output terminal
PLC NC contact

The PLC receives signals from external switches The PLC outputs signals to external loads through
through input terminals. output terminals. Contacts for external output
An input relay (X) connected to an input terminal (output devices such as relay contacts, TRIACs and
inside the PLC is an electronic relay isolated transistors) of output relays are connected to output
optically, and has many NO contacts and NC terminals inside the PLC. An output relay has many
contacts. These contacts can be arbitrarily used electronic NO contacts and NC contacts. These
inside the PLC. contacts can be arbitrarily used inside the PLC.
These input relays cannot be driven by the program. Differences in operations between external output
contacts (output devices) and internal contacts are
explained on the next page.

90
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.2 I/O Relays [X, Y]

1
4.2.3 Operation timing of input relays

Introduction
The PLC executes sequence control by repeatedly executing the following processing procedure. In this
batch I/O method, not only are there driving times of input filters and output devices but also response delays
caused by operation cycles. (Refer to Section 6.3.)

1) 2) 3) .... 6) indicate the processing order. 2

Input processing

Overview
1) Read-in Input processing
Before executing a program, the PLC reads the ON/
X000 OFF status of all input terminals inside the PLC into
X001 the input image memory.
Even if inputs change while the program is
Input terminal

X002 Input executed, the contents of the input image memory

Image
remain unchanged, but the changes in inputs are
read during the input processing in the next cycle. 3
Even if an input contact changes from ON to OFF or

List
Instruction
Memory from OFF to ON, its ON/OFF status is judged after
the response delay (approximately 10 ms) caused
by the input filter.
(When the input filter is a digital type input terminal ,
its value can be overwritten by a sequence
program.)

in Detail
Devices
2) Read-out Program processing Program processing
The PLC reads the ON/OFF status of each device
X000 from the input image memory and other device
Y000 image memories according to the contents of
3) Write
Device
instructions in the program memory, executes
operations in sequence from step 0, and then writes
5
4) Read-

Constant
Device &
Specified the
out the operation result to the image memory.
M0 Image Accordingly, the contents of the image memory for
Y000 5) Write each device change as the program is executed.
Memory The operation of a contact inside an output relay is
Auxiliary determined by the contents of the output image
relay memory.

Programming
Before
(scan time).]
operation is called operation cycle
[The time required for a cyclic
Repeated operation

6) Output
Output processing Output processing
When execution of all instructions is finished, the 7
ON/OFF status of the image memory of outputs (Y)

Instruction
Basic
Y000 is transferred to the output latch memory. This is
Y001 the actual output of the PLC.
External output contacts inside the PLC operate
Output terminal

Output Y002 after the response delay time of the output devices.
Latch
Memory 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

The above method is called the batch I/O method (or refresh method).
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

91
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.3 Auxiliary Relay [M]

4.3 Auxiliary Relay [M]

There are many auxiliary relays inside the PLC. Coils of auxiliary relays are driven by contacts of various
devices inside the PLC in the same way as output relays.
Auxiliary relays have many electronically NO contacts and NC contacts which can be used arbitrarily inside
the PLC. However, external loads cannot be driven directly by these contacts. External loads should be
driven by output relays.

4.3.1 Numbers of auxiliary relays

The table below shows auxiliary relay (M) numbers. (Numbers are assigned in decimal.)

1. FX3U/FX3UC PLC

latched (battery Fixed latched (battery

General type Special type
backed) type backed) type
M0 to M499 M500 to M1023 M1024 to M7679 M8000 to M8511
500 points*1 524 points*2 6656 points*3 512 points

2. FX3G PLCs

Fixed latched
General type General type Special type
(EEPROM keep) type
M0 to M383 M384 to M1535 M1536 to M7679 M8000 to M8511
384 points 1152 points 6144 points*4 512 points

*1. This area is not latched (battery backed). It can be changed to a latched (battery backed) area by
setting the parameters.
*2. This area is latched (battery backed). It can be changed to a non-latched (non-battery-backed) area
by setting the parameters.
*3. The characteristics of latch (battery backup) cannot be changed in the parameters.
*4. These registers can be changed to the latched (battery backed) type by the parameter setting when
the optional battery is used. However, the latched range cannot be set.

When simple N : N link or parallel link is used, some auxiliary relays are occupied for the link.
→ Refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.

4.3.2 Functions and operation examples

1. General type
All of general type auxiliary relays turn OFF when the PLC turns OFF.
M100 When the ON/OFF status of auxiliary relays just before power failure is
required in control, use latched (battery backed) type auxiliary relays.

M100
NO contact

M100
NC contact

Auxiliary relay circuit

92
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.3 Auxiliary Relay [M]

1
2. Latched (battery backed) type

Introduction
When the power is turned OFF while the PLC is operating, all of the output relays and general type auxiliary
relays turn OFF.
When restoring the power again, all of the output relays and general type auxiliary relays remain OFF except
those whose input condition is ON. In some output relays and auxiliary relays, however, the ON/OFF status
just before power failure should be stored and then replicated when restoring the power, depending on control
targets. In such a case, use latched (battery backed) type auxiliary relays.
2

Overview
In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, latched (battery backed) type devices are backed up by the battery built into the PLC.
In FX3G PLCs, latched type devices are backed up by the EEPROM built into the PLC. When the optional
battery is installed, the battery backs up some general type devices.

→ For details on backup method against power failure,

refer to Section 2.6. 3
The figure on the left shows an operation example of

List
Instruction
X000 X001
M600 M600 (latched [battery backed] type device) in a self-
holding circuit.
M600 When X000 turns ON and M600 turns ON in this circuit,
M600 holds its operation by itself even if X000 is
PLC
Backup against power failure
(self-holding circuit)
opened.
Because M600 is a latched (battery backed) type
4

in Detail
Devices
device, it remains activated when the operation is
restarted even after X000 has turned OFF due to power
failure. If an NC contact of X001 is opened when the
operation is restarted, however, M600 is deactivated.
X000
SET M600
The figure on the left shows a circuit using the SET and 5
X001 RST instructions.

Constant
Device &
Specified the
RST M600

PLC
Backup against power failure
(set/reset circuit)
6
1) Application example of latched (battery backed) type auxiliary relays

Programming
Before
Limit switch Limit switch In some cases, the table should be restarted in the
Left limit Right limit same direction as the direction selected just before
LS1 (X000) LS2 (X001)
power failure.

Instruction
Basic
Table in reciprocating motion
Motor with brake
X000 = ON (at the left limit) → M600 = ON→ The table
X000 X001 is driven rightward. → The power is turned OFF. → The
M600 Rightward
drive
table is stopped in an intermediate position. → The table 8
M600 command is restarted (M600 = ON). → X001 = ON (at the right
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

limit) → M600 = OFF, M601 = ON → The table is driven

leftward.
X001 X000
M601 Leftward drive
command
M601
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

2) Method for using a fixed latched (battery backed) type auxiliary relay as a general type auxiliary relay
When using a fixed latched (battery backed) type auxiliary relay as a general type auxiliary relay, provide
a reset circuit shown in the figure below around the head step in the program.
Ex. Fx3U/FX3UC PLCs
M8002
10
FNC 040
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

M1024 M1999
ZRST
Initial pulse
M1024 to M1999 are initialized.

93
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.4 State Relay [S]

4.4 State Relay [S]

State relays (S) are important devices to program stepping type process control simply, and combined with
the step ladder instruction STL.
State relays can be used in the SFC (sequential function chart) programming method.
→ For programming by the step ladder instruction and SFC method, refer to Chapter 34.

4.4.1 Numbers of state relays

The table below shows state relay (S) numbers. (Numbers are assigned in decimal.)

1. FX3U/FX3UC PLC

Latched (battery Fixed latched (battery

Initial state type General type Annunciator type
backed) type backed) type
S0 to S9 S0 to S499 S500 to S899 S1000 to S4095 S900 to S999
10 points*1 500 points*1 400 points*2 3096 points*3 100 points*2

2. FX3G PLCs

Initial state type Fixed latched Annunciator type

General type
(EEPROM keep) (EEPROM keep) type (EEPROM keep)
S0 to S9 S10 to S900 S900 to S999 S1000 to S4095
10 points 890 points 100 points 3096 points*4

*1. This area is not latched (battery backed). It can be changed to a latched (battery backed) area by
setting the parameters.
*2. This area is latched (battery backed). It can be changed to a non-latched (non-battery-backed) area
by setting the parameters.
*3. The characteristics of latch (battery backup) cannot be changed in the parameters.
*4. These registers can be changed to the latched (battery backed) type by the parameter setting when
the optional battery is used. However, the latched range cannot be set.

94
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.4 State Relay [S]

1
4.4.2 Functions and operation examples

Introduction
1. General type
Initial state In the stepping type process control shown in the left
figure, when the start signal X000 turns ON, the state
S 2
Start relay S20 is set (turned ON) and the solenoid valve 2
X000
Y000 for moving down turns on.

Overview
TRAN
Start When the lower limit switch X001 turns ON the state
Moving down relay S21 is set (turned ON) and the solenoid valve
S 20 Y000 Y001 for clamping turns on.
Lower limit When the clamp confirmation limit switch X002 turns

Lower
X001
TRAN
ON, the state relay S22 is set (turned ON). 3
When the operation proceeds to the next step, the
limit

List
Instruction
Clamping state relay in the preceding step is automatically reset
S 21 Y001
(turned OFF).

Clamping When the PLC turns OFF, all of general type state
X002
relays are turned OFF.
Clamping TRAN
When the ON/OFF status just before power failure is 4
Moving up required, use latched (battery backed) type state

in Detail
Devices
S 22 Y002 relays.
Upper limit
Upper X003
limit TRAN

Constant
Device &
Specified the
State relays have many NO contacts and NC contacts in the same way as X001
auxiliary relays, and such contacts can be used arbitrarily in sequence S10
programs.
When state relays (S) are not used for step ladder instructions, they can S10
be used in general sequences in the same way as auxiliary relays (M) (as M30
shown in the figure on the right). 6
Y005

Programming
Before
2. Latched (battery backed) type
• Latched (battery backed) type state relays store their ON/OFF status even if the power is shut down while
the PLC is operating, so the operation can be restarted from the last point in the process.
In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, latched (battery backed) type devices are backed up by the battery built into the 7
PLC.

Instruction
Basic
In FX3G PLCs, latched type devices are backed up by the EEPROM built into the PLC. When the optional
battery is installed, the battery backs up some general type devices.
→ For details on backup against power failure, refer to Section 2.6.
• When using latched (battery backed) type state relays as Ex. Fx3U/FX3UC PLCs
general type state relays, provide a reset circuit shown in the
M8002
8
right figure around the head step in the program. FNC 040
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

0 S1000 S1200
ZRST
Initial pulse
S1000 to S1200 are initialized.

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

95
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.4 State Relay [S]

3. Annunciator type
Annunciator type state relays can be used as outputs for external fault diagnosis.

For example, when an external fault diagnosis circuit shown in the figure below is created and the contents of
the special data register D8049 are monitored, the smallest number out of the active state relays S900 to
S999 is stored in D8049.
If two or more faults have occurred, the smallest state number having a fault is displayed at first. When the
fault is cleared, the next smallest state number having a fault is stored.
M8000
• When the special auxiliary relay M8049 is driven,
M8049 monitoring becomes valid.
RUN monitor

Y000 X000
FNC 46 • If the forward end detection input X000 is not
T 0 K 10 S900 activated within 1 second after the forward output
ANS
Y000 is driven, S900 is activated.

X001 X002
FNC 46 • If both the upper limit detection input X001 and the
T 1 K 20 S901 lower limit detection input X002 are deactivated at the
ANS
same time for 2 seconds or more, S901 is activated.

X003 X004 • In a machine whose tact time is less than 10 seconds,

FNC 46 T 2 K100 S902 if the switch X004 which is designed to be activated
ANS during one-cycle operation of the machine is not
activated while the continuous operation mode input
X003 is ON, S902 is activated.

M8048
• When any annunciator among S900 to S999 turns
Y010 ON, the special auxiliary relay M8048 is activated and
the fault display output Y010 is activated.

X005 • The state relays activated by the external fault

FNC 47 diagnosis program can be turned OFF by the reset
ANRP button X005.
Every time X005 is set to ON, the active annunciator
with the smallest number is reset in turn.
While the special auxiliary relay M8049 is not driven, annunciator type state relays can be used as latched
(battery backed) type state relays in sequence programs in the same way as general type state relays.
In the SFC programming mode in the FX-PCS/WIN(-E), however, S900 to S999 cannot be programmed as a
processes flow in SFC diagrams.

96
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.5 Timer [T]

1
4.5 Timer [T]

Introduction
Timers add and count clock pulses of 1 ms, 10 ms, 100 ms, etc. inside the PLC. When the counted value
reaches a specified set value, the output contact of the timer turns on.
A set value can be directly specified by a constant (K) in the program memory, or indirectly specified by the
contents of a data register (D). 2

Overview
4.5.1 Numbers of timers
The table below shows timer (T) numbers. (The numbers are assigned in decimal.)

1. FX3U/FX3UC PLC 3
Retentive type for 1 Retentive type for

List
Instruction
For 100 ms pulses For 10 ms pulses For 1 ms pulses
0.1 to 3276.7 sec 0.01 to 327.67 sec ms pulses*1 100 ms pulses*1 0.001 to 32.767 sec
0.001 to 32.767 sec 0.1 to 3276.7 sec
T 0 to T199 T246 to T249
200 points T250 to T255
4 points for
-------------
Routine program
T200 to T245
46 points
Interrupt execution
6 points
Latched (battery
T256 to T511
256 points
4
Latched (battery
backed) type*1

in Detail
Devices
type
T192 to T199 backed) type*1

2. FX3G PLCs
Retentive type for Potentiometer
For 100 ms
pulses
For 10 ms pulses 1 ms pulses
Retentive type for
100 ms pulses
For 1 ms pulses
0.001 to 32.767
type 5
0.01 to 327.67 sec 0.001 to 32.767 0 to 255

Constant
Device &
Specified the
0.1 to 3276.7 sec 0.1 to 3276.7 sec sec
sec (numeric value)
T 0 to T199
200 points T246 to T249 2 built-in points
T250 to T255
------------- T200 to T245 4 points*2 for T256 to T319
Routine program 46 points 6 points*2 64 points Stored in D8030
Interrupt execution
type Latched type
Latched type and D8031 6
T192 to T199

Programming
Before
Timer numbers not used for timers can be used as data registers for storing numeric values.
*1. In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, retentive type timers are backed up by the battery.
*2. In FX3G PLCs, retentive type timers are backed up by the EEPROM memory.
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

97
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.5 Timer [T]

4.5.2 Functions and operation examples

1. General type
X000 When the drive input X000 of the timer coil T200 turns ON, the
T200 K123 current value counter for T200 adds and counts clock pulses of
T200 Set value 10 ms. When the counted value becomes equivalent to the set
Y000 (constant) value K123, the output contact of the timer turns on.
A data register
can be In other words, the output contact turns on 1.23 seconds after the
specified also. coil is driven.
1.23 sec When the drive input X000 turns OFF or when the power is
X000 turned off the timer is reset and the output contact returns.
Current Set value
value

Y000

2. Retentive type
X001 Set value When the drive input X001 of the timer coil T250 turns ON, the
T250 K345 (constant) current value counter for T250 adds and counts clock pulses of
T250 A data register 100 ms. When the counted value becomes equivalent to the set
Y001 can be
specified also. value K345, the output contact of the timer turns on.
X002 Even if the drive input X001 turns OFF or the power is turned off
RST T250
during counting, the timer continues counting when the operation
restarts. The retentive operating time is 34.5 seconds.
When the reset input X002 turns ON, the timer is reset and the
Retentive time
t1 t2
t1 + t2 = 34.5 sec output contact is returned.
X001
Current Set value
value
Y001
X002

3. Potentiometer type
1) When variable analog potentiometers built in the FX3G main unit are used
Values of variable analog potentiometers
[Basic example]
built in FX3G PLCs as standard are stored
X003 as numeric data in the range from 0 to 255
T10 D08030
in the following special registers in
This register stores the 0 to 25.5 sec
accordance with the scale position.
value (0 to 255) of variable An obtained numeric value can be
analog potentiometer. specified as the indirectly specified value
for a timer to make a variable
[Applied example]
potentiometer type analog timer.
• VR1 → D8030 (Integer from 0 to 255)
M8000
FNC 22
MUL
D8031 K2 DO (D1) • VR2 → D8031 (Integer from 0 to 255)
RUN monitor
"D8030 (VR2) value x 2" is transferred to D0 (D1).
(0 to 51 sec)
X003
T10 D0
The set value range can be
changed (up to 32,767) by multiplying
the register value by "n".
Do not use D1 in other programs.

98
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.5 Timer [T]

1
2) When variable analog potentiometers (expansion board) are used

Introduction
The value of a variable analog potentiometer
volume Read
number destination board which can be built in an FX3G PLC as an
X000
FNC 85 expansion board can be obtained as numeric
K0 D0 data in the range from 0 to 255 in accordance
VRRD
with the scale position.
An obtained numeric value can be specified as
2

Overview
X001 the indirectly specified value for a timer to make
D0
T0 a variable potentiometer type analog timer.
Use the FNC85 (VRRD) instruction to take the
value of a variable analog potentiometer into the
Example of application as analog timer PLC.
→ For FNC85(VRRD), refer to Section 16.6. 3
The analog value of the potentiometer No. 0 is converted into Use the FNC86 (VRSC) instruction to take the

List
Instruction
binary 8-bit data, and a numeric value in the range from 0 to 255
value of a variable analog potentiometer as a
is transferred to D0.
In this application example, the value of D0 is used as the set numeric value in the range from 0 to 10.
value of a timer. → For FNC86(VRSC), refer to Section 16.7.

4
4.5.3 Set value specification method

in Detail
Devices
1. Specifying a constant (K)
Constant T10 is a 100 ms (0.1 sec) type timer.
X003 (decimal integer) When the constant "100" is specified, T10 works as a
T10 K100 10-second timer 10-second timer (0.1 sec × 100 = 10 sec). 5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
2. Indirectly specifying a data register
Turns on when T10 reaches the indirectly specified
X001 value of the defined data register, previously set by a
FNC 12 K100 D 5 digital switch.
MOV
Note that the set value of a latched (battery backed) 6
D5 = K100
X003

Programming
Before
10-second type register is not held correctly sometimes when the
T10 D5 timer battery voltage becomes low.

4.5.4 Cautions on routines 7

Instruction
Basic
1) Use timers T192 to T199 in subroutines and interrupt routines. These timers execute counting when a
coil instruction or END instruction is executed.
When such a timer reaches the set value, its output contact turns on when a coil instruction or END
instruction is executed.
Because general type timers execute counting only when a coil instruction is executed (Refer to "4.5.5 8
Details of timer operation and timer accuracy" below.), they do not execute counting and do not operate
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

normally if they are used in subroutines or interrupt routines in which a coil instruction is executed only in
a certain condition.
2) When a retentive timer for 1 ms pulses (T246 to T249) is used in a subroutine or interrupt routine, note
that its output contact turns on when the first coil instruction is executed after the retentive timer has
reached the set value. 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

99
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.5 Timer [T]

4.5.5 Details of timer operation and timer accuracy

A timer (except interrupt execution type) starts counting when a coil is driven, and its output contact turns on
when the first coil instruction is executed after the timer has reached timeout.
Counting operation (If the operation cycle is long,
it automatically counts two or more clocks.)
Contact is not
Input processing X010 = OFF→ON activated at this point
X010 Timer starts counting
T 0
T 0 Contact is
K12 1.2 sec activated
time-
out
T 0 Y010
Y010 ON
1st cycle 2nd cycle "n"th cycle "n+1"th cycle

As shown in the above operation diagram, the accuracy of operation of the timer contact after the coil is
driven until the contact turns on is shown in the following outline:

T
+T0 α : 0.001 sec (timer for 1 ms), 0.01 sec (timer for 10 ms) or 0.1 sec (timer for 100 ms)
−α T : Timer set value (sec)
T0: Operation cycle (sec)

If the contact is programmed before the timer coil, "+2T0" is obtained in the worst case.
When the timer set value is "0", the output contact turns on when a coil instruction is executed in the next
cycle. An interrupt execution type timer for 1 ms pulses counts clock pulses of 1 ms as an interrupt
processing after a coil instruction has been executed.

4.5.6 Program examples [off-delay timer and flicker timer]

Off-delay timer
X001 T5
Y000 X001

Y000 X001
T 5 K200 Y000 T5 (20 sec)

Flicker timer (blink)

X001
X001 T2 2 1 2
T 1 K20 sec sec sec
T1 T2 T1
T 1
T 2 K10 Y000

T 2 One
Y000 ( ) operation
cycle
In addition, the flicker operation can be performed by the ALT (FNC 66) instruction.

Multi-timer by the applied instruction STMR (FNC 65) <FX3U/FX3UC PLC>

By this instruction, off-delay timers, one-shot timers and flicker timers can be easily created.
→ For details, refer to Section 14.6.

100
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.5 Timer [T]

1
Off-delay timer and one-shot timer

Introduction
S‚ m D‚
X000
FNC 65 • A value specified by "m" becomes the set value
T 10 K100 M0
STMR of the timer specified by S ‚ . 10-second in this
example.

X000
2

Overview
10 10 • M0 is an off-delay timer.
M0
sec sec

M1 10 10 • M1 is a one-shot timer after "ON → OFF"

operation.
sec sec
3
M2 10 • M2 and M3 are provided for a flicker timer, and

List
Instruction
sec connected as shown in the program example for
flicker timer (below).
M3

Flicker timer
4
X000 M 3

in Detail
Devices
FNC 65 • When M3 is connected as shown in the left
T 10 K100 M0 figure, M2 and M1 become flicker outputs.
STMR

X000 • When X000 is set to OFF, M0, M1 and M3 are

turned OFF and T10 is reset after the set time.

M 2
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
M 1 • Do not use the timers here in other general
circuits again.

In addition, the timer time can be set according to the switch input time by the teaching timer instruction
TTMR (FNC 64). 6

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

101
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.5 Timer [T]

4.5.7 Handling timers as numeric devices

In timers, the output contact operating in accordance with the set value is used in some cases, and the
present value is used as numeric data for control in other cases.
The figures below show the structure of the timer present value registers. When a timer number is specified
in an operand of an applied instruction, the timer is handled as a device storing 16-bit or 32-bit data in the
same way as data registers.

1. Structure of timer present value register

1) 16-bit
High 16 bits Low Available numeric value range
order order 16-bit : 0 to 32,767
b15 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 b0 32-bit : -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
16384
8192
4096
2048
1024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
*1
Sign
0: Positive
number
1: Negative
number
*1 The sign is valid only when a timer is handled as a substitute for data register.

2) 32-bit
High 32 bits Low
order order
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
b31 b0
1,073,741,824
536,870,912
268,435,456
134,217,728
67,108,864
33,554,432
16,777,216
8,388,608
4,194,304
2,097,152
1,048,576
524,288
262,144
131,072
65536
32768
16384
8192
4096
2048
1024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Sign
0: Positive
number
1: Negative
number

2. Use examples in applied instructions

For the full use of timers as numeric devices, refer to the explanation of applied instructions later.

102
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.6 Counter [C]

1
4.6 Counter [C]

Introduction
4.6.1 Numbers of counters
The table below shows counter (C) numbers. (Numbers are assigned in decimal.) 2
→ For high speed counters, refer to Section 4.7.

Overview
1. FX3U/FX3UC PLC
16-bit up counter 32-bit bi-directional counter
Counting range: 0 to 32767 Counting range: −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

General type
Latched (battery backed)
type (protected by battery General type
Latched (battery backed)
type (protected by battery
3

List
Instruction
against power failure) against power failure)
C0 to C99 C100 to C199 C200 to C219 C220 to C234
100 points*1 100 points*2 20 points*1 15 points*2

2. FX3G PLCs
16-bit up counter 32-bit bi-directional counter
4

in Detail
Devices
Counting range: 0 to 32767 Counting range: −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
General type Latched (EEPROM keep) type General type Latched (EEPROM keep) type
C0 to C15 C16 to C199 C200 to C219 C220 to C234
16 points 184 points 20 points 15 points

*1. This area is not latched (battery backed). It can be changed to a latched (battery backed) area by 5
setting the parameters.

Constant
Device &
Specified the
*2. This area is latched (battery backed). It can be changed to a non-latched (non-battery-backed) area
by setting the parameters.

Counter numbers not used as counters can be converted as data registers for storing numeric values.
6
4.6.2 Features of counters

Programming
Before
The table below shows the features of 16-bit counters and 32-bit counters. They can be used in accordance
with the operating condition such as the counting direction switching and counting range, etc.
Item 16-bit counter 32-bit counter

Counting direction Up-counting

Up-counting and down-counting can be switched 7
(as shown in Subsection 4.6.3)

Instruction
Basic
Set value 1 to 32767 −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
Set value specification Constant (K) or data register Constant (K) or a pair of data registers
Current value change Does not change after counting up Changes even after counting up (ring counter)
Latches (in up-counting), or reset (in down-
Output contact Latches after counting up
counting) 8
When RST instruction is executed, current value of counter is reset to "0" and output contact
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Reset operation
returns
Current value register 16 bits 32 bits

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

103
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.6 Counter [C]

4.6.3 Related devices (to specify counting direction) [32-bit counter]

When an auxiliary relay for switching the counting direction is set to ON, the counter executes down-counting,
and when set to OFF, the counter executes up-counting.
Counting Counting Counting Counting
direction direction direction direction
Counter No. Counter No. Counter No. Counter No.
switching switching switching switching
relay relay relay relay
C200 M8200 C209 M8209 C218 M8218 C227 M8227
C201 M8201 C210 M8210 C219 M8219 C228 M8228
C202 M8202 C211 M8211 C220 M8220 C229 M8229
C203 M8203 C212 M8212 C221 M8221 C230 M8230
C204 M8204 C213 M8213 C222 M8222 C231 M8231
C205 M8205 C214 M8214 C223 M8223 C232 M8232
C206 M8206 C215 M8215 C224 M8224 C233 M8233
C207 M8207 C216 M8216 C225 M8225 C234 M8234
C208 M8208 C217 M8217 C226 M8226

4.6.4 Functions and operation examples

1. General type and latched (battery backed) type 16-bit up counters

• The valid set range of 16-bit binary up counter is from K1 to K32767 (decimal constant).
K0 provides the same operation as K1, and the output contact turns on at the first counting.
• In general type counters, the counter value is cleared when the PLC turns off. In latch type counters,
however, the counter value just before power failure is stored (backed up by the battery); The counter
value in the subsequent operations can be added to the last counter value.
• Every time the coil C0 is driven by the counting input X011, the current value of the counter increases.
When a coil instruction is executed 10 times, the output contact turns on.
After that, the current value of the counter does not change even if the counting input X011 turns on after
that.
When the RST input X010 turns ON and then RST instruction is executed, the current value of the counter
is reset to "0" and the output contact returns.
X010 X010
RST C 0
X011 X011
C 0 K10 10
9
C 0 Set value (constant) 8
Y000 7
It can be specified Current 6
indirectly also. value 5
4
3
2
1
0

Y000

• The counter set value can be set by a constant (K) as shown above, or indirectly specified by a data
register number. For example, when D10 is specified and the contents of D10 are "123", it is equivalent to
"K123".
• If data beyond the set value is written to the current value register by MOV instruction, etc., the OUT coil
turns ON and the current value register becomes the set value when the next counting input is received.
• For latched (battery backed) type counters, the current value, output contact operation and reset status are
backed up against power failure.
In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, latched type counters are backed up by the battery built into the PLC.
In FX3G PLCs, latched type counters are backed up by the EEPROM built into the PLC.
→ For details on backup methods against power failure, refer to Section 2.6.

104
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.6 Counter [C]

1
2. General type and latched (battery backed) type 32-bit bi-directional counters

Introduction
The valid set range of 32-bit binary bi-directional counters is from −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 (decimal
constant). The counting direction (up or down) is specified by special auxiliary relays M8200 to M8234.
• When M8UUU is driven for CUUU, a counter executes down-counting. When M8UUU is not driven, a
counter executes up-counting. (Refer to the previous page.)
• The set value (positive or negative) can be specified by a constant (K) or the contents of data registers (D). 2
When data registers are used, 32-bit data composed of paired serial devices are treated as set values.

Overview
For example, when D0 is specified, D1 and D0 provide a 32-bit set value.
• When the coil C200 is driven by the counting input X014, a counter starts up-counting or down-counting.
When the current value of a counter increases from "−6" to "−5", the output contact is set. When the
current value decreases from "−5" to "−6", the output contact is reset.
3
X012 X012 Up counting Down counting Up counting

List
Instruction
M8200
X013
X013 X014
RST C200
45 4
Current 3 3
2 2
X014
C200 K-5
value
0
1 1
0 0 4
−1

in Detail
Devices
C200 −2
When output has −3−4 −4−3
Y001 Set value (constant)
−5
It can be specified been already −6 −6−5
indirectly also. activated. −7 −7
−8
Y001

• The current value increases or decreases regardless of the operation of the output contact. When a 5
counter executes up-counting from "+2,147,483,647", the counter value becomes "−2,147,483,648". In the

Constant
Device &
Specified the
same way, when a counter executes down-counting from "−2,147,483,648", the counter value becomes
"+2,147,483,647". (This type of counter is called ring counter.)
• When the reset input X013 turns ON and then RST instruction is executed, the current value of the counter
is reset to "0" and the output contact returns.
• For latched (battery backed) type counters, the current value, output contact operation and reset status are
6

Programming
Before
backed up against power failure.
In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, latched type counters are backed up by the battery built into the PLC.
In FX3G PLCs, latched type counters are backed up by the EEPROM built into the PLC.
→ For details on backup methods against power failure, refer to Section 2.6.
• A 32-bit counter can be used as a 32-bit data register. 32-bit counters cannot be handled as target devices
in 16-bit applied instructions. 7

Instruction
Basic
• If data beyond the set value is written to the current value register by DMOV instruction, etc., the counter
continues counting and the contact does not change when the next counting input is received.

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

105
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.6 Counter [C]

4.6.5 Set value specification method

1. 16-bit counter
1) Specification by constant (K)
Constant (decimal constant): 1 to 32767
X003 100 counts
C0 K100

2) Indirect specification (D)

Counts to the indirectly specified value of the defined data

X001 register, previously set by a digital switch.
FNC 12 K100 D 5 Note that the set value of a latched (battery backed) type
MOV register is not held correctly sometimes when the battery
voltage becomes low.
X003
C0 D5

D5 = 100
100 counts

2. 32-bit counter
1) Specification by constant (K)
Constant (decimal constant):
X003 −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
C200 K43,210 43210 counts

2) Indirect specification (D)

X001 Pairs of data registers are used for indirect specification.

FNC 12 K43210 D5(D6) Use a 32-bit instruction for writing the set value, and make
DMOV sure that the latter of paired registers (D6 in this example)
does not overlap with other programs because it is not
X003 shown in ladder format.
C200 D5(D6)

4.6.6 Response speed of counters

Counters execute counting by cyclic operating for contact operations of internal signals X, Y, M, S, C, etc.
inside the PLC.
For example, when X011 is specified as counting input, its ON duration and OFF duration should be longer
than the cycle time of the PLC (which is tens of Hz or less usually).
On the other hand, high speed counters described later execute counting as an interrupt processing for
specific input, and can execute counting at 5 k to 6 kHz regardless of the cycle time.
→ For high speed counters, refer to Section 4.7.

106
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.6 Counter [C]

1
4.6.7 Handling counters as numeric devices

Introduction
Counters use output contacts operating in accordance with the set value or use the counter value (current
value) as numeric data for control.
The figure below shows the structure of the current value register of a counter. When a counter number is
specified in an operand of an applied instruction in execution, the counter is handled as a device storing 16-bit
or 32-bit data in the same way as data register.
2

Overview
A 32-bit counter is handled as 32-bit data.

1. Structure of register storing current value of counter

1) 16-bit

High 16 bits Low Available numeric value range 3

order order 16-bit counter: 0 to 32767

List
Instruction
b15 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 b0 32-bit counter: −2,147,483,648 to
+2,147,483,647
16384
8192
4096
2048
1024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
*1
Sign
0: Positive
number
1: Negative
number
*1. The sign is valid only when a counter is handled as a substitute for data register. 4

in Detail
Devices
2) 32-bit

High 32 bits Low

order 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 order
b31 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 b0
5
1,073,741,824
536,870,912
268,435,456
134,217,728
67,108,864
33,554,432
16,777,216
8,388,608
4,194,304
2,097,152
1,048,576
524,288
262,144
131,072
65536
32768
16384
8192
4096
2048
1024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Sign

Constant
Device &
Specified the
0: Positive
number
1: Negative
number

6
2. Examples in applied instructions

Programming
Before
For the full use of counters as numeric devices, refer to the explanation of applied instructions later.

FNC 12 C 20 D 10 C20 (current value) is transferred to D10.

MOV

FNC 10 A decimal integer "100" is compared with C30

7
K100 C 30 M 0

Instruction
Basic
CMP (current value), and the result is output to M0 to M2.

The contents of C10 (current value) are converted into

FNC 18 BCD, and output to Y000 to Y007.
BCD C 10 K2Y000
(Seven-segment display unit is controlled.)

FNC 22 C 5 K 2 D4(D5)
C5 (current value) is multiplied by 2, and transferred 8
MUL to (D5, D4).
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

FNC 12 C200 D0(D1) C 200 (current value) is transferred to (D1, D0).

DMOV
*1
9
C200 (current value) is compared with a decimal
FNC 11 integer zone 100 to 20000, and the result is output to
DZCP K100 K20000 C200 M10
M10 and M12.
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

*1. Make sure to use 32-bit operation instructions for 32-bit counters.

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

107
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC)

4.7 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC)

4.7.1 Types and device numbers of high speed counters

1. Types of high speed counters

The main unit has built-in 32-bit high speed bi-directional counters (1-phase 1-count, 1-phase 2-count and 2-
phase 2-count). These high speed counters are classified into hardware type or software type according to
the counting method. Some high speed counters are capable of using an external reset input terminal and an
external start input terminal (for counting start).

2. Classification of high speed counters according to counting method

• Hardware counters: These types of counters execute counting by hardware, but may be switched to
software counters depending on the operating condition.
→ For the condition handled as software counters,
refer to Subsection 4.7.9.
• Software counters: These types of counters execute counting as CPU interrupt processing.
It is necessary to use each software counter within both limitations of maximum
response frequency and total frequency.
→ For the limitation of response frequency depending on the total frequency,
refer to Subsection 4.7.10.

3. Types of high speed counters and input signal forms

The table below shows the types (1-phase 1-count, 1-phase 2-count and 2-phase 2-count) and input signals
(waveforms) of high speed counters.
Input signal form Counting direction
Down-count or up-count is specified
by turning on or off M8235 to
1-phase
UP/DOWN M8245.
1-count input
ON: Down-counting
OFF: Up-counting
A counter executes up-count or
+1 +1 +1 down-count as shown on the left.
1-phase UP The counting direction can be
2-count input −1 −1 −1 checked with M8246 to M8250.
DOWN ON: Down-counting
OFF: Up-counting

A phase A phase
1 edge +1 +1 −1 −1
A counter automatically executes
count B phase B phase up-count or down-count according to
Up-counting Down-counting changes in the input status of the A/
2-phase
B phase as shown on the left.
2-count +1 +1 +1 +1 +1 −1 −1 −1 −1 −1
The counting direction can be
input A phase A phase checked with M8251 to M8255.
4 edge
ON: Down-counting
count B phase B phase OFF: Up-counting
+1 +1 +1 +1 −1 −1 −1 −1
Up-counting Down-counting

4. Cautions on counterpart equipment connected to high speed counter inputs

General-purpose inputs X000 to X007 are used for high speed counter inputs. An encoder*1 adopting the
output method shown in the table below can be connected depending on the connected terminal.
Encoders adopting the voltage output method and absolute encoders cannot be connected to high speed
counter inputs.
→ For the wiring, refer to the Hardware Edition of the main unit.
Output method of encoder which can be directly connected Open collector transistor output method compatible with 24V
to input terminal in main unit DC
Output method of encoder which can be directly connected Differential line driver output method
to input terminal in FX3U-4HSX-ADP (output voltage: 5V DC or less)

*1. A rotary encoder adopting the output method shown above may not operate correctly depending on
the electrical compatibility. Check the specifications before connecting an encoder.

108
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC)

1
5. High speed counter device list

Introduction
External reset External start
Classification Counter No. Edge count Data length
input terminal input terminal
C235*2
C236*2
C237*2
−
2
Hardware C238*2

Overview
Not provided Not provided
counter*1 C239*2
1-phase C240*2 32-bit
1-count *3 bi-directional
C244(OP)
input − counter
C245(OP)*3
C241 3
C242 − Provided*5 Not provided

List
Instruction
Software counter C243
C244*3
− Provided*5 Provided
C245*3
Hardware C246*2
− Not provided Not provided
counter*1
1-phase C248(OP)*2*3
C247
32-bit 4
2-count − bi-directional Provided*5 Not provided

in Detail
Devices
input Software counter C248*3 counter
C249
− Provided*5 Provided
C250
1*4
C251*2 Not provided
Hardware 4*4
counter*1
C253*2
1*4
Provided*5
Not provided
5
4*4

Constant
Device &
Specified the
2-phase 32-bit
1*4
2-count C252 bi-directional Provided*5
input 4*4 counter Not provided
1*4
Software counter C253(OP)*6 Not provided
4*4
C254 1*4
Provided*5 Provided
6
C255 4*4

Programming
Before
*1. They are handled as software counters depending on the operating condition. When they are handled
as software counters, they have limitations on both maximum response frequency and total
frequency.
→ For the condition handled as software counters,
refer to Subsection 4.7.9. 7
→ For the total frequency, refer to Subsection 4.7.10.

Instruction
Basic
*2. Cautions on wiring should be considered for these high speed counters.
→ For the wiring, refer to the Hardware Edition of the main unit.
*3. C244, C245 and C248 are usually used as software counters, but can be used as hardware counters
C244 (OP), C245 (OP) and C248 (OP) by combining a special auxiliary relay (M8388, M8390 to
M8392). 8
→ For the method to switch the counter function, refer to Subsection 4.7.7.
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

*4. 2-phase 2-input counter is usually 1 edge count counter, but can be used as a 4 edge count counter by
combining a special auxiliary relay (M8388, M8198 or M8199).
→ For the method to use a 2-phase 2-input 4 edge count counter,
refer to Subsection 4.7.8.
*5. The external reset input is usually reset by turning ON, but can be changed to be reset by turning OFF
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

by combining special auxiliary relays (M8388 and M8389).

→ For the method to change the logic of the external reset input, refer to Subsection 4.7.6.
*6. The counter C253 is usually used as a hardware counter, but can be used as the counter C253 (OP)
not equipped with reset input by combining special auxiliary relays (M8388 and M8392).
In this case, C253 (OP) is handled as a software counter.
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

109
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC)

Notation of high speed counter devices

For some high speed counters in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, the assignment of input terminals will switch when
special auxiliary relays are used.
Such high speed counter devices are classified below. Note that description as (OP) is not available in
programming.
Standard Device Standard Device
Switched Device Numbers Switched Device Numbers
Numbers Numbers
C244 C244(OP) C248 C248(OP)
C245 C245(OP) C253 C253(OP)

110
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC)

1
4.7.2 Input assignment for high speed counters

Introduction
Inputs X000 to X007 are assigned as shown in the table below according to each high speed counter number.
When a high speed counter is used, the filter constant of a corresponding input number in the main unit
automatically changes (X000 to X005: 5 µs, X006 and X007: 50 µs). Input terminals not used for high speed
counters, however, can be used as general inputs.
When FX3U-4HSX-ADP unit is connected to an FX3U PLC, input terminals inside bold-line frames in the table
2

Overview
below are assigned to the first FX3U-4HSX-ADP unit, and other input terminals are assigned to the second
FX3U-4HSX-ADP unit.
→ For the input specifications of the FX3U-4HSX-ADP, refer to the FX3U Hardware Edition.
→ For the input specifications of the main unit, refer to the Hardware Edition of the main unit.

Counter No.
Classifica-
tion X000 X001
Input terminal assignment
X002 X003 X004 X005 X006 X007
3

List
Instruction
C235*1 H/W*2 U/D
C236*1 H/W*2 U/D
*1 *2 U/D
C237 H/W
*1 *2 U/D
C238 H/W
C239 *1
H/W *2 U/D 4

in Detail
Devices
1-phase C240*1 H/W*2 U/D
1-count
C241 S/W U/D R
input
C242 S/W U/D R
C243 S/W U/D R
C244
*3
S/W
*2
U/D R S
U/D
5
C244(OP) H/W

Constant
Device &
Specified the
C245 S/W U/D R S
C245(OP)*3 H/W*2 U/D
C246*1 H/W*2 U D
C247 S/W U D R
1-phase
2-count
C248 S/W U D R 6
C248(OP)*1*3 H/W*2

Programming
Before
input U D
C249 S/W U D R S
C250 S/W U D R S
*1 *2 A B
C251 H/W

2-phase
C252 S/W A B R
7
C253*1 H/W*2 A B R
2-count

Instruction
Basic
input*4 C253(OP)*3 S/W A B
C254 S/W A B R S
C255 S/W A B R S

H/W: Hardware counter S/W: Software counter U: Up-counting input D: Down-counting input
A: A phase input B: B phase input R: External reset input S: External start input 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

*1. Cautions on wiring should be considered for these high speed counters.
→ For the wiring, refer to the Hardware Edition of the main unit.
*2. Hardware counters are switched to software counters when a comparison set/reset instruction for high
speed counter (DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ or DHSCT) is used.
The counter C253 is switched to a software counter when the logic of the external reset input signal is
reversed.
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

→ For the condition under which it is handled as a software counter, refer to Subsection 4.7.9.
*3. When a special auxiliary relay is driven in a program, the input terminals and their associated
functions are switched.
→ For the method to use a software counter as a hardware counter, refer to Subsection 4.7.7.
*4. In a 2-phase 2-count input counter, the edge count is usually 1. But the edge count can be set to 4 by
combining a special auxiliary relay.
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

→ For the method on how to use a 2-phase 2-count input counter with on edge count of 4,
refer to Subsection 4.7.8.

111
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC)

Restriction to overlap input numbers

• Inputs X000 to X007 are used for high speed counters, input interrupt, pulse catch, SPD/ZRN/DSZR/DVIT
instructions and general-purpose inputs. When assigning functions, there should be no overlap between
those input terminals.
For example, when C251 is used, X000 and X001 are occupied. As a result, "C235, C236, C241, C244,
C246, C247, C249, C252 and C254", "input interrupt pointers I000 and I101", "pulse catch contacts M8170
and M8171" and "SPD, ZRN, DSZR and DVIT instructions using X000 and/or X001" cannot be used.
• Since the FX3U-4HSX-ADP and FX3UC PLC main unit share the same assigned input terminal numbers,
only one of them may be used in operation. If both input terminals are used, intended operation is not
enabled because the inputs of the FX3U-4HSX-ADP and PLC main unit operate in an "OR" relationship.

4.7.3 Handling of high speed counters

1. 1-phase 1-count input

X010 • C235 counts "OFF→ ON" of the input X000 while X012
M8235 Down/up count is ON.
X011 • When X011 turns ON and then RST instruction is
RST C235 Reset executed, C235 is reset.
• The counting direction of the counters C235 to C245 is
X012 switched to down-count or up-count when M8235 to
C235 K-5
M8245 turns ON or OFF.

• C244 immediately starts counting when the input X006

X010
M8244 Down/up count turns ON while X012 is ON. The counting input is X000.
In this example, the set value is indirectly specified by
X011 the contents of data registers (D1 and D0).
RST C244 Reset • A high speed counter can be reset using X011 in a
X012
sequence as shown in the figure, but C244 immediately
C244 D0(D1) reset without any program when X001 is closed. So a
program with X011 is not necessary.
• The counting direction of the counters C235 to C245 is
Set value is (D1, D0)
switched to down-count or up-count when M8235 to
M8245 turns ON or OFF.

Operation example
The counter C235 shown above operates as follows:
X010 Up counting Down counting Up counting

X011 Reset input

X012 Start input

X000
Counting
input 5
4 4
C235 3 3
2 2
Current 1 1
value 0 0 0

−1
−2
When output has −3 −3
already been activated −4 −4
−5 −5
−6 −6
−7 −7
−8
C235 output contact

When counting with input X000, C235 executes up-count or down-count as an interrupt.
• When the current value of a counter increases from "−6" to "−5", the output contact is set. When the
current value decreases from "−5" to "−6", the output contact is reset.

112
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC)

1
• The current value increases or decreases without regard to the operation of the output contact. When a

Introduction
counter executes up-count from "+2,147,483,647", the counter value becomes "−2,147,483,648". In the
same way, when a counter executes down-count from "−2,147,483,648", the counter value becomes
"+2,147,483,647". (This type of counter is called a ring counter.)
• When the reset input X011 turns ON and RST instruction is executed, the current value of the counter is
reset to "0" and the output contact is restored.
• In a latch type high speed counter, the current value, output contact operation and reset status of the
2

Overview
counter are latched (battery backed) by the backup battery built in the PLC.

2. 1-phase 2-count input

These counters are 32-bit binary bi-directional counters, and the operation of the output contact for the
current value is equivalent to that in 1-phase 1-count input type high speed counters described above.
X011 • While X012 is ON, C246 executes up-count when the input 3
RST C246 X000 turns from OFF to ON, and executes down-count when

List
Instruction
the input X001 turns from OFF to ON.
X012
C246 D2(D3) • The up/down-count operation of C246 to C250 can be checked
with M8246 to M8250.
ON status: Down-counting
Set value is (D3,D2)
OFF status: Up-counting 4
• While X012 is ON, C249 immediately starts counting when the

in Detail
Devices
X011
RST C249 input X006 turns ON.
The up-count input is X000, and the down-count input is X001.
X012
• A high speed counter can be reset by X011 in a sequence as
C249 K1234
shown in the figure, but C249 is immediately reset without any
program when X002 is closed. So a program with X011 is not 5
necessary.

Constant
Device &
Specified the
• The up/down-count operation of C246 to C250 can be checked
with M8246 to M8250.
ON status: Down-counting
OFF status: Up-counting
6
3. 2-phase 2-count input

Programming
Before
These counters are 32-bit binary bi-directional counters, and the operation of the output contact for the
current value is equivalent to that in 1-phase high speed counters described above.
X011 • While X012 is ON, C251 counts the operation of the inputs
RST C251 X000 (A phase) and X001 (B phase) as interrupt.

X012
When X011 turns ON a RST instruction is executed and C251
is reset.
7
C251 K1234

Instruction
Basic
• When the current value becomes equivalent to or larger than
C251 the set value, Y002 turns ON. When the current value becomes
Y002 equivalent to or smaller than the set value, Y002 turns OFF.
M8251 • Y003 turns ON (for down-count) or OFF (for up-count)
Y003 according to the counting direction. 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

X011 • When X006 turns ON while X012 is ON, C254 immediately

RST C254 starts counting. Its counting inputs are X000 (A phase) and
X001 (B phase).
X012
C254 D0(D1) • In addition to reset by X011 in a sequence, C254 is reset
immediately when X002 turns ON. 9
C254
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

Y004 • When the current value becomes equivalent to or larger than

the set value (D1, D0), Y004 turns ON. When the current value
M8254 becomes equivalent to or smaller than the set value, Y004 turns
Y005 OFF.
• Y005 turns ON (for down-count) or OFF (for up-count)
according to the counting direction. 10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

113
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC)

• A 2-phase encoder generates outputs for the A phase and B phase by a phase difference of 90°. With
these outputs, a high speed counter automatically executes up-count and down-count as shown in the
figure below.
- When the counter is operating at the 1 edge count
A phase A phase
+1 +1 −1 −1
B phase B phase
Up-counting Down-counting
- When the counter is operating at the 4 edge count
+1 +1 +1 +1 +1 −1 −1 −1 −1 −1
A phase A phase

B phase B phase
+1 +1 +1 +1 −1 −1 −1 −1
Up-counting Down-counting
• The down/up-count operation of C251 to C255 can be checked with M8251 to M8255.
ON status: Down-counting
OFF status: Up-counting

4.7.4 Current value update timing and comparison of current value

1. Current value update timing

A high speed counter executes up-count or down-count when a pulse is input to its input terminal, but the
current value is updated at the timing shown in the table below. When using the current value of a hardware
counter in a MOV, CMP or applied instruction such as the comparison instruction, special care must be taken
since the current value update timing is affected by the ladder scans as shown in the table.
Current value update timing
Hardware counter When OUT or HCMOV instruction is executed for the counter
Software counter Every time a pulse is input

2. Comparison of the Current value

The following two methods are available to compare and output the current value of a high speed counter.
1) Using the comparison instruction (CMP), zone comparison instruction (ZCP) or comparison contact
instruction
When the comparison result is necessary during counting operation*1, comparison may be executed in
the main program if the HCMOV instruction is used just before the comparison instruction (CMP or ZCP)
or comparison contact instruction.
*1. If it is necessary to execute comparison to update an output contact with the high-speed counter's
changing value, use comparison instructions for high speed counters (HSCS, HSCR, HSZ or
HSCT).
2) Using comparison instructions for high speed counters (HSCS, HSCR, HSZ or HSCT)
The comparison instructions for high speed counters (HSCS, HSCR, HSZ and HSCT) execute a
comparison and output the comparison result during high speed counting. The number of times these
instructions can be used is limited as shown in the table below.
When an output relay is specified for the comparison result, the comparison result is directly updated at
the ON/OFF status of the output regardless of the output refresh by END instruction.
Mechanical operation delay (about 10 ms) cannot be avoided in a relay output type PLC. Use a transistor
output type PLC.
Instruction Limitation in number of instruction
HSCS
HSCR Can be used up to 32 times including HSCT instruction.
HSZ*1
HSCT*1 Can be used only once.

*1. When HSZ or HSCT instruction is used, the maximum response frequency and total frequency of
all software counters are affected.
→ For the maximum response frequency and total frequency of software counters,
refer to Subsection 4.7.10.

114
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC)

1
4.7.5 Related devices

Introduction
1. Devices used to switch the counting direction of 1-phase 1-count input counters
Type Counter No. Specifying device Up-counting Down-counting
C235
C236
M8235
M8236
2

Overview
C237 M8237
C238 M8238
C239 M8239
1-phase
C240 M8240 OFF ON
1-counting input
C241
C242
M8241
M8242
3

List
Instruction
C243 M8243
C244 M8244
C245 M8245

2. Devices used to check the counting direction of 1-phase 2-count input counters and
2-phase 2-count input counters 4

in Detail
Devices
Type Counter No. Monitoring device OFF ON
C246 M8246
C247 M8247
1-phase
C248 M8248
2-counting input
C249
C250
M8249
M8250
5
Up-counting Down-counting

Constant
Device &
Specified the
C251 M8251
C252 M8252
2-phase
C253 M8253
2-counting input
C254 M8254
C255 M8255
6
3. Devices used to switch the high speed counter function

Programming
Before
Device No. Name Description
Contact for changing function
M8388 Changes the function of high speed counter.
of high speed counter
Switches the logic of the external reset input.
M8389
(For details, refer to Subsection 4.7.6.) 7
M8390 Switches the function of C244. (For details, refer to Subsection 4.7.7.)

Instruction
Basic
M8391 Switches the function of C245. (For details, refer to Subsection 4.7.7.)
Function switching Switches the function of C248 and C253.
M8392 device (For details, refer to Subsection 4.7.7.)
Switches the edge count (between 1 and 4) of C251, C252 and C254.
M8198
(For details, refer to Subsection 4.7.8.) 8
Switches the edge count (between 1 and 4) of C253, C255 and C253 (OP).
M8199
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

(For details, refer to Subsection 4.7.8.)

4. Operation status of hardware counters and software counters

Device No. Name Description ON OFF

9
*1 Operation status of C235, C241, C244, C246, C247, C249, C251, C252 or C254
M8380
M8381*1 Operation status of C236
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

M8382*1 Operation status of C237, C242 or C245

M8383*1 Operation Operation status of C238, C248, C248(OP), C250, C253 or C255
Software
status Hardware
M8384*1 Operation status of C239 or C243 counter
flag
M8385*1
M8386*1
Operation status of C240
Operation status of C244(OP)
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

M8387*1 Operation status of C245(OP)

*1. Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN.

115
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC)

4.7.6 Changing the logic of external reset input signal

The counters C241 to C245, C247 to C250 and C252 to C255 are usually reset when the external reset input
turns ON.
By using the program shown below, the logic can be inverted so that these counters are reset when the
external reset input turns OFF.
Counter No. When inverting logic of external reset input signal Description

M8388 The logic of the external reset input is

C241 to C245 M8389 inverted so that the counters are reset
C247 to C250 when the input turns OFF.
C252 to C255 (The logic is inverted for all target
C2……
counters.)
K{{{

Caution
The counter C253 is switched to a software counter when the logic of the external reset input signal is
inverted.

4.7.7 Assignment of counter input terminal and switching of function

The assignment of the input terminal and the function of the software counters C244, C245, C248 and C253
are changed as shown below when combined with the following special auxiliary relays.
In a program, put a special auxiliary relay just before a target counter.
Counter No. When using software counter as hardware counter Description

M8388 • The counting input is changed from

M8390 X000 to X006.
C244(OP) • Reset input is not provided.
• Start input is not provided.
C244 • It operates as a hardware counter.
K{{{

M8388 • The counting input is changed from

M8391 X002 to X007.
C245(OP) • Reset input is not provided.
• Start input is not provided.
C245
• It operates as a hardware counter.
K{{{

M8388
M8392
• Reset input is not provided.
C248(OP)
• It operates as a hardware counter.
C248
K{{{

M8388
M8392
• Reset input is not provided.
C253(OP)
• It operates as a software counter.
C253
K{{{

116
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC)

1
4.7.8 How to use 2-phase 2-count input counters C251 to C255 with

Introduction
4 edge counting
For the 2-phase 2-count input counters C251 to C255, the edge count is usually set to 1. By using the
programs shown in the table below, the edge count may be set to 4.

Counter No.
When using 2-phase 2-count input counters with 4 edge
Description
2
counting

Overview
M8000
M8198
C251
C251
K{{{
3
1 edge count (before change)

List
Instruction
M8000 A phase
M8198 +1 +1
C252 B phase
C252 Up-counting
K{{{ 4

in Detail
Devices
M8000 A phase
M8199 −1 −1
C253 B phase
C253 Down-counting
K{{{
↓ 5
4 edge count (after change)

Constant
Device &
Specified the
M8000
M8199 +1 +1 +1 +1 +1
M8388 A phase
C253(OP) M8392
B phase
C253 +1 +1 +1 +1
Up-counting
6
K{{{

Programming
Before
−1 −1 −1 −1 −1
M8000
M8198 A phase
C254
B phase
C254
K{{{
−1 −1 −1 −1
Down-counting
7

Instruction
Basic
M8000
M8199
C255
C255
K{{{ 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

117
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC)

4.7.9 Conditions for hardware counters to be handled as software counters

High speed counters are classified into hardware counters and software counters. In some conditions,
however, hardware counters are handled as software counters.
In this case, use hardware counters within the range of maximum response frequency and total frequency as
determined for software counters.

Conditions under which counters are handled as software counters

Hardware
Condition in which hardware counters are handled as software counters
counter No.
Because hardware counters execute counting at the hardware level of the FX3U/FX3UC, they can
execute counting regardless of the total frequency.
However, when hardware counters are handled as software counters with the following conditions, their
maximum response frequency and total frequency are limited in the same way as the software counters.
Use M8380 to M8387 to check whether high speed counters are handled as hardware counters or
software counters.
• When DHSCS (FNC 53), DHSCR (FNC 54), DHSZ (FNC 55) or DHSCT (FNC280) instruction is used
for a hardware counter number, the hardware counter is handled as a software counter.
Example: C235

C235
C235 K{{{
C236
DHSCS K100 C235 Y000
C237
C238
In this case, C235 is handled as a software counter.
C239
C240
• When an index register is used for a counter number specified in DHSCS (FNC 53), DHSCR
C244(OP)
(FNC 54), DHSZ (FNC 55) or DHSCT (FNC280) instruction, all hardware counters are handled as
C245(OP)
software counters.
C246
Example: C235Z0
C248(OP)
C251
DHSCS K100 C235Z0 Y000
C253

• C253 (hardware counter) is handled as a software counter by inverting the logic using the external
reset input signal logic changing function.
Example: The logic of the C253 external reset input signal is inverted.
→For logic inversion of the external reset input signal, refer to Subsection 4.7.6.
M8388
M8389

C253
K{{{

118
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC)

1
4.7.10 Response frequency of high speed counters

Introduction
1. Response frequency of hardware counters
The table below shows the maximum response frequency of hardware counters.
When hardware counters are handled as software counters in some operating conditions, their maximum
response frequency becomes equivalent to that of software counters, and thus hardware counters are some 2
times subject to restrictions in total frequency.

Overview
→ For the conditions in which hardware counters are handled as software counters,
refer to the previous page.
Maximum response frequency
Counter type Counter No.
Main unit FX3U-4HSX-ADP
C235, C236, C237, C238, C239, C240 100 kHz 3
1-phase 1-counting input

List
Instruction
C244(OP), C245(OP) 10 kHz 200 kHz
1-phase 2-counting input C246, C248(OP) 100 kHz
2-phase 2-count- 1 edge count 50 kHz 100 kHz
C251, C253
ing input 4 edge count 50 kHz 100 kHz

2. Response frequency and total frequency of software counters 4

in Detail
Devices
The table below shows the maximum response frequency and total frequency of software counters.
When using the HSZ or HSCT instruction in a program, both the maximum response frequency and the total
frequency are limited for all software counters without regarding the operands of the instruction. When
examining a system or creating a program, consider the limitations, and use software counters within the
allowable range of maximum response frequency and total frequency.
→ For the conditions handled as software counters, refer to the previous page. 5
1) When special analog adapters and FX3U/FX3UC Series special function blocks/units are not used

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Response frequency and total frequency according to instructions used
When HSZ and HSCT
Following Magnifica- When only HSCT When only HSZ When both HSZ and HSCT
instructions are not
software tion for instruction is used instruction is used instructions are used
used
Software counter with calculating
Counter type total Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum
counter HSCS, HSCR,
HSZ or HSCT
instruction*1
frequency response
frequency
Total
frequency
response
frequency
Total
frequency
response
frequency
Total
frequency
response
frequency
Total
frequency 6
(kHz) (kHz) (kHz) (kHz)
(kHz) (kHz) (kHz) (kHz)

Programming
Before
C241,
C242, C235, C236,
C243, C237, C238, ×1 40 30
1-phase C244, C239, C240
1-counting input
C245
C244(OP), 40 - (Num-
30-(Number
7
− ×1 10 10 ber of
of instruc-

Instruction
Basic
C245(OP) instruc- 80− 60−
1.5×(Num tion)*2 1.5×(Num
C247, tion)*2
80 60 ber of ber of
1-phase C248, C246, instruc- instruc-
2-counting input C249,
×1 40 30
C248(OP) tion) tion)
C250
2- 1 edge
phase count C252,
×1 40 30 8
C253(OP),
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

2- (40-Num-
count- 4 edge C254,
C251, C253 (30-Number
ber of
ing count C255
×4 10 7.5 instruc-
of instruction)
input ÷4
tion) ÷ 4

*1. When an index register is added to a counter number specified by a HSCS, HSCR, HSZ or HSCT
instruction, all hardware counters are switched to software counters.
9
*2. The high speed counters C244 (OP) and C245 (OP) can count up to 10 kHz.
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

119
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC)

2) When special analog adapters and FX3U/FX3UC Series special function blocks/units are used
Counter type Response frequency and total frequency according to instruction use condition
When HSZ and HSCT
Following Magnifica- When only HSCT When only HSZ When both HSZ and HSCT
instructions are not
software tion for instruction is used instruction is used instructions are used
used
Software counter with calculating
counter HSCS, HSCR, total Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum
Total Total Total Total
HSZ or HSCT frequency response response response response
frequency frequency frequency frequency
instruction*1 frequency frequency frequency frequency
(kHz) (kHz) (kHz) (kHz)
(kHz) (kHz) (kHz) (kHz)
C241,
C242, C235, C236,
C243, C237, C238, ×1 30 25
1-phase C244, C239, C240
1-counting input
C245
C244(OP), 30 - (Num-
25-(Number
− ×1 10 10 ber of
of instruc-
C245(OP) instruc- 50− 50−
1.5×(Num tion)*2 1.5×(Num
C247, tion)*2
60 50 ber of ber of
1-phase C248, C246, instruc- instruc-
2-counting input C249,
×1 30 25
C248(OP) tion) tion)
C250
2- 1 edge
×1 30 25
phase count C252,
2- C253(OP), (30-Num-
count- 4 edge C254,
C251, C253 (25-Number
ber of
ing count C255
×4 7.5 6.2 instruc-
of instruction)
input ÷4
tion) ÷ 4

*1. When an index register is added to a counter number specified by a HSCS, HSCR, HSZ or HSCT
instruction, all hardware counters are switched to software counters.
*2. The high speed counters C244 (OP) and C245 (OP) can count up to 10 kHz.

3. Calculation of the total frequency

Total frequency ≥ Sum of "Response frequency of high speed counter ×
Magnification for calculating total frequency"

4. Calculation example
When only HSZ instruction is used 6 times in a program, the total frequency and response frequency are
calculated as follows in accordance with the columns for "When only HSZ instruction is used" shown above.
This calculation example is provided for a system configuration not including special analog adapters and
FX3U/FX3UC Series special function blocks/units.
Magnification
Input Maximum response frequency Used
Used high speed counter No. for calculating
frequency calculation instruction
total frequency
Operates as
C237 30 kHz 40 − 6 (times) = 34 kHz ×1
software counter HSZ
C241 20 kHz 40 − 6(times) = 34 kHz ×1 instruction × 6
C253(OP) Software counter times
4 kHz {40 − 6(times)} ÷ 4 = 8.5 kHz ×4
[4 edge count]

1) The total frequency is calculated as follows because HSZ instruction is used 6 times:
Total frequency = 80 − 1.5 × 6 = 71 kHz
2) The sum of the response frequencies of the high speed counters
being used is calculated as follows:
"30 kHz × 1[C237]" + "20 kHz × 1[C241]" + "4kHz × 4[C253(OP)]" = 66 kHz ≤ 71 kHz

120
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC)

1
4.7.11 Cautions on use

Introduction
• For a contact to drive the coil of a high speed counter, use a contact which is normally ON during high
speed counting.

Example: M8000 (RUN monitor NO contact)

X000
Input number corresponding to
C235 2
C235 C235

Overview
Program a contact which is If a number of input relay for counting is specified, high
normally ON during counting. speed counter cannot execute accurate counting.

• If the operation of a high speed counter is triggered by a device such as a switch, the counter may 3
malfunction due to extra noise from switch chattering or contact bounce.

List
Instruction
• The input filter of an input terminal for a high speed counter in the main unit is automatically set to 5 µs
(X000 to X005) or 50 µs (X006 and X007).
Accordingly, it is not necessary to use the REFF instruction or special data register D8020 (input filter
adjustment).
The input filter for input relays not being used for high speed counters remains at 10 ms (initial value). 4
• The inputs X000 to X007 are used for high speed counters, input interrupt, pulse catch, SPD/DSZR/DVIT/

in Detail
Devices
ZRN instructions and general-purpose inputs. There should be no overlap between each input number.
For example, when C251 is used, X000 and X001 are occupied. As a result, "C235, C236, C241, C244,
C246, C247, C249, C252 and C254", "input interrupt pointers I00* and I10*", "pulse catch contacts M8170
and M8171" and "SPD instruction using X000 and/or X001" cannot be used.
• When a counting pulse is not provided, none of the high speed counter output contacts will turn ON, even 5
if the PLC executes an instruction where "present value = set value."

Constant
Device &
Specified the
• Counting may be started or stopped for a high speed counter when the output coil (OUT C***) is set to ON
or OFF. Program this output coil in the main routine. If the output coil is programmed in a step ladder
(SFC) circuit, subroutine or interrupt routine, counting cannot be started or stopped until the step ladder or
routine is executed.
• Make sure that the signal speed for high speed counters does not exceed the response frequency 6
described above. If an input signal exceeds the response frequency, a WDT error may occur, or

Programming
Before
communication functions such as a parallel link may malfunction.
• When a high speed counter is reset by the RST instruction, it cannot count until the RST instruction is set
to OFF.
1) Program example
X010
7

Instruction
Basic
RST C235 C235 is reset while X010 turns ON.

2) Timing chart

X000
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

The current value does not change

3 even if pulses are input because the 3
Current 2 C235 reset instruction is valid. 2
value of C235 1 1

X010 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

RST
C235 C235 remains reset

"RST C235" is set to ON "RST C235" is set to OFF

because the contact turns ON. because the contact turns OFF.

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

121
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.7 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3U/FX3UC PLC)

• Write the following program to "reset only the current value of a high speed counter (and does not turn OFF
the contact)".
1) Program example
X010*
FNC 12 K0 C235 The current value of C235 is cleared (to "0").
DMOV

* When the driving contact is the continuous execution type, the current value of the counter is reset to "0"
at each scan while X010 remains ON.
2) Timing chart

X000

4
3 3
Current 2 2
value of C235 1 1

X010

Because X010 turns ON, Because the driving contact is the

"FNC12 DMOV" is executed. pulse execution type, C235 executes
The current value of C235 is counting normally after that.
reset to "0".

• Write the following program to "turn OFF the contact and reset the current value of a high speed counter".
1) Program example
X010*
RST C235 ----- A

M8001
RST C235 ----- B
RUN Monitor
(normally OFF)
* When the driving contact is the continuous execution type, the current value of the counter is reset to "0"
and the counter reset status is cleared at each scan while X010 remains ON.
2) Timing chart

X000

4
3 3
Current 2 2
value of C235 1 1
Because the reset instruction
is deactivated, C235 executes
X010 counting.

RST
C235

Counter is reset Counter reset instruction is

(part A in above deactivated
program). (part B in above program).

122
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3G PLCs)

1
4.8 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3G PLCs)

Introduction
4.8.1 Types and device numbers of high speed counters

1. Types of high speed counters

2

Overview
The main unit has built-in 32-bit high speed bi-directional counters (1-phase 1-count, 1-phase 2-count and 2-
phase 2-count). Some high speed counters are capable of using an external reset input terminal and an
external start input terminal (for counting start).

2. Classification of high speed counters according to counting method

These types of counters execute counting as CPU interrupt processing. 3
Observe both the restriction in response frequency for each counter and the restriction in total frequency

List
Instruction
when using high speed counters.
→ For the limitation of response frequency depending on the total frequency,
refer to Subsection 4.8.7.

3. Types of high speed counters and input signal forms

The table below shows the types (1-phase 1-count, 1-phase 2-count and 2-phase 2-count) and input signals 4
(waveforms) of high speed counters.

in Detail
Devices
Input signal form Counting direction
Down-count or up-count is specified
by turning on or off M8235 to
1-phase
UP/DOWN M8245.
1-count input
ON: Down-counting
OFF: Up-counting
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
A counter executes up-count or
+1 +1 +1 down-count as shown on the left.
1-phase UP The counting direction can be
2-count input −1 −1 −1 checked with M8246 to M8250.
DOWN ON: Down-counting
OFF: Up-counting 6
A counter automatically executes

Programming
Before
up-count or down-count according to
A phase A phase changes in the input status of the A/
2-phase +1 +1 −1 −1 B phase as shown on the left.
2-count input B phase B phase The counting direction can be
Up-counting Down-counting checked with M8251 to M8255.
ON: Down-counting
OFF: Up-counting
7

Instruction
Basic
4. Cautions on counterpart equipment connected to high speed counter inputs
General-purpose inputs X000 to X007 are used for high speed counter inputs. An encoder*1 adopting the
output method shown in the table below can be connected depending on the connected terminal.
Encoders adopting the voltage output method and absolute encoders cannot be connected to high speed
counter inputs. 8
→ For the wiring, refer to the Hardware Edition of the main unit.
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Output method of encoder which can be directly connected Open collector transistor output method compatible with 24V
to input terminal in main unit DC

*1. A rotary encoder adopting the output method shown above may not operate correctly depending on
the electrical compatibility. Check the specifications before connecting an encoder.
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

123
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3G PLCs)

5. High speed counter device list

External reset External start
Classification Counter No. Data length
input terminal input terminal
C235
C236
C237
Not provided Not provided
C238
C239 32-bit
1-phase
C240 bi-directional
1-count input
C241 counter
C242 Provided Not provided
C243
C244
Provided Provided
C245
C246
Not provided Not provided
C248(OP)*1 32-bit
1-phase C247 bi-directional Provided Not provided
2-count input C248 counter
C249
Provided Provided
C250
C251
C253(OP)*1 Not provided Not provided
C254(OP)*2 32-bit
2-phase
C252 bi-directional
2-count input Provided Not provided
C253 counter
C254
Provided Provided
C255

*1. C248 and C253 are usually used as counters having reset input, but can be used as counters C248
(OP) and C253 (OP) not having reset input when used together with special auxiliary relays M8388
and M8392.
→ For the method to switch the counter function, refer to Subsection 4.8.7.
*2. C254 is usually used as a counter having reset input and start input, but can be used as a counter
C254 (OP) not having reset input or start input when used together with special auxiliary relays M8388
and M8395.
→ For the method to switch the counter function, refer to Subsection 4.8.6.

Notation of high speed counter devices

In some high speed counters in FX3G PLCs, the input terminal assignment is changed over when used
together with special auxiliary relays.
Such high speed counter devices are classified below. Note that description as (OP) is not available in
programming.
Standard Device
Switched Device Numbers
Numbers
C248 C248(OP)
C253 C253(OP)
C254 C254(OP)

124
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3G PLCs)

1
4.8.2 Input assignment for high speed counters

Introduction
Inputs X000 to X007 are assigned as shown in the table below according to each high speed counter number.
When a high speed counter is used, the filter constant of a corresponding input number in the main unit
automatically changes (X000, X001, X003 and X004: 10 µs, X002, X005, X006 and X007: 50 µs). Input
terminals not used for high speed counters, however, can be used as general inputs.
→ For the input specifications of the main unit, refer to the Hardware Edition of the main unit.
2

Overview
Input terminal assignment
Counter No.
X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 X005 X006 X007
C235 U/D
C236 U/D
C237 U/D 3
C238 U/D

List
Instruction
1-phase C239 U/D
1-count C240 U/D
input C241 U/D R
C242 U/D R
C243 U/D R 4
C244 U/D R S

in Detail
Devices
C245 U/D R S
C246 U D
C247 U D R
1-phase C248 U D R
2-count
input C248(OP) U D 5
C249 U D R S

Constant
Device &
Specified the
C250 U D R S
C251 A B
C252 A B R
2-phase C253 A B R
2-count C253(OP) A B 6
input C254 A B R S

Programming
Before
C254(OP) A B
C255 A B R S

U: Up-counting input D: Down-counting input A: A phase input

B: B phase input R: External reset input S: External start input
7

Instruction
Basic
Restriction to overlap input numbers

• Inputs X000 to X007 are used for high speed counters, input interrupt, pulse catch, SPD/ZRN/DSZR
instructions and general-purpose inputs. When assigning functions, there should be no overlap between
those input terminals.
For example, when C251 is used, X000 and X001 are occupied. As a result, "C235, C236, C241, C244, 8
C246, C247, C249, C252 and C254", "input interrupt pointers I000 and I101", "pulse catch contacts M8170
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

and M8171" and "SPD, ZRN and DSZR instructions using X000 and/or X001" cannot be used.

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

125
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3G PLCs)

4.8.3 Handling of high speed counters

High speed counters in FX3G PLCs operate in the same way as high speed counters in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
For details, refer to the following.
→ 4.7.3 Handling of high speed counters

4.8.4 Current value update timing and comparison of current value

1. Current value update timing

When pulses are input to an input terminal for a high-speed counter, the high-speed counter executes up-
counting or down-counting. The current values of devices are updated when counting is input.

2. Comparison of the Current value

The following two methods are available to compare and output the current value of a high speed counter.
1) Using the comparison instruction (CMP), zone comparison instruction (ZCP) or comparison contact
instruction
Use the comparison instruction (CMP), band comparison instruction (ZCP) or contact comparison
instruction if the comparison result is necessary at counting. Use these instructions only when high-speed
processing is not required because these instructions are processed in the operation cycle of the PLC,
and operation delay is generated before the comparison output result is obtained.
If it is necessary to execute comparison to update an output contact with the high-speed counter's
changing value, use comparison instructions for high speed counters HSCS, HSCR and HSZ.
2) Using comparison instructions for high speed counters (HSCS, HSCR or HSZ)
The comparison instructions for high speed counters (HSCS, HSCR and HSZ) execute a comparison and
output the comparison result during high speed counting. The number of times these instructions can be
used is limited as shown in the table below.
When an output relay is specified for the comparison result, the comparison result is directly updated at
the ON/OFF status of the output regardless of the output refresh by END instruction.
Mechanical operation delay (about 10 ms) cannot be avoided in a relay output type PLC. Use a transistor
output type PLC.
Instruction Limitation in number of instruction
HSCS
HSCR Can be used up to 6 times.
HSZ

4.8.5 Related devices

1. Devices used to switch the counting direction of 1-phase 1-count input counters
Type Counter No. Specifying device Up-counting Down-counting
C235 M8235
C236 M8236
C237 M8237
C238 M8238
C239 M8239
1-phase
C240 M8240 OFF ON
1-counting input
C241 M8241
C242 M8242
C243 M8243
C244 M8244
C245 M8245

126
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3G PLCs)

1
2. Devices used to check the counting direction of 1-phase 2-count input counters and

Introduction
2-phase 2-count input counters
Type Counter No. Monitoring device OFF ON
C246 M8246
C247 M8247
1-phase
2-counting input
C248 M8248 2
C249 M8249

Overview
C250 M8250
Up-counting Down-counting
C251 M8251
C252 M8252
2-phase
C253 M8253
2-counting input
C254 M8254 3
C255 M8255

List
Instruction
3. Devices used to switch the high speed counter function
Device No. Name Description
Contact for changing function
M8388
of high speed counter
Changes the function of high speed counter.
4
Switches the function of C248 and C253.

in Detail
Devices
M8392 Function switching (For details, refer to Subsection 4.8.6.)
device
M8395 Switches the function of C254. (For details, refer to Subsection 4.8.6.)

4.8.6 Assignment of counter input terminal and switching of function

5
When the counters C248, C253 and C254 are combined with the following special auxiliary relays, the

Constant
Device &
Specified the
allocation of the input terminals and functions are changed.
In a program, put a special auxiliary relay just before a target counter.
When using assignment of counter input terminal and
Counter No. Description
switching of function

M8388 6
M8392

Programming
Before
C248(OP) • Reset input is not provided.
C248
K

M8388
M8392 7

Instruction
Basic
C253(OP) • Reset input is not provided.
C253
K

M8388 • The input count (2-phase 2-count)

M8395 changes as follows:
Phase A: Changes from X000 to X006.
8
C254(OP)
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Phase B: Changes from X001 to X007.

C254 • Reset input is not provided.
K


• Start input is not provided.

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

127
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3G PLCs)

4.8.7 Response frequency of high speed counters

1. Response frequency and overall frequency

When any of the following functions/instructions is used, the overall frequency is restricted without regard to
the operand of the instruction.
Consider this restriction when examining the system or creating programs, and observe the specified overall
frequency range.
• When two or more high speed counters are used
• When the HSCS, HSCR, HSZ, PLSY, PLSR, DSZR, TBL, ZRN, PLSV, DRVI or DRVA instruction is used
• When the pulse width/pulse period measurement function is used.
Overall frequency determined by condition of used instruction
Response
Counter type When HSCS, HSCR or HSZ When HSCS, HSCR or HSZ instruction
frequency
instruction is not used is used
C235, C236, C238,
1-phase C239, C241 60kHz
1-counting
input C237, C240, C242,
10kHz 200 kHz
C243, C244, C245 60 kHz
1-phase C246, C248(OP) 60kHz - (Number of positioned axes*1
- (Number of positioned axes*1 x 5 kHz)
2-counting C247, C248, + Number of pulse width/period
- (Number of pulse width/period
input 10kHz measurement inputs)
C249,C250 measurement inputs x 20 kHz)
x 40 kHz
2-phase C251, C253(OP) 30kHz
2-counting C252, C253, C254,
input 5kHz
C254(OP), C255

*1. Number of axes used in the following positioning instructions:

PLSY (FNC 57), PLSR (FNC 59), DSZR (FNC150), TBL (FNC152), ZRN (FNC156), PLSV (FNC157),
DRVI (FNC158), DRVA (FNC159)

2. Calculation of the total frequency

Obtain the overall frequency using the following expression:

Total frequency ≥ [(Sum of used frequency of 1-phase counters) + (Sum of used

frequency of 2-phase counters)]

3. Calculation example
Example1: When HSCS, HSCR or HSZ instruction is not used, and instructions related to positioning (DRVI
instruction [Y000] and DRVA instruction [Y001]) are used

Overall frequency: 200 kHz - (2 axes x 40 kHz) = 120 kHz

<Counter No.> <Contents of use>

C235(1-phase 1-counting) 50 kHz is input.
C236(1-phase 1-counting) 50 kHz is input.
C237(1-phase 1-counting) 10 kHz is input.
C253(2-phase 2-counting) 5 kHz is input.
Total115kHz ≤ 120kHz(Overall frequency)

Example2: When HSCS, HSCR or HSZ instruction is not used, and instructions related to positioning (DRVI
instruction [Y000] are used, Number of pulse width/pulse period measurement inputs(X003)

Overall frequency: 200 kHz - [(1 axes + 1 input) x 40 kHz] = 120 kHz

<Counter No.> <Contents of use>

C235(1-phase 1-counting) 50 kHz is input.
C236(1-phase 1-counting) 50 kHz is input.
Total100kHz ≤ 120kHz(Overall frequency)

128
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3G PLCs)

1
4.8.8 Cautions on use

Introduction
• For a contact to drive the coil of a high speed counter, use a contact which is normally ON during high
speed counting.
Example: M8000 (RUN monitor NO contact)
X000
Input number corresponding to
C235 2

Overview
C235 C235

Program a contact which is If a number of input relay for counting is specified, high
normally ON during counting. speed counter cannot execute accurate counting.

• If the operation of a high speed counter is triggered by a device such as a switch, the counter may 3
malfunction due to extra noise from switch chattering or contact bounce.

List
Instruction
• The input filter of an input terminal for a high speed counter in the main unit is automatically set to 10 µs
(X000, X001, X003, X004) or 50 µs (X002, X005, X006, X007).
Accordingly, it is not necessary to use special data register D8020 (input filter adjustment).
The input filter for input relays not being used for high speed counters remains at 10 ms (initial value).
• The inputs X000 to X007 are used for high speed counters, input interrupt, pulse catch, SPD/DSZR/ZRN 4
instructions and general-purpose inputs. There should be no overlap between each input number.

in Detail
Devices
For example, when C251 is used, X000 and X001 are occupied. As a result, "C235, C236, C241, C244,
C246, C247, C249, C252 and C254", "input interrupt pointers I00* and I10*", "pulse catch contacts M8170
and M8171", "SPD instruction using X000 and/or X001" and "pulse width/pulse period measurement
contacts M8076 and M8077" cannot be used.
• When a counting pulse is not provided, none of the high speed counter output contacts will turn ON, even 5
if the PLC executes an instruction where "present value = set value."

Constant
Device &
Specified the
• Counting may be started or stopped for a high speed counter when the output coil (OUT C***) is set to ON
or OFF. Program this output coil in the main routine. If the output coil is programmed in a step ladder
(SFC) circuit, subroutine or interrupt routine, counting cannot be started or stopped until the step ladder or
routine is executed.
• Make sure that the signal speed for high speed counters does not exceed the response frequency 6
described above. If an input signal exceeds the response frequency, a WDT error may occur, or the

Programming
Before
communication functions such as a parallel link may malfunction.
• When a high speed counter is reset by the RST instruction, it cannot count until the RST instruction is set
to OFF.
1) Program example
X010
7

Instruction
Basic
RST C235 C235 is reset while X010 turns ON.

2) Timing chart

X000
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

The current value does not change

3 even if pulses are input because the 3
Current 2 C235 reset instruction is valid. 2
value of C235 1 1

X010 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

RST
C235 C235 remains reset

"RST C235" is set to ON "RST C235" is set to OFF

because the contact turns ON. because the contact turns OFF.
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

129
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.8 High Speed Counter [C] (FX3G PLCs)

• Write the following program to "reset only the current value of a high speed counter (and does not turn OFF
the contact)".
1) Program example
X010*
FNC 12 K0 C235 The current value of C235 is cleared (to "0").
DMOV

* When the driving contact is the continuous execution type, the current value of the counter is reset to "0"
at each scan while X010 remains ON.
2) Timing chart

X000

4
3 3
Current 2 2
value of C235 1 1

X010

Because X010 turns ON, Because the driving contact is the

"FNC12 DMOV" is executed. pulse execution type, C235 executes
The current value of C235 is counting normally after that.
reset to "0".

• Write the following program to "turn OFF the contact and reset the current value of a high speed counter".
1) Program example
X010*
RST C235 ----- A

M8001
RST C235 ----- B
RUN Monitor
(normally OFF)
* When the driving contact is the continuous execution type, the current value of the counter is reset to "0"
and the counter reset status is cleared at each scan while X010 remains ON.
2) Timing chart

X000

4
3 3
Current 2 2
value of C235 1 1
Because the reset instruction
is deactivated, C235 executes
X010 counting.

RST
C235

Counter is reset Counter reset instruction is

(part A in above deactivated
program). (part B in above program).

130
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.9 Data Register and File Register [D]

1
4.9 Data Register and File Register [D]

Introduction
Data registers are devices for storing numeric data. File registers are handled as the initial values of data
registers.
Each data register or file register stores 16-bit data (whose most significant bit specifies the positive or
negative sign). Combined two data registers or file registers can store 32-bit numeric data (whose most 2
significant bit specifies the positive or negative sign).

Overview
→ For the functions and operations of file registers, refer to Subsection 4.9.4.

4.9.1 Numbers of data registers and file registers

The table below shows numbers of data registers and file registers. (Numbers are assigned in decimal.) 3

List
Instruction
1. FX3U/FX3UC PLC
Data registers
Latched (battery backed) Fixed latched (battery File registers
General type backed) type (latched (battery
Special type backed) type)
type (backed up by battery
against power failure)
(backed up by battery
against power failure) 4

in Detail
Devices
D0 to D199 D200 to D511 D512 to D7999 D8000 to D8511 D1000*4 and later
200 points*1 312 points*2 7488 points*3*4 512 points 7000 points maximum

2. FX3G PLCs

Latched type
Data registers File registers
(latched (EEPROM
5
General type General type Special type keep) type)

Constant
Device &
Specified the
(EEPROM keep)
D0 to D127 D128 to D1099 D1100 to D7999 D8000 to D8511 D1000*4 and later
128 points 972 points *5 512 points
6900 points 7000 points maximum

*1. This area is not latched (battery backed). It can be changed to the latched (battery backed) area by
setting parameters. 6
*2. This area is latched (battery backed). It can be changed to the non-latched (non-battery-backed) area

Programming
Before
by setting parameters.
*3. The latch (battery backup) characteristics cannot be changed using parameters.
*4. Data registers D1000 and later can be used as file registers in units of 500 points by setting
parameters.
7
*5. These registers can be changed to the latched type by the parameter setting when the optional

Instruction
Basic
battery is used. However, the latched range cannot be set.

When computer link PCs or parallel link is used, some data registers are occupied for the link.
→ Refer to the Data Communication Edition.

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

131
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.9 Data Register and File Register [D]

4.9.2 Structures of data registers and file registers

1) 16-bit type
One (16-bit) data register or file register can store a numeric value within the range from -32768 to
+32767.
High D 0 (16 bits) Low
order 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 order
b15 16384 b0
8192
4096
2048
1024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Sign
0: Positive
number
1: Negative
number
A numeric value can be read from or written to a data register by an applied instruction usually.
Or a numeric value can be directly read from or written to a data register from a display unit, display
module, or programming tool.
2) 32-bit type
Two serial data registers or file registers can express 32-bit data.
- A data register with a larger device number handles high-order bits, and a data register with a smaller
device number handles low-order bits.
- In the index type, V handles high-order bits, and Z handles low-order bits.
Two data registers or file registers can store a numeric value within the range from -2,147,483,648 to
+2,147,483,647.

High D1 (high-order 16 bits) D0 (low-order 16 bits) Low

order 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 order
b31 b0
1,073,741,824
536,870,912
268,435,456
134,217,728
67,108,864
33,554,432
16,777,216
8,388,608
4,194,304
2,097,152
1,048,576
524,288
262,144
131,072
65536
32768
16384
8192
4096
2048
1024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Sign
0: Positive
number
1: Negative
number

In the case of 32-bit type, when a data register or file register on the low-order side (example: D0) is
specified, the subsequent number on the high-order side (example: D1) is automatically occupied.
Either an odd or even device number can be specified for the low-order side, but it is recommended to
specify an even device number for the low-order side under consideration of the monitoring function of
display units, display modules, and programming tools.

132
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.9 Data Register and File Register [D]

1
4.9.3 Functions and operation examples of data registers

Introduction
Data registers are devices for storing numeric data.
Each data register stores 16-bit data (whose most significant bit specifies the positive or negative sign). Two
data registers combined can store 32-bit numeric data (whose most significant bit specifies the positive or
negative sign). 2
1. General type and latched (battery backed) type data registers

Overview
• Once data is written to a data register it does not change unless other data overwrite it.
When the PLC mode switches from "RUN" to "STOP" or when the power is interrupted, however, all data
stored in general type data registers is cleared to "0".
If the special auxiliary relay M8033 has been driven in advance, data is held even when the PLC mode
switches from "RUN" to "STOP". 3

List
Instruction
• Latched (battery backed) type data registers hold their contents even when the PLC mode switches from
"RUN" to "STOP" or when the power is interrupted.
In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, the contents of data registers are backed up by the battery built into the PLC.
In FX3G PLCs, the contents of data registers are backed up by the EEPROM built into the PLC. When the
optional battery is installed, the battery backs up the contents of some general type data registers against
power failure. 4
The contents of data registers are backed up by the battery built in the PLC.

in Detail
Devices
→ For details on each backup method, refer to Section 2.6.
• When using fixed latched (battery backed) type data registers as general type data registers, provide the
following reset circuit by RST or ZRST instruction at the head step in a program.
Ex. FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
5
M8002
Data stored in D512 to D999 are

Constant
Device &
Specified the
FNC 40 D512 D999
ZRST cleared to "0".
Initial pulse
→ For file registers, refer to Subsection 4.8.4.

2. Special type data registers

• Special type data registers contain informative, special purpose data and are sometimes written to during
6

Programming
Before
program operation.
The contents of special type data registers are cleared to their initial values when restoring the power.
(Generally, these data registers are cleared to "0" at first, and then the initial values (if there are any) are
written by the system ROM.)
• For example, the watchdog timer time is set initially to D8000 by the system ROM. When changing the
contents, write a desired time to D8000 by transfer instruction MOV (FNC 12).
7

Instruction
Basic
M8002
FNC 12 K250 D8000 The watchdog timer is set to 250 ms.
MOV
Initial pulse
FNC 07 The watchdog timer is refreshed.
WDT
→ For the data backup characteristics of special data registers, refer to Section 2.6 and Chapter 36.
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

→ For the types and functions of special data registers, refer to Chapter 36.

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

133
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.9 Data Register and File Register [D]

3. Operation examples
Data registers can be used in various control with numeric data.
This section explains the operations of representative basic instructions and applied instructions among
various applications.
For the full use of data registers, refer to the explanation of applied instructions later.
1) Data registers in basic instructions
Specifying the set value of a timer or counter

T 2 D0 A counter or timer operates while regarding the

contents of a specified data register as its set value.

C 10 D 20

2) Data registers using applied instructions

Operation examples using MOV (FNC 12) instruction
a) Changing the current value of a counter

FNC 12 The current value of the counter C2 is changed to

D 5 C 2 the contents stored in D5.
MOV

b) Reading the current value of a timer or counter to a data register

FNC 12 The current value of the counter C10 is transferred

C 10 D 4 to D4.
MOV

c) Storing a numeric value to data registers

16-bit
FNC 12 K200 D 10 "200 (decimal value)" is transferred to D10.
MOV

32-bit
"80000 (decimal value)" is transferred to D10 and D11.
FNC 12 K80000 D10(D11) Because a numeric value larger than 32767 is 32-bit
DMOV data, a 32-bit operation is required. When a data
register on the low-order side (D10) is specified, a
data register on the high-order side (D11) is
automatically occupied.

d) Transferring the contents of a data register to another data register

FNC 12 D 10 D 20 The contents of D10 are transferred to D20.

MOV

3) Using unoccupied timers and counters as data registers

Operation examples using MOV (FNC 12) instruction
Timers and counters not in a program can be used as devices for storing 16-bit or 32-bit numeric values
(data registers).

FNC 12 K300 T 10 "300 (decimal value)" is transferred to T10.

MOV

FNC 12 The contents of T10 are transferred to the current

T 10 C 20 value register of C20.
MOV In this case, T10 is not working as a timer, but is
working as a data register.
C 20 K300

As in the case of data registers, when 16-bit timers or counters are used as 32-bit devices, two timers or
two counters (example: C1 and C0) store 32-bit numeric data.
One 32-bit counter (example: C200) can store 32-bit numeric data.

134
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.9 Data Register and File Register [D]

1
4.9.4 Functions and operation examples of file registers

Introduction
A file register is a device for setting the initial value of a data register with the same number.
Each file register stores 16-bit data (whose most significant bit specifies the positive or negative sign). Two
file registers combined can store 32-bit numeric data (whose most significant bit specifies the positive or
negative sign).
Up to 7000 data registers starting from D1000 can be specified as file registers by the parameter setting.
2

Overview
• In parameter settings, 1 to 14 blocks can be specified. One block secures 500 file registers, but uses the
program memory area by 500 steps.
• When some of data registers starting from D1000 are specified as file registers, the remaining data
registers not specified as file registers can be used as data registers. 3

List
Instruction
This section explains how to handle file registers.

1. Operation of file registers

• The contents of the file register area [A] set inside the built-in memory or memory cassette are batch-
transferred to the data memory area [B] inside the system RAM when the power of the PLC is turned ON or
when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN.
4

in Detail
Devices
When data registers are specified as file registers by the parameter setting, the contents of the file register
area [A] inside the program memory are transferred when the power of the PLC is turned ON or when the
PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN. This means that the contents changed in the data memory are
initialized every time when the PLC turns ON or when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN.
When it is necessary to save data changed in the data memory using a sequence program, update the file
register area [A] to the changed values by the same-number register update mode in BMOV 5
(FNC 15) instruction described later.

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Inside built-in memory Inside system
or RAM
memory cassette
D0

6
Program Data
memory When power memory
is turned ON

Programming
Before
Program/ When PLC Data register
comment mode is For devices D1000 and later specified
D1000 changed D1000 as operands in applied instructions other
500 points × from STOP than BMOV (FNC 15) , indirectly
File register to RUN Data register Write
14 blocks specified values for timers, counters or
7
maximum [A] [B] devices in RST instructions can be read
(7000 points Read from and written to the data register
Data register area [B] in the same way as general

Instruction
Basic
maximum)
D7999 data registers.

The remaining area can be used as data registers for general purpose.

• Difference between BMOV (FNC 15) instruction and other instructions

The table below shows the differences between the BMOV (FNC 15) instruction and other applied 8
instructions.
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Instruction Transferred contents Remarks

BMOV Data can be read from and written to the file
−
instruction register area [A] inside the program memory.
Applied
instructions Data can be read from and written to the data
Because the data register area [B] is provided 9
inside the system RAM in the PLC, its contents can
other than register area [B] inside the image memory in
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

be arbitrarily changed without being limited by the

BMOV the same way as general data registers.
optional memory format.
instruction

The data stored in data registers set as file registers are automatically copied from the file register area [A]
to the data register area [B] when restoring the power.
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

135
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.9 Data Register and File Register [D]

• When a file register is monitored from peripheral equipment, the data register area [B] inside the data
memory is read.
When "file register device current value change", "file register device forced reset" or "PLC memory all
clear" is executed from peripheral equipment, the file register area [A] inside the program memory is
changed, and then the data is automatically transferred to the data register area [B].
Accordingly, when file registers are to be overwritten, the program memory should be "built-in memory" or
"memory cassette whose protect switch is set to OFF". (The memory cassette cannot be overwritten from
peripheral equipment if its protect switch is set to ON.)

2. File register ↔ Data register <updating the same number registers by BMOV (FNC 15)
instruction>
When the same file register is specified for both S and D in BOMV (FNC 15) instruction, this
instruction specifies the same-number register update mode and executes the following operation:
Inside built-in Inside system Read
memory or RAM
memory cassette BMOV
OFF
D0 direction
Program Data M8024
inverse:
memory memory OFF
S‚ D‚ n
Program/ Data register X002
comment FNC 15
BMOVP D1100 D1100 K400
D1000 D1100 D1100
500 points × File register Data register Same file register number is specified.
Read
14 blocks
[A] [B]
maximum D1499 D1499 •When X002 is set to ON while BMOV instruction direction
(7000 points reverse flag M8024 is OFF, the contents of a file register
maximum) Data register
D7999 are transferred to the data register area [B] inside the data
memory as shown in the figure on the left.

Inside built-in Write

Inside system
memory or RAM BMOV
X001
memory cassette direction
D0 M8024
Program Data ON inverse:
memory memory ON
S‚ D‚ n
Program/ Data X003
FNC 15
comment register BMOVP D1100 D1100 K400
D1000 D1100 D1100
500 points × File Data Same file register number is specified.
14 blocks register Write register M8001 BMOV
maximum [A] [B] M8024 direction
D1499 D1499
(7000 points
Data register Always OFF inverse:
maximum)
D7999 during operation OFF

•When X003 is set to ON while BMOV instruction direction

reverse flag M8024 is ON, the contents of a data register
inside the data memory are written to the file register area
inside the program memory as shown in the figure on the
left.
• When updating the contents of a file register in the same-number update mode, make sure that the file
register numbers at S and D are equal to each other. Also make sure that the number of transfer
points specified by "n" does not exceed the file register area. If the number of transfer points exceeds the
file register area, an operation error occurs and the instruction is not executed.
• When S and D are indexed, the instruction is executed if the actual device number is within the
file register area and if the number of transfer points is within the file register area also.

136
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.9 Data Register and File Register [D]

1
3. Data register → File register <writing by BMOV (FNC 15) instruction>

Introduction
When a file register (D1000 or later) is specified for the destination of BMOV (FNC 15) instruction, it is
possible to directly write data to the file register area [A] inside the program memory.

Write
Inside built-in
memory or
Inside system
RAM M8024 2
memory cassette OFF

Overview
D0 S‚ D‚ n
Program Data D200
X001
memory memory FNC 15
BMOVP D200 D1100 K400
D599
Program/

Write
Data register
comment • When X001 is set to ON, data is transferred to
D1000
500 points ×
D1100 D1100
the data register area [B] and file register area [A] 3
File register Data register as shown in the figure on the left.

List
Instruction
14 blocks Write
maximum [A] [B] If data cannot be written to the file register area
D1499 D1499 [A] because the protect switch of the memory
(7000 points
maximum) Data register cassette is ON, data is written to only the data
D7999
register area [B].
When a file register device is specified for D 4
in a general applied instruction, data is

in Detail
Devices
transferred to only the data register area [B].
• A file register can be specified for S . If
D is the same as S , the same-number
register update mode is selected.
→ For the same-number register update mode, refer to the previous page. 5
• By controlling BMOV instruction direction reverse flag M8024 for BMOV (FNC 15) instruction, data can be

Constant
Device &
Specified the
transferred in both directions in one program (as shown in the figure below).
X001 BMOV S ‚ → D ‚ Batch transfer of data registers
M8024 direction M8024(OFF):D1100 D200
inverse
S‚ D‚ n 6
X000 S‚ ← D ‚ Batch transfer of data registers

Programming
Before
FNC 15
BMOVP D1100 D200 K400 and writing to file register
M8024(ON) :D1100 D200
M8001 BMOV
M8024
direction
Always OFF during
inverse: OFF
operation
7
Cautions on reading

Instruction
Basic
When a file register (D1000 or later) is specified for the source of BMOV (FNC 15) instruction and the same
number file register is not specified for the destination, the contents of the file register area [A] inside the
program memory are not read.
1) When a file register is specified for the source and a data register is specified for the destination 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Inside built-in Inside system Batch transfer of data registers

memory or RAM
memory cassette M8024
D0
D200 OFF
Program Data S‚ D‚ n
memory memory X000

Program/ D599 Data register

FNC 15
BMOVP D1100 D200 K400 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19
Read

comment
D1000 • When X000 is set to ON, the data register area
500 points × D1100 Data register
14 blocks
File register [B] is read as shown in the figure on the left.
maximum [A] [B]
D1499 • A file register can be specified for D . If
(7000 points
maximum)
D7999
Data register S is the same as D , the same-number
register update mode is selected.
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

→ For the same-number register update mode,

refer to the previous page.

137
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.9 Data Register and File Register [D]

2) When file registers of different device numbers are specified for the source and destination

Write
Inside built-in Inside system
memory or RAM M8024
memory cassette OFF
D0 S‚ D‚ n
Program Data
X001
memory memory FNC 15
BMOVP D1100 D1400 K100
Program/ Data register
comment • When X001 is set to ON, the contents of the data
D1000 D1100
500 points ×
Write register area [B] are transferred to the data

Write
File register Data register D1199 register area [B] and file register area [A] as
14 blocks D1400
D1400
maximum [A] [B] shown in the figure on the left.
(7000 points D1499 D1499 If data cannot be written to the file register area
maximum)
D7999
Data register [A] because the protect switch of the memory
cassette is ON, data is written to only the data
register area [B].

4.9.5 Cautions on using file registers

1. Cautions on using a memory cassette

When changing the contents of file registers stored in the memory cassette, confirm the following conditions:
• Set to OFF the protect switch in the memory cassette.
• It takes 66 to 132 ms to write data to one serial block (500 points) in the memory cassette (flash memory).
It takes 80 ms to write data to one serial block (500 points) in the memory cassette (EEPROM).

Execution of the program is paused during this period.

Because the watchdog timer is not refreshed at this time, it is necessary to take proper countermeasures
such as insertion of WDT instruction in a user program.*1
*1. Only FX3U/FX3UC PLC

2. Allowable number of writes to the memory

• Data can be written to the memory cassette up to 10,000 times, and to the memory (EEPROM) built in
FX3G PLCs up to 20,000 times.
When a continuous operation type instruction is used for data writing in a program, data is written to the
memory in every operation cycle of the PLC. To prevent this, make sure to use a pulse operation type
instruction (BMOVP).

3. Cautions on handling file registers in the same-number register update mode in BMOV (FNC
15) instruction
• When updating the contents of the same number file register, make sure that the file register number at
S and D are equal to each other.
• Make sure that the number of transfer points specified by "n" does not exceed the file register area.
• If the number of transfer points specified by "n" exceeds the file register area, an operation error (M8067)
occurs and the instruction is not executed.
• In the case of indexing
When S and D are indexed, the instruction is executed if the actual device number is within the
file register area and the number of transfer points is within the file register area also.

138
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER]

1
4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER]

Introduction
Extension registers (R) are the extended form of data registers (D).
The contents of extension registers (R) can be stored in extension file registers (ER). In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs,
extension file registers (ER) are available only while the memory cassette is attached.
2
4.10.1 Numbers of extension registers and extension file registers

Overview
The table below shows numbers of extension registers (R) and extension file registers (ER).
(Numbers are assigned in decimal.)

1. FX3U/FX3UC PLC
3
Extension register (R) Extension file register (ER)

List
Instruction
(latched [battery backed] type) (file type)
R0 to R32767 ER0 to ER32767
32768 points 32768 points*1

2. FX3G PLCs
4
Extension register (R) Extension file register (ER)

in Detail
Devices
(General type) (file type)
R0 to R23999 ER0 to ER23999
24000 points*2 24000 points*3

*1. Available only while a memory cassette is mounted (because they are stored in the flash memory
inside a memory cassette.) 5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
*2. These registers can be changed to the latched (battery backed) type by the parameter setting when
the optional battery is used. However, the latched range cannot be set.
*3. These registers are stored in the EEPROM built in the PLC, or in the EEPROM in the memory
cassette when the memory cassette is attached.

4.10.2 Data storage destination and access method

6

Programming
Before
Because the memory for storing data is different between extension registers and extension file registers, the
access method is different as shown in the table below:

Data storage destination

Device PLC Data storage destination 7

Instruction
Basic
FX3U/FX3UC Built-in RAM (latched [battery backed] area)
Extension register
FX3G Built-in RAM
FX3U/FX3UC Memory cassette (flash memory)
Extension file register
FX3G Built-in EEPROM or EEPROM in memory cassette

Difference in the access method

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Extension
Access method Extension file register
register
UOnly dedicated instructions
Reading in program 3
are enabled

Writing in program 3
UOnly dedicated instructions
are enabled
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

Display module 3 3
Test operation in online mode of GX Developer 3 ×
Data change
Batch writing by GX Developer 3 3
method
Computer link function 3 ×
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

139
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER]

4.10.3 Structures of extension registers and extension file registers

One extension register consists of 16 bits. Extension registers can be used in 16-bit and 32-bit applied
instructions in the same way as data registers.
1) 16-bit type
One extension register (consisting of 16 bits) can handle a numeric ranging from −32768 to +32767.
High R0, ER0 (16 bits) Low
order 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 order
b15 b0
16384
8192
4096
2048
1024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Sign
0: Positive
number
1: Negative
number
A numeric value is usually read from and written to an extension register by applied instructions.
However, a numeric value can also be directly read from and written to an extension register from a
display unit, display module, or programming tool.
2) 32-bit type
Two serial extension registers (consisting of 32 bits) can express a 32-bit numeric value ranging from
−2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647. (A larger number register handles high-order 16 bits, and a smaller
number register handles low-order 16 bits.)
High R1, ER1 (high-order 16 bits) R0, ER0 (low-order 16 bits) Low
order 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 order
b31 b0
1,073,741,824
536,870,912
268,435,456
134,217,728
67,108,864
33,554,432
16,777,216
8,388,608
4,194,304
2,097,152
1,048,576
524,288
262,144
131,072
65536
32768
16384
8192
4096
2048
1024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
Sign
0: Positive
number
1: Negative
number

• In the case of 32 bit type, when an extension register on the low-order side (example: R0) is specified, the
subsequent serial number on the high-order side (example: R1) is automatically occupied.
Either an odd or even device number can be specified for the low-order side, but it is recommended to
specify an even device number for the convenience of the monitoring function for display units, display
modules, and programming tools.

4.10.4 Initialization of extension registers and extension file registers

The contents of extension registers are backed up by the battery even when the power is turned OFF or when
the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs and in FX3G PLCs if extension registers are
changed to the latched (battery backed) type and the optional battery is installed.
When initializing the contents of extension registers, clear them using a sequence program or GX Developer.

1. When clearing the data using a program

• When initializing some extension registers (R)
Example: When initializing (clearing) R0 to R199
Command
FNC 16 K0 R0 K200
FMOVP

• When initializing extension registers and extension file registers in sector units
(Sectors are not provided for extension registers and extension file registers in FX3G PLCs.)
Example: When initializing R0 to R4095 and ER0 to ER4095 (initializing two sectors starting from R0 and
ER0)
Ex. FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
Command
FNC 292 The current value in Ro to R4095 is initialized
R0 K2 to "FFFFH".
INITRP

2. When clearing the data using GX Developer

Select [Online] → [Clear PLC memory...] in GX Developer, and clear [Data device].
This operation initializes the contents of timers, counters, data registers, file registers and extension registers.

140
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER]

1
4.10.5 Functions and operation examples of extension registers

Introduction
Extension registers can be used in various controls with numeric data the same as data registers.
This subsection explains operations in representative basic instructions and applied instructions among
various applications.
For the full use of extension registers, refer to the explanation of applied instructions described later. 2
1. Extension registers in basic instructions

Overview
• Specifying an extension register as the set value of a timer or counter

T 2 R 0 A counter or timer operates with regards to the contents

of a specified extension register as the set value.
3

List
Instruction
C 10 R 20

2. Extension registers in applied instructions

Operation examples using MOV (FNC 12) instruction 4
• Changing the current value of a counter

in Detail
Devices
FNC 12 The current value of the counter C2 is changed to the
R 5 C 2
MOV contents of R5.

• Reading the current value of a counter to an extension register

5
The current value of the counter C10 is transferred to R4.

Constant
Device &
Specified the
FNC 12 C 10 R 4
MOV

• Storing a numeric value to extension registers

"200 (decimal value)" is transferred to R10.
16 bits
FNC 12
6
K200 R 10

Programming
Before
MOV

32 bits "80000 (decimal value)" is transferred to R10 and R11.

Because a numeric value larger than 32767, the 32-bit
FNC 12 K80000 R10(R11)
DMOV operation (double D instruction) is required. When an
extension register on the low-order side (R10) is
specified, an extension register on the high-order side 7
(R11) is automatically occupied.

Instruction
Basic
• Transferring the contents of a data register to extension register
The contents of D10 are transferred to R20.
FNC 12 D 10 R 20
MOV
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

141
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER]

4.10.6 Functions and operation examples of extension file registers

Extension file registers (ER) are usually used as log data storage destinations and set data storage
destinations.
Extension file registers can be handled only with dedicated instructions shown in the table below. When
using data contents with other instructions, transfer them to an extension register of the same device number,
and then use the extension register.
However, extension file registers (ER) are available in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs only when the memory cassette is
attached.
• FX3U/FX3UC PLC
Instruction Description
LOADR(FNC290) This (transfer) instruction reads data of extension file registers (ER)*1 to extension registers (R).
This (transfer) instruction writes data of extension registers (R) to extension file registers (ER)*1 in 2048
SAVER(FNC291) point (1 sector) units. Use this instruction to store newly created sectors (2048 points) of data to
extension file registers (ER)*1.
This instruction initializes extension registers (R) and extension file registers (ER)*1 in 2048 point (1
INITR(FNC292) sector) units. Use this instruction to initialize extension registers (R) and extension file registers (ER)*1
before starting to log data by the LOGR instruction.
This instruction logs specified data, and writes it to extension registers (R) and extension file registers
LOGR(FNC293)
(ER)*1.
This (transfer) instruction writes specified extension registers (R) to extension file registers (ER)*1.This
RWER(FNC294) instruction is supported in FX3UC PLCs Ver.1.30 or later.Use this instruction to store the contents of any
extension register (R) to extension file register (ER)*1.
This instruction initializes extension file registers (ER)*1 in 2048 point (1 sector) units. This instruction is
INITER(FNC295) supported in FX3UC PLCs Ver.1.30 or later.Use this instruction to initialize extension file registers (ER)*1
before executing SAVER instruction.

*1. Extension file registers are only accessible when a memory cassette is mounted.

• FX3G PLCs
Instruction Description
LOADR(FNC290) This (transfer) instruction reads data of extension file registers (ER) to extension registers (R).
This (transfer) instruction writes specified extension registers (R) to extension file registers (ER)
RWER(FNC294)
Use this instruction to store the contents of any extension register (R) in extension file registers (ER)*2.

*2. When the memory cassette is attached, extension file registers in the memory cassette are accessed.
When the memory cassette is not attached, extension file registers in the EEPROM built in the PLC
are accessed.

142
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER]

1
1. Relationship between extension file registers and extension registers

Introduction
Extension file registers and extension registers have the following positional relationship inside the PLC.
a) FX3U/FX3UC PLCs

Extension register (R) Extension file register (ER)

Available in built-in RAM Available with a memory
cassette mounted
2

Overview
SAVER instruction
(sector units)
RWER instruction
R0 (point units) ER0
2048 2048 1 sector
points points
General-purpose device
3
R2048 2048 ER2048 2048
General
(sequence program) applied points LOADR instruction points
instruction R4096 (point units) ER4096

List
Instruction
2048 2048
points points
INITER instruction ER6144 2048
INITER (initialization) points
LOGR (sector units) 16
instruction sectors
4

in Detail
Devices
INITR instruction
(initialization) All points are
(sector units) written at one
R30720 time ER30720

R32767 ER32767
Nonvolatile
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
memory

Programming tool
GX Developer

b) FX3G PLCs 6

Programming
Before
Extension register (R) Extension file register (ER)
Available in built-in RAM Available in attached memory
General-purpose device cassette or built-in EEPROM
(sequence program) RWER instruction
R0 (arbitrary number of points) ER0

General
7

Instruction
Basic
applied LOADR instruction
instruction (point units)

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

R23999 ER23999
All points are Nonvolatile
written at one memory
time

Programming tool 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

GX Developer

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

143
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER]

2. Sectors of extension registers and extension file registers

In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, extension registers and extension file registers are divided into sectors in the data
configuration. One sector consists of 2,048 devices. The table below shows the head device number in each
sector.
In FX3G PLCs, sectors are not provided for extension registers and extension file registers.
Head Head
Sector Sector
device Device range device Device range
No. No.
No. No.
Sector 0 R0 ER0 to ER2047, R0 to R2047 Sector 8 R16384 ER16384 to ER18431, R16384 to R18431
Sector 1 R2048 ER2048 to ER4095, R2048 to R4095 Sector 9 R18432 ER18432 to ER20479, R18432 to R20479
Sector 2 R4096 ER4096 to ER6143, R4096 to R6143 Sector 10 R20480 ER20480 to ER22527, R20480 to R22527
Sector 3 R6144 ER6144 to ER8191, R6144 to R8191 Sector 11 R22528 ER22528 to ER24575, R22528 to R24575
Sector 4 R8192 ER8192 to ER10239, R8192 to R10239 Sector 12 R24576 ER24576 to ER26623, R24576 to R26623
Sector 5 R10240 ER10240 to ER12287, R10240 to R12287 Sector 13 R26624 ER26624 to ER28671, R26624 to R28671
Sector 6 R12288 ER12288 to ER14335, R12288 to R14335 Sector 14 R28672 ER28672 to ER30719, R28672 to R30719
Sector 7 R14336 ER14336 to ER16383, R14336 to R16383 Sector 15 R30720 ER30720 to ER32767, R30720 to R32767

144
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER]

1
4.10.7 Cautions on using extension file registers

Introduction
1. Cautions on writing data to extension file registers (FX3U/FX3UC PLC)
Because extension file registers are stored in the flash memory inside a memory cassette, pay attention to
the following points:
• When writing data to extension file registers by SAVER instruction
2

Overview
Initialize sectors to be written before executing this instruction. After initialization, store data to be written
to extension registers.
In FX3UC PLCs Ver.1.30 or later, it is not necessary to initialize sectors to be written when using RWER
instruction.
• When writing data to extension file registers by LOGR instruction
Initialize sectors to be written before starting to log data.
3

List
Instruction
• When using INITR instruction
This instruction initializes the contents of specified extension registers and extension file registers.
When initializing only extension file registers by this instruction, make sure to temporarily move the
contents of extension registers to unused extension registers or unused data registers before executing
this instruction.
When initializing only extension file registers in FX3UC PLCs Ver.1.30 or later, use INITER instruction. 4

in Detail
Devices
2. Initialization of extension file registers
Because the contents of extension file registers are stored in the memory cassette or built-in EEPROM, use
the data clear operation in a sequence program or GX Developer to initialize them.
For writing data to extension file registers in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, it is necessary to initialize the target area to
be written in advance. 5
For writing data to extension file registers in FX3G PLCs, it is not necessary to initialize the target area to be

Constant
Device &
Specified the
written in advance.
1) When initializing extension file registers in a program (required only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs)
a) Initializing only extension file registers in sector units [Ver.1.30 or later]
Example: When initializing ER0 to ER4095 (initializing two sectors starting from ER0)
Command input
FNC 295 The current value is initialized to "FFFFH" in ER0
6
R0 K2 to ER4095.

Programming
Before
INITERP

b) Initializing extension registers and extension file registers in sector units

Example: When initializing R0 to R4095 and ER0 to ER4095 (initializing two sectors starting from R0
and ER0)
Command input
7
FNC 292 R0 K2 The current value is initialized to "FFFFH" in R0 to R4095 and

Instruction
Basic
INITRP ER0 to ER4095.

2) When initializing extension file registers using GX Developer

Select [Online] → [Clear PLC memory...] in GX Developer, and clear [Data device].
This operation initializes the contents of timers, counters, data registers, file registers and extension
registers. 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

3. Allowable number of writes to the memory

Note the following cautions on access to extension file registers.
• In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
Data can be written to the memory cassette (flash memory) up to 10,000 times.
Every time the INITR (FNC292), RWER (FNC294) or INITER (FNC295) instruction is executed, it is 9
counted as a write to the memory. Make sure not to exceed the allowable number of writes.
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

When a continuous operation type instruction is used, data is written to the memory in every operation
cycle of the PLC. For preventing this, make sure to use a pulse operation type instruction.

Execution of the LOADR (FNC290), SAVER (FNC291) or LOGR (FNC293) instruction is not counted as a
write to the memory. However, it is necessary to initialize the writing target sector before executing the
SAVER (FNC291) or LOGR (FNC293) instruction.
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

Every time the INITR (FNC292)or INITER (FNC295) instruction is executed, it is counted as a write to the
memory. Make sure not to exceed the allowable number of writes.

145
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER]

• In FX3G PLCs
Data can be written to the memory cassette (EEPROM) up to 10,000 times, and to the built-in memory
(EEPROM) up to 20,000 times.
Every time the RWER (FNC294) instruction is executed, it is counted as a write to the memory. Make sure
not to exceed the allowable number of writes.
When a continuous operation type instruction is used, data is written to the memory in every operation
cycle of the PLC. For preventing this, make sure to use a pulse operation type instruction.
Execution of the LOADR (FNC290)instruction is not counted as a write to the memory.

4.10.8 Registration of data in extension registers and extension file registers

This subsection explains the operating procedures of GX Developer (Ver.8.72A or later).
→ For details on GX Developer operating procedures, refer to the GX Developer manual.

1 Starting up GX Developer (GPPW)

Click [Start]-[All Programs]-[MELSOFT Application]-[GX Developer] in Microsoft Windows.

2 Setting the PLC model

Set the PLC Series and PLC type as shown below.
Essential set item Contents of setting
PLC series FXCPU
PLC Type FX3U(C)*1, FX3G

*1

*1. For Ver. 8.13P to 8.24A of GX Developer, the PLC type is FX3UC.

146
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER]

1
3

Introduction
Setting the data
1. Right-click [Device memory] in the project data list to open the submenu.

2. Click [New] on the submenu to display "New" dialog box.

2
3. Click the [OK] button to display the dialog box for confirmation.

Overview
4. Click the [Yes] button.

List
Instruction
4

in Detail
Devices
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
6

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

FX3U(C)*1

*1. For Ver. 8.13P to 8.24A of GX Developer, the PLC type is FX3UC.
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

147
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER]

5. Input a device number to be set to "Device Label", and click the [Display] button.

6. Select the data type to be set in the two selection boxes to the right of the [Display] button.

7. Input data or character string to each device accordingly.

148
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.10 Extension Register [R] and Extension File Register [ER]

1
4

Introduction
Writing (transferring) data to the PLC
1. Select [Online] → [Write to PLC...] to open the [Write to PLC] dialog box.

2
FX3U(C)*1

Overview
3

List
Instruction
4

in Detail
Devices
*1. For Ver. 8.13P to 8.24A of GX Developer, the PLC type is FX3UC.

2. Put a check mark next to "MAIN (prepared device memory name)" under "Device memory."

3. Click the "Device data" tab, and add "Ext. file register" to target devices.
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
By default, "Ext. file register" is not included for reading/writing.
To add it, click the blank space on the left side of "Ext. file register" to change it to "×".
In GX Developer Ver.8.18U or later, the range of extension file registers to be written can be specified.

FX3U(C)*1
6

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic
Click the blank
space to
change it into
"×".
This example shows a window
in an FX3U PLC. 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

*1. For Ver. 8.13P or 8.24A of GX Developer, the PLC type is FX3UC.

4. Click the [Execute] button to write (transfer) to the PLC.

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

149
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.11 Index Register [V and Z]

4.11 Index Register [V and Z]

Index registers can be used in the same way as of data registers. But they are special registers since they
can change the contents of device numbers and numeric values by program when combined with another
device number or numeric value in operands of applied instructions.

4.11.1 Numbers of index registers

The table below shows numbers of index registers (V and Z). (Numbers are assigned in decimal.)
When only "V" or "Z" is specified, it is handled as "V0" or "Z0" respectively.
Index type
V0 (V) to V7, Z0 (Z) to Z7
16 points*1

*1. The characteristics related to protection against power failure cannot be changed by parameters.

4.11.2 Functions and structures

1. 16-bit type
Index registers have the same structures as data registers.
16 bits 16 bits
V Z
V0 to V7: Z0 to Z7:
8 points 8 points

2. 32-bit type
Make sure to use Z0 to Z7 when indexing a device in a 32-bit applied instruction or handling a numeric value
outside the 16-bit range.
32 bits This is because FX PLCs handle Z as the low-order side of a 32-bit
V0 (high-order side) Z0 (low-order side) register as shown in combinations of V and Z in the figure on the left.
Even if V0 to V7 on the high-order side is specified, indexing is not
V1 (high-order side) Z1 (low-order side) executed.
When index registers are specified as a 32-bit device, both V (high-
V2 (high-order side) Z2 (low-order side)
order side) and Z (low-order side) are referred to at the same time.
V3 (high-order side) Z3 (low-order side) If a numeric value for another purpose remains in V (high-order side),
consequently the numeric value here becomes extremely large, thus
V4 (high-order side) Z4 (low-order side) an operation error occurs.
Example of writing to 32-bit index registers
V5 (high-order side) Z5 (low-order side)

V6 (high-order side) Z6 (low-order side) FNC 12 K300 Z2

DMOV
V7 (high-order side) Z7 (low-order side) K300→(V2,Z2)
Even if an index value in a 32-bit applied instruction does not exceed
the 16-bit numeric range, use a 32-bit operation instruction such as
DMOV for writing a numeric value to Z as shown in the above figure
so that both V (high-order side) and Z (low-order side) are overwritten
at the same time.

150
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.11 Index Register [V and Z]

1
4.11.3 Indexing of devices

Introduction
Available devices and the contents of indexing are as described below:
→ For indexing method and cautions, refer to Section 5.7.

Decimal devices/numeric values: M, S, T, C, D, R, KnM, KnS, P and K

For example, when "V0 = K5" is specified and "D20V0" is executed, an instruction is executed for the device 2
number D25 (D20 + 5).

Overview
Constants can be indexed also. When "K30V0" is specified, an instruction is executed for decimal value K35
(30 + 5).

Octal devices: X, Y, KnX and KnY

For example, when "Z1 = K8" is specified and "X0Z1" is executed, an instruction is executed for the device
number X10 (X0 + 8: addition of octal value). When indexing for a device whose device number is handled in
3

List
Instruction
octal, a numeric value converted into octal is added for the contents of V and Z.
Accordingly, note that when "Z1 = K10" is specified "X0Z1" indicates that X12 is specified, and X10 is not
specified.

Hexadecimal numeric values: H

For example, when "V5 = K30" is specified and a constant "H30V5" is specified, it is handled as H4E (30H + 4
K30). When "V5 = H30" is specified and a constant "H30V5" is specified, it is handled as H60 (30H + 30H).

in Detail
Devices
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
6

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

151
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.12 Pointer [P and I]

4.12 Pointer [P and I]

4.12.1 Numbers of pointers

The table below shows numbers of pointers (P and I). (Numbers are assigned in decimal.)
When using a pointer for input interrupt, an input number assigned to it cannot be used together with a "high
speed counter" or "speed detection (FNC 56)" which uses the same input range.

1. FX3U/FX3UC PLC

For input interrupt/input delay For counter

For branch For jump to For timer interrupt
interrupt interrupt
END step
I00…(X000) I30…(X003) I6…… I010 I040
P0 to P62
P63 I10…(X001) I40…(X004) I7…… I020 I050
P64 to P4095
1 point I20…(X002) I50…(X005) I8…… I030 I060
4095 points
6 points 3 points 6 points

2. FX3G PLCs

For branch For jump to For input interrupt For timer interrupt
END step
I00…(X000) I30…(X003) I6……
P0 to P62
P63 I10…(X001) I40…(X004) I7……
P64 to P2047
1 point I20…(X002) I50…(X005) I8……
2047 points
6 points 3 points

152
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.12 Pointer [P and I]

1
4.12.2 Functions and operation examples of pointers for branch

Introduction
The roles and operations of pointers for branch are as described below.
Because all of these pointers are combined with applied instructions, refer to the explanation of each
instruction for the detailed method.
→ For details on interrupt function, refer to Chapter 35. 2
1. Applied instructions using pointers for branch (P)

Overview
• CJ (FNC 00) (conditional jump)
X001
FNC 00 P 0 When X001 turns ON, the PLC jumps to a label
CJ position specified by CJ (FNC 00) instruction,
and executes the subsequent program. 3
Jump

List
Instruction
Label
P0

• CALL (FNC 01) call subroutine

X001
FNC 01 When X001 turns ON, the PLC executes a
4
P 1
CALL

in Detail
Devices
subroutine in the label position specified by
Main program CALL (FNC 01) instruction, and then returns to
Jump the original position by SRET (FNC 02)
FNC 06 instruction.
FEND

Label 5
P1 Subroutine

Constant
Device &
Specified the
FNC 02 program
SRET Return

• Role of pointer P63 for jump to the END step

FNC 00
P63 is a special pointer for jumping to the END step
when the CJ (FNC 00) instruction is executed.
6
P 63
Note that a program error will occur when P63 is

Programming
Before
CJ
programmed as a label.
→ Refer to "5. Label unnecessary for the
pointer P63" in Section 8.1.
Label
P63 END
7

Instruction
Basic
Should not be programmed.

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

153
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.12 Pointer [P and I]

4.12.3 Functions and operation examples of pointers for interrupt

→ For details on interrupt function, refer to Chapter 35.
There are three types of pointers for interrupt. When in use, they are combined with IRET(FNC03),
EI(FNC04) and DI(FNC05) for interrupt return, enabling interrupt and disabling interrupt.

1. Pointers for input interrupt (delay interrupt): 6 points

→ For details on input interrupt function, refer to Section 35.3 and Section 35.4.
The PLC can receive input signals from specific input numbers without influence of the operation cycle of the
PLC. By using these input signals as triggers, the PLC executes interrupt routine programs.
Because pointers for input interrupt can handle signals shorter than the operation cycle, use them for high
priority processing during sequence control and for control handling short pulses.
ON duration or OFF duration of
Pointer for input interrupt
input signal
Input Interrupt disabling flag
Interrupt at rising Interrupt at falling
FX3U/FX3UC FX3G
edge edge
X000 I001 I000 M8050*1
10 µs or more
X001 I101 I100 M8051*1
X002 I201 I200 M8052*1 50 µs or more
5 µs or more
X003 I301 I300 *1
M8053
10 µs or more
X004 I401 I400 M8054*1
X005 I501 I500 M8055*1 50 µs or more

*1. Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP.
Non-overlap of input numbers
Inputs X000 to X007 are used for high speed counters, input interrupt, pulse catch, SPD/ZRN/DSZR/DVIT
instructions and general-purpose inputs. When assigning functions, there should be no overlap between
those input terminals.
For example, when the input interrupt pointer I001 is used, X000 is occupied. As a result, "C235, C241,
C244, C246, C247, C249, C251, C252 and C254", "input interrupt pointer I000", "pulse catch contact M8170"
and "SPD instruction using X000" cannot be used.
Delay function of input interrupt
This input interrupt has a function to delay the execution of interrupt routine in units of 1ms.
The delay time is specified by the following pattern program.
This delay function can electrically adjust the mounting position of sensors for input interrupts without shifting
the actual position.

Contact for setting delay time

I
M8393
FNC 12 • Delay time specifying program
K{{{* D8393 Make sure to describe the delay time specifying
MOV
program shown on the left at the head of an
[1] Delay time (unit: ms) interrupt routine program.
Because this is a pattern program, change only
the delay time [1].
Program to be processed by input interrupt Only a constant (K) or data register (D) can be
used to specify the delay time*.
FNC 03 • Interrupt program is finished
IRET

*2. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

154
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.12 Pointer [P and I]

1
Operations

Introduction
FNC 04 • Interrupt is usually disabled in the PLC.
If interrupt is enabled by EI instruction, when
EI X000 or X001 turns ON while a program is
scanned, the PLC executes the interrupt
Interrupt enabled
range
routine [1] or [2], and then returns to the main
program by IRET instruction. 2

Overview
FNC 06
Pointer for FEND
interrupt Rising edge of X000 is detected 3
I001 • Make sure to program a pointer for interrupt

List
Instruction
(I***) as a label after FEND instruction.
Interrupt routine [1]
FNC 03
IRET
Pointer for
interrupt Rising edge of X001 is detected
I101
4

in Detail
Devices
Interrupt routine [2]
FNC 03
IRET

END
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
2. Pointers for timer interrupt: 3 points
→ For details on timer interrupt function, refer to Section 35.5.
The PLC executes an interrupt routine program at every specified interrupt cycle time (10 to 99 ms).
Use these pointers for control requiring cyclic processing regardless of the operation cycle of the PLC.
Input No. Interrupt cycle (ms) Interrupt disabling flag 6

Programming
Before
I6…… M8056*1
An integer in the range from 10 to 99 is put in "……" portion of the
I7…… pointer name. M8057*1
Ex: I610 = Timer interrupt at every 10 ms
I8…… M8058*1

*1. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

7
*2. Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP.

Instruction
Basic
Caution
It is recommended to set the timer interrupt time to 10 ms or more. When the timer interrupt time is set to 9
ms or less, the timer interrupt processing may not be executed at an accurate cycle in the following cases:
• When the processing time of the interrupt program is long
8
• When an instruction requiring long processing time is used in the main program
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

155
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.12 Pointer [P and I]

Operations
Step FNC 04 Interrupt is • Timer interrupt is enabled after EI instruction.
0 enabled It is not necessary to program DI (disable
EI interrupt) instruction when no zone to disable
timer interrupt is needed.

Main
program

FNC 06 Main program • "FEND" indicates the end of the main

FEND is finished program.
Make sure to describe an interrupt routine
after "FEND".
Pointer for
interrupt Interrupt at every 20 ms
• The PLC executes an interrupt routine at every
I620 Interrupt 20 ms.
routine The PLC returns to main program by IRET
instruction.

FNC 03 Interrupt return

IRET

END

3. Pointers for counter interrupt: 6 points*1

→ For details on counter interrupt function, refer to Section 35.6.
The PLC executes an interrupt routine based on the comparison result obtained by the comparison set
instruction for high speed counter (DHSCS instruction).
Use these pointers for control requiring an interrupt routine based on the counting result from high speed
counters.
Pointer No. Interrupt disabling flag Pointer No. Interrupt disabling flag
I010 I040
I020 M8059*2 I050 M8059*2
I030 I060

*1. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

*2. Cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN to STOP.

156
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 4 Devices in Detail
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 4.12 Pointer [P and I]

1
Operations

Introduction
Step • Enable interrupt after EI instruction, and
0 FNC 04
EI describe the main program.

M8000
• Drive the coil of a high speed counter, and
2
C255 K2,147,483,647

Overview
specify an interrupt pointer in DHSCS (FNC 53)
RUN instruction.
monitor FNC 53
DHSCS K1000 C255 I010
• When the current value of C255 changes from
"999" to "1000" or from "1001" to "1000", the
Interrupt pointer interrupt routine is executed.
For example of interrupt program, refer to an
FNC 06
FEND
number is
specified
input interrupt described above. 3
Pointer for

List
Instruction
interrupt Counter interrupt is specified

I010
Interrupt routine
(interrupt program)
4

in Detail
Devices
FNC 03 Interrupt return
IRET

END
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
6

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

157
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.1 Numeric Values Handled in PLCs (Octal, Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Numbers)

5. How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions

This chapter explains how to specify sources and destinations in sequence instructions which are the basis
for handling PLC instructions.
• Specifying constants as decimal, hexadecimal and real numbers
• Specifying digits of bit devices
• Specifying bit positions in data registers
• Directly specifying BFM (buffer memory) in special function blocks/units
• Indexing with index registers

5.1 Numeric Values Handled in PLCs

(Octal, Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Numbers)
FX PLCs handle five types of numeric values according to the application and purpose.
This section explains the roles and functions of these numeric values.

5.1.1 Types of numeric values

1. Decimal numbers (DEC)

• Set value (constant K) of timers and counters
• Device numbers of auxiliary relays (M), timers (T), counters (C), state relays (S), etc.
• Numeric values in operands and instruction operations in applied instructions (constant K)

2. Hexadecimal numbers (HEX)

• Numeric values in operands and instruction operations in applied instructions (constant H)

3. Binary numbers (BIN)

For a timer, counter or data register, a numeric value is specified Input from
in decimal or hexadecimal as described above. But all of these Example of decimal keyboard
number input (decimal) K 7 8 9
numeric values are handled in the binary format inside PLCs.
When these devices are monitored in peripheral equipment, they 0: Positive value
1: Negative value
are automatically converted into the decimal format as shown in
16384
8192
4096
2048
1024
512
256
128
64
32
16
8
4
2
1
the figure on the right (or can be converted into the hexadecimal
format). (binary)
• Handling of negative value 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
A negative value is expressed in complement of PLCs. Automatic
For details, refer to the explanation of NEG (FNC 29) 1+4+16+256+512 conversion
instruction. = 789 (decimal) K 7 8 9
Monitoring in programming tool
4. Octal numbers (OCT)
In FX PLCs, device numbers of input relays and output relays are assigned in octal.
Because "8" and "9" do not exist in octal, device numbers are carried in the way "0 to 7, 10 to 17, 70 to 77,
100 to 107".

5. Binary coded decimal (BCD)

BCD format expresses each numeric value from 0 to 9 constructing each digit of a decimal number in a 4-bit
binary number.
Because handling of each digit is easy, this format is adopted in controlling digital switches of BCD output
type and seven-segment display units.

158
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.1 Numeric Values Handled in PLCs (Octal, Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Numbers)

1
6. Real numbers (floating point data)

Introduction
FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs have the floating point operation function to achieve high accuracy operation.
In floating point operations, binary floating points (real numbers) are used, and scientific notation (real
numbers) are used for monitoring them.

5.1.2 Conversion of numeric values 2

Overview
Numeric values handled in FX PLCs can be converted as shown in the table below:
Decimal number Hexadecimal number
Octal number (OCT) Binary number (BIN) BCD
(DEC) (HEX)
0 0 00 0000 0000 0000 0000
1 1 01 0000 0001 0000 0001 3
2 2 02 0000 0010 0000 0010

List
Instruction
3 3 03 0000 0011 0000 0011
4 4 04 0000 0100 0000 0100
5 5 05 0000 0101 0000 0101
6
7
6
7
06
07
0000
0000
0110
0111
0000
0000
0110
0111
4

in Detail
Devices
8 10 08 0000 1000 0000 1000
9 11 09 0000 1001 0000 1001
10 12 0A 0000 1010 0001 0000
11 13 0B 0000 1011 0001 0001
12 14 0C 0000 1100 0001 0010 5
13 15 0D 0000 1101 0001 0011

Constant
Device &
Specified the
14 16 0E 0000 1110 0001 0100
15 17 0F 0000 1111 0001 0101
16 20 10 0001 0000 0001 0110

6
•••

•••

•••

•••

•••

•••

•••
99 143 63 0110 0011 1001 1001

Programming
Before
•••

•••

•••

•••

•••

•••

•••
Major applications
Decimal number Hexadecimal number
Octal number (OCT) Binary number (BIN) BCD
(DEC)
Constants (K) and
(HEX)
7
BCD digital switches

Instruction
Basic
numbers of internal Numbers of internal Processing inside
Constants (H) and seven-segment
devices except I/O I/O relays PLC
display units
relays

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

159
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.1 Numeric Values Handled in PLCs (Octal, Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Numbers)

5.1.3 Handling of numeric values in floating point operations

Handling of numeric values in floating point operations

Binary integers are handled inside PLCs.
During division of integers, the answer "40 ÷ 3 = 13 ... 1" is obtained, for example.
During square root extraction operations, decimal points are ignored.
In FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, floating point operations are available to achieve higher accuracy in such
operations.

Binary floating point (real number)

When handling a binary floating point (real number) in data registers, use a pair of data registers having
consecutive device numbers.
When D11 and D10 are used, for example, a binary floating point is handled as shown below:
D 11(b15 to b0) D 10(b15 to b0)
27 26 25 21 20 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-21 2-22 2-23
S E7 E6 E5 E1 E0 A22 A21 A20 A2 A1 A0
b31 b30 b29 b28 b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b2 b1 b0
8 bits in 23 bits in
exponent part mantissa part
E0 to E7 = 0 or 1 A0 to A22 = 0 or 1
Sign for mantissa part 0 in case "b0 to b31 = 0"
(0: Positive, 1: Negative)
Binary floating point (real number) = ± (20 + A22 × 2−1 + A21 × 2−2 + ... + A0 × 2−23)
7 6 0
× 2 (E7 × 2 + E6 × 2 + ... + E0 × 2 )/2127

Example: A22=1 , A21=0, A20=1, A19 to A0=0, E7=1, E6 to E1=0, E0=1

Binary floating point (real number) = ± (20 + 1 × 2−1 + 0 × 2−2 + 1 × 2−3 + ... + 0 × 2−23)
7 6 0
× 2 (1 × 2 + 0 × 2 + ... + 1 × 2 )/2127
= ±1.625 × 2129/2127 = ±1.625 × 22

The sign bit b31 states whether data is positive or negative, but is not handled as a complement.

Number of significant figures

The number of significant figures of binary floating point is approximately 7 when expressed in decimal. The
binary floating point range is as follows:

- Least absolute value: 1175494 × 10-41

- Most absolute value: 3402823 × 1035

Handling of the zero (M8020), borrow (M8021) and carry (M8022) flags
These flags operate as follows in floating point operations.

- Zero flag : 1 when the result is 0

- Borrow flag : 1 when the result does not reach the minimum unit but is not 0
- Carry flag : 1 when the absolute value of the result exceeds the available numeric value range.

Monitoring of binary floating point (real number)

A programming software supporting the display of floating point such as GX Developer can directly monitor
binary floating point (real number).
A programming tool not supporting the display of floating point can monitor binary floating point (real number)
when it is converted into scientific notation (real number).

160
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.1 Numeric Values Handled in PLCs (Octal, Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Numbers)

1
Scientific notation (real number)

Introduction
Because binary floating point (real number) is difficult to understand for users, it can be converted into
scientific notation (real number). But internal operations are executed using binary floating point (real
number).
Scientific notation (real number) is handled by a pair of data registers having serial device numbers. Different
from binary floating point (real number), a data register having a smaller device number handles the mantissa
part, and the other data register having a larger device number handles the exponent part.
2

Overview
For example, when data registers D1 and D0 are used, they handle scientific notation as shown below. Data
can be written to D0 and D1 by MOV instruction.

Scientific notation (real number) = [Mantissa D0] × 10 [Exponent D1]

Mantissa D0 = ± (1000 to 9999) or 0
Exponent D1 = −41 to +35 3

List
Instruction
The most significant bit of D0 and D1 specifies the positive or negative sign respectively, and is handled as
the complement of 2 respectively.
The mantissa D0 does not allow "100", for example. In the case of "100", it is handled as "1000 × 10−1".
The scientific notation (real number) range is as follows:

- Minimum absolute value: 1175 × 10−41

4

in Detail
Devices
- Maximum absolute value: 3402 × 1035

Number of significant figures

The number of significant figures of scientific notation is approximately 4 when expressed in decimal. The
scientific notation range is as described above.
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Scientific notation (real number) is valid in the following instructions:
- Conversion from binary floating point (real number) into scientific notation (real number): FNC118
([D]EBCD)
- Conversion from scientific notation (real number) into binary floating point (real number): FNC119
([D]EBIN)
6

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

161
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.2 Specification of Constants K, H and E (Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Number)

5.2 Specification of Constants K, H and E

(Decimal, Hexadecimal and Real Number)
When handling constants in a sequence program, use constant K (decimal), H (hexadecimal) or E (floating
point).
In peripheral equipment for programming, add "K" to a decimal number, "H" to a hexadecimal number and "E"
to a floating point (real number) for operations associated with numeric values in instructions. (Examples:
K100 (decimal number), H64 (hexadecimal number) and E1.23 (or E1.23 + 10) (real number))
The roles and functions of constants are described below.

5.2.1 Constant K (decimal number)

"K" indicates a decimal integer, and is mainly used to specify the set value of timers and counters and
numeric values as operands in applied instructions. (Example: K1234)
The decimal constant specification range is as follows:

- When word data (16 bits) is used ... K-32768 to K32767

- When double data (32 bits) is used ... K-2,147,483,648 to K2,147,483,647

5.2.2 Constant H (hexadecimal number)

"H" indicates a hexadecimal number, and is mainly used to specify numeric values as operands in applied
instructions. (Example: H1234)
When using digits 0 to 9, the bit status (1 or 0) of each bit is equivalent to the BCD code, so BCD data can be
specified also.
(Example: H1234 ... When specifying BCD data, specify each digit of hexadecimal number in 0 to 9.)
The hexadecimal constant setting range is as follows:

- When word data (16 bits) is used ... H0 to HFFFF (H0 to H9999 in the case of BCD data)
- When double data (32 bits) is used ... H0 to HFFFFFFFF (H0 to H99999999 in the case of BCD data)

5.2.3 Constant E (real number)

"E" indicates a real number (floating point data), and is mainly used to specify numeric values as operands in
applied instructions. (Example: E1.234 or E1.234 + 3)
The real number setting range is from −1.0 × 2128 to −1.0 × 2−126, 0 and 1.0 × 2−126 to 1.0 × 2128.
In a sequence program, a real number can be specified in two methods, "normal expression" and "exponent
expression".

- Normal expression: .................. Specify a numeric value as it is.

For example, specify "10.2345" in the form "E10.2345".
- Exponent expression: .............. Specify a numeric value in the format "(numeric value) × 10n".
For example, specify "1234" in the form "E1.234 + 3".
"+3" in "E1.234 + 3" indicates "103".

162
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.3 Character Strings

1
5.3 Character Strings

Introduction
Character strings are classified into character string constants which directly specify character strings in
operands in applied instructions and character string data. 2

Overview
5.3.1 Character string constant ("ABC")
A device "character string" directly specifies a character string in a sequence program.
Put half-width characters inside quotation marks (example: "ABCD1234") in specification.
JIS8 code is available.
Up to 32 characters can be specified as a character string.
3

List
Instruction
5.3.2 Character string data
With regard to character string data, a specified device to the NUL code (00H) is handled as one character
string in 1-byte units.
When expressing (recognizing) character string data by bit devices with digit specification, however, 16 bits 4
are required for data including the NUL code (00H) specifying the end of the character string data because

in Detail
Devices
the instruction length is 16 bits. (Refer to Example 2 in the step 2 below.)
In the following cases, an operation error occurs in the applied instruction (error code: K6706):
• When "00H" is not specified in the corresponding device range after the source device number specified in
an applied instruction
• When there are insufficient devices for storing character string data (including "00H" or "0000H" indicating 5
the end of the character string data) in the destination devices specified in an applied instruction

Constant
Device &
Specified the
1) Character string data stored in word devices
• Example of data which can be • Example of data which cannot be
recognized as character string data recognized as character string data
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
D100
D101
2nd character 1st character D100
D101
2nd character 1st character 6
4th character 3rd character 4th character 3rd character

Programming
Before
D102 6th character 5th character D102 6th character 5th character
…

D110 00H 21st character D7999 "n"th character "(n-1)"th character

"00H" indicating the end of "00H" indicating the end of character string
the character string can be
detected.
cannot be detected from the specified
device to the end device number. 7

Instruction
Basic
2) Character string data stored in bit devices with digit specification
• Example of data which can be • Examples of data which cannot be
recognized as character string data recognized as character string data
16 bits <Example 1> 16 bits
M115 to M100 2nd character
M131 to M116 4th character
1st character M115 to M100
M131 to M116
2nd character 1st character 8
3rd character 4th character 3rd character
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

M147 to M132 6th character 5th character M147 to M132 6th character 5th character
…
…

M7679 to
M211 to M196 00H 13th character M7664 "n"th character "(n-1)"th character
"00H" indicating the "00H" indicating the end of character string
end of the character cannot be detected from the specified
string can be device to the end device number. 9
detected. <Example 2> 16 bits
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

M7623 to M7608 2nd character 1st character

M7639 to M7624 4th character 3rd character
M7655 to M7640 6th character 5th character
M7671 to M7656 8th character 7th character
M7679 to M7672 00H 10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

Because the data "00H" indicating the end

of the character string does not reach 16
bits, the end of the character string cannot
be recognized.

163
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.4 Specification of Digits for Bit Devices (Kn[ ]***)

5.4 Specification of Digits for Bit Devices (Kn[ ]***)

Handling of bit devices

Devices which handle only the ON/OFF information such as X, Y, M and S are called bit devices.
On the other hand, devices handling numeric values such as T, C, D and R are called word devices.
Even bit devices can handle a numeric value when they are combined. In this case, the number of digits Kn
and the head device number are combined.
The number of digits is expressed in 4 bit units (digits); K1 to K4 are used for 16-bit data, and K1 to K8 are
used for 32-bit data.
For example, "K2M0" indicates two-digit data expressed by M0 to M7.
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Sign bit (0 = Positive, 1: Negative) D0 Low order
Transferred
Do not change
K2M0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0

Transferred
Sign bit (0 = Positive, 1: Negative) D1 Low order
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
When 16-bit data is transferred to K1M0 to K3M0, the highest-order bits are not transferred due to insufficient
data length.
32-bit data is transferred in the same way.
When the number of digits specified for bit devices is K1 to K3 (or K1 to K7) in a 16-bit (or 32-bit) operation,
the insufficient high-order bits are always regarded as "0". It means that such data is always positive.

M 0 Two-digit BCD data expressed by X004 to X013 is converted into

FNC 19 K 2X004 D 0
BIN binary data, and then transferred to D0.

A bit device number can be specified arbitrarily, but it is recommended to set the least significant digit to "0"
for X or Y. (In other words, it is recommended to specify "X000, X010, X020 ... Y000, Y010, Y020 ...")
For M and S, multiples of "8" are ideal, but it is recommended to specify "M0, M10, M20 ..." to prevent
confusion.

Specification of consecutive words

A series of data registers starting from D1 means "D1, D2, D3, D4 ....."
In the case of word devices with digit specification, when such word devices are handled as a series, they are
specified as shown below:

• K1X000, K1X004, K1X010, K1X014 .....

• K2Y010, K2Y020, K2Y030 .....
• K3M0, K3M12, M3M24, K3M36 .....
• K4S16, K4S32, K4S48 .....

Use the above devices in digit units so that devices are not skipped.
When "K4Y000" is used in a 32-bit operation, the high-order 16 bits register as "0".
It is necessary to use "K8Y000" when 32-bit data is required.

164
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.5 Bit Specification of a Word Device (D[ ].b)

1
5.5 Bit Specification of a Word Device (D[ ].b)

Introduction
By specifying a bit of a word device, the specified bit can be used as bit data.
When specifying a bit of a word device, use a word device number and bit number (hexadecimal). 2
(Example: D0.0 ... Indicates the bit 0 of data register (D).)

Overview
Indexing is not available for both device numbers and bit numbers.

Target word device : Data register or special data register

Bit number : 0 to F (hexadecimal)
D0.F 3
D0.3

List
Instruction
D0 F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

4
16 bits

in Detail
Devices
5.6 Direct Specification of Buffer Memory (U[ ]\G[ ])
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
A buffer memory (BFM) of a special function block or special extension unit can be specified directly.
BFM is 16-bit or 32-bit word data, and is mainly used for operands in applied instructions.
For specifying a BFM, specify the unit number (U) of a special function block or special extension unit and the
BFM number (\G) consecutively.
(Example: U0\G0 ... Indicates the BFM #0 in the special function block or special extension unit whose unit
6

Programming
Before
number is 0.)
Indexing is available for BFM numbers.
The specification range is as follows:

Unit number (U).................0 to 7

BFM number (\G) .............0 to 32766 7

Instruction
Basic
Example of MOV Transfer Transfer
instruction source destination
FNC 12 K10 U0\G10
MOV

Unit number BFM #10

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Example of indexing Transfer Transfer

BFM number source destination
FNC 12 K20 U0\G10Z0
MOV
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

Unit number BFM #(10 + Z0)

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

165
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.7 Indexing

5.7 Indexing
The functions and structures of index registers are explained in detail in "4.10 Index Register [V and Z]".
Refer to Section 4.10 in advance.

5.7.1 Indexing in basic instructions

In the case of bit devices

Bit devices [X, Y, M (except special auxiliary relays), T, and C (C0 to C199)] used in LD, LDI, AND, ANI, OR,
ORI, OUT, SET, RST, PLS, and PLF instructions can be indexed with index registers.
The figure shown on the right explains an indexing operation with
X030
the index register Z(0) for X000 and M0 in the LD instruction. FNC 12 K5 Z(0)
Transfer K5 or K10 to the index register Z(0) in advance. MOVP
If Z(0) is "5", "X(0+5) = X005". When X005 turns ON, Y000 turns ON K5 → Z(0)
and "M(0+5) = M5". When M5 turns ON, Y001 turns ON. X030
FNC 12
If Z(0) is "10", "X(0+10) = X012*1". When X012*1 turns ON, Y000 MOVP
K10 Z(0)
turns ON and "M(0+10) = M10". When M10 turns ON, Y001 turns K10 → Z(0)
ON.
X000Z(0)
*1. Refer to the caution 3) below. Y000
• The index registers Z0 to Z7 and V0 to V7 can be used for
indexing. M0Z(0)
Y001
• In OUT instruction for a timer or counter, the timer number (or
Z(0)=5 : X005=ON → Y000=ON
counter number) and the device specified for the set value can be M5=ON → Y001=ON
indexed. Z(0)=10 : X012*2=ON → Y000=ON
M10=ON → Y001=ON
Cautions *2 Refer to the caution 3).

1) 32-bit counters and special auxiliary relays cannot be indexed

with index registers.
2) It is not permitted to use 16-bit counters as 32-bit counters by executing indexing.
3) When an octal device number of X or Y is indexed with an index register, the contents of the index
register are converted into octal, and then added to the device number.
For example, when the value of an index register added to the input X000 is changed in the order "K0 →
K8 → K16", the device number converted into octal is added to the input X000 and the input number is
changed in the order "X(000+0) = X000 → X(000+8) = X10 → X(000+16) = X20".

In the case of word devices and constants

The set value of word devices used in OUT instruction of T and C(0~199) can be indexed with index registers.
The indexing operation is explained in an example in which the set
value D0 of T0 used in the index register V2 indexes OUT X030
FNC 12 K0 V2
instruction(as shown in the right figure). MOVP
Transfer K0 or K10 to the index register V2 in advance. K0 → V2
When X001 is set to ON, "D(0+0) = D0" if V2 is "0", and T0 operates X030
with the set value D0. FNC 12 K10 V2
When X001 is set to ON, "D(0+10) = D10" if V2 is "10", and T0 MOVP
operates with the set value D10. K10 → V2

Caution X001
T0
1) When a 32-bit counter is used in OUT instruction, the set value D0V2
cannot be indexed with an index register. V2 = 0 : The set value of T0 is the
present value of D0.
V2 = 10 : The set value of T0 is the
present value of D10.

166
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.7 Indexing

1
5.7.2 Indexing in applied instructions

Introduction
Expression of applied instructions allowing indexing
In the explanation of applied instructions, " ‚ " is added to the source S or destination D symbol to
indicate operands allowing indexing as shown in the figure below so that such operands can be discriminated 2
from operands not allowing indexing.

Overview
Indicates that indexing is allowed.
S‚ D‚
FNC 12 K100 D 10
MOV
3

List
Instruction
In the case of bit devices
The indexing operation is explained in an example in which the
X000
comparison result M0 in CMP (FNC 10) instruction is indexed with FNC 12 K0 V1
the index register V1 (as shown in the figure on the right). MOVP
Transfer K0 or K10 to the index register V1 in advance. K0 → V1 4
When X001 is set to ON, "M(0+0) = M0" and the comparison result X000

in Detail
Devices
is output to M0 to M2 if V1 is "0". FNC 12 K10 V1
MOVP
On the other hand, "M(0+10) = M10" and the comparison result is
K10 → V1
output to M10 to M12 if V1 is "10".
X001
• The index registers Z0 to Z7 and V0 to V7 can be used for FNC 10 D0 D1 M0V1
indexing. CMP
5
V1=0 V1=10

Constant
Device &
Specified the
D0>D1 → M0=ON M10=ON
D0=D1 → M1=ON M11=ON
D0<D1 → M2=ON M12=ON
In the case of word devices
1. indexing operands in 16-bit instructions
The indexing operation is explained in an example in which the 6
X000
transfer destination D0 in MOV instruction is indexed with the index FNC 12

Programming
Before
K0 V3
register V3 (as shown in the figure on the right). MOVP
Transfer K0 or K10 to the index register V3 in advance. K0 → V3
When X001 is set to ON, "D(0+0) = D0" if V3 is "0", and K500 is X000
transferred to D0. FNC 12 K10 V3
When X001 is set to ON, "D(0+10) = D10" if V3 is "10", and K500 is
MOVP
K10 → V3
7
transferred to D10.

Instruction
Basic
X001
FNC 12 K500 D0V3
MOV
V3=0 : K500 → D0 (D0+0)
V3=10 : K500 → D10 (D0+10)

2. indexing operands in 32-bit instructions 8

In a 32-bit instruction, it is also necessary to specify a 32-bit index
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

X002
register in the instruction. FNC 12 K0 Z4
When an index register Z (Z0 to Z7) is specified in a 32-bit DMOVP
instruction, the specified Z and its counterpart V (V0 to V7) work K0 → V4,Z4
together as 32-bit registers. X002
The indexing operation is explained in an example in which the FNC 12
DMOVP
K10 Z4 9
transfer destinations [D1, D0] in DMOV instruction are indexed with
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

the index registers [V4, Z4] (as shown in the figure on the right). K10 → V4,Z4
Transfer K0 or K10 to the index registers [V4, Z4] in advance. X003
FNC 12 K69000 D0Z4
When X003 is set to ON, "[D(1+0), D(0+0)] = [D1, D0]" is realized if
DMOVP
[V4, Z4] is "0", and K69000 is transferred to [D1, D0].
V4,Z4=0 : K69000 → D1 ,D0 (D0+0)
When X003 is set to ON, "[D(1+10), D(0+10)] = [D11, D10]" is
realized if [V4, Z4] is "10", and K69000 is transferred to [D11, D10].
V4,Z4=10 : K69000 → D11,D10 (D0+10)
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

167
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.7 Indexing

Cautions

1) When even if a numeric value written to index registers does not exceed the 16-bit numeric value range
(0 to 32767), make sure to overwrite both V and Z using a 32-bit instruction. If only Z is overwritten and
another numeric value remains in V, the numeric value will be extremely large. Thus an operation error
occurs.
2) It is not permitted to use 16-bit counters as 32-bit counters by executing indexing.
When 32-bit counters are required, add Z0 to Z7 to counters C200 and later.
3) It is not permitted to index V and Z themselves.
4) Direct specification of buffer memory in special function blocks/units
In the direct specification of buffer memory "U…\G…", the buffer memory number can be indexed with
index registers.
The unit number cannot be indexed with index registers.
("U0\G0Z0" is valid, but "U0Z0\G0" is invalid.)
5) Indexing in bit digit specification
It is not permitted to index "n" in "Kn" used for digit specification.
("K4M0Z0" is valid, but "K0Z0M0" is invalid.)
6) Indexing of I/O relays (octal device numbers)
X030
When octal device numbers of X, Y, KnX, and KnY are indexed FNC 12 K0 V3
with index register, the contents of an index register are MOVP
converted into octal, and then added to the device number. K0→V3
In the example shown in the figure on the right, Y007 to Y000 X031
FNC 12 K8 V3
are output by MOV instruction, and inputs are switched by MOVP
indexing X007 to X000, X017 to X010, and X027 to X020. K8→V3
When rewriting the index value as "K0", "K8", "K16", the device X032
FNC 12 K 16 V3
number converted into octal is added "X000 + 0 = X000", "X000 MOVP
+ 8 = X10", "X000 + 16 = X20", and the input terminal working as K16 → V 3
the source is changed accordingly. X033
FNC 12 K2X0V3 K2Y0
MOV
V3=0 : X7 to X0 → Y7 to Y0
Display example of timer present value V3=8 : X17 to X10 → Y7 to Y0
V3=16 : X27 to X20 → Y7 to Y0
A sequence to display the present value of the timers T0 to T9 can
be programmed index registers.
M8000
FNC 19 K1X000 Z0 Digital switch input
5
BIN for setting timer
RUN monitor number X003 to X000
(X003 to X000)BCD→(Z0)BIN

FNC 18 PLC
T 0Z0 K4Y000
BCD
(T0Z0)BIN→(Y017 to Y000)BCD
"T0Z0 = T0 to T9" according to "Z0 = 0 to 9"

Seven-segment display unit

output for displaying
timer current value
Y017 to Y000

168
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.7 Indexing

1
In the case of constants

Introduction
The indexing operation is explained in an example in which the
transfer destination in MOV instruction is indexed with the index X004
FNC 12 K0 V6
register V6 (as shown in the figure on the right). MOVP
Transfer K0 or K20 to the index register V6 in advance. K0 → V6
When X005 is set to ON, "K(6+0) = K6" if V6 is "0", and K6 is
X004
2
transferred to D10. FNC 12 K20 V6

Overview
When X005 is set to ON, "K(6+20) = K26" if V6 is "20", and K26 is MOVP
transferred to D10. K20 → V6
X005
FNC 12 K6V6 D10
MOVP
V6=0 : K6 (K6+0) → D10 3
V6=20 : K26(K6+20) → D10

List
Instruction
5.7.3 Indexing example for instruction with limited number of use.
4
By modifying the target device numbers using index registers V and Z, the target device numbers can be

in Detail
Devices
changed using the program. In this way, an instruction with a limited number of uses per program can be
used with multiple devices.

Example using the TKY instruction (FNC 70)

Two groups of key entries (numeric keypad from 0 to X010
5
9) store the input data to D0 and D2. Although the FNC 12 (K0) → (V0)

Constant
Device &
Specified the
K0 V0
MOVP
TKY instruction (FNC 70) can only be programmed
once, modifying the head device number of the input FNC 12 K0 V1 (K0) → (V1)
data, storage destination and pressed key MOVP
information, the information can be input from the FNC 12 (K0) → (V2)
two groups of keys (numeric keypad from 0 to 9). MOVP
K0 V2
6
Furthermore, even if V is changed while this X012

Programming
Before
instruction is being executed, this change is invalid. FNC 12 K16 V0 (K16) → (V0)
MOVP
The change is invalid until the instruction is no longer
being driven. FNC 12 K2 V1 (K2) → (V1)
MOVP
FNC 12
MOVP
K20 V2 (K20) → (V2) 7

Instruction
Basic
X013
FNC 70 X000V0 D0V1 M0V2
TKY
TKY Input Data Data Head Device
Instruction Head Storage Number of
Device Destinati
Number on
Pressed Key
Information 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

169
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 5 How to Specify Devices and Constants to Instructions
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 5.7 Indexing

MEMO

170
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.1 How to Read Explanation of Instructions

Introduction
6. What to Understand before Programming
This chapter explains the I/O processing, relationship among instructions and programming method which 2
should be understood before creating sequence programs.

Overview
6.1 How to Read Explanation of Instructions
In this manual, applied instructions are explained in the following form.
For the expression methods and basic rules for applied instructions, read in advance "6.5 General rules for
3

List
Instruction
applied instructions" described later.

4
Indicates applicable

in Detail
Devices
PLC versions.
Applicable series

Expression of applicable versions

x → Ver.2.20: before Ver.2.20 5
x Ver.2.20 →: Ver.2.20 or later

Constant
Device &
Specified the
6

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

The above is different from the actual page, as it is provided for explanation only.
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

171
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.1 How to Read Explanation of Instructions

Outline
1. Instruction format
1) The applied instruction number (FNC No.) and instruction mnemonic are indicated. The table below
shows the meaning of simplified expression.

Applicable
Mark Description instruction
(example)

FNC 12 No. Dotted lines on the upper left and lower left sides indicate an independent
WDT(FNC 07)
Instruction
MOV name P instruction not associated with the 16-bit or 32-bit type.

FNC 12 No. Continuous lines on the upper left side indicates that 16-bit type is available.
MOV(FNC 12)
D MOV name
Instruction P "D" on the lower left side indicates that the 32-bit type is available.

Dotted lines on the lower left side indicate that the 32-bit type does not exist.
FNC 12 No.
Continuous lines on the upper left side indicate that only the 16-bit type is CJ(FNC 00)
D Instruction
MOV name P available.

FNC 12 No. Dotted lines on the upper left side indicate that the 16-bit type does not exist.
HSCS(FNC 53)
D Instruction
MOV name P "D" on the lower left side indicates that only the 32-bit type is available.

Continuous lines on the upper right side indicate that the continuous operation
FNC 12 No.
type is available. "P" on the lower right side indicates that the pulse operation CMP(FNC 10)
DInstruction
MOV name P type is available.

Dotted lines on the lower right side indicate that the pulse operation type does
FNC 12 No.
not exist. Continuous line on the upper right side indicate that only the MTR(FNC 52)
DInstruction
MOV name P continuous operation type is available.

" "on the upper right side indicates that the contents of the destination
FNC 12 No. change in every operation cycle when the continuous operation type is used. INC(FNC 24)
DMOV name P
Instruction When operation should be executed only during the driving of an instruction,
use the pulse operation type indicated by "P" on the lower right side.

2. Set data
The contents of devices that can be specified as operands in instructions and available data types are
described below:
1) Contents
The contents of operands in each instruction are described below.
2) Indexing of the source and destination
In operands to which " ‚ " is added such as S and S1 , indexing is available.
Operands not allowing indexing are expressed as S and S1 .
3) Data types
- Bit : Bit device
- 16-bit BIN : 16-bit binary code
- 32-bit BIN : 32-bit binary code
- 64-bit BIN : 64-bit binary code
- 16/32-bit BIN : 16-bit or 32-bit binary code
- 32/64-bit BIN : 32-bit or 64-bit binary code
- 4-digit BCD : 4-digit (16-bit) BCD code
- 8-digit BCD : 8-digit (32-bit) BCD code
- 4/8-digit BCD : 4-digit (16-bit) or 8-digit (32-bit) BCD code
- Character string : Character code such as ASCII code and shift JIS code
- Character string (only ASCII) : ASCII code
- Real number (binary) : Binary floating point
- Real number (decimal) : Scientific notation

172
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.1 How to Read Explanation of Instructions

1
Applicable devices

Introduction
Devices which can be specified in operands of instructions are shown.
When a device supports an instruction, "3" is added to the device.

1) Bit devices 2) Word devices

•X : Input relay (X)
•Y : Output relay (Y)
•K : Decimal integer
•H : Hexadecimal integer
2

Overview
•M : Auxiliary relay (M) •KnX: Input relay (X) with digit specification*1
•S : State relay (S)
•KnY: Output relay (Y) with digit specification*1
etc.
•KnM: Auxiliary relay (M) with digit specification*1
•KnS: State relay (S) with digit specification*1
•T : Timer (T) current value
•C : Counter (C) current value 3
•D : Data register (file register)

List
Instruction
•V, Z: Index register
•Modify: Availability of indexing using index register
etc.

*1. Kn without specification indicates K1 to K4 for 16 bits, and K1 to K8 for 32 bits.

4
Explanation of function and operation

in Detail
Devices
The function of each instruction is explained.

Cautions
Cautions on using each instruction are described.
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Errors
Major errors that are possible to occur in each instruction are described.
For details on errors, refer to "Chapter 37. Errors and Error Code List".

Program examples 6
Concrete program examples using each instruction are described.

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

173
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.2 Cautions on Creation of Fundamental Programs

6.2 Cautions on Creation of Fundamental Programs

This section explains cautions on programming.

6.2.1 Programming procedure and execution order

1. Contact configuration and steps

Even for a sequence circuit offering a same operation, the program can be simplified and the number of steps
can be saved depending on the contact configuration method.
1) It is recommended to write a circuit with many serial contacts in an upper position.
(1)LD (1)LD (2)AND

(5)OUT (4)OUT

(2)LD (3)AND (4)ORB (3)OR

ORB instruction is not necessary

2) It is recommended to write a circuit with many parallel contacts in a left position.

(1)LD (2)LD (1)LD (3)AND

(5)OUT (4)OUT
(4)ANB

(3)OR (2)OR

ANB instruction is not necessary

2. Program execution and programming order

A sequence program is executed "from top to bottom" and "from left to right".
Code the sequence instruction list according to this rule.

Executed

(1)
(5)
(3)
(7) (9) (10)
(2)
(6)

(4)
(8)
(11)

174
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.2 Cautions on Creation of Fundamental Programs

1
6.2.2 Double output (double coil) operation and countermeasures

Introduction
1. Operation of double outputs
When a coil gives double outputs (double coils) in a sequence program, the priority is given to the latter one.

Suppose that the same coil Y003 is used in two positions as 2

shown in the figure on the right. Input processing

Overview
X001 = ON X002 = OFF
For example, suppose the X001 is ON and X002 is OFF.
First
In the first coil Y003, the image memory turns ON and the output X001
Y004 turns ON also because the input X001 is ON. Y003
In the second coil Y003, however, the image memory is set to 3
OFF because the input X002 is OFF.

List
Instruction
Accordingly, the actual output to the outside is "Y003 = OFF, Y003
Y004 = ON". Y004

Second
X002
Y003 4

in Detail
Devices
2. Countermeasures against double outputs
Double outputs (double coils) do not cause illegal input (program Output processing
Y003 = OFF Y004 = ON
error), but the operation is disrupted as described above.
Change the program as shown in the example below.
A B 5
A B Y000

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Y000
C E
.....

Ignored D

C E
6

Programming
Before
Y000

D
A B
M100
.....

or
7
C E

Instruction
Basic
M101

D
.....

M100
Y000 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

M101

SET, RST or jump instruction can be used instead, or a same output coil can be programmed at each state by
step ladder instructions.
When step ladder instructions are used, if an output coil located in the main routine is also used in a state, it is 9
handled as a double coil. It is better to avoid such programming.
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

175
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.2 Cautions on Creation of Fundamental Programs

6.2.3 Circuits which cannot be programmed and countermeasures

1. Bridge circuit
A circuit in which the current flows in both directions should be changed as shown in the figure on the right (so
that a circuit without D and a circuit without B are connected in parallel).
A B C E B
F F

A
E

A E D

C D
C

2. Coil connection position

• Do not write a contact on the right side of a coil.
• It is recommended to program a coil between contacts first.
The number of steps can be saved when a coil (E) between the contacts A and B is programmed first.
A B D A
C E

B D
E C

176
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.3 I/O Processing and Response Delay

1
6.3 I/O Processing and Response Delay

Introduction
1. Operation timing of I/O relays and response delay
FX PLCs execute the I/O processing by repeating
(1) [Input The ON/OFF status of input
the process (1) to process (3).
Accordingly, the control executed by PLCs contains
processing]
Input image
terminals is received at one time. 2
Input image is read,

Overview
not only the drive time of input filters and output memory is read
and operation is
devices but also the response delay caused by the Scan time (2) [Program processing] executed according
Image memory of to program.
operation cycle. (operation
cycle) each device is
updated

Acquiring the latest I/O information (3) [Output processing]

Result is Output 3
For acquiring the latest input information or transferred to devices

List
Instruction
output latch
immediately outputting the operation result in the Batch I/O method memory are driven
(refresh method)
middle of the operation cycle shown above, the I/O
refresh instruction is available.

2. Short pulses cannot be received. 4

The ON duration and OFF duration of inputs in PLCs require longer time than "PLC cycle time + Input filter

in Detail
Devices
response delay".
When the response delay of the input filter "10 ms" is considered and the cycle time is supposed as "10 ms",
the ON duration and OFF duration should be at least 20 ms respectively.
Accordingly, PLCs cannot handle input pulses at 25 Hz (1000 / (20 + 20) = 25) or more. However, the
situation can be improved by PLC special functions and applied instructions. 5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Convenient functions for improvement
By using the following functions, PLCs
can receive pulses shorter than the This "input ON" can be received
operation cycle: "Input ON" cannot This "input OFF"
be received cannot be received
• High speed counter function
OFF ON ON OFF 6
• Input interrupt function

Programming
Before
Program Program Program Program
• Pulse catch function processing processing processing processing
• Input filter value adjustment function Input processing
Operation cycle
Output processing ( Time)

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

177
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.4 Mutual Relationship Among Program Flow Control Instructions

6.4 Mutual Relationship Among Program Flow Control Instructions

The table below shows the mutual relationship among various program flow control instructions.
In the table below, " " indicates containment relationship, and " " indicates that zones are partially
overlapped.
Instruction in top line Instruction in top line
Instruction in Instruction in
left line left line
Example 1: MC −− CJ −− P −− MCR Example 2: MC −− CJ −− MCR −− P

Top line
MC-MCR CJ-P EI-DI FOR-NEXT STL-RET
Left line

3 octet 3 Example 3 3 3
1
MC-MCR
Example
2 3
3 3 3 3 3
CJ-P
3
3 3 3 3 3
EI-DI
3 3 3 3 3
3 3 3 quintet
FOR-NEXT
3 *2

inside
3 3 one
STL
STL-RET
3
3 3 3
P-SRET
3
3 3 3
I-IRET
3
3 3 3 3
FEND-END
*1

3 3 3 3 3
O-FEND
3 3
O-END 3 3 3 3 3
(no FEND)
*1

178
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.4 Mutual Relationship Among Program Flow Control Instructions

Introduction
2

Overview
3:This combination can be used without any problem.
× :This combination is not allowed; Operation error will be occurs.
U:This combination is allowed, but is better not to be used because the operation will be complicated.

P-SRET I-IRET FEND-END Remarks

3

List
Instruction
*1 The DI skip status occurs, but this is not an
error.

*2 4
FOR FOR NEXT NEXT

in Detail
Devices
3
The operation indicated by continuous lines is
*1 discribed.
3 3
5
3 3 3 *3 The first FEND or END is valid, but the intended

Constant
Device &
Specified the
processes will not occur. But this is not an
error.

Programming
Before
Instructions having containment relationship can
be combined except some combinations as
follows: 7

Instruction
Basic
1) MC-MCR cannot be used in FOR-NEXT, STL-RET,
P-SRET and I-RET.

2) STL-RET cannot be used in FOR-NEXT, P-SRET

and I-IRET.
8
3) MC-MCR, FOR-NEXT, P-SRET and I-IRET cannot
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

*3
3 3 be interrupted by I, IRET, SRET, FEND, END, etc.
*3

*3
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

*3

*3

*3
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

179
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.5 General Rules for Applied Instructions

6.5 General Rules for Applied Instructions

6.5.1 Expression and operation type of applied instructions

Instructions and operands

- Both a function number FNC 00 to FNC ……… and a symbol (mnemonic) indicating the contents are
given to each applied instruction.
For example, a mnemonic "SMOV (shift move)" is assigned to FNC 13 instruction.
- Some applied instructions function only with their instruction part, but many instructions consist of the
instruction part and following operands.
Command
input FNC 13 S‚ m1 m2 D‚ n
SMOV

S : An operand whose contents do not change by execution of the instruction is called

"source", and is indicated by this symbol.
When a device number can be indexed with index registers, the source is expressed as
S with addition of " ‚ ".
When there are two or more sources, they are expressed as S1 , S2 , etc.
D : An operand whose contents change by execution of the instruction is called "destination",
and indicated by this symbol.
When indexing is allowed and there are two or more destinations, they are expressed as
D1 , D2 , etc. in the same way as sources.
m, n : Operands not falling under source or destination are expressed as m and n.
When indexing is allowed and there are two or more such operands, they are expressed as
m1 ‚, m2 ‚, n1 ‚, n2 ‚,etc. in the same way as sources and destinations.

- In applied instructions, the program step of the instruction part always occupies 1 step, but each
operand occupies 2 or 4 steps depending on whether the instruction is 16-bit type or 32-bit type.

Devices handled as operands

- Bit devices themselves such as X, Y, M and S may be handled.
- Combined bit devices, KnX, KnY, KnM, KnS, etc, may be handled as numeric value data.
→ Refer to Section 5.4.
- Data registers D and current value registers for timers T and counters C may be handled.
- Though data registers D are the 16-bit type, two serial data registers are combined when 32-bit data is
handled.
For example, when a data register D0 is specified as an operand in a 32-bit instruction, D1 and D0 are
combined to handle 32-bit data. (D1 handles high-order 16 bits, and D0 handles low-order 16 bits.)
When current value registers for T and C are used as general data registers, they are handled in the
same way.
However, each of 32-bit counters C200 to C255 can handle 32-bit data, and cannot be specified as an
operand in a 16-bit instruction.

180
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.5 General Rules for Applied Instructions

1
Instruction form and operation type

Introduction
Applied instructions are classified into "16-bit type" or "32-bit type" by the size of handled numeric values.
And by the operation type, applied instructions are classified into "continuous operation type" or "pulse
operation type".
Some applied instructions have every combination of this form and type, and others do not.

1. 16-bit type and 32-bit type

2

Overview
- Applied instructions handling numeric values are classified into the 16-bit type or the 32-bit type by the
bit length of the numeric value data.

Command 1
FNC 12 D10 D12 This instruction transfers the contents of D10 to D12.

Command 2
MOV
This instruction transfers the contents of D21 and D20 to
3
FNC 12

List
Instruction
D20 D22 D23 and D22.
DMOV

- In a 32-bit type instruction, the symbol "D" is added (example: DMOV).

- Either an odd or even device number can be specified, and a specified device is combined with a device
having the subsequent larger number (in the case of word devices such as T, C and D).
4

in Detail
Devices
For avoiding confusion, it is recommended to specify an even device number (which will be the low-
order side) for an operand in a 32-bit instruction.
- 32-bit counter (C200 to C255) is regarded as 32 bits, and cannot be used as an operand in a 16-bit
instruction.

2. Pulse operation type and continuous operation type 5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Pulse operation type
In the example shown in the figure on the right, when X000 turns X000
ON from OFF, the instruction is executed only once, and is not FNC 12 D10 D12
MOVP
executed in any other case.
When it is not necessary to continually execute an instruction,
use the pulse operation type. 6
The symbol "P" indicates the pulse operation type.

Programming
Before
"DMOVP" indicates also the pulse operation type.

Continuous operation type

X001
The figure on the right shows a continuous operation type FNC 12 D10 D12
instruction. While X001 is ON, the instruction is executed in
every operation cycle.
MOV
7

Instruction
Basic
In the continuous operation type of some instructions such as FNC 24 (INC) and FNC 25 (DEC), the
contents of the destination change in every operation cycle.
For applied instructions requiring attention in using the continuous operation type, the symbol " " is
added to the title of the explanation of such instructions as shown in the figure below.
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

FNC 12 No.
D MOV name P
Instruction

In any case, instructions are not executed while the drive input X000 or X001 is OFF. And the destinations
do not change except when instructions specify otherwise.
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

181
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.5 General Rules for Applied Instructions

6.5.2 Handling of general flags

In some types of applied instructions, the following flags operate:
Examples: M8020: Zero flag M8021: Borrow flag M8022: Carry flag
M8029: Instruction execution complete flag
M8090: Block comparison signal M8328: Instruction non-execution flag
M8329: Instruction execution abnormal complete flag
M8304: Zero Flag M8306:Carry Flag
These flags turn ON or OFF every time various instructions turn ON, but do not change when various
instructions turn OFF not driven or when errors have occurred.
Because these flags turn ON or OFF in many instructions, the ON/OFF status of flags change every time
such instructions are executed.
Program flag contacts directly under each instruction while referring to the examples below.

1. Program containing many flags (example of instruction execution complete flag M8029)
When two or more instruction execution complete flags M8029 are programmed together for applied
instructions, it is difficult to determine which instruction executes which flag.
For using flags in any positions other than directly under applied instructions, refer to the next page.

Good example

...
M8000
FNC 72 X10 Y10 D0 K1
DSW

M8029
FNC 22 D0 K10 D20
Execution is MUL
M8029 works as completed
a flag to indicate
...
that execution of
DSW is
completed.
X000
SET M0

M0
FNC 57 K1000 D20 Y000
DPLSY
M8029 works as
a flag to indicate
that execution of M8029
DPLSY is RST M0
completed. Execution is
completed

Bad example M8029 works as M8029

a flag to indicate Program for the second DPLSY
that execution of RST M0
instruction
...

the second Execution is

DPLSY is completed
completed.
M8000
FNC 72 X10 Y10 D0 K1
DSW
M8029 works as
a flag to indicate X000
that execution of M0
DSW is SET
completed.
M0
FNC 57 K1000 D20 Y000 First DPLSY instruction
DPLSY
M8029 works as
a flag to indicate
that execution of M8029
FNC 22 Program for DSW
the first DPLSY D0 K10 D20
is completed. Execution is MUL instruction
completed
M1
FNC 57 Second DPLSY
K1000 D22 Y001
DPLSY instruction

182
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.5 General Rules for Applied Instructions

1
2. Introduction of method for using flags in any positions other than directly under applied

Introduction
instructions
When two or more applied instructions are programmed, general flags turn ON or OFF when each applied
instruction turns ON.
Accordingly, when using a flag in any position other than directly under an applied instruction, set to ON or
OFF another device just under the applied instruction, and then use the contact of the device as the 2
command contact.

Overview
...
M8000
FNC 72
DSW
X10 Y10 D0 K1 3

List
Instruction
DSW execution M8029
complete flag
M8029 is Execution is
M100
changed to completed
M100.
M0
FNC 57 K1000 D20 Y000 4
DPLSY

in Detail
Devices
DPLSY M8029
execution
complete flag RST M0
Execution is
M8029 is completed
changed to
M200.
M200 5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
...

It works as DSW
execution
complete flag.
M100
FNC 22
MUL
D0 K10 D20 6

Programming
Before
It works as
DPLSY execution
complete flag.
M200
Y030

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

183
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.5 General Rules for Applied Instructions

6.5.3 Handling of operation error flag

When there is an error in the applied instruction configuration, target device or target device number range
and an error occurs while operation is executed, the following flag turns ON and the error information is
stored.

1. Operation error

Error detected step number storange device

Error flag Error code storange device
FX3U/FX3UC PLC FX3G PLC
M8067 D8067 D8315, D8314, D8069 D8069

• When an operation error has occurred, M8067 turns ON and D8067 stores the operation error code
number.
• In the FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, D8315 and D8314 (32 bits in total) store the step number in which the error has
occurred.
When the error occurrence step number is up to 32767, the error occurrence step can be checked also in
D8069 (16 bits).
• In the FX3G PLC, D8069 stores the error occurrence step number.
• If another error occurs in another step, the stored data is updated in turn to the error code and step number
of the new error. (These devices are set to OFF when errors are cleared.)
• When the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN, these devices are cleared instantaneously, and then
set to ON again if errors have not been cleared.

2. Operation error latch

Error detected step number storange device

Error flag Error code storange device
FX3U/FX3UC PLC FX3G PLC
M8068 − D8315, D8314, D8068 D8068

• When an operation error has occurred, M8068 turns ON.

• In the FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, D8313 and D8312 (32 bits in total) store the step number in which the error has
occurred.
When the error occurrence step number is up to 32767, the error occurrence step can be checked also in
D8068 (16 bits).
• In the FX3G PLC, D8068 stores the error occurrence step number.
• Even if another error has occurred in another step, the stored data is not updated, and remains held until
these devices are forcibly reset or until the power turns OFF.
• When the error occurrence step is up to the 32767th step, the error occurrence step can be checked in
D8068 (16 bits).

184
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.5 General Rules for Applied Instructions

1
6.5.4 Handling functions of extension flag

Introduction
In some applied instructions, the function can be extended by combining a specific special auxiliary relay
determined for each applied instruction. An example is explained below.

- When X000 turns ON, this instruction exchanges the

X000 2
contents of D10 and D11 with each other. FNC 17 D10 D11

Overview
XCHP

- If M8160 has been driven before the XCH instruction

X000
and the source and destination of the XCH instruction M8160 Function extension flag
are specified to the same device, high-order 8 bits and
low-order 8 bits are exchanged with each other inside
for the XCH instruction
3
FNC 17 D10 D10

List
Instruction
the device. XCHP

- For returning this XCH instruction to the normal XCH Same number
instruction, it is necessary to set M8160 to OFF. M8160

When using an instruction requiring the function extension flag in an interrupt program, program DI instruction 4
(for disabling interrupt) before driving the function extension flag, and program EI instruction (for enabling

in Detail
Devices
interrupt) after turning OFF the function extension flag.

6.5.5 Limitation in number of instructions

5
Limitation in the number of instructions and limitation in simultaneous driving

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Some applied instructions can be used only up to the specified number of times.

Instruction Allowable number

Remarks
name of times of use
FNC 52(MTR) 1 MTR instruction can only be used once in program. 6
FNC53 (HSCS)

Programming
Before
FNC54 (HSCR) 6 *1 The allowable number of times of use is restricted only in FX3G PLCs.
FNC55 (HSZ)
8 Pay attention so that this instruction does not overlap the input numbers of in
FNC 56(SPD) (1 instruction/1 input DVIT instruction, DOG inputs in ZRN instruction, zero point signal in DSZR
or less) instruction, input interrupt numbers and high speed counter input numbers. 7
FNC 60(IST) 1 −

Instruction
Basic
FNC 69(SORT) 1 −
FNC 70(TKY) 1 −
FNC 71(HKY) 1 −
FNC 75(ARWS) 1 − 8
FNC 77(PR) 2 PR instruction can only be used twice in a program.
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

FNC149(SORT2) 2 −
5
FNC186(DUTY) (1 instruction/1 input −
or less)
FNC280(HSCT) 1 − 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

*1. Total number of times that the FNC53 (HSCS), FNC54 (HSCR) and FNC55 (HSZ) instructions are
used

When using above instructions beyond the allowable number of times of use
For instructions whose operands allow indexing, device numbers and numeric values in such instructions can
be changed by index registers. 10
By indexing, when driving multiple instances simultaneously is not required, such instruction can be used as if
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

they were used beyond the allowable number of times.

→ Refer to "Subsection 5.7.3. Indexing example in instruction with limited number of use".

185
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 6 What to Understand before Programming
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 6.5 General Rules for Applied Instructions

Limitation in simultaneous instances of instructions

Some applied instructions can be programmed two or more times, but the number of simultaneous instances
is limited.
Even in instructions not shown below, if two or more instructions are driven at the same time for a same I/O
number, it is regarded as double outputs. In some combinations of instructions, the operation may be
disrupted, or the instructions cannot be executed.
For details, refer to the caution described in each instruction page.
For combinations of instructions, refer to "6.4 Mutual relationship among program flow control instructions".

1. Positioning instructions
Do not drive FNC 57 (PLSY), FNC 58 (PWM), FNC 59 (PLSR), FNC150 (DSZR), FNC151 (DVIT), FNC156
(ZRN), FNC157 (PLSV), FNC158 (DRVI) and FNC159 (DRVA) instructions at the same time for the same
output number.

2. High speed processing instructions

• FX3U/FX3UC PLC
In FNC 53 (HSCS), FNC 54 (HSCR) and FNC 55 (HSZ) instructions (including FNC280 (HSCT)
instruction), make sure that up to 32 instructions are driven at the same time. [FNC280 (HSCT) instruction
can be used only once.]
Note that "FNC280 (HSCT) instruction", "table high speed comparison mode of FNC 55 (HSZ) instruction)"
and "frequency control mode of FNC 55 (HSZ) instruction" can each only be used once.
• FX3G PLC
The FNC53 (HSCS), FNC54 (HSCR) and FNC55 (HSZ) instructions can be driven up to 6 times in total at
the same time.

3. External device communication instructions

• In FNC 80 (RS) and FNC 87 (RS2) instructions, do not drive two or more instructions at the same time for
the same port.
• It is impossible to combine and use FNC 80 (RS), FNC 87 (RS2), FNC270 (IVCK), FNC271 (IVDR),
FNC272 (IVRD), FNC273 (IVWR) and FNC274 (IVBWR) instructions for the same port.
• In FNC270 (IVCK), FNC271 (IVDR), FNC272 (IVRD), FNC273 (IVWR) and FNC274 (IVBWR) instructions,
two or more instructions can be driven at the same time for the same port.

186
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

Introduction
7. Basic Instruction
This chapter explains types and functions of basic sequence instructions. 2
For beginners to sequence control, we offer "Introduction Course" and "Relay Ladder Course" learning texts

Overview
for reference.
We can also offer the PLC learning software "Beginner Course".
Mnemonic Name Symbol Function Applicable devices Reference

Contact Instruction 3
Initial logical operation

List
Instruction
Applicable devices
LD Load contact type NO (normally X,Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.1
open)
Initial logical operation
LDI Load Inverse Applicable devices contact type NC (normally X,Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.1
closed)

Applicable devices Initial logical operation of

4
LDP Load Pulse X,Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.5

in Detail
Devices
rising edge pulse

Applicable devices Initial logical operation of

LDF Load Falling Pulse X,Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.5
falling/trailing edge pulse

AND AND
Applicable devices Serial connection of NO
(normally open) contacts
X,Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.3 5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Applicable devices Serial connection of NC
ANI AND Inverse X,Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.3
(normally closed) contacts

Applicable devices Serial connection of rising

ANDP AND Pulse X,Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.5
edge pulse
6
Applicable devices Serial connection of falling/

Programming
Before
ANDF AND Falling Pulse X,Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.5
trailing edge pulse

Parallel connection of NO
OR OR X,Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.4
Applicable devices (normally open) contacts

Parallel connection of NC
7
ORI OR Inverse X,Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.4

Instruction
Basic
Applicable devices (normally closed) contacts

Parallel connection of
ORP OR Pulse X,Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.5
Applicable devices rising edge pulse

ORF OR Falling Pulse

Parallel connection of
X,Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.5
8
falling/trailing edge pulse
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Applicable devices

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

187
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

Mnemonic Name Symbol Function Applicable devices Reference

Connection Instruction

Serial connection of
ANB AND Block − Section 7.7
multiple parallel circuits

Parallel connection of
ORB OR Block − Section 7.6
multiple contact circuits

Stores the current result of

Memory Point
MPS the internal PLC Section 7.8
Store MPS operations
Reads the current result of
MRD Memory Read MRD − Section 7.8
the initial PLC operations
Pops (recalls and
MPP Memory POP MPP removes) the currently Section 7.8
stored result

INV Invert the current result of

INV Inverse the internal PLC − Section 7.10
operations
Conversion of
MEP MEP operation result − Section 7.11
to leading edge pulse
Conversion of
MEF MEF operation result − Section 7.11
to trailing edge pulse
Out Instruction

Applicable devices Final logical operation type

OUT OUT Y,M,S,D….b,T,C Section 7.2
coil drive

SET SET SET Applicable devices Set bit device latch ON Y,M,S,D….b Section 7.13

Y,M,S,D….b,T,C,
RST Reset RST Applicable devices Reset bit device OFF Section 7.13
D,R,V,Z

PLS Pulse PLS Applicable devices Rising edge pulse Y,M Section 7.12

PLF Pulse Falling PLF Applicable devices Falling/trailing edge pulse Y,M Section 7.12

Master Control Instruction

Denotes the start of a
MC Master Control MC N Applicable devices Y,M Section 7.9
master control block

Master Control Denotes the end of a

MCR MCR N − Section 7.9
Reset master control block
Other Instruction

NOP No Operation No operation or null step − Section 7.14

End Instruction
Program end, I/O refresh
END END END − Section 7.15
and return to step 0

188
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.1 LD, LDI

1
7.1 LD, LDI

Introduction
Outline
LD and LDI instructions are contacts connected to bus lines.
When combined with ANB instruction described later, LD and LDI instructions can be used for the start of
2

Overview
branches.

1. Instruction format
Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
LD
LD Continuous
Operation
Pulse (Single)
3
Load −

List
Instruction
Operation

Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

LDI Continuous
LDI Operation
Load
Inverse
− Pulse (Single)
Operation 4

in Detail
Devices
→ For the number of instruction steps, refer to Section 7.15.

2. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Instruc-
tion
System User Digit Specification System User
Special
Unit
Index
Con- Real Charac-
stant Number ter String
Pointer 5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
S S S
LD 3 3 3 S3 S4
1 1 2
S S S
LDI 3 3 3 S3 S4
1 1 2
6
S1: Special auxiliary relays (M) and 32-bit counters (C) cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z).

Programming
Before
S2: State relays (S) cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z).
S3: "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
S4: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation 7

Instruction
Basic
1. LD instruction (initial logical operation, NO contact type)
Circuit program List program

LD instruction
X000 0000 LD X000 Connection to bus line
Y000 0001 OUT Y000 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Bus line

Timing chart

X000 ON ON
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

Y000 ON ON

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

189
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.1 LD, LDI

2. LDI instruction (initial logical operation, NC contact type)

Circuit program List program

LDIinstruction
X000 0000 LDI X000 Connection to bus line
Y000 0001 OUT Y000
Bus line

Timing chart

X000 ON ON

Y000 ON ON

3. Indexing*1
Devices used in LD and LDI instructions allow indexing with index registers (V and Z).
(State relays (S), special auxiliary relays (M), 32-bit counters (C), and "D….b" cannot be indexed.)

V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7 are available in

Circuit program List program
indexing.
When used devices are inputs (X) and
outputs (Y), values of index registers (V and
X000V0 0000 LD X000V0 Z) are converted into octal numbers, and then
Y000 0003 OUT Y000
added.
Example:When the value of V0 is 10, LD
contact is set to ON (becomes
conductive) or OFF (becomes non-
conductive) by X012.
*1. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

4. Bit specification of data register (D)

A bit in data register (D) can be specified as a device used in LD and LDI instructions.

When specifying a bit in data register, input "."

Circuit program List program
after a data register (D) number, and then
input a bit number (0 to F) consecutively.
Only 16-bit data registers are available.
D0.3 0000 LD D0.3 Specify a bit number as "0, 1, 2, ... 9, A, B, ...
Y000 0003 OUT Y000
F" from the least significant bit.
Example:In the example shown on the left, LD
contact is set to ON (becomes
conductive) or OFF (becomes non-
conductive) by the bit 3 of D0.
*1. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Errors
• When an I/O number used in LD or LDI instruction does not exist due to indexing, M8316 (Non-existing I/O
specification error) turns ON.
• When the device number of a device (M, T or C) other than I/O used in LD or LDI instruction does not exist
due to indexing, an operation error (error code: 6706) occurs.

190
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.2 OUT

1
7.2 OUT

Introduction
Outline
OUT instruction drives coils of output relays (Y), auxiliary relays (M), state relays (S), timers (T) and counters
(C).
2

Overview
1. Instruction format
Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
OUT Continuous
OUT Operation
OUT − Pulse (Single)
Operation
3

List
Instruction
→ For the number of instruction steps, refer to Section 7.15.

2. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Instruc-
tion
System User Digit Specification System User
Special
Unit
Index
Con- Real Charac-
stant Number ter String
Pointer 4

in Detail
Devices
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
S S S
OUT 3 3 S3 S4
1 1 2
Set
3 3 S4 3
value
5
S1: Special auxiliary relays (M) and 32-bit counters (C) cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z).

Constant
Device &
Specified the
S2: State relays (S) cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z).
S3: "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
S4: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation 6

Programming
Before
1. When a bit device is used
A device described in OUT instruction turns ON or OFF according to the driven contact status.
Parallel OUT instructions can be used consecutively as many times as necessary.
In the program example shown below, OUT M100 and OUT M101 are parallel.
If two or more OUT instructions are executed for a same device number, however, the double output (double
coil) operation is resulted. 7

Instruction
Basic
Circuit program List program
Drive contact of
OUT instruction
OUT instruction
X000 0000 LD X000
Y000 0001 OUT Y000

OUT instruction
0002
0003
LDI
OUT
X001
M100
8
X001 0004 OUT M101
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

M100
OUT instruction
Program step numbers are
M101 automatically controlled.

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

191
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.2 OUT

Timing chart

ON ON
X000

OUT instruction Y000 ON ON

X001 ON ON

OUT instruction M100 ON

OUT instruction M101 ON

2. When a timer or counter is used

The set value is required after OUT instruction for the counting coil of a timer or counter.
The set value can be specified directly by a decimal number (K) or indirectly using a data register (D) or
extension register (R).
1) Direct specification
The set value of a timer or counter can be
Circuit program List program
specified directly by a decimal number (K).
X000 0000 LD X000
T0 K30
0001 OUT T0
(SP) K30
X001 0004 LDI X001
T1 K30 0005 OUT T1
(SP) K30
0008 OUT C0
(SP) K50
C0 K50

2) Indirect specification
The set value of a timer or counter can be
Circuit program List program set by a data register (D) or extension data
X000 0000 LD X000 register (R). At this time, the current value
T10 D10
0001 OUT T10 of the data register (D) or extension
(SP) D10 register (R) is regarded as the set value of
X001 0004 LDI X001
R15 0005 OUT T11 the timer or counter.
T11
(SP) R15 It is necessary to write in advance the set
0008 OUT C10 value to a data register (D) or extension
(SP) D20
C10 D20 register (R) used for the set value by MOV
instruction, DSW instruction or display unit
before driving the timer or counter.
3) Setting range of timers and counters
The table below shows the set value range of timers and counters, the actual timer constants and the
number of program steps (including the set value) for OUT instruction.
Setting range
Timer/counter Actual set value Number of steps
(Value of K or current value of D or R)
1 ms timer 1 to 32767 0.001 to 32.767 sec 3
10 ms timer 0.01 to 327.67 sec
1 to 32767 3
100 ms timer 0.1 to 3276.7 sec
16-bit counter 1 to 32767 Same as left 3
32-bit counter −2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 Same as left 5

192
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.2 OUT

1
3. Indexing*1

Introduction
Devices used in OUT instruction can be indexed with index registers (V and Z).
(State relays (S), special auxiliary relays (M), 32-bit counters (C), and "D….b" cannot be indexed.)

The index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7 are

Circuit program List program
available for indexing. 2
When a used device is an input (X) or output

Overview
(Y), the value of an index register (V or Z) is
X000 0000 LD X000 converted into an octal number, and then
Y000Z0 0001 OUT Y000Z0
added.
Example:When the value of Z0 is "20", Y024
turns ON or OFF.
3
*1. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

List
Instruction
4. Bit specification of data register (D)*1
A bit in data register (D) can be specified as a device used in OUT instruction.

Circuit program List program

When specifying a bit in data register, input "."
after a data register (D) number, and then
4

in Detail
Devices
input a bit number (0 to F) consecutively.
Only 16-bit data registers are available.
X000 0000 LD X000 Specify a bit number as "0, 1, 2, ... 9, A, B, ...
D0.3 0001 OUT D0.3
F" from the least significant bit.
Example: In the example shown on the left,
the bit 3 of D0 turns ON or OFF 5
when X000 turns ON or OFF.

Constant
Device &
Specified the
*1. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Caution
• When a special internal relay (M), timer or counter is used, program steps increase as described in
"Setting range of timers and counters" on the previous page.
6

Programming
Before
• Do not use the last bit number of a data register (D) or extension register (R) as the set value of a 32-bit
counter.

Errors
• When an I/O number used in OUT instruction does not exist due to indexing, M8316 (Non-existing I/O 7
specification error) turns ON.

Instruction
Basic
• When the device number of a device (M, T or C) other than I/O used in OUT instruction does not exist due
to indexing, an operation error (error code: 6706) occurs.

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

193
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.3 AND, ANI

7.3 AND, ANI

Outline
AND and ANI instructions connect one contact in series.
The number of contacts connected in series is not limited, so AND and ANI instructions can be used
consecutively as many times as necessary.
Output to another coil by way of a contact after OUT instruction is called cascade output.
Such cascade output can be repeated as many times as necessary as far as the order is correct.

1. Instruction format
Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
AND Continuous
AND Operation
− Pulse (Single)
AND Operation

Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

ANI Continuous
ANI Operation
− Pulse (Single)
AND Inverse Operation

→ For the number of instruction steps, refer to Section 7.15.

2. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Instruc- Special Con- Real Charac-
System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
tion Unit stant Number ter String
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
S S S
AND 3 3 3 S3 S4
1 1 2
S S S
ANI 3 3 3 S3 S4
1 1 2

S1: Special auxiliary relays (M) and 32-bit counters (C) cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z).
S2: State relays (S) cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z).
S3: "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
S4: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. AND instruction (serial connection of NO (normally open) contacts)
Circuit program List program

AND instruction
X002 X000 0000 LD X002
Y003 0001 AND X000 Contact connected
0002 OUT Y003 in series

Timing chart

LD instruction X002 ON ON

AND instruction X000 ON ON

Y003 ON

194
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.3 AND, ANI

1
2. ANI instruction (serial connection of NC (normally closed) contacts)

Introduction
Circuit program List program

ANI instruction
X002 X000 0000 LD X002
Y003 0001 ANI X000 Contact connected
in series
2
0002 OUT Y003

Overview
Timing chart

LD instruction X002 ON ON
3

List
Instruction
ANI instruction X000 ON ON

Y003 ON ON

4
*1
3. Indexing

in Detail
Devices
Devices used in AND and ANI instruction can be indexed with index registers (V and Z).
(State relays (S), special auxiliary relays (M), 32-bit counters (C), and "D….b" cannot be indexed.)

The index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7 are

Circuit program List program
available for indexing. 5
When a used device is an input (X) or output

Constant
Device &
Specified the
(Y), the value of an index register (V, Z) is
X002 X000V0 0000 LD X002 converted into an octal number, and then
Y003 0001 AND X000V0
0004 OUT Y003 added.
Example:When the value of V0 is "10", AND
contact is set to ON or OFF by
X012. 6

Programming
Before
*1. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

4. Bit specification of data register (D)*1

A bit in data register (D) can be specified as a device used in AND and ANI instructions.

When specifying a bit in data register, input "." 7

Circuit program List program
after a data register (D) number, and then

Instruction
Basic
input a bit number (0 to F) consecutively.
Only 16-bit data registers are available.
X002 D0.3 0000 LD X002 Specify a bit number as "0, 1, 2, ... 9, A, B, ...
Y003 0001 AND D0.3
0004 OUT Y003 F" from the least significant bit.
Example: In the example shown on the left, 8
AND contact turns ON (becomes
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

conductive) when the bit 3 of D0

turns ON.
*1. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Errors 9
• When an I/O number used in AND or ANI instruction does not exist due to indexing, M8316 (Non-existing I/
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

O specification error) turns ON.

• When the device number of a device (M, T or C) other than I/O used in AND or ANI instruction does not
exist due to indexing, an operation error (error code: 6706) occurs.

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

195
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.3 AND, ANI

Program examples
Circuit program List program

AND instruction
0000 LD X000
X000 X001 0001 AND X001 Contact connected
Y003 0002 OUT Y003 in series
ANI instruction 0003 LD X002
0004 ANI X003 Contact connected
X002 X003 0005 OUT Y004 in series
Y004 0006 AND X004 Contact connected
0007 OUT T0 in series
(SP) K30
AND instruction 0010 LD X005 Contact connected
0011 ANI T0 in series
X004 0012 OUT Y005
K30
T0
ANI instruction
X005 T0
Y005

196
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.4 OR, ORI

1
7.4 OR, ORI

Introduction
Outline
OR and ORI instructions are used to connect one contact in parallel.
If two or more contacts are connected in series, use ORB instruction described later to connect such a serial
2

Overview
circuit block to another circuit in parallel.
A step containing OR or ORI instruction is connected in parallel to a preceding step containing LD or LDI
instruction. There is no limitation in the number of times of parallel connection.

1. Instruction format
Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
3
OR Continuous

List
Instruction
OR Operation
− Pulse (Single)
OR Operation

Mnemonic Operation Condition

ORI
Basic Instruction
ORI Continuous
Operation
4

in Detail
Devices
− Pulse (Single)
OR Inverse Operation

→ For the number of instruction steps, refer to Section 7.15.

2. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Instruc- Special Con- Real Charac-
System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
tion Unit stant Number ter String
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
S S S
OR 3 3 3 S3 S4
1 1 2
S S S
6
ORI 3 3 3 S3 S4
1 1 2

Programming
Before
S1: Special auxiliary relays (M) and 32-bit counters (C) cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z).
S2: State relays (S) cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z).
S3: "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
S4: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
7

Instruction
Basic
Explanation of function and operation
1. OR instruction (parallel connection of NO (normally open) contacts)
Circuit program List program
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

X000 0000 LD X000

Y000 0001 OR X001
0002 OUT Y000
X001

Timing chart
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

LD instruction X000 ON ON

OR instruction X001 ON ON
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

Y000 ON ON ON

197
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.4 OR, ORI

2. ORI instruction (parallel connection of NC (normally closed) contacts)

Circuit program List program

X000 0000 LD X000

Y001 0001 ORI X002
0002 OUT Y001
X002

Timing chart

LD instruction X000 ON ON

ORI instruction ON ON ON
X002

Y001 ON ON ON

3. Relationship with ANB instruction

The parallel connection by OR or ORI
LD ANB LD instruction is connected to the preceding LD
or LDI instruction in principle. After ANB
instruction, however, the parallel connection
by OR or ORI instruction is connected to the
second preceding LD or LDI instruction.
OR OR

Before ANB
OR instruction

OR

After ANB instruction

4. Indexing*1
Devices used in OR and ORI instruction can be indexed with index registers (V and Z).
(State relays (S), special auxiliary relays (M), 32-bit counters, and "D….b" cannot be indexed.)

The index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7 are

Circuit program List program
available for indexing.
When a used device is an input (X) or output
(Y), the value of an index register (V or Z) is
X000 0000 LD X000 converted into an octal number, and then
Y000 0001 OR X001V0
0004 OUT Y000 added.
X001V0 Example:When the value of V0 is "10", OR
contact is set to ON (becomes
conductive) or OFF (becomes non-
conductive) by X013.
*1. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

198
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.4 OR, ORI

1
5. Bit specification of data register (D)*1

Introduction
A bit in data register (D) can be specified as a device used in OR and ORI instructions.

When specifying a bit in data register, input "."

Circuit program List program
after a data register (D) number, and then
input a bit number (0 to F) consecutively. 2
Only 16-bit data registers are available.

Overview
X000 0000 LD X000 Specify a bit number as "0, 1, 2, ... 9, A, B, ...
Y000 0001 OR D0.3
0004 OUT Y000 F" from the least significant bit.
D0.3 Example:In the example shown on the left,
OR contact is set to ON (becomes
conductive) or OFF (becomes non-
conductive) by the bit 3 of D0.
3

List
Instruction
*1. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Errors
• When an I/O number used in OR or ORI instruction does not exist due to indexing, M8316 (Non-existing I/
O specification error) turns ON. 4
• When the device number of a device (M, T or C) other than I/O used in OR or ORI instruction does not

in Detail
Devices
exist due to indexing, an operation error (error code: 6706) occurs.

Constant
Device &
Specified the
6

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

199
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.5 LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF

7.5 LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF

Outline
LDP, ANDP, and ORP instructions for contacts detect the rising edge, and become active during one
operation cycle only at the rising edge of a specified bit device (that is, when the bit device turns ON from
OFF).
Contact instructions LDF, ANDF and ORF detect the falling edge, and become active during one operation
cycle only at the falling edge of a specified bit device (that is, when the bit device turns OFF from ON).

1. Instruction format
Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
LDP − Continuous
Operation
Load Pulse LDP Pulse (Single)
Operation

Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

LDF − Continuous
Operation
Load Falling Pulse LDF Pulse (Single)
Operation

Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

ANDP − Continuous
Operation
AND Pulse ANDP Pulse (Single)
Operation

Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

ANDF − Continuous
Operation
AND Falling Pulse ANDF Pulse (Single)
Operation

Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

ORP − Continuous
Operation
OR Pulse ORP Pulse (Single)
Operation

Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

ORF − Continuous
Operation
OR Falling Pulse ORF Pulse (Single)
Operation

→ For the number of instruction steps, refer to Section 7.15.

2. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Instruc- Special Con- Real Charac-
System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
tion Unit stant Number ter String
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
LDP 3 3 3 3 3 3 S
LDF 3 3 3 3 3 3 S
ANDP 3 3 3 3 3 3 S
ANDF 3 3 3 3 3 3 S
ORP 3 3 3 3 3 3 S
ORF 3 3 3 3 3 3 S

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

200
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.5 LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF

1
Explanation of function and operation

Introduction
1. LDP, ANDP, and ORP instructions (initial logical operation of rising edge pulse, serial
connection of rising edge pulse, and parallel connection of rising edge pulse)
Circuit program List program
2

Overview
LDP instruction
X000 0000 LDP X000
M0 0002 ORP X001
0004 OUT M0
X001 ORP instruction
0005 LD M8000
0006 ANDP X002
M8000 X002
ANDP instruction
0008 OUT M1 3
M1

List
Instruction
RUN monitor

Timing chart

LDP instruction X000 ON ON 4

in Detail
Devices
ORP instruction X001 ON ON

ON during one
M0 operation cycle
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
M8000 ON

ANDP instruction X002 ON ON ON

ON during
6
one opera-

Programming
Before
M1 tion cycle

In the example shown above, M0 or M1 is ON during only one operation cycle when X000 to X002 turn ON
from OFF.

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

201
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.5 LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF

2. LDF, ANDF, and ORF instructions (initial logical operation of falling/trailing edge pulse,
serial connection of falling/trailing edge pulse, and parallel connection of falling/trailing
edge pulse)
Circuit program List program

LDF instruction
X000
0000 LDF X000
M0
0002 ORF X001
X001 0004 OUT M0
ORF instruction 0005 LD M8000
ANDF instruction 0006 ANDF X002
M8000 X002 0008 OUT M1
M1
RUN monitor

Timing chart

LDF instruction X000 ON ON

ORF instruction X001 ON ON

ON during
one opera-
M0 tion cycle

M8000 ON

ANDF instruction X002 ON ON ON

ON during
one opera-
M1 tion cycle

In the example shown above, M0 or M1 is ON during only one operation cycle when X000 to X002 turn OFF
from ON.

3. Bit specification of a data register (D)*1

A bit in data register (D) can be specified as a device used in LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP and ORF
instructions.
When specifying a bit in data register, input "."
Circuit program List program
after a data register (D) number, and then
input a bit number (0 to F) consecutively.
Only 16-bit data registers are available.
D0.3 0000 LDP D0.3 Specify a bit number as "0, 1, 2, ... 9, A, B, ...
Y000 0003 OUT Y000
F" from the least significant bit.
Example:In the example shown on the left,
LDP contact turns ON (becomes
conductive) or OFF (becomes non-
conductive) when the bit 3 of D0
turns ON or OFF.
*1. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

202
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.5 LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF

1
4. Output drive side

Introduction
The following two circuits offer a same operation:

<OUT instruction> <Pulse instruction>

X010 X010
M6 = PLS M6
2

Overview
X010
Operation Operation
M 6 cycle cycle

In each circuit, M6 is ON during only one operation cycle when X010 turns ON from OFF. 3

List
Instruction
<Rising edge detection> <Pulse instruction (applied instruction)>
X020 X020
FNC 12
MOV
K10 D0 = FNC 12
MOVP
K10 D0

In each circuit, MOV instruction is executed only once when X020 turns ON from OFF.
4

in Detail
Devices
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
6

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

203
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.5 LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF

5. Differences in the operation caused by auxiliary relay (M) numbers

When an auxiliary relay (M) is specified as a device in LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP and ORF instructions,
the operation varies depending on the device number range as shown in the figure below.

<M0 to M2799, M3072 to M7679>

After M0 is driven by X000, all contacts [1] to [4] corresponding
[1]
M0 to M0 are activated.
SET M50
•The contacts [1] to [3] detect the rising edge of M0.
X000 •Because of LD instruction, the contact [4] is conductive
M0
while M0 is ON.
[2] M0
SET M51
[3]
M0
SET M52

[4] M0
M53

<M2800 to M3071>
From M2800 driven by X000, the program is divided into the
M2800 upper block (block A) and the lower block (block B). In each of
SET M0 the blocks A and B, only the first contact which detects the
M2800 rising or falling edge is activated.
Block A
SET M1 Because of LD instruction, the contact in the block C is
conductive while M2800 is ON.
X000 By utilizing these characteristics, "transition of state by same
M2800 signal" in a step ladder circuit can be efficiently programmed.
M2800
SET M2

M2800
SET M3

Block B
M2800
SET M4

M2800
SET M5
M2800
SET M6
M2800
M7 Block C

204
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.5 LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, ORF

1
Cautions

Introduction
1. Cautions when LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP, or ORF instruction programmed in a same
step is executed two or more times within one operation cycle
When LDP, LDF, ANDP, ANDF, ORP or ORF instruction programmed in a same step is executed two or
more times within one operation cycle, the following operation results: 2

Overview
Programs executed two or more times
• Program between FOR and NEXT instructions FNC 08 K
• Program which executes a same subroutine program from two or FOR
more CALL instructions during one operation cycle X000

• Program which jumps to a label (P) in a smaller step number by CJ 3

instruction FNC 09

List
Instruction
NEXT
Operation
1) When a device turns ON from OFF
1st time: LDP, ANDP or ORP instruction turns ON.
2nd time and later: When the device status is same as the time when the instruction was executed last,
the instruction turns OFF.
4

in Detail
Devices
2) When a device turns OFF from ON
1st time: LDF, ANDF or ORF instruction turns ON.
2nd time and later: When the device status is same as the time when the instruction was executed last,
the instruction turns OFF.

2. Cautions on write during RUN 5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
1) Instructions for falling edge pulse
When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for falling edge pulse (LDF,
ANDF, or ORF instruction), the instruction for falling edge pulse is not executed without regard to the ON/
OFF status of the target device of the instruction for falling edge pulse.
When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for falling edge pulse (PLF
instruction), the instruction for falling edge pulse is not executed without regard to the ON/OFF status of 6
the operation condition device.

Programming
Before
It is necessary to set to ON the target device or operation condition device once and then set it to OFF for
executing the instruction for falling edge pulse.
2) Instructions for rising edge pulse
When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for rising edge pulse, the
instruction for rising edge pulse is executed if a target device of the instruction for rising edge pulse or the 7
operation condition device is ON.

Instruction
Basic
Target instructions for rising edge pulse: LDP, ANDP, ORP, and pulse operation type applied instructions
(such as MOVP)

Contact ON/OFF status

(while write during RUN is executed)
Instruction for rising edge pulse Instruction for falling edge pulse 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

OFF Not executed Not executed

ON *1 Not executed
Executed

*1. PLS instruction is not executed.

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

205
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.6 ORB

7.6 ORB

Outline
A circuit in which two or more contacts are connected in series is called serial circuit block.

1. Instruction format
Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
ORB Continuous
ORB Operation
1 step
OR Block − Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Instruc- Special Con- Real Charac-
System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
tion Unit stant Number ter String
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
ORB There are no applicable devices.

Explanation of function and operation

1. ORB instruction (parallel connection of multiple contact circuits)
When connecting serial circuit blocks in parallel, use LD or LDI instruction at the start of branch, and use
ORB instruction at the end of branch.
ORB instruction is an independent instruction not associated with any device number in the same way as
ANB instruction described later.
When there are many parallel circuits, ORB instruction can be used for each circuit block to connect them.

Circuit program List program

X000 X001 Appropriate program Inappropriate program

Y006 0000 LD X000 0000 LD X000
0001 AND X001 0001 AND X001
0002 LD X002 0002 LD X002
ORB instruction
0003 AND X003 0003 AND X003
X002 X003 0004 ORB 0004 LDI X004
0005 LDI X004 0005 AND X005
0006 AND X005 0006 ORB
ORB instruction 0007 ORB 0007 ORB
0008 OUT Y006 0008 OUT Y006
X004 X005

Serial circuit block

Caution
There is no limitation in the number of parallel circuits which can be connected by ORB instructions (in the
case of appropriate program shown above).
Though ORB instructions can be used at one time, note that the repeated use of LD or LDI instruction is
limited to 8 or less (in the case of inappropriate program shown above).

206
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.7 ANB

1
7.7 ANB

Introduction
Outline
Use ANB instruction to connect a branch circuit (parallel circuit block) to the preceding circuit in series.
Use LD or LDI instruction at the start of branch. After completing a parallel circuit block, connect the parallel
2

Overview
circuit block to the preceding circuit in series by ANB instruction.
When there are many parallel circuits, ANB instruction can be used in each circuit block to connect them.

1. Instruction format

ANB
Basic Instruction Mnemonic
ANB
Operation Condition
Continuous 3
1 step Operation

List
Instruction
AND Block − Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Applicable devices

Instruc-
Bit Devices Word Devices
Special Con- Real
Others
Charac-
4
System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer

in Detail
Devices
tion Unit stant Number ter String
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
ANB There are no applicable devices.

Explanation of function and operation 5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
1. ANB instruction (serial connection of multiple parallel circuits)
Circuit program List program
LD
ANB
X000 X002 X003
Y007
0000 LD X000 6
0001 OR X001

Programming
Before
0002 LD X002 Branch start point
X001 X004 X005
0003 AND X003
ORB 0004 LDI X004
X006 0005 AND X005
0006 ORB Parallel block is completed.
0007 OR X006 7
0008 ANB It is connected to the

Instruction
Basic
0009 OR X003 preceding circuit in series.
Parallel block
X003 0010 OUT Y007

OR instruction before ANB instruction

OR instruction after ANB instruction
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Caution
There is no limitation in the number of ANB instruction.
Though ANB instructions can be used at one time, note that the repeated use of LD or LDI instruction is
limited to 8 or less in the same way as ORB instruction. 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

207
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.8 MPS, MRD, MPP

7.8 MPS, MRD, MPP

Outline
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs have 11 memories called "Stack" which store the intermediate result (ON or OFF) of
operations.

1. Instruction format
Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
MPS MPS Continuous
1 step Operation
Memory Point Store Pulse (Single)
− Operation

Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

MRD MRD Continuous
1 step Operation
Memory Read − Pulse (Single)
Operation

Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

MPP MPP Continuous
1 step Operation
Memory POP − Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Instruc- Special Con- Real Charac-
System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
tion Unit stant Number ter String
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
MPS There are no applicable devices.
MRD There are no applicable devices.
MPP There are no applicable devices.

208
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.8 MPS, MRD, MPP

1
Explanation of function and operation

Introduction
These instructions are convenient in programming branched multi-output circuits.

1. MPS, MRD, and MPP instructions (stores the current result of the internal PLC operations,
reads the current result of the internal PLC operations, and pops (recalls and removes) the
currently stored result) 2
MPS

Overview
X004 X005 0018 LD X004
18 Y002
0019 MPS MPP
X006 1 [2]
0020 AND X005 MRD
Y003 2 [1]
0021 OUT Y002
MRD
Y004 0022 MRD
3 MPS
3
0023 AND X006

List
Instruction
MRD X007 MPP
Y005 0024 OUT Y003
0025 MRD
MPP 10
0026 OUT Y004
11
0027 MPP
Stack
0028 AND X007 4
0029 OUT Y005

in Detail
Devices
0030 END

• Use MPS instruction to store the intermediate result of operation, and then drive the output Y002.
• Use MRD instruction to read the stored data, and then drive the output Y003.
MRD instruction can be programmed as many times as necessary. 5
• In the final output circuit, use MPP instruction instead of MRD instruction.

Constant
Device &
Specified the
MPP instruction reads the stored data described above, and then resets it.

Error
MPS instruction can be used two or more times.
However, the difference between number of MPS instructions and the number of MPP instructions should be 6
11 or less, and should be 0 at the end.

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

209
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.8 MPS, MRD, MPP

Program examples
1) Program example 1: One stack
Only one stack is used in this example.

Circuit program List program

MPS
X000 X001 X002 0000 LD X000
Y000 0001 AND X001
0002 MPS
Y001 0003 AND X002
0004 OUT Y000
MPP 0005 MPP
MPS 0006 OUT Y001
X003 X004 0007 LD X003
Y002 0008 MPS
X005 0009 AND X004
Y003 0010 OUT Y002
0011 MPP
MPP 0012 AND X005
0013 OUT Y003
MPS 0014 LD X006
X006 X007 0015 MPS
Y004 0016 AND X007
0017 OUT Y004
X010 0018 MRD
Y005
0019 AND X010
MRD X011 0020 OUT Y005
Y006 0021 MRD
0022 AND X011
MRD X012
Y007 0023 OUT Y006
0024 MPP
MPP 0025 AND X012
0026 OUT Y007

210
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.8 MPS, MRD, MPP

1
2) Program example 2: One stack with ANB and ORB instructions

Introduction
Circuit program List program
MPS
X000 X001
Y000
0000 LD X000
2

Overview
X002 0001 MPS
0002 LD X001
0003 OR X002
X003 X004
Y001 0004 ANB
0005 OUT Y000
MRD X005 X006 0006 MRD 3
0007 LD X003

List
Instruction
X007 0008 AND X004
Y002 0009 LD X005
0010 AND X006
MPP X010
0011 ORB
Y003
0012 ANB 4
X011 0013 OUT Y001

in Detail
Devices
0014 MPP
0015 AND X007
0016 OUT Y002
0017 LD X010
0018
0019
OR
ANB
X011
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
0020 OUT Y003

3) Program example 3: Two stacks

Circuit program List program

6
X000 X001 X002 0000 LD X000

Programming
Before
Y000 0001 MPS
X003 0002 AND X001
MPS MPS
Y001 0003 MPS
MPP 0004 AND X002
X004 X005 0005
0006
OUT
MPP
Y000 7
Y002

Instruction
Basic
0007 AND X003
MPP MPS X006
0008 OUT Y001
Y003
0009 MPP
MPP 0010 AND X004
0011
0012
MPS
AND X005
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

0013 OUT Y002

0014 MPP
0015 AND X006
0016 OUT Y003

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

211
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.8 MPS, MRD, MPP

4) Program example 4: Four stacks

Circuit program List program

MPS MPS MPS MPS

X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 0000 LD X000 0009 OUT Y000
Y000 0001 MPS 0010 MPP
0002 AND X001 0011 OUT Y001
Y001 0003 MPS 0012 MPP
0004 AND X002 0013 OUT Y002
MPP
0005 MPS 0014 MPP
Y002
0006 AND X003 0015 OUT Y003
MPP 0007 MPS 0016 MPP
Y003 0008 AND X004 0017 OUT Y004
MPP
Y004
MPP

X000 0000 LD X000

Y004 0001 OUT Y004
X001 0002 AND X001
Y003 0003 OUT Y003
0004 AND X002
X002
0005 OUT Y002
Y002
0006 AND X003
X003 0007 OUT Y001
Y001 0008 AND X004
X004 0009 OUT Y000
Y000

In programming a circuit on the upper side, it is necessary to MPS instruction three times.
By changing the circuit on the upper side into the circuit on the lower side, the same contents can be
programmed easily without MPS instruction.

212
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.9 MC, MCR

1
7.9 MC, MCR

Introduction
Outline
When MC instruction is executed, the bus line (LD or LDI point) is moved to a position after MC contact.
The bus line can be returned to the original position by MCR instruction.
2

Overview
By changing a device (Y or M) number, MC instruction can be used as many times as necessary.
If a same device number is used twice, however, it results in the double coil operation in the same way as
OUT instruction.

1. Instruction format
Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
3
MC Continuous

List
Instruction
MC Operation
Master Control − Pulse (Single)
Operation

Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

MCR
2 steps
MCR Continuous
Operation 4
Master Control − Pulse (Single)

in Detail
Devices
Operation
Reset
→ For the number of steps of MC instruction, refer to Section 7.15.

2. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others 5
Instruc- Special Con- Real Charac-

Constant
Device &
Specified the
System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
tion Unit stant Number ter String
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
MC 3 S
MCR There are no applicable devices.

S: Except special auxiliary relays (M)

6

Programming
Before
Explanation of function and operation
1. MC and MCR instructions (denotes the start of a master control block and denotes the end
of a master control block)
When MC instruction is executed, the bus line is moved to a position after MC contact. 7
Drive instructions connected to the bus line after MC contact execute each operation only when MC

Instruction
Basic
instruction is executed, and do not execute the operation when MC instruction is not executed.
In the program example below, the instructions from MC to MCR are executed as they are while the input
X000 is ON.
However, while the input X000 is OFF, each driven device offers the following operation:
Timers (except retentive type timers) and devices driven by OUT instruction: Turn OFF. 8
Retentive type timers, counters and devices driven by SET/RST instruction: Hold the current status.
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

The expressions of circuit programs used to explain operations are circuits (for reading or monitoring) of GX
Developer.

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

213
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.9 MC, MCR

Circuit program List program

0000 LD X000
X000
MC N 0 M100 0001 MC N000
Three-step instruction
SP M100
N0 M100 0004 LD X001
0005 OUT Y000
X001 0006 LD X002
Y000 0007 OUT Y001
0008 MCR N 0 ← Two-step instruction
X002
Y001

MCR N 0 ← Write MCR N0 instruction.

Program examples
1) When the nesting structure is not adopted

Circuit program List program

0000 LD X000
X000
MC N 0 M100 0001 MC N000
Three-step instruction
SP M100
N0 M100 0004 LD X001
0005 OUT Y000
X001 0006 LD X002
Y000 0007 OUT Y001
0008 MCR N000 ← Two-step instruction
X002
Y001

MCR N 0 ← Return to the bus line ("N0" shows the

nest level.)

X003
MC N 0 M150 ← When not adopting the nesting structure,
use "N0" again. There is no limitation in
N0 M150 the number of "N0".
Only in the nesting structure, increase
the nest level "N" in the way "N0 →
X004 N1 ... N6 → N7" as shown in the
Y002 example 2 on the next page.

X005
Y003

MCR N 0

214
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.9 MC, MCR

1
2) When the nesting structure is adopted

Introduction
When using MC instructions inside MC instruction, increase the nest level "N" in turn in the way "N0 → N1
→ N2 → N3 → N4 → N5 → N6 → N7".
For returning from the nesting structure, reset the nest levels from the highest one in turn using MCR
instruction in the way "N7 → N6 → N5 → N4 → N3 → N2 → N1 → N0".
For example, if "MCR N5" is programmed without programming "MCR N6" and "MCR N7", the nest level
is returned to 5 at one time.
2

Overview
Available nest levels are from N0 to N7 (eight layers).

Circuit program
While X000
is OFF X000 N0

[A]
MC N 0 M100
3

List
Instruction
N0 M100

X001 Level N0
Y000
The bus line B is active while X000 is ON.
[B]

While 4
X002 is X002

in Detail
Devices
OFF N1
MC N 1 M101

N1 M101

X003 Level N1
Y001 The bus line C is active while both X000 and
X002 are ON.
5
[C]

Constant
Device &
Specified the
While
X004 X004
is OFF N2
MC N 2 M102

N2 M102 6

Programming
Before
X005 Level N2
Y002 The bus line D is active while all of X000,
X002 and X004 are ON.

[D]
MCR N 2
7
N2

Instruction
Basic
X006
Y003 Level N1
The bus line returns to the status of the bus
line C by "MCR N2".
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

[C] MCR N 1
N1

X007
Y004 Level N0
The bus line returns to the status of the bus
line B by "MCR N1". 9
[B]
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

MCR N 0
N0
Initial status
The bus line returns to the initial status of the
X010
Y005 bus line A by "MCR N0". Accordingly, Y005 10
turns ON or OFF by turning ON or OFF of
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

X010 without regard to X000, X002 and X004.

[A]

215
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.10 INV

7.10 INV

Outline
1. Instruction Format
INV instruction inverts the operation result up to just before INV instruction, and does not require device
number specification.
Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
INV INV Continuous
1 step Operation
Inverse − Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Instruc- Special Con- Real Charac-
System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
tion Unit stant Number ter String
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
INV There are no applicable devices.

Explanation of function and operation

1. INV instruction (inverts the result of operations)
Circuit program List program Timing chart
ON
0 LD X000 X000 OFF OFF
X000
Y000 1 INV
2 OUT Y000
Y000 ON OFF
ON

Operation result until just Operation result after INV

before INV instruction instruction is executed
OFF ON
ON OFF

Inverted
In the figure above, Y000 turns ON when X000 is OFF, and Y000 turns OFF when X000 is ON.
INV instruction can be used in a same position as serial contact instructions (AND, ANI, ANDP and ANDF).
Different from LD, LDI, LDP and LDF instructions shown in the list, INV instruction cannot execute connection
to bus lines. Different from OR, ORI, ORP and ORF instructions, INV instruction cannot be used
independently in parallel to a contact instruction.
2. Operation range of INV instruction
When INV instruction is used in a complicated circuit containing ORB and ANB instructions, the operation
range of INV instruction is as shown in the figure below:

LD LD

LD LD

LD LD

INV instruction inverts the operation result after LD, LDI, LDP or LDF instruction located before INV
instruction.
Accordingly, if INV instructions are used inside ORB and ANB instructions, blocks after LD, LDI, LDP or LDF
instruction seen from each INV instruction are regarded as the target of INV operation.

216
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.11 MEP, MEF

1
7.11 MEP, MEF

Introduction
Outline
MEP and MEF commands are instructions that change the operation results to pulses so that device numbers
do not have to be specified.
2

Overview
1) MEP
The operation results up to the MEP instruction become conductive when the driving contacts turn ON
from OFF.
The use of MEP instructions simplifies the process of changing driving contacts to pulses when multiple
contact points connect in a series.
2) MEF
3

List
Instruction
The operation results up to the MEF instruction become conductive when the driving contacts turn OFF
from ON.
The use of MEF instructions simplifies the process of changing driving contacts to pulses when multiple
contact points connect in a series.

1. Instruction format 4

in Detail
Devices
Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
MEP Continuous
1 step − Operation
MEP MEP Pulse (Single)
Operation

MEF
Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
Continuous
5
1 step − Operation

Constant
Device &
Specified the
MEF MEF Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others 6
Instruc- Special Con- Real Charac-
System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer

Programming
Before
tion Unit stant Number ter String
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
MEP There are no applicable devices.
MEF There are no applicable devices.
7
Explanation of function and operation

Instruction
Basic
1. MEP instruction (ON during rising edge of driving contacts results)
Circuit Program List program Timing chart

X000 X001
SET M0
0
1
LD X000
AND X001
X000 OFF ON 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

2 MEP
3 SET M0 X001 OFF ON

M0 OFF ON

2. MEF instruction (ON during falling edge of driving contacts results) 9

Circuit program List program Timing chart
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

X000 X001 0 LD X000 OFF ON OFF

X000
SET M0 1 AND X001
2 MEF
3 SET M0 X001 OFF ON OFF
10
M0 OFF ON
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

217
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.11 MEP, MEF

Caution
1. MEP and MEF instructions may not operate normally if the indexed contact is modified and
changed to pulses by sub-routine programs, the FOR and NEXT instructions, etc.

2. As the MEP and MEF instructions operate using the operation results immediately before
them, use at the list program as the AND instruction.
The MEP and MEF instructions cannot be used at the list program as LD or OR.

3. Caution on writing during RUN

1) Pulse command during rising edge of operation (MEP instruction) results
After writing to the circuit with MEP instructions during RUN, the MEP instruction result turns ON
(conductive) while the operation results up to the MEP instruction are ON.
2) Pulse instruction during falling edge of operation (MEF command) results
After writing to the circuit with MEF instructions during RUN , the MEF instruction result turns OFF (non-
conductive), regardless of the operation results up to the MEF instruction. The operation results of MEF
instruction turns ON (conductive) when the operation results up to the MEF instruction turn OFF.
Operation Results up to MEP/MEF Instruction
MEP Instruction MEF Instruction
(while writing is excuted during RUN)
OFF OFF (non-conductive) OFF (non-conductive)
ON ON (conductive) OFF (non-conductive)

Error
• There are no calculation errors in the MEP and MEF instructions.

218
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.12 PLS, PLF

1
7.12 PLS, PLF

Introduction
Outline
When PLS instruction is executed, an applicable device is activated during only one operation cycle after a
drive input turns ON.
2

Overview
When PLF instruction is executed, an applicable device is activated during only one operation cycle after a
drive input turns OFF.
For example, when PLC mode is changed in the way "RUN → STOP → RUN" while a drive input remains
ON, "PLS M0" operates, but "PLS M600 (backed up by the battery against power failure)" does not operate
(when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN) because the status of M600 is latched even while the
PLC is in the STOP mode. 3

List
Instruction
1. Instruction format
Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
PLS Continuous
− Operation
Pulse PLS Pulse (Single)
Operation
4

in Detail
Devices
Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
PLF − Continuous
Operation
Pulse Falling PLF Pulse (Single)
Operation

→ For the number of instruction steps, refer to Section 7.15. 5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
2. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Instruc- Special Con- Real Charac-
System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
tion Unit stant Number ter String
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V
S
Z Modify K H E "…" P
6
PLS 3 S2

Programming
Before
1
S
PLF 3 S2
1

S1: Except special auxiliary relays (M)

S2: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs. 7

Instruction
Basic
Explanation of function and operation
1. PLS instruction (rising edge pulse)
Circuit program List program Timing chart
X000 0000 LD X000 X000 ON
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

PLS M0 0001 PLS M 0 ON during

PLS one operation
instruction M 0 cycle

In the figure above, M0 is ON during only one operation cycle when X000 changes from OFF to ON.

2. PLF instruction (falling/trailing edge pulse) 9

Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

Circuit program List program Timing chart

X000 0000 LD X000 X000 ON
PLF M1 0001 PLF M 1 ON during
PLF one operation
instruction M 1 cycle
10
In the figure above, M1 is ON during only one operation cycle when X000 changes from ON to OFF.
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

219
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.12 PLS, PLF

3. Output drive side

The following two circuits cause a same operation.

<OUT instruction> <PLS instruction>

X000 M1
M0 X000
X000 = PLS M0
M1

X000 ON

ON during
one operation
M 0 cycle

M 1 ON

In each case, M0 is ON during only one operation cycle when X000 changes from OFF to ON.

<PLS instruction> <Pulse operation type applied instruction>

X000 X000
FNC12
PLS M0 MOVP K10 D0
M0
FNC12
MOV K10 D0

In each case, MOV instruction is executed only once when X000 changes from OFF to ON.

Caution
1. Cautions on write during RUN
1) Instructions for falling edge pulse
When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for falling edge pulse (LDF,
ANDF, or ORF instruction), the instruction for falling edge pulse is not executed without regard to the ON/
OFF status of the target device of the instruction for falling edge pulse.
When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for falling edge pulse (PLF
instruction), the instruction for falling edge pulse is not executed without regard to the ON/OFF status of
the operation condition device.
It is necessary to set to ON the target device or operation condition device once and then set it to OFF for
executing the instruction for falling edge pulse.
2) Instructions for rising edge pulse
When write during RUN is completed for a circuit including an instruction for rising edge pulse, the
instruction for rising edge pulse is executed if a target device of the instruction for rising edge pulse or the
operation condition device is ON.
Target instructions for rising edge pulse: LDP, ANDP, ORP, and pulse operation type applied instructions
(such as MOVP)

Contact ON/OFF status

Instruction for rising edge pulse Instruction for falling edge pulse
(while write during RUN is executed)
OFF Not executed Not executed
ON *1 Not executed
Executed

*1. PLS instruction is not executed.

220
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.13 SET, RST

1
7.13 SET, RST

Introduction
Outline
1) Setting a bit device (SET instruction (set bit device latch ON))
When the command input turns ON, SET instruction sets to ON an output relay (Y), auxiliary relay (M),
2

Overview
state relay (S) and bit specification (D….b) of word device.
Even if the command input turns OFF after that, the device which was set to ON by SET instruction
remains ON.
2) Resetting a bit device (RST instruction (reset bit device OFF))
RST instruction resets an output relay (Y), auxiliary relay (M), state relay (S), Timer (T), counter (C) or bit
specification (D….b) of a word device.
3

List
Instruction
Use the RST instruction to reset (set to OFF) a device which was set to ON by SET instruction.
3) Clearing the present value of a word device (RST instruction reset bit device OFF))
RST instruction clears the current value of a timer (T), counter (C), data register (D), extension register
(R) or index register (V)(Z).
RST instruction can be used to clear to "0" the contents of a data register (D) or index register (V)(Z).
(The same result can be obtained by MOV instruction which transfers the constant K0.) 4
RST instruction can be used also to reset the current value and return the contact of retentive type timers

in Detail
Devices
T246 to T255.
SET and RST instructions can be used for a same device as many times as necessary in an arbitrary
order.

1. Instruction format 5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
SET
SET Continuous
Operation
SET
− Pulse (Single)
Operation

Programming
Before
Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
RST
RST Continuous
Operation
Reset
− Pulse (Single)
Operation

→ For the number of instruction steps, refer to Section 7.15. 7

Instruction
Basic
2. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Instruc- Special Con- Real Charac-
System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
tion Unit stant Number ter String
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P 8
S S
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

SET 3 S3 S4
1 2
S S S S S S S S S
RST 3 3 S3 S4
1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

S1: Special auxiliary relays (M) and 32-bit counters (C) cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z).
S2: State relays (S) cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z). 9
S3: "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

S4: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

221
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.13 SET, RST

Explanation of function and operation

SET instruction drives the coil for an output relay (Y), auxiliary relay (M), state relay (S) and bit specification of
data register (D).

1. When using a bit device

SET instructions located in parallel can be used consecutively as many times as necessary.
In the program example shown below, "RST Y000" after "SET Y000" corresponds to this usage.

Circuit program List program Timing chart

X000 X000 ON
0 LD X000
SET Y000 1 SET Y000
2 LD X001 X001 ON
X001
RST Y000 3 RST Y000
Y000 ON
SET RST
instruction instruction

2. When using a word device (timer or counter)

Use RST instruction to reset a counter or retentive type timer.
1) Program example of an internal counter
X010
C0 up-counts the number of turning ON from OFF at X011.
RST C 0 When the counting result reaches the set value K10, the output
contact C0 is activated. Even if X011 changes from OFF to ON
X011 K10 after that, the current value of the counter remains unchanged
C 0 and the output contact remains activated.
C 0 For clearing the counter and returning the output contact, X010
Y000 is set to ON.
It is necessary to specify a constant K or data register number
for indirect specification after OUT C instruction.
In the case of latched (battery backed) type counters, the
current value and the operation status/reset status of the output
contact are latched even after power failure.
2) Program example of a high speed counter
Counting direction For 1-phase 1-input counters C235 to C245, use special
X010 auxiliary relays M8235 to M8245 for specifying the counting
M8UUU direction.
X010 in ON status: Specifies down counting.
X010 in OFF status: Specifies up counting.
Sequence reset When X011 turns ON, the output contact of the counter
circuit
X011 CUUU is returned and the current value of the counter
RST CUUU CUUU is reset to "0".
In counters with reset input (C241, C242 ...), the same situation
is achieved by interrupt operation when the corresponding reset
Counting coil input turns ON, but any program is not required for this
X012 operation.
CUUU When X012 turns ON, turning ON/OFF of a counting input X000
to X005 determined according to the counter number is
K or D
counted.
In counters having start input (C244, C245 ...), counting is
CUUU started only after the corresponding input turns ON.
Y002 When the current value of a counter increases and reaches the
set value (K or contents of D), the output contact is set. When
the current value decreases and reaches the set value, the
output contact is reset.

As a contact driving the counting coil of a high speed counter, program a contact which is normally ON
when high speed counting is executed.
If an input relay (X000 to X005) assigned for high speed counters is used for driving the counting coil,
accurate counting cannot be achieved.

222
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.13 SET, RST

1
Cautions on using RST instruction for a jumped program, subroutine program or interrupt program

Introduction
When RST instruction for a timer or counter is executed in a jumped program, subroutine program or
interrupt program, the timer or counter may be kept in the reset status and the timer or counter may be
disabled.
For details, refer to the following sections:
→ For a jumped program, refer to Subsection 8.1.1.
→ For a subroutine program, refer to Subsection 8.2.1.
2

Overview
→ For an interrupt program, refer to Subsection 35.2.3.

3. Indexing*1
Devices used in SET and RST instructions can be indexed with index registers (V)(Z).
(State relays (S), special auxiliary relays (M), 32-bit counters, "D….b", and word devices cannot be indexed.)
3
V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7 are available for

List
Instruction
Circuit program List program
indexing.
X000 0000 LD X000 When a used device is an input (X) or output
SET Y000Z0 0001 SET Y000Z0 (Y), the value of an index register (V or Z) is
0004 LD X001 converted into octal, and then added.
X001 0005 RST Y000Z0
RST Y000Z0
Example: When Z0 is "20", Y024 turns ON or
OFF.
4

in Detail
Devices
*1. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

4. Bit specification of a data register (D)*1

A bit in data register (D) can be specified as a device used in SET or RST instruction. 5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
When specifying a bit in data register, input "."
Circuit program List program
after a data register (D) number, and then
X000 0000 LD X000 input a bit number (0 to F) consecutively.
SET D0.3 0001 SET D0.3 Only 16-bit data registers are available.
0004 LD X001 Specify a bit number as "0, 1, 2, ... 9, A, B, ...
X001
RST D0.3
0005 RST D0.3
F" from the least significant bit. 6
Example: In the example shown on the left,

Programming
Before
when X000 turns ON once, the bit 3
of D0 turns ON. When X001 turns
ON, the bit 3 of D0 turns OFF.
*1. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
7
Caution

Instruction
Basic
When SET and RST instructions are executed for an output relay (Y) in a same operation, the result of the
instruction located nearest the END instruction (which specifies the end of program) is output.

Errors
• When an I/O number used in SET or RST instruction does not exist due to indexing, M8316 (Non-existing
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

I/O specification error) turns ON.

• When the device number of a device (M, T or C) other than I/O used in SET or RST instruction does not
exist due to indexing, an operation error (error code: 6706) occurs.

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

223
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.14 NOP

7.14 NOP

Outline
NOP instruction specifies no operation.
When a program is erased completely, all steps are replaced with NOP instructions.
When NOP instruction is located between general instructions, PLCs ignore NOP instruction.
If NOP instructions are put in the middle of a program, fluctuation of step numbers is minimized when the
program is changed or added. But excessive program steps are required.
Note that circuits are considerably changed if already written instructions are replaced with NOP instructions.

1. Instruction format
Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
NOP Continuous
1 step NOP Operation
− Pulse (Single)
No Operation Operation

2. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Instruc- Special Con- Real Charac-
System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
tion Unit stant Number ter String
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
NOP There are no applicable devices.

Explanation of function and operation

1. NOP instruction (no operation or null step)
NOP instruction specifies no operation.
If NOP operation is written in the middle of a program, PLCs ignore it in executing the program.
When an existing program is replaced with NOP instructions, it means that former instructions are deleted.
OUT → NOP (error)

AND → NOP ANI → NOP

OR → NOP
Contact becomes Circuit is
short-circuit. disconnected.
ORI → NOP

224
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.15 END

1
7.15 END

Introduction
Outline
END instruction specifies the end of a program.
(Do not write the END instruction in the middle of a program.)
2

Overview
1. Instruction format
Basic Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
END Continuous
1 step END Operation
END − Pulse (Single)
Operation 3

List
Instruction
2. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Instruc- Special Con- Real Charac-
System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
tion
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V
Unit stant Number ter String
Z Modify K H E "…" P
4

in Detail
Devices
END There are no applicable devices.

Explanation of function and operation

1. END instruction (program end, I/O refresh and return to step 0)
PLCs repeat "input processing → program execution → output processing". When END instruction is written
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
at the end of a program, PLCs immediately execute the output processing without executing steps after END
instruction.
If END instruction is not written at the end of a program, PLCs execute the program until the final step, and
then execute the output processing.
At the first execution after the PLC mode was changed from STOP to RUN, PLCs start from END instruction.
When END instruction is executed, the watchdog timer (which checks the operation cycle) is refreshed. 6

Programming
Before
Input processing

Step 000
001 LD X000
002
OUT Y000 7
END

Instruction
Basic
NOP
NOP

NOP

8
Output processing
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Caution
Do not write END instruction in the middle of a program.
When a program is transferred from a programming tool, all steps after END instruction are replaced with 9
NOP (no operation) instructions.
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

225
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 7 Basic Instruction
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 7.16 Number of Instruction Steps and Specified Devices

7.16 Number of Instruction Steps and Specified Devices

The table below shows the number of steps of basic instructions. Available devices and device ranges vary
depending on the PLC. For details of devices, refer to Chapter 4.
For ORB, ANB, MPS, MRD, MPP, MCR, INV, MEP, MEF, NOP and END instructions, refer to pages
explaining these instructions.
Instruction
LDP, LDF,
LD, LDI,
PLS, ANDP,
Device AND, ANI, OUT SET RST MC
PLF ANDF,
OR, ORI
ORP, ORF
X000 to X357 1 − − − − 2 −
Y000 to Y357 1 1 1 1 2 2 3
M0 to M1535 1 1 1 1 2 2 3
M1536 to M3583 2 2 2 2 2 2 3
M3584 to M7679 3 3 3 3 3 3 4
S0 to S1023 1 2 2 2 − 2 −
S1024 to S4095 2 2 2 2 − 2 −
T0 to T191,
Bit devices 1 3 − 2 − 2 −
T200 to T245
T192 to T199,
1 3 − 2 − 2 −
T246 to T511
C0 to C199 1 3 − 2 − 2 −
C200 to C255 1 5 − 2 − 2 −
Special auxiliary relays
1 2 2 2 − 2 −
M8000 to M8255
Special auxiliary relays
2 2 2 2 − 2 −
M8256 to M8511
X000 to X357 3 − − − − − −
Y000 to Y357 3 3 3 3 3 − −
M0 to M7679 3 3 3 3 3 − −
T0 to T511 3 4 − − − − −
Bit devices
with index S0 to S4095 − − − − − − −
C0 to C199 3 4 − 3 − − −
C200 to C255 − − − − − − −
Special auxiliary relays
3 3 3 3 − − −
M8000 to M8511
D0 to D7999,
Special data registers − − − 3 − − −
Word devices D8000 to D8511
R0 to R32767 − − − 3 − − −
D0 to D7999,
Word devices Special data registers
− − − − − − −
with index D8000 to D8511,
R0 to R32767
D….b,
Bit specification
Special auxiliary relays 3 3 3 3 − 3 −
in word device
D….b

226
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

Introduction
8. Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
FNC 00 to FNC 09 provide instructions mainly related to control flow of sequence programs such as 2
conditional program execution and priority processing.

Overview
FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

00 CJ CJ Pn Conditional Jump Section 8.1

3

List
Instruction
01 CALL CALL Pn Call Subroutine Section 8.2

02 SRET SRET Subroutine Return Section 8.3

4
03 IRET IRET Interrupt Return Section 8.4

in Detail
Devices
04 EI EI Enable Interrupt Section 8.5

05 DI DI Disable Interrupt Section 8.6 5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
06 FEND FEND Main Routine Program End Section 8.7

07 WDT WDT Watchdog Timer Refresh Section 8.8

6

Programming
Before
08 FOR FOR S Start a FOR/NEXT Loop Section 8.9

Section
09 NEXT NEXT End a FOR/NEXT Loop
8.10
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

227
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump

8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump

Outline
CJ or CJP instruction jumps to a pointer (P); The sequence program steps between CJ or CJP instruction and
the pointer are not executed.
CJ and CJP instructions reduce the cycle time, and allow programs with double coils.

1. Instruction format

FNC 00 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
CJ P 3 steps CJ Continuous
Operation −
CJP Pulse (Single)
Operation
−

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
Pn (FX3U/FX3UC : n = 0 to 4095, FX3G : n=0 to 2047) (P63 jumps to END instruction.) Pointer number

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

Pn 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (CJ and CJP)
While the command input is ON, CJ or CJP instruction executes a program with a specified label (pointer
number).
1) In the case of CJ instruction

User program

Command
Pn ‚ Command ON
Jumps to the pointer while the CJ input
command is ON.

CJ Executed in every scan.

User program
which is skipped and is not executed when the command turns ON

Label
Pn ‚ User program

2) In the case of CJP instruction

User program

Command Command ON
CJP Pn
Pn‚ input
Jumps to the pointer only in one
operation while the command is ON.

User program
CJP
which is skipped and is not executed in one operation cycle
when the command turns ON Executed in one scan.

Label
Pn ‚ User program

228
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump

1
Cautions

Introduction
1. Relationship between the label input position and the list program
The figure below shows programming of a label.
When creating a circuit program, move the cursor to the left side of the bus line in the ladder diagram, and
input a label (P) at the head of the circuit block. 2
X030 FNC 00

Overview
P 20 LD X030
CJ CJ P 20

X031 Pointer
Y010 LD X031

Label
X032
OUT Y010
P 20
3

List
Instruction
P 20 Y011 LD X032
Bus OUT Y011
line Label

2. Programming a label in a smaller number step than CJ instruction

A label can be programmed in a smaller number step than CJ instruction. However, note that a watchdog 4
timer error occurs when the scan time exceeds 200 ms (default setting).

in Detail
Devices
Label
P 10

X022
FNC 00
5
P 10

Constant
Device &
Specified the
CJ

3. Jumping to one label from two or more CJ instructions

When the pointer number in operands is same and there is one label, the following operation is caused:
When X020 turns ON, the program execution jumps from CJ instruction corresponding to X020 to the label
P9. When X020 turns OFF and X021 turns ON, the program execution jumps from CJ instruction
6

Programming
Before
corresponding to X021 to the label P9.
X020
FNC 00 P 9
CJ

X021
FNC 00 P 9
7
CJ

Instruction
Basic
Label
P 9

4. Using a label (P) two or more times

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

When a label number (including labels for CALL instructions described later) is used two or more times, an
error is caused.
X020
FNC 00
CJ
P9 Good
9
X030 FNC 00
Good
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

P9
CJ
Label
P9 User program
Label
Bad P9 User program
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

END

229
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump

5. Label unnecessary for the pointer P63

The pointer P63 specifies jump to END step. Do not program P63.
If P63 is programmed, PLCs will display the error code 6507 (defective label definition) and stop.
FNC 00 P 63
CJ

Label
P 63 END

Do not program P63.

6. When jumping to a pointer for subroutine

Any label cannot be shared by CALL instruction and CJ instruction.
Command
FNC 00
CJ
P15 Bad

X000 FNC 01
CALLP
P15 Good
X001 K10
C0

FNC 06
FEND Subroutine program
Label dedicated to CALL
M8000 instruction
P15 User program
RUN monitor Program a label (P) after
(normally ON) FEND instruction.
FNC 02
SRET

7. Unconditional jump if the command contact is normally ON

Because M8000 is normally ON while a PLC is operating, unconditional jump is specified when M8000 is
used in the following example:

M8000 FNC00 P5
RUN monitor CJ

User program
(It is skipped, and is not executed.)

Label
P5 User program

230
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump

1
Program example

Introduction
1. When jump is necessary after the OFF processing
In one operation cycle after X023 changes to ON from OFF, CJ P7 instruction becomes valid.
By using this method, jump can be executed after all outputs between CJ P7 instruction and the label P7 turn
OFF. 2

Overview
X023
PLS M0

M0
FNC00 P7
CJ
X023 3

List
Instruction
Label
P7 User program 4

in Detail
Devices
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
6

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

231
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump

8.1.1 CJ instruction and operations of contact and coil

In the program example shown below, when X000 turns ON, the program execution jumps from CJ instruction
in the first circuit to the label P8.
While X000 is OFF, jump is not executed; The program is executed from the 1st step in turn, and then the
program execution jumps from CJ instruction in the 11th circuit to the label P9.
Instructions skipped by jump are not executed.

1. Circuit example 1 for explaining operations

1st
X000
FNC 00
• Double coil operation of output Y001
0 P 8 While X000 is OFF, output Y001 is activated by X001.
circuit CJ
X001 While X000 is ON, output Y001 is activated by X012.
4 Y001 Even in a program divided by conditional jumps, if a
X002 same coil (Y000 in this case) is programmed two or
6 M1 more times within the jump area or outside the jump
X003 area, such a coil is handled as double coil.
8 S1
X004 • When the reset (RST) instruction for the retentive type
11 T0 K 10
timer T246 is located outside the jump area
X005 Even if the counting coil (OUT T246) is jumped, reset
15 RST T246
(return of the contact and clearing of the current value)
X006 is valid.
18 T246 K1000
X007
22 RST C 0 • When the reset (RST) instruction for the counter C0 is
X010 located outside the jump area
25 C0 K 20 Even if the counting coil is jumped, reset (return of the
X011 contact and clearing of the current value) is valid.
FNC 12 K 3 D 0
29
MOV
• Operation of the routine timers T192 to T199
Label
P 8 A routine timer continues its operation even if it is
X000 jumped after the coil is driven, and the output contact is
11th FNC 00 P 9
35 activated.
circuit CJ
X012
40 Y001
• Operation of the high speed counters C235 to C255
Label A high speed counter continues its operation even if it is
P 9 jumped after the coil is driven, and the output contact is
X013 activated.
42 RST T246

RST C 0
When each input changes during jump in the above
program, each coil executes the following operation:
Contact status before
Classification Coil operation during jump
jump
Y, M, S X001, X002, X003 OFF Y001, M1 and S1 turn OFF.
(Y001, M1, S1) X001, X002, X003 ON Y001, M1 and S1 turn ON
10 ms timer and X004 OFF Timer is not activated.
100 ms timer (T0) X004 ON Counting is paused (, and is restarted after X000 turns OFF).
X005 OFF Timer is not activated.
1 ms timer X006 OFF The deactivation status is reset when X013 turns ON.
(T246) X005 OFF Counting is continued (, and the contact is activated after X000 turns
X006 ON OFF).
X007 OFF Counting is not activated.
Counter X010 OFF The deactivation status is reset when X013 turns ON.
(C0) X007 OFF
Counting is paused (, and is restarted after X000 turns OFF).
X010 ON
Applied instruction X011 OFF FNC instruction is not executed during jump.
(MOV) X011 ON But instructions FNC 52 to FNC 58 continue their operations.

232
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump

1
2. Circuit example 2 for explaining operations (when only an RST instruction for a timer or

Introduction
counter is jumped)
When X011 turns ON while the RST instruction for
X012
C0 the counter C0 is operating (X010 is ON), the
K10 program execution jumps past the RST instruction
X011 FNC 00 P0
due to the CJ (FNC 00) instruction. 2
CJ In this jump status, the counter C0 remains reset.

Overview
X010 Accordingly, the current value of C0 remains "0"
RST C0 even if X012 turns ON.
Label
To clear this reset status, it is necessary to turn
P0 OFF the RST instruction for counter C0. (Refer to
the program shown below.)
3
Timing chart

List
Instruction
Jump operation by CJ
instruction driven by X011

X012
4

in Detail
Devices
Because C0 remains
Counter reset, its current value
3 is reset. remains unchanged
Current 2 even if X012 turns ON. 2
value of C0 1 1

X010 ON 5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
RST
C0 Remains reset.

Program example for activating a timer and counter even during a jump

X012
C0
6
K10

Programming
Before
X011 FNC 00 P0
CJ
X010
RST C0
Label 7
P0

Instruction
Basic
M8000
RST C0 Clears the reset status of
counter C0 during jump.

Timing chart
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Jump operation by CJ
instruction driven by X011

X012
9
5
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

Counter 4
3 is reset. 3
Current 2 2
value of C0 1 1

X010 ON
10
RST
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

C0 *1 In the same operation cycle as the

reset, the reset status of counter
*1 C0 is cleared.

233
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.1 FNC 00 – CJ / Conditional Jump

8.1.2 Relationship between master control instruction and jump instruction

The figure below shows the contents of operation and the relationship between the master control instruction.
Avoid using [2], [4] and [5] because the operation will be complicated.

CJ P 0
[1] Jump from outside MC
to outside MC
Jump is available
CJ P 1 arbitrarily.
MC N 0 M 1

Master control
[2] Jump from outside MC
to inside MC
MC N 0 M 0 Jump is executed CJ P 4
regardless of the MC [5] Jump from
operation. inside MC
P 1 Even if M0 is OFF, M0 MCR N 0 to inside
is regarded as ON after another
P1. MC

MC N 0 M 2
Master control

[3] Jump from inside MC to

CJ P 2 inside MC

Master control
Jump is disabled while P 4
M0 is OFF.
P 2
MCR N 0

[4] Jump from inside MC to

outside MC
CJ P 3 Jump is disabled while
M0 is OFF. Jump is enabled while M1 is ON.
Jump is executed while In circuits after jump, M2 is regarded as ON
M0 is ON, but MCR is
MCR N 0 invalid. regardless of the actual ON/OFF status of M2.
And the first MCR N0 is ignored.
P 3

P 0

234
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.2 FNC 01 – CALL / Call Subroutine

1
8.2 FNC 01 – CALL / Call Subroutine

Introduction
Outline
This instruction calls and executes a program which should be processed commonly in a sequence program.
This instruction reduces the number of program steps, and achieves efficient program design.
2

Overview
For creating a subroutine program, FEND (FNC 06) and SRET (FNC 02) instructions are required.

1. Instruction format

FNC 01 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
CALL P 3 steps CALL Continuous
Operation − 3
CALLP Pulse (Single) −

List
Instruction
Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type

Pn
Pointer number (P) indicating the label number for the jump destination
(FX3U/FX3UC : P0 to P62 and P64 to P4095, FX3G : P0 to P62 and P64 to P2047)
Pointer number 4

in Detail
Devices
For the pointer Pn in the CALL instruction, P0 to P62 and P64 to P4095 can be specified in FX3U/FX3UC
PLCs, and P0 to P62 and P64 to P2047 can be specified in FX3G PLCs.
Because P63 is dedicated to CJ (FNC 00) instruction (for jump to END step), it cannot be used as a pointer
for CALL (FNC 01) instruction.

3. Applicable devices 5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

Pn 3 3
6

Programming
Before
Explanation of function and operation
1. 16-bit operation
While the command input is ON, CALL instruction is executed and the program execution jumps to a step with
a label Pn . 7
Then, a subroutine program with the label Pn is executed.

Instruction
Basic
When SRET (FNC 02) instruction is executed, the program execution returns to the step after CALL
instruction.
• At the end of the main program, put FEND instruction.
• Put a label (P) for CALL instruction after FEND instruction.
8
User program
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Command
FNC 01 Pn‚
Pn
CALL Main program
Program area from the step 0 to FEND
instruction
User program
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

FNC 06
FEND
Label M8000
Pn ‚ User program
RUN monitor Subroutine program
(normally ON) Program area from a label Pn ‚ to SRET
FNC 02 instruction 10
SRET
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

235
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.2 FNC 01 – CALL / Call Subroutine

Caution
1. Using a label (P) number two or more times
In CALL instructions, a same number can be used two or more times in operands (P).
However, do not use a label (P) and number used in another instruction (CJ instruction).
X020 FNC 00 P9
CJ

X030 FNC 01
CALLP
P9 Bad

Label
P9 User program

Program examples
1. Example of fundamental use (no nesting)
X000
FNC 01 P 10
CALL
Main program
While X000 is ON, the program execution jumps to a
step with the label P10.
FNC 06
FEND
Label
P 10
Subroutine program
When SRET instruction is executed after the subroutine
program has executed, the program execution returns to
FNC 02 the original step +1.
SRET

END

2. Example of multiple CALL instructions in subroutines (multiple nesting)

CALL instruction can be used up to 4 times in subroutine programs. Nesting of up to five layers is allowed.

X001
FNC 01 P 11
CALLP Main program
When X001 turns ON from OFF, the program execution
FNC 06 jumps to the label P11 only once.
FEND
Label
P 11 Subroutine program 1
X002 When SRET instruction is executed, the program
FNC 01 P 12 execution returns to the main program.
CALL If X002 is ON while the subroutine program 1 is
FNC 02 executed, the program execution jumps to a step with the
SRET label P12.
Label X003
P 12
Subroutine program 2
FNC 02 The subroutine program with P12 is executed, and then
SRET the program execution returns to the subroutine program
with P11 by SRET instruction.
END

236
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.2 FNC 01 – CALL / Call Subroutine

1
8.2.1 Cautions on subroutines and interrupt routines

Introduction
This section explains cautions on creating programs in subroutines and interrupt routines.
The explanation below is given for subroutines, but the situation also applies to interrupt routines.
1. When using timers in subroutines (or interrupt routines)
Use retentive type timers T192 to T199 in subroutines. 2
These timers execute counting when the coil instruction or END instruction is executed.

Overview
After a timer reaches the set value, the output contact is activated when the coil instruction or END instruction
is executed.
Because general timers execute counting only when the coil instruction is executed, they do not execute
counting if they are used in subroutines in which the coil instruction is executed only under some conditions.
2. When using retentive type 1 ms timers in subroutines (or interrupt routines) 3
If a retentive type 1 ms timer is used in a subroutine, note that the output contact is activated when the first

List
Instruction
coil instruction (or subroutine) is executed after the timer reaches its set value.
3. Countermeasures against latches of devices used in subroutines (or interrupt routines)
Devices which were set to ON in a subroutine are latched in the ON status even after the subroutine is
finished. (Refer to the program example shown below.)
When RST instruction for a timer or counter is executed, the reset status of the timer or counter is latched 4
also.

in Detail
Devices
For turning OFF such a device latched in the ON status or for canceling such a timer or counter latched in the
reset status, reset such a device in the main program after the subroutine is finished, or program a sequence
for resetting such a device or for deactivating RST instruction in the subroutine. (Refer to the program
example shown on the next page.)
Example in which outputs are latched
In the following program example, the counter C0 is provided to count X001. When X000 is input, the
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
subroutine P0 is executed only in one scan, and then the counter is reset and Y007 is output.
1) Program example
X000 FNC 01 P0
CALLP
X001
C0
K10 6

Programming
Before
FNC 06
FEND
X000
P0 RST C0
7

Instruction
Basic
Y007

FNC 02
SRET

2) Timing chart 8
Execution of Subroutine is executed.
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

subroutine P0
triggered by X000

X001
9
Because the reset instruction
Counter
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

3
for C0 is valid, the current value
is reset. of C0 remains unchanged even
Current 2
value of C0 1
if pulses are input.

RST
C0 Remains reset.
10
Y007
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

Y007 is being output.

Outputs are held.

237
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.2 FNC 01 – CALL / Call Subroutine

Example for resetting held outputs (countermeasures)

1) Program example

X000 FNC 01 P0
CALLP
X001 K10
C0

X002
RST Y007 Y007 is reset at an arbitrary timing.

FNC 06
FEND

X000
P0 RST C0 A

M8001 B
RST C0 The preceding RST C0 instruction is
RUN monitor deactivated in the subroutine.
(normally OFF)

Y007

FNC 02
SRET

2) Timing chart
Subroutine is
Execution of P0 is executed.
triggered by X000

X001

3 4
Current 3
2 2
value of C0 1 1
Counter is reset (part Counter reset instruction is deactivated
RST A in above program). (part B in above program).
C0

Y007

X002 Y007 is reset.

238
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.3 FNC 02 – SRET / Subroutine Return

1
8.3 FNC 02 – SRET / Subroutine Return

Introduction
Outline
This instruction returns the program execution from a subroutine to the main program.
2
1. Instruction format

Overview
FNC 02 Independent Inst. Mnemonic Operation Condition
SRET Continuous This instruction is the independent type, and
1 step SRET Operation does not require drive contact.

List
Instruction
2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
– There is no set data. –

3. Applicable devices 4
Bit Devices Word Devices Others

in Detail
Devices
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
– There are no applicable devices.
5
Explanation of function and operation

Constant
Device &
Specified the
When CALL instruction in the main program is executed, the program execution jumps to a subroutine.
SRET instruction returns the program execution to the main routine.
→ Refer to Section 8.2.

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

239
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.4 FNC 03 – IRET / Interrupt Return

8.4 FNC 03 – IRET / Interrupt Return

Outline
This instruction returns the program execution from an interrupt routine to the main program.

1. Instruction format
FNC 03 Independent Inst. Mnemonic Operation Condition
IRET Continuous This instruction is the independent type, and
1 step IRET Operation does not require drive contact.

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
– There is no set data. –

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
– There are no applicable devices.

Explanation of function and operation

When an interrupt (input, timer or counter) is generated while the main program is executed, the program
execution jumps to an interrupt (I) routine.
IRET instruction returns the program execution to the main routine.
The table below shows three types of jump to an interrupt routine.

1. Types of interrupt function

Function Interrupt No. Description Reference
Section 35.3
Executes the interrupt processing when an input (X) signal turns
Input interrupt I00* to I50* and
ON or OFF.
Section 35.4
Executes the interrupt processing at a specified time interval
Timer interrupt I6** to I8** Section 35.5
(constant cycle).
Executes the interrupt processing when a high speed counter
Counter interrupt*1 I010 to I060
reaches it’s set value.
Section 35.6

*1. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

→ For the interrupt function, refer to Chapter 35.

240
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.4 FNC 03 – IRET / Interrupt Return

1
Program example

Introduction
FNC 04
Interrupts are usually disabled in PLCs.
Use EI instruction to enable interrupts.
M8000
EI
When X000 turns ON while the main program is executed, 2
instructions after the interrupt routine pointer I001 are

Overview
C255
Main program executed, and the program execution returns to the
original main program by IRET instruction.

FNC 06
FEND 3
Interrupt

List
Instruction
pointer The rising edge of X000 is detected.
I001
Input interrupt
routine The timer interrupt of the pointer I620 is executed every
FNC 03 timer time of 20 ms, and the program execution is
Interrupt
IRET
returned to the original main program by IRET instruction 4
Interrupt every 20 ms each time.

in Detail
Devices
pointer
I620
Timer interrupt The high speed counter interrupt of the pointer I010 is
routine executed when the current value of a high speed counter
FNC 03 becomes equivalent to a value specified by DHSCS (FNC
IRET
Interrupt
High speed counter
53) instruction.
The program execution returns to the original main
5
pointer

Constant
Device &
Specified the
I010 program by IRET instruction.
High speed counter
routine Make sure to program an interrupt pointer (I***) as a label
FNC 03
after FEND instruction.
IRET
6
‚“

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

241
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.5 FNC 04 – EI / Enable Interrupt

8.5 FNC 04 – EI / Enable Interrupt

Outline
Interrupts are usually disabled in PLCs.
This instruction enables interrupts in PLCs.
Use this instruction for using the input interrupt, timer interrupt and counter interrupt functions.

1. Instruction format
FNC 04 Independent Inst. Mnemonic Operation Condition
EI Continuous This instruction is the independent type, and
1 step EI Operation does not require drive contact.

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
– There is no set data. –

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
– There are no applicable devices.

Explanation of function and operation

EI instruction is the independent type, and does not require command (drive) contact.
→ For the interrupt function, refer to Chapter 35.

242
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.6 FNC 05 – DI / Disable Interrupt

1
8.6 FNC 05 – DI / Disable Interrupt

Introduction
Outline
This instruction disables interrupts after interrupts were enabled by EI (FNC 04) instruction.
2
1. Instruction format

Overview
FNC 05 Independent Inst. Mnemonic Operation Condition
DI Continuous This instruction is the independent type, and
1 step DI Operation does not require drive contact.

List
Instruction
2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
– There is no set data. –

3. Applicable devices 4
Bit Devices Word Devices Others

in Detail
Devices
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
– There are no applicable devices.
5
Explanation of function and operation

Constant
Device &
Specified the
DI instruction is the independent type, and does not require command (drive) contact.
→ For the interrupt function, refer to Chapter 35.

Cautions
Interrupts (requests) generated after DI instruction are processed after EI (FNC 04) instruction is executed
6

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

243
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.7 FNC 06 – Main Routine Program End

8.7 FNC 06 – Main Routine Program End

Outline
This instruction indicates the end of the main program.

1. Instruction format

FNC 06 Independent Inst. Mnemonic Operation Condition

FEND Continuous This instruction is the independent type, and
1 step FEND Operation does not require drive contact.

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
– There is no set data. –

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
– There are no applicable devices.

Explanation of function and operation

FEND instruction works in the same way as END instruction.
When FEND instruction is executed, output processing, input processing and watchdog timer refresh are
executed, and then the program execution returns to the step 0.
FEND instruction is required in creating subroutine programs and interrupt programs.

1. In the case of CJ instruction

0 Main routine
program
When X010 is OFF

X010
FNC 00 P 20
CJ

Main routine
Jump

program

FNC 06
FEND
When X010 is ON

P20 Main routine

program

FNC 06
FEND

END

244
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.7 FNC 06 – Main Routine Program End

1
2. In the case of CALL instruction

Introduction
0 Main routine
program
When X011

When X011 is OFF

X011
2
is ON
FNC 01 P 21
CALL

Overview
Main routine
program

FNC 06
FEND 3

List
Instruction
P21 Subroutine
program

I100
Interrupt routine
program 4

in Detail
Devices
END

Cautions 5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
1. When FEND instruction is programmed two or more times
Put a subroutine program or interrupt routine program between last FEND instruction and END instruction.

2. When CALL or CALLP instruction is used

Put a label after FEND instruction. And the SRET instruction is required in every case. 6

Programming
Before
3. When CALL or CALLP instruction is used
If FEND instruction is executed after CALL or CALLP instruction was executed and before SRET instruction is
executed, an error is caused.

4. When FOR instruction is used

If FEND instruction is executed after FOR instruction was executed and before NEXT instruction is executed, 7
an error is caused.

Instruction
Basic
5. When the interrupt function (I) is used
Make sure to program an interrupt label (pointer) after FEND instruction. And IRET instruction is required in
every case.
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

245
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.8 FNC 07 – WDT / Watchdog Timer Refresh

8.8 FNC 07 – WDT / Watchdog Timer Refresh

Outline
This instruction refreshes the watchdog timer in a sequence program.

1. Instruction format

FNC 07 Independent Inst. Mnemonic Operation Condition

WDT P WDT Continuous
1 step Operation
WDTP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
– There is no set data. –

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
– There are no applicable devices.

Explanation of function and operation

When the operation cycle (time until END or FEND instruction is executed after the step 0) of a PLC exceeds
200 ms, a watchdog timer error (indicating abnormal operation) occurs; The CPU error LED lights, and the
PLC stops.
When the operation cycle is long, insert WDT instruction in the middle of the program to avoid the watchdog
timer error.
Command
contact
Command
input
FNC 07
WDTP One scan is executed.

Command
contact
Command
input
FNC 07
WDT
Each scan is
executed.

Related device
Device Name Description
D8000 Watchdog timer time Up to 32767 ms can be set in units of ms (initial value: 200 ms).

246
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.8 FNC 07 – WDT / Watchdog Timer Refresh

1
Cautions

Introduction
1. When a watchdog timer error occurs
A watchdog timer error may occur in the following cases. To avoid the error, input a program shown below
near the head step to extend the watchdog timer time, or shift FROM/TO instruction execution timing.
1) Caution when many special extension devices are connected 2
In such configuration that many special extension devices (such as positioning units, cam switches,

Overview
analog units and link units) are connected, the buffer memory initialization time may become longer, thus
the operation time may become longer, and a watchdog timer error may occur.
2) Caution when many FROM/TO instructions are driven at one time
When many FROM/TO instructions are executed or when many buffer memories are transferred, the
scan time may become longer, and a watchdog timer error may occur. 3
3) Caution when there are many high speed counters (software counters)

List
Instruction
When many high speed counters are provided and high frequency are counted at one time, the operation
time may become longer, and a watchdog timer error may occur.

2. The watchdog timer time can be changed.

→ For details on changing watchdog timer time, refer to Subsection 36.2.2.
By overwriting the contents of D8000 (watchdog timer time), the watchdog timer detection time (initial value:
4

in Detail
Devices
200 ms) can be changed.
By inputting the program shown below, the sequence program after this insertion is monitored by a new
watchdog timer time.
M8002
FNC 12
0
Initial pulse
MOV
K300 D8000 Watchdog timer time: 300 ms
5
Watchdog timer refresh

Constant
Device &
Specified the
FNC 07 If WDT (FNC 07) instruction is not programmed, the value of
WDT D8000 is valid during END processing.

Program examples
6
1. When the operation cycle is long and causes an error

Programming
Before
For example, by dividing a program whose operation cycle is 240 ms into two portions and inserting WDT
instruction between them, the operation cycle becomes less than 200 ms in both the former half portion and
the latter half portion.
Program whose
Program
whose
operation cycle
is 120 ms 7
operation cycle

Instruction
Basic
is 240 ms FNC07
WDT

Program whose
END operation cycle
is 120 ms
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

END

2. When a label (P) of CJ instruction is located in a step number smaller than the step number
of CJ instruction
Put WDT instruction after the label (P).
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

If an input relay (X) is used as the

M8000 command contact, input refresh is
Label FNC 07
Pn RUN monitor WDT disabled, so the program execution
cannot be returned from the area
When the command
Program contact turns ON between P and CJ.
Command
As the command contact, use such 10
FNC00 device that can be set to OFF in a
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

Pn
CJ program being jumped.

247
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.8 FNC 07 – WDT / Watchdog Timer Refresh

3. When FOR/NEXT instruction is repeated many times

Put WDT instruction between FOR and NEXT instructions.

FNC 08
K30000
FOR

Program

FNC 07
WDT

FNC 09
NEXT

248
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.9 FNC 08 – FOR / Start a FOR/NEXT Loop

1
8.9 FNC 08 – FOR / Start a FOR/NEXT Loop

Introduction
Outline
FOR instruction specifies the number of repetition of the loop between FOR and NEXT (FNC 09) instructions.
2
1. Instruction format

Overview
FNC 08 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
FOR Continuous
3 steps FOR Operation −

List
Instruction
2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
Number of repetition of the loop between FOR and NEXT instructions
S [ S = K1 to K32767] 16-bit binary
(A value from −32768 to 0 is handled as "1".)
4

in Detail
Devices
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
5
S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

Constant
Device &
Specified the
S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

→ For details, refer to NEXT (FNC 09) instruction. 6

Programming
Before
Related instruction
FOR instruction and NEXT (FNC 09) instruction are set as a pair in programming.

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

249
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.10 FNC 09 – NEXT / End a FOR/NEXT Loop

8.10 FNC 09 – NEXT / End a FOR/NEXT Loop

Outline
NEXT instruction specifies the end position of the loop.

1. Instruction format

FNC 09 Independent Inst. Mnemonic Operation Condition

NEXT Continuous This instruction is the independent type, and
1 step NEXT Operation does not require drive contact.

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
– There is no set data. –

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
– There are no applicable devices.

Explanation of function and operation

The loop between FOR and NEXT instructions is repeated "n" times (which is specified by the source data).
After the loop is repeated by the specified number of times, steps after NEXT instruction are executed.

FNC 08 S‚
FOR
Repeated " S ‚ "
times.
FNC 09
NEXT

Related instruction
NEXT instruction and FOR (FNC 08) instruction are set as a pair in programming.

250
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.10 FNC 09 – NEXT / End a FOR/NEXT Loop

1
Caution

Introduction
1. Limitation in the number of nesting
FOR-NEXT loop can be nested up to 5 levels.

FOR FOR 2

Overview
FOR FOR
1st
level

FOR NEXT
2nd
3
1st 2nd 3rd

List
Instruction
level level level level

NEXT FOR
1st
level

NEXT NEXT
4

in Detail
Devices
NEXT NEXT

Errors
5
1. Watchdog timer error

Constant
Device &
Specified the
When FOR-NEXT loop is repeated many times, the operation cycle (D8010) is too long, and a watchdog
timer error may occur. In such a case, change the watchdog timer time or reset the watchdog timer.
→ For details on changing the watchdog timer time, refer to Subsection 36.2.2.
→ For resetting the watchdog timer, refer to WDT (FNC 07) instruction.

2. Examples of wrong programs 6

The following programs are regarded as errors.

Programming
Before
When NEXT instruction is located before FOR When NEXT instruction does not exist
instruction

NEXT FOR
7

Instruction
Basic
FOR NEXT ← Not programmed

When number of FOR instructions is not When NEXT instruction is located after FEND or
equivalent to the number of NEXT instructions END instruction

FOR FOR
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

FOR FEND

NEXT NEXT
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

NEXT ← Not programmed END

NEXT
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

251
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 8 Program Flow – FNC 00 to FNC 09
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 8.10 FNC 09 – NEXT / End a FOR/NEXT Loop

Program example
1. Program with three FOR-NEXT loops

FNC 08 K 4
FOR
The loop [3] is repeated 4 times.
FNC 08 D 0Z
FOR
When the data value (current value) of D0Z
X010 (D4 when Z is "4") is "6", the loop [2] is
FNC 00 P 22
CJ repeated 6 times.

FNC 08 K1X000
When X010 is OFF

FOR When K1X000 is "7", the loop [1] is repeated
[1] [2] [3]
7 times.
FNC 09
When X010 is ON
NEXT 7 The program execution jumps to the pointer P22,
times and the loop [1] is skipped.
P 22

FNC 09 Number of times of repeating the loops [1],

NEXT 6 [2] and [3]
times
X010 = OFF X010 = ON
FNC 09 4
[1] 7 × 6 × 4 =168 times 0 time
NEXT times [2] 6 × 4 = 24 times 24 times
[3] 4 times 4 times

252
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

Introduction
9. Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
FNC 10 to FNC 19 provide fundamental data processing instructions such as data transfer and data 2
comparison which are regarded as most important in applied instructions.

Overview
FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

10 CMP CMP S1 S2 D Compare Section 9.1

3
11 ZCP Zone Compare Section 9.2

List
Instruction
ZCP S1 S2 S D

12 MOV MOV S D Move Section 9.3

13 SMOV SMOV S m1 m2 D n Shift Move Section 9.4 4

in Detail
Devices
14 CML CML S D Complement Section 9.5

15 BMOV BMOV S D n Block Move Section 9.6

5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
16 FMOV FMOV S D n Fill Move Section 9.7

17 XCH XCH D1 D2 Exchange Section 9.8

18 BCD BCD S D Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal Section 9.9 6

Programming
Before
Section
19 BIN BIN S D Conversion to Binary
9.10

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

253
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.1 FNC 10 – CMP / Compare

9.1 FNC 10 – CMP / Compare

Outline
This instruction compares two values, and outputs the result (smaller, equal or larger) to bit devices (3
points).
→ For the contact comparison instruction, refer to Chapter 28.
→ For floating point comparison, refer to Section 18.1.

1. Instruction format
FNC 10 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D CMP P 7 steps
CMP Continuous
13 steps
DCMP Continuous
Operation Operation
CMPP Pulse (Single) DCMPP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Data or device number handled as comparison value 16- or 32-bit binary

S2 Date or device number handled as comparison source 16- or 32-bit binary

D Head bit device number to which comparison result is output Bit

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 S1 3

S1: "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
S2: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (CMP and CMPP)
The comparison value S1 and the comparison source S2 are compared with each other. According to
the result (smaller, equal or larger), either one among D , D +1 and D +2 turns ON.
• The source data S1 S2 are handled as binary values.
• Comparison is executed algebraically. Example: −10 < 2
Command Command
input input
FNC 10
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ 51
CMP
50
D‚ Turns ON in the case of 49
" [ S1 ‚ > S2 ‚ ] ". S2 ‚ 48 S1 ‚

D ‚ +1 Turns ON in the case of

D‚
" [ S1 ‚ = S2 ‚ ] ".
Latched
D ‚ +2 Turns ON in the case of
D ‚ +1
" [ S1 ‚ < S2 ‚ ] ".
Latched
D ‚ +2

Latched
Even if the command input turns OFF and CMP instruction is not executed, D‚ , D ‚ +1 and D ‚ +2 latch
the status just before the command input turns OFF from ON.

254
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.1 FNC 10 – CMP / Compare

1
2. 32-bit operation (DCMP and DCMPP)

Introduction
The comparison value [ S1 +1, S1 ] and the comparison source [ S2 +1, S2 ] are compared with each
other. According to the result (smaller, equal or larger), either one among D , D +1 and D +2 turns ON.
• The source data [ S1 +1, S1 ] [ S2 +1, S2 ] are handled as binary values.
• Comparison is executed algebraically. Example: −125400 < 22466 2

Overview
Command
Command input
input 51
FNC 10 50
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
DCMP 49
S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ 48 S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚
D‚ Turns ON in the case of
" [ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ] > [ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ ] ".
3
D‚

List
Instruction
D ‚ +1 Turns ON in the case of
" [ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ] = [ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ ] ". Latched
D ‚ +1,
D ‚ +2 Turns ON in the case of
" [ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ] < [ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ ] ". Latched
D ‚ +2, 4

in Detail
Devices
Latched
Even if the command input turns OFF and DCMP instruction is not executed, D‚ , D ‚ +1 and D ‚ +2 latch
the status just before the command input turns OFF from ON.

Caution
1. Number of occupied devices
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
From the device specified as D , three devices are occupied. Make sure not to use those devices in another control.

Program examples
1. When comparing the current value of a counter
6
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚

Programming
Before
X000 X000
FNC 10
K100 C 20 M 0 101
CMP
100
M 0 99
Turns ON in the case of C20
"K100 > C20 (Current value)" .
M0
7
M 1
Turns ON in the case of

Instruction
Basic
"K100 = C20 (Current value)" .
M1
M 2 Turns ON in the case of
"K100 < C20 (Current value)" . M2
Latched Latched Latched
in the
ON
in the
ON
in the
ON
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

status. status. status.

If it is necessary to clear the comparison result when the instruction is not executed, add the following
contents under the above program.
1) RST instruction
X000
RST M0 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

RST M1

RST M2
10
2) ZRST instruction
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

X000
FNC 40
M0 M2 M0 to M2 are reset.
ZRST

255
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.2 FNC 11 – ZCP / Zone Compare

9.2 FNC 11 – ZCP / Zone Compare

Outline
This instruction compares two values (zone) with the comparison source, and outputs the result (smaller,
equal or larger) to bit devices (3 points).
→ For the contact comparison instruction, refer to Chapter 28.
→ For floating point comparison, refer to Section 18.2.

1. Instruction format

FNC 11 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D ZCP P 9 steps
ZCP Continuous
17 steps
DZCP Continuous
Operation Operation
ZCPP Pulse (Single) DZCPP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Data or device number handled as lower comparison value 16- or 32-bit binary

S2 Data or device number handled as upper comparison value 16- or 32-bit binary

S Data or device number handled as comparison source 16- or 32-bit binary

D Head bit device number to which comparison result is output Bit

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3 3 3

S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 S1 3

S1: "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
S2: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

256
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.2 FNC 11 – ZCP / Zone Compare

1
Explanation of function and operation

Introduction
1. 16-bit operation (ZCP and ZCPP)
The lower comparison value S1 and upper comparison value S2 are compared with the comparison
source S . According to the result (smaller, within zone or larger), either one among D , D +1 and
D +2 turns ON. 2

Overview
• Comparison is executed algebraically. Example: −10 < 2 <10
Command
input
FNC 11 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ S‚ D‚
ZCP
D‚ Turns ON in the case of 3
" [ S1 ‚ > S ‚ ] ".

List
Instruction
D ‚ +1 Turns ON in the case of
" [ S1 ‚ ≤ S ‚ ≤ S2 ‚ ] ".
D ‚ +2 Turns ON in the case of
"[ S‚ > S2 ‚ ] ". 4

in Detail
Devices
Even if the command input turns OFF and ZCP instruction is not executed, D ‚ , D ‚ +1 and D ‚ +2 latch
the status just before the command input turns OFF from ON.

2. 32-bit operation (DZCP and DZCPP)

The lower comparison value [ S1 +1, S1 ] and upper comparison value [ S2 +1, S2 ] are compared 5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
with the comparison source [ S +1, S ]. According to the result (smaller, within zone or larger), either
one among D , D +1 and D +2 turns ON.
• Comparison is executed algebraically. Example: −125400 < 22466 < 1015444
Command
input
FNC 11
6
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ S‚ D‚

Programming
Before
DZCP
D‚ Turns ON in the case of
" [ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ] > [ S ‚ +1, S ‚ ] ".
D ‚ +1 Turns ON in the case of
" [ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ] ≤ [ S ‚ +1, S ‚ ] ≤ [ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ ] ". 7
D ‚ +2 Turns ON in the case of

Instruction
Basic
" [ S ‚ +1, S ‚ ] > [ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ ] ".

Even if the command input turns OFF and ZCP instruction is not executed,
the status just before the command input turns OFF from ON.
D‚ , D ‚ +1 and D ‚ +2 latch 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

257
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.2 FNC 11 – ZCP / Zone Compare

Cautions
1. Number of occupied devices
From the device specified as D , three devices are occupied. Make sure not to use devices used in
another control.

2. Upper comparison value and lower comparison value

The lower comparison value S1 should be smaller than the upper comparison value S2 .
1) When the lower comparison value S1 is smaller than the upper comparison value S2

S1 ‚ S2 ‚ S‚ D‚ X000
X000
K100 K120 C30 M3 121
ZCP 120
119
M 3 …
Turns ON in the case of 100
"K100 > C30 (Current value)" . C30 99
M 4
Turns ON in the case of M3
"K100 ≤ C30 (Current value) ≤ K120" .
M 5 M4
Turns ON in the case of
"K120 < C30 (Current value)" .
M5

2) When the lower comparison value S1 is larger than the upper comparison value S2

S1 ‚ S2 ‚ S‚ D‚
X000
X000
ZCP K120 K100 C30 M3 121
120
119
…
It is handled as
100
K120 S1 ‚ . C30 99
M 3
Turns ON in the case of
"K120 > C30 (Current value)" . M3
M 4
Turns ON in the case of M4
"K120 = C30 (Current value)" .
M 5 M5
Turns ON in the case of
"K120 < C30 (Current value)" .

258
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.3 FNC 12 – MOV / Move

1
9.3 FNC 12 – MOV / Move

Introduction
Outline
This instruction transfers (copies) the contents of a device to another device.
2
1. Instruction format

Overview
FNC 12 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D MOV P 5 steps
MOV Continuous
9 steps
DMOV Continuous
Operation Operation
MOVP Pulse (Single) DMOVP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
3

List
Instruction
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Transfer source data or device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary

Transfer destination device number 16- or 32-bit binary

D
4
3. Applicable devices

in Detail
Devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type

S
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3
Z Modify K H
3 3 3
E "…" P
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation 6

Programming
Before
1. 16-bit operation (MOV and MOVP)
The contents of the transfer source S are transferred to the transfer destination D .
• While the command input is OFF, the transfer destination D does not change.
• When a constant (K) is specified as the transfer source S , it is automatically converted into binary.
7
Command

Instruction
Basic
input
FNC 12 → D‚
S‚ D‚ S‚
MOV

When specifying digits of a bit device (K1X000 → K1Y000)

The bit device transfers a maximum of 16 points(multiple of 4). 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Command
input
FNC 12 K1X000 K1Y000
MOV

S ‚ :K1X000 D ‚ :K1Y000
Before X3 X2 X1 X0 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0
Command contact ON
9
execution X000 ON
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

ON OFFOFF ON ON ON ON OFF
X001 OFF
S‚
Transfer X002 OFF
After X3 X2 X1 X0 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0
execution X003 ON
ON OFFOFF ON ON OFFOFF ON

Y000 OFF ON 10
Y001 ON OFF
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

D‚
Y002 ON OFF
Y003 ON

259
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.3 FNC 12 – MOV / Move

When a word device is specified

The word device transfers 1 point.
Command
input
FNC 12 D10 D50
MOV

S‚ :D10 D ‚ :D50 Command contact ON

Before
execution K50 K0
S‚ 50
Transfer
After
execution K50 K50 D‚ 0 50

2. 32-bit operation (DMOV and DMOVP)

The contents of the transfer source [ S +1, S ] are transferred to the transfer destination [ D +1,
D ].

• While the command input is OFF, the transfer destination D does not change.
• When a constant (K) is specified as the transfer source [ S +1, S ], it is automatically converted into
binary.
Command
input
FNC 12 S‚ D‚ [ ]→[
S ‚ +1, S ‚ D ‚ +1, D ‚ ]
DMOV

When specifying digits of a bit device (K8X000 → K8Y000)

The bit device transfers a maximum of 32 points (multiple of 4).
Command
input
FNC 12 K8X000 K8Y000
DMOV

S ‚ :K8X000 D ‚ :K8Y000 ON
Command contact
Before X37 to X1 X0 Y37 to Y1 Y0
execution X000 ON
ON OFFOFF ON ON ON ON OFF
X001 OFF
Transfer S‚
…

After OFF
X37 to X1 X0 Y37 to Y1 Y0
execution X037 ON
ON OFFOFF ON ON OFFOFF ON

Y000 OFF ON
Y001 ON OFF
D‚
ON OFF
…

Y037 ON

When a word device is specified

The word device transfers 1 point.
Command
input
FNC 12 D10 D50
DMOV

S‚ :D11,D10 D ‚ :D51,D50 Command contact ON

Before
execution K500000 K4321
S‚ 500000
Transfer
After
execution K500000 K500000 D‚ 4321 500000

260
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.3 FNC 12 – MOV / Move

1
Program examples

Introduction
1. When reading the current value of a timer and counter
X001 (Current value of T0) → (D20)
FNC 12 T 0 D 20 The operation is the same as a counter.
MOV
2

Overview
2. When indirectly specifying the set value of a timer or counter
As the set value of the timer T20, two values can be specified by turning ON or OFF the switch X002.
For specifying more than two set values, more than one switch is required.
X002
FNC 12
MOV
K100 D 10 (K100) → (D 10) 3

List
Instruction
X002
FNC 12 K 50 D 10 (K50) → (D 10)
MOV
M 0
T 20 D 10 When X002 is ON, D10 = K100 (10-second timer).
When X002 is OFF, D10 = K50 (5-second timer).
4

in Detail
Devices
3. When transferring a bit device
The program written by basic instructions shown on the right can be expressed using MOV instruction as
shown below.
X000
Y000 5
X001

Constant
Device &
Specified the
M8000 Y001
FNC 12 K1X000 K1Y000
MOV X002
RUN monitor Y002

X003
Y003
6

Programming
Before
4. When transferring 32-bit data
Make sure to use DMOV instruction for transferring the operation result of an applied instruction (such as
MUL) whose operation result is output in 32 bits, and for transferring a 32-bit numeric value or transferring the
current value of a high speed counter (C235 to C255) which is a 32-bit device. 7

Instruction
Basic
Command
input
FNC 12 D0(D1) D10(D11) (D 1,D 0) → (D 11,D 10)
Command
DMOV
input
FNC 12 (Current value of C235) → (D21, D20)
DMOV
C235 D20(D21)
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

261
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.4 FNC 13 – SMOV / Shift Move

9.4 FNC 13 – SMOV / Shift Move

Outline
This instruction distributes and composes data in units of digit (4 bits).

1. Instruction format

FNC 13 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

SMOV P SMOV Continuous −

11 steps Operation
SMOVP Pulse (Single) −
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Word device number storing data whose digits will be moved 16-bit binary
m1 Head digit position to be moved 16-bit binary
m2 Number of digits to be moved 16-bit binary
D Word device number storing data whose digits are moved 16-bit binary
n Head digit position of movement destination 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3
m1 3 3
m2 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3
n 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

262
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.4 FNC 13 – SMOV / Shift Move

1
Explanation of function and operation

Introduction
1. 16-bit operation (SMOV and SMOVP)
The contents of the transfer source S and transfer destination D are converted into 4-digit BCD
(0000 to 9999) respectively. "m2" digits starting from "m1"th digit are transferred (composed) to the transfer
destination D starting from "n"th digit, converted into binary, and then stored to the transfer destination 2
D .

Overview
• While the command input is OFF, the transfer destination D does not change.
• When the command input turns ON, only the specified digits in the transfer destination D are changed.
The transfer source S and unspecified digits in the transfer destination D do not change.
Command 3
input

List
Instruction
FNC 13 m1 m2 n
S‚ D‚
SMOV

In the case of "m1 = 4, [1] S is converted from binary into BCD.

m2 = 2, n = 3".
4th digit 3rd digit 2nd digit 1st digit
S ‚ (16-bit binary data)
[2] "m2" digits starting from "m1"th digit are 4
transferred (composed) to D ’ starting

in Detail
Devices
↓ Data is automatically from "n"th digit.
converted. [1]
103 102 101 100 S ‚ ' (4-digit BCD data) The digits of 103 and 100 of D ’ are not
Command contact = ON affected even if data is transferred from
↓ Digits are moved. [2] S ’.

103 102 101 100 D ‚ ' (4-digit BCD data)

[3] The composed data (BCD) is converted
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Do not change. ↓ Data is automatically into binary, and stored to D .
converted. [3]
D ‚ (16-bit binary data)

2. Extension function
When M8168 is set to ON first and then SMOV instruction is executed, conversion from binary to BCD is not 6
executed.

Programming
Before
Data is moved in units of 4 bits.

M8168
X010
FNC 13 D 1 K 4 K 2 D 2 K 3 7
SMOV

Instruction
Basic
M8168 ‚ M8168 is available for other instructions also.
X010 After using M8168 for SMOV instruction, return it to OFF.

Program example 8
The data on three-digit digital switches are composed, and stored as binary data to D2.
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

102 101 100 M8000

FNC 19 K2X020 D 2 (X020 to X027) 2-digit BCD
BIN → D2 (binary)
7 6 5

8 1 8 1
FNC 19
BIN
K1X000 D 1 (X000 to X003) 1-digit BCD
→ D1 (binary) 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

8 1
FNC 13 D 1 K 1 K 1 D 2 K 3
X003 to X000 X027 to X020 SMOV
1-digit BCD data of D1 is transferred to
PLC the 3rd digit (BCD data) of D2, and
Data on three digital switches
automatically converted into binary data.
10
connected to non-consecutive input
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

terminals are composed.

263
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.5 FNC 14 – CML / Complement

9.5 FNC 14 – CML / Complement

Outline
This instruction inverts data in units of bit, and then transfers (copies) the inverted data.

1. Instruction format

FNC 14 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D CML P 5 steps
CML Continuous
9 steps
DCML Continuous
Operation Operation
CMLP Pulse (Single) DCMLP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Data to be inverted or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary

D Word device number storing inverted data 16- or 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (CML and CMLP)
Each bit of a device specified as S is inverted (from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0), and then transferred to D .
• When a constant (K) is specified as S , it is automatically converted into binary.
• This operation is useful when a logically inverted output is required as an output from a PLC.
Command
input
FNC 14 → D‚
S‚ D‚ S‚
CML

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b11 b9 b8 b7 b6 n5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

S‚ 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0
Sign bit (0: Positive, 1: Negative)
When command contact turns ON

D‚ 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

Inverted data is transferred.

264
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.5 FNC 14 – CML / Complement

1
2. 32-bit operation (DCML and DCMLP)

Introduction
Each bit of devices specified as [ S +1, S ] is inverted (from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0), and then transferred
to [ D +1, D ].
• When a constant (K) is specified as [ S +1, S ], it is automatically converted into binary.
• This operation is useful when a logically inverted output is required as an output from a PLC. 2

Overview
Command
input
FNC 14 S ‚ +1, S ‚ → D‚ +1, D ‚
S‚ D‚
DCML

b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 to b7 b6 n5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 3

S‚ 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0

List
Instruction
Sign bit (0: Positive, 1: Negative)
When command contact turns ON

D‚ 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

Inverted data is transferred.

4

in Detail
Devices
Program examples
1. When receiving an inverted input
The sequence program shown below can be written by CML instruction. 5
X000 X000

Constant
Device &
Specified the
M0 M0

X001 X001
M1 M1

X002
M2
X002
M2
6

Programming
Before
X003 X003
M3 M3

Instruction
Basic
M8000
FNC 14 K1X000 K1M0
CML
RUN monitor

2. When four bits are specified for a device with digit specification 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

S‚ D‚
X000
FNC 14 D 0 K1Y000 (D 0) → (K1Y000)
CML

Y015 b14 b13 b12 b11 b11 b9 b8 b7 b6 n5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 9

S‚ 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

D0 Sign bit (0: Positive, 1: Negative) X000 = ON

D‚ 0 1 0 1
K1Y000 Y017 Y016 Y015 Y014 Y013 Y012 Y011 Y010 Y007 Y006 Y005 Y004 Y003 Y002 Y001 Y000
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

Do not change. Inverted data is

transferred.

265
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.6 FNC 15 – BMOV / Block Move

9.6 FNC 15 – BMOV / Block Move

Outline
This instruction transfers (copies) a specified number of data at one time.

1. Instruction format

FNC 15 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

BMOV P BMOV Continuous −

7 steps Operation
BMOVP Pulse (Single) −
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Transfer source data or device number storing data 16-bit binary

D Transfer destination device number 16-bit binary

n Number of transferred points (including file registers) [n ≤ 512] 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3
n 3 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

BMOV instruction transfers "n" points of data from S to D at one time.
• If the device number range is exceeded, data is transferred within the possible range.
Command
input
FNC 15 n S‚ D‚
S‚ D‚
BMOV S ‚ +1 D ‚ +1
"n" points
…

S ‚ +n D ‚ +n

Transfer is enabled even if the transfer number range is overlapped.

To prevent overwriting before transfer of source data, data is automatically transferred in the order "[1] → [2]
→ [3]" according to the number overlap status.
X001 [1]
FNC 15 D 10 D 9 K 3 D 10 D 9
BMOV [2]
D 11 D 10
[3]
D 12 D 11

X002 [3]
FNC 15 D 10 D 11
D 10 D 11 K 3 [2]
BMOV D 11 D 12
[1]
D 12 D 13

266
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.6 FNC 15 – BMOV / Block Move

1
Extension function (bi-directional transfer function)

Introduction
By controlling the direction inverse flag M8024*1 for BMOV (FNC 15) instruction, data can be transferred in
two directions in one program.

X001 *1
BMOV
M8024
direction
BMOV direction
inverse flag
Transfer
direction
S , D 2
inverse flag

Overview
S‚ D‚ n D5 → D10
X000 M8024*1 : OFF S → D D6 → D11
FNC 15
BMOVP D5 D10 K3 D7 → D12
D5 ← D10
M8001 *1BMOV
M8024*1 : ON S ← D D6 ← D11
M8024 direction
Normally OFF inverse flag: D7 ← D12 3
during operation OFF

List
Instruction
*1. M8024 is cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP.

Caution
When specifying digits of bit devices, specify a same number of digits for S and D . 4

in Detail
Devices
S‚ D‚ n
M8000
FNC 15 K1M0 K1Y000 K 2 M 0 Y000
BMOV M 1 Y001
M 2 Y002
Specify a same number M 3 Y003
5
of digits.

Constant
Device &
Specified the
n=2
(Example: K1)
M 4 Y004
M 5 Y005
M 6 Y006
M 7 Y007 6

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

267
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.6 FNC 15 – BMOV / Block Move

9.6.1 Function of transfer between file registers and data registers

BMOV (FNC 15) instruction has a special function for file registers (D1000 and later).
→ For details on file registers, refer to Section 4.8.

1. What are file registers

By parameter setting, D1000 to D7999 can be handled as file registers, and written to and read from the
program memory area.
1) Outline of setting
File registers (D1000 to D7999) do not exist in the initial status. They are valid only when some number
of file registers are secured by parameter setting in a programming tool.
2) Number of file registers
In parameter setting, set 500 file registers as 1 block.
1 to 14 blocks (each of which has 500 file registers) can be set.
1 block occupies 500 steps in the program memory area.
3) Difference between BMOV (FNC 15) instruction and other instructions
The table below shows the difference between BMOV (FNC 15) instruction and other instructions with
regard to file registers (D1000 and later).

Instruction Contents of transfer Remarks

BMOV Can read from and write to the file register
−
instruction area [A] inside the program memory.
Because the data register area [B] is provided
Can read from and write to the data register
Other applied inside the system RAM in PLCs, its contents can be
area [B] inside the program memory in the
instructions arbitrarily changed without regard to the memory
same way as general data registers.
cassette format

When restoring the power, data registers set as file registers are automatically copied from the file
register area [A] to the data register area [B].

Inside built-in memory Inside system

or memory cassette RAM
D0
Program When power Data
memory is turned ON memory
When PLC Devices D1000 and later specified as
Program/ Data register
mode is operands in applied instructions other
comment
changed from than BMOV (FNC 15) , indirectly
D1000 D1000
STOP to specified values for timers or
500 points × File register RUN Data register Write counters or devices in RST
14 blocks
[A] [B] instruction are read from and written
maximum
to the area [B] in the same way as
(7000 points Read
Data register general data registers.
maximum) D7999

The remaining area can be used as general purpose

data registers.

268
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.6 FNC 15 – BMOV / Block Move

1
2. Cautions on use

Introduction
1) When updating the contents of a file register with a same number (same-number update mode), make
sure that the file register number is equivalent between S and D .
2) When using file registers in the same-number update mode, make sure that the number of transfer points
specified by "n" does not exceed the file register area.
2
3) If the file register area is exceeded while file registers are used in the same-number update mode, an

Overview
operation error (M8067) is caused and the instruction is not executed.
4) In the case of indexing (in the same-number update mode)
When S and D are indexing with index, the instruction is executed if the actual device number is
within the file register area and the number of transfer points does not exceed the file register area.
5) Handling of the memory cassette 3
When changing the contents of file registers secured inside the memory cassette, confirm the following

List
Instruction
conditions:
- Set the protect switch of the memory cassette to OFF.
- It takes 66 to 132 ms to write data to one serial block (500 points) in the memory cassette (flash
memory). It takes 80 ms to write data to one serial block (500 points) in the memory cassette
(EEPROM). 4
Execution of the program is paused during this period. Because the watchdog timer is not refreshed at

in Detail
Devices
this time, it is necessary to take proper countermeasures such as insertion of WDT instruction in a user
program.
6) Allowable number of times of writing to the memory
Data can be written to the memory cassette up to 10,000 times, and to the memory (EEPROM) built in
FX3G PLCs up to 20,000 times. 5
When a continuous operation type instruction is used for data writing in a program, data is written to the

Constant
Device &
Specified the
memory in every operation cycle of the PLC. To prevent this, make sure to use a pulse operation type
instruction (BMOVP).
7) File register operation
File registers are secured inside the built-in memory or memory cassette.
Different from general data registers, file registers can be read and written only by peripheral equipment
or BMOV (FNC 15) instruction.
6

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

269
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.6 FNC 15 – BMOV / Block Move

8) If a file register is not specified as the destination in BMOV (FNC 15) instruction, the file register is not
accessed.
a) Outline of memory operation

Inside built-in memory Inside system

or memory cassette RAM
D0
Program D200 Image
memory memory

Program/
D599 Data register
comment

Read
D1000
500 points × File register D1100 Data register
14 blocks [A] [B]
maximum D1499
(7000 points Data register
maximum) D7999

b) Program example
When X000 is set to ON, the data register area [B] is read.

S‚ D‚ n
X000
FNC 15
BMOVP D1100 D200 K400

A file register can be specified as D . But if a same number with S is specified, the same-
number register update mode is selected.
However, even if a file register having different number is specified for S and D respectively,
data cannot be transferred from the file register area to another file register area. In such a case, read
the contents of a file register specified as S in the same-number register update mode to the data
register area [B] once, and then write the data.
→ For the same-number register update mode of file registers, refer to Subsection 4.8.2.

270
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.7 FNC 16 – FMOV / Fill Move

1
9.7 FNC 16 – FMOV / Fill Move

Introduction
Outline
This instruction transfers same data to specified number of devices.
2
1. Instruction format

Overview
FNC 16 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D FMOV P 7 steps
FMOV Continuous
13 steps
DFMOV Continuous
Operation Operation
FMOVP Pulse (Single) DFMOVP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
3

List
Instruction
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Transfer source data or device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary

D
Head word device number of transfer destination (Same data is transferred from
the transfer source at one time.)
16- or 32-bit binary 4

in Detail
Devices
n Number of transfer points [K1 ≤ n ≤ K512, H1 ≤ n ≤ H1FF] 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
and System User Digit Specification System User
Special
Unit
Index
Con- Real Charac-
stant Number ter String
Pointer 5
Type

Constant
Device &
Specified the
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3
n 3 3
6
S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Programming
Before
Explanation of function and operation
1. 16-bit operation (FMOV and FMOVP)
The contents of S are transferred to "n" devices starting from D . 7
• The contents will be same among all of "n" devices.

Instruction
Basic
• If the number of points specified by "n" exceeds the device number range, data is transferred within the
possible range.
• While the command input is OFF, the transfer destination D does not change.
• While the command input is ON, the data of the transfer source S does not change. 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

271
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.7 FNC 16 – FMOV / Fill Move

• When a constant (K) is specified as the transfer source S , it is automatically converted into binary.
Command
input
FNC 16 n
S‚ D‚
FMOV

S‚ D‚

D ‚ +1

D ‚ +2 n

D ‚ +3

D ‚ +4

2. 32-bit operation (DFMOV and DFMOVP)

The contents of [ S +1, S ] are transferred to "n" 32-bit devices starting from [ D +1, D ].
• The contents will be the same among all of "n" 32-bit devices.
• If the number of points specified by "n" exceeds the device number range, data is transferred within the
possible range.
• While the command input is OFF, the transfer destination [ D +1, D ] does not change.
• While the command input is ON, the data of the transfer source [ S +1, S ] does not change.
• When a constant (K) is specified as the transfer source [ S +1, S ], it is automatically converted into
binary.
X000
FNC 16 S‚ D‚ n
DFMOV

S ‚ +1, S ‚ D ‚ +1, D ‚

D ‚ +3, D ‚ +2

D ‚ +5, D ‚ +4 n

D ‚ +7, D ‚ +6

D ‚ +9, D ‚ +8

272
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.7 FNC 16 – FMOV / Fill Move

1
Program example

Introduction
1. When writing specified data to two or more devices

S‚ D‚ n
X000
FNC 16
FMOV
K 0 D 0 K 5 2

Overview
Before After
S‚ D‚ execution execution

K0 K0 D0 …… K 3 → K 0

K0 D1 …… K 5 → K 0
3

List
Instruction
K0 D2 …… K 65 → K 0

K0 D3 …… K 7 → K 0
4
K0 D4 …… K100 → K 0

in Detail
Devices
Values before execution are
shown as examples.

Constant
Device &
Specified the
6

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

273
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.8 FNC 17 – XCH / Exchange

9.8 FNC 17 – XCH / Exchange

Outline
This instruction exchanges data between two devices.

1. Instruction format

FNC 17 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D XCH P XCH Continuous DXCH Continuous

5 steps Operation 9 steps Operation
XCHP Pulse (Single) DXCHP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
D1 Device number storing data to be exchanged. 16- or 32-bit binary

D2 Device number storing data to be exchanged. 16- or 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

D1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

D2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (XCH and XCHP)
Data is exchanged between D1 and D2 .
Command
input
FNC 17
D1 ‚ D2 ‚ D1 ‚ D2 ‚
XCHP
Before After
execution execution
D1 ‚ = K10 K36 = D1 ‚

D2 ‚ = K36 K10 = D2 ‚
Exchange

2. 32-bit operation (DXCH and DXCHP)

Data is exchanged between [ D1 +1, D1 ] and [ D2 +1, D2 ].
Command
input
FNC 17 D1 ‚ D2 ‚ D1 ‚ +1, D1 ‚ D2 ‚ +1, D2 ‚
DXCHP

Before execution After execution

D1 ‚ +1, D1 ‚ = K10000 K1433600 = D1 ‚ +1, D1 ‚

D2 ‚ +1, D2 ‚ = K1433600 K10000 = D2 ‚ +1, D2 ‚

Exchange

274
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.8 FNC 17 – XCH / Exchange

1
Extension function (function compatible between the FX2 Series and the FX2C Series)

Introduction
When the instruction is executed while M8160 is ON, high-order 8 bits (byte) and low-order 8 bits (byte) of a
word device are exchanged each other.
Because this instruction works in the same way as SWAP (FNC147) instruction, use SWAP instruction when
programming new exchange.
In a 32-bit operation, high-order 8 bits (byte) and low-order 8 bits (byte) of each word device are exchanged 2
for each other.

Overview
X000
M8160 SWAP

FNC 17
DXCH
D 10 D 10 3

List
Instruction
D 11 D 10

M8160 High-order 8 bits Low-order 8 bits High-order 8 bits Low-order 8 bits

M8000

Error 4

in Detail
Devices
An operation error occurs in the following case. The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored
in D8067.
• When M8160 is ON, and the device number is different between D1 and D2

Constant
Device &
Specified the
6

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

275
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.9 FNC 18 – BCD / Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal

9.9 FNC 18 – BCD / Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal

Outline
This instruction converts binary (BIN) data into binary-coded decimal (BCD) data.
Binary data is used in operations in PLCs. Use this instruction to display numeric values on the seven-
segment display unit equipped with BCD decoder.

1. Instruction format

FNC 18 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D BCD P 5 steps
BCD Continuous
9 steps
DBCD Continuous
Operation Operation
BCDP Pulse (Single) DBCDP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Word device number storing the conversion source (binary) data 16- or 32-bit binary

D Word device number of the conversion destination (binary-coded decimal) data 16- or 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (BCD and BCDP)
This instruction converts the binary (BIN) data of S into binary-coded decimal (BCD) data, and transfers
the converted BCD data to D .
• The data of S can be converted if it is within the range from K0 to K9999 (BCD).
• The table below shows digit specification for S and D .
Command
input BIN
FNC 18 S‚ D‚ PLC
BCD BCD (FNC 18)

Y014 … Y010 … Y004 … Y000 …

When "K4Y000" is specified
Y017 … Y013 … Y007 … Y003 …

BCD

D Number of digits Data range

K1Y000 1 0 to 9
K2Y000 2 00 to 99
K3Y000 3 000 to 999
K4Y000 4 0000 to 9999

276
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.9 FNC 18 – BCD / Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal

1
2. 32-bit operation (DBCD and DBCDP)

Introduction
This instruction converts the binary (BIN) data of [ S +1, S ] into binary-coded decimal (BCD) data, and
transfers the converted BCD data to [ D +1, D ].
• The data of [ S +1, S ] can be converted if it is within the range from K0 to K99999999 (BCD).
• The table below shows digit specification for [ S +1, S ] and [ D +1, D ]. 2

Overview
Command
input
FNC 18 BIN
S‚ D‚ PLC
DBCD DBCD (FNC 18)

Y034 …Y030 …Y024 … Y020 …Y014 …Y010 …Y004 …Y000 …

When "K8Y000" is specified
Y037 Y033 Y027 Y023 Y017 Y013 Y007 Y003 3

List
Instruction
BCD

in Detail
Devices
[ D +1, D ] Number of digits Data range
K1Y000 1 0 to 9
K2Y000 2 00 to 99
K3Y000 3 000 to 999
5
K4Y000 4 0000 to 9999

Constant
Device &
Specified the
K5Y000 5 00000 to 99999
K6Y000 6 000000 to 999999
K7Y000 7 0000000 to 9999999
K8Y000 8 00000000 to 99999999
6

Programming
Before
Related instruction
Instruction Function
BIN (FNC 19) Converts binary-coded decimal (BCD) data into binary (BIN) data.

Cautions 7

Instruction
Basic
1. When using SEGL (FNC 74) or ARWS (FNC 75) instruction
Because conversion between binary-coded decimal data and binary data is automatically executed in SEGL
(FNC 74) and ARWS (FNC 75) instructions, BCD instruction is not required.

2. Handling of BCD inputs and outputs 8

Binary data is used in all operations in PLCs including arithmetic operations (+, −, × and ÷), increment and
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

decrement instructions.
• When receiving the digital switch information in the binary-coded decimal (BCD) format into a PLC, use
BIN (FNC 19) instruction for converting BCD data into binary data.
• When outputting data to the seven-segment display unit handling binary-coded decimal (BCD) data, use
BCD (FNC 18) instruction for converting binary data into BCD data. 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

Errors
In BCD or BCDP (16-bit type) instructions, an operation error occurs when the S value is outside the
range from 0 to 9999.
In DBCD or DBCDP (32-bit type) instructions, an operation error occurs when the S value is outside the
range from 0 to 99,999,999. 10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

277
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.9 FNC 18 – BCD / Conversion to Binary Coded Decimal

Program examples
1. When the seven-segment display unit has 1 digit
X000
FNC 18 D0 K1Y000 PLC
BCD

2. When the seven-segment display unit has 2 to 4 digits

X000
FNC 18 D0 K2Y000 PLC
BCD

In the case of 2 digits: K2 Output

In the case of 3 digits: K3 destination
In the case of 4 digits: K4

K4 K3 K2 K1

3. When the seven-segment display unit has 5 to 8 digits

X000
FNC 18 PLC
DBCD D0 K5Y000

D1,D0 Output
destination
In the case of 5 digits: K5
In the case of 6 digits: K6
In the case of 7 digits: K7
In the case of 8 digits: K8
K8 K7 K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1

278
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.10 FNC 19 – BIN / Conversion to Binary

1
9.10 FNC 19 – BIN / Conversion to Binary

Introduction
Outline
This instruction converts binary-coded decimal (BCD) data into binary (BIN) data.
Use this instruction to convert a binary-coded decimal (BCD) value such as a value set by a digital switch into
2

Overview
binary (BIN) data and to receive the converted binary data so that the data can be handled in operations in
PLCs.

1. Instruction format

FNC 19 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
3
D BIN P 5 steps
BIN Continuous
9 steps
DBIN Continuous

List
Instruction
Operation Operation
BINP Pulse (Single) DBINP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
4
S Word device number storing the conversion source (binary-coded decimal) data 16- or 32-bit binary

in Detail
Devices
D Word device number of the conversion destination (binary) 16- or 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices

Oper-
Bit Devices Word Devices
Special Con- Real
Others
Charac-
5
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

6

Programming
Before
Explanation of function and operation
1. 16-bit operation (BIN and BINP)
This instruction converts the binary-coded decimal (BCD) data of S into binary (BIN) data, and transfers
7
the converted binary data to D .

Instruction
Basic
• The data of S can be converted if it is within the range from K0 to K9999 (BCD).
• The table below shows digit specification for S and D .
Command
input
FNC 19
BIN
S‚ D‚
6 7 8 9
BCD
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

When "K4X000"
is specified

X014 … X010 …X004 … X000 …

X017 X013 X007 X003
9
BIN
BIN (FNC 19)
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

PLC

S Number of digits Data range

K1X000 1 0 to 9
10
K2X000 2 00 to 99
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

K3X000 3 000 to 999

K4X000 4 0000 to 9999

279
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.10 FNC 19 – BIN / Conversion to Binary

2. 32-bit operation (DBIN and DBINP)

This instruction converts the binary-coded decimal (BCD) data of [ S +1, S ] into binary (BIN) data, and
transfers the converted binary data to [ D +1, D ].
• The data of [ S +1, S ] can be converted if it is within the range from 0 to 99,999,999 (BCD).
• The table below shows digit specification for [ S +1, S ] and [ D +1, D ].
Command
input BCD
FNC 19 S‚ D‚
DBIN 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

When "K8X000"
is specified

X034 …X030 … X024 … X020 …X014 …X010 …X004 …X000 …

X037 X033 X027 X023 X017 X013 X007 X003
BIN
DBIN (FNC 19)
PLC

[ S +1, S ] Number of digits Data range

K1X000 1 0 to 9
K2X000 2 00 to 99
K3X000 3 000 to 999
K4X000 4 0000 to 9999
K5X000 5 00000 to 99999
K6X000 6 000000 to 999999
K7X000 7 0000000 to 9999999
K8X000 8 00000000 to 99999999

Related instruction
Instruction Function
BCD (FNC 18) Converts binary (BIN) data into binary-coded decimal (BCD) data.

Cautions
1. When using DSW (FNC 72) instruction
Because conversion between binary-coded decimal data and binary data is automatically executed in DSW
(FNC 72) instruction, BIN instruction is not required.

2. Handling of BCD inputs and outputs

Binary data is used in all operations in PLCs including arithmetic operations (+, −, × and ÷), increment and
decrement instructions.
• When receiving the digital switch information in the binary-coded decimal (BCD) format into a PLC, use
BIN (FNC 19) instruction for converting BCD data into binary data.
• When outputting data to the seven-segment display unit handling binary-coded decimal (BCD) data, use
BCD (FNC 18) instruction for converting binary data into BCD data.

Error
M8067 (operation error) turns ON when the source data is not binary-coded decimal (BCD).

280
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 9 Move and Compare – FNC 10 to FNC 19
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 9.10 FNC 19 – BIN / Conversion to Binary

1
Program examples

Introduction
1. When the digital switch has 1 digit
X000
FNC 19 K1X000 D0
BIN 6 2

Overview
MOV instruction can be used instead.
X000
FNC 12 K1X000 D0
MOV PLC

2. When the digital switch has 2 to 4 digits

3

List
Instruction
X000 K4 K3 K2 K1
FNC 19 K2X000 D0
BIN
6 7 8 9
In the case of 2 digits: K2 Output
destination
In the case of 3 digits: K3
In the case of 4 digits: K4 Digital switch 4
input

in Detail
Devices
PLC

3. When the digital switch has 5 to 8 digits

X000 K8 K7 K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1 5
FNC 19 K5X000 D0

Constant
Device &
Specified the
DBIN
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
In the case of 5 digits: K5 Output
In the case of 6 digits: K6 destination
In the case of 7 digits: K7 Digital switch
In the case of 8 digits: K8 input
6
PLC

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

281
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

10. Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) –

FNC 20 to FNC 29
FNC 20 to FNC 29 provide instructions for arithmetic operations and logical operations of numeric data.

FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

Section
20 ADD ADD S1 S2 D Addition
10.1

Section
21 SUB SUB S1 S2 D Subtraction
10.2

Section
22 MUL MUL S1 S2 D Multiplication
10.3

Section
23 DIV DIV S1 S2 D Division
10.4

Section
24 INC INC D Increment
10.5

Section
25 DEC DEC D Decrement
10.6

Section
26 WAND WAND S1 S2 D Logical Word AND
10.7

Section
27 WOR WOR S1 S2 D Logical Word OR
10.8

Section
28 WXOR WXOR S1 S2 D Logical Exclusive OR
10.9

Section
29 NEG NEG D Negation
10.10

Floating point operation instructions

FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs offer not only arithmetic operation instructions in the binary format but also
arithmetic operation instructions in the floating point format.
FNC No. Instruction mnemonic Contents of processing
120 [D]EADD Addition of binary floating point
121 [D]ESUB Subtraction of binary floating point
122 [D]EMUL Multiplication of binary floating point
123 [D]EDIV Division of binary floating point

For details, refer to the explanation of each instruction.

→ For the floating point operation, refer to Chapter 18.

282
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.1 FNC 20 – ADD / Addition

1
10.1 FNC 20 – ADD / Addition

Introduction
Outline
This instruction executes addition by two values to obtain the result (A + B = C).
→ For the floating point addition instruction EADD (FNC120), refer to Section 18.8.
2

Overview
1. Instruction format

FNC 20 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D ADD P 7 steps ADD Continuous
13 steps DADD
Continuous

ADDP
Operation
Pulse (Single)
Operation
DADDP
Operation
Pulse (Single)
Operation
3

List
Instruction
2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
S1 Data for addition or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary
4
S2 Data for addition or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary

in Detail
Devices
D Word device number storing the addition result 16- or 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
5
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 6

Programming
Before
S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (ADD and ADDP) 7
The contents of S2 are added to S1 in the binary format, and the addition result is transferred to D .

Instruction
Basic
Command
input FNC 20 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ S1 ‚ + S2 ‚ → D ‚
ADD

• The most significant bit of each data indicates the sign (positive: 0 or negative: 1), and data are added
algebraically. 8
5 + (−8) = −3
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

• When a constant (K) is specified in S1 or S2 , it is automatically converted into the binary format.

2. 32-bit operation (DADD and DADDP)

The contents of [ S2 +1, S2
is transferred to [ D1 +1, D1
] are added to [ S1
].
+1, S1 ] in the binary format, and the addition result
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

Command
input FNC 20 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ [ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ] + [ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ ] → [ D ‚ +1, D ‚ ]
DADD

• The most significant bit of each data indicates the sign (positive: 0 or negative: 1), and data are added
algebraically. 10
5500 + (−8540) = −3040
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

• When a constant (K) is specified in [ S1 +1, S1 ] or [ S2 +1, S2 ], it is automatically converted into

the binary format.

283
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.1 FNC 20 – ADD / Addition

Related devices
1. Relationship between the flag operation and the sign (positive or negative) of a numeric
value
→ For the flag operations, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Device Name Description
ON : When the operation result is 0
M8020 Zero
OFF: When the operation result is not 0
ON : When the operation result is less than −32768 (in 16-bit operation) or
−2,147,483,648 (in 32-bit operation)
M8021 Borrow
OFF: When the operation result is not less than −32768 (in 16-bit operation) or
−2,147,483,648 (in 32-bit operation)
ON : When the operation result is more than 32767 (in 16-bit operation) or
2,147,483,647 (in 32-bit operation)
M8022 Carry
OFF: When the operation result is not more than 32767 (in 16-bit operation) or
2,147,483,647 (in 32-bit operation)

Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag

−2, −1, 0, −32768 −1, 0, 1 32767, 0, 1, 2

Borrow flag The most The most Carry flag

significant bit of significant bit
data becomes of data
Zero flag "1". becomes "0". Zero flag

−2, −1, 0, −2,147,483,648 −1, 0, 1 2,147,483,647, 0, 1, 2

Borrow flag Zero flag Carry flag

Cautions
1. When using a 32-bit operation instruction (DADD or DADDP)
When specifying word devices, a 16-bit word device on the low-order side is specified first, and a word device
with the subsequent device number is automatically set for the high-order 16 bits.
To prevent number overlap, it is recommended to always specify an even number, for example.

2. When specifying the same device in the source and destination

The same device number can be specified for both the source and the destination.
In this case, note that the addition result changes in every operation cycle if a continuous operation type
instruction (ADD or DADD) is used.
X001
FNC 20 D 0 K 25 D 0 (D 0) + 25→(D 0)
ADD

284
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.1 FNC 20 – ADD / Addition

1
Program example

Introduction
1. Difference between ADD instruction and INC instruction caused by a program for adding
"+1"
When ADD[P] is executed, "1" is added to the contents of D0 every time X001 turns ON from OFF.
ADD[P] instruction is similar to INCP instruction described later except the contents shown in the table below: 2

Overview
ADD, ADDP, DADD or
INC, INCP, DINC, DINCP instruction
DADDP instruction
Flag (zero, borrow or carry) Operates Does not operate

16-bit S +(+1)= D +32767→0→+1→+2→ +32767→−32768→−32767

Operation result

operation
S +(−1)= D ←−2←−1←0←−32768 ⎯ 3

List
Instruction
32-bit S +(+1)= D +2,147,483,647→0→+1→+2→ +2,147,483,647→−2,147,483,648→−2,147,483,647
operation ←−2←−1←0←−2,147,483,648 ⎯
S +(−1)= D

S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
X001
FNC 20
4
D 0 K 1 D 0 (D 0) + 1→(D 0)

in Detail
Devices
ADDP

X001
FNC 24 D 0 (D 0) + 1→(D 0) 5
INCP

Constant
Device &
Specified the
6

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

285
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.2 FNC 21 – SUB / Subtraction

10.2 FNC 21 – SUB / Subtraction

Outline
This instruction executes subtraction using two values to obtain the result (A − B = C).
→ For the floating point subtraction instruction ESUB (FNC121), refer to Section 18.9.

1. Instruction format
FNC 21 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D SUB P 7 steps SUB Continuous
13 steps DSUB
Continuous
Operation Operation
SUBP Pulse (Single) DSUBP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
S1 Data for subtraction or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary

S2 Data for subtraction or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary

D Word device number storing the subtraction result 16- or 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (SUB and SUBP)
The contents of S2 are subtracted from S1 in the binary format, and the subtraction result is transferred
to D .
Command
input FNC 21 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ S1 ‚ − S2 ‚ → D ‚
SUB

• The most significant bit of each data indicates the sign (positive: 0 or negative: 1), and data are subtracted
algebraically.
5 − (−8) = 13
• When a constant (K) is specified in S1 or S2 , it is automatically converted into the binary format.

2. 32-bit operation (DSUB and DSUBP)

The contents of [ S2 +1, S2 ] are subtracted from [ S1 +1, S1 ] in the binary format, and the
subtraction result is transferred to [ D1 +1, D1 ].
Command
input FNC 21 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ [ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ] − [ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ ] → [ D ‚ +1, D ‚ ]
DSUB

• The most significant bit of each data indicates the sign (positive: 0 or negative: 1), and data are subtracted
algebraically.
5500 − (−8540) = 14040
• When a constant (K) is specified in [ S1 +1, S1 ] or [ S2 +1, S2 ], it is automatically converted into
the binary format.

286
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.2 FNC 21 – SUB / Subtraction

1
Related devices

Introduction
1. Relationship between the flag operation and the sign (positive or negative) of a numeric
value
→ For the flag operations, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Device Name Description 2
ON : When the operation result is 0

Overview
M8020 Zero
OFF: When the operation result is other than 0
ON : When the operation result is less than −32768 (in 16-bit operation) or
−2,147,483,648 (in 32-bit operation)
M8021 Borrow
OFF: When the operation result is not less than −32768 (in 16-bit operation) or
−2,147,483,648 (in 32-bit operation)
3
ON : When the operation result is more than 32767 (in 16-bit operation) or

List
Instruction
2,147,483,647 (in 32-bit operation)
M8022 Carry
OFF: When the operation result is not more than 32767 (in 16-bit operation) or
2,147,483,647 (in 32-bit operation)

Zero flag Zero flag Zero flag

4
−2, −1, 0, −32768 −1, 0, 1 32767, 0, 1, 2

in Detail
Devices
Borrow flag The most The most Carry flag
significant bit of significant bit
data becomes of data
Zero flag "1". becomes "0". Zero flag
5
−2, −1, 0, −2,147,483,648 −1, 0, 1 2,147,483,647, 0, 1, 2

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Borrow flag Zero flag Carry flag

Cautions
6
1. When using a 32-bit operation instruction (DSUB or DSUBP)

Programming
Before
When specifying word devices, a 16-bit word device on the low-order side is specified first, and then a word
device with the subsequent device number is automatically set for the high-order 16 bits.
For preventing number overlap, it is recommended to always specify an even number, for example.

2. When specifying the same device in the source and destination

The same device number can be specified for both the source and the destination.
7

Instruction
Basic
In this case, note that the addition result changes in every operation cycle if a continuous operation type
instruction (SUB or DSUB) is used.
X001
FNC 21 D 0 K 25 D 0 (D 0) − 25→(D 0)
SUB
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

287
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.2 FNC 21 – SUB / Subtraction

Program example
1. Difference between SUB instruction and DEC instruction caused by a program for
subtracting "1"
"1" is subtracted from the contents of D0 every time X001 turns ON from OFF.
SUB[P] instruction is similar to DECP instruction described later except the contents shown in the table
below:

[D] SUB [P] instruction [D] DEC [P] instruction

Flag (zero, borrow or carry) Operates Does not operate

16-bit S −(+1)= D ←−2←−1←0←−32768 −32,768→+32,767→+32,766

Operation result

operation +32767→0→+1→+2→ ⎯
S −(−1)= D

32-bit S −(+1)= D ←−2←−1←0←−2,147,483,648 −2,147,483,648→+2,147,483,647→+2,147,483,646

operation +2,147,483,647→0→+1→+2→ ⎯
S −(−1)= D

S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
X001
FNC 21 D 0 K 1 D 0 (D 0) − 1→(D 0)
SUBP

X001
FNC 25 D 0 (D 0) − 1→(D 0)
DECP

288
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.3 FNC 22 – MUL / Multiplication

1
10.3 FNC 22 – MUL / Multiplication

Introduction
Outline
This instruction executes multiplication by two values to obtain the result (A x B = C).
→ For the floating point multiplication instruction EMUL (FNC122), refer to Section 18.10.
2

Overview
1. Instruction format

FNC 22 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D MUL P 7 steps MUL Continuous
13 steps DMUL
Continuous

MULP
Operation
Pulse (Single)
Operation
DMULP
Operation
Pulse (Single)
Operation
3

List
Instruction
2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
S1 Data for multiplication or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary
4
S2 Data for multiplication or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary

in Detail
Devices
D Head word device number storing the multiplication result 32- or 64-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
5
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S1 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S1 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S1
S
3
6
2

Programming
Before
S1: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
S2: Available only in 16-bit operations (Not available in 32-bit operations)

Explanation of function and operation

7
1. 16-bit operation (MUL and MULP)

Instruction
Basic
The contents of S1 are multiplied by S2 in the binary format, and the multiplication result is transferred
to 32-bit [ D +1, D1 ] .
Command BIN BIN BIN
input FNC 22
MUL
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ ( S1 ‚ ) × ( S2 ‚ ) → ( D ‚ +1, D ‚ )
16 bits 16 bits 32 bits
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

• The most significant bit of each data indicates the sign (positive: 0 or negative: 1), and data are multiplied
algebraically.
5 × (−8) = −40
• When a constant (K) is specified in S1 or S2 , it is automatically converted into the binary format.
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

289
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.3 FNC 22 – MUL / Multiplication

• When a digit (K1 to K8) is specified for [ D +1, D ]

A digit can be specified in the range from K1 to K8.
For example, when K2 is specified, only low-order 8 bits can be obtained out of the product (32 bits).
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
Command
input FNC 22 K53 K15 K2Y000
MUL

S1 ‚ K53(H0035)
×
S2 ‚ K15(H000F)

When command contact turns ON

K795(H031B)
Sign bit (0: Positive, 1: Negative)
Y027 Y026 Y025 … Y013 Y012 Y011 Y010 Y007 Y006 Y005 Y004 Y003 Y002 Y001 Y000
D‚ 0 0 0 … 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1

Not output Operation result is output to K2Y000.

2. 32-bit operation (DMUL and DMULP)

The contents of [ S1 +1, S1 ] are multiplied by [ S2 +1, S2 ] in the binary format, and the
multiplication result is transferred to 64-bit [ D +3, D +2, D +1, D ] (four word devices).
Command
input FNC 22 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
DMUL

BIN BIN BIN

[ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ] × [ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ ] → [ D ‚ +3, D ‚ +2, D ‚ +1, D‚ ]
32 bits 32 bits 64 bits

• The most significant bit of each data indicates the sign (positive: 0 or negative: 1), and data are multiplied
algebraically.
5500 × (−8540) = −46,970,000
• When a constant (K) is specified in [ S1 +1, S1 ] or [ S2 +1, S2 ], it is automatically converted
into the binary format.
• When a digit (K1 to K8) is specified for [ D +3, D +2, D +1, D ]
The result is obtained only for low-order 32 bits, and is not obtained for high-order 32 bits.
Transfer the data to word devices once, then execute the operation.
S1 S2 D
Command
input FNC 22 (D51,D50) (D103,D102,D101,D100)
D50 K150 D100 K100 × K150 → K15000
DMUL

FNC 12 D100 is output to Y017 to Y000

D100 K8Y000 D101 is output to Y037 to Y020
DMOV

FNC 12 D102 is output to Y057 to Y040

D102 K8Y040 D103 is output to Y077 to Y060
DMOV

290
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.3 FNC 22 – MUL / Multiplication

1
Related devices

Introduction
1. Relationship between flag operation and numeric value
Device Name Description
ON: When the operation result is 0.
M8304*1 Zero
OFF: When the operation result is a number other than 0. 2

Overview
*1. Available in all FX3G PLCs and FX3U/FX3UC PLCs Ver. 2.30 or later.

Cautions

1. Devices specified in D
3
• In a 32-bit operation (by DMUL or DMULP), Z cannot be specified in D .

List
Instruction
2. When monitoring the operation result in a programming tool
Even if word devices are used, the operation result (64 bits) cannot be monitored at one time.
In such a case, floating point operation is recommended.
→ For the floating point operation, refer to Chapter 18.
4

in Detail
Devices
Program examples
1. 16-bit operation
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
X000
FNC 22 D 0 D 2 D 4 (D 0) × (D 2) → (D 5,D 4) 5
MUL 8 9 72

Constant
Device &
Specified the
2. 32-bit operation
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
X001
FNC 22
DMUL
D 0 D 2 D 4
(D 1,D 0) × (D 3,D 2) → (D 7,D 6,D 5,D 4)
1756 327 574,212 6

Programming
Before
Function Changes According to Versions

FX3G
Compatible Versions
FX3U FX3UC
Item Function Summary 7

Instruction
Basic
Turns the special device M8304 ON when the
Ver. 1.00 or later Ver. 2.30 or later Ver. 2.30 or later Zero Flag
operation result of MUL command is 0.

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

291
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.4 FNC 23 – DIV / Division

10.4 FNC 23 – DIV / Division

Outline
This instruction executes division by two values to obtain the result (A ÷ B = C ... ).
→ For the floating point division instruction EDIV (FNC123), refer to Section 18.11.

1. Instruction format

FNC 23 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D DIV P 7 steps DIV Continuous
13 steps DDIV
Continuous
Operation Operation
DIVP Pulse (Single) DDIVP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
S1 Data for division or word device number storing data (dividend) 16- or 32-bit binary

S2 Data for division or word device number storing data (divisor) 16- or 32-bit binary

D Head word device number storing the division result (quotient and remainder) 32- or 64-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S1 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S1 3 3 3 3
S
D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S1 3
2

S1:This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

S2: Available only in 16-bit operations (Not available in 32-bit operations)

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (DIV and DIVP)
S1 indicates the dividend, S2 indicates the divisor, the quotient is transferred to D , and the
remainder is transferred to D +1.
Command
input Dividend Divisor Quotient Remainder
FNC 23 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
DIV BIN BIN BIN BIN
( S1 ‚ ) ÷ ( S2 ‚ ) → ( D ‚ ) ... ( D ‚ +1)
16 bits 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits

• The most significant bit of each data indicates the sign (positive: 0 or negative: 1), and data are divided
algebraically.
36 ÷ (−5) = −7 (quotient) ... 1 (remainder)
• Two devices in total starting from D are occupied to store the operation result (quotient and
remainder). Make sure that these two devices are not used for another control.
• When a constant (K) is specified as S1 or S2 , it is automatically converted into the binary format.

292
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.4 FNC 23 – DIV / Division

1
2. 32-bit operation (DDIV and DDIVP)

Introduction
[ S1 +1, S1 ] indicates the dividend, [ S2 +1, S2 ] indicates the divisor, the quotient is transferred to
[ D +1, D ]), and the remainder is transferred to [ D +3, D +2].
Command
input FNC 23
DDIV
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
2

Overview
Dividend Divisor Quotient Remainder
BIN BIN BIN BIN
[ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ] ÷ [ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ ] → [ D ‚ +1, D ‚ ] ... [ D ‚ +3, D ‚ +2]
32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits

• Four devices in total starting from D are occupied to store the operation result (quotient and 3
remainder). Make sure that these four devices are not used for another control.

List
Instruction
• The most significant bit of each data indicates the sign (positive: 0 or negative: 1), and data are divided
algebraically.
5500 ÷ (−540) = −10 (quotient) ... 100 (remainder)
• When a constant (K) is specified in [ S1 +1, S1 ] or [ S2 +1, S2 ], it is automatically converted into
the binary format. 4

in Detail
Devices
Related devices
1. Relationship between flag operation and numeric value
Device Name Description
ON : When the operation result is 0.
5
M8304*1 Zero

Constant
Device &
Specified the
OFF : When the operation result is a number other than 0.
ON : Carry flag operates when the operation result is over 32,767 (16-bit opera-
tion) or2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation).
M8306*1 Carry
OFF : When the operation result is less than 32,767 (16-bit operation) or
2,147,483,647 (32-bit operation).

*1. Available in all FX3G PLCs and FX3U/FX3UC PLCs Ver. 2.30 or later.
6

Programming
Before
Cautions
1. Operation result
• The most significant bit of the quotient and remainder indicates the sign (positive: 0, negative: 1)
respectively.
7

Instruction
Basic
• The quotient is negative when either the dividend or divisor is negative.
The remainder is negative when the dividend is negative.

2. Device specified as D
• The remainder is not obtained when a bit device is specified with digit specification. 8
• In a 32-bit operation (by DDIV or DDIVP), Z cannot be specified as D .
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Error
• When the divisor S2 is "0", an operation error is caused and the instruction is not executed.
• A operation error results when the operation result is over 32,767 (16-bit operation) or 2,147,483,647 (32- 9
bit operation). (Turns the carry flag ON.)
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

293
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.4 FNC 23 – DIV / Division

Program examples
1. 16-bit operation
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
X000 Dividend Divisor Quotient Remainder
FNC 23 D 0 D 2 D 4 (D 0) ÷ (D 2) → (D 4) ... (D 5)
DIV 100 33 3 1

2. 32-bit operation
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
X001 Dividend Divisor Quotient Remainder
FNC 23 D 0 D 2 D 4 (D 1,D 0) ÷ (D 3,D 2) → (D 5,D 4) ... (D 7,D 6)
DDIV 100,000 3333 30 10

Function Changes According to Versions

Compatible Versions
Item Function Summary
FX3G FX 3U FX3UC
Turns M8304 ON when the operation result of DIV
Zero Flag
instruction is 0.
Turns M8306 ON when the operation result of DIV
instruction overflows.
Ver. 1.00 or later Ver. 2.30 or later Ver. 2.30 or later 16-bit operation : Only when the maximum negative
Carry Flag value(-32,768) is divided by -1.
32-bit operation : Only when the maximum negative
value
(-2,147,483,648) is divided by -1.

294
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.5 FNC 24 – INC / Increment

1
10.5 FNC 24 – INC / Increment

Introduction
Outline
This instruction increments the data of a specified device by "1".
2
1. Instruction format

Overview
FNC 24 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D INC P 3 steps INC Continuous
5 steps DINC
Continuous
Operation Operation
INCP Pulse (Single) DINCP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
3

List
Instruction
2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
D Word device number storing data to be incremented by "1" 16- or 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
4

in Detail
Devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (INC and INCP)
The contents of D are incremented by "1", and the increment result is transferred to D .
6

Programming
Before
Command
input FNC 24 D‚ D‚ +1→ D‚
INCP

2. 32-bit operation (DINC and DINCP) 7

The contents of [ D +1, D ] are incremented by "1", and the increment result is transferred to [ D +1,

Instruction
Basic
D ].
Command
input FNC 24 D‚ [ D ‚ +1, D ‚ ] + 1 → [ D ‚ + 1, D‚ ]
DINCP
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Cautions
1. Note that data is incremented in every operation cycle in a continuous operation type
instruction.

2. Flag operations 9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

1) 16-bit operation
When "+32767" is incremented by "1", the result is "−32768". Flags (zero, carry and borrow) are not
activated at this time.
2) 32-bit operation
When "+2,147,483,647" is incremented by "1", the result is "−2,147,483,648". Flags (zero, carry and
borrow) are not activated at this time. 10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

295
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.5 FNC 24 – INC / Increment

Program example
X010
FNC 12 K 0 Z 0 → (Z) Z is cleared by the reset input X010.
MOVP
M 1

The current values of counters C0 to C9

FNC 18 C 0Z K4Y000 (C 0Z) → (K4Y000) are converted into BCD format, and
BCDP BIN BCD output to K4Y000.
X011
FNC 24 Every time X011 is set to ON, the current
Z (Z) + 1 → (Z) values of C0, C1 ... C9 are output one at
INCP
a time.
FNC 10 When Z is "10",
K 10 Z M 0 M1 turns ON.
CMPP

296
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.6 FNC 25 – DEC / Decrement

1
10.6 FNC 25 – DEC / Decrement

Introduction
Outline
This instruction decrements the data of a specified device by "1".
2
1. Instruction format

Overview
FNC 25 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D DEC P 3 steps DEC Continuous
5 steps DDEC
Continuous
Operation Operation
DECP Pulse (Single) DDECP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
3

List
Instruction
2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
D Word device number storing data to be decremented by "1" 16- or 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
4

in Detail
Devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (DEC and DECP)
The contents of D are decremented by "1", and the decremented result is transferred to D .
6

Programming
Before
Command
input FNC 25 D‚ D‚ −1→ D‚
DECP

2. 32-bit operation (DDEC and DDECP) 7

The contents of [ D +1, D ] are decremented by "1", and the decremented result is transferred to

Instruction
Basic
[ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC 25 D‚ [ D ‚ +1, D ‚ ] − 1 → [ D ‚ + 1, D ‚ ]
DDECP
8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

Cautions
1. Flag operations
1) 16-bit operation
When "−32768" is decremented by "1", the result is "+32767". Flags (zero, carry and borrow) are not
activated at this time.
9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

2) 32-bit operation
When "−2,147,483,648" is decremented by "1", the result is "+2,147,483,647". Flags (zero, carry and
borrow) are not activated at this time.

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

297
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.7 FNC 26 – WAND / Logical Word AND

10.7 FNC 26 – WAND / Logical Word AND

Outline
This instruction executes the logical product (AND) operation of two numeric values.

1. Instruction format
W FNC 26 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D AND P 7 steps WAND Continuous
13 steps DAND
Continuous
Operation Operation
WANDP Pulse (Single) DANDP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
S1 Data used for logical product or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary

S2 Data used for logical product or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary

D Word device number storing the logical product result 16- or 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (WAND and WANDP)
The logical product (AND) operation is executed to the contents of S1 and S2 in units of bit, and the
result is transferred to D .
Command
input FNC 26 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ S1 ‚ ∧ S2 ‚ → D ‚
WAND

• While the command input is OFF, the data of the transfer destination D does not change.
• While the command input is ON, the data of the transfer sources S1 and S2 do not change.
• When a constant (K) is specified in the transfer sources S1 and S2 , it is automatically converted into
the binary format.
• The logical product operation is executed in units of bit as shown in the table below (1 ∧ 1 = 1, 0 ∧ 1 = 0, 1
∧ 0 = 0, 0 ∧ 0 = 0).
1: ON, 0: OFF
D
S1 S2
WAND (FNC 26) instruction
0 0 0
Logical operation 1 0 0
(unit: bit) 0 1 0
1 1 1

298
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.7 FNC 26 – WAND / Logical Word AND

1
2. 32-bit operation (DAND and DANDP)

Introduction
The logical product (AND) operation is executed to the contents of [ S1 +1, S1 ] and [ S2 +1, S2 ] in
units of bit, and the result is transferred to [ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC 26
DAND
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ∧ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ → D ‚ +1, D ‚
2

Overview
• While the command input is OFF, the data of the transfer destination [ D +1, D ] does not change.
• While the command input is ON, the data of the transfer source [ S1 +1, S1 ] [ S2 +1, S2 ] do not
change.
• When a constant (K) is specified in the transfer source [ S1
automatically converted into the binary format.
+1, S1 ] [ S2 +1, S2 ], it is 3

List
Instruction
• The logical product operation is executed in units of bit as shown in the table below (1 ∧ 1 = 1, 0 ∧ 1 = 0, 1
∧ 0 = 0, 0 ∧ 0 = 0).
1: ON, 0: OFF
D +1, D
S1 +1, S1 S2 +1, S2
DAND (FNC 26) instruction 4

in Detail
Devices
0 0 0
Logical operation 1 0 0
(unit: bit) 0 1 0
1 1 1
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
6

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

299
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.8 FNC 27 – WOR / Logical Word OR

10.8 FNC 27 – WOR / Logical Word OR

Outline
This instruction executes the logical sum (OR) operation of two numeric values.

1. Instruction format
W FNC 27 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D OR P 7 steps WOR Continuous
13 steps DOR
Continuous
Operation Operation
WORP Pulse (Single) DORP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
S1 Data used for logical sum or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary

S2 Data used for logical sum or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary

D Word device number storing the logical sum result 16- or 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (WOR and WORP)
The logical sum (OR) operation is executed to the contents of S1 and S2 in units of bit, and the result is
transferred to D .
Command
input FNC 27 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ S1 ‚ ∨ S2 ‚ → D‚
WOR

• While the command input is OFF, the data of the transfer destination D does not change.
• While the command input is ON, the data of the transfer sources S1 and S2 do not change.
• When a constant (K) is specified in the transfer sources S1 and S2 , it is automatically converted into
the binary format.
• The logical sum operation is executed in units of bit as shown in the table below (1 ∨ 1 = 1, 0 ∨ 1 = 1,
0 ∨ 0 = 0, 1 ∨ 0 = 1).
1: ON, 0: OFF
D
S1 S2
WOR (FNC 27) instruction
0 0 0
Logical operation 1 0 1
(unit: bit) 0 1 1
1 1 1

300
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.8 FNC 27 – WOR / Logical Word OR

1
2. 32-bit operation (DOR and DORP)

Introduction
The logical sum (OR) operation is executed to the contents of [ S1 +1, S1 ] and [ S2 +1, S2 ] in units
of bit, and the result is transferred to [ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC 27
DOR
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ∨ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ → D ‚ +1, D ‚ 2

Overview
• While the command input is OFF, the data of the transfer destination [ D +1, D ] does not change.
• While the command input is ON, the data of the transfer source [ S1 +1, S1 ] [ S2 +1, S2 ] do not
change.
• When a constant (K) is specified in the transfer source [ S1 +1, S1 ] [ S2 +1, S2 ], it is 3
automatically converted into the binary format.

List
Instruction
• The logical sum operation is executed in units of bit as shown in the table below (1 ∨ 1 = 1, 0 ∨ 1 = 1,
0 ∨ 0 = 0, 1 ∨ 0 = 1).
1: ON, 0: OFF
D +1, D
S1 +1, S1 S2 +1, S2
DOR (FNC 27) instruction
4

in Detail
Devices
0 0 0
Logical operation 1 0 1
(unit: bit) 0 1 1
1 1 1
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
6

Programming
Before
7

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

301
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.9 FNC 28 – WXOR / Logical Exclusive OR

10.9 FNC 28 – WXOR / Logical Exclusive OR

Outline
This instruction executes the exclusive logical sum (XOR) operation of two numeric values.

1. Instruction format
W FNC 28 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D XOR P 7 steps WXOR Continuous
13 steps DXOR
Continuous
Operation Operation
WXORP Pulse (Single) DXORP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
S1 Data used for exclusive logical sum or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary

S2 Data used for exclusive logical sum or word device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary

D Word device number storing the exclusive logical sum result 16- or 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (WXOR and WXORP)
The exclusive logical sum (XOR) operation is executed to the contents of S1 and S2 in units of bit, and
the result is transferred to D .
Command
input FNC 28 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ S1 ‚ ∀ S2 ‚ → D‚
WXOR

• While the command input is OFF, the data of the transfer destination D does not change.
• While the command input is ON, the data of the transfer sources S1 and S2 do not change.
• When a constant (K) is specified in the transfer sources S1 and S2 , it is automatically converted into
the binary format.
• The logical exclusive sum operation is executed in units of bit as shown in the table below (1 ∀ 1 = 0,
0 ∀ 0 = 0, 1 ∀ 0 = 1, 0 ∀ 1 = 1).
1: ON, 0: OFF
D
S1 S2
WXOR (FNC 28) instruction
0 0 0
Logical operation 1 0 1
(unit: bit) 0 1 1
1 1 0

302
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.9 FNC 28 – WXOR / Logical Exclusive OR

1
2. 32-bit operation (DXOR and DXORP)

Introduction
The exclusive logical sum (XOR) operation is executed to the contents of [ S1 +1, S1 ] and [ S2 +1,
S2 ] in units of bit, and the result is transferred to [ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC 28
DXOR
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ∀ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ → D ‚ +1, D ‚
2

Overview
• While the command input is OFF, the data of the transfer destination [ D +1, D ] does not change.
• While the command input is ON, the data of the transfer source [ S1 +1, S1 ] [ S2 +1, S2 ] do not
change.
• When a constant (K) is specified in the transfer source [ S1 +1, S1 ] [ S2 +1, S2 ], it is 3
automatically converted into the binary format.

List
Instruction
• The exclusive logical sum operation is executed in units of bit as shown in the table below (1 ∀ 1 = 0,
0 ∀ 0 = 0, 1 ∀ 0 = 1, 0 ∀ 1 = 1).
1: ON, 0: OFF
D +1, D
S1 +1, S1 S2 +1, S2
DXOR (FNC 28) instruction
4

in Detail
Devices
0 0 0
Logical operation 1 0 1
(unit: bit) 0 1 1
1 1 0
5
Program example

Constant
Device &
Specified the
By combining WXOR and CML (FNC 14) instructions, the exclusive logical sum not (XORNOT) operation can
be executed.
X000
FNC 28
WXOR
D 10 D 12 D 14
6

Programming
Before
FNC 14 D 14 D 14
CML

Instruction
Basic

8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

9
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

303
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.10 FNC 29 – NEG / Negation

10.10 FNC 29 – NEG / Negation

Outline
This instruction obtains the complement of a numeric value (by inverting each bit and adding "1").
This instruction can be used to negate the sign of a numeric value.
→ For the Floating point negation ENEG (FNC128), refer to Section 18.16.

1. Instruction format

FNC 29 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D NEG P 3 steps NEG Continuous
5 steps DNEG
Continuous
Operation Operation
NEGP Pulse (Single) DNEGP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
Word device number which stores data for obtaining complement and will store
D the operation result (The operation result will be stored in the same word device 16- or 32-bit binary
number.)

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (NEG and NEGP)
Each bit of D is inverted (0 → 1, 1 → 0), "1" is added, and then the result is stored in the original device.
Command
input FNC 29 D‚ ( D ‚ )+1 → D ‚
NEGP

2. 32-bit operation (DNEG and DNEGP)

Each bit of [ D +1, D ] is inverted (0 → 1, 1 → 0), "1" is added, and then the result is stored in the
original device.
Command
input FNC 29 D‚ ( D ‚ + 1, D ‚ ) +1 = ( D ‚ + 1, D ‚ )
DNEGP

Caution
Note that the complement is obtained in every operation cycle in a continuous operation type instruction.

304
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 10 Arithmetic and Logical Operation (+, −, ×, ÷) – FNC 20 to FNC 29
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 10.10 FNC 29 – NEG / Negation

1
Program examples

Introduction
The program examples below are provided to obtain the absolute value of a negative binary value.

1. Obtaining the absolute value of a negative value using NEG instruction

M8000
FNC 44
BON
D 10 M 0 K 15
In BON (ON bit check) instruction, M0 turns ON
when the bit 15 (b15 among b0 to b15) of D10 is "1".
2
RUN monitor

Overview
M 0
FNC 29 D10 → D10 NEGP instruction is executed for D10 only when M0
D 10 turns ON.
NEGP

2. Obtaining the absolute value by SUB (subtraction) instruction 3

List
Instruction
Even if NEG instruction is not used, D30 always stores the absolute value of the difference.
X000
FNC 10 D 10 D 20 M 10 (D 10) > (D 20) (D10) = (D 20) (D 10) < (D 20)
CMP M 10 = ON M 11 = ON M 12 = ON

M 10
FNC 21 D 10 D 20 D 30 In the case of "D10 ≥ D20", 4
SUB D10 − D20 → D30.

in Detail
Devices
M 11

M 12
FNC 21 D 20 D 10 D 30 In the case of "D10 < D20",
D20 − D10 → D30.
SUB
5

Constant
Device &
Specified the
Negative value expression and absolute value (reference)
In PLCs, a negative value is expressed in 2’s complement.
When the most significant bit is "1", it is a negative value, and its absolute value can be obtained by NEG
instruction.
(D 10) = 2
6

Programming
Before
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

(D 10) = 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

(D 10) = 0
7

Instruction
Basic
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

(D 10) = −1 (D 10) + 1 = 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

(D 10) = −2 (D 10) + 1 = 2 8
Program Flow
FNC00-FNC09

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
......
......

9
(D 10) = −32767 (D 10) + 1 = 32767
Move & Compare
FNC10-FNC19

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

(D 10) = −32768 (D 10) + 1 = −32768

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
10
Operation
Arith. & Logic
FNC20-FNC29

The absolute value can be obtained up to 32767.

305
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

11. Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39

FNC 30 to FNC 39 provide instructions for rotating and shifting bit data and word data in specified directions.

FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

ROR D n Section
30 ROR Rotation Right
11.1

ROL D n Section
31 ROL Rotation Left
11.2

RCR D n Section
32 RCR Rotation Right with Carry
11.3

RCL D n Section
33 RCL Rotation Left with Carry
11.4

SFTR S D n1 n2 Section
34 SFTR Bit Shift Right
11.5

SFTL S D n1 n2 Section
35 SFTL Bit Shift Left
11.6

WSFR S D n1 n2 Section
36 WSFR Word Shift Right
11.7

WSFL S D n1 n2 Section
37 WSFL Word Shift Left
11.8

SFWR S D n Section
38 SFWR Shift write [FIFO/FILO control]
11.9

SFRD S D n Section
39 SFRD Shift read [FIFO control]
11.10

306
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.1 FNC 30 – ROR / Rotation Right

11
11.1 FNC 30 – ROR / Rotation Right

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction shifts and rotates the bit information rightward by the specified number of bits without the
carry flag.
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1. Instruction format

FNC 30 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D ROR P 5 steps ROR Continuous
9 steps DROR
Continuous
Operation Operation
RORP Pulse (Single)
Operation
DRORP Pulse (Single)
Operation
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
D Word device number storing data to be rotated rightward 16- or 32-bit binary

n
Number of bits to be rotated
16- or 32-bit binary
14
[n ≤ 16 (16-bit instruction), n ≤ 32 (32-bit instruction)]

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and
Type
System User Digit Specification System User
Unit
Index
stant Number ter String
Pointer
15
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D S1 S1 S1 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3

S1: In 16-bit operations, K4Y{{{, K4M{{{ and K4S{{{ are valid.

In 32-bit operations, K8Y{{{, K8M{{{ and K8S{{{ are valid. 16
S2: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Explanation of function and operation
1. 16-bit operation (ROR and RORP)
"n" bits out of 16 bits of D are rotated rightward. 17
Command

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
input FNC 30 D‚ n
RORP

• The final bit is stored in the carry flag (M8022).

• In a device with digit specification, K4 (16-bit instruction) is valid.
"n" bits (in the case of K4)
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

High order Low order

b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Carry flag
Before
execution 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M8022
After the "n−1" bits
instruction
is executed 19
once b0 to b3 (n−1) are moved.
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

Rightward The status of the bit "n−1" is

"n" bits copied.
rotation
High order Low order
b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
After
execution 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
Carry flag
20
Before shift Before shift M8022
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

b3 to b0 b15 to b4
The contents of
b3 are stored.

307
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.1 FNC 30 – ROR / Rotation Right

2. 32-bit operation (DROR and DRORP)

"n" bits out of 32 bits of [ D +1, D ] are rotated rightward.
Command
input FNC 30 D‚ n
DRORP

• The final bit is stored in the carry flag (M8022).

• In a device with digit specification, K8 (32-bit instruction) is valid.
"n" bits (in the case of K4)

High order Low order

Before b31b30b29b28b27b26b25b24b23b22b21b20b19b18b17b16 b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Carry flag
execution 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M8022

After the The status of

instruction is the bit "n−1" is b0 to b3 (n−1)
executed once copied. are moved.

"n" bits The status of the bit "n−1" is

Rightward copied.
rotation
High order Low order
b31b30b29b28b27b26b25b24b23b22b21b20b19b18b17b16 b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
After
execution 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
Carry flag
Before shift Before shift M8022
b3 to b0 b31 to b4
The contents of
b3 are stored.

Related device
→ For the carry flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Device Name Description
M8022 Carry Turns ON when the bit shifted last from the lowest position is "1".

Cautions
1. In the case of continuous operation type instructions (ROR and DROR)
Note that shift and rotation are executed in every scan time (operation cycle).

2. When a device with digit specification is specified as D

Only K4 (16-bit instruction) or K8 (32-bit instruction) is valid (examples: K4Y010 or K8M0).

308
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.2 FNC 31 – ROL / Rotation Left

11
11.2 FNC 31 – ROL / Rotation Left

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction shifts and rotates the bit information leftward by the specified number of bits without the carry
flag.
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1. Instruction format

FNC 31 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D ROL P 5 steps ROL Continuous
9 steps DROL
Continuous
Operation Operation
ROLP Pulse (Single)
Operation
DROLP Pulse (Single)
Operation
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
D Word device number storing data to be rotated leftward 16- or 32-bit binary

n
Number of bits to be rotated
16- or 32-bit binary
14
[n ≤ 16 (16-bit instruction), n ≤ 32 (32-bit instruction)]

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and
Type
System User Digit Specification System User
Unit
Index
stant Number ter String
Pointer
15
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D S1 S1 S1 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3

S1: In 16-bit operations, K4Y{{{, K4M{{{ and K4S{{{ are valid.

In 32-bit operations, K8Y{{{, K8M{{{ and K8S{{{ are valid. 16
S2: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Explanation of function and operation
1. 16-bit operation (ROL and ROLP)
"n" bits out of 16 bits of D are rotated leftward. 17
Command

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
input FNC 31 D‚ n
ROLP

• The final bit is stored in the carry flag (M8022).

• In a device with digit specification, K4 (16-bit instruction) is valid.
18
"n" bits (in the case of K4)
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

High order Low order

Before Carry flag b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

execution M8022 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
After the
instruction
is executed b12 (16−n) to
19
once b15 are moved.
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

The status of
the bit "16−n" is
copied. Leftward "n" bits
rotation
High order Low order
b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
After
execution 1
Carry flag
1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
20
M8022 Before shift Before shift
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

b11 to b0 b15 to b12

The contents of
b12 are stored.

309
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.2 FNC 31 – ROL / Rotation Left

2. 32-bit operation (DROL and DROLP)

"n" bits out of 32 bits of [ D +1, D ] are rotated leftward.
Command
input FNC 31 D‚ n
DROLP

• The final bit is stored in the carry flag (M8022).

• In a device with digit specification, K8 (32-bit instruction) is valid.
"n" bits (in the case of K4)

Carry High order Low order

flag b31b30b29b28b27b26b25b24b23b22b21b20b19b18b17b16 b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Before
execution M8022 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
"16−n" bits After the
instruction is
executed once b28 (32−n) to b31 are moved.
The status of
the bit "32−n"
is copied. Leftward "n" bits
rotation
High order Low order
After b31b30b29b28b27b26b25b24b23b22b21b20b19b18b17b16 b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
execution 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Carry
flag Before shift Before shift
M8022 b27 to b0 b31 to b28
The contents of
b28 are stored.

Related device
→ For the carry flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Device Name Description
M8022 Carry Turns ON when the bit shifted last from the highest position is "1".

Cautions
1. In the case of continuous operation type instructions (ROL and DROL)
Note that shift and rotation are executed in every scan time (operation cycle).

2. When a device with digit specification is specified as D

Only K4 (16-bit instruction) or K8 (32-bit instruction) is valid (examples: K4Y010 or K8M0).

310
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.3 FNC 32 – RCR / Rotation Right with Carry

11
11.3 FNC 32 – RCR / Rotation Right with Carry

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction shifts and rotates the bit information rightward by the specified number of bits together with
the carry flag.
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1. Instruction format

FNC 32 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D RCR P 5 steps RCR Continuous
9 steps DRCR
Continuous
Operation Operation
RCRP Pulse (Single)
Operation
DRCRP Pulse (Single)
Operation
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
D Word device number storing data to be rotated rightward 16- or 32-bit binary

n
Number of bits to be rotated
16- or 32-bit binary
14
[n ≤ 16 (16-bit instruction), n ≤ 32 (32-bit instruction)]

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and
Type
System User Digit Specification System User
Unit
Index
stant Number ter String
Pointer
15
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D S S S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3

S: In 16-bit operations, K4Y{{{, K4M{{{ and K4S{{{ are valid.

In 32-bit operations, K8Y{{{, K8M{{{ and K8S{{{ are valid. 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Explanation of function and operation
1. 16-bit operation (RCR and RCRP)
"n" bits out of 16 bits of D and 1 bit (carry flag M8022) are rotated rightward.
Command
input
17
FNC 32 D‚ n

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
RCRP

"n" bits (in the case of K4)

High order Low order Carry flag
b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 M8022
Before
execution 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 When M8022 is ON 18
After the b3 (n−1)
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

instruction to b0 are
is b3 (n−1)
b2 (n−2) to b0 and the head bit executed moved.
indicating the carry flag ON/OFF once The status of the final bit b3
status are moved.
(bit "n−1") is stored.
Rightward
"n" bits rotation
High order Low order 19
After b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

execution 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 Before shift b3

Carry flag
Before Before shift b15 to b4 M8022
shift
b2 to b0
Before shift
Carry flag M8022
20
The carry flag is intervened in the rotation loop. If M8022 has been set to ON or OFF before the rotation
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

instruction, the carry flag is transferred to the destination.

311
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.3 FNC 32 – RCR / Rotation Right with Carry

2. 32-bit operation (DRCR and DRCRP)

"n" bits out of 32 bits of [ D +1, D ] and 1 bit (carry flag M8022) are rotated rightward.
Command
input FNC 32 D‚ n
DRCRP
"n" bits (in the case of K4)

High order Low order

b31b30b29b28b27b26b25b24b23b22b21b20b19b18b17b16 b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Before
execution 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
After the
b2 (n−2) to b0 and the head bit instruction is
indicating the carry flag ON/OFF Carry flag M8022
executed once
status are moved. When M8022 is OFF

"n" bits Rightward

rotation The status
High order Low order of the final
After b31b30b29b28b27b26b25b24b23b22b21b20b19b18b17b16 b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 bit b3 (bit
"n−1") is
execution 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 stored.
Before Before shift b31 to b4
shift Carry flag M8022
b2 to b0 Before shift
Carry flag M8022 1
Before shift
b3

Related device
→ For the carry flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Device Name Description
M8022 Carry Turns ON when the bit shifted last from the lowest position is "1".

Cautions
1. In the case of continuous operation type instructions (RCR and DRCR)
Note that shift and rotation are executed in every scan time (operation cycle).

2. When a device with digit specification is specified as D

Only K4 (16-bit instruction) or K8 (32-bit instruction) is valid (examples: K4Y010 or K8M0).

312
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.4 FNC 33 – RCL / Rotation Left with Carry

11
11.4 FNC 33 – RCL / Rotation Left with Carry

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction shifts and rotates the bit information leftward by the specified number of bits together with the
carry flag.
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1. Instruction format

FNC 33 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D RCL P 5 steps RCL Continuous
9 steps DRCL
Continuous
Operation Operation
RCLP Pulse (Single)
Operation
DRCLP Pulse (Single)
Operation
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
D Word device number storing data to be rotated leftward 16- or 32-bit binary

n
Number of bits to be rotated
16- or 32-bit binary
14
[n ≤ 16 (16-bit instruction), n ≤ 32 (32-bit instruction)]

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and
Type
System User Digit Specification System User
Unit
Index
stant Number ter String
Pointer
15
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D S S S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3

S: In 16-bit operations, K4Y{{{, K4M{{{ and K4S{{{ are valid.

In 32-bit operations, K8Y{{{, K8M{{{ and K8S{{{ are valid. 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Explanation of function and operation
1. 16-bit operation (RCL and RCLP)
"n" bits out of 16 bits of D and 1 bit (carry flag M8022) are rotated leftward.
Command
input FNC 33
17
D‚ n

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
RCLP

"n" bits (in the case of K4)

High order Low order
b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Before
execution
b15 to b12
(16−n) are 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 18
moved.
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

1
Carry flag After the
When M8022 instruction is
is ON executed once b15 to b13 (16−n+1) and the head
bit indicating the carry flag ON/OFF
Leftward "n" bits
status are moved.
High order
rotation
Low order 19
b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
After
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

execution The status 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

of the final
bit b12 (bit
"16−n") is Before shift b11 to b0 Before shift b15 to b13
stored. Before shift
0 Carry flag M8022 Carry flag M8022
Before shift b12 20
The carry flag is intervened in the rotation loop. If M8022 has been set to ON or OFF before the rotation
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

instruction, the carry flag is transferred to the destination.

313
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.4 FNC 33 – RCL / Rotation Left with Carry

2. 32-bit operation (DRCL and DRCLP)

"n" bits out of 32 bits of [ D +1, D ] and 1 bit (carry flag M8022) are rotated leftward.
Command
input FNC 33 D‚ n
DRCLP

"n" bits (in the case of K4)

High order Low order

b31b30b29b28b27b26b25b24b23b22b21b20b19b18b17b16b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Before b31 to b28
execution (b32−n) 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
are
moved.
1
b31 to b29 (32−n+1) and the head
Carry flag After the
instruction is bit indicating the carry flag ON/OFF
When M8022
is ON executed once status are moved.

Leftward
rotation
High order Low order
The status b31b30b29b28b27b26b25b24b23b22b21b20b19b18b17b16b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
After of the final
execution bit b28 (bit 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
"32−n") is
stored.
Before shift b27 to b0 Before shift
b31 to b29
0 Carry flag M8022
Before shift
Before shift b28 Carry flag M8022

Related device
→ For the carry flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Device Name Description
M8022 Carry Turns ON when the bit shifted last from the highest position is "1".

Cautions
1. In the case of continuous operation type instructions (RCL and DRCL)
Note that shift and rotation are executed in every scan time (operation cycle).

2. When a device with digit specification is specified as D

Only K4 (16-bit instruction) or K8 (32-bit instruction) is valid (examples: K4Y010 or K8M0).

314
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.5 FNC 34 – SFTR / Bit Shift Right

11
11.5 FNC 34 – SFTR / Bit Shift Right

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction shifts bit devices of the specified bit length rightward by the specified number of bits.
After shift, the bit device S is transferred by "n2" bits from the most significant bit.
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1. Instruction format

FNC 34 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
SFTR P 9 steps SFTR Continuous
−
Operation
SFTRP Pulse (Single)
Operation
− 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Head bit device number to be stored to the shift data after rightward shift Bit

D Head bit device number to be shifted rightward Bit

14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
n1 Bit length of the shift data n2 ≤ n1 ≤ 1024 16-bit binary
n2 Number of bits to be shifted rightward n2 ≤ n1 ≤ 1024 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices

Oper-
Bit Devices Word Devices Others 15
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 S 3

D 3 3 3 3
n1 3 3 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
n2 3 3 3 3

S: "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.

17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

315
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.5 FNC 34 – SFTR / Bit Shift Right

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (SFTR and SFTRP)
For "n1" bits (shift register length) starting from D , "n2" bits are shifted rightward ([1] and [2] shown
below).
After shift, "n2" bits from S are transferred to "n2" bits from D +n1-n2 ([3] shown below).
Command
input
FNC 34 S‚ D‚ n1 n2
SFTRP

n2 (in the case of "n2=3")

S ‚ +2 S ‚ +1 S‚

Before
execution n1 (in the case of "n1=9")

D ‚ +8 D ‚ +7 D ‚ +6 D ‚ +5 D ‚ +4 D ‚ +3 D ‚ +2 D ‚ +1 D‚

[2] [1]
"n2" bits are Overflow (data to
[3] Copy shifted rightward be deleted)
(n2=3).

After D ‚ +8 D ‚ +7 D ‚ +6 D ‚ +5 D ‚ +4 D ‚ +3 D ‚ +2 D ‚ +1 D‚
execution

S ‚ +2 to S ‚ before shift (n2=3) D ‚ +8 to D ‚ +3 before shift (n2=3)

Caution
Note that "n2" bits are shifted every time the command input turns ON from OFF in SFTRP instruction, but
that "n2" bits are shifted in each scan time (operation cycle) in SFTR instruction.

Error
If the transfer source S is equivalent to the shifted device D in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, an operation error
occurs (error code: K6710).
An operation error does not occur in FX3G PLCs.

316
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.6 FNC 35 – SFTL / Bit Shift Left

11
11.6 FNC 35 – SFTL / Bit Shift Left

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction shifts bit devices of the specified bit length leftward by the specified number of bits.
After shift, the bit device S is transferred by "n2" bits from the least significant bit.
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1. Instruction format

FNC 35 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
SFTL P 9 steps SFTL Continuous
−
Operation
SFTLP Pulse (Single)
Operation
− 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Head bit device number to be stored to the shift data after leftward shift Bit

D Head bit device number to be shifted leftward Bit

14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
n1 Bit length of the shift data n2 ≤ n1 ≤ 1024 16-bit binary
n2 Number of bits to be shifted leftward n2 ≤ n1 ≤ 1024 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices

Oper-
Bit Devices Word Devices Others 15
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 S 3

D 3 3 3 3
n1 3 3 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
n2 3 3 3 3

S: "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.

17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

317
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.6 FNC 35 – SFTL / Bit Shift Left

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (SFTL and SFTLP)
For "n1" bits (shift register length) starting from D , "n2" bits are shifted leftward ([1] and [2] shown below).
After shift, "n2" bits from S are transferred to "n2" bits from D ([3] shown below).
Command
input FNC 35 S‚ D‚ n1 n2
SFTLP
n2 (in the case of "n2=3")

S ‚ +2 S ‚ +1 S‚

Before
execution n1 (in the case of "n1=9")

D ‚ +8 D ‚ +7 D ‚ +6 D ‚ +5 D ‚ +4 D ‚ +3 D ‚ +2 D ‚ +1 D‚

[1] [2]
Overflow (data to "n2" bits are
be deleted) shifted rightward [3] Copy
(n2=3).

After D ‚ +8 D ‚ +7 D ‚ +6 D ‚ +5 D ‚ +4 D ‚ +3 D ‚ +2 D ‚ +1 D‚
execution

D ‚ to D ‚ +5 before shift (n2=3) S ‚ +2 to S ‚ before shift (n2=3)

Caution
Note that "n2" bits are shifted every time the command input turns ON from OFF in SFTLP instruction, but
that "n2" bits are shifted in each operation cycle in SFTL instruction.

Error
If the transfer source S is equivalent to the shifted device D in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, an operation error
occurs (error code: K6710).
An operation error does not occur in FX3G PLCs.

318
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.6 FNC 35 – SFTL / Bit Shift Left

11
Program example (conditional stepping of 1-bit data)

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
By setting X000 to X007 to ON in turn, Y000 to Y007 are activated in turn.
If the order is wrong, activation is disabled.

X000 M8046

Data
M 0 Head data
12
input

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
*1
M8046 X000
FNC 35 M 0 S 0 K 8 K 1
SFTL
S 0 X001

S 1 X002
Bit 1 of M0 is regarded as the head input, and 8-bit shift register is
constructed by S0 to S7. 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
*1 By using a state relay (S), the state under operation can be monitored
by the dynamic monitoring function of the state relay.

S 7 X000
14
M8000

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
FNC 12 K2S 0 K2Y000 (S 7 to S 0) → (Y007 to Y000)
MOV

M8047 STL monitor is valid.

END 15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
X000
X001
Even if X000 is set to ON, Y000 is not activated.

X007
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Y000
Y001

Y007
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

319
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.6 FNC 35 – SFTL / Bit Shift Left

11.6.1 Replacement of SFT instruction in F1 and F2 Series

SFT instruction in F1/F2 PLCs corresponds to SFTL (FNC 35) instruction in FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs as
shown below:

1. F1 and F2 PLCs
M100: Input data
M101 to M117 (octal number): 15-step shift register

Circuit program List program

X000 data input 0000 LD X000

OUT 0001 OUT M100
M100 0002 LD X001
X001 shift input 0003 SFT M100
0004 LD X002
SFT 0005 RST M100
X002 reset input M117
RST

2. FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs

X000 data input M101 to M115 (decimal number): 15-step shift register
M100 Fixed value
X001 shift input
FNC 35 M100 M101 K 15 K 1
SFTLP
Input data Head Number Shift by
device of steps 1 bit
X002 reset input
FNC 40 Shift registers M101 to M115 are reset
M101 M115 at one time.
ZRST
Head
device

320
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.7 FNC 36 – WSFR / Word Shift Right

11
11.7 FNC 36 – WSFR / Word Shift Right

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction shifts word devices with "n1" data length rightward by "n2" words.
12
1. Instruction format

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC 36 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
WSFR P 9 steps WSFR Continuous
−
Operation
WSFRP Pulse (Single) −
Operation
13
2. Set data

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Head device number to be stored to the shift data after rightward shift 16-bit binary

D Head word device number storing data to be shifted rightward 16-bit binary
n1 Word data length of the shift data n2 ≤ n1 ≤ 512 16-bit binary 14
n2 Number of words to be shifted rightward n2 ≤ n1 ≤ 512 16-bit binary

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and
Type
System User Digit Specification System User
Unit
Index
stant Number ter String
Pointer
15
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3
n1 3 3
n2 3 3 3 3
16
S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Explanation of function and operation
1. 16-bit operation (WSFR and WSFRP)
For "n1" word devices starting from D , "n2" words are shifted rightward ([1] and [2] shown below). 17
After shift, "n2" words starting from S are shifted to "n2" words starting from [ D +n1-n2] ([3] shown

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
below).
Command
input FNC 36 S‚ D‚ n1 n2
WSFRP

n2 (in the case of "n2=3")

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

S ‚ +2 S ‚ +1 S‚

Before
execution n1 (in the case of "n1=9")
19
D ‚ +8 D ‚ +7 D ‚ +6 D ‚ +5 D ‚ +4 D ‚ +3 D ‚ +2 D ‚ +1 D‚
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

[2] [1]
"n2" bits are Overflow (data to
[3] Copy shifted rightward be deleted)
(n2=3).

After D ‚ +8 D ‚ +7 D ‚ +6 D ‚ +5 D ‚ +4 D ‚ +3 D ‚ +2 D ‚ +1 D‚
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

execution

S ‚ +2 to S ‚ before shift (n2=3) D ‚ +8 to D ‚ +3 before shift (n2=3)

321
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.7 FNC 36 – WSFR / Word Shift Right

Caution
Note that "n2" words are shifted when the drive input turns ON in WSFRP instruction, but that "n2" words are
shifted in each operation cycle in WSFR instruction.

Error
If the transfer source S is equivalent to the shifted device D , an operation error occurs (error code:
K6710).

Program example
1. Shifting devices with digit specification
S‚ D‚ n1 n2
X000
FNC 36 K1X000 K1Y000 K 4 K 2
WSFRP
Specify a same digit for devices with digit specification.

Make sure that the number of digits is

equivalent (Kn…………).
X007 X006 X005 X004 X003 X002 X001 X000
[3]
Y017 Y016 Y015 Y014 Y013 Y012 Y011 Y010 Y007 Y006 Y005 Y004 Y003 Y002 Y001 Y000

[2] [1]

322
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.8 FNC 37 – WSFL / Word Shift Left

11
11.8 FNC 37 – WSFL / Word Shift Left

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction shifts the word data information leftward by the specified number of words.
12
1. Instruction format

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC 37 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
WSFL P 9 steps WSFL Continuous
−
Operation
WSFLP Pulse (Single) −
Operation
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Head device number to be stored to the shift data after leftward shift 16-bit binary
Head word device number storing data to be shifted leftward 16-bit binary
D
n1 Word data length of the shift data n2 ≤ n1 ≤ 512 16-bit binary
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
n2 Number of words to be shifted leftward n2 ≤ n1 ≤ 512 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
and System User Digit Specification System User
Special
Unit
Index
Con- Real Charac-
stant Number ter String
Pointer 15
Type

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3
n1 3 3
n2 3 3 3 3 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (WSFL and WSFLP) 17
For "n1" word devices starting from D , "n2" words are shifted leftward ([1] and [2] shown below).

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
After shift, "n2" words starting from S are shifted to "n2" words starting from D ([3] shown below).
Command
input FNC 37 S‚ D‚ n1 n2
WSFLP

n2 (in the case of "n2=3")

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

S ‚ +2 S ‚ +1 S‚

Before
execution n1 (in the case of "n1=9")
19
D ‚ +8 D ‚ +7 D ‚ +6 D ‚ +5 D ‚ +4 D ‚ +3 D ‚ +2 D ‚ +1 D‚
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

[1] [2]
Overflow (data to "n2" bits are
be deleted) shifted leftward [3] Copy
(n2=3).

D ‚ +8 D ‚ +7 D ‚ +6 D ‚ +5 D ‚ +4 D ‚ +3 D ‚ +2 D ‚ +1 D‚
20
After
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

execution

D ‚ +5 to D ‚ before shift (n2=3) S ‚ +2 to S ‚ before shift (n2=3)

323
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.8 FNC 37 – WSFL / Word Shift Left

Caution
Note that "n2" words are shifted every time the drive input turns ON from OFF in WSFLP instruction, but that
"n2" words are shifted in each operation cycle in WSFL instruction.

Error
If the transfer source S is equivalent to the shifted device D , an operation error occurs (error code:
K6710).

Program example
1. Shifting devices with digit specification
S‚ D‚ n1 n2
X000
FNC 37 K1X000 K1Y000 K 4 K 2
WSFLP
Specify a same digit for devices with digit specification.

Make sure that the number of digits is

equivalent (Kn…………).
X007 X006 X005 X004 X003 X002 X001 X000

[3]
Y017 Y016 Y015 Y014 Y013 Y012 Y011 Y010 Y007 Y006 Y005 Y004 Y003 Y002 Y001Y000

[1]
[2]

324
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.9 FNC 38 – SFWR / Shift Write [FIFO/FILO Control]

11
11.9 FNC 38 – SFWR / Shift Write [FIFO/FILO Control]

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction writes data for first-in first-out (FIFO) and last-in first-out (LIFO) control.
12
1. Instruction format

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC 38 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
SFWR P 7 steps SFWR Continuous
−
Operation
SFWRP Pulse (Single) −
Operation
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Word device number storing data to be put in first 16-bit binary
Head word device number storing data (The first word device works as the
D
pointer, and data is stored in D +1 and later)
16-bit binary 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
n Number of store points plus "1"*1 2 n 512 16-bit binary

*1. "+1" is required for the pointer.

3. Applicable devices

Oper-
Bit Devices Word Devices Others 15
Special Con- Real Charac-

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3
S
D
n
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
3 3
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

325
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.9 FNC 38 – SFWR / Shift Write [FIFO/FILO Control]

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (SFWR and SFWRP)
The contents of S are written to "n-1" devices from D +1, and "1" is added to the number of data
stored in D .
For example, when D = 0, the contents of S are written to D +1. When D = 1, the contents of
S are written to D +2.
Command
input
FNC 38 S‚ D‚ n
SFWRP

S‚
n
Before
execution
D+n ... D+10 D+9 D+8 D+7 D+6 D+5 D+4 D+3 D+2 D+1 D ‚

Executed at the 1st time Pointer

( D ‚ = 0)
S‚ D ‚ +1 → D ‚
(K0) (K1)
D+n ... D+10 D+9 D+8 D+7 D+6 D+5 D+4 D+3 D+2 S ‚ D‚

After Pointer
execution
Executed at the 2nd time
S‚ D ‚ +1 → D ‚
(K1) (K2)
D+n ... D+10 D+9 D+8 D+7 D+6 D+5 D+4 D+3 S ‚ S‚ D‚
Pointer

1) When X000 turns ON from OFF, the contents of S are stored to D +1. So the contents of
D +1 become equivalent to S .
2) When the contents of S are changed and then the command input is set to ON from OFF again, the
new contents of S are stored to D +2. So the contents of D +2 become equivalent to S .
(When the continuous operation type SFWR instruction is used, the contents are stored in each operation
cycle. Use the pulse operation type SFWRP instruction in programming.)
3) Data are stored from the right end in the same way, and the number of stored data is specified by the
contents of the pointer D .

Related device
→ For the carry flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Device Name Description
When the contents of the pointer D exceeds "n-1", no operation is executed (so data is
M8022 Carry
not written) and the carry flag M8022 turns ON.

Related instructions
Instruction Description
SFRD (FNC 39) Shift read (for FIFO control)
POP (FNC212) Shift last data read (for FILO control)

Caution
1. In the case of continuous operation type (SFWR) instruction
Note that data are stored (overwritten) in each scan time (operation cycle).

326
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.9 FNC 38 – SFWR / Shift Write [FIFO/FILO Control]

11
Program example

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. Example of first-in first-out control
→ For a program example of FILO, refer to Section 27.3.
In the example below, the shift write (SFWR) and shift read (SFRD) instructions are used.
1) Contents of operation 12
- In this circuit example, a product number to be taken out now is output according to "first-in first-out" rule

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
while products which were put into a warehouse with their product numbers registered are taken out of
the warehouse.
- The product number is hexadecimal, and up to 4 digits. Up to 99 products can be stored in the
warehouse.
2) Program 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Button for request to put a
product into warehouse
X020
FNC 12 The product number is input from X000 to X017, and
K4X000 D256 transferred to D256.
MOVP

FNC 38 D256 D257 K100

Pointer
D257: Data register for storing the product number 14
SFWRP D258 to D356 (99 points)

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Button for request to take a
product out of warehouse
X021 The product number of a product put into first is output
FNC 39 D257 D357 K100 to D357 in response to the request to put a product out
SFRDP
M8000
of the warehouse.
The product number to be taken out is output to Y000
15
FNC 12 D357 K4Y000

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
MOV to Y017 in a four-digit hexadecimal number.
RUN
monitor

Digital switch 0000 to FFFF Seven-segment display unit

Request to Request to
1 2 3 4 put a
product into
take a
product out
16
warehouse of warehouse

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
X017 to X000 X20 X21 Y017 to Y000
Command Command
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
MOV instruction
+1 −1
6 D257 5 4 Shift
1 0320 D258 0320 D357 0320 0232
2 0232 D259 0232 0462 18
3 0462 MOV instruction D260 0462 0539
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

4 0539 D261 0539 0142

5 0142 D262 0142 0
6 1234 D256 1234 D263 0 0
7 0 0

0
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

99 0 D355 0 0
100 0 SFWRP instruction D356 0 SFRDP instruction 0
is executed. is executed.

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

327
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.10 FNC 39 – SFRD / Shift Read [FIFO Control]

11.10 FNC 39 – SFRD / Shift Read [FIFO Control]

Outline
This instruction reads data for first-in first-out control.

1. Instruction format

FNC 39 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
SFRD P 7 steps SFRD Continuous
−
Operation
SFRDP Pulse (Single) −
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Head word device number storing data
S (The first word device works as the pointer, and data is stored in S +1 and 16-bit binary
later.)
D Word device number storing data taken out first 2 ≤ n ≤ 512 16-bit binary
n Number of store points plus "1"*1 2 ≤ n ≤ 512 16-bit binary

*1. "+1" is required for the pointer.

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3
n 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (SFRD and SFRDP)
S1 +1 written in turn by SFWR (FNC 38) instruction is transferred (read) to D , and "n-1" words from
S1 +1 are shifted rightward by 1 word. "1" is subtracted from the number of data, stored in S .
Command
input FNC 39 S‚ D‚ n
SFRDP

328
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 11 Rotation and Shift Operation – FNC 30 to FNC 39
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 11.10 FNC 39 – SFRD / Shift Read [FIFO Control]

11

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
D‚
n
Before
execution
S+n ... S+10 S+9 S+8 S+7 S+6 S+5 S+4 S+3 S+2 S+1 S ‚ S‚ =n
Pointer
12
Executed at the 1st time

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D‚ S+1 S‚ −1 → S ‚

S+n S+n ... S+10 S+9 S+8 S+7 S+6 S+5 S+4 S+3 S+2 S‚

After Word data is shifted. Pointer 13

execution Executed at the 2nd time

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
D‚ S+2 S‚ −1 → S ‚

S+n S+n S+n ... S+10 S+9 S+8 S+7 S+6 S+5 S+4 S+3 S ‚

Word data is shifted. Pointer 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
1) When the command input turns ON, the contents of S +1 are transferred (read) to D .
2) Accompanied by this transfer, the contents of the pointer S decrease, and the data on the left side
are shifted rightward by 1 word. (When the continuous operation type SFRD instruction is used, the
contents are stored in turn in each operation cycle. Use the pulse operation type SFRDP instruction in
programming.) 15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Related device
→ For the zero flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Device Name Description
Data is always read from S +1. When the contents of the pointer become "0", the
M8020 Zero
zero flag M8020 turns ON.
S
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Related instructions
Instruction Description
SFWR (FNC 38) Shift write (for FIFO/FILO control)
POP (FNC212) Shift last data read (for FILO control) 17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Caution
1. Data after reading was executed
The contents of S +n do not change by reading.
18
2. In the case of continuous operation type (SFRD) instruction
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

Data is read in turn in each scan time (operation cycle), but the contents of S +n do not change.

3. When pointer S is 0
Data is not processed, and the contents of D do not change.
19
Program example
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

Refer to the program example provided for SFWR (FNC 38) instruction.
→ For the program example, refer to Section 11.9.

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

329
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

12. Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49

FNC 40 to FNC 49 provide instructions for executing complicated processing for fundamental applied
instructions FNC 10 to FNC 39 and for executing special processing.

FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

Section
40 ZRST ZRST D1 D2 Zone Reset
12.1

Section
41 DECO DECO S D n Decode
12.2

Section
42 ENCO ENCO S D n Encode
12.3

Section
43 SUM SUM S D Sum of Active Bits
12.4

Section
44 BON BON S D n Check Specified Bit Status
12.5

Section
45 MEAN MEAN S D n Mean
12.6

Section
46 ANS ANS S m D Timed Annunciator Set
12.7

Section
47 ANR ANR Annunciator Reset
12.8

Section
48 SQR SQR S D Square Root
12.9

Section
49 FLT FLT S D Conversion to Floating Point
12.10

330
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.1 FNC 40 – ZRST / Zone Reset

11
12.1 FNC 40 – ZRST / Zone Reset

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction resets devices located in a zone between two specified devices at one time.
Use this instruction for restarting operation from the beginning after pause or after resetting control data.
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1. Instruction format

FNC 40 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

ZRST P ZRST Continuous −

5 steps
ZRSTP
Operation
Pulse (Single)
Operation
− 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
S
D11 ‚ Head bit or word device number to be reset at one time SD11 ‚ ≤ D2
Specify same type of
16-bit binary
14
D2 Last bit or word device number to be reset at one time devices. 16-bit binary

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and
Type
System User Digit Specification System User
Unit
Index
stant Number ter String
Pointer
15
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
S
D11 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3

D2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

16
Explanation of function and operation

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1. 16-bit operation (ZRST and ZRSTP)
Same type of devices from D1 to D21 are reset at one time.

When D1 and D21 are bit devices 17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1) "OFF (reset)" is written to the entire range from D1 to D21 at one time.
Command
input FNC 40 D1 ‚ D2 ‚ Devices D1 ‚ through D2 ‚ are reset at one time.
ZRST

18
Before
… D1 ‚ +9 D1 ‚ +8 D1 ‚ +7 D1 ‚ +6 D1 ‚ +5 D1 ‚ +4 D1 ‚ +3 D1 ‚ +2 D1 ‚ +1
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

D2 ‚ D1 ‚
execution

Executed

OFF
After
19
execution
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

OFF … OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

331
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.1 FNC 40 – ZRST / Zone Reset

When D1 and D21 are word devices

"K0" is written to the entire range from D1 to D21 at one time.
Command
input FNC 40 D1 ‚ D2 ‚ Devices D1 ‚ through D2 ‚ are reset at one time.
ZRST

Before
D2 ‚ … D1 ‚ +9 D1 ‚ +8 D1 ‚ +7 D1 ‚ +6 D1 ‚ +5 D1 ‚ +4 D1 ‚ +3 D1 ‚ +2 D1 ‚ +1 D1 ‚
execution

Executed

K0
After
execution
K0 … K0 K0 K0 K0 K0 K0 K0 K0 K0 K0

Related instructions
1. RST instruction
As an independent reset instruction for devices, RST instruction can be used for bit devices (Y, M and S) and
word devices (T, C, D and R).
X001
RST M0 M0 is reset.

The current value of T0 is

RST T0 reset.

RST D0 D0 is reset.

2. FMOV (FNC 16) instruction

FMOV (FNC 16) instruction is provided to write a constant (example: K0) at one time. By using this
instruction, "0" can be written to word devices (KnY, KnM, KnS, T, C, D and R) at one time.
X002
FNC 16 K0 D0 K100 K0 is written to D0 to D99 at one time.
FMOV

Cautions
1. Caution on specifying devices
Specify same type of devices in D1 and D21 . The device number of D1 should be smaller than or
equal to the device number of D21 .
If the device number of D1 is larger than the device number of D21 , only one device specified in D1 is
reset.

332
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.1 FNC 40 – ZRST / Zone Reset

11
2. When specifying high speed counters (C235 to C255)

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
ZRST instruction is handled as the 16-bit type, but 32-bit counters can be specified in D1 and D21 .
However, it is not possible to specify a 16-bit counter in D1 and specify a 32-bit counter in D21 ; D1
and D21 should be a same type.

Example
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Command Command
input FNC 40 input FNC 40
C180 C230 C180 C199
ZRST ZRST
16-bit 32-bit FNC 40
counter counter C200 C230
ZRST
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Program example
1. When using devices in the latch area as non-latch type devices
In the program shown below, when the power of the PLC is turned ON or when the PLC mode is changed to
RUN, the specified ranges of bit devices and word devices are reset at one time. 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
D1 D2
M8002
FNC 40 M500 M599 M500 to M599 are reset at one time.
Initial pulse ZRST
D1 D2
FNC 40 C235 C255
C235 to C255 are reset at one time. 15
ZRST ("0" is written to them, and their contacts are reset.)

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D1 D2
FNC 40 S500 S599 S500 to S599 are reset at one time.
ZRST

16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

333
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.2 FNC 41 – DECO / Decode

12.2 FNC 41 – DECO / Decode

Outline
This instruction converts numeric data into ON bit.
A bit number which is set to ON by this instruction indicates a numeric value.

1. Instruction format
FNC 41 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

DECO P DECO Continuous −

7 steps Operation
DECOP Pulse (Single) −
Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
SS1 ‚ Data to be decoded or word device number storing data 16-bit binary

D Bit or word device number storing the decoding result 16-bit binary
Number of bits of device storing the decoding result (n = 1 to 8)
n 16-bit binary
(No processing is executed in the case of "n = 0".)

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
SS1 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

SD2 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3
n 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (DECO and DECOP)
One bit among DD1 to DD1 +2n − 1 is set to ON according to the DS1 value.
1) When DD1 is a bit device (1 ≤ n ≤ 8)
The numeric value (expressed in 2n, 1 ≤ n ≤ 8) of a device specified by DS1 is decoded to DD1 .
- When all bits of DS1 are "0", the bit device DD1 turns ON.
8
- When "n" is "8", 2 points (= 256 bits which is the maximum value) are occupied..
Command
input FNC 41 S‚ D‚ n
DECO
(1 ≤ n ≤ 8)
When it is Y, M or S
Ignored 8 bits When "n" is "8"
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 When S ‚ is D0
← 2n
128
64
32
16
8

1
4
2

K8 K7 K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1 ←n
Turns ON when all
bits of S ‚ are OFF.
Up to … Up to … Up to … Up to
M255 M127 M63 M31
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 When D ‚ is M0
M255 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
Up to 256 bits (The number of occupied bits varies depending on the specified "n" value.)

334
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.2 FNC 41 – DECO / Decode

11
2) When DD1 is a word device (1 ≤ n ≤ 4)

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
The numeric value (expressed in 2n on the low-order side) of DS1 is decoded to DD1 .
- When all bits of DS1 are "0", b0 of the word device DD1 turns ON.
- In the case of "n ≤ 3", all of high-order bits of DD1 become "0" (turn OFF).
12
When it is T,C,D,R,U…\G…,V,Z,K or H

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Command
input FNC 41 S‚ D‚ n
DECO
(1 ≤ n ≤ 4)
Ignored 4 bits
When "n" is "4"
13
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 When S ‚ is D0
← 2n

1
4
2
K4 K3 K2 K1 ← n
Turns ON when all bits
of S ‚ are OFF. 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 When D ‚ is D2
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Up to 16 bits
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Caution
• While the command input is OFF, the instruction is not executed. The activated decode output is held in
the previous ON/OFF status.
• When "n" is "0", the instruction executes no processing. 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

335
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.2 FNC 41 – DECO / Decode

Program example
1. When setting bit devices to ON according to the value of a data register
The value of D0 (whose current value is "14" in this example) is decoded to M0 to M15.

S‚ D‚ n
M8000
FNC 41 D 0 M 0 K 4
DECO
4 bits
Ignored (D0 b0 to b3)
(D0 b4 to b15)
b15 … 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b0
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 S ‚ When the value of b0 to
← 2n b3 of D0 is "14"

128
64
32
16
8

1
4
2
K8 K7 K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1 ← n = K4

Turns ON when D0 is K0.

Up to Up to Up to Up to
M255 … M127 … M63 … M31
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 When D ‚ is M0
M255 M M M M M M M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0
15 14 13 12 11 10
Up to 256 bits (The number of occupied bits varies depending on the specified "n" value.)

• When the value of b0 to b3 of D0 is "14 (= 0 + 2 + 4 + 8)", M14 (which is the 15th from M0) becomes "1"
(turn ON).
• When the value of D0 is "0", M0 becomes "1" (turns ON).
• When "n" is set to "K4", either one point among M0 to M15 turns ON according to the value of D0 (0 to 15).
• By changing "n" from K1 to K8, D0 can correspond to numeric values from 0 to 255.
However, because the device range of DD1 is occupied for decoding accordingly, such device range
should not be used for another control.

2. Turning ON the bit out of word devices according to the contents of bit devices
The value expressed by X000 to X002 is decoded to D0 (X000 and X001 are ON, and X002 is OFF in this
example.).
S‚ D‚ n
M8000
FNC 41 X000 D0 K3 X2 X1 X0
DECO
0 1 1 S‚
← 2n
1
4
2

K3 K2 K1 ←n
Turns ON when all
bits of S ‚ are OFF.

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 D ‚ =D0
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

All of these bits are

"0" (OFF).

• When the values expressed by X000 to X002 are "3 (= 1 + 2 + 0)", b3 (which is the 4th from b0) becomes
1 (turns ON).
• When all of X000 to X002 are "0" (OFF), b0 becomes "1" (turns ON).

336
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.3 FNC 42 – ENCO / Encode

11
12.3 FNC 42 – ENCO / Encode

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction obtains positions in which bits are ON in data.
12
1. Instruction format

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC 42 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

ENCO P ENCO Continuous −

7 steps Operation
ENCOP Pulse (Single) −
Operation
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
SS1 ‚ Data to be encoded or word device number storing data 16-bit binary
Word device number storing the encoding result 16-bit binary
D
Number of bits of device storing the encoding result (n = 1 to 8)
14
n 16-bit binary

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
(When "n" is "0", no processing is executed.)

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
and System User Digit Specification System User
Special
Unit
Index
Con- Real Charac-
stant Number ter String
Pointer 15
Type

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

SS1 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3

SD2 ‚ 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3
n 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Explanation of function and operation
1. 16-bit operation (ENCO and ENCOP)
The 2n bit of DS1 is encoded, and the result value is stored to DD1 .
This instruction converts data into binary data according to a bit position in the ON status.
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1) When DS1 is a bit device (1 ≤ n ≤ 8)
ON bit positions among "2n" bits (1 ≤ n ≤ 8) from DS1 are encoded to DD1 .
- When "n" is "8", 28 = 256 bits (which is the maximum value) are occupied.
- The encoding result of DD1 is "0" (OFF) from the most significant bit to the low-order bit "n". 18
When it is Y, M or S
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

Command
input FNC 42 S‚ D‚ n
ENCO
(1 ≤ n ≤ 8)

19
M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 When "n" is 3
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
S ‚ = M10
7 6 5 4 (3) 2 1 0

b15 D10 4 (2) (1) 20

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 D‚
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

b0
All of them are "0".

337
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.3 FNC 42 – ENCO / Encode

2) When DS1 is a word device (1 ≤ n ≤ 4)

ON bit positions among "2n" bits (1 ≤ n ≤ 4) from a device specified in DS1 are encoded to DD1 .
- The encoding result of DD1 is "0" (OFF) from the most significant bit to the low-order bit "n".

When it is T, C, D, R, U…\G…, V or Z
Command
input
FNC 42 S‚ D‚ n
ENCO
(1 ≤ n ≤ 4)

D0
2n = 8 (When "n" is 3)
b15 b0
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 S‚
6 5 4 (3) 2 1 0
7
Ignored

b15 4 (2) (1)

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 D‚
b0
All of these bits are 0.

D2

Cautions

1. When two or more bits are ON in the DS1 data

The low-order side is ignored, and only the ON position on the high-order side is encoded.

2. While the command input is OFF

The instruction is not executed. Activated encode outputs are latched in the previous ON/OFF status.

338
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.4 FNC 43 – SUM / Sum of Active Bits

11
12.4 FNC 43 – SUM / Sum of Active Bits

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction counts the number of "1" (ON) bits in the data of a specified device.
12
1. Instruction format

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC 43 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D SUM P 5 steps SUM Continuous
9 steps DSUM
Continuous
Operation Operation
SUMP Pulse (Single) DSUMP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
SS1 ‚ Word device number storing the source data 16- or 32-bit binary

D Word device number storing the result data 16- or 32-bit binary 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P 15
SS1 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
SD2 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1. 16-bit operation (SUM and SUMP)
The number of bits in the ON status in DS1 is counted, and stored to DD1 .
• When all bits are OFF in DS1 , the zero flag M8020 turns ON.
Command
input FNC 43 Number of bits in the
17
S‚ D‚ ON status in S ‚ →

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
SUM D‚

Word data
16-bit data
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
K21847
Before
execution
S‚ 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
9 ← 8 ← 7 ← 6 ← 5 ← 4 ← 3 2 1 (Number of "1" (ON))
18
K0
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

D‚ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

K21847
After S‚ 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
execution
32 16 8 4 2 1
19
K9
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

D‚ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

339
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.4 FNC 43 – SUM / Sum of Active Bits

2. 32-bit operation (DSUM and DSUMP)

The number of bits in the ON status in [ DS1 +1, DS1 ] is counted, and stored to DD1 .
• The number of bits in the ON status are stored in DD1 , and K0 is stored in DD1 +1.
• When all bits are OFF in [ DS1 +1, DS1 ], the zero flag M8020 turns ON.
Command
input FNC 43 Number of bits in → D ‚ +1, D ‚
DSUM
S‚ D‚ the ON status in [ S ‚ +1, S ‚ ]

Word data K0 is written

32-bit data
b31 … b17 b16b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
K21847
Before S‚ 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
execution (Number of "1" (ON)) 9 ← 8 ← 7 ← 6 ← 5 ← 4 ← 3 2 1
K0 K0
D‚ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

b31 … b17 b16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

K21847
After S‚ 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
execution
32 16 8 4 2 1
K0 K9
D‚ 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 01 00 00 01 0 1 0 0 1

3. Operation result DD1 according to the DS1 value (in 16-bit operation)

S M8020
Bit device Word device D (zero
flag)
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Decimal Hexadecimal
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000 0 ON
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0001 1 OFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 0002 1 OFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 0003 2 OFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4 0004 1 OFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 5 0005 2 OFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 6 0006 2 OFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 7 0007 3 OFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 8 0008 1 OFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 9 0009 2 OFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 10 000A 2 OFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 11 000B 3 OFF
OFF
…

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 −5 FFFB 15 OFF
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 −4 FFFC 14 OFF
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 −3 FFFD 15 OFF
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 −2 FFFE 15 OFF
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 −1 FFFF 16 OFF

340
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.4 FNC 43 – SUM / Sum of Active Bits

11
Caution

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
While the command input is OFF, the instruction is not executed.
The output of the number of bits in the ON status is latched in the previous status.

Program example
When X000 is ON, the number of bits in the ON status in D0 is counted, and stored to D2. 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
S‚ D‚
X000
FNC 43 D 0 D 2 The number of "1" in D0 is stored to D2.
SUM

D 0 = K0 D 2 = K0 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
M8020=ON Zero flag

D 0 = K21847 D 2 = K9
32 16 8 4 2 1
14
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
M8020=OFF Zero flag

15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

341
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.5 FNC 44 – BON / Check Specified Bit Status

12.5 FNC 44 – BON / Check Specified Bit Status

Outline
This instruction checks whether a specified bit position in a specified device is ON or OFF.

1. Instruction format

FNC 44 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D BON P 7 steps BON Continuous
13 steps DBON
Continuous
Operation Operation
BONP Pulse (Single) DBONP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
SS1 ‚ Word device number storing the source data 16- or 32-bit binary

D Bit device number to be driven 16- or 32-bit binary

Bit position to be checked
n 16- or 32-bit binary
[n: 0 to 15 (16-bit instruction), 0 to 31 (32-bit instruction)]

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

SS1 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3 3 3

SD2 ‚ 3 3 3 S1 3
n 3 3 3 3

S1: "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
S2: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (BON and BONP)
The status (ON or OFF) of the bit "n" in DS1 is output to DD1 .
[When the bit "n" is ON, DD1 is set to ON. When the bit "n" is OFF, DD1 is set to OFF.]
• When a constant (K) is specified as the transfer source DS1 , it is automatically converted into the binary
format.
Command
input FNC 44 S‚ D‚ n S‚ D ‚ = ON/OFF status of bit "n"
BON
(n = K0 to K15)

S‚

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1
K15 K14 K13 K12 K11 K10 K9 K8 K7 K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1 K0 ←n D ‚ bit device
n=5
0 (OFF)
n=8
1 (ON)

342
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.5 FNC 44 – BON / Check Specified Bit Status

11
2. 32-bit operation (DBON and DBONP)

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
The status (ON or OFF) of the bit "n" in [ DS1 +1, DS1 ] is output to DD1 .
[When the bit "n" is ON, DD1 is set to ON. When the bit "n" is OFF, DD1 is set to OFF.]
• When a constant (K) is specified as the transfer source [ DS1 +1, DS1 ], it is automatically converted into
the binary format. 12
Command

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
input FNC 44 S‚ D‚ n [ S ‚ +1, S ‚ ] D ‚ = ON/OFF status of bit "n"
DBON
(n = K0 to K31)

S ‚ +1, S ‚
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
b31 b30 b29 … b17 b16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1 0 1 … 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1
K31 K30 K29 … K17 K16 K15 K14 K13 K12 K11 K10 K9 K8 K7 K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1 K0 ←n

D ‚ bit device

n = 29
n=5
0 (OFF) 14
1 (ON)

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Program example
When the bit 9 (n = 9) in D10 is "1" (ON), M0 is set to "1" (ON).

X000
S‚ D‚ n 15
FNC 44

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D 10 M 0 K9
BON

D 10
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 M 0 = ON
b15 b8 b7
n=9
b0 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 M 0 = OFF
b15 b0
n=9

17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

343
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.6 FNC 45 – MEAN / Mean

12.6 FNC 45 – MEAN / Mean

Outline
This instruction obtains the mean value of data.

1. Instruction format

FNC 45 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D MEAN P 7 steps MEAN Continuous
13 steps DMEAN
Continuous
Operation Operation
MEANP Pulse (Single) DMEANP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
SS1 ‚ Head word device number storing data to be averaged 16- or 32-bit binary

D Word device number storing the mean value result 16- or 32-bit binary
n Number of data to be averaged (1 n 64) 16- or 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

SS1 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3

SD2 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (MEAN and MEANP)
The mean value of "n" 16-bit data from DS1 is stored to DD1 .
• The sum is obtained as algebraic sum, and divided by "n".
• The remainder is ignored.
Command
input S‚ + S ‚ + 1 + ……… + S ‚ + n − 1
FNC 45 S‚ D‚ D‚
n
MEAN n

2. 32-bit operation (DMEAN and DMEANP)

The mean value of "n" 32-bit data from [ DS1 +1, DS1 ] is stored to [ DD1 +1, DD1 ].
• The sum is obtained as algebraic sum, and divided by "n".
• The remainder is ignored.
Command
input FNC 45 S‚ D‚ n
DMEAN

[ S ‚ + 1, S ‚ ] + [ S ‚ + 3, S ‚ + 2] + ……… + [{ S ‚ + n × 2 − 1}, { S ‚ + n × 2 − 2}]

[ D ‚ + 1, D ‚ ]
n

344
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.6 FNC 45 – MEAN / Mean

11
Caution

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
When a device number is exceeded, "n" is handled as a smaller value in the possible range.

Error
When "n" is any value outside the range from "1" to "64", an operation error (M8067) is caused.
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Program example
The data of D0, D1 and D2 are summed, divided by "3", and then stored to D10.
S‚ D‚ n
X000 (D 0) + (D 1) + (D 2)
FNC 45
MEAN
D 0 D 10 K 3
3
(D 10) 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

345
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.7 FNC 46 – ANS / Timed Annunciator Set

12.7 FNC 46 – ANS / Timed Annunciator Set

Outline
This instruction sets a state relay as an annunciator (S900 to S999).

1. Instruction format

FNC 46 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

ANS 7 steps ANS Continuous

−
Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
SS1 ‚ Timer number for evaluation time 16-bit binary
m Evaluation time data [m = 1 to 32767 (unit: 100 ms)] 16-bit binary
D Annunciator device to be set 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

SS1 ‚ S1 3
m 3 3 3 3
2
D S 3

S1 : T0 to T199
S2 : S900 to S999

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation
When the command input remains ON for equivalent to or longer than the evaluation time [m × 100 ms, timer
DS1 ], DD1 is set.
When the command input remains ON for less than the evaluation time [m × 100 ms] and then turns OFF, the
current value of the timer for evaluation DS1 is reset and DD1 is not set.
When the command input turns OFF, the timer for evaluation is reset.
Command
input Command input
FNC 46 S‚ m D‚
ANS D‚

Less than Equivalent to or

evaluation time longer than
(m × 100 ms) evaluation time
(m × 100 ms)

Related devices
Device Name Description
M8049 Enable annunciator When M8049 is set to ON, M8048 and D8049 are valid.
M8048 Annunciator ON When M8049 is ON and one of the state relays S900 to S999 is ON, M8048 turns ON.
Smallest state relay
D8049 Among S900 to S999, the smallest state relay number in the ON status is stored.
number in ON status

346
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.7 FNC 46 – ANS / Timed Annunciator Set

11
Program example

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. Displaying a fault number using an annunciator
When the program for external fault diagnosis shown below is created and the content of D8049 (smallest
state relay number in the ON status) is monitored, the smallest state relay number in the ON status from S900
to S999 is displayed.
If two or more faults are present at the same time, the next smallest fault number is displayed after the fault of
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
the smallest fault number is cleared.
M8000
0 M8049 When M8049 turns ON, monitoring becomes valid.
RUN monitor

Y005 X000 If the forward end detection input X000 does not turn
13
3 FNC 46 T 0 K 10 S900 ON within 1 second after the forward movement output

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Forward Forward
ANS Y005 is driven, S900 turns ON.
movement end
X001 X002 If both the upper limit input X001 and the lower limit
12 FNC 46 T 1 K 20 S901 input X002 are OFF for 2 seconds or more due to a dog
ANS error, S901 turns ON.
Upper Lower
limit limit 14
X003 X004 The switch X004 is set to ON in one operation cycle of

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
21 FNC 46 T 2 K100 S902 the machine. If the switch X004 is not set to ON while
ANS the continuous operation mode input X003 is ON in the
Continuous Cycle machine whose tact time is less than 10 seconds, S902
turns ON.
X005
30 Y005
Forward 15
movement

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
M8048
32 When one among S900 to S999 turns ON, M8048 turns
Y006 ON and the fault display output Y006 turns ON.
Annunciator ON Fault display

X007
34 FNC 47
ANRP
A state relay which was set to ON by the external fault
diagnosis program is set to OFF by the reset button 16
Reset X007. Every time X007 is set to ON, an operation state

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
relay in the ON status with the smallest device number
36 END is reset (set to OFF) in turn.

17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

347
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.8 FNC 47 – ANR / Annunciator Reset

12.8 FNC 47 – ANR / Annunciator Reset

Outline
This instruction resets an annuciator (S900 to S999) in the ON status with the smallest number.

1. Instruction format

FNC 47 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

ANR P Continuous −
1 step ANR Operation
ANRP Pulse (Single) −
Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
⎯ There is no set data. ⎯

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
⎯ There are no applicable devices.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (ANR and ANRP)
When the command input turns ON, a state relay working as annunciator (S900 to S999) in the ON status is
reset.
• If two or more state relays are ON, the state relay with the smallest number is reset.
When the command input is set to ON again, the state relay with the next smallest number is reset among
state relays working as annunciators (S900 to S999) in the ON status.
Command
input FNC 47
ANRP

Related devices
Device Name Description
M8049 Enable annunciator When M8049 is set to ON, M8048 and D8049 are valid.
When M8049 is ON and either one among the state relays S900 to S999 is ON, M8048
M8048 Annunciator ON
turns ON.
Minimum state relay
D8049 Among S900 to S999, the minimum number in the ON status is stored.
number in ON status

Caution
1. Execution in each operation cycle
• When ANR instruction is used, annunciators in the ON status are reset in turn in each operation cycle.
• When ANRP instruction is used, an annunciator in the ON status is reset only in one operation cycle (only
once).

Program example
Refer to ANS (FNC 46) instruction.
→ For a program example, refer to Section 12.7.

348
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.9 FNC 48 – SQR / Square Root

11
12.9 FNC 48 – SQR / Square Root

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction obtains the square root.
The ESQR (FNC127) instruction obtains the square root in floating point operation.
12
→ For ESQR (FNC127) instruction, refer to Section 18.15.

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1. Instruction format

FNC 48 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D SQR P 5 steps SQR Continuous
Operation 9 steps DSQR
Continuous
Operation 13
SQRP Pulse (Single) DSQRP Pulse (Single)

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
SS1 ‚ Word device number storing data whose square root is obtained 16- or 32-bit binary 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
D Data register number storing the square root operation result 16- or 32-bit binary

DS1 : K0 to K32767 in 16-bit operation, K0 to K2,147,483,647 in 32-bit operation

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others 15
Oper-

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

SS1 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Explanation of function and operation
1. 16-bit operation (SQR and SQRP)
The square root of the data stored in DS1 is calculated, and stored to DD1 .
Command
input
17
FNC 48 S‚ D‚ → D‚

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
SQR S‚

2. 32-bit operation (DSQR and DSQRP)

The square root of the data stored in [ DS1 +1, DS1 ] is calculated, and stored to [ DD1 +1, DD1 ].
Command 18
input FNC 48 S‚ D‚
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

DSQR S ‚ + 1, S ‚ → D ‚ + 1, D ‚

Caution
1. Operation result 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

1) The obtained square root is an integer because the decimal point is ignored.
When the calculated value is ignored, M8021 (borrow flag) turns ON.
2) When the calculated value is true "0", M8020 (zero flag) turns ON.

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

349
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.9 FNC 48 – SQR / Square Root

Program example
The square root of D10 is stored to D12.
The value of D10 is "100".

S‚ D‚
X000
FNC 48 D 10 D 12 D 10 → D 12
SQR
= 100 → 10

350
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.10 FNC 49 – FLT / Conversion to Floating Point

11
12.10 FNC 49 – FLT / Conversion to Floating Point

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction converts a binary integer into a binary floating point (real number).
12
1. Instruction format

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC 49 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D FLT P 5 steps FLT Continuous
9 steps DFLT
Continuous
Operation Operation
FLTP Pulse (Single) DFLTP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
SS1 ‚ Data register number storing binary integer 16- or 32-bit binary
Data register number storing binary floating point (real number) Real number (binary)
D
14
3. Applicable devices

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V
3 3 S
Z Modify K H
3
E "…" P
15
SS1 ‚

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D 3 3 S 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

16
1. 16-bit operation (FLT and FLTP)

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
The binary integer data of DS1 is converted into binary floating point (real number), and stored to [ DD1 +1,
DD1 ].
Command
input S‚ → ( D ‚ + 1, D ‚ )
FNC 49
FLT
S‚ D‚
Binary Binary floating point 17
integer (real number)

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
2. 32-bit operation (DFLT and DFLTP)
The binary integer data of [ DS1 +1, DS1 ] is converted into binary floating point (real number), and stored to
[ DD1 +1, DD1 ].
Command
18
input ( S ‚ + 1, S ‚ ) → ( D ‚ +1, D ‚ )
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

FNC 49 S‚ D‚
DFLT Binary integer Binary floating point
(real number)

Related instruction
Instruction Description
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

INT(FNC129) It is inverse of FLT instruction, and converts binary floating point into binary integer.

Caution
1. It is not necessary to convert a constant (K or H) into floating point value.
The value of a K or H specified in each instruction for binary floating point (real number) operation is
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

automatically converted into binary floating point (real number). It is not necessary to convert such a constant
using by FLT instruction.
(K and H cannot be specified in RAD, DEG, EXP and LOGE instructions.)

351
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 12 Data Operation – FNC 40 to FNC 49
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 12.10 FNC 49 – FLT / Conversion to Floating Point

Program example
1. Arithmetic operations by binary floating point operations
The sequence program shown below is constructed as follows:
1) Calculation example

× K34.5 (D 11, D 10) Binary floating point

(D 0) ÷ (X017 to X010) operation
16-bit binary 2-digit BCD (6)

(7) (D 13, D 12)

(1) (2) (5) (4) Scientific notation operation
for monitoring
(8)
(D 21, D 20) (D 22) (D 27, D 26) (D 15, D 14)
Binary floating BIN Binary floating 32-bit binary integer
point operation point operation
(3)

(D 25, D 24)
Binary floating
point operation
(D 29, D 28)
Binary floating
point operation

2) Sequence program
M8000 (1)
FNC 49 (D 0) → (D21, D20)
D 0 D 20 BIN Binary floating point operation
FLT

FNC 19 (X017 to X010) → (D22)

(2) K2X010 D 22 BCD BIN
BIN

FNC 49 (D22) → (D25, D24)

(3) D 22 D 24 BIN Binary floating point operation
FLT

FNC 123 K345 ÷ K 10 → (D27, D26)

(4) K345 K 10 D 26 Binary floating point operation
DEDIV
(D21, D20) ÷ (D25, D24) → (D29, D28)
FNC 123 D 20 D 24 D 28 Binary floating point Binary floating point
(5)
DEDIV division operation
FNC 122 (D29, D28) × (D27, D26) → (D11, D10)
(6) D 28 D 26 D 10 Binary floating point multiplication
DEMUL
(D11, D10) → (D13, D12)
FNC 118 D 10 D 12 Binary floating Scientific notation operation
(7)
DEBCD point operation for monitoring
(D11, D10) → (D15, D14)
FNC 129 D 10 D 14 Binary floating 32-bit binary integer
(8)
DINT point operation

352
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

11

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
13. High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
FNC 50 to FNC 59 provide interrupt processing type high speed instructions that execute sequence control 12
using the latest I/O information and utilize the high speed processing performance of the PLC.

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

Section
50 REF REF D n Refresh
13.1

Section
13
51 REFF REFF n Refresh and filter adjust

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
13.2

Section
52 MTR MTR S D1 D2 n Input Matrix
13.3

53 HSCS HSCS S1 S2 D High speed counter set

Section
13.4
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Section
54 HSCR HSCR S1 S2 D High speed counter reset
13.5

Section
55 HSZ HSZ S1 S2 S D High speed counter zone compare
13.6
15
Section

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
56 SPD SPD S1 S2 D Speed Detection
13.7

Section
57 PLSY PLSY S1 S2 D Pulse Y Output
13.8

58 PWM PWM S1 S2 D Pulse Width Modulation

Section
13.9
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Section
59 PLSR PLSR S1 S2 S3 D Acceleration/deceleration setup
13.10

17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

353
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.1 FNC 50 – REF / Refresh

13.1 FNC 50 – REF / Refresh

Outline
This instruction immediately outputs the latest input (X) information or the current output (Y) operation result
in the middle of a sequence program.

1. Instruction format

FNC 50 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

REF P REF Continuous −

5 steps Operation
REFP Pulse (Single) −
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
D Head bit device (X or Y) number to be refreshed Bit
Number of bit devices to be refreshed
n (FX3U/FX3UC: multiple of 8 in the range from 8 to 256, 16-bit binary
FX3G: multiple of 8 in the range from 8 to 128)

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
System Special Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification Index Constant Pointer
User Unit Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

D S 1 S2
n S 3 S3

S1: X000, X010 or X020: Up to the final input number (whose least significant digit number is "0")
S2: Y000, Y010 or Y020: Up to the final output number (whose least significant digit number is "0")
S3: FX3U/FX3UC PLCs: K8 (H8) or K16 (H10): Up to K256 (H100) (which is a multiple of 8)
FX3G PLC: K8 (H8) or K16 (H10): Up to K128 (H80) (which is a multiple of 8)

354
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.1 FNC 50 – REF / Refresh

11
Explanation of function and operation

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. 16-bit operation (REF and REFP)
1) When refreshing outputs (Y)
"n" points are refreshed from the specified output device D . ("n" must be a multiple of 8.)
Command
12
input

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC 50 D n
REF
Head Number
device of points
number
K8 (H8) or K16 (H10): Up to K256 (H100) (which is a multiple of 8)
Y000, Y010 or Y020: Up to the final output number
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
(whose least significant digit number is "0")

- When this instruction is executed, the output latch memory is refreshed to the output status in the
specified range.

Image memory output (Y) 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
REF instruction (executed)

END instruction
processing (output)

Output refresh
‚ REF instruction + END processing
ON 15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
‚ Only END processing ON ON

Improved response Improved response

delay time delay time

2) When refreshing inputs (X) 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
"n" points are refreshed from the specified input device D . ("n" must be a multiple of 8.)
Command
input
FNC 50 D n
REF
Head Number
device of points
17
number

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
K8 (H8) or K16 (H10): Up to K256 (H100) (which is a multiple of 8)
X000, X010 or X020: Up to the final input number
(whose least significant digit number is "0")

- If the input information is turned ON approximately 10 ms (response delay time of the input filter) before
the instruction is executed, the input image memory turns ON when the instruction is executed. 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

- In X000 to X017*1, the response delay time of the input filter can be changed.
*1 X000 to X007 in the FX3G, FX3U-16M… and FX3UC-16M….
→ For details, refer to "13.1.1 What should be understood before using the REF instruction".

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

355
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.1 FNC 50 – REF / Refresh

Does not turn ON.

Input terminal 5ms 20ms

Input signal (X) ON

Filter time 10ms 10ms 10ms

REF instruction (executed)

END instruction (input) processing

Input refresh ON
‚ REF instruction + END processing

‚ Only END processing ON

Improved response
delay time

Cautions
1. Setting the number of refreshed points "n"
Set a multiple of 8 such as "K8 (H8), K16 (H10) … K256 (H100)". Any other numeric value causes an error.

2. Setting the head device number (D)

Make sure that the least significant digit number is "0" such as "X000, X010, X020 …"or " Y000, Y010, Y020
…"

Program examples
1. When refreshing inputs
Only X010 to X017 (8 points in total) are refreshed.
D n
X000
FNC 50 X010 K 8
REF

2. When refreshing outputs

Y000 to Y007, Y010 to Y017 and Y020 to Y027 (24 points in total) are refreshed.
D n
X001
FNC 50 Y000 K 24
REF

356
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.1 FNC 50 – REF / Refresh

11
13.1.1 What should be understood before using the REF instruction

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. Changing the input filter
The input filter value is determined by the contents of D8020 (initial value: 10 ms).
Use the MOV instruction, etc. to adjust the value in D8020, which represents the input filter value.
12
Target range: X000 to X017 (In inputs X020 and later, the input filter value is fixed at 10 ms and cannot

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
be changed.)
(The target range is X000 to X007 in the FX3G, FX3U-16M…, FX3UC-16M….)

2. Output response time

After the REF instruction is executed, the output (Y) sets the output signal to ON after the response time
shown below.
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
→ For details, refer to the respective PLC Hardware Edition manual.

Target range: Y000 to highest connected output number

1) Relay output type
The output contact is activated after the response time of the output relay.
- Y000 and higher: Approximately 10 ms 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
2) Transistor output type
a) FX3U/FX3UC(D, DSS) PLC
- Y000, Y001 and Y002: 5µs or less (load current = 10 mA or more, 5 to 24V DC)
- Y003 and higher: 0.2ms or less (load current = 100 mA, 24V DC)
b) FX3UC -32MT-LT(-2) PLC
- Y000, Y001, Y002 and Y003: 5µs or less (load current = 10 mA or more, 5 to 24V DC) 15
- Y004 and higher: 0.2ms or less (load current = 100 mA, 24V DC)

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
c) FX3G PLC (14-point and 24-point type)
- Y000 and Y001: 5µs or less (load current = 10 mA or more, 5 to 24V DC)
- Y002 and higher: 0.2ms or less (load current = 100 mA, 24V DC)
d) FX3G PLC (40-point and 60-point type)
- Y000, Y001 and Y002: 5µs or less (load current = 10 mA or more, 5 to 24V DC) 16
- Y003 and higher: 0.2ms or less (load current = 100 mA, 24V DC)

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
3. When using the REF instruction between FOR and NEXT instructions or between a pointer
(with a lower step number) and CJ instruction (with a higher step number)
Inputs and outputs can be refreshed even when the input information or immediate output is required in the
middle of a routine program during control. 17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
4. When using the input interrupt (I) function
When executing interrupt processing accompanied by I/O operations, I/O refresh can be executed in the
interrupt routine to receive the latest input (X) information and give the immediate output (Y) of the operation
result so that dispersion caused by the operation time is improved.

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

357
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.2 FNC 51 – REFF / Refresh and Filter Adjust

13.2 FNC 51 – REFF / Refresh and Filter Adjust

Outline
The digital input filter time of the inputs X000 to X017*1 can be changed using this instruction or D8020.
Using this instruction, the status of inputs X000 to X017*1 can be refreshed at an arbitrary step in the program
for the specified input filter time, and then transferred to the image memory.

1. Instruction format

FNC 51 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

REFF P REFF Continuous −

3 steps Operation
REFFP Pulse (Single) −
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
n Digital input filter time [K0 to K60 (H0 to H3C) × 1 ms] 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
n 3 3 S S

S: K0 (H0) to K60 (H3C)

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (REFF and REFFP)
16 inputs from X000 to X017*1 in the image memory are refreshed at the digital input filter time [n × 1 ms].
Command
input
FNC 51 n
REFF
K0 to K60 (Filter constant from 0 to 60 ms)

• When the input turns ON "n × 1 ms" before the instruction is executed, the image memory is set to ON.
When the input turns OFF "n × 1 ms" before the instruction is executed, the image memory is set to OFF.
• When the command input is ON, the REFF instruction is executed in each operation cycle.
• When the command input is OFF, the REFF instruction is not executed, and the input filter of X000 to
X017*1 uses the set value of D8020 (which is the value used during input processing).
*1. X000 to X007 in the FX3U-16M…, FX3UC-16M….

358
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.2 FNC 51 – REFF / Refresh and Filter Adjust

11
Cautions

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. Setting the filter time "n"
Set "n" within the range from K0 (H0) to K60 (H3C) [0 to 60 ms].

2. Function of the input filter

12
A digital filter is built into the inputs X000 to X017*1. The filter time can be changed in 1 ms units within the

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
range from 0 to 60 ms using applied instructions. When the filter time is set to "0", the input filter value is as
follows.
Input number Input filter value when set to "0"
X000 to X005 5 µs*2
X006, X007 50 µs 13
*3 *3
200 µs

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
X010 to X017

*1. X000 to X007 in the FX3U-16M…, FX3UC-16M….

*2. When setting the input filter time to "5 µs", perform the following actions:
- Make sure that the wiring length is 5 m or less.
- Connect a bleeder resistor of 1.5 kΩ (1 W or more) to the input terminal, and make sure that the 14
load current in the open collector transistor output of the external equipment is 20 mA or more

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
including the input current of the main unit.
*3. The filter time is fixed to 10 ms in X010 to X017 when the FX3U-16M…, FX3UC-16M… is used.

Program example
15
1. Relationship between the program and the filter time

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
n When X010 is ON
X010
FNC 51 The image memory of X000 to Input
K 1 processing
REFF X017*4 is refreshed with an input
filter of 1 ms. Set value of D8020
X000
Sequence (Initial value: 10 ms) 16
program

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
X001 REFF instruction

1 ms
M8000 *4
FNC 51 The image memory of X000 to X017 is REFF instruction
K 20
refreshed with an input filter of 20 ms.
X000
REFF
20ms
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
END

The image memory is refreshed with Output

END processing
the input filter value set in D8020.

*4. X000 to X007 in the FX3U-16M…, FX3UC-16M….

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

359
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.2 FNC 51 – REFF / Refresh and Filter Adjust

13.2.1 What should be understood before using REFF instruction

Generally, a C-R filter of approximately 10 ms is provided for inputs in PLCs as countermeasures against
chattering and noise at the input contacts.
A digital filter is provided for the inputs X000 to X017*1 in FX3UC PLCs. The digital filter value can be changed
within the range from 0 to 60 ms using applied instructions.
*1. X000 to X007 in the FX3U-16M…, FX3UC-16M….

1. How to change the digital filter (executing END instruction)

The input filter initial value (10 ms) for X000 to X017*2 is set in special data register D8020.
By changing this value using the MOV instruction, etc., the input filter value for X000 to X017*2 which is used
during execution of the END instruction can be changed.

REFF D8020
instruction
When the When the END
command is ON instruction is
executed

Input terminal *2
X000 to X017 Digital filter
Initial value: 10 ms
Input image
Input terminal memory
X020 and C-R filter
later Fixed to 10 ms

*2. X000 to X007 in the FX3U-16M…, FX3UC-16M….

2. Instruction in which the digital filter is automatically changed

Regardless of the change in the filter time executed by the REFF instruction, when the following functions and
instruction are executed, the input filter value is automatically changed (to 5 µs in X000 to X005 and 50 µs in
X006 and X007).
However, if the digital filter is used in any other functions or instructions than the ones listed, the digital filter
uses the time set in D8020. As a result, the program will not run correctly if the ON or OFF duration of the
corresponding input signal is less than the input filter time.
• Input of interrupt pointer specified in the input interrupt function
• Input used in a high speed counter
• Input used in the SPD (FNC 56) instruction

360
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.3 FNC 52 – MTR / Input Matrix

11
13.3 FNC 52 – MTR / Input Matrix

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction reads matrix input as 8-point input × "n"-point output (transistor) in the time division method.
12
1. Instruction format

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC 52 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

MTR Continuous
9 steps MTR Operation −
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Input device (X) number of matrix signal input
S X000, X010, X020 … final input device number Bit
(Only "0" is allowed in the least significant digit of device numbers.) 14
Head device (Y) number of matrix signal output

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
D1 Y000, Y010, Y020 … final output device number Bit
(Only "0" is allowed in the least significant digit of device numbers.)
Head bit device (Y, M or S) number of ON output destination
Y000, Y010, Y020 … final Y number, M000, M010, M020 … final M number or
D2 Bit
S000, S010, S020 … final S number
(Only "0" is allowed in the least significant digit of device numbers.)
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
n Number of columns in matrix input (K2 to K8 or H2 to H8) 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
and System User Digit Specification
System
User
Special
Unit
Index Constant
Real Charac-
Number ter String
Pointer 16
Type

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3

D1 3

3 3 3
D2
n 3 3
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Explanation of function and operation
1. 16-bit operation (MTR)
An input signal of 8 points × "n" columns is controlled in the time division method using 8 inputs S and "n" 18
transistor outputs D1 . Each column is read in turn, and then output to D2 .
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

ON Number
Command Input Output output of
input number number destination columns
(normally ON)
FNC 52 S D1 D2 n
MTR
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

• For each output, the I/O processing is executed immediately in turn in interrupt at every 20 ms under
consideration of the input filter response delay of 10 ms.

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

361
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.3 FNC 52 – MTR / Input Matrix

The figure below shows an example of the FX3U series main unit (sink input/sink output). For writing details,
refer to the following manuals of the PLC used.
→ FX3G Hardware Edition
→ FX3U Hardware Edition
→ FX3UC Hardware Edition

Diode Command
D2 +10

D2 +11

D2 +12

D2 +13

D2 +14

D2 +15

D2 +16

D2 +17
0.1A(50V) contact
2nd
column 1st column input is received.

D1 [1] [3] [5]

D2 +1

D2 +2

D2 +3

D2 +4

D2 +5

D2 +6

D2 +7
1st 2nd column input is received.
D2

column
D1 +1 [2] [4] [6]
20ms
24V 0V S/S S S +1 S +2 S +3 S +4 S +5 S +6 S +7 M8029 (execution
Input (X) [sink] complete)
PLC Output (Y) [sink]

COM D1 D1 +1 D1 +2 D1 +3 D1 +4 D1 +5 D1 +6 D1 +7

"n" points
are
occupied.

Related device
Device Name Description
M8029 Instruction execution complete Turns ON after the first cycle operation.

Cautions
1. Number of occupied devices
1) Eight input points are occupied from the input device number specified in S .
2) "n" output points are occupied from the output device number specified in D1 .
When specifying the output in D2 , make sure that "n" output numbers specified in D1 does not
overlap the output specified in D2 .

2. Wiring
One diode of 0.1 A/50 V is required for each switch.

3. Output format
Use the transistor output format.

362
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.3 FNC 52 – MTR / Input Matrix

11
Program example

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
n=Three outputs (Y020, Y021 and Y022) are set to ON in turn repeatedly.
Every time an output is set to ON, eight inputs in the 1st, 2nd and 3rd columns are received in turn repeatedly,
and stored to M30 to M37, M40 to M47 and M50 to M57 respectively.
In this program example, the FX3U series main unit (sink input/sink output) is used. For writing details, refer to
the following manuals of the PLC used. 12
→ FX3G Hardware Edition

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
→ FX3U Hardware Edition
→ FX3UC Hardware Edition
S D1 D2 n
M0
FNC 52
MTR
X020 Y020 M 30 K 3 13
Input Output ON Number

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
number number output of
destination columns

Diode M0
M 50

M 51

M 52

M 53

M 54

M 55

M 56

M 57
0.1A(50V)
1st column input is received.
3rd
column 14
Y020 [1] [4]

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
X021 X022 X023 X024 X025 X026 X027
2nd column input is received.
Diode
0.1A(50V)
M 40

M 41

M 42

M 43

M 44

M 45

M 46

M 47

Y021 [2] [5]

2nd
column 3rd column input is received.

X021 X022 X023 X024 X025 X026 X027 Y022 [3] [6]
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Diode 20ms
0.1A(50V)
M 30

M 31

M 32

M 33

M 34

M 35

M 36

M 37

M8029 (execution
1st complete)
column

24V 0V S/S X020 X021 X022 X023 X024X025X026 X027 16

Sink input

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
PLC Sink output

COM Y020Y021Y022Y023Y024Y025Y026Y027

17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

363
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.3 FNC 52 – MTR / Input Matrix

13.3.1 Operation and cautions for MTR instruction

1. Command input
1) Setting the command input to normally ON
For the MTR instruction, set the command input to normally ON.
M{{
(normally ON)
FNC 52 X020 Y040 M 0 K 8
MTR

2. Input numbers used in MTR instruction

1) Inputs available in MTR instruction
Use inputs X020 and later under normal conditions.
2) When using the inputs X000 to X017*1
The receiving speed is higher. Because the output transistor recovery time is long and the input
sensitivity is high, however, erroneous input pulses may be counted.
To prevent erroneous input pulses, connect pull-up resistors (3.3 kΩ/0.5 W) to transistor outputs used in
MTR instruction.
For pull-up resistors, use the power supply shown in the table below.
Power supply used for pull-up resistors
AC power type PLC Service power supply
DC power type PLC Power supply for driving PLC

The figure below shows an example of the FX3U Series main unit (sink input/sink output).

Matrix
circuit
Refer to the
24V S/S 0V X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 X005 X006 X007 previous page.

FX3U-64MT-ES
Transistor output
COM5 Y020 Y021 Y022 Y023 Y024 Y025 Y026 Y027

3.3kΩ/0.5W

Pull-up resistor

*1. X000 to X007 in the FX3G, FX3U-16M… and FX3UC-16M….

3. ON/OFF duration of input signals

Because 64 input points (8 rows × 8 columns) are received in a cycle of 80 or 160 ms, the ON/OFF duration
of each input signal should be greater than or equal to the value shown below:

When inputs X000 to When inputs X020*2 or

X017*1 are used later are used

80ms 80ms 160ms 160ms

*1. X000 to X007 in the FX3G, FX3U-16M… and FX3UC-16M….

*2. X010 and later in the FX3G, FX3U-16M… and FX3UC-16M….

364
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.4 FNC 53 – HSCS / High Speed Counter Set

11
13.4 FNC 53 – HSCS / High Speed Counter Set

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction compares a value counted by a high speed counter with a specified value, and immediately
sets an external output (Y) if the two values are equivalent each other.
12
→ For the counter interrupt using HSCS instruction, refer to Section 35.6.

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1. Instruction format

FNC 53 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D HSCS
− 13 steps DHSCS
Continuous
Operation
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Data to be compared with the current data value of a high-speed counter or word
32-bit binary
14
S1
device number.

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
S2 Device number of a high speed counter [C235 to C255] 32-bit binary
Bit device number to be set to ON when the compared two values are equivalent
D Bit
to each other

3. Applicable devices 15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
System Special Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification Index Constant Pointer
User Unit Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3 3
16
S2 3 3

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
D 3 3 3 S1 3 S3

S1: "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
S2: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
S3: When using the counter interrupt function in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, specify an interrupt pointer.
→ For counter interrupt using HSCS instruction, refer to Section 35.6.
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Explanation of function and operation
1. 32-bit operation (DHSCS)
When the current value of a high speed counter (C235 to C255) specified in S2 becomes the comparison
18
value [ S1 +1, S1 ] (for example, when the current value changes from "199" to "200" or from "201" to
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

"200" if the comparison value is K200), the bit device D is set to ON without regard to the operation cycle.
This instruction is executed after the counting processing in the high speed counter.
Command
input
K2,147,483,647
S2 ‚
Comparison Comparison Output
19
value source destination
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

Set to ON.
FNC 53
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ S1 ‚ = S2 ‚ → D ‚
DHSCS

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

365
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.4 FNC 53 – HSCS / High Speed Counter Set

Operation
When the current value of the high speed counter C255 changes from "99" to "100" or from "101" to "100",
Y010 is set to ON (output refresh).
M8000
C255 K2,147,483,647
RUN monitor Comparison Comparison Output
value source destination
Set to ON.
FNC 53 K100 C255 Y010 K100 = C255 → Y010
DHSCS

Related instructions
The following instructions can be combined with high speed counters:
Instruction FNC No. Instruction name
DHSCS FNC 53 High speed counter set
DHSCR FNC 54 High speed counter reset
DHSZ FNC 55 High speed counter zone compare
DHCMOV FNC189 High speed counter move
DHSCT FNC280 High speed counter compare with data table

Cautions
1. Selection of the count comparison method
1) FX3U/FX3UC PLC
When the HSCS instruction is used in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, hardware counters (C235, C236, C237, C238,
C239, C240, C244 (OP), C245 (OP), C246, C248 (OP), C251 and C253) are automatically switched to
software counters, and the maximum frequency and total frequency of each counter are affected.
Refer to the counting operation described below, and select according to the contents of control whether
to use HSCS instruction or general-purpose comparison instruction.
a) Case to select DHSCS instruction
- When the output should be given when the counting result becomes equivalent to the comparison
value without regard to the scan time of the PLC
b) Cases to select a general-purpose comparison instruction
- When the required frequency is beyond the counting performance of the software counters
- When counting is regarded as important, but the effect of the scan time can be ignored in
operations according to the counting result
- When the number of an instruction is more than 32
M8000
FNC189
DHCMOV C251 D100 K0

FNC229
LDD<= K100 D100 SET Y010

FNC 50
REF Y010 K8

366
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.4 FNC 53 – HSCS / High Speed Counter Set

11
2) FX3G PLCs

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
When the HSCS instruction is used in FX3G PLCs, the total frequency of each counter is affected.
Refer to the counting operation described below, and select according to the contents of control whether
to use the HSCS instruction or a general-purpose comparison instruction.
a) Case to select the HSCS instruction
- When the output should be given if the counting result becomes equivalent to the comparison 12
value without regard to the scan time of the PLC

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
b) Cases to select a general-purpose comparison instruction
- When the required frequency is beyond the counting performance
- When counting is regarded as important, but the effect of the scan time can be ignored in
operations according to the counting result
- When an instruction is used 6 times or more 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
FNC229
K100 C251 SET Y010
LDD<=

FNC 50
REF
Y010 K8
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
2. Device specification range
Only high speed counters (C235 to C255) can be specified as S .

3. Only 32-bit operation instructions are available.

Because instructions for high speed counters are dedicated to 32 bits, make sure to input "DHSCS (FNC 53)". 15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
4. Priority order in operation among HSCS (FNC 53), HSCR (FNC 54), and HSZ (FNC 55)
instructions for a same high speed counter
→ For details, refer to "6. Priority order in operations among HSCS (FNC 53), HSCR (FNC 54), and HSZ
(FNC 55) instructions for the same high speed counter" in Subsection 13.4.1.

5. Reset operation by an external terminal 16

→ For details, refer to "5. Reset operation by an external terminal" in Subsection 13.4.1.

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
6. For other cautions on using HSCS instruction, refer to the description later.
→ For details, refer to the next page.

Program example 17
With regard to the current value of a counter, different outputs (Y) are arbitrary set to ON by two values.

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Set the maximum counting value of
M8000 high speed counter.
C255 K2,147,483,647
RUN monitor S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
FNC 53 K100 C255 Y010 C255 = K100 → Y010 = ON
18
DHSCS
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
FNC 53 K150 C255 Y011 C255 = K150 → Y011 = ON
DHSCS
Comparison Comparison Output
value source destination 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

151
150
… 149
101
100
… 99
C255 0 20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

Y010

Y011

367
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.4 FNC 53 – HSCS / High Speed Counter Set

13.4.1 Common cautions on using instructions for high speed counter

DHSCS (FNC 53), DHSCR (FNC 54), DHSZ (FNC 55) and DHSCT (FNC280) instructions are provided for
high speed counters.
This section explains common cautions for these instructions.

1. Limitation in the number of an instruction in a program

1) FX3U/FX3UC PLC
DHSCS, DHSCR and DHSZ instructions can be used as many times as necessary in the same way as
general instructions. However, the number of simultaneously driven instructions is limited. The DHSCT
instruction can be used only once in any program.
Instruction Limitation in number of instructions driven at same time
DHSCS
DHSCR 32 instructions including DHSCT instruction
*1
DHSZ
DHSCT*1 Only 1 (This instruction can be used only once.)

2) FX3G PLCs
The DHSCS, DHSCR and DHSZ instructions can be used 6 times in total in any program. In addition, the
number of simultaneously driven instructions is limited for these instructions.
Instruction Limitation in number of instructions driven at same time
DHSCS
DHSCR 6 instructions (These instructions can be used up to 6 times in total.)
DHSZ

2. Response frequency of high speed counters

When the DHSZ or DHSCT instruction is used in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, the maximum response frequency and
total frequency of every software counter are limited.
When the DHSCS, DHSCR or DHSZ instruction is used in FX3G PLCs, the total frequency of high speed
counters is limited.
→ For the maximum response frequency and total frequency in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs,
refer to Subsection 4.7.10.
→ For the total frequency in FX3G PLCs, refer to Subsection 4.8.7.

3. Specification of output numbers (Y)

When using the same instruction for high speed counter repeatedly or when driving two or more other
instructions for high speed counter at the same time, specify such output devices (Y) whose high-order two
digits are the same (in units of 8 devices).
1) When using devices of the same number (in units of 8 devices)
Example: When using Y000, specify Y000 to Y007. When using Y010, specify Y010 to Y017.
2) When using two or more instructions for high speed counter and non-consecutive output (Y) numbers
A program example is shown below:
M8000
FNC 53 K100 C255 Y000
DHSCS

FNC 53 K100 C255 Y010

DHSCS

When C255 reaches K100, the output Y000 is driven by interrupt. Y010 is driven when END processing
is executed.
If interrupt drive is required, use an output number in the range from Y001 to Y007 whose high-order two
digits are equivalent.

368
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.4 FNC 53 – HSCS / High Speed Counter Set

11
4. Caution on the counting operation when the current value is changed

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
An instruction for the high speed counter gives the comparison result when a pulse is input to the input (X) of
the high speed counter.
However, the comparison result is not given when the current value of the high speed counter is changed in
the following method:
1) Change method (examples) 12
a) Overwriting the contents of a word device used as the comparison value using DMOV instruction, etc.

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
b) Resetting the current value of a high speed counter in a program
2) Operation
Even if the condition for setting the output to ON or OFF is given as the comparison result, the
comparison result does not change when an instruction is simply driven.
13
5. Reset operation by an external terminal [M8025*1: HSC (external reset) mode]

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
For a high speed counter equipped with an external reset terminal (R) such as C241, an instruction is
executed and the comparison result is output at the rising edge of the reset input signal.
In FX3G PLCs, high speed counters operate in the HSC (external reset) mode without regard to the status of
M8025.
1) Program 14
If an instruction for the high speed counter is used while M8025*1 is driven, the instruction is executed

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
again when the current value of the high speed counter C241 is cleared by an external reset terminal.
And the comparison result is output even if a counting input is not given.
M8000
M8025 *1 External reset mode
RUN monitor X001 External reset 15
terminal for C241

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
C241 K9,999

FNC 54 K 0 C241 Y000

DHSCR

*1. M8025 is cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP.
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
It is not necessary to drive M8025 in FX3G PLCs.
2) Operation
When the external reset input X001 turns ON while the current value of C241 is "100", for example, the
current value of C241 is reset to "0". And Y000 is reset at this time even if a counting input is not given.

17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

369
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.4 FNC 53 – HSCS / High Speed Counter Set

6. Priority order in operations among HSCS (FNC 53), HSCR (FNC 54), and HSZ (FNC 55)
instructions for the same high speed counter
1) FX3U/FX3UC PLC
When the same comparison value is used for the same high speed counter in the HSCS, HSCR and HSZ
instructions, reset (self-reset) of the comparison target high speed counter for the HSCR instruction is
executed with the highest priority (as shown in the table below).
In this case, the comparison results do not change in HSCS, HSCR, and HSZ instructions whose
comparison value is programmed to be the same as the comparison value for self-reset by HSCR
instruction.
To change the comparison results, set the comparison value to "K0".
2) FX3G PLCs
In FX3G PLCs, the HSCS, HSCR and HSZ instructions are executed in the order of programming.
M8000 Processing sequence
C235 K10000 Program
sequence FX3U/ FX2N/ FX3G/FX1N/
FX3UC FX2NC FX1S/FX1NC
FNC 53 DHSCR (6)
K500 C235 Y000 (1) DHSCS (1) DHSCS (1) DHSCS (1)
DHSCS (self-reset)
DHSCS (2) DHSZ (4) DHSCS (2) DHSCS (2)
FNC 53
K500 C235 Y001 (2) DHSCR (3) DHSCS (1) DHSCR (3) DHSCR (3)
DHSCS
DHSZ (4) DHSCS (2) DHSZ (4) DHSZ (4)*1
FNC 54 DHSCR (5) DHSCR (3) DHSCR (5) DHSCR (5)
K500 C235 Y002 (3)
DHSCR DHSCR (6) DHSCR (6) DHSCR (6)
DHSCR (5)
(self-reset) (self-reset) (self-reset)
M8000
FNC 55
K250 K500 C235 Y003 (4)
DHSZ *1. Only FX3G PLCs support the DHSZ instruction.

FNC 11
K250 K500 C235 Y003
DZCPP

M8000
FNC 54
K500 C235 Y006 (5)
DHSCR

FNC 54
K500 C235 C235 (6)
DHSCR

Self-reset program

Operation of FX3G/FX2N/FX2NC/FX1N/FX1NC/FX1S
Operation of FX3U/FX3UC PLC
PLC [reference]
Present value
Present value
500
500
250
250
0
0
Y000 to Y002 and Y006 do not change.*1
Y003 ON ON
Y000,Y001 ON
Y004 OFF
Y002 OFF
It does not change.*2 Present value:1
Y005 OFF
Y003 ON ON
*1. To change the comparison results by the instructions
Y004 ON
(1) to (3) and (5), change the comparison value
"K500" in the instructions (1) to (3) and (5) to "K0". *1
Y005
*2. To set Y005 to ON in the HSZ instruction (4), set a Present value:1
value smaller than the comparison value "K500".
However, due to the response delay at the output, *1. Due to the response delay at the output, the
the output may not operate within the short time output may not operate within the short time
before the counter's present value is reset to "0". before the counter's present value is reset to "0".

370
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.5 FNC 54 – HSCR / High Speed Counter Reset

11
13.5 FNC 54 – HSCR / High Speed Counter Reset

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction compares the value counted by a high speed counter with a specified value at each count,
and immediately resets an external output (Y) when both values become equivalent to each other.
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1. Instruction format

FNC 54 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D HSCR Continuous
− 13 steps DHSCR Operation
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Data to be compared with the current value of a high speed counter or word
S1 32-bit binary
device number storing the data to be compared
14
S2 Device number of a high speed counter [C235 to C255] 32-bit binary

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Bit device number to be reset (set to OFF) when both values become equivalent
D Bit
each other.

3. Applicable devices

Oper-
Bit Devices Word Devices Others 15
System Special Real Charac-

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
and System User Digit Specification Index Constant Pointer
User Unit Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S3 3 3 3 3

3 3
S2

3 3 3 S1 S2 3
16
D

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
S1: "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
S2: The same counter as S2 can be specified also. (Refer to the program example shown later.)
S3: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation 17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1. 32-bit operation (DHSCR)
When the current value of a high speed counter (C235 to C255) specified in S2 becomes the comparison
value [ S1 +1, S1 ] (for example, when the current value changes from "199" to "200" or from "201" to
"200" if the comparison value is K200), the bit device D is reset (set to OFF) regardless of the operation
cycle. In this instruction, the comparison processing is executed after the counting processing in the high
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

speed counter.
Command
input
S2 ‚ K2,147,483,647
Comparison Comparison Output

FNC 54
value source destination
Reset. 19
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ S1 ‚ = S2 ‚ → D ‚
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

DHSCR

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

371
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.5 FNC 54 – HSCR / High Speed Counter Reset

Operation
When the present value of the high speed counter C255 changes (counts) from "99" to "100" or from "101" to
"100", Y010 is reset (output refresh).
M8000 K2,147,483,647
C255
RUN Comparison Comparison Output
monitor value source destination
Reset.
FNC 54 K100 C255 Y010 K100 = C255 → Y010
DHSCR

Related instructions
The following instructions can be combined with high speed counters:
Instruction FNC No. Instruction name
DHSCS FNC 53 High speed counter set
DHSCR FNC 54 High speed counter reset
DHSZ FNC 55 High speed counter zone compare
DHCMOV FNC189 High speed counter move
DHSCT FNC280 High speed counter compare with data table

Cautions
1. Selection of the count comparison method
1) FX3U/FX3UC PLC
When the HSCR instruction is used in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, hardware counters (C235, C236, C237, C238,
C239, C240, C244 (OP), C245 (OP), C246, C248 (OP), C251 and C253) are automatically switched to
software counters, and the maximum frequency and total frequency of each counter are affected.
Refer to the counting operation described below, and select according to the contents of control whether
to use HSCR instruction or general-purpose comparison instruction.
a) Case to select DHSCR instruction
- When the output should be given when the counting result becomes equivalent to the comparison
value regardless of the scan time of the PLC
b) Cases to select a general-purpose comparison instruction
- When the required frequency is beyond the counting performance of software counters
- When counting is important, but the effect of the scan time can be ignored in operations depending
on the counting result
- When the number in an instruction is more than 32
M8000
FNC189
DHCMOV C251 D100 K0

FNC229
LDD<= K10000 D100 RST Y010

M8000
FNC 50
REF Y010 K8

372
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.5 FNC 54 – HSCR / High Speed Counter Reset

11
2) FX3G PLCs

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
When the HSCR instruction is used in FX3G PLCs, the total frequency of each counter is affected.
Refer to the counting operation described below, and select according to the contents of control whether
to use the HSCR instruction or a general-purpose comparison instruction.
a) Case to select the HSCR instruction
- When the output should be given if the counting result becomes equivalent to the comparison 12
value without regard to the scan time of the PLC

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
b) Cases to select a general-purpose comparison instruction
- When the required frequency is beyond the counting performance
- When counting is regarded as important, but the effect of the scan time can be ignored in
operations according to the counting result
- When an instruction is used 6 times or more 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
FNC229
K10000 C251 RST Y010
LDD<=

M8000 FNC 50
Y010 K8
REF
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
2. Only 32-bit operation instructions are available.
Because instructions for high speed counters are dedicated to 32 bits, make sure to input "DHSCR (FNC 54)".

3. Priority order in operation among HSCS (FNC 53), HSCR (FNC 54), and HSZ (FNC 55)
instructions for the same high speed counter 15
→ For details, refer to "6. Priority order in operations among HSCS (FNC 53), HSCR (FNC 54), and HSZ

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
(FNC 55) instructions for the same high speed counter" in Subsection 13.4.1.

4. Reset operation by an external terminal

→ For details, refer to "5. Reset operation by an external terminal [M8025*1: HSC (external reset)
mode]" in Subsection 13.4.1.
16
5. Other cautions on using HSCR instruction

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
→ For details, refer Subsection 13.4.1.

Program example
1. Example of self-reset circuit 17
When the current value of C255 becomes "400", C255 is immediately reset. Its current value becomes "0",

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
and the output contact is set to OFF.

M8000 Reset value of DHSCR

C255 K300 400
RUN monitor Count-up value

FNC 54 K400 C255 C255

300
18
DHSCR
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

Current value
Comparison Comparison Output
value source destination
of C255

Output contact
of C255
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

373
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High Speed Counter Zone Compare

13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High Speed Counter Zone Compare

Outline
This instruction compares the current value of a high speed counter with two values (one zone), and outputs
the comparison result to three bit devices (refresh).
→ For the table high speed comparison mode, refer to Subsection 13.6.2.
→ For the frequency control mode, refer to Subsection 13.6.3.

1. Instruction format

FNC 55 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D HSZ Continuous
− 17 steps DHSZ Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Data to be compared with the current value of a high speed counter or word
S1 32-bit binary
device number storing data to be compared (comparison value 1)
Data to be compared with the current value of a high speed counter or word
S2 32-bit binary
device number storing data to be compared (comparison value 2)
S Device number of a high speed counter [C235 to C255] 32-bit binary
Head bit device number to which the comparison result is output based on upper
D Bit
and lower comparison values

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
System Special Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification Index Constant Pointer
User Unit Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3 3

S 3 3

D 3 3 3 S1 3

S1: "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
S2: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 32-bit operation (DHSZ)
The current value of a high speed counter (C235 to C255) specified in S is compared with two
comparison points (comparison value 1 and comparison value 2). Based on the comparison result, "smaller
than the lower comparison value", "inside the comparison zone" or "larger than the upper comparison value",
one among D , D +1 and D +2 is set to ON regardless of the operation cycle.
In this instruction, the comparison processing is executed after the count processing in the high speed
counter.

Command
input
K2,147,483,647
S‚
Comparison Comparison Comparison Output
value 1 value 2 source destination
Set to ON.

FNC 55 S1 ‚ > S‚ → D‚
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ S‚ D‚
DHSZ
S1 ‚ ≤ S‚ ≤ S2 ‚ → D ‚ +1

S‚ > S2 ‚ → D ‚ +2

374
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High Speed Counter Zone Compare

11
Comparison points

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Make sure that the comparison value 1 and the comparison value 2 have the following relationship:
[ S1 +1, S1 ] ≤ [ S2 +1, S2 ]
Comparison point Contents (32 bits)
Comparison value 1 S1 +1, S1
12
Comparison value 2 S2 +1, S2

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Operation
When the current value of the high speed counter C251 changes (counts) as shown below, the comparison
result is output to one of the outputs Y000, Y001 or Y002.

M8000 K2,147,483,647
13
C251

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
RUN monitor Comparison Comparison Comparison Output
value 1 value 2 source destination
ON
FNC 55 K1000 K2000 C251 Y000 K1000 > C251 → Y000
DHSZ
K1000 ≤ C251 ≤ K2000 → Y001
C251 > K2000 → Y002 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Change of output contact (Y)
Comparison pattern Current value of C251
Y000 Y001 Y002
1000 > S ON OFF OFF
S1 > S 999 → 1000 ON → OFF OFF → ON OFF
999 ← 1000 OFF → ON ON → OFF OFF 15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
999 → 1000 ON → OFF OFF → ON OFF
999 ← 1000 OFF → ON ON → OFF OFF
S1 ≤ S ≤ S2 1000 ≤ S ≤ 2000 OFF ON OFF
2000 → 2001 OFF ON → OFF OFF → ON
2000 ← 2001 OFF OFF → ON ON → OFF 16
2000 → 2001 OFF ON → OFF OFF → ON

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
S < S2 2000 ← 2001 OFF OFF → ON ON → OFF
S > 2000 OFF OFF ON

Related instructions
The following instructions can be combined with high speed counters:
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Instruction FNC No. Instruction name
DHSCS FNC 53 High speed counter set
DHSCR FNC 54 High speed counter reset
DHSZ FNC 55 High speed counter zone compare
DHCMOV FNC189 High speed counter move 18
DHSCT FNC280 High speed counter compare with data table
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

375
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High Speed Counter Zone Compare

Cautions
1. Selection of the count comparison method
1) FX3U/FX3UC PLC
When the HSZ instruction is used in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, hardware counters (C235, C236, C237, C238,
C239, C240, C244 (OP), C245 (OP), C246, C248 (OP), C251 and C253) are automatically switched to
software counters, and the maximum frequency and total frequency of each counter are affected.
Refer to the counting operation described below, and select according to the contents of control whether
to use DHSZ instruction or general-purpose comparison instruction.
a) Case to select DHSZ instruction
- When the output should be given when the counting result becomes equivalent to the comparison
value regardless of the scan time of the PLC
b) Cases to select a general-purpose comparison instruction
- When the required frequency is beyond the counting performance of software counters
- When counting is important, but the effect of the scan time can be ignored in operations depending
on the counting result
- When the number in an instruction is more than 32
M8000
DHCMOV C251 D100 K0

FNC225
LDD > K10000 D100 Y010

FNC229 FNC238
LDD <= K10000 D100 ANDD >= K20000 D100 Y011

FNC226
LDD < K20000 D100 Y012

M8000
FNC 50
Y010 K8
REF

2) FX3G PLCs
When the HSZ instruction is used in FX3G PLCs, the total frequency of each counter is affected.
Refer to the counting operation described below, and select according to the contents of control whether
to use the HSZ instruction or a general-purpose comparison instruction.
a) Case to select the HSZ instruction
- When the output should be given if the counting result becomes equivalent to the comparison
value without regard to the scan time of the PLC
b) Cases to select a general-purpose comparison instruction
- When the required frequency is beyond the counting performance
- When counting is regarded as important, but the effect of the scan time can be ignored in
operations according to the counting result
- When an instruction is used 6 times or more

FNC225 K10000 C251 Y010

LDD>

FNC229 K10000 FNC238

C251 K20000 C251 Y011
LDD<= ANDD>=

FNC226
K20000 C251 Y012
LDD<

M8000 FNC 50
Y010 K8
REF

376
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High Speed Counter Zone Compare

11
2. Device specification range

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Only high speed counters (C235 to C255) can be specified as S .

3. Only 32-bit operation instructions are available.

Because instructions for high speed counters are dedicated to 32 bits, make sure to input "DHSZ (FNC 55)".

4. Caution on values set in the comparison value 1 S1 and comparison value 2 S2

12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Make sure that S1 is smaller than or equivalent to S2 .

5. Relationship between the comparison timing and the result output

1) DHSZ instruction executes comparison and outputs the result only when a counting pulse is input to a
high speed counter. 13
(When S1 is "1000" and S2 is "1999", the output D is set to ON as soon as the current value of

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
C235 changes from "999" to "1000" or from "1999" to "2000".)
2) Because the comparison result cannot be obtained when restoring the power or when the PLC mode
switches from STOP to RUN, the result is not output even if the comparison condition is provided.
→ For details, refer to "13.6.1 Program in which comparison result is set to ON when power is turned
ON [ZCP (FNC 11) instruction]". 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
6. Priority order in operation among HSCS (FNC 53), HSCR (FNC 54), and HSZ (FNC 55)
instructions for a same high speed counter
→ For details, refer to "6. Priority order in operation among HSCS (FNC 53), HSCR (FNC 54), and HSZ
(FNC 55) instructions for a same high speed counter" in Subsection 13.4.1.

7. Reset operation by an external terminal 15

→ For details, refer to "5. Reset operation by an external terminal [M8025*1: HSC (external reset)

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
mode]" in Subsection 13.4.1.

8. Number of occupied devices

1) The comparison value occupies two devices from S1 or S2 respectively.
2) The output occupies three devices from D .
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

377
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High Speed Counter Zone Compare

13.6.1 Program in which comparison result is set to ON when power is turned ON

[ZCP (FNC 11) instruction]
DHSZ instruction outputs the comparison result only when a counting pulse is input. Even if the current value
of C235 is "0", Y010 remains OFF at the time of startup.
For initializing Y010, compare the current value of C235 with K1000 and K1200 and drive Y010 by DZCPP
instruction (for general zone comparison) as pulse operation only at the time of startup.
Refer to the program example shown below.

Explanation of operation
The outputs Y010 to Y012 are as shown below:
Y010 = ON Y011 = ON Y012 = ON

0 1000 1200
Current value of C235

Program example
X010
RST C235

FNC 40 Y010 Y012 Y010 to Y012 are reset.

ZRST

M8000
C235 K9999 … pulse input: X000
RUN monitor

X010 Immediately after start, comparison is

FNC 11 K1000 K1200 C235 Y010
DZCPP executed only once.
Start K1000 > C235 :Y010 ON
K1000 ≤ C235 ≤ K1200 :Y011 ON
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ S‚ D‚ K1200 < C235 :Y012 ON

FNC 55 After start, comparison is executed

K1000 K1200 C235 Y010 when each pulse is input from X000.
DHSZ
K1000 > C235 :Y010 ON
K1000 ≤ C235 ≤ K1200 :Y011 ON
K1200 < C235 :Y012 ON

Timing chart
In the part [1] in the timing chart, Y010 remains OFF if the current value of a high speed counter (C235 in the
example below) is "0" when restoring the power.
1) For initializing Y010, the current value of C235 is compared with K1000 and K1200, and Y010 is driven
using the DZCPP instruction (for general zone comparison) as pulse operation only upon startup.
2) The comparison result in Y010 is latched until an input pulse is input and the comparison output is driven
by the DHSZ instruction.
3) According to the current value of the counter, the DHSZ instruction drives the output (A), (B) or (C).

378
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High Speed Counter Zone Compare

11

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
X000
(input pulse for
C235)
12
X010

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
(Start)

Y010 [1] A
(smaller than
zone)
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Y011 B
(inside zone)

Y012
(larger than zone)
C
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
1200
1000

0
(present value of counter) 15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

379
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High Speed Counter Zone Compare

13.6.2 Table high speed comparison mode (M8130)

This section explains the table high speed comparison mode (high speed pattern output) of the DHSZ
instruction.
When two or more outputs should be activated at one time, use the HSCT instruction which can change up to
16 outputs.

1. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Head word device number storing the data table (only data register D) 32-bit binary

S2 Number of lines in the table (only K or H) … K1 to K128 or H1 to H80 32-bit binary

S Device number of a high speed counter [C235 to C255] 32-bit binary

M8130 (special auxiliary relay for declaring the table high speed comparison
D Bit
mode)

Explanation of function and operation

1. 32-bit operation (DHSZ)
When the special auxiliary relay M8130 for declaring the table high speed comparison mode is specified as
D in the DHSZ instruction, the special function shown below is provided.
Command
input
K2,147,483,647
S‚
Head Number Comparison
device of lines source
FNC 55 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ S‚ M8130
DHSZ

Table high speed comparison mode

Comparison table
Comparison data (32 bits) Output (Y) number SET/RST Table counter (D8130)
0
S1 + 1, S1 S1 +2 S1 +3 ↓
1
S1 + 5, S1 +4 S1 +6 S1 +7 ↓
2
S1 + 9, S1 +8 S1 + 10 S1 + 11 ↓
…
…

S2 − 1
S1 + 5, S1 +4 S1 +6 S1 +7 ↓
Repeated from "0".

1) Specify the head device number for the comparison table as S1 .

Because one line in the comparison table uses four devices, S2 × 4 devices are occupied from S1 .
2) Specify the number of lines in the comparison table as S2 .
The created table starts from the head register S1 , and has the number of lines specified in S2 .
3) Comparison data
Make sure that the comparison data is 32 bits.

380
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High Speed Counter Zone Compare

11
4) Output (Y) number

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Specify each digit of the (Y) number in hexadecimal form.
Example: When specifying Y010, specify "H10".
When specifying Y020, specify "H20".
5) Specification of set and reset
These set and reset are directly controlled as interrupt. 12
Contents of setting

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Set (ON) K1/H1
Reset (OFF) K0/H0

2. Operation
M8002
13
FNC 12

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
K123 D200 Comparison data
DMOV

FNC 12 H10 D202 Output (Y) number

MOV

FNC 12
MOV
K1 D203
Output is set or reset.
K1: Output is set.
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
FNC 12 K234 D204 Comparison data
DMOV

FNC 12 H10 D206 Output (Y) number

MOV

FNC 12 Output is set or reset.

15
K0 D207
K0: Output is reset.

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
MOV

FNC 12 K345 D208 Comparison data

DMOV

FNC 12 H11 D210 Output (Y) number

MOV 16
Output is set or reset.

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
FNC 12 K1 D211
MOV K1: Output is set.

FNC 12 K456 D212 Comparison data

DMOV

FNC 12
MOV
H11 D214 Output (Y) number 17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
FNC 12 Output is set or reset.
K0 D215
MOV K0: Output is reset.

FNC 12 K567 D216 Comparison data

DMOV
18
FNC 12 H11 D218 Output (Y) number
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

MOV

FNC 12 Output is set or reset.

K1 D219
MOV K1: Output is set.
Command
input
C251
K2,147,483,647
Head Number Comparison
19
device of lines source
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

Reset FNC 55 D200 K5 C251 M8130

command DHSZ
input
RST C251 Table high speed comparison mode
20
RST Y011
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

381
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High Speed Counter Zone Compare

Comparison table
Present value
Comparison Output (Y) Table of C251
SET/RST
data number counter
D201,D200 D 202 D 203 0 A program to reset
K123 H10 K1 ↓ the counter is
required.
D205,D204 D 206 D 207 1 567
K234 H10 K0 ↓
456
D209,D208 D 210 D 211 2
K345 H11 K1 ↓ 345
D213,D212 D 214 D 215 3
K456 H11 K0 ↓ 234
4 123
D217,D216 D 218 D 219 ↓
K567 H11 K1 Repeated
from "0".
Y010
1) When this instruction is executed, the top
table in the data table is set as the A program to reset
Y011
comparison target data. the output is
required.
2) When the current value of the high speed
counter C251 is equivalent to the
comparison target data table, the output (Y) number specified in the table is set or reset.
This output processing is directly executed without regard to completion of output refresh by END
instruction.
3) "1" is added to the current value of the table counter D8130.
4) The comparison target data table is transferred to the next table.
5) The steps 2) and 3) are repeated until the current value of the table counter D8130 becomes "4".
When the current value becomes "4", the program execution returns to the step 1), and the table counter
D8130 is reset to "0".
At this time, the complete flag M8131 turns ON.
6) When the command contact is set to OFF, execution of the instruction is stopped and the table counter
D8130 is reset to "0".

Cautions
1. Limitation in the number of DHSZ instruction
This instruction can be programmed only once in a program.
With regard to the DHSCS, DHSCR, DHSZ and DHSCT instructions used for other purposes, up to 32
instructions including the DHSZ instruction can be driven at one time.

2. When the command input is set to OFF in the middle of execution

Execution of the instruction is aborted, and the table counter D8130 is reset to K0.
However, outputs which have been set or reset remain in the current status.

3. Output start timing

After the DHSZ instruction is first executed, creation of the table is completed by END instruction. After that,
the DHSZ instruction becomes valid.
Accordingly, the output is activated from the second scan.

4. Current value of a high speed counter

Make sure to execute the DHSZ instruction from a point where the current value of the high speed counter
(regarded as the operation target) is smaller than the value in the 1st line in the comparison table.

382
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High Speed Counter Zone Compare

11
13.6.3 Frequency control mode (HSZ and PLSY instructions) (M8132)

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
When the special auxiliary relay M8132 for declaring the frequency control mode is specified as D in the
DHSZ instruction, the special function shown below is provided if DPLSY instruction is combined. 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
At this time, only a data register D can be specified as S1 , and a constant K or H can be specified as
S2 . The available range is limited to "1 ≤ K, H ≤ 128".
A high speed counter C235 to C255 can be specified as S .
This function is different from the zone comparison described above.
PLSY instruction is as shown on the next page, and only the pulse output can be changed by users.
13
1. Control example

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Example of table configuration and data setting
Comparison data Frequency Table counter D8131
D 301,D 300 D 302, D 303 0 Head device (32 bits)
K 20 K300 ↓ specified as S1 ‚ 14
D 305,D 304 D 306, D 307 1

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
K600 K500 ↓
D 309,D 308 D 310, D 311 2 Number of lines specified
K700 K200 ↓ as S2 ‚
D 313,D 312 D 314, D 315 3
K800 K100 ↓ 15
D 317,D 316 D 318, D 319 4

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
K 0 K 0 ↓

16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

383
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High Speed Counter Zone Compare

Command
input
FNC 12 K20 D300 Comparison data
DMOVP

FNC 12 K300 D302 Frequency

DMOVP

FNC 12 K600 D304 Comparison data

DMOVP

FNC 12 K500 D306 Frequency

DMOVP

FNC 12 K700 D308 Comparison data

DMOVP

FNC 12 K200 D310 Frequency

DMOVP

FNC 12 K800 D312 Comparison data

DMOVP

FNC 12 K100 D314 Frequency

DMOVP

FNC 12 K0 D316 Comparison data

DMOVP

FNC 12 K0 D318 Frequency

DMOVP
Frequency
Head Number Comparison control
device of lines source mode
FNC 55 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ S‚ M8132
DHSZ

PLS M10

Pulse quantity
(K0 specifies
continuous Pulse
Frequency output.) output
M10
FNC 57 D8132 K0 Y000
DPLSY

384
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.6 FNC 55 – HSZ / High Speed Counter Zone Compare

11
Output pulse characteristics

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Output pulse
frequency (Hz)

500
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
300
200 13
100

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
0
0 20 600 700 800
→ Current value of C251

1) Write prescribed data in advance to data registers constructing the table as shown in this program
example.
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
2) The output frequency of the PLSY instruction remains in the value (D303, D302) until the current value of
a high speed counter specified in S becomes equivalent to (D301, D300). (D302 specifies low-order
16 bits. D303 specifies high-order 16 bits, but is always "0".)
3) The operation in the 2nd line is started after that, and then the operation in each line is executed in turn.
4) When the operation in the last line is completed, the complete flag M8133 turns ON. The program 15
execution returns to the 1st line, and the operation is repeated.

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
5) For stopping the operation in the last line, set the frequency in the last table to K0.
6) When the command input is set to OFF, the pulse output turns OFF and the table counter D8131 is reset.
7) After DHSZ instruction is first executed, creation of the table is completed at the END instruction. The
DHSZ instruction becomes valid after that. 16
8) Accordingly, the contact of PLS M10 is used so that the PLSY instruction is executed from the second

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
scan after the command input has been set to ON.

Data can be written to the table in a program as shown in this example or directly using keys in peripheral
equipment.
1) M8132 17
This is the special auxiliary relay for declaring the frequency control mode

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
2) D8132
In the frequency control mode, the frequency set in the table is received by D8132 sequentially according
to the table counter count D8131.
3) D8134 (low-order) and D8135 (high-order)
In the frequency control mode, the comparison data in the table is received sequentially according to the 18
table counter count.
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

Cautions
1) DHSZ instruction can be used only once.
2) With regard to the DHSCS (FNC 53), DHSCR (FNC 54), DHSZ (FNC 55) and DHSCT (FNC280)
instructions used for other purposes, up to 32 instructions including the DHSZ instruction can be driven at
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

one time.
3) Because the table is created when the END instruction is executed, it is necessary to delay execution of
the PLSY (FNC 57) instruction until creation of the table is completed.
4) Do not change the data table while the DHSZ instruction is driven.
5) In the frequency control mode, simultaneous output to Y000 to Y001 is not permitted. 20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

385
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.7 FNC 56 – SPD / Speed Detection

13.7 FNC 56 – SPD / Speed Detection

Outline
This instruction counts the input pulse for a specified period of time as interrupt input.
The function of this instruction varies depending on the version.

1. Instruction format

FNC 56 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D SPD 7 steps SPD

Continuous
13 steps DSPD
Continuous
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Device number of pulse input (X) Bit

S2 Time data (ms) or word device number storing the data 16- or 32-bit binary

D Head word device number storing the pulse density data 16- or 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
System Special Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification Index Constant Pointer
User Unit Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 S1 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

S1: X000 to X007 can be specified.

S2: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

386
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.7 FNC 56 – SPD / Speed Detection

11
Explanation of function and operation

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. 16-bit operation (SPD)
The input pulse S1 is counted only for S2 × 1 ms. The measured value is stored in D , the present
value is stored in D +1, and the remaining time is stored in D +2 (ms).
By repeating this operation, the measured value D will store the pulse density (which is proportional to 12
the rotation speed).

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Command
input
FNC 56
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
SPD

1) Timing chart
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Command
input The command contact is set to ON.

S1 ‚

D ‚ +1
14
D‚

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Current value D ‚ + 1 counts "OFF → ON" operation of S1 ‚ .
Measured S2 ‚ ms later, the counting result is stored to D ‚ .
value
Accompanied by this operation, D ‚ +1 is reset, and
then counting of the "OFF → ON" operation of S1 ‚ is

S2 ‚ ms S2 ‚ ms started again. 15
Counting time Counting time

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
S2 ‚ ms D ‚ + 2 is used to measure the remaining time.

D ‚ +2
Remaining time (ms) 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
2) The measured value D is in proportion to the number of rotations as shown below:

17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Input X000

N(rpm)
60 D
18
3
N= × 10 (r/min)
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

nt
t: Measurement time duration specified as S2 (ms)
Proximity switch
"n" pulses/rotation

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

387
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.7 FNC 56 – SPD / Speed Detection

2. 32-bit operation (DSPD)

The input pulse S1 is counted only for [ S2 +1, S2 ] x 1 ms. The measured value is stored in
[ D +1, D ], the present value is stored in [ D +3, D +2], and the remaining time is stored in
[ D +5, D +4] (ms).
By repeating this operation, the measured value [ D +1, D ] will store the pulse density (which is
proportional to the rotation speed).
Command
input
FNC 56
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
DSPD

1) Timing chart
Command
input The command contact is set to ON.

S1 ‚
[ D ‚ +1, D ‚ ]
Measured value
[ D ‚ +3, D ‚ +2] [ D ‚ +3, D ‚ +2] counts "OFF → ON" operation
Current value
of S1‚ . [ S2‚ +1, S2‚ ] ms later, the counting result is
stored to [ D ‚ +1, D ‚ ].
Accompanied by this operation, [ D ‚ +3, D ‚ +2] is
reset, and then counting of the "OFF → ON" operation of
[ S2‚ +1, S2‚ ] ms [ S2‚ +1, S2‚ ] ms S1‚ is started again.
Counting time Counting time

[ D ‚ +5, D ‚ +4] is used to measure the remaining

[ S2‚ +1, S2‚ ] ms
time.

[ D ‚ +5, D ‚ +4]
Remaining time (ms)

2) The measured value [ D +1, D ] is in proportion to the number of rotations as shown below:

Input X000

N(rpm)
60 [ +1, ]
N= × 103 (r/min)
nt
t: Measurement time duration specified as [ +1, ] (ms)
Proximity switch
"n" pulses/rotation

388
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.7 FNC 56 – SPD / Speed Detection

11
Cautions

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. Input specifications of the input S1
• An input device X000 to X007 specified as S1 cannot overlap the following functions or instructions:
- High speed counter
- Input interrupt
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
- Pulse catch
- DSZR instruction
- DVIT instruction
- ZRN instruction
• For one input, this instruction can be used only once. 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
• The maximum frequency of turning the inputs X000 to X007 ON and OFF is shown below:
- FX3U/FX3UC PLC
Maximum input frequency
Used input number FX3U PLC
FX3UC PLC
Main unit FX3U-4HSX-ADP 14
X000 to X005 *1 *1
100 kHz 100 kHz

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
200 kHz
X006,X007 10 kHz 10 kHz

*1. When receiving pulses within the response frequency range of 50 k to 100 kHz, perform the following
actions:
- Make sure that the wiring length is 5 m or less. 15
- Connect a bleeder resistor of 1.5 kΩ (1 W or more) to the input terminal, and make sure that the

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
load current in the open collector transistor output of the external equipment is 20 mA or more.
- FX3G PLCs
Maximum input
Used input number frequency
FX3G PLC 16
X000,X001,X003,X004

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
60 kHz
X002,X005,X006,X007 10 kHz

2. Occupied devices
1) When using the 16-bit operation
Three devices are occupied from a device specified in D .
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
2) When using the 32-bit operation
Six devices are occupied from a device specified in D .

3. When a word device is specified as S2 .

If the word device value is changed while the instruction is being executed, the change affects the operation
in every measurement cycle.
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

Function change depending on the version

The function of the FNC 56 instruction varies depending on the PLC version shown in the table below.
Applicable version
FX3G FX3U FX3UC
Item Outline of function 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

Ver.1.00 or later Ver.2.20 or later Ver.2.20 or later Addition of 32-bit instruction 32-bit operations (DSPD) are enabled.

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

389
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.8 FNC 57 – PLSY / Pulse Y Output

13.8 FNC 57 – PLSY / Pulse Y Output

Outline
This instruction generates a pulse signal.
→ For the frequency control mode, refer to Subsection 13.6.3.

1. Instruction format

FNC 57 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D PLSY 7 steps PLSY
Continuous
13 steps DPLSY
Continuous
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Output pulse frequency 16- or 32-bit binary

S2 Number of output pulses 16- or 32-bit binary

D Device number (Y) from which pulses are output Bit

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
System Special Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification Index Constant Pointer
User Unit Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3 3 3

D S1 3

S1: Specify a transistor output on the main unit or Y000 or Y001 on a special high speed output adapter*1.
S2: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
*1. High-speed output special adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (PLSY)
A pulse train of frequency S1 is output in the quantity S2 from the output (Y) D .
Command S2 ‚ Pulse quantity
input
FNC 57
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ D‚
PLSY
S1 ‚ Frequency

• Specify the frequency in S1 .

Allowable setting range: 1 to 32767 (Hz)
• Specify the generated pulse quantity in S2 .
Allowable setting range: 1 to 32767 (PLS)
• Specify the output (Y) number from which pulses are to be output in D .
Allowable setting range: Y000, Y001

390
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.8 FNC 57 – PLSY / Pulse Y Output

11
2. 32-bit operation (DPLSY)

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
A pulse train at the frequency [ S1 +1, S1 ] is output by the quantity [ S2 +1, S2 ] from the output (Y)
D .

Command [ S2 ‚ + 1, S2 ‚ Pulse quantity ]

input
FNC 57
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ D‚
12
DPLSY

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
[ S1 ‚ + 1, S1 ‚ Frequency ]

• Specify the frequency in [ S1 +1, S1 ].

- When special high speed output adapters are used
Allowable setting range: 1 to 200,000 (Hz) 13
- When the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC main unit is used

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Allowable setting range: 1 to 100,000 (Hz)
• Specify the generated pulse quantity in [ S2 +1, S2 ].
Allowable setting range: 1 to 2,147,483,647 (PLS)
• Specify the output (Y) number from which pulses are output in D .
Allowable setting range: Y000, Y001
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
→ For the method to output pulses without any limitation,
refer to the program example later.

Related devices
1. Instruction execution complete flag 15
The instruction execution complete flag M8029 used for PLSY instruction can be used also for other

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
instructions. When using other instructions, setting the M8029 flag to ON or OFF, or using two or more PLSY
instructions, make sure to use each M8029 flag just after an instruction to be monitored.
→ For the instruction execution complete flag use method,
refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Device Name Description 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
ON: Generation of specified number of pulses is completed.
Instruction execution
M8029 OFF: Generation of pulses is paused before the specified number of pulses is
complete
reached or the continuous pulse generation operation is stopped.

Command Command
input 1
FNC 57
input 1
FNC 57
17
K1000 K0 Y000 K1000 K0 Y000

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
PLSY PLSY
Command
M8029 input 2
FNC 57 K1000 K0 Y001
DPLSY
Command
input 1 M8029
Command
input 2
° Changes by DPSLY
18
FNC 57 K1000 K0 Y000 Command instruction corresponding to
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

DPLSY input 2 M8029 the command input 2.

M8029

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

391
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.8 FNC 57 – PLSY / Pulse Y Output

2. Monitoring the current number of generated pulses

The number of pulses output from Y000 or Y001 is stored in the following special data registers:
Device
High Low Description Contents of data
order order
Accumulated number of pulses Accumulated number of pulses output from Y000 by PLSY and PLSR
D8141 D8140
output from Y000 instructions
Accumulated number of pulses Accumulated number of pulses output from Y001 by PLSY and PLSR
D8143 D8142
output from Y001 instructions
Total accumulated number of
Total accumulated number of pulses output from Y000 and Y001 by
D8137 D8136 pulses output from Y000 and
PLSY and PLSR instructions
Y001

The contents of each data register can be cleared using the following program:
Command
input
FNC 12 Low-order device shown in
K0
DMOV table above

3. How to stop the pulse output

• When the command input is set to OFF, the pulse generation is immediately stopped. When the command
input is set to ON again, pulse generation operation restarts from the beginning.
• When the special auxiliary relays (M) shown below are set to ON, the pulse output is stopped.
Device
Description
FX3G FX3U•FX3UC
M8145,M8349 M8349 Immediately stops pulse output from Y000.
M8146,M8359 M8359 Immediately stops pulse output from Y001.

To restart pulse output, set the device (FX3G : M8145, M8146, M8349, M8359
FX3U/FX3UC : M8349, M8359) corresponding to the output signal to OFF, and then drive the pulse output
instruction again.

Cautions

1. When a word device is specified as S1 or S2

When the value of the word device is changed while the instruction is executed, the following operation
results:
• When the data in S1 is changed, the output frequency changes accordingly.
• When the data in S2 is changed, the change (new value) becomes valid the next time the instruction is
driven.

2. Frequency S1
When using transistor outputs in the main unit, set the output frequency S1 to "100,000 Hz" or less.
If the load is operated using pulses at a frequency higher than 100,000 Hz, the PLC may be damaged.

3. Pulse output
• Only a transistor output on the main unit or Y000 or Y001 on a special high speed output adapter*1 can be
specified in D .
When using the PLSY (FNC 57) instruction with a relay output type FX3U PLC, a special high speed output
adapter is required.
*1. High-speed output special adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC.
• The duration of the ON/OFF pulses is 50% (ON = 50%, OFF = 50%).
• The pulse output is controlled by the dedicated hardware not affected by the sequence program (operation
cycle).
• If the command input is set to OFF during continuous pulse output, the output from D turns OFF.

392
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.8 FNC 57 – PLSY / Pulse Y Output

11
4. Handling of pulse output terminals in the FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC series main units

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
The outputs Y000 and Y001 are the high
speed response type. Item Description
When using a pulse output instruction or Operating voltage range 5 to 24V DC
positioning instruction, adjust the load current
Operating current range 10 to 100 mA
of the open collector transistor output to
about 10 to 100 mA (5 to 24V DC). Output frequency 100 kHz or less
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
When the load is smaller, connect a dummy Equipment PLC
resistor in parallel to the outside of a used load Dummy (transistor output)
resistor resistor [sink output]
output terminal (Y000 or Y001) as shown in External
the circuit diagram below so that the power
specified current shown above flows in the supply
Input circuit
Y000 13
output transistor.

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
COM1

5. Cautions on using special high speed output adapters

1) Outputs of special high speed output adapters work as differential line drivers. 14
2) Set the pulse output type setting switch in a special high speed output adapter to the "pulse chain +

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
direction" (PLSxDIR) side.
If the switch is set to the "forward rotation pulse chain reverse rotation pulse chain" (FPxRP) side, normal
operations are disabled. The pulse output destination changes depending on the PLC output status as
shown in the table below.
Pulse output Output affecting
Operation
15
destination operation

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
While Y004 is ON, pulses are output from Y000 in the high speed output adapter.
D = Y000 Y004 While Y004 is OFF, pulses are output from Y004 in the high speed output
adapter.
While Y005 is ON, pulses are output from Y001 in the high speed output adapter.
D = Y001 Y005 While Y005 is OFF, pulses are output from Y005 in the high speed output
adapter.
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
3) Set the pulse output type setting switch while the PLC is stopped or while the power is OFF.
Do not manipulate the pulse output form setting switch while pulses are being output.
4) When special high speed output adapters are connected, the same output numbers in the main unit are
assigned as shown in the table below.
Only wire the appropriate output terminals. 17
Outputs in special high speed output adapters and the main unit operate as shown below.

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Assignment of output numbers in special high speed output adapters
Output number
Status of output form Setting name in each
Signal name 1st unit 2nd unit
setting switch positioning instruction
1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis 18
Forward rotation
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

Pulse output destination Y000 Y001 Y002 Y003

pulse chain (FP)
"FPxRP" side
Reverse rotation
Rotation direction signal Y004 Y005 Y006 Y007
pulse chain (RP)
Pulse chain Pulse output destination Y000 Y001 Y002 Y003
"PLSxDIR" side
Direction Rotation direction signal Y004 Y005 Y006 Y007 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

Output operation
Output operation
While instruction is activated, relevant output is ON. (LED is also ON.)
Relay output type main unit
Use a special high speed adapter.
Operated.
20
Special high speed output adapter
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

Set the output frequency to "200kHz" or less.

Operated.
Transistor output type main unit
Set the output frequency to "100kHz" or less.

393
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.8 FNC 57 – PLSY / Pulse Y Output

6. Others
1) Types of pulse output, positioning and other relevant instructions and their target output numbers
Classification Instruction Instruction name Target output numbers
PLSY(FNC 57) Pulse Y output Y000,Y001
Pulse output
PLSR(FNC 59) Acceleration/deceleration setup Y000,Y001
DSZR(FNC150) DOG search zero return Y000,Y001,Y002*1,Y003*2
DVIT(FNC151)*3 Interrupt positioning Y000,Y001,Y002,Y003*2
ZRN(FNC156) Zero return Y000,Y001,Y002*1,Y003*2
Positioning
PLSV(FNC157) Variable speed pulse output Y000,Y001,Y002*1,Y003*2
DRVI(FNC158) Drive to increment Y000,Y001,Y002*1,Y003*2
DRVA(FNC159) Drive to absolute Y000,Y001,Y002*1,Y003*2
High speed
processing
PWM(FNC 58) Pulse width modulation Y000,Y001,Y002*1,Y003*2

*1. Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is
connected.
*2. The pulse output destination Y003 can be specified only when two special high speed output adapters
are connected to an FX3U PLC.
*3. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
2) When using the same output relay (Y000 or Y001) in several instructions.
While a pulse output monitor (BUSY/READY) flag is ON a pulse output instruction and positioning
instruction for the same output relay cannot be executed.
While a pulse output monitor flag is ON even after the instruction drive contact is set to OFF, a pulse
output instruction or positioning instruction for the same output relay cannot be executed.
Before executing such an instruction, wait until the pulse output monitor flag turns OFF and one or more
operation cycles pass.
Pulse output destination device Pulse output monitor flag
Y000 M8340
Y001 M8350

3) "Frequency control mode" in which DHSZ (FNC 55) and PLSY (FNC 57) instructions are combined can
be used only once in a program.

Program example (when outputting pulses without any limitation)

When S2 is set to K0, pulses are output without any limitation.
Command No limitation (K0)
input
FNC 57 K1000 K0 Y000
DPLSY Y000
1000Hz

394
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.9 FNC 58 – PWM / Pulse Width Modulation

11
13.9 FNC 58 – PWM / Pulse Width Modulation

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction outputs pulses with a specified period and ON duration.
12
1. Instruction format

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC 58 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

PWM Continuous
7 steps PWM Operation −
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Output pulse width (ms) 16-bit binary

S2 Period (ms) 16-bit binary

D Device number (Y) from which pulses are to be output Bit

14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
System Special Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification Index Constant Pointer
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify
User Unit
K H
Number ter String
E "…" P
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3 3 3

D S1 3

S1: Specify transistor output Y000, Y001, or Y002 on the main unit or Y000, Y001, Y002, or Y003 on a 16
special high speed output adapter*1.

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
S2: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
*1. Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLCs.
*2. High-speed output special adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC.

Explanation of function and operation 17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1. 16-bit operation (PWM)
Pulses whose ON pulse width is S1 ms are output in periods of S2 ms.
Command
input t
FNC 58
PWM
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ D‚ 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

Pulse width Period T0

t T0

• Specify the pulse width "t" in S1 .

Allowable setting range: 0 to 32767 ms
19
• Specify the period "T0" in S2 .
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

Allowable setting range: 1 to 32767 ms

• Specify the output (Y) number from which pulses are to be output in D .
Allowable setting range: Y000, Y001, Y002, Y003

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

395
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.9 FNC 58 – PWM / Pulse Width Modulation

Cautions
1. Setting the pulse width and period
Make sure that the pulse width S1 and period S2 satisfy the relationship " S1 ≤ S2 ".

2. Pulse output
• Only the following outputs can be specified in D according to the system configuration.
- When using special high speed output adapters : Y000, Y001, Y002*2, or Y003*2
*1

- When transistor outputs in the main unit are used: Y000, Y001, or Y002*3
*1. High-speed output special adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC.
When using the PWM (FNC 58) instruction with a relay output type FX3U PLC, a special high speed
output adapter is required.
*2. When specifying Y002 or Y003 on a special high speed output adapter, a second special high speed
output adapter is required.
*3. Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.
• The pulse output is controlled by interrupt processing not affected by the sequence program (operation
cycle).
• If the command input is set to OFF, the output from D turns OFF.
• While a pulse output monitor (BUSY/READY) flag is ON, a pulse output or positioning instruction for the
same output relay cannot be executed.
While a pulse output monitor flag is ON even after the instruction drive contact is set to OFF, a pulse output
or positioning instruction for the same output relay cannot be executed.
Before executing a pulse output or positioning instruction, wait until the pulse output monitor flag turns OFF
and one or more operation cycles pass.
Pulse output destination device Pulse output monitor flag
Y000 M8340
Y001 M8350
Y002 M8360
Y003 M8370

396
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.9 FNC 58 – PWM / Pulse Width Modulation

11
3. Cautions on using special high speed output adapters

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1) Outputs of special high speed output adapters work as differential line drivers.
2) Set the pulse output type setting switch of a special high speed output adapter to the "pulse chain +
direction" (PLSxDIR) side.
If the switch is set to the "forward rotation pulse chain reverse rotation pulse chain" (FPxRP) side, normal
operations are not possible. The pulse output destination changes depending on the output status as 12
shown in the table below.

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Pulse output Output affecting
Operation
destination operation
While Y004 is ON, pulses are output from Y000 on the high speed output
adapter.
D = Y000 Y004
While Y004 is OFF, pulses are output from Y004 on the high speed output 13
adapter.

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
While Y005 is ON, pulses are output from Y001 on the high speed output
adapter.
D = Y001 Y005
While Y005 is OFF, pulses are output from Y005 on the high speed output
adapter.
While Y006 is ON, pulses are output from Y002 on the high speed output
adapter. 14
D = Y002 Y006
While Y006 is OFF, pulses are output from Y006 on the high speed output

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
adapter.
While Y007 is ON, pulses are output from Y003 on the high speed output
adapter.
D = Y003 Y007
While Y007 is OFF, pulses are output from Y007 on the high speed output
adapter.
15
3) Set the pulse output type setting switch while the PLC is stopped or while the power is OFF.

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Do not adjust the pulse output type setting switch while pulses are being output.

16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

397
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.9 FNC 58 – PWM / Pulse Width Modulation

4) When special high speed output adapters are connected, the same output numbers in the main unit are
assigned as shown in the table below.
Only wire the appropriate output terminals.
Outputs in special high speed output adapters and the main unit operate as shown below.

Assignment of output numbers in special high speed output adapters

Output number
Setting status of output Setting name in each
Signal name 1st unit 2nd unit
form setting switch positioning instruction
1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis
Forward rotation
Pulse output destination Y000 Y001 Y002 Y003
pulse chain (FP)
"FPxRP" side
Reverse rotation
Rotation direction signal Y004 Y005 Y006 Y007
pulse chain (RP)
Pulse chain Pulse output destination Y000 Y001 Y002 Y003
"PLSxDIR" side
Direction Rotation direction signal Y004 Y005 Y006 Y007

Output operation
Output operation
Do not use the PWM (FNC 58) instruction with relay-output type main units.
Relay output type main unit (Considerable output response delay may be generated, chattering may occur
in contacts, or the contact life may be shortened.)
Set the output frequency to "200kHz" or less.
Special high speed output adapter
Use a transistor output type main unit.
Transistor output type main unit Set the output frequency to "100kHz" or less.

Program example
When the contents of D10 are changed in the range from "0" to "50" in the program example shown below,
the average output from Y000 will be in the range from 0 to 100%.
In this program example the FX3U series main unit (sink output) is used. For wiring details, refer to the
following manual.
→ FX3G Hardware Edition
→ FX3U Hardware Edition
→ FX3UC Hardware Edition

X0 D10
FNC 58 D10 K50 Y000 Y000
PWM

50ms

Example of smoothing circuit

510Ω R
1kΩ
0V 24V (1kΩ)
PLC 5V P + 10V
1kΩ 22Ω E e V
12V C
1kΩ 470µF

1kΩ
COM1 Y000 Y001 Y002 Y003

R>P
τ = P(kΩ) ° C(µF) = 470ms >> T0
The time constant of the filter should be considerably larger than the pulse cycle T0.
The ripple value "∆e" in the mean output current "e" is approximately "∆e/e ≤ T0/τ"

398
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.10 FNC 59 – PLSR / Acceleration/Deceleration Setup

11
13.10 FNC 59 – PLSR / Acceleration/Deceleration Setup

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This pulse output instruction has the acceleration/deceleration function.
12
1. Instruction format

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC 59 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D PLSR 9 steps PLSR
Continuous
17 steps DPLSR
Continuous
Operation Operation

2. Set data
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Maximum frequency (Hz) 16- or 32-bit binary

S2 Total number of output pulses (PLS) 16- or 32-bit binary

S3 Acceleration/deceleration time (ms) 16- or 32-bit binary

14
D Device number (Y) from which pulses are to be output Bit

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
System Special Real Charac-
and
Type
System User Digit Specification
User Unit
Index Constant
Number ter String
Pointer
15
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3 3 3

S3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3 3 3

D S1 3 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
S1: Specify a transistor output on the main unit or Y000 or Y001 on a special high speed output adapter*1.
S2: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
*1. High-speed output special adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC.

Explanation of function and operation 17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1. 16-bit operation (PLSR)
Pulses are output from output (Y) D by the specified number S2 with acceleration/deceleration to the
maximum frequency S1 over the time S3 (ms).
Pulse frequency
Command
input
FNC 59
(Hz) Maximum frequency S1 ‚ 18
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ S3 ‚ D‚
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

PLSR
Maximum Total Acceleration/ Output
frequency number deceleration number
Total number of
(HZ) of output time (Y000, output pulses
pulses (ms) Y001) S2 ‚ (PLS)
(PLS)

S1 : Maximum frequency (Hz)

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

Allowable setting range: 10 to 32767 (Hz)

S2 : Total number of output pulses (PLS) Acceleration/ Acceleration/
S3 ‚ deceleration time S3 ‚ deceleration time
Allowable setting range
FX3G : 110 to 32767(PLS)
FX3U/X3UC : 1 to 32767(PLS)
S3 : Acceleration/deceleration time (ms) 20
Allowable setting range: 50 to 5000 (ms)
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

D : Pulse output number

Allowable setting range: Y000, Y001

399
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.10 FNC 59 – PLSR / Acceleration/Deceleration Setup

2. 32-bit operation (DPLSR)

Pulses are output from the output (Y) D by the specified number [ S2 +1, S2 ] with acceleration/
deceleration to the maximum frequency [ S1 +1, S1 ] for the time [ S3 +1, S3 ](ms).
Command
input
FNC 59
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ S3 ‚ D‚
DPLSR
Maximum Total Acceleration/ Output
frequency number deceleration number
(HZ) of output time (Y000,
pulses (ms) Y001)
(PLS)

[ S1 +1, S1 ]: Maximum frequency (Hz)

- When special high speed output adapters are used
Allowable setting range: 10 to 200,000 (Hz)
- When the FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC main unit is used
Allowable setting range: 1 to 100,000 (Hz)
[ S2 +1, S2 ]: Total number of output pulses (PLS)
Allowable setting range
FX3G : 110 to 2,147,483,647 (PLS)
FX3U/FX3UC : 1 to 2,147,483,647 (PLS)
[ S3 +1, S3 ]: Acceleration/deceleration time (ms)
Allowable setting range: 50 to 5000 (ms)
D : Pulse output number
Allowable setting range: Y000, Y001

3. Pulse output specifications

• Simple positioning (with the acceleration/deceleration function)
The operation pattern is as shown below:

S1
Maximum frequency (Hz)

16-bit operation: 10 to 32767 Hz
Pulse frequency (Hz)
32-bit operation: 10 to 200,000 Hz

S2
Total number of output pulses

(PLS)

16-bit operation
FX3G : 110 to 32767 (PLS)
FX3U/FX3UC: 1 to 32767 (PLS)

32-bit operation
FX3G : 110 to 2,147,483,647 (PLS)
FX3U/FX3UC: 1 to 2,147,483,647 (PLS)

S3
S3

Acceleration/ Acceleration/
deceleration time deceleration time

50 to 5000ms 50 to 5000ms

• Output processing
The pulse output is controlled by the dedicated hardware regardless of the operation cycle.
• Data change while the instruction is executed
Even if operands are overwritten while the instruction is executed, such changes are not reflected
immediately. The changes become valid the next time the instruction is driven.

400
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.10 FNC 59 – PLSR / Acceleration/Deceleration Setup

11
Related devices

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. Instruction execution complete flag
→ For the instruction execution complete flag use method,
refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Device Name Description 12
OFF: The input command is OFF, or pulses are being output. (This flag does not turn

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Instruction execution ON if the pulse output is interrupted in the middle of output.)
M8029
complete
ON: Output of the number of pulses set in S2 is completed.

2. Monitoring the number of generated pulses

The number of pulses output from Y000 or Y001 is stored in the following special data registers: 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Device
High Low Description Contents of data
order order
Accumulated number of pulses Accumulated number of pulses output from Y000 by PLSY and PLSR
D8141 D8140
output from Y000 instructions
Accumulated number of pulses Accumulated number of pulses output from Y001 by PLSY and PLSR
14
D8143 D8142

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
output from Y001 instructions
Total accumulated number of
Total accumulated number of pulses output from Y000 and Y001 by
D8137 D8136 pulses output from Y000 and
PLSY and PLSR instructions
Y001

The contents of each data register can be cleared using the following program:
Command
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
input
FNC 12 Low-order device shown in
K0
DMOV above table

3. How to stop the pulse output

• When the command input is set to OFF, the pulse generation is immediately stopped. When the command 16
input is set to ON again, pulse generation operation restarts from the beginning.

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
• When the special auxiliary relays (M) shown below are set to ON, the pulse output is stopped.
Device
Description
FX3G FX3U•FX3UC
M8145,M8349
M8146,M8359
M8349
M8359
Immediately stops pulse output from Y000.
Immediately stops pulse output from Y001.
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
To restart pulse output pulses again, set the device (FX3G : M8145, M8146, M8349, M8359
FX3U/FX3UC : M8349, M8359) corresponding to the output signal to OFF, and then drive the pulse output
instruction again.

Cautions 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

1. Frequency S1
When using transistor outputs on the main unit, set the output frequency S1 to "100,000 Hz" or less.
If the load is operated using pulses at a frequency higher than 100,000 Hz from transistor outputs in the main
unit, the PLC may be damaged.

2. Pulse output 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

• Only a transistor output on the main unit or Y000 or Y001 on a special high speed output adapter*1 can be
specified in D .
*1. High-speed output special adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC.
When using the PLSR (FNC 59) instruction with a relay output type FX3U PLC, a special high speed
output adapter is required.
• The duration of the ON/OFF pulses is 50% (ON = 50%, OFF = 50%). 20
• The pulse output is controlled by the dedicated hardware not affected by the sequence program (operation
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

cycle).
• If the command input is set to OFF during continuous pulse output, the output from D turns OFF.

401
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.10 FNC 59 – PLSR / Acceleration/Deceleration Setup

3. Handling of pulse output terminals in the FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC series main units
The outputs Y000 and Y001 are the high speed response type.
When using a pulse output instruction or positioning instruction, adjust the load current of the open collector
transistor output to about 10 to 100 mA (5 to 24V DC).
Item Description
Operating voltage range 5 to 24V DC
Operating current range 10 to 100 mA
Output frequency 100 kHz or less

When the load is smaller, connect a dummy resistor in parallel to the outside of a used output terminal (Y000
or Y001) as shown in the circuit diagram below so that the specified current shown above flows in the output
transistor.

Equipment PLC
load Dummy (transistor output)
resistor resistor [sink output]
External
power
supply Y000
Input circuit
COM1

4. Cautions on special high speed output adapters

1) Outputs of special high speed output adapters work as differential line drivers.
2) Set the pulse output type setting switch in a special high speed output adapter to the "pulse chain +
direction" (PLSxDIR) side.
If the switch is set to the "forward rotation pulse chain reverse rotation pulse chain" (FPxRP) side, normal
operations are disabled. The pulse output destination changes depending on the PLC output status as
shown in the table below.
Pulse output Output affecting
Operation
destination operation
While Y004 is ON, pulses are output from Y000 in the high speed output
adapter.
D = Y000 Y004
While Y004 is OFF, pulses are output from Y004 in the high speed output
adapter.
While Y005 is ON, pulses are output from Y001 in the high speed output
adapter.
D = Y001 Y005
While Y005 is OFF, pulses are output from Y005 in the high speed output
adapter.

3) Set the pulse output type setting switch while the PLC is stopped or while the power is OFF.
Do not manipulate the pulse output type setting switch while pulses are being output.
4) When special high speed output adapters are connected, the same output numbers in the main unit are
assigned as shown in the table below.
Only wire the appropriate output terminals.
Outputs in special high speed output adapters and the main unit operate as shown below.

Assignment of output numbers in special high speed output adapter

Output number
Setting status of output Setting name in each
Signal name 1st unit 2nd unit
form setting switch positioning instruction
1st axis 2nd axis 3rd axis 4th axis
Forward rotation
Pulse output destination Y000 Y001 Y002 Y003
pulse chain (FP)
"FPxRP" side
Reverse rotation
Rotation direction signal Y004 Y005 Y006 Y007
pulse chain (RP)
Pulse chain Pulse output destination Y000 Y001 Y002 Y003
"PLSxDIR" side
Direction Rotation direction signal Y004 Y005 Y006 Y007

402
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 13 High Speed Processing – FNC 50 to FNC 59
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 13.10 FNC 59 – PLSR / Acceleration/Deceleration Setup

11
Output operation

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Output operation
While instruction is active, associated output is ON. (LED is also ON.)
Relay output type main unit
Use a special high speed adapter.
Special high speed output adapter Set the output frequency to "200kHz" or less.
Transistor output type main unit Set the output frequency to "100kHz" or less. 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
5. Others
1) Types of pulse output, positioning and other relevant instructions and their target output numbers
Classification Instruction Instruction name Target output numbers

Pulse output
PLSY(FNC 57) Pulse Y output Y000,Y001
13
PLSR(FNC 59) Acceleration/deceleration setup Y000,Y001

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
DSZR(FNC150) DOG search zero return Y000,Y001,Y002*1,Y003*2
DVIT(FNC151)*3 Interrupt positioning Y000,Y001,Y002,Y003*2
ZRN(FNC156) Zero return Y000,Y001,Y002*1,Y003*2
Positioning
PLSV(FNC157) Variable speed pulse output Y000,Y001,Y002*1,Y003*2 14
DRVI(FNC158) Drive to increment Y000,Y001,Y002*1,Y003*2

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
DRVA(FNC159) Drive to absolute Y000,Y001,Y002*1,Y003*2
High speed
processing
PWM(FNC 58) Pulse width modulation Y000,Y001,Y002*1,Y003*2

*1. Y002 (pulse output destination) cannot be specified when the 14-point or 24-point type FX3G PLC is 15
connected.

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
*2. The pulse output destination Y003 can be specified only when two special high speed output adapters
are connected to an FX3U PLC.
*3. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
2) When using the same output relay (Y000 or Y001) in several instructions.
While a pulse output monitor (BUSY/READY) flag is ON, a pulse output or positioning instruction for the 16
same output relay cannot be executed.

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
While a pulse output monitor flag is ON, even after the instruction drive contact is set to OFF, a pulse
output or positioning instruction for the same output relay cannot be executed.
Before executing a pulse output or positioning instruction, wait until the pulse output monitor flag turns
OFF and one or more operation cycles pass.
Pulse output destination device Pulse output monitor flag 17
Y000 M8340

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Y001 M8350

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

403
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

14. Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69

FNC 60 to FNC 69 provide handy instructions which achieve complicated control in a minimum sequence
program.

FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

Section
60 IST IST S D1 D2 Initial State
14.1

Section
61 SER SER S1 S2 D n Search a Data Stack
14.2

Section
62 ABSD ABSD S1 S2 D n Absolute drum sequencer
14.3

Section
63 INCD INCD S1 S2 D n Incremental drum sequencer
14.4

Section
64 TTMR TTMR D n Teaching Timer
14.5

Section
65 STMR STMR S m D Special Timer
14.6

Section
66 ALT ALT D Alternate State
14.7

Section
67 RAMP RAMP S1 S2 D n Ramp Variable Value
14.8

Section
68 ROTC ROTC S m1 m2 D Rotary Table Control
14.9

Section
69 SORT SORT S m1 m2 D n SORT Tabulated Data
14.10

404
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State

11
14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction automatically controls the initial state and special auxiliary relays in a step ladder program.
→ For SFC programs and step ladder, refer to Chapter 34.
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1. Instruction format

FNC 60 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

IST 7 steps IST Continuous

−
Operation
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
SS1 ‚ Head bit device number of the selector switch in the operation mode Bit

D1
Smallest state relay number of practical state relays in the automatic mode
Bit 14
( D1 < D2 )

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Largest state relay number of practical state relays in the automatic mode
D2 Bit
( D1 < D2 )

3. Applicable devices

Oper-
Bit Devices Word Devices Others 15
Special Con- Real Charac-

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

SS1 ‚ 3 3 3 S1 3

S S2 3
D21 ‚

D2 S2 3
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
S1: "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLC. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
S2: S20 to S899 and S1000 to S4095

Explanation of function and operation

Command 17
input FNC 60

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
S‚ D1 ‚ D2 ‚
IST

• Specify the head input in the operation mode in S .

Selector switches in the operation mode occupy eight devices from the head device S , and the switch
functions shown in the table below are assigned to each of them.
When X020 is assigned as shown below, it is necessary to set X020 to X024 as rotary switches so that
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

they do not turn ON at the same time.

It is not necessary to wire unused switches, but they cannot be used for any other purpose because they
are occupied by IST instruction.
Source Device number (example) Switch function
S X020 Individual operation
S +1 X021 Return to zero point 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

S +2 X022 Stepping
S +3 X023 Cycle operation
S +4 X024 Continuous operation
S +5 X025 Zero return start
X026 Automatic start
S
S
+6
+7 X027 Stop
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

• Specify the smallest device number of practical state relays in D1 (for the automatic mode).
• Specify the largest device number of practical state relays in D2 (for the automatic mode).

405
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State

1. Control of devices by switch operations (occupied devices)

While the command input is ON, the following devices are automatically switched and controlled. While
the command input is OFF, the devices are not switched.
Device number Operation function Device number Operation function
M8040 STL transfer disable S0 Individual operation initial state
M8041*1 Transfer start S1 Zero return initial state
M8042 Start pulse S2 Automatic operation initial state
*1 Zero return complete
M8043
M8045 All output reset disable
*2 Enable STL monitoring
M8047

*1.Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP.

*2.Set to ON when END instruction is executed.

Do not program the following state relays as general state relays;

Device number Operation function
Occupied for the initial state
S0 to S9 • S0 to S2 are used for individual operation, zero return and automatic operation as shown above.
• S3 to S9 can be used arbitrarily.
S10 to S19 Occupied for zero return

If the devices are switched among individual operation (X020), zero return (X021) and automatic
operation (X022, X023 and X024) while the zero return complete device (M8043) is OFF, all outputs are
set to OFF.
Automatic operation can be started again after zero return is completed.
→ For introducing IST instruction, refer to "14.1.2 Example of IST instruction introduction
(example of workpiece transfer mechanism)".

Cautions

1. Device specified as DS1 and switches to be used

It is not necessary to use all switches for mode selection.
When some switches are not used, leave the corresponding numbers in the unused status. Such numbers
cannot be used for any other purpose.

2. Programming order of IST instruction and STL instruction

• IST instruction should be programmed earlier than a series of STL circuit such as state relays S0 to S2.

3. State relays used for the zero return operation

Use the state relays S10 to S19 for the zero return operation.
In the final state in the zero return operation, set M8043 to ON, and then let it be reset to OFF by itself.

4. Limitation in the number of IST instruction

IST instruction can be used only once in a program.

406
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State

11
14.1.1 IST instruction equivalent circuit

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
The details of special auxiliary relays (M) and initial state relays (S0 to S9) which are automatically controlled
by IST instruction are as shown in the equivalent circuit below. (Refer to the equivalent circuit below for
reference.) This equivalent circuit cannot be programmed.

1. Equivalent circuit 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Continuous
operation Stepping
X024 M8041 X027 X022 operation
M8041 is set to ON when the start button
M8041 is pressed in the automatic mode.
Stop Cycle
X026 Automatic start X023 operation Transfer Especially in the continuous mode,
M8041 holds its status by itself, and is
Continuous
X024 operation
start
reset when the stop button is pressed. 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
X026 Automatic start X020 *1
PLS M8042
X025 Zero return start Individual
operation Start pulse

X020 Individual operation

M8040
M8040 is set to ON in the stepping
mode, and set to OFF every time the
14
Zero start button is pressed.
X021 return X027Stop

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
M8042 STL transfer
disable In the zero return operation or cycle
Start pulse operation, M8040 holds its status by
X022Stepping operation itself when the stop button is pressed,
and is reset when the start button is
X023Cycle X027Stop pressed.
operation
15
M8002 Initial pulse

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
M8040 Self-holding

M8000 RUN monitor

M8047
*1 Enable STL monitoring
16
Individual M8044
X020 operation

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
M8043 The initial state is switched according to
S 0 each mode input, and M8043 is
Zero point
condition Zero return controlled at the same time.
*1 complete However, it is necessary to control
X021 Zero return X025
RST M8043 M8044 and M8043 in user programs
S 1 also.
Zero return
*1
start Zero return
complete signal is
17
X022 to X024 M8043 M8041 reset

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
S 2
Automatic Zero return Transfer start
operation complete
*1. Because the above equivalent circuit is provided only for explanation, it cannot be actually programmed.

2. Switching of the operation mode

When the operation mode is switched among the individual operation, zero return operation and automatic
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

operation, all outputs and conventional states are reset at one time unless the machine is located in the zero
point. (Reset of all outputs*1 is not executed when M8045 is driven.)
S1 M8043
Zero return Switched
X021 Conventional states and
Zero return to X020
S2 corresponding outputs are
Automatic
X022 to X024
complete (individual
operation) reset at one time. 19
M8045

Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

All output reset disable

Individual Switched
operation
X020 to X021 When M8045 is OFF, all
S2 (zero
outputs are reset.
Automatic return
X022 to X024 operation)

Even if the mode is switched from automatic operation to zero return operation while S2 is ON, state relays
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

(except initial state relays) and outputs are not reset.

*1. All outputs: Outputs (Y) not driven by state relays DS1 and outputs (Y) driven by state relays DS1 in
OUT and SET instructions

407
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State

14.1.2 Example of IST instruction introduction (example of workpiece transfer mechanism)

1. Operation mode

Stepping
Mechanism for transferring a workpiece from the
operation X022 point A to the point B using the robot hand
Zero return Zero return Cycle
operation mode operation mode Y003
PB
X021 X023 Rightward Right limit X003
X025 Y004
Left limit X004 Leftward
Individual Continuous Power supply
operation mode operation mode Upper
X020 X024 PB
Leftward limit X002 Moving down
Moving up travel Unclamping
PB PB PB PB
Y002 Y000
X005 X006 X007 Start X026
Rightward Emergency stop
Moving down travel Clamping
PB
Moving Lower
PB PB PB PB
up limit X001
X010 X011 X012 Stop X027

Clamping Y001
Pushbutton switches for individual operations Unclamping Y001
of the robot hand shown in the figure on the right Workpiece
Pushbutton switches for the external circuit to
Point A Point B
turn ON and OFF the load power supply

Operation mode Contents of operation

Individual
operation Each load is turned ON and OFF by an individual pushbutton switch.
Manual mode
mode Zero return
When the pushbutton switch for zero return is pressed, the machine automatically returns to the
operation
zero point.
mode
Stepping
operation Every time the start button is pressed, the machine performs one process.
mode
When the start button is pressed while the machine is located at the zero point, the machine
Cycle performs one cycle of automatic operation and stops at the zero point.
Automatic operation If the stop button is pressed in the middle of one cycle, the machine stops immediately. When
mode mode the start button is pressed after that, the machine performs the continuous operation from the
last position, and automatically stops at the zero point.
When the start button is pressed while the machine is located at the zero point, the machine
Continuous
starts continuous operation.
operation
When the stop button is pressed, the machine finishes the current cycle until the zero point, and
mode
then stops at the zero point.

408
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State

11
2. Transfer mechanism

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Start Left limit X004
X026

(4) Rightward Y003

Zero point 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
(8) Leftward Y004

Upper
Right limit limit
(1) Moving X003 X002
down
Y000
Upper limit X002
(1) Moving down 13
Y000 (7) Moving up

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Lower (3) Moving up Y002
limit Y002
X001 Lower
limit
What is the zero point condition? X001
Clamping Upper limit X002 is ON, left limit Unclamping
X004 is ON and unclamping Y001
(2) Clamping is OFF. (6) Unclamping
14
Y001 ON Y001 OFF

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
The upper left position is regarded as the zero point. The machine transfers a workpiece from the left to the
right in the order "moving down → clamping → moving up → rightward travel → moving down → unclamping
→ moving up → leftward travel."
Double-solenoid type solenoid valves (with two inputs for driving and non-driving) are adopted for moving
down, moving up, leftward travel and rightward travel. Single type solenoid valves (which operate only while 15
the power is ON) are adopted for clamping.

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

409
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State

3. Assignment of mode selection inputs

For using IST instruction, it is necessary to assign inputs having consecutive device numbers as shown below
for mode inputs.
When using non-consecutive inputs or omitting some modes, change the layout by using an auxiliary relay as
the head input for mode specification as shown in the figure below.
- X020: Individual operation mode
- X021: Zero return operation mode
- X022: Stepping operation mode
- X023: Cycle operation mode
- X024: Continuous operation
- X025: Zero return start
- X026: Automatic mode start
- X027: Stop

When only the continuous When only the continuous

When inputs do not have operation mode and zero return operation mode and individual
consecutive device numbers operation mode are used operation mode are used
Example: Example: Example:
X030:Individual operation mode X030:Zero return operation mode X030:Individual operation mode
X035:Zero return operation mode X031:Continuous operation mode X031:Continuous operation mode
X033:Stepping operation mode X032:Automatic mode start zero X032:Automatic mode start
X040:Cycle operation mode return start X033:Stop
X032:Continuous operation mode X033:Stop
X034:Zero return start
X026:Automatic mode start
X041:Stop

X030 M8000 X030

M 0 Individual M 0 Does not M 0 Individual
operation mode operate operation mode
RUN monitor
X035 X030 M8000
Zero return Zero return
M 1 M 1 operation mode M 1
operation mode
X033 M8000
Stepping Does not
M 2 M 2 operate M 2
operation mode
X040
Cycle operation Does not
M 3 mode M 3 operate M 3

X032 X031 X031

Continuous Continuous Continuous
M 4 operation M 4 M 4
operation operation
X034 X032 M8000
M 5 Zero return M 5 Zero return M 5
start start
X026 X032
M 6 Automatic M 6 Automatic M 6 Automatic
mode start mode start mode start
X041 X033 X033
M 7 Stop M 7 Stop M 7 Stop

In this example, M0 is used as the head input for mode specification.

M8000
FNC 60 M 0 S 20 S 29
IST
RUN
monitor

410
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State

11
4. Special auxiliary relay (M) for IST instruction

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Auxiliary relays (M) used in IST instruction are classified into two types. Some auxiliary relays are
automatically controlled by IST instruction itself according to the situation. Other auxiliary relays should be
controlled by a program for preparation of operation or for purpose of control.
1) Special auxiliary relays automatically controlled by IST instruction
a) M8040: STL transfer disable 12
When this special auxiliary relay turns ON, transfer of every state is disabled.

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Individual operation mode:
M8040 is always effective.
Zero return operation mode and cycle operation mode:
When the stop button is pressed, the operation is held until the start button is pressed.
Stepping operation mode:
M8040 is always effective except when the start button is pressed. When the start button is
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
pressed, M8040 is not effective and transfer of states is allowed.
Others: The operation is latched when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN, and reset when
the start button is pressed.
Even in the transfer disabled status, the operation is held for outputs in the states.
b) M8041: Transfer start
This special auxiliary relay allows transfer from the initial state S2 to the next state. 14
Individual operation mode and zero return operation mode:

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
M8041 is not effective.
Stepping operation mode and cycle operation mode:
M8041 is effective only while the start button is pressed and held.
Continuous operation mode:
The operation is latched when the start button is pressed, and cleared when the stop button 15
is pressed.

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
c) M8042: Start pulse
M8042 is activated instantaneously only when the start button is pressed.
d) M8047: Enable STL monitoring
When IST instruction is executed, M8047 is set to ON.
When the M8047 turns ON, STL monitoring becomes valid, and state relay numbers (S0 to S899) in
the ON status are stored in turn in the ascending order of device number to the special auxiliary relays
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
D8040 to D8047.
Up to eight state relay numbers in the ON status can be monitored.
If either state relay is ON, the special auxiliary relay M8046 is set to ON.
2) Auxiliary relays controlled by a sequence program

a) M8043: Zero return complete

→ For details of these controls, refer to the next page.
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Set this special auxiliary relay (M) to ON by a user program when the machine returns to the zero
point in the zero return operation mode.
b) M8044: Zero point condition
Detect the zero point condition of the machine, and drive this special auxiliary relay. This signal is
effective in every mode.
c) M8045: All output reset disable
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

When the mode is switched among individual operation mode, zero return operation mode and
automatic mode, all outputs and operation state relays are reset if the machine is not located at the
zero point.
If M8045 has been set to ON in advance, however, only operation state relays are reset.

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

411
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State

5. Program example
1) Circuit diagram
In the sequence circuit shown below, all areas except shaded areas are standard.
Program the shaded areas according to the contents of control.
a) Initial circuit
While the machine is operating, the operation mode can be switched arbitrarily (among stepping
operation, cycle operation and continuous operation) in the automatic mode.
When the operation mode is switched between the individual operation mode, zero return operation
mode and automatic mode while the machine is operating, all outputs are reset once to assure safety,
after which the following mode becomes valid.
(While M8045 (All output reset disable) is ON, outputs are not reset at all.)

Ladder block Detects that the machine is located at the zero point, and
regards it as the condition to start the automatic mode.

X004 X002 Y001

M8044 Zero point condition
Upper
Left limit limit Unclamping

M8000
FNC 60
IST X020 S 20 S 27 Initial state
RUN
monitor

b) Individual operation mode

Programming is not required when the individual operation mode is not provided.
SFC block
State number
Clamping
X012 Clamping command
0 SET Y001
Unclamping
X007 command
Initial state RST Y001
for individual
operation Moving-up
X005 command Y000
Moving
Y002 up
Moving-down
X010 command Y002
Y000 Moving
down
Leftward travel
X006 command X002 Y003
Y004 Leftward
Rightward travel travel
X011 command X002 Y004
Y003 Rightward
Upper limit travel

412
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State

11
c) Zero return operation mode

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Programming is not required when the zero return operation mode is not provided.
It is necessary to set M8043 (zero return complete) to ON before starting the automatic mode.
SFC block
State number

1 Initial state for zero return

12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
X025
TRAN
Zero return start

10 RST Y001 Unclamping

13
RST Y000 Moving-down reset

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Y002 Moving up
X002
TRAN
Upper limit
11 RST Y003 Rightward
14
travel reset

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Y004 Leftward travel
X004
TRAN
Left limit

12 SET M8043 Zero return complete

15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
M8043 Make sure to use the state relays
TRAN S10 to S19 for the zero return
operation. In the final state, drive
M8043, and then reset the final
state.
S 12 Reset
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

413
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State

d) Automatic mode (stepping operation mode, cycle operation mode or continuous operation mode)

SFC block
State number

2 Initial state for

automatic mode
M8041 M8044
TRAN
Transfer Zero point
start condition

20 Y000 Moving down

X001
TRAN
Down limit
21 SET Y001 Clamping

T 0 K 10
T0
TRAN

22 Y002 Moving up
X002
TRAN
Upper limit
Rightward
23 Y003 travel
X003
TRAN
Right limit
24 Y000 Moving down
X001
TRAN
Down limit
25 RST Y001 Unclamping

T 1 K 10
T1
TRAN

26 Y002 Moving up
X002
TRAN
Upper limit
27 Y004 Leftward travel
X004
TRAN
Left limit

S2 RET END

414
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.1 FNC 60 – IST / Initial State

11
6. List program

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
The list program for the circuit diagram shown on the previous page is as shown below:

0 LD X 004 32 STL S 1 70 LD T 0
1 AND X 002 33 LD X 025 71 SET S 22
2
3
ANI Y 001
OUT M8044
34
36
SET S 10
STL S 10
73
74
STL
OUT
S
Y
22
002 12
Initial circuit

5 LD M8000 37 RST Y 001 75 LD X 002

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
6 IST 60 38 RST Y 000 76 SET S 23
(SP) X 020 39 OUT Y 002 78 STL S 23

Zero return operation

(SP) S 20 40 LD X 002 79 OUT Y 003
(SP) S 27 41 SET S 11 80 LD X 003
13

Automatic mode
13 STL S 0 43 STL S 11 81 SET S 24
14 LD X 012 44 RST Y 003 83 STL S 24

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
15 SET Y 001 45 OUT Y 004 84 OUT Y 000
16 LD X 007 46 LD X 004 85 LD X 001
17 RST Y 001 47 SET S 12 86 SET S 25
18 LD X 005 49 STL S 12 88 STL S 25
19 ANI Y 000 50 SET M8043 89 RST Y 001
20
21
OUT Y 002
LD X 010
52
53
LD M8043
RST S 12
90 OUT
(SP)
T
K
1
10
14
Individual
operation

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
22 ANI Y 002 (RET) 93 LD T 1
23 OUT Y 000 55 STL S 2 94 SET S 26
24 LD X 006 56 LD M8041 96 STL S 26
25 AND X 002 57 AND M8044 97 OUT Y 002
26 ANI Y 003 58 SET S 20 98 LD X 002
27
28
OUT Y 004
LD X 011
60
61
STL S 20
OUT Y 000
99 SET
101 STL
S
S
27
27
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
29 AND X 002 62 LD X001 102 OUT Y 004
30 ANI Y 004 63 SET S 21 103 LD X 004
31 OUT Y 003 65 STL S 21 104 OUT S 2
(RET) 66 SET Y 001 106 RET
67 OUT T 0 107 END

Programming is not required.

(SP) K 10 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

415
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.2 FNC 61 – SER / Search a Data Stack

14.2 FNC 61 – SER / Search a Data Stack

Outline
This instruction searches for the same data, maximum value and minimum value in a data table.

1. Instruction format

FNC 61 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D SER P 9 steps SER Continuous
17 steps DSER
Continuous
Operation Operation
SERP Pulse (Single) DSERP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
Head device number in which same data, maximum value and minimum value
S
S1 ‚ 16- or 32-bit binary
are searched
S2 Data to be searched for or device number storing data 16- or 32-bit binary
Head device number storing number of same data, maximum value and minimum
D 16- or 32-bit binary
value detected by search
Number of data in which same data, maximum value and minimum value are
n searched 16- or 32-bit binary
[16-bit instruction: 1 to 256, 32-bit instruction: 1 to 128]

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S
S1 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

SD2 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3
n 3 3 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (SER and SERP)
In "n" data starting from S1 , same data as S2 is searched, and the search result is stored to D to
D +4.
Command
input FNC 61 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ n
SER

1) Contents of searched data and the search result

a) When same data was detected
Five devices starting from D store the number of same data, first position, last position, maximum
value position and minimum value position.
b) When same data was not detected
Five devices starting from D store the number of same data, first position, last position, maximum
value position and minimum value position.
In this case, however, "0" is stored in three devices starting from D (which store the number of
same data, first position and last position).

416
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.2 FNC 61 – SER / Search a Data Stack

11
2) Operation example

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
a) Example of search result table configuration and data
Comparison Search result
Searched data
Searched device data Data Maximum Minimum value
S1 value Same
S1 S2 value position
(example)
(example)
value D
+4
D
D
+3 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
3 (first
S1 K100 0
position)
S1 +1 K111 1

S1 +2 K100 2 3

S1 +3 K 98 3 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
S1 +4 K123 4
K100
S1 +5 K 66 5 3
3 (last
S1 +6 K100 6
position)
S1 +7 K 95 7 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
S1 +8 K210 8 3

S1 +9 K 88 9

b) Search result table

Device number Contents
3 Number of same data
Search result item
15
D

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D +1 0 Same data position (first position)

D +2 6 Same data position (last position)

D +3 5 Minimum value position (last position)

D +4 8 Maximum value position (last position) 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
2. 32-bit operation (DSER and DSERP)
In "n" data starting from [ S1 +1, S1 ], same data as [ S2 +1, S2 ] is searched, and the search result
is stored to [ D +1, D ] to [ D +9, D +8].
Command
input FNC 61 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ n
17
DSER

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ D ‚ +1, D ‚
S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚

1) Contents of searched data and the search result

a) When same data was detected 18
Five 32-bit devices starting from [ DD1 +1, DD1 ] store the number of same data, first position, last
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

position, maximum value position and minimum value position.

b) When same data was not detected
Five 32-bit devices starting from [ DD1 +1, DD1 ] store the number of same data, first position, last
position, maximum value position and minimum value position.
In this case, however, "0" is stored in three devices starting from [ DD1 +1, DD1 ] (which store the
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

number of same data, first position and last position).

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

417
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.2 FNC 61 – SER / Search a Data Stack

2) Operation example
a) Example of search result table configuration and data
Search result
Searched data Comparison
Searched device Data Maximum Minimum
S1 value data Same
S1 +1 position value D value D
(example) S2 D
+4 +3
3 (first
[ S1 + 1, S1 ] K100000 0
position)
[ S1 + 3, S1 + 2] K110100 1

[ S1 + 5, S1 + 4] K100000 2 3

[ S1 + 7, S1 + 6] K 98000 3

[ S1 + 9, S1 + 8] K123000 4
K100000
[ S1 + 11, S1 + 10] K 66000 5 3
3 (last
[ S1 + 13, S1 + 12] K100000 6
position)
[ S1 + 15, S1 + 14] K 95000 7

[ S1 + 17, S1 + 16] K910000 8 3

[ S1 + 19, S1 + 18] K910000 9 3

b) Search result table

Device number Contents Search result item
[ D + 1, D ] 3 Number of same data

[ D + 3, D + 2] 0 Same data position (first position)

[ D + 5, D + 4] 6 Same data position (last position)

[ D + 7, D + 6] 5 Minimum value position (last position)

[ D + 9, D + 8] 9 Maximum value position (last position)

Cautions
1. Comparison of values
It is executed algebraically.
(example: −10 < 2)

2. When there are two or more maximum or minimum values

When there are two or more maximum or minimum values in the searched data, the last position of the max/
min is stored respectively.

3. Number of occupied devices

When this instruction is driven, the following number of devices are occupied for storing the search result
DD1 .
Make sure that such devices are not used in other controls for the machine.
1) In the case of 16-bit operation
Five devices, DD1 , DD1 +1, DD1 +2, DD1 +3 and DD1 +4, are occupied.
2) In the case of 32-bit operation
Ten devices, [ DD1 +1, DD1 ], [ DD1 +3, DD1 +2], [ DD1 +5, DD1 +4], [ DD1 +7, DD1 +6] and
[ DD1 +9, DD1 +8], are occupied.

418
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.3 FNC 62 – ABSD / Absolute Drum Sequencer

11
14.3 FNC 62 – ABSD / Absolute Drum Sequencer

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction creates many output patterns corresponding to the current value of a counter.
12
1. Instruction format

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC 62 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D ABSD 9 steps ABSD Continuous 17 steps DABSD Continuous

Operation Operation

13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
S
S1 ‚ Head device number storing the data table (with rising and faling point data) 16- or 32-bit binary

S2 Counter number for monitoring the current value compared with the data table 16- or 32-bit binary 14
D Head bit device number to be output Bit

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Number of lines in the table and the number of output bit devices
n 16-bit binary
[1 ≤ n ≤ 64]

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others 15
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S
S1 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S2 3

S2
3 3 3 S1
3 3
3
16
SD2 ‚

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
n 3 3

S1: "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
S2: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation 17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1. 16-bit operation (ABSD)
In this example, outputs are controlled to ON or OFF by one rotation (0 to 360° using the rotation angle signal
of 1°/pulse).
The current value S
D21 of the counter is compared with the data table with "n" lines starting from S
D1
(which occupies "n" lines × 2 devices), and consecutive "n" outputs starting from DD1 are controlled to ON or
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

OFF during one rotation.

Command
input FNC 62 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ n
ABSD

S2 ‚ X001
RST S2 ‚
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

X001
S2 ‚ K360

Rotation angle signal of 1°/pulse

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

419
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.3 FNC 62 – ABSD / Absolute Drum Sequencer

1) Write the following data to S

D1 to S
D1 +2n+1 in advance by a transfer instruction:
Rising point Falling point
Target output
Data value (example) Data value (example)
S1 40 S1 +1 140 D

S1 +2 100 S1 +3 200 D +1
S1 +4 160 S1 +5 60 D +2
S1 +6 240 S1 +7 280 D +3
…

…
⎯ ⎯
S1 + 2n S1 + 2n + 1 D +n−1

For example, store the 16-bit rising point data to an even device number devices, and store the 16-bit
falling data to an odd device number devices.
2) Output pattern
When the command input is set to ON, "n" points starting from DD1 change as shown below.
Each rising point/falling point can be changed respectively by overwriting the data in D D1 +n ×
S1 to S
2.
40 140
D‚
100 200

D ‚ +1
60 160
D ‚ +2

240 280

D ‚ +3
z
0 180 360

2. 32-bit operation (DABSD)

In this example, outputs are controlled to ON or OFF by one rotation (0 to 360° using the rotation angle signal
of 1°/pulse).
The present value D21
S of the counter is compared with the data table having "n" lines starting from
[ S
D1 +1, S D1 ] (which occupies "n" lines × 4 devices), and consecutive "n" outputs starting from DD1 are
controlled to ON or OFF during one rotation.
Command
input FNC 62 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ n
DABSD

S2 ‚ X001
RST S2 ‚

X001
S2 ‚ K360

Rotation angle signal of 1°/pulse

420
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.3 FNC 62 – ABSD / Absolute Drum Sequencer

11
1) Write the following data to [ S
D1 , S
D1 +1] to [ S
D1 +4n+2, S
D1 +4n+3] in advance using a transfer

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
instruction:
Rising point Falling point
Data value Data value Target output
(example) (example)
[ S1 + 1, S1 ] 40 [ S1 + 3, S1 + 2] 140 D
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
[ S1 + 5, S1 + 4] 100 [ S1 + 7, S1 + 6] 200 D +1

[ S1 + 9, S1 + 8] 160 [ S1 + 11, S1 + 10] 60 D +2

[ S1 + 13, S1 + 12] 240 [ S1 + 15, S1 + 14] 280 D +3

13
…

…
⎯ ⎯
[ S1 + 4n + 1, S1 + 4n] [ S1 + 4n + 3, S1 + 4n + 2] D +n−1

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
For example, store the 32-bit rising point data to devices having an even device number, and store the
32-bit falling data to devices having an odd device number.

When the command input is set to ON, "n" points starting from DD1 change as shown below.
14
Each rising point/falling point can be changed respectively by overwriting the data in [ S
D1 +1, S
D1 ] to

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
[ S
D1 +(n×2)+3, S
D1 +(n×2)+2].

40 140
D‚
100 200 15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D ‚ +1
60 160
D ‚ +2

240 280

D ‚ +3 16
z

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
0 180 360

Cautions
1. Specifying a high speed counter (C235 to C255) 17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
In DABSD instruction, a high seed counter can be specified as S
D21 .
In this case, however, the output pattern contains response delay caused by the scan cycle with regard to the
current value of a counter.
When high responsitivity is required in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, use the table high speed comparison function
offered by the HSZ instruction, or use the HSCT instruction.
18
2. When specifying digits of a bit device as S
D1
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

1) Device number
Specify a multiple of 16 (0, 16, 32, 64 ...).
2) Number of digits
- In ABSD instruction (16-bit operation): Only K4 is available.
- In DABSD instruction (32-bit operation): Only K8 is available.
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

3. Other cautions
• The value "n" determines the number of target outputs (1 ≤ n ≤ 64).
• Even if the command input is set to OFF, the ON/OFF status of outputs does not change.
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

421
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.4 FNC 63 – INCD / Incremental Drum Sequencer

14.4 FNC 63 – INCD / Incremental Drum Sequencer

Outline
This instruction creates many output patterns using a pair of counters.

1. Instruction format

FNC 63 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

INCD 9 steps INCD Continuous

−
Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
S
S1 ‚ Head word device number storing the set value 16-bit binary

S2 Head number of counters whose current value is monitored 16-bit binary

D Head bit device number to be output Bit

n Number of output bit devices [1 ≤ n ≤ 64] 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S
S1 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S2 3

S2 3 3

SD2 ‚ 3 3 3 S1 3
n 3 3

S1: "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
S2: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (INCD)
The current value S
D21 of a counter is compared with the data table having "n" lines starting from S
D1
(which occupies "n" lines x 1 device). When S D21 is equivalent to the table data, the current output is reset,
and the next output is set to ON. In this way, the ON/OFF status of specified outputs is controlled in turn.
Command
input FNC 63 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ n
INCD
Count signal
K9999
S2 ‚

422
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.4 FNC 63 – INCD / Incremental Drum Sequencer

11
Operation

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ n
X000
FNC 63 D300 C0 M0 K4
INCD

M8013
C0
K9999 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1 sec clock

1) Timing chart
Suppose that the following data is written in advance by a transfer instruction:
Device storing data Output
Data value (example) Example 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
S1 D300 = 20 D M0
S1 +1 D301 = 30 D +1 M1
S1 +2 D302 = 10 D +2 M2
S1 +3 D303 = 40 D +3 M3
14
…

…
…

…
⎯ ⎯

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
S1 +n−1 D +n−1

X000
30 40

Current
20
10
20 20
15
value of

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
C0

Current 3
2
value of 1 1 1
C1 0 0 0

M 0
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
M 1

M 2

M 3
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
M8029 Complete flag

2) When the command contact turns ON, the output M0 turns ON.
3) When the current value of C0 reaches the comparison value D300, the output M0 is reset. "1" is added to
the count value of the process counter C1, and the current value of the counter C0 is reset. 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

4) The next output M1 turns ON.

5) When the current value of C0 reaches the comparison value D301, the output M1 is reset. "1" is added
to the count value of the process counter C1, and the current value of the counter C0 is reset.
6) The current value is compared for up to "n (K4)" outputs in the same way (1 ≤ n ≤ 64).
7) When the final process specified by "n" is finished, the execution complete flag M8029 turns ON and 19
remains ON for one operation cycle.
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

M8029 is used for many instructions as the instruction execution complete flag. Use M8029 as a contact
just after a corresponding instruction.
8) The program execution returns to the beginning, and outputs are repeated.

Caution 20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

1. When specifying digits of a bit device as S

D11
As a device number, specify a multiple of 16 (0, 16, 32, 64 ...).

423
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.5 FNC 64 – TTMR / Teaching Timer

14.5 FNC 64 – TTMR / Teaching Timer

Outline
This instruction measures the period of time in which TTMR instruction is ON.
Use this instruction to adjust the set value of a timer by a pushbutton switch.

1. Instruction format

FNC 64 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

TTMR 5 steps TTMR Continuous

−
Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
D Device number storing the teaching data 16-bit binary
n Magnification by which the teaching data is multiplied [K0 to K2/H0 to H2] 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

SD2 ‚ 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (TTMR)
The period of time to press and hold the command input (pushbutton switch) is measured in 1-second units,
multiplied by the magnification (10n), and then transferred to DD1 .
Command Command
input
FNC 64 contact
D‚ n
TTMR
D ‚ +1
D ‚ +1
D‚
D‚

τ0 τ0
Pressing and holding time Pressing and holding time

The table below shows the actual value indicated by DD1 depending on the magnification n and the
pressing and holding time t0 (unit: 1 sec).
n Magnification D
K0 τ0 D ×1
K1 10τ0 D × 10
K2 100τ0 D × 100

Related instruction
There is a handy instruction as follows:
Instruction Description
Measures the input contact ON time in 1-hour units, and outputs alarm when the
HOUR(FNC169)
measurement result reaches a specified value.

424
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.5 FNC 64 – TTMR / Teaching Timer

11
Cautions

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. When the command contact turns OFF
The current value [ DD1 +1] of the pressing and holding time is reset, and the teaching time DD1 will not
change any more.

2. Number of occupied devices

12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Two devices are occupied from a device specified as the teaching time DD1 .
Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine.
• DD1 : Teaching time
• DD1 +1: Current value of the pressing and holding time 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Program example
1. Writing the teaching time to 10 types of data registers
Suppose that the set value is written to D400 to D409 in advance.
14
T 0 D 400

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
T 1 D 401 10 timers to be set
Because the timers T0 to T9 are the 100 ms type, the actual
operating time (sec) is 1/10 of the teaching data.
…

15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
T 9 D 409

M8000 Selecting a timer by a digital switch

FNC 19 K1X000 Z
BIN An input to the 1-digit digital switch connected to X000 to
RUN X003 is converted into the binary format, and transferred to Z.
monitor
X010 Measuring the teaching time 16
FNC 64 D300 K 0 The time (sec) in which X010 is pressed and held is stored to

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
TTMR D300.
Teaching
button
PLF M 0 Recovery of the teaching time is detected.
X010

M 0
FNC 12
Writing the set value of a timer 17
D300 D400Z The teaching time (D300) is transferred to the register D400Z
MOV

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
for setting a timer selected by the digital switch.

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

425
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.6 FNC 65 – STMR / Special Timer

14.6 FNC 65 – STMR / Special Timer

Outline
This instruction can easily make off-delay timers, one-shot timers and flicker timers.

1. Instruction format

FNC 65 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

STMR 7 steps STMR Continuous

−
Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
SS1 ‚ Used timer number [T0 to T199 (100 ms timer)] 16-bit binary
m Set value of the timer [1 to 32,767] 16-bit binary
D Head bit number to which the set value is output (Four devices are occupied.) Bit

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

SS1 ‚ 3 3
m 3 3 3 3
SD2 ‚ 3 3 3 S 3

S: "D….b" cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z).

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (STMR)
The value specified in "m" is handled as the set value of a timer specified in DS1 , and output to four devices
starting from DD1 .
Create a proper program according to the purpose while referring to the example shown below.
Command
input FNC 65 S‚ m D‚
STMR

Off-delay timer and one-shot timer

When T10 is set to DS1 , and M0 is set to DD1
Command
input FNC 65 T10 K100 M0
STMR

• M0 [ DD1 ] : Off-delay timer which turns OFF with delay of the timer set value after the command
contact turned OFF
• M1 [ DD1 +1] : One-shot timer which turns ON after the command contact turned OFF from ON, and
turns OFF after the timer set value
• M2 [ DD1 +2] : Occupied, and can be used for flicker.
• M3 [ DD1 +3] : Occupied.

426
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.6 FNC 65 – STMR / Special Timer

11

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Command
input

M0 D‚ 10s 10s

M1 D ‚ +1 10s 10s
12
M2 D ‚ +2 10s

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
M3 D ‚ +3

Flicker
In the program shown below which turns OFF STMR instruction at the NC contact of DD1 +3, flicker is output 13
to DD1 +1 and DD1 +2.

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
DD1 and DD1 +3 are occupied.
S‚ m D‚
Command
input M3
FNC 65 T10 K100 M0
STMR
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
• M0 [ DD1 ] : Occupied (, and can be used for off-delay timer). (Refer to the previous page.)
• M1 [ DD1 +1] : Flicker (NO contact) which turns ON and OFF repeatedly at the interval of timer set value
• M2 [ DD1 +2] : Flicker (NC contact) which turns ON and OFF repeatedly at the interval of timer set value
• M3 [ DD1 +3] : Occupied. 15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Command
input

M2 D ‚ +2 10s 10s 10s

M1 D ‚ +1 10s 10s
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Cautions
1. Handling of a specified timer
The timer number specified in this instruction cannot be used in other general circuits (such as OUT 17
instruction).

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
If the timer number is used in other general circuits, the timer malfunctions.

2. Number of occupied devices

Four devices are occupied from a device specified in DD1 .
Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine. 18
Function
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

Device Off-delay timer

Flicker
One-shot timer
D Off-delay timer Occupied
One-shot timer Flicker (NO contact)
D +1
Occupied Flicker (NC contact)
19
D +2
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

D +3 Occupied Flicker (NC contact)

3. When the command contact is set to OFF

DD1 , DD1 +1 and DD1 +3 will turn OFF after the set time. DD1 +2 and the timer DS1 are immediately
reset. 20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

427
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.7 FNC 66 – ALT / Alternate State

14.7 FNC 66 – ALT / Alternate State

Outline
This instruction alternates a bit device (from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON) when the input turns ON.

1. Instruction format

FNC 66 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

ALT P ALT Continuous −

3 steps Operation
ALTP Pulse (Single) −
Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
D Bit device number whose output is alternated Bit

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

SD2 ‚ 3 3 3 S 3

S: "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (ALT and ALTP)

Alternating output (1-step)

Every time the command input turns ON from OFF, a bit device specified in DD1 is alternated (from ON to
OFF or from OFF to ON).
Command
input FNC 66 Command input ON ON ON
D‚
ALTP
D‚ ON ON

Dividing output (by 2-step alternating output)

Multi-step dividing outputs are achieved by combination of two or more ALTP instructions.
1st step
Command
ON ON ON ON
D‚ input
Command
input FNC 66 M0 M0 D‚ ON ON
ALTP

Specify a same device D ‚ 2nd step

M0
FNC 66 M1
ALTP M1 D‚ ON

428
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.7 FNC 66 – ALT / Alternate State

11
Caution

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. When using (continuous operation type) ALT instruction
• When ALT instruction is used, a specified bit device is alternated in every operation cycle.
To alternate a specified device by turning the command ON or OFF, use the (pulse operation type) ALTP
instruction, or use a pulse operation type command contact such as LDP. 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Program examples
1. Start and stop by one input
1) When the pushbutton switch X000 is pressed, the start output Y001 is set to ON.
2) When the pushbutton switch X000 is pressed again, the stop output Y000 is set to ON. 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
X000
FNC 66 M0
ALTP
M0
Y000 Stop
M0
Y001 Start
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
2. Flicker operation
1) When the input X006 is set to ON, the contact of the timer T2 turns ON instantaneously every 5 seconds.
2) Every time the contact of T2 turns ON, the output Y007 is set to ON or OFF alternately. 15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
X006 T2 X006 ON
T2 K50
5s 5s 5s 5s 5s 5s 5s
X006 T2
FNC 66 Y007 T2
ALT

Y007 ON ON ON
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
3. Alternating output operation using auxiliary relays (M) (operation equivalent to ALT
instruction)
The circuit below is provided as an example of alternating operation using basic instructions and auxiliary
relays (M) which is equivalent to ALT instruction. 17
1) When X000 is set to ON, M0 turns ON and remains ON for only one operation cycle.

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
2) When M0 turns ON for the first time, Y000 is latched. When M0 turns ON the second time, Y000
becomes unlatched.
X000 M1
M0
18
X000
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

M1

M0 Y000
Y000
M0 Y000
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

429
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.8 FNC 67 – RAMP / Ramp Variable Value

14.8 FNC 67 – RAMP / Ramp Variable Value

Outline
This instruction obtains the data which changes between the start value (initial value) and the end value
(target value) over the specified "n" times.

1. Instruction format

FNC 67 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

RAMP 9 steps RAMP Continuous

−
Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
S
S1 ‚ Device number storing the initial value of ramp 16-bit binary

S2 Device number storing the target value of ramp 16-bit binary

D Device number storing the current value of ramp 16-bit binary

n Ramp transfer time (scan) [1 to 32, 767] 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S
S1 ‚ 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3

SD2 ‚ 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (RAMP)
When the start value S
D1 and the end value S D21 have been specified and the command input is set to
ON, the value obtained by adding a value divided equally by "n" times to D
S1 in every operation cycle is
stored to DD1 .
By combining this instruction and an analog output, the cushion start/stop command can be output.
Command
input FNC 67 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ n
RAMP

1) In the case of " S1 ‚ < S2 ‚ " 2) In the case of " S1 ‚ > S2 ‚ "

S2 ‚ S1 ‚ D‚

S2 ‚
S1 ‚ D‚

"n" scans "n" scans

Number of scans D ‚ +1 Number of scans D ‚ +1

• The number of scans ("0" to "n") is stored in DD1 +1.

• The time from start to the end value is the operation cycle multiplied by "n" times.

430
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.8 FNC 67 – RAMP / Ramp Variable Value

11
• If the command input is set to OFF in the middle of operation, execution is paused. (The present data

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
value stored in DD1 is held, and the number of scans stored in DD1 +1 is cleared.) When the command
input is set to ON again, DD1 is cleared, and the operation is started from S
D1 .

• After transfer is completed, the instruction execution complete flag M8029 turns ON, and the DD1 value is
returned to the S
D1 value. 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Command

S2 ‚
13
S1 ‚

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
D‚

(M8029)

• When acquiring the operation result at a constant time interval (constant scan mode)
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Write a prescribed scan time (which is longer than the actual scan time) to D8039 and set M8039 to ON to
select the constant scan mode in the PLC.
For example, when "20 ms" is written to D8039 and "n" is set to 100, the DD1 value will change from
D1
S to S
D21 in 20 seconds.

2. Operation of the mode flag (M8026) 15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, the contents of DD1 +1 are changed as follows depending on the ON/OFF status of
the mode flag M8026.
In FX3G PLCs, the contents of DD1 +1 are same as the case "2) When M8026 is ON" below without regard to
the ON/OFF status of the mode flag M8026.
1) When M8026 is OFF 2) When M8026 is ON 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Command Command

S2 ‚ S2 ‚
17
D‚
S1 ‚ S1 ‚

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
D‚

(M8029) (M8029)

18
Related devices
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

→ For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Device Name Description
Instruction
M8029 Turns ON when D becomes equivalent to S2 after "n" operation cycles.
execution complete
19
M8026*1 RAMP mode Refer to the operation of the mode flag M8026 described above.
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

*1. M8026 is available only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, and is cleared when the PLC mode switches from RUN
to STOP.

Caution
20
DD1
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

1. When specifying a latched (battery backed) type device as

When setting PLC to the RUN mode while the command input is ON, clear DD1 in advance.

431
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.9 FNC 68 – ROTC / Rotary Table Control

14.9 FNC 68 – ROTC / Rotary Table Control

Outline
This instruction is suitable for efficient control of the rotary table for putting/taking a product into/out of the
rotary table.

1. Instruction format

FNC 68 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

ROTC 9 steps ROTC Continuous

−
Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
S Data register for counting 16-bit binary
m1 Number of divisions 16-bit binary
m2 Number of low-speed sections 16-bit binary
D Head bit device number to be driven 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3
m1 3 3
m2 3 3
SD2 ‚ 3 3 3 S 3

S: "D….b" cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z).

432
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.9 FNC 68 – ROTC / Rotary Table Control

11
Explanation of function and operation

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. 16-bit operation (ROTC)
The table rotation is controlled by "m2", DS1 and DD1 so that a product can be efficiently put into or taken
out of the rotary table divided into "m1" (=10) sections as shown in the figure below.
S‚ m1 m2 D‚ 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Command
FNC 68 D200 K10 K2 M0
ROTC
Calling Number Number Calling
Port No. 0 condition of of low- condition
register divisions speed register
Zero point Product (word device) sections (bit device)
detection 13
8

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
9 7
X000(M0)
0 6

Detection Forward rotation

switch 14
1 5

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
X001(M1)
Port No. 1
2 4
3
Rotary table

1) Register (word device) specifying the calling condition DS1

15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
S Works as a register for counting.

S +1 Sets the port No. to be called. Set them in advance using a transfer instruction.

S +2 Sets the product No. to be called.

2) Register (bit device) specifying the calling condition DD1 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
D : A phase signal

D +1 B phase signal

D +2 Zero point detection signal

D +3 Forward rotation at high speed Construct an internal contact circuit in advance which is 17
Forward rotation at low speed driven by the input signal (X)
D +4

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
D +5 Stop

D +6 Backward rotation at low speed

D +7 Backward rotation at high speed

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

433
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.9 FNC 68 – ROTC / Rotary Table Control

Operation conditions
The conditions required to use this instruction are as shown in the example below.
1) Rotation detection signal: X → DD1
- Provide a 2-phase switch (X000 and X001) for detecting the rotation direction (forward or backward) of
the table and the switch X002 which turns ON when the product No. 0 reaches the port No. 0.
- Create the sequence program shown below.
2-phase switch
D‚
X000 A
M0 phase
D ‚ +1 Up-counting signal during forward rotation
X001 B
M1 phase
D ‚ +2
X002
M2 Zero point detection switch

X000 to X002 are replaced with internal contacts of D to D +2.

An arbitrary head device number can be specified by X or D .

2) Specification of a register for counting: DS1

The counter DS1 detects which number of product is located at the port No. 0.
3) Registers specifying the calling condition: DS1 +1 and DS1 +2
a) Set the port No. to be called in DS1 +1.
b) Set the product No. to be called in DS1 +2.
4) Number of divisions m1 and number of low-speed sections m2
Specify the number of divisions m1 of the table, and number of low-speed sections m2.

When the above conditions are specified, forward/backward rotation and high speed/low speed/stop are
output to DD1 +3 to DD1 +7 specified by the head device DD1 .

Cautions
1. Operations caused by the command input ON/OFF status
• When the command input is set to ON and this instruction is executed, the result will be automatically
output to DD1 +3 to DD1 +7.
• When the command input is set to OFF, DD1 +3 to DD1 +7 are set to OFF accordingly.

2. Multiple activation of the rotation detection signal ( DD1 to DD1 +2) in one division
For example, when the rotation detection signal ( DD1 to DD1 +2) is activated 10 times in one division, set a
value multiplied by "10" to each division, port No. to be called and product No. to be called.
As a result, an intermediate value of the division number can be set to a low-speed section.

3. Zero point detection signal DD1

When the zero point detection signal (M2) turns ON while the command input is ON, the contents of the
register for counting DS1 are cleared to "0".
This clear operation should be executed before starting the operation.

434
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.10 FNC 69 – SORT / SORT Tabulated Data

11
14.10 FNC 69 – SORT / SORT Tabulated Data

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction sorts a data table consisting of data (lines) and group data (columns) based on a specified
group data (column) sorted by line in ascending order. This instruction stores the group data (columns) in
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
serial devices.
On the other hand, SORT2 (FNC149) instruction stores the data (lines) in serial devices facilitating the
addition of data (lines), and sorts a table in either ascending or descending order.
→ For SORT2 (FNC149) instruction, refer to Section 19.7.

1. Instruction format 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
FNC 69 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

SORT 11 steps SORT Continuous

−
Operation

2. Set data
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Operand type Description Data type
SS1 ‚ Head device number storing the data table [which occupies m1 × m2 points]
m1 Number of data (lines) [1 to 32]
m2 Number of group data (columns) [1 to 6] 16-bit binary
D Head device number storing the operation result [which occupies m1 × m2 points]
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
n Column number of the group data (column) used as the basis of sorting [1 to m2]

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
and System User Digit Specification System User
Special
Unit
Index
Con- Real Charac-
stant Number ter String
Pointer 16
Type

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

SS1 ‚ 3 3
m1 3 3
m2 3 3
SD2 ‚ 3 3 17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
n 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (SORT)
In the data table (sorting source) having (m1 × m2) points from DS1 , data lines are sorted in the ascending
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

order based on the group data in the column No. "n", and the result is stored in the data table (sorting result)
having (m1 × m2) points from DD1 .
→ For operation examples, refer to the next page.
Command
input FNC 69
SORT
S m1 m2 D n 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

Instruction execution complete flag

M8029
M{{ Instruction execution complete flag for SORT instruction

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

435
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.10 FNC 69 – SORT / SORT Tabulated Data

• The data table configuration is explained in an example in which the sorting source data table has 3 lines
and 4 columns (m1 = K3, m2 = K4). For the sorting result data table, understand DS1 as DD1 .
Number of groups (m2 = K4)
Column No.
1 2 3 4
Line No. Control number Height Weight Age
1 S S +3 S +6 S +9
Number of
data 2 S +1 S +4 S +7 S +10
(m1 = 3)
3 S +2 S +5 S +8 S +11

• When the command input turns ON, data sorting is started. Data sorting is completed after "m1" scans,
and the instruction execution complete flag M8029 is set to ON.
→ For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.

2. Operation examples
When the instruction is executed with "n = K2 (column No. 2)" and "n = K3 (column No. 3) for the following
sorting source data, the operations shown below are acquired.
It is recommended to put a serial number such as a control number in the first column so that the original line
number can be estimated based on the contents.

Sorting source data

Column No. Number of groups (m2 = K4)
1 2 3 4
Line No. Control number Height Weight Age
S S +5 S + 10 S + 15
1
1 150 45 20
S +1 S +6 S + 11 S + 16
2
2 180 50 40
Number of
S +2 S +7 S + 12 S + 17
data 3
(m1 = 5) 3 160 70 30
S +3 S +8 S + 13 S + 18
4
4 100 20 8
S +4 S +9 S + 14 S + 19
5
5 150 50 45

1) Sorting result when the instruction is executed with "n = K2 (column No. 2)"
Column No. 1 2 3 4
Line No. Control number Height Weight Age
D D +5 D + 10 D +15
1
4 100 20 8
D +1 D +6 D + 11 D + 16
2
1 150 45 20
D +2 D +7 D + 12 D + 17
3
5 150 50 45
D +3 D +8 D + 13 D + 18
4
3 160 70 30
D +4 D +9 D + 14 D + 19
5
2 180 50 40

436
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 14 Handy Instruction – FNC 60 to FNC 69
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 14.10 FNC 69 – SORT / SORT Tabulated Data

11
2) Sorting result when the instruction is executed with "n = K3 (column No. 3)"

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Column No. 1 2 3 4
Line No. Control number Height Weight Age
D D +5 D + 10 D + 15
1
4 100 20 8
12
D +1 D +6 D + 11 D + 16

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
2
1 150 45 20
D +2 D +7 D + 12 D + 17
3
2 180 50 40

4
D
5
+3 D
150
+8 D
50
+ 13 D
45
+ 18
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
D +4 D +9 D + 14 D + 19
5
3 160 70 30

Related device
→ For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2. 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Device Name Description
Instruction
M8029 Turns ON when sorting is completed.
execution complete

Cautions 15
• Do not change the contents of operands and data while the instruction is executed.

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
• Before executing the instruction again, set the command input to OFF.
• Limitation in the number of instructions
Only one instruction can be used in a program.
• When the same device is specified in DS1 and DD1 16
The source data is overwritten by the data acquired by sorting.

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Take special care so that the contents of DS1 are not changed until execution is completed.

17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

437
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

15. External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79

FNC 70 to FNC 79 provide instructions to receive data from and send data to external devices mainly using
inputs and outputs in PLCs.
Because these instructions easily achieve complicated controls with a minimum required sequence program
and external wiring, they are similar to handy instructions described in the preceding chapter.
FROM and TO instructions essential for controlling special units and special blocks are included in this group.
(In FX3U and FX3UC PLCs, transfer can be executed also by MOV instruction.)

FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

Section
70 TKY TKY S D1 D2 Ten Key Input
15.1

Section
71 HKY HKY S D1 D2 D3 Hexadecimal Input
15.2

Section
72 DSW DSW S D1 D2 n Digital switch (thumbwheel input)
15.3

Section
73 SEGD SEGD S D Seven Segment Decoder
15.4

Section
74 SEGL SEGL S D n Seven Segment With Latch
15.5

Section
75 ARWS ARWS S D1 D2 n Arrow Switch
15.6

Section
76 ASC ASC S D ASCII code data input
15.7

Section
77 PR PR S D Print (ASCII Code)
15.8

Section
78 FROM FROM m1 m2 D n Read From A Special Function Block
15.9

Section
79 TO TO m1 m2 S n Write To A Special Function Block
15.10

438
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.1 FNC 70 – TKY / Ten Key Input

11
15.1 FNC 70 – TKY / Ten Key Input

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction sets data to timers and counters through inputs of the ten keys from "0" to "9".
12
1. Instruction format

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC 70 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D TKY 7 steps TKY Continuous
13 steps DTKY Continuous
Operation Operation

13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Head bit device number from which one of the ten keys is input [10 devices are
S Bit
occupied]
D1 Word device number storing the data 16- or 32-bit binary 14
Head bit device number storing the key pressing information [11 devices are

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
D2 Bit
occupied]

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
and System User Digit Specification System User
Special
Index
Con- Real Charac-
Pointer
15
Unit stant Number ter String
Type

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 S 3

D1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

D2 3 3 3 S 3
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
S: "D….b" cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z).

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (TKY)
D1 stores a numeric value input from S to S +9 connected to the ten keys. Output informations for 17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
key pressing and key sensing are output to D2 to D2 +10.
1) Input numeric value D1
- When an input value is larger than "9999", it overflows from the most significant digit.
- An input numeric value is stored in the binary format.
- When the ten keys are pressed in the order "[1] → [2] → [3] → [4]" in the figure shown on the next page, 18
"2130" is stored in D1 .
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

439
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.1 FNC 70 – TKY / Ten Key Input

2) Key pressing information [ D2 to D2 +10]

- For the key pressing information, D2 to D2 +9 turn ON or OFF according to the pressed keys.
- For the key sensing output, D2 +10 turns ON when any key is pressed.
Command
input S‚ [4]
FNC 70 S‚ D1 ‚ D2 ‚
TKY

Input form ten keys

S ‚ +1 [2]
The figure below shows an example of FX3U PLC (sink
input). S ‚ +2 [1]
For wiring details, refer to the following manual.
→ FX3U Hardware Edition S ‚ +3 [3]
Ten keys → 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
S ‚ +9

D2 ‚
24V 0V S/S S‚ S‚ S‚ S‚ S‚ S‚ S‚ S‚ S‚ S‚

Output information for key

+1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9

pressing information
D2 ‚ +1

PLC D2 ‚ +2

D2 ‚ +3

D2 ‚ +9

D2 ‚ +10 [1] [2] [3] [4]

Key sensing output
"2130" is stored in D1 ‚ .
2. 32-bit operation (DTKY)
[ D1 +1, D1 ] store a numeric value input from S to S +9 connected to the ten keys. Output
informations for key pressing and key sensing are output to D2 to D2 +10.
1) Input numeric value [ D1 ]
- When an input value is larger than "99,999,999", it overflows from the most significant digit.
- An input numeric value is stored in the binary format.
2) Key pressing information [ D2 to D2 +10]
- For the key pressing information, D2 to D2 +9 turn ON or OFF according to the pressed keys.
- For the key sensing output, D2 +10 turns ON when any key is pressed.
Command
input FNC 70 S‚ D1 ‚ D2 ‚
DTKY

For the ten-key connection example and key pressing information, refer to the 16-bit operation (TKY) shown
above.

Cautions
1. When two or more keys are pressed at the same time
In such a case, only the first key pressed is valid.

2. When the command contact turns OFF

Though the contents of D1 do not change, all of D2 to D2 +10 turn OFF.

440
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.1 FNC 70 – TKY / Ten Key Input

11
3. Number of occupied device

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1) Ten bit devices are occupied from S for connecting the ten keys.
Because these devices are occupied even if the ten keys are not connected, they cannot be used for any
other purpose.
2) Eleven bit devices are occupied from D2 for outputting the key pressing information.
Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine.
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
- D2 to D2 +9: Turn ON or OFF according to input of the ten keys "0" to "9".
- D2 +10: Is ON while either one among "0" to "9" keys is pressed (key sensing output).

4. Limitation in the number the instruction

TKY or DTKY instruction can be used only once in a program. 13
When TKY and/or DTKY instruction should be used two or more times, use the indexing (V, Z) function.

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Program example
In the program example shown below, the input X000 is set as the head bit device, and the ten keys "0" to "9"
are connected.

1. Program
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
S‚ D1 ‚ D2 ‚
X030
FNC 70 X000 D0 M10
TKY

2. Connection diagram 15
This connection diagram shows an example of FX3U PLC (sink input).

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
For wiring details, refer to the following manual.
→ FX3U Hardware Edition
Ten keys → 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
24V 0V S/S X000 X001 X002 X003 X004 X005 X006 X007 X010 X011

PLC
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

441
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.1 FNC 70 – TKY / Ten Key Input

3. Timing chart
X000 [4]
1) When the ten keys are pressed in the order "[1] → [2] →
[3] → [4]" shown in the figure, "2130" is stored in (D0).
X001 [2]
When an input value is larger than "9999", it overflows
from the most significant digit.
(An input numeric value is stored in the binary format in X002 [1]
D0).
X003 [3]
2) When X002 is pressed, M12 turns ON and remains ON
until another key is pressed. Other keys work in the
same way. X011
In this way, M10 to M19 turn ON and OFF according to
the inputs X000 to X011. M 10
3) When pressing a key, the key sensing output M20 is ON
only while it is pressed. M 11

M 12

M 13

M 19

M 20 [1] [2] [3] [4]

Key sensing output

442
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.2 FNC 71 – HKY / Hexadecimal Input

11
15.2 FNC 71 – HKY / Hexadecimal Input

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction multiplexes four X-devices and four Y-devices to allow for 16 key (0 to F) 4-digit (byte) input.
Keys 0 to 9 stores numerical values, and keys A to F represent function keys.
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
When the extension function is set to ON, hexadecimal keys 0 to F all store their corresponding numerical
values.

1. Instruction format

FNC 71 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
13
D HKY 9 steps HKY Continuous
17 steps DHKY Continuous

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description
Head X device number to be used (Four devices occupied.)
Data Type
Bit
14
S

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
D1 Head Y device number to be used (Four devices occupied.) Bit

D2 Device number storing the numerical input from the 16 keys 16- or 32-bit binary
Head bit device number storing the key pressing information
D3 Bit
(Eight devices are occupied.)
15
3. Applicable devices

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
D1 3 3

D2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

D3 3 3 3 S 3

S: "D….b" cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z). 17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Explanation of function and operation
1. 16-bit operation (HKY)
signals [ S to S +3] and [ D1 to D1 +3] connected to the 16 key input (0 to F) are scanned.
When a key 0 to 9 is pressed, the corresponding numeric value is shifted into D2 from the least significant 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

byte, and D3 +7 turns ON.

When a key A to F is pressed, the corresponding key press information bit [ D3 to D3 +5] turns ON, and
D3 +6 turns ON.
Command
input FNC 71
HKY
S‚ D1 ‚ D2 ‚ D3 ‚ 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

443
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.2 FNC 71 – HKY / Hexadecimal Input

1) Input of a numeric value through keys 0 to 9:

- When an input value is larger than "9999", it overflows from the most significant digit.
- The numeric value input is stored to D2 in binary.
- The key sensing output D3 +7 turns ON when any key 0 to 9 is pressed.
2) Key pressing information for the keys A to F:
- Six devices starting from D3 corresponding to keys A to F turn ON.
- The key sensing output D3 +6 turns ON when any key A to F is pressed.
Key Key pressing information Key Key pressing information
A D3 D D3 +3
B D3 +1 E D3 +4
C D3 +2 F D3 +5

2. 32-bit operation (DHKY)

Signals [ S to S +3] and [ D1 to D1 +3] connected to the 16 key input (0 to F) are scanned.
When a key 0 to 9 is pressed, the corresponding numeric value is shifted into [ D2 +1, D2 ] from the least
significant byte, and D3 +7 turns ON.
When a key A to F is pressed, the corresponding key press information bit [ D3 to D3 +5] turns ON. and
D3 +6 turns ON.
Command
input FNC 71 S‚ D1 ‚ D2 ‚ D3 ‚
DHKY

1) Input of a numeric value through keys 0 to 9:

- When an input value is larger than "99,999,999", it overflows from the most significant digit.
- The numeric value input is stored to [ D2 +1, D2 ] in binary.
- The key sensing output D3 +7 turns ON when any key 0 to 9 is pressed.
2) Key pressing information for the keys A to F:
Six devices starting from D3 corresponding to keys A to F turn ON.
The key sensing output D3 +6 turns ON when any key A to F is pressed.

Extension function
When M8167 is set to ON making the extension function valid, the numerical values for keys 0 to F are stored
in binary.
When the extension function is valid, the function and opearation are the same except for the following.

1. 16-bit operation (HKY)

Hexadecimal numerical value data input using keys 0 to F is shifted into D2 from the least significant byte.
1) Input of a numeric value using keys 0 to F:
- When the input value is larger than "FFFF", it overflows from the most significant digit.
- Example:
When "1 → 2 → 3 → B → F" is input, numerical value "23BF" is stored in D2 in binary.
"1" overflows when "F" is input.
Command
input
M8167

FNC 71 S‚ D1 ‚ D2 ‚ D3 ‚
HKY

444
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.2 FNC 71 – HKY / Hexadecimal Input

11
2. 32-bit operation (DHKY)

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Hexadecimal numerical value data input using keys 0 to F is shifted into [ D2 +1, D2 ] from the least
significant byte.
1) Input of a numeric value using keys 0 to F:
- When the input value is larger than "FFFFFFFF", it overflows from the most significant digit.
- Example:
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
When "9 → 2 → 3 → B → F → A → F" is input, numerical value "923BFAF" is stored in [ D2 +1, D2 ]
in binary.
Command
input
M8167
13
FNC 71

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
S‚ D1 ‚ D2 ‚ D3 ‚
DHKY

Related devices
→ For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2. 14
Device Name Description

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Turns ON/OFF the hexadecimal data handling function of HKY (FNC 71) instruction.
M8167 Extension function flag OFF: Ten-keys and function keys
ON: Hexadecimal keys

OFF: Data is being output to D1 to D1 +3 or the instruction is not executed yet.

M8029
Instruction execution
complete flag ON: A cycle operation of outputting data to D1 to D1 +3 (scan of the keys 0 to 15
F) is completed.

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Cautions
1. Limitation in the number of instructions
HKY or DHKY instruction can be used only once in a program. 16
When TKY and/or DTKY instruction should be used two or more times, use the indexing (V, Z) function.

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
2. When two or more keys are pressed at the same time
In such a case, the first key pressed is valid.

3. When the command contact turns OFF

Though the contents of D2 do not change, D3 to D3 +7 turn OFF.
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
4. Number of devices occupied
1) Four devices are occupied from the head X device S for connecting 16 keys.
2) Four devices are occupied from the head Y device D1 for connecting 16 keys.
3) Eight devices are occupied from the head device D3 for outputting the key pressing information.
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

Make sure that these devices are not used by other machine controls.
- D3 to D3 +5: Key pressing information for the keys A to F
- D3 +6: Key sensing output for the keys A to F
- D3 +7: Key sensing output for the keys 0 to 9
19
5. Key input receiving timing
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

HKY and DHKY instructions are executed in synchronization with the operation cycle of the PLC.
8 scan cycles are required to finish reading the keys.
To prevent key input receiving errors caused by the filter delay, utilize the "constant scan mode" and "timer
interrupt" function.

6. Output format 20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

Use a transistor output type PLC.

445
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.2 FNC 71 – HKY / Hexadecimal Input

Program example
S‚ D1 ‚ D2 ‚ D3 ‚
X004
FNC 71 X000 Y000 D 0 M 0
HKY

The figure below shows an example of the FX3U series main unit (sink input/sink output).
For wiring details, refer to the following manual.
→ FX3U Hardware Edition
External
wiring C D E F

8 9 A B

4 5 6 7

0 1 2 3

24V 0V S/S X000 X001 X002 X003

PLC

Transistor output
COM1 Y000 Y001 Y002 Y003

446
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.3 FNC 72 – DSW / Digital Switch (Thumbwheel Input)

11
15.3 FNC 72 – DSW / Digital Switch (Thumbwheel Input)

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction reads the set value of digital switches.
This instruction can read a set of 4 digits (n = K1) or two sets of 4 digits (n = K2).
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1. Instruction format

FNC 72 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
DSW Continuous
9 steps DSW −
Operation
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Head device (X) number connected to a digital switch
S Bit
(Four devices are occupied.)
Head device (Y) number to which the strobe signal is output
14
D1 Bit

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
(Four devices are occupied.)
Device number storing the numeric value of a digital switch
D2 16-bit binary
("n" devices are occupied.)
n Total number of 4-digit switch sets (4 digits/set) (n = 1 or 2) 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices 15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3
16
D1 3 3

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
D2 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3
n 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

17
Explanation of function and operation

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1. 16-bit operation (DSW)
The value of each digital switch connected to S is input in the time division method (in which the value is
input from the 1st digit in turn by the output signal at the interval of 100 ms), and stored to D2 .
Strobe 18
Command signal
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

input FNC 72 S‚ D1 ‚ D2 ‚ n
DSW

1) Data D1
- A numeric value from 0 to 9999 (up to 4 digits) can be read. 19
- A numeric value is stored in the binary format.
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

- The first set is stored to D2 , and the second set is stored to D2 +1.

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

447
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.3 FNC 72 – DSW / Digital Switch (Thumbwheel Input)

2) Specification of the number of sets ("n")

- When using one set of 4 digits [n = k1]
A 4-digit BCD digital switch connected to S to S +3 is read in turn by the strobe signal D1 to
D1 +3, and stored in the binary format to D2 .
- When using two sets of 4 digits [n = k2]
A 4-digit BCD digital switch connected to S to S +3 is read in turn by the strobe signal D1 to
D1 +3, and stored in the binary format to D2 .
A 4-digit BCD digital switch connected to S +4 to S +7 is read in turn by the strobe signal D1
to D1 +3, and stored in the binary format to D2 +1.

Related devices
→ For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Device Name Description
OFF: Data is being output to D1 to D1 +3 or the instruction is not executed yet.
Instruction execution
M8029 ON: A cycle operation of outputting data to D1 to D1 +3 (scan of the 1st to 4th
complete flag
digits) is completed.

Cautions
1. When the command contact turns OFF
Though the contents of D2 do not change, all of D1 to D1 +3 turn OFF.

2. Number of occupied devices

1) When two sets of 4 digits (n = K2) are used, two devices are occupied starting from D2 .
2) When one set of 4 digits is used, four devices are occupied starting from S . When two sets of 4 digits
is used, eight devices are occupied starting from S .

3. When connecting a digital switch of up to 3 digits

It is not necessary to wire the strobe signal (output for digit specification) D1 to unused digits. Because
unused digits are occupied also by this instruction, however, they cannot be used for any other purpose.
Make sure to leave unused outputs vacant.

4. Transistor output type is recommended

For continuously receiving digital switch values, make sure to use a transistor output type PLC.
→ For a relay type PLC, refer to "How to use this instruction in a relay output type PLC" later.

5. Digital switches
Use BCD output type digital switches.

Program example
In the program example shown below, digital switches are connected to inputs starting from X010 and outputs
from Y010.

1. Program
S‚ D1 ‚ D2 ‚ n
X000
FNC 72 X010 Y010 D 0 K 1
DSW

448
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.3 FNC 72 – DSW / Digital Switch (Thumbwheel Input)

11
2. Connection diagram

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
The figure below shows an example of the FX3U series main unit (sink input/sink output).
For wiring details, refer to the following manuals.
→ FX3G Hardware Edition
→ FX3U Hardware Edition
→ FX3UC Hardware Edition 12
100

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
To
101 second
2
10 set
103
BCD type 100 101 102 103
digital
switch BCD type
digital
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Diode of switch
0.1 A, 50 V
is required.
1 To
2 second
3
1 2 4 8 1 2 4 8 4
set
14
24V 0V S/S X010 X011 X012 X013 X014 X015 X016 X017

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Inputs of first set Inputs of second set

PLC
COM3 Y010 Y011 Y012 Y013
100 101 102 103 15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
3. Timing chart
X000

Y010 0.1 sec

Repeated
operation 0.1 sec 0.1 sec 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Y011 0.1 sec

Y012 0.1 sec Pause

Y013 0.1 sec

M8029 Complete flag 17

While X000 is ON, Y010 to Y013 turn ON in turn at every 100 ms. After one cycle is finished, the execution

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
complete flag M8029 turns ON.

4. How to use this instruction in a relay output type PLC

By providing a "digital switch read input", this instruction can be used in a relay output type PLC.
When the push button switch (X000) is pressed, DSW (FNC 72) instruction executes a series of operations. 18
Accordingly, with regard to this program, it is not necessary to consider the relay contact life even if Y010 to
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

Y013 are relay outputs.

X000
SET M 0

M 0
19
FNC 72 X010 Y010 D 0 K 1
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

DSW
M8029
RST M 0

1) While M0 (digital switch read input) is ON, DSW (FNC 72) is driven. 20
2) DSW (FNC 72) completes one cycle of operation, and remains driven until the execution complete flag
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

(M8029) turns ON.

449
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.4 FNC 73 – SEGD / Seven Segment Decoder

15.4 FNC 73 – SEGD / Seven Segment Decoder

Outline
This instruction decodes data, and turns the seven-segment display unit (1 digit) ON.

1. Instruction format

FNC 73 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
SEGD P 5 steps SEGD Continuous
−
Operation
SEGDP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Head word device to be decoded 16-bit binary
Word device number storing the data to be displayed in the seven-segment
D 16-bit binary
display unit

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (SEGD and SEGDP)
"0" to "F" (hexadecimal numbers) in low-order 4 bits (1 digit) of S are decoded to data for the seven-
segment display unit, and stored the low-order 8 bits of D .
Command
input FNC 73 S‚ D‚
SEGD

450
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.4 FNC 73 – SEGD / Seven Segment Decoder

11
2. Seven-segment decoding table

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
S D
Hexadeci- Seven-segment Display
mal num- b3 b2 b1 b0 configuration B15 ... B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0 data
ber
12
0 0 0 0 0 − − 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1 0 0 0 1 − − 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

2 0 0 1 0 − − 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1

3 0 0 1 1 − − 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
4 0 1 0 0 − − 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

5 0 1 0 1 − − 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1

− −
6 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
14
7 0 1 1 1 − − 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
8 1 0 0 0 − − 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

9 1 0 0 1 − − 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1

A 1 0 1 0 − − 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
B 1 0 1 1 − − 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0

C 1 1 0 0 − − 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1

D 1 1 0 1 − − 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
E 1 1 1 0 − − 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1

F 1 1 1 1 − − 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1

The head bit device or the least significant

17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
bit of a word device is handled as B0.

Caution
1. Number of occupied devices
Low-order 8 bits of D are occupied, and high-order 8 bits do not change. 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

451
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.5 FNC 74 – SEGL / Seven Segment With Latch

15.5 FNC 74 – SEGL / Seven Segment With Latch

Outline
This instruction controls one or two sets of 4-digit seven-segment display units having the latch function.

1. Instruction format

FNC 74 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
SEGL Continuous
7 steps SEGL Operation −

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Head word device converted into the BCD format 16-bit binary

D Head Y number to be output Bit

n Parameter number [setting range: K0 (H0) to K7 (H7)] 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3
n 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (SEGL)
The 4-digit numeric value stored in S is converted into BCD data, and each digit is output to the seven-
segment display unit with the BCD decoder in the time division method.
Command
input FNC 74 S‚ D‚ n
SEGL

When using one set of 4 digits (n = K0 to K3)

→ For selection of "n", refer to Subsection 15.5.2.
1) Data and strobe signal
A 4-digit numeric value stored in S is converted from binary into BCD, and each digit is output in turn
from D to D +3 in the time division method.
The strobe signal is output in turn from D +4 to D +7 in the time division method also to latch one
set of 4-digit seven-segment display unit.
2) For S , binary data in the range from 0 to 9999 is valid.

452
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.5 FNC 74 – SEGL / Seven Segment With Latch

11
3) Example of connecting one seven-segment display unit

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
The figure below shows an example of the FX3U series main unit (sink output).
For wiring details, refer to the following manuals.
→ FX3G Hardware Edition
→ FX3U Hardware Edition
→ FX3UC Hardware Edition
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
PLC (transistor output type)
COM D ‚ D ‚ +1 D ‚ +2 D ‚ +3 D ‚ +4 D ‚ +5 D ‚ +6 D ‚ +7
1 2 4 8 100 101 102 103 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
103 102 101 100
V+
1
2
4
8
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
1st set

When using two sets of 4 digits (n = K4 to K7)

→ For selection of "n", refer to Subsection 15.5.2.
1) Data and strobe signal 15
a) 1st set of 4 digits

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
A 4-digit numeric value stored in S is converted from binary into BCD, and its each digit is output
in turn from D to D +3 in the time division method.
The strobe signal is output in turn from D +4 to D +7 in the time division method also to latch
the first set of 4-digit seven-segment display unit.
b) 2nd set of 4 digits 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
A 4-digit numeric value stored in S +1 is converted from binary into BCD, and its each digit is
output in turn from D +10 to D +13 in the time division method.
The strobe signal is output in turn from D +4 to D +7 in the time division method also to latch
the second set of 4-digit seven-segment display unit. (The strobe signal outputs D +4 to D +7
are shared by the 1st and 2nd sets.)
17
2) For S and S +1, binary data in the range from 0 to 9999 is valid.

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
3) Example of connecting two seven-segment display units
The figure below shows an example of the FX3U series main unit (sink output).
For wiring details, refer to the following manuals.
→ FX3G Hardware Edition
→ FX3U Hardware Edition 18
→ FX3UC Hardware Edition
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

PLC
(transistor output type)
COM D ‚ D ‚ +1 D ‚ +2 D ‚ +3 D ‚ +4 D ‚ +5 D ‚ +6 D ‚ +7 COM D ‚ +10 D ‚ +11 D ‚ +12 D ‚ +13 19
1 2 4 8 100 101 102 103 1 2 4 8
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

103 102 101 100 103 102 101 100

V+ V+
1
2
1
2 20
4 4
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

8 8

1st set 2nd set

453
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.5 FNC 74 – SEGL / Seven Segment With Latch

Related devices
→ For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Device Name Description
Instruction execution
M8029 Turns ON when output of 4 digits is finished.
complete flag

Cautions
1. Time to update the 4-digit seven-segment display
The scan time (operation cycle) multiplied by 12 is required to update (one or two sets of) the 4-digit display.

2. Operation when the command input turns OFF

While the command input is ON, the operation is repeated.
When the command contact is set to OFF in the middle of an operation, the operation is paused. When the
command contact is set to ON again, the operation is started from the beginning.

3. Number of occupied devices

When one set of 4 digits is used: 1 device is occupied from the head device specified in S .
8 devices are occupied from the head device specified in D . Even if
the number of digits is smaller than 4, unused devices cannot be used
for any other purpose.
When two sets of 4 digits are used: 2 devices are occupied from the head device specified in S .
Twelve devices are occupied from the head device specified in D .
Even if the number of digits is smaller than 4, unused devices cannot be
used for any other purpose.

4. Scan time (operation cycle) and the display timing

SEGL instruction is executed in synchronization with the scan time (operation cycle) of the PLC.
For achieving a series of display, the scan time of the PLC should be 10 ms or more.
If the scan time is less than 10 ms, use the constant scan mode so that the scan time exceeds 10 ms.

5. Output type of the PLC

Use a transistor output type PLC.

454
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.5 FNC 74 – SEGL / Seven Segment With Latch

11
15.5.1 How to select a seven-segment display unit

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
When selecting a seven-segment display unit based on its electrical characteristics, refer to the manual
below:
→ For the wiring, refer to the Hardware Edition of the used PLC.

1. Points to be checked for the seven-segment specifications 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1) Whether the input voltage and current characteristics of the data input and strobe signal satisfy the output
specifications of the PLC.
- Whether the input signal voltage (Lo) is approximately 1.5 V or less
- Whether the input voltage is from 5V DC to 30V DC
2) Whether the seven-segment display unit has the BCD decoding and latch functions 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
15.5.2 How to select parameter "n" based on seven-segment display specifications
The value set to the parameter "n" varies depending on the signal logic of the seven-segment display. Select
"n" as described below.
The check column is provided at the bottom of the table. Check a corresponding type of logic (positive or
negative), and utilize it for parameter setting.
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
1. Role of the parameter "n"
The parameter "n" should be determined according to the data input logic (positive or negative) of the seven-
segment display unit, the logic (positive or negative) of the strobe signal and the number of sets of 4 digits to
be controlled (1 or 2).
15
2. Checking the output logic of the PLC

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Transistor outputs in PLCs are classified into the sink output type and source output type. The table below
shows the specifications for each type.
Logic Negative logic Positive logic
Output type Sink output (− common) Source output (+ common)
16
V+

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Pull-up +V0
resistor ON

Logic 1 HIGH
Output circuit Y000 Logic 1
Y000
LOW
ON
Pull- 17
down

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
COM1 resistor
PLC PLC

Because transistor output (sink) is provided, the Because transistor output (source) is provided, the
output becomes low level (0 V) when the internal output becomes high level (V+) when the internal
Description
logic is "1 (ON output)". This is called "negative
logic."
logic is "1 (ON output)". This is called "positive
logic." 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

Check

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

455
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.5 FNC 74 – SEGL / Seven Segment With Latch

3. Confirming the logic of the seven-segment display unit

1) Data input
Logic Negative logic Positive logic

D‚ H H D‚ H L H L
1 1
D ‚ +1 2
H D ‚ +1 2
H L
H
Timing chart D ‚ +2 4 D ‚ +2 4
D ‚ +3 8 D ‚ +3 8 H

Seven-segment Seven-segment
display display
Description BCD data at low level BCD data at high level
Check

2) Strobe signal
Logic Negative logic Positive logic

D‚ 1 H D‚ 1 H

...

...
...

...

D ‚ +3 8 D ‚ +3 8
Timing chart
D ‚ +4 to D ‚ +7 H H D ‚ +4 to D ‚ +7 L H L H
Change in Change in
strobe display Nothing Nothing strobe display Nothing Nothing

Latch Latch

Description Data latched at low level is held. Data latched at high level is held.
Check

4. Setting the parameter "n"

Set a proper value according to the logic (positive or negative) of the PLC and the logic (positive or negative)
of the seven-segment display unit as shown in the table below:
Parameter "n"
PLC output logic Data input Strobe signal
4 digits × 1 set 4 digits × 2 sets
Negative logic (match) 0 4
Negative logic (match)
Positive logic (mismatch) 1 5
Negative logic
Negative logic (match) 2 6
Positive logic (mismatch)
Positive logic (mismatch) 3 7
Positive logic (match) 0 4
Positive logic (match)
Negative logic (mismatch) 1 5
Positive logic
Positive logic (match) 2 6
Negative logic (mismatch)
Negative logic (mismatch) 3 7

5. Explanation of the parameter "n" setting method according to an actual example

When the following seven-segment display unit is selected, "n" should be "1" when one display unit is
connected (4 digits × 1 set) or "5" when two display units are connected (4 digits × 2 sets).
1) Transistor output of PLC
- Sink output = Negative logic
- Source output = Positive logic
2) Seven-segment display unit
- Data input = Negative logic
- Strobe signal = Positive logic
Parameter "n"
PLC output logic Data input Strobe signal
4 digits × 1 set 4 digits × 2 sets
Negative logic (match) 0 4
Negative logic (match)
Positive logic (mismatch) 1 5
Negative logic
Negative logic (match) 2 6
Positive logic (mismatch)
Positive logic (mismatch) 3 7

456
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.6 FNC 75 – ARWS / Arrow Switch

11
15.6 FNC 75 – ARWS / Arrow Switch

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction inputs data through arrow switches used for shifting the digit and incrementing/decrementing
the numeric value in each digit.
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1. Instruction format

FNC 75 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
ARWS Continuous
9 steps ARWS −
Operation
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Head bit device number to be input 16-bit binary

D1 Word device number storing data converted into BCD 16-bit binary 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
D2 Head bit device (Y) number connected to seven-segment display unit 16-bit binary
n Number of digits of seven-segment display unit [setting range: K0 to K3] 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices

Oper-
Bit Devices Word Devices Others 15
Special Con- Real Charac-

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 S 3

D1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

D2 3 3
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
n 3 3

S: "D….b" cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z).

17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

457
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.6 FNC 75 – ARWS / Arrow Switch

Explanation of function and operation

Four arrow switches are connected to the inputs S to S +3, a seven-segment display unit having the
BCD decoder is connected to the outputs D2 to D2 +7, and a numeric value is input to D1 .

1. 16-bit operation (ARWS)

D1 actually stores a 16-bit binary value in the range from 0 to 9999, but the value is expressed in the BCD
format in the explanation below for convenience.
When the command input is set to ON, ARWS instruction executes the following operation.
Command
input
FNC 75 S‚ D1 ‚ D2 ‚ n
ARWS

Contents of the display and operation part

Display/operation panel

103
D2 ‚ +7

Strobe output
102
D2 ‚ +6
To outputs in
101
D2 ‚ +5 PLC
100
D2 ‚ +4
← Display for
selected digit

Seven-segment display unit

Equipped with the latch function so that a
numeric value being set can be seen.

8
Numeric value

D2 ‚ +3
4
output

Increment D2 ‚ +2 To outputs in
2 PLC
D2 ‚ +1
S ‚ +1 1
D2 ‚
Higher Lower S ‚ +3
digit digit
Switches

S ‚ +3 S ‚ +2 S ‚ +2 To inputs in
S‚ PLC
S ‚ +1
Decrement S‚
Arrow switches
Provided to select a digit and increment or
decrement the numeric value in the selected digit.

1) Specifying the number of digits of the seven-segment display unit having the BCD decoder n
In the explanation below, "n" is set to "4" (up to the 103 digit).
2) Operation of the digit selection switches ( S +2 and S +3)
- Operation when the lower digit input S +2 turns ON
Every time the lower digit switch is pressed, the digit specification changes in the way "103 → 102 → 101
→ 100 → 103".
- Operation when the higher digit input S +3 turns ON
Every time the higher digit switch is pressed, the digit specification changes in the way "103 → 100 →
101 → 102 → 103".
3) Operation of the LED for displaying a selected digit ( D2 +4 to D2 +7)
A specified digit can be displayed by the LED offered by the strobe signals D2 +4 to D2 +7.

458
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.6 FNC 75 – ARWS / Arrow Switch

11
4) Operation of the switches for changing data in each digit ( S and S +1)

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
In a digit specified by a digit selection switch described above, data is changed as follows:
- When the increment input turns ON
Every time the increment switch is pressed, the contents of D1 change in the way "0 → 1 → 2 → ... →
8 → 9 → 0 → 1".
- When the decrement input turns ON 12
Every time the decrement switch is pressed, the contents of D1 change in the way "0 → 9 → 8 → 7

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
... 1 → 0 → 9".
The contents can be displayed in the seven-segment display unit.
As described above, a target numeric value can be written to D1 using a series of operation while
looking at the seven-segment display unit.
13
Cautions

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
1. Setting of the parameter "n"
Refer to the explanation of parameter setting in SEGL (FNC 74) instruction. The setting range is from 0 to 3
for ARWS instruction.
→ For the parameter setting, refer to Subsection 15.5.2. 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
2. Output type of the PLC
Use a transistor output type PLC.

3. Scan time (operation cycle) and the display timing

ARWS instruction is executed in synchronization with the scan time (operation cycle) of the PLC.
For achieving a series of display, the scan time of the PLC should be 10 ms or more. 15
If the scan time is less than 10 ms, use the constant scan mode so that the scan time exceeds 10 ms.

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
4. Number of occupied devices
1) Four input devices are occupied starting from S .
2) Eight output devices are occupied starting from D2 .
16
5. Limitation in the number of the instruction

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
ARWS instruction can be used only once in a program.
When ARWS instruction should be used two or more times, use the indexing (V, Z) function.

17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

459
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.6 FNC 75 – ARWS / Arrow Switch

Program example
1. When changing the timer number and displaying the current value
1) Specifying the timer number using a 3-digit digital switch
X010
X011
X012
X013

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

102 101 100

Y012 Y011 Y010
2) Setting the constant of the timer using the arrow switches
Y007 Y006 Y005 Y004

Read 1
Y000
Y014 2
Y001
4
Y015 Y002
8
Write Y003

Read
Set
Write
X004 X003 X002 X000 X001

Explanation of operation
Every time the read/write key is pressed, the read/write LED lights alternately.
• In reading
Set the timer number using the digital switch, and then press the set switch (X003).
• In writing
Set a numeric value using the arrow switches while looking at the seven-segment display unit, and then
press the switch X003.

460
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.6 FNC 75 – ARWS / Arrow Switch

11
Program

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
T0 D300

T1 D301 Practical
timer circuit 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
T99 D399
X000
M0 Decrement
X001
M1 Increment 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
X002
M2 Higher digit
M8000
M3 Lower digit
RUN monitor
X004
FNC 66
14
M100

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Read/write ALTP

M100
Y014 Read indication
M100
Y015 Write indication 15
Y014 X003

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
FNC 72 X010 Y010 Z K1
Read Set DSW
Digital switch → Z 4 digits × 1 set
Y014
FNC 74 T0Z Y000 K 1 4 digits × 1 set
Read SEGL Negative logic
16
T0Z → Seven-segment display unit

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Y015
FNC 12 D300Z D511
Write MOVP
FNC 75 M0 D511 Y000 K1
ARWS
(M 0 to M 3) → (D511) → (Y000 to Y007) 17
→ Seven-segment display unit

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
4 digits × 1 set
Y015 X003
FNC 12 D511 D300Z
Write Set MOVP

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

461
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.7 FNC 76 – ASC / ASCII Code Data Input

15.7 FNC 76 – ASC / ASCII Code Data Input

Outline
This instruction converts a half-width alphanumeric character string into ASCII codes.
Use this instruction for selecting one among two or more messages and displaying it on an external display
unit.

1. Instruction format

FNC 76 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
ASC Continuous
11 steps ASC Operation −

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Character string
S Eight half-width alphanumeric characters input from a personal computer
(only ASCII codes)
D Head word device number storing ASCII data 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
*1
S 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3

*1. It is not necessary to attach quotes (" ") to the character string specified in S .

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (ASC)
The half-width alphanumeric characters specified in S are converted into ASCII codes, and each ASCII
code is transferred in turn to D .
• S can handle half-width characters A to Z, 0 to 9 and symbols (, but cannot handle regular-width
characters).
A character string is entered when a program is created with a programming tool.
• D stores converted ASCII codes in the order of low-order 8 bits and high-order 8 bits by 2 characters/
byte at one time.

Command High-order 8 Low-order 8

input FNC 76 bits bits
S D‚
ASC D‚ 42 (B) 41 (A)
Example: ABCDEFGH
D ‚ +1 44 (D) 43 (C)

D ‚ +2 46 (F) 45 (E)

D ‚ +3 48 (H) 47 (G)

462
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.7 FNC 76 – ASC / ASCII Code Data Input

11
Extension function

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
When M8161 is set to ON for making the extension function valid, a half-width alphanumeric character string
specified in S is converted into ASCII codes, and transferred in turn only to low-order 8 bits (1 byte) of
D .
Command
input 12
M8161

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC 76 S D‚
ASC

M8000 Example: ABCDEFGH

M8161
13
"H00" is stored in high-order 8 bits.

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
D S
High-order 8 bits Low-order 8 bits Character string
D 00 41 A

D +1 00 42 B 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
D +2 00 43 C

D +3 00 44 D

D +4 00 45 E

D +5 00 46 F
15
D +6 00 47 G

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D +7 00 48 H

Related devices
Device Name Description 16
8-bit processing mode for ASC (FNC 76), RS (FNC 80), ASCI (FNC 82), HEX (FNC

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
83) and CCD (FNC 84) instructions
M8161 Extension function flag OFF: Two characters are stored to low-order 8 bits and high-order 8 bits in this order
at one time (2 characters/word).
ON: One character is stored to low-order 8 bits at one time (1 character/word).

Caution
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1. Number of occupied devices
1) While the extension function is OFF
- D occupies as many devices as the number of characters divided by "2". (The decimal point is
rounded up.) 18
2) While the extension function is ON
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

- D occupies as many devices as the number of characters in the character string.

2. When using RS (FNC 80), ASCI (FNC 82), HEX (FNC 83) and/or CCD (FNC 84) instructions
The extension function flag M8161 is also used for other instructions.
When using an instruction described above and the ASC instruction in the same program, make sure to set 19
M8161 to ON or OFF just before the ASC instruction so that M8161 does not apply to another instruction.
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

463
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.8 FNC 77 – PR / Print (ASCII Code)

15.8 FNC 77 – PR / Print (ASCII Code)

Outline
This instruction outputs ASCII code data to outputs (Y) in parallel.

1. Instruction format

FNC 77 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
PR Continuous
5 steps PR Operation −

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Character string
S Head device number storing ASCII code data
(only ASCII codes)
D Head output (Y) number to which ASCII code data is output Bit

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (PR)
ASCII codes stored in low-order 8 bits (1 byte) of S to S +7 are output to D to D +7 in turn by
one character at a time in the time division method.
Command
input FNC 77 S‚ D‚
PR

The timing chart below shows a case in which the following ASCII codes are stored in S to S +7.
Eight bytes are sent from S = "A" at first to " S +7 = "H" at the end.
S S +1 S +2 S +3 S +4 S +5 S +6 S +7
A (H41) B (H42) C (H43) D (H44) E (H45) F (H46) G (H47) H (H48)

464
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.8 FNC 77 – PR / Print (ASCII Code)

11
2. Timing chart

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Command input

S1 ‚ S1 ‚ +1 S1 ‚ +2 S1 ‚ +3 S1 ‚ +7

D ‚ to D ‚ +7 Data A B C D H 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
T0 T0
T0: Scan time (ms)
T0
D ‚ +8 Strobe

D ‚ +9 Execution flag
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Types of output signals
• D to D +7: Sending output ( D handles low-order bits, and D +7 handles high-order bits.)
• D +8: Strobe signal
• D +9: Execution flag which operates as shown in the above timing chart
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Extension function
1. 16-byte serial output
Depending on the ON/OFF status of the special auxiliary relay M8027, the number of characters output by
one-time execution of the instruction varies.
While M8027 is OFF, 8-byte serial output (fixed to 8 characters) is executed. While M8027 is ON, 16-byte 15
serial output (1 to 16 characters) is executed.

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
In the example shown below, up to 16 characters (1 character/byte) are output to the display unit (external
display unit A6FD, for example).
It is supposed that data to be displayed is stored in hexadecimal codes in D300 to D307.
1) Connection example of the external display unit A6FD*1
The PLC shown in the example below is the FX2N-16EYT (sink input/sink output) connected to the 16
FX3U-32M….

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
PLC

17
COM1 Y020 Y021 Y022 Y023 Y024 Y025 Y026 Y027 COM2 Y030 Y031 Y032 Y033

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
NC
12V
24V AC100/200V
∼
18
COM D 0 D 1 D 2 D 3 D 4 D 5 D 6 D 7 STR AC AC
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

External display unit A6FD*1

LG

*1. A6FD was distributed only inside Japan, however, production of the external display unit A6FD was
terminated in November 2002.
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

465
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.8 FNC 77 – PR / Print (ASCII Code)

2) Timing chart (while M8027 is ON)

Operation is started when X000 turns ON from OFF.
Drive input X000

Head Last
Data Y007 to Y000 character character*
T T T T: Operation cycle
or interrupt time
Strobe Y010

Execution flag Y011

Execution complete flag M8029

* If "H00 (NUL code)" is contained in the data (16 characters), the character just before "H00 (NUL code)"
is handled as the last character.

Related devices
Device Name Description
OFF: 8-byte serial output (fixed to 8 characters)
M8027*1 PR mode
ON: 16-byte serial output (1 to 16 characters)

*1. Cleared when the PR mode is changed from RUN to STOP.

Cautions
1. Command input and instruction operation
While the command input is ON: Even if the command input is continuously ON or if the pulse operation type
instruction is used, execution is completed after a series of outputs. M8029
turns ON only while M8027 is ON.
While the command input is OFF: All outputs are OFF.

2. Relationship with the scan time (operation cycle)

This instruction is executed in synchronization with the scan time.
If the scan time is short, the constant scan mode can be used. If the scan mode is too long, the timer interrupt
function can be used.

3. Output type of the PLC

Use a transistor output type PLC.

4. When "00H (NUL code)" is contained in the data (while M8027 is ON)
The instruction is executed completely, and the data after "00H" is not output.
M8029 remains ON during one operation cycle.

5. This instruction can only be executed twice in a program.

466
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.9 FNC 78 – FROM / Read From A Special Function Block

11
15.9 FNC 78 – FROM / Read From A Special Function Block

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction reads the contents of buffer memories (BMF) in a special extension unit/block attached to a
PLC.
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
When a large capacity of buffer memory (BFM) data is read by this instruction, a watchdog timer error may
occur. When bad effect is not given to the control even if data to be read is divided, use RBFM (FNC278)
instruction.
→ For RBFM (FNC278) instruction, refer to Section 31.1.

1. Instruction format 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
FNC 78 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D FROM P 9 steps FROM Continuous
17 steps DFROM
Continuous
Operation Operation
FROMP Pulse (Single) DFROMP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Operand Type Description Data Type
Unit number of a special extension unit/block
m1 16- or 32-bit binary
(K0 to K7 from the right side of the main unit)
m2 Transfer source buffer memory (BFM) number 16- or 32-bit binary
D Transfer destination device number 16- or 32-bit binary 15
n Number of transfer points 16- or 32-bit binary

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and
Type
System User Digit Specification System User
Unit
Index
stant Number ter String
Pointer
16
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
m1 3 3 3 3
m2 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Explanation of function and operation
1. 16-bit operation (FROM and FROMP)
→ For the common items between FROM instruction and TO instruction,
refer to Subsection 15.9.1.
18
Special extension unit/block (BFM) → PLC (word device)
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

"n"-point 16-bit data starting from the buffer memory (BFM) # m2 inside a special extension unit/block No. m1
are transferred (read) to "n"-point 16-bit data starting from D inside a PLC.
Command
input FNC 78
FROM
m1 m2 D‚ n
19
Number of transfer points
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

n = 1 to 32767
Transfer destination (PLC)
Transfer source BFM #
(Special extension unit/block)
m2 = 0 to 32766
Unit No. 20
m1 = 0 to 7
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

467
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.9 FNC 78 – FROM / Read From A Special Function Block

2. 32-bit operation (DFROM and DFROMP)

Special extension unit/block (BFM) → PLC (word device)
"n" 32-bit data starting from the buffer memory (BFM) # [m2+1, m2] inside a special extension unit/block No.
m1 are transferred (read) to "n" devices starting from [ D +1, D ] inside a PLC.
Command
input FNC 78 m1 m2 D‚ n
DFROM
Number of transfer points
n = 1 to 16383
Transfer destination (PLC)
Transfer source BFM #
(Special extension unit/block)
m2 = 0 to 32765
Unit No.
m1 = 0 to 7

Related devices
Device Name Description
Disables or enables interrupts while FROM/TO instruction is executed.
→ For details, refer to "Acceptance of interrupts while FROM/TO instruction is
executed (M8028)" on the next page.
M8028 Enable interrupt flag
OFF: Disables interrupts.
(Interrupts are executed after FROM/TO instruction is executed.)
ON: Enables interrupts.

Cautions

1. Digit specification in bit device D

For the 16-bit operation instruction, specify K1 to K4. For the 32-bit operation instruction, specify K1 to K8.

468
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.9 FNC 78 – FROM / Read From A Special Function Block

11
Program examples

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
In programs, the contents of buffer memories (BFMs) in special extension units/blocks are read (transferred)
to data registers (D), extension registers (R) and auxiliary relays (M) with digit specification using the FROM
instruction and direct specification of buffer memories*1.
*1. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Example: When the BFM #4 (abnormal station information) in the CC-Link/LT master unit (whose unit number
is fixed to "0") built in the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) is read to D0
- In case of FROM instruction
M8000 FNC 78 K0 K4 D0 K1
FROM
13
Unit BFM #4 Transfer Number of

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
No. 0 destination transfer
points

- In case of MOV instruction

M0 FNC 78 K0 K0 D10 K4
FROMP 14
Transfer Number of

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Unit BFM #0
No. 0 destination transfer
points
Example: When the BFMs #0 to 3 (remote station connection information) in the CC-Link/LT master unit
(whose unit number is fixed to "0") built in the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) are read to D10 to D13
- In case of FROM instruction
M0 FNC 78
15
K0 K0 D10 K4

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
FROMP
Unit BFM #0 Transfer Number of
No. 0 destination transfer
points

- In case of BMOV instruction

M0
16
FNC 15 U0\G0 D10 K4

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
BMOVP
Unit No. 0 Transfer Number of
BFM #0 destination transfer
points

17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

469
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.9 FNC 78 – FROM / Read From A Special Function Block

15.9.1 Common items between FROM instruction and TO instruction (details)

Contents specified by operands

1. Unit number "m1" of a special extension unit/block
Use the unit number to specify which equipment FROM/TO instruction works for.
Setting range: K0 to K7

Unit
No. 0
Built-in Unit Unit Unit
CC-Link/LT No.1 No.2 No.3
FX3UC-
I/O Special Special I/O Special
32MT-
extension extension extension extension extension
LT(-2)
block block block block block
main unit

A unit number is automatically assigned to each special extension unit/block connected to a PLC.
The unit number is assigned in the way "No. 0 → No. 1 → No. 2 ..." starting from the equipment nearest to the
main unit.
When the main unit is the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2), the unit number is assigned in the way "No. 1 → No. 2 → No.
3 ..." starting from the equipment nearest to the main unit because the CC-Link/LT master is built into the
FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2).

2. Buffer memory (BFM) number "m2"

Up to 32767 16-bit RAM memories are built into a special extension unit/block, and they are called buffer
memories.
Buffer memory numbers range from "0" to "32766" and their contents vary depending on the function of the
extension equipment.
Setting range: K0 to K32766
• When BFMs are handled in a 32-bit instruction, a specified BFM stores low-order 16 bits, and a
consecutive BFM stores high-order 16-bits.
High-order Low-order
16 bits 16 bits
BFM #10 BFM #9 ← Specified BFM number

3. Number of transfer points "n"

Setting range: K1 to K32767

Specify the number of transferred word devices in "n".

"n =2" in a 16-bit instruction indicates the same meaning with "n = 1" in a 32-bit instruction.
Specified devices Specified BFMs Specified devices Specified BFMs

D100 BFM #5
D100 BFM #5
D101 #6
D101 #6
D102 #7
D102 #7
D103 #8
D103 #8
D104 #9

In the case of "n = 5" in a 16-bit In the case of "n = 2" in a 32-bit
instruction instruction

470
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.9 FNC 78 – FROM / Read From A Special Function Block

11
Acceptance of interrupts while FROM/TO instruction is executed (M8028)

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. While M8028 is OFF
While a FROM/TO instruction is being executed, interrupts are automatically disabled. Input interrupts and
timer interrupts are not executed.
Interrupts generated during the execution of FROM/TO instructions are immediately executed after the
FROM/TO instruction completes.
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FROM/TO instructions can be used in interrupt programs.

2. While M8028 is ON
When an interrupt is generated during the execution of a FROM/TO instruction, the FROM/TO operation is
momentarily paused while the interrupt program executes. FROM/TO instructions cannot be used in interrupt
programs. 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Action against watchdog timer error
1. Cause of watchdog timer error
A watchdog timer error may occur in the following cases:
1) When many special extension equipment is connected 14
When many special extension equipment (such as positioning units, cam switches, link units and analog

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
units) are connected, considerable time may be required to initialize buffer memories when the PLC
mode is set to RUN, the operation time may be long, and a watchdog timer error may occur.
2) When many FROM/TO instructions are driven at the same time
When many FROM/TO instructions are driven at the same time or when many buffer memories are
transferred, the operation time may be long, and a watchdog timer error may occur. 15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
2. Countermeasures
1) Using RBFM (FNC278) or WBFM (FNC279) instruction [Ver.2.20 or later]

→ For divided BFM read [RBFM (FNC278) instruction], refer to Section 31.1.
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
→ For divided BFM write [WBFM (FNC279) instruction], refer to Section 31.2.
2) Changing the watchdog timer time
By overwriting the contents of D8000 (watchdog timer time), the watchdog timer detection time can be
changed.
When the program shown below is input, the sequence program after the input will be monitored with the
new watchdog timer time.
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
M8002
FNC 12 K300 D8000 Watchdog timer time: 300 ms
0
MOV
Initial pulse
Watchdog timer refresh
FNC 07 If WDT (FNC 07) instruction is not programmed, the value of
WDT D8000 is valid during END processing.
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

3) Changing FROM/TO instruction execution timing

Shift FROM/TO instruction execution timing to make the operation time shorter.

Handling of special extension units/blocks

For the special extension unit/block connection method, number of connectable special extension units/
blocks and handling of I/O numbers, refer to the manuals of the PLC and each special extension unit/block.
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

471
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.10 FNC 79 – TO / Write To A Special Function Block

15.10 FNC 79 – TO / Write To A Special Function Block

Outline
This instruction writes data from a PLC to buffer memories (BFM) in a special extension unit/block.
When a large capacity of data is written to buffer memories (BFM) by this instruction, a watchdog timer error
may occur. When splitting the data to be written does not affect the control, use WBFM (FNC279) instruction.
→ For WBFM (FNC279) instruction, refer to Section 31.2.

1. Instruction format

FNC 79 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D TO P 9 steps TO Continuous
17 steps DTO
Continuous
Operation Operation
TOP Pulse (Single) DTOP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Unit number of a special extension unit/block
m1 16- or 32-bit binary
(K0 to K7 from the right side of the main unit)
m2 Transfer destination buffer memory (BFM) number 16- or 32-bit binary
S Device number storing the transfer source data 16- or 32-bit binary
n Number of transfer points 16- or 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
m1 3 3 3 3
m2 3 3 3 3

S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (TO and TOP)
→ For the common items between FROM instruction and TO instruction,
refer to Subsection 15.9.1.

PLC (word device) → Special extension unit/block (BFM)

"n"-point 16-bit data starting from S inside a PLC are transferred (written) to "n"-point buffer memories
starting from the buffer memory (BFM) # m2 inside a special extension unit/block No. m1.
Command
input FNC 79 m1 m2 S‚ n
TO
Number of transfer points
n = 1 to 32767
Transfer source (PLC)
Transfer destination (Special
extension unit/block) BFM #
m2 = 0 to 32766
Unit No.
m1 = 0 to 7

472
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 15 External FX I/O Device – FNC 70 to FNC 79
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 15.10 FNC 79 – TO / Write To A Special Function Block

11
2. 32-bit operation (DTO and DTOP)

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
PLC (word device) → Special extension unit/block (BFM)
"n"-point 32-bit data starting from [ S , S +1] inside a PLC are transferred (written) to "n"-point buffer
memories starting from the buffer memory (BFM) # [m2+1, m2] inside a special extension unit/block No. m1.
Command
input FNC 79
12
m1 m2 S‚ n

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
DTO
Number of transfer points
n = 1 to 16383
Transfer source (PLC)
Transfer destination (Special
extension unit/block) BFM #
m2 = 0 to 32765
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Unit No.
m1 = 0 to 7

Related devices
Device Name Description
Disables or enables interrupts while FROM/TO instruction is executed.
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
→ For details, refer to "Acceptance of interrupt while FROM/TO instruction is
executed (M8028)" in Subsection 15.9.1.
M8028 Enable interrupt flag
OFF: Disables interrupts.
(Interrupts are executed after FROM/TO instruction is executed.)
ON: Enables interrupts.
15
Cautions

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
1. Digit specification in bit device S
For the 16-bit operation instruction, specify K1 to K4. For the 32-bit operation instruction, specify K1 to K8.

Program examples 16
In programs, the contents of data registers (D), extension registers (R), auxiliary relays (M) with digit

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
specification and constants (K and H) are written (transferred) to buffer memories (BFMs) in special extension
units/blocks using the TO instruction and direct specification of buffer memories*1.
*1. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Example: When writing "H0" to the BFM #27 (command) in the CC-Link/LT master unit (whose unit number is 17
fixed to "0") built in the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2)

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
- In case of TO instruction
M1 FNC 79 K0 K27 H0 K1
TOP
Unit
No. 0
BFM #27 Transfer Number of
source Transfer
18
data points
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

- In case of MOV instruction

M1 FNC 12 H0 U0\G27
MOVP
Transfer Unit No. 0 19
source BFM #27
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

data

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

473
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

16. External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89

FNC 80 to FNC 89 provide control instructions for special adapters mainly connected to serial ports.
PID control loop instruction is included in this group.

FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

Section
80 RS RS S m D n Serial Communication
16.1

Section
81 PRUN PRUN S D Parallel Run (Octal Mode)
16.2

Section
82 ASCI ASCI S D n Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion
16.3

Section
83 HEX HEX S D n ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion
16.4

Section
84 CCD CCD S D n Check Code
16.5

Section
85 VRRD VRRD S D Volume Read
16.6

Section
86 VRSC VRSC S D Volume Scale
16.7

Section
87 RS2 RS2 S m D n n1 Serial Communication 2
16.8

Section
88 PID PID S1 S2 S3 D PID Control Loop
16.9

89 – –

474
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.1 FNC 80 – RS / Serial Communication

11
16.1 FNC 80 – RS / Serial Communication

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction sends and receives data in no-protocol communication by way of a serial port (only the ch1) in
accordance with RS-232C or RS-485 provided in the main unit.
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1. Instruction format

FNC 80 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

RS 9 steps RS Continuous
−
Operation
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
16-bit binary or
SS1 ‚ Head device of data registers storing data to be sent
character string 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
m Number of bytes of data to be sent [setting range: 0 to 4096]*1 16-bit binary
16-bit binary or
D Head device of data registers storing received data when receiving is completed
character string
n Number of bytes to be received [setting range: 0 to 4096]*1 16-bit binary

*1. Make sure to observe "m + n ≤ 8000." 15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P 16
3 3 3

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
SS1 ‚
m 3 3 3 3
SD2 ‚ 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3

17
Explanation of function and operation

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1. 16-bit operation (RS)
This instruction sends and receives data in no-protocol communication by way of serial ports in accordance
with RS-232C or RS-485 provided in the main unit.
→ For detailed explanation, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.
18
Command
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

input FNC 80 S‚ m D‚ n
RS

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

475
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.1 FNC 80 – RS / Serial Communication

Related devices
→ For detailed explanation, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.
Device Name Device Name
M8063*1 Serial communication error 1 D8120*3 Communication format setting
*2 Sending wait flag *4 Remaining number of data to be sent
M8121 D8122
*2 Sending request *4 Monitor for number of received data
M8122 D8123
M8123*2 Receiving complete flag D8124 Header
M8124 Carrier detection flag D8125 Terminator
M8129 Time-out check flag *3 Time-out time setting
D8129
*4 8-bit processing mode *1 Error code number of serial communication error 1
M8161 D8063
D8405 Communication parameter display
D8419 Operation mode display

*1. Cleared when the power is turned off and on (in FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs).
Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN (in FX3G, FX3U and FX3UC PLCs).
*2. Cleared in the following cases:
• When the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP
• When the RS instruction is not driven
*3. Latched (battery backed).
*4. Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP.

System configuration
To use this instruction, it is necessary to attach one of the products shown in the table below to the main unit.
→ For the system configuration, refer to the respective PLC Hardware Edition manual.
→ For detailed explanation, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.
PLC Communication type Option
FX3U, RS-232C communication FX3U-232-BD or FX3U-232ADP(-MB) (with FX3U-CNV-BD)
FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) RS-485 communication FX3U-485-BD or FX3U-485ADP(-MB) (with FX3U-CNV-BD)
RS-232C communication FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
FX3UC(D,DSS)
RS-485 communication FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
RS-232C communication FX3G-232-BD or FX3U-232ADP(-MB) (with FX3G-CNV-ADP)
FX3G
RS-485 communication FX3G-485-BD or FX3U-485ADP(-MB) (with FX3G-CNV-ADP)

Differences between RS (FNC 80) instruction and RS2 (FNC 87) instruction
Item RS2 instruction RS instruction Remarks
Up to 1 character
Header size 1 to 4 characters (bytes) For the RS2 instruction, up to 4 characters
(byte)
(bytes) can be specified as a header or
Up to 1 character terminator.
Terminator size 1 to 4 characters (bytes)
(byte)
For the RS2 instruction, the check sum can
be automatically attached to the sent and
The check sum should
Attachment of check The check sum can be received data.
be attached by a user
sum automatically attached. In this case, however, make sure to use a
program.
terminator with the communication frame to
be sent and received.

Cautions
→ For other cautions, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.
• RS (FNC 80) instruction can be used for ch1 only (cannot be used for ch2).
• Do not drive two or more RS (FNC 80) and/or RS2 (FNC 87) instructions for the same port at the same
time.
• It is not permitted to use an RS (FNC 80)/RS2 (FNC 87) instruction and an IVCK (FNC270)/IVDR
(FNC271)/IVRD (FNC272)/IVWR (FNC273)/IVBWR (FNC274) instruction for the same port.

476
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.2 FNC 81 – PRUN / Parallel Run (Octal Mode)

11
16.2 FNC 81 – PRUN / Parallel Run (Octal Mode)

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction handles the device number of
as octal numbers, and transfers data.
S with digit specification and the device number of D 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1. Instruction format

FNC 81 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D PRUN P PRUN Continuous
9 steps DPRUN
Continuous
5 steps
PRUNP
Operation
Pulse (Single) DPRUNP
Operation
Pulse (Single) 13
Operation Operation

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
SS1 ‚ Digit specification *1

*1
16- or 32-bit binary
14
D Device number of transfer destination 16- or 32-bit binary

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
*1. Make sure that the least significant digit of a specified device number is "0".

3. Applicable devices

Oper-
Bit Devices Word Devices
Special Con- Real
Others
Charac-
15
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

SS1 ‚ 3 3 3

SD2 ‚ 3 3 3
16
Explanation of function and operation

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1. 16-bit operation (PRUN and PRUNP)
Octal bit device → Decimal bit device

Command
S‚ D‚ 17
input FNC 81

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
K4X000 K4M0 X000 to X017 → M0 to M7, M10 to M17
PRUN

Octal bit device (X)

X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0

Decimal bit device (M)
M8 and M9 do not change

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

477
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.2 FNC 81 – PRUN / Parallel Run (Octal Mode)

Decimal bit device → Octal bit device

S‚ D‚
Command
input FNC 81 K4M0 K4Y000 M0 to M7, M10 to M17 → Y0 to Y17
PRUN

Not transferred
Decimal bit device (M)
M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0

Y17 Y16 Y15 Y14 Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10 Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0

Octal bit device (Y)

2. 32-bit operation (DPRUN and DPRUNP)

Octal bit device → Decimal bit device
S‚ D‚
Command
input FNC 81 K6X000 K6M0 X000 to X027 → M0 to M7, M10 to M17, M20 to M27
DPRUN

Octal bit device (X)

X27 … X20 X17 … X10 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1 X0

M27 … M20 M19 M18 M17 … M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0

M18 and M19 do not change

Decimal bit device (M)

Decimal bit device → Octal bit device

S‚ D‚
Command
input FNC 81 K6M0 K6Y000 M0 to M7, M10 to M17, M20 to M27 → Y000 to Y027
DPRUN

Decimal bit device (M)

Not transferred Not transferred

M27 … M20 M19 M18 M17 … M10 M9 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1 M0

Y27 … Y20 Y17 … Y10 Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0

Octal bit device (Y)

478
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.3 FNC 82 – ASCI / Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion

11
16.3 FNC 82 – ASCI / Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction converts hexadecimal code into ASCII code.
On the other hand, BINDA (FNC261) instruction converts binary data into ASCII code, and ESTR (FNC116)
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
instruction converts binary floating point data into ASCII code.
→ For BINDA (FNC261) instruction, refer to Section 29.6.
→ For ESTR (FNC116) instruction, refer to Section 18.4.

1. Instruction format
13
FNC 82 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
ASCI P ASCI Continuous −
7 steps Operation
ASCIP Pulse (Single) −
Operation

2. Set data 14
Operand type Description Data type

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
SS1 ‚ Head device number storing hexadecimal code to be converted 16-bit binary
Character string
D Head device number storing converted ASCII code
(only ASCII code)
Number of characters (digits) of hexadecimal code to be converted [setting
n
range: 1 to 256]
16-bit binary
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
SS1 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

SD2 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3
n 3 3 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

17
Explanation of function and operation

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1. 16-bit operation (ASCI and ASCIP)
"n" hexadecimal code characters (digits) stored in S and later are converted into ASCII code, and then
stored to the devices D and later.
The 16-bit mode and 8-bit mode options are available for this instruction. For operation in each mode, refer to 18
the proceeding pages.
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

Command
input FNC 82 S‚ D‚ n
ASCI

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

479
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.3 FNC 82 – ASCI / Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion

2. 16-bit conversion mode (while M8161 is OFF) (M8161 is also used for the RS, HEX, CCD and
CRC instructions.)
Each digit of hexadecimal data stored in S and later is converted into ASCII code, and transferred to the
high-order 8 bits and low-order 8 bits of each device D and later. The number of digits (characters) to be
converted is specified by "n".
Each ASCII code is stored in either the high-order 8 bits or low-order 8 bits of each device D and later.
M8161 is used also for RS, HEX, CCD and CRC instructions. When using the 16-bit mode, set M8161 to
normally OFF. M8161 is cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP.
M8000
M8161 16-bit mode
Command
input FNC 82 S‚ D‚ n
ASCI

Operation
In the following program, conversion is executed as follows:
M8000
M8161 16-bit mode
X010
FNC 82 D100 D200 K4
ASCI

Devices after S
D100 = 0ABCH
D101 = 1234H
D102 = 5678H

Number of specified digits (characters) and conversion result

n
K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9
D
Low-order 8 bits of D200 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] [2] [1] [8]
High-order 8 bits of D200 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] [2] [1]
Low-order 8 bits of D201 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] [2]
High-order 8 bits of D201 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3]
Low-order 8 bits of D202 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4]
High-order 8 bits of D202 [C] [B] [A] [0]
Low-order 8 bits of D203 Does not change [C] [B] [A]
High-order 8 bits of D203 [C] [B]
Low-order 8 bits of D204 [C]

Bit configuration in the case of "n = K4"

D 100 = 0ABCH
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 ASCII code
0 A B C [0] = 30H [1] = 31H [5] = 35H
D 200 [A] = 41H [2] = 32H [6] = 36H
[B] = 42H [3] = 33H [7] = 37H
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
[C] = 43H [4] = 34H [8] = 38H
[A] → 41H [0] → 30H
D 201
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
[C] → 43H [B] → 42H

• When outputting data in the BCD format for a printer, for example, it is necessary to convert binary data
into BCD data before executing this instruction.

480
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.3 FNC 82 – ASCI / Hexadecimal to ASCII Conversion

11
3. 8-bit conversion mode (while M8161 is ON)

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
(M8161 is used also for the RS, HEX, CCD and CRC instructions.)
Each digit of hexadecimal data stored in S and later is converted into an ASCII code, and transferred to
low-order 8 bits of each device D and later. The number of digits (characters) to be converted is
specified by "n". "0" is stored in high-order 8 bits of each device D and later.
M8161 is used also for the RS, HEX, CCD and CRC instructions. When using the 8-bit mode, set M8161 to 12
normally ON. M8161 is cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP.

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
M8000 When M8161 is set to ON, the 8-bit mode
M8161 8-bit mode is selected. The conversion processing is
executed as follows
Command 16 bits
input FNC 82
ASCI
S‚ D‚ n 0 Low-order 8 bits 13
Destination

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Operation
In the following program, conversion is executed as follows:
M8000
M8161 8-bit mode 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
X010
FNC 82 D100 D200 K4
ASCI

Devices after S
D100 = 0ABCH 15
D101 = 1234H

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D102 = 5678H

Number of specified digits (characters) and conversion result

n
D
K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
D 200 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] [2] [1] [8]
D 201 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] [2] [1]
D 202 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] [2]
D 203 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3]
D 204 [C] [B] [A] [0] [4]
17
D 205 [C] [B] [A] [0]

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
D 206 Does not change [C] [B] [A]
D 207 [C] [B]
D 208 [C]

Bit configuration in the case of "n = K2" 18

D 100 = 0ABCH
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 ASCII codes
0 A B C [0] = 30H [1] = 31H [5] = 35H
[A] = 41H [2] = 32H [6] = 36H
D200 = B → ASCII code = 42H [B] = 42H [3] = 33H [7] = 37H
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
[C] = 43H [4] = 34H [8] = 38H 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

4 2

D201 = C → ASCII code = 43H

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
4 3
20
• When outputting data in the BCD format for a printer, for example, it is necessary to convert binary data
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

into BCD data before executing this instruction.

481
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.4 FNC 83 – HEX / ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion

16.4 FNC 83 – HEX / ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion

Outline
This instruction converts ASCII codes into hexadecimal codes.
On the other hand, DABIN (FNC260) instruction converts ASCII codes into binary data, and EVAL (FNC117)
instruction converts ASCII codes into binary floating point data.
→ For DABIN (FNC260) instruction, refer to Section 29.5.
→ For EVAL (FNC117) instruction, refer to Section 18.5.

1. Instruction format

FNC 83 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

HEX P HEX Continuous −

7 steps Operation
HEXP Pulse (Single) −
Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
Character string
SS1 ‚ Head device number storing ASCII code to be converted
(only ASCII code)*1

D Head device number storing converted hexadecimal code 16- or 32-bit binary
n Number of ASCII codes (bytes) to be converted [setting range: 1 to 256] 16-bit binary

*1. Make sure to use only ASCII codes "0" to "9" and "A" to "F".

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

SS1 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3

SD2 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (HEX and HEXP)
Among the ASCII codes stored in S and later, "n" characters are converted into hexadecimal codes, and
then stored to the devices D and later.
The 16-bit mode and 8-bit mode are available for this instruction. For operation in each mode, refer to the
proceeding pages.
Command
input FNC 83 S‚ D‚ n
HEX

482
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.4 FNC 83 – HEX / ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion

11
2. 16-bit conversion mode (while M8161 is OFF)

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
(M8161 is used also for the RS, ASCI, CCD, and CRC instructions.)
Each ASCII code stored in high-order 8 bits and low-order 8 bits of devices S and later is converted into
a hexadecimal code, and transferred to devices D and later in units of 4 digits. The number of characters
to be converted is specified by "n".
M8161 is used also for the RS, ASCI, CCD and CRC instructions. When using the 16-bit mode, set M8161 to 12
normally OFF.

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
M8161 is cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP.
M8000
M8161 16-bit mode
Command
input FNC 83 S‚ D‚ n
13
HEX

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Operation
In the following program, conversion is executed as follows:
M8000
M8161 16-bit mode 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
X010
FNC 83 D200 D100 K4
HEX

Conversion source data

S ASCII code Hexadecimal code 15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Low-order 8 bits of D200 30H 0
High-order 8 bits of D200 41H A
Low-order 8 bits of D201 42H B
High-order 8 bits of D201 43H C
Low-order 8 bits of D202 31H 1 16
High-order 8 bits of D202 32H 2

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Low-order 8 bits of D203 33H 3
High-order 8 bits of D203 34H 4
Low-order 8 bits of D204 35H 5

Number of specified characters and conversion result 17

" • " indicates "0".

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
D In the case of "n = K4"
D 102 D 101 D 100
n D 200 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
1 •••0H 41H → [A] 30H → [0]
2
Does not change
••0AH
D 201 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
18
3 •0ABH
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

4 0ABCH 43H → [C] 42H → [B]

5 •••0H ABC1H
D 100 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
6 ••0AH BC12H
0 A B C
7 •0ABH C123H
8 0ABCH 1234H 19
•••0H
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

9 ABC1H 2345H

• When the input data is in BCD format, it is necessary to convert BCD data into binary data after executing
this instruction.
• If ASCII code is not stored in S in the HEX instruction, an operation error occurs and conversion into
hexadecimal code is disabled. Especially, note that ASCII code should be stored in high-order 8 bits of 20
S also when M8161 is OFF.
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

483
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.4 FNC 83 – HEX / ASCII to Hexadecimal Conversion

3. 8-bit conversion mode (while M8161 is ON)

(M8161 is used also for the RS, ASCI, CCD and CRC instructions.)
Each ASCII code stored in the low-order 8 bits of each device S and later is converted into a
hexadecimal code, and transferred to device D and later in 4-digits units. The number of characters to be
converted is specified by "n".
M8161 is also used for the RS, ASCI, CCD and CRC instructions. When using the 8-bit mode, set M8161 to
normally ON. M8161 is cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP.
M8000
M8161 8-bit mode 16 bits
Command Ignored Low-order 8 bits
input FNC 83 S‚ D‚ n Source data
HEX

Operation
In the following program, conversion is executed as follows:
M8000
M8161 8-bit mode
X010
FNC 83 D200 D100 K4
HEX

Conversion source data

S ASCII code Hexadecimal code
D 200 30H 0
D 201 41H A
D 202 42H B
D 203 43H C
D 204 31H 1
D 205 32H 2
D 206 33H 3
D 207 34H 4
D 208 35H 5

Number of specified characters and conversion result

" • " indicates "0".
D In the case of "n = K2"
D 102 D 101 D 100
n D 200 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
1 •••0H 30H → [0]
2 ••0AH
Does not change D 201 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1
3 •0ABH
4 0ABCH 41H → [A]
5 •••0H ABC1H D 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
6 ••0AH BC12H 0 A
7 •0ABH C123H
8 0ABCH 1234H
9 •••0H ABC1H 2345H

• When the input data is in BCD format, it is necessary to convert BCD data into binary data after executing
this instruction.

484
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.5 FNC 84 – CCD / Check Code

11
16.5 FNC 84 – CCD / Check Code

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction calculates the horizontal parity value and sum check value in the error check methods used in
communication. There is another check method, CRC (cyclic redundancy check) also. For obtaining CRC
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
value, use CRC instruction.
→ For CRC instruction, refer to Section 24.4.
→ For complement [NEG (FNC 29) instruction], refer to Section 10.10.

1. Instruction format
13
FNC 84 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
CCD P CCD Continuous −
7 steps Operation
CCDP Pulse (Single) −
Operation

2. Set data 14
Operand type Description Data type

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
16-bit binary or
SS1 ‚ Head device number of applicable device
character string
16-bit binary or
D Head device number storing the calculated data
character string
n Number of data [setting range: 1 to 256] 16-bit binary 15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P 16
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
SS1 ‚
SD2 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

17
Explanation of function and operation

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1. 16-bit operation (CCD and CCDP)
The addition data and horizontal parity value of data stored in S to S +n-1 are calculated. The
addition data is stored to D , and the horizontal parity value is stored to D +1.
The 16-bit mode and 8-bit mode are available in this instruction. For the operation in each mode, refer to the 18
proceeding pages.
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

Command
input FNC 84 S‚ D‚ n
CCD

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

485
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.5 FNC 84 – CCD / Check Code

2. 16-bit conversion mode (while M8161 is OFF)

(M8161 is also used for the RS, ASCI, HEX and CRC instructions.)
With regard to "n" data starting from S , the addition data and horizontal parity data of high-order 8 bits
and low-order 8 bits are stored to D and D +1 respectively.
M8161 is used also for the RS, ASCI, HEX and CRC instructions. When using the 16-bit mode, set M8161 to
normally OFF. M8161 is cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP.
M8000
M8161 16-bit mode
Command
input FNC 84 S‚ D‚ n
CCD

Example of 16-bit conversion

In the following program, conversion is executed as follows:
M8000
M8161 16-bit mode
X010
FNC 84 D100 D0 K10
CCD

S Example of data contents

Low-order 8 bits of D100 K100 = 01100100
High-order 8 bits of D100 K111 = 0110111 (1) ←
Low-order 8 bits of D101 K100 = 01100100
High-order 8 bits of D101 K 98 = 01100010
Low-order 8 bits of D102 K123 = 0111101 (1) ←
High-order 8 bits of D102 K 66 = 01000010
Low-order 8 bits of D103 K100 = 01100100
High-order 8 bits of D103 K 95 = 0101111 (1) ←
Low-order 8 bits of D104 K210 = 11010010
High-order 8 bits of D104 K 88 = 01011000
Total K1091
Horizontal parity 1000010 (1) ← When the number of "1" is odd, the horizontal parity is
"1".
When the number of "1" is even, the horizontal parity is
"0".

D0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 "1091" in BCD

D1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Horizontal parity

486
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.5 FNC 84 – CCD / Check Code

11
3. 8-bit conversion mode (while M8161 is ON)

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
(M8161 is used also for the RS, ASCI, HEX and CRC instructions.)
With regard to "n" data starting from S , the addition data and horizontal parity data of only low-order 8
bits are stored to D and D +1 respectively.
M8161 is also used for the RS, ASCI, HEX and CRC instructions. When using the 8-bit mode, set M8161 to
normally ON. M8161 is cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP. 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
M8000
M8161 8-bit mode 16 bits
Command Ignored Low-order 8 bits
input FNC 84 S‚ D‚ n Source data
CCD
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Example of 8-bit conversion
In the following program, conversion is executed as follows:
M8000
M8161 8-bit mode
X010
FNC 84
14
D100 D0 K10

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
CCD

S Example of data contents

D 100 K100 = 01100100
D 101 K111 = 0110111 (1) ←
15
D 102 K100 = 01100100

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D 103 K 98 = 01100010
D 104 K123 = 0111101 (1) ←
D 105 K 66 = 01000010
D 106 K100 = 01100100
D 107 K 95 = 0101111 (1) ← 16
D 108 K210 = 11010010

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
D 109 K 88 = 01011000
Total K1091
Horizontal parity 1000010 (1) ← When the number of "1" is odd, the horizontal parity is "1".
When the number of "1" is even, the horizontal parity is "0".
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
D0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 "1091" in BCD

D1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Horizontal parity
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

487
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.6 FNC 85 - VRRD / Volume Read

16.6 FNC 85 - VRRD / Volume Read

Outline
This instruction reads the analog value of a variable analog potentiometer board (FX3G-8AV-BD) attached to
the FX3G PLC main unit.

1. Instruction format

FNC 85 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
VRRD P VRRD Continuous −
5 steps Operation
VOLUME READ VRRDP Pulse (Single) −
Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
SS1 ‚ Volume number [setting range: 0 to 7] 16-bit binary

D Device to which the read analog value is transferred 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

SS1 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3

SD2 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

This instruction reads the analog value of a variable analog potentiometer board attached the PLC main unit.
This instruction converts the analog value of the variable analog potentiometer specified in SS1 ‚ into binary
8-bit data, and transfers the numeric value in the range from 0 to 255 to D .
Command
input FNC 85 S‚ D‚
VRRD

Program example
1. Example in which the read analog value is used as the set value of an analog timer
The analog value of the variable analog potentiometer No.0 is converted into binary 8-bit data, and the value
in the range from 0 to 255 is transferred to D0.
The value of D0 is used as the set value of a timer.
Volume Read
number destination
X000
FNC 85 K0 D0
VRRD

X001
D0
T0

When a value larger than 255 is required as the set value of a timer, the read value multiplied by a constant
by the FNC22 (MUL) instruction can be set indirectly as the timer constant.

488
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.6 FNC 85 - VRRD / Volume Read

11
2. Example in which the analog values of the variable analog potentiometers Nos. 0 to 7 are

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
read in turn, and used as analog timers
K0 to K7 are specified in SS1 ‚ of the VRRD instruction in accordance with the values of the variable
potentiometers VR0 to VR7.
Index (Z = 0 to 7) is used for indexing in the sequence below, and K0Z indicates K0 to K7.
12
M8000

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
0 RST Z The index register Z is reset.
RUN
monitor
FNC 08
4 FOR K8 The routine "FOR ~ NEXT" is repeated 8 times.

7
M8000
FNC 85
K0Z D200Z
Analog values of variable
potentiometers are stored in data
13
VRRD

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
registers D200 to D207.
FNC 24
INC Z Z+1→Z

FNC 09
16
NEXT
14
X000
D200

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
17 T0 Analog timer of VR0
T0
21 Y000
X001
D201
23 T1 Analog timer of VR1
Because T0 to T7 are 100
15
T1 ms timers, 0 to 25.5 sec are

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
27 Y001 obtained from the set values
0 to 255.

X007
D207
59 T7 Analog timer of VR7
16
T7

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
63 Y007

Cautions
• In 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLCs, the variable analog potentiometer board can be connected to the 17
option connector 1, and occupies the communication channel ch1.

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
In this case, the communication function using the communication channel ch1 is not available when the
VRRD or VRSC instruction is used.
• In 40-point and 60-point type FX3G PLCs, the variable analog potentiometer board can be connected only
to the option connector 2, and occupies the communication channel ch2.
In this case, the communication function using the communication channel ch2 is not available when the 18
VRRD or VRSC instruction is used.
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

→ For details, refer to the Communication Control Edition manual.

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

489
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.7 FNC 86 - VRSC / Volume Scale

16.7 FNC 86 - VRSC / Volume Scale

Outline
This instruction reads the value of a variable analog potentiometer on the variable analog potentiometer
board (FX3G-8AV-BD) attached to the FX3G PLC main unit as a numeric value in the range from 0 to 10.

1. Instruction format

FNC 86 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
VRSC P VRSC Continuous −
5 steps Operation
VOLUME SCALE VRSCP Pulse (Single) −
Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
SS1 ‚ Volume number [setting range: 0 to 7] 16-bit binary

D Device to which the read analog value is transferred 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

SS1 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3

SD2 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

This instruction reads the value of a variable analog potentiometer on the variable analog potentiometer
board attached to the main unit as a numeric value in the range from 0 to 10.
However, the actual scale value does not always correspond to the switching position of the variable analog
potentiometer scale (0 to 10).
This instruction converts into a binary value the scale value of a variable analog potentiometer specified
in SS1 ‚ , and transfers the converted binary value to D .
Command
input FNC 86 S‚ D‚
VRSC

490
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.7 FNC 86 - VRSC / Volume Scale

11
Program example

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. Example in which the scale value is used as a rotary switch
Either one among auxiliary relays M0 to M10 turns ON in accordance with the scale value in the range from
0 to 10 of the specified variable analog potentiometer.
12
X000

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC 86
VRSC K1 D1

X001 The FNC41 (DECO)

FNC 41
D1 M0 K4 instruction occupies auxiliary
DECO
relays M0 to M15.

M0 13
M0 turns ON when the scale value is "0".

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
M1
M0 turns ON when the scale value is "1".

M10 14
M0 turns ON when the scale value is "10".

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Cautions
• In 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLCs, the variable analog potentiometer board can be connected to the
option connector 1, and occupies the communication channel ch1. 15
In this case, the communication function using the communication channel ch1 is not available when the

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
VRRD or VRSC instruction is used.
• In 40-point and 60-point type FX3G PLCs, the variable analog potentiometer board can be connected only
to the option connector 2, and occupies the communication channel ch2.
In this case, the communication function using the communication channel ch2 is not available when the
VRRD or VRSC instruction is used.
→ For details, refer to the Communication Control Edition manual.
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

491
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.8 FNC 87 – RS2 / Serial Communication 2

16.8 FNC 87 – RS2 / Serial Communication 2

Outline
This instruction sends and receives data in no-protocol communication by way of serial ports in accordance
with RS-232C or RS-485 provided in the main unit.
In FX3G PLCs, data can be sent and received in no-protocol communication by way of the standard built-in
port (RS-422).

1. Instruction format

FNC 87 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

RS2 11 steps RS2 Continuous

−
Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
16-bit binary or
SS1 ‚ Head device of data registers storing data to be sent
character string
m Number of bytes of data to be sent [setting range: 0 to 4,096] 16-bit binary
16-bit binary or
D Head device of data registers storing received data when receiving is completed
character string
n Number of bytes to be received [setting range: 0 to 4,096] 16-bit binary
n1 *1 16-bit binary
Used channel number [contents of setting: K0 = ch 0, K1 = ch 1, K2 = ch 2]

*1. Ch2 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLCs.
Ch0 is available only in FX3G PLCs.

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

SS1 ‚ 3 3 3
m 3 3 3 3
SD2 ‚ 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3
n1 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (RS2)
This instruction sends and receives data in no-protocol communication by way of serial ports in accordance
with RS-232C or RS-485 provided in the main unit.
→ For detailed explanation, refer to the Data Communication Edition.
Command
input FNC 87 S‚ m D‚ n n1
RS2

492
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.8 FNC 87 – RS2 / Serial Communication 2

11
Related devices

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
→ For detailed explanation, refer to the Data Communication Edition.
Device Device
Name Name
*1 *1 *1
ch0 ch1 ch2 ch0 ch1 ch2*1
M8371 M8401 M8421 Sending wait flag*2
M8372 M8402 M8422 Sending request *2
M8370 D8400 D8420 Communication format setting
– − −
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Remaining number of data to be
M8373 M8403 M8423 Receiving complete flag*2 M8372 D8402 D8422
sent*2
– M8404 M8424 Carrier detection flag M8373 D8403 D8423 Monitor for number of received data*2
– M8405 M8425 Data Set Ready (DSR) Flag *3 M8375 D8405 D8425 Communication parameter display
– – – – M8379 D8409 D8429 Time-out time setting 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
M8379 M8409 M8429 Time-out check flag M8380 D8410 D8430 Header 1, 2
M8381 D8411 D8431 Header 3, 4
M8382 D8412 D8432 Terminator 1, 2
M8383 D8413 D8433 Terminator 3, 4
− − −
– M8384 D8414 D8434 Receiving sum (received data)
M8385 D8415 D8435 Receiving sum (calculation result)
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
M8386 D8416 D8436 Sending sum
M8389 D8419 D8439 Operation mode display
Error code number of serial
M8062 M8063 M8438 Serial communication error*4 M8062 D8063 D8438
communication error*4

*1. Ch2 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLCs. 15
Ch0 is available only in FX3G PLCs.

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
*2. Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP.
*3. Available in all FX3G PLCs and FX3U/FX3UC PLCs Ver. 2.30 or later.
*4. Cleared when the power is turned off and on.

System configuration
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
For using this instruction, it is necessary to attach one of the products shown in the table below to the main
unit.
→ For the system configuration, refer to the respective PLC Hardware Edition manual.
→ For detailed explanation, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.
PLC Communication type Option
FX3U, RS-232C communication FX3U-232-BD or FX3U-232ADP(-MB) 17
FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) RS-485 communication FX3U-485-BD or FX3U-485ADP(-MB)

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
RS-232C communication FX3U-232ADP(-MB)
FX3UC(D,DSS)
RS-485 communication FX3U-485ADP(-MB)
FX3G-232BD or FX3U-232ADP(-MB) (which requires FX3G-CNV-ADP)
RS-232C communication RS-232C/RS-422 converter*1
FX3G
(FX-232AW, FX232AWC and FX-232AWC-H) 18
RS-485 communication FX3G-485-BD or FX3U-485ADP(-MB) (which requires FX3G-CNV-ADP)
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

*1. Required to use ch0 (standard built-in RS-422 port) in FX3G PLCs.

Differences between RS (FNC 80) instruction and RS2 (FNC 87) instruction
Item
Header size
RS2 instruction RS instruction
1 to 4 characters (bytes) Up to 1 character (byte)
Remarks
19
For the RS2 instruction, up to 4 characters (bytes)
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

Terminator size 1 to 4 characters (bytes) Up to 1 character (byte) can be specified as a header or terminator.
For the RS2 instruction, the check sum can be
The check sum should
Attachment of The check sum can be automatically attached to the sent and received data.
be attached by a user
check sum automatically attached. In this case, however, make sure to use a terminator
program.
in the communication frame to be sent and received.
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

493
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.8 FNC 87 – RS2 / Serial Communication 2

Cautions
→ For other cautions, refer to the Data Communication Edition.
• Do not drive two or more RS (FNC 80) and/or RS2 (FNC 87) instructions for the same port at the same time.
• It is not permitted to use an RS (FNC 80)/RS2 (FNC 87) instruction and an IVCK (FNC270)/IVDR
(FNC271)/IVRD (FNC272)/IVWR (FNC273)/IVBWR (FNC274) instruction for the same port.
• When using a header and terminator, set the data in the header and terminator to corresponding devices
(D) before executing the RS2 instruction. Do not change the values of the header and terminator while the
RS2 instruction is being executed.

Function Changes According to Versions

Compatible Versions
Item Function Summary
FX3G FX3U FX3UC
Turns the special device M8405 ON
ch1
when the DR (DSR) signal of ch1 is
Data Set Ready (DSR) Flag
ON.
Ver. 1.00 or later Ver. 2.30 or later Ver. 2.30 or later
Turns the special device M8425 ON
ch2
when the DR (DSR) signal of ch2 is
Data Set Ready (DSR) Flag
ON.

494
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.9 FNC 88 – PID / PID Control Loop

11
16.9 FNC 88 – PID / PID Control Loop

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction executes PID control which changes the output value according to the input variation.
→ For details, refer to the Analog Control Edition.
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1. Instruction format

FNC 88 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

PID 9 steps PID Continuous

−
Operation
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
SS11 ‚ Data register number storing the target value (SV)
Data register number storing the measured value (PV)
16-bit binary
16-bit binary
14
SS12 ‚

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
S3 Data register number storing a parameter 16-bit binary

SD
1‚ Data register number storing the output value (MV) 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others 15
Oper-

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

SS11 ‚ 3 3 S

SS12 ‚ 3 3 S
16
SS23 ‚ 3 3

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
SD1 ‚ 3 3 S

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation 17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1. 16-bit operation (PID)
When the target value S1 , measured value S2 , and parameters S3 to S3 +6 are set and a
program is executed, the operation result (MV) is stored to the output value D at every sampling time
S3 .

Command
18
input
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

FNC 88 S1 S2 S3 D
PID
Output value (MV)
Parameter
Measured value (PV)
Target value (SV) 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

495
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.9 FNC 88 – PID / PID Control Loop

2. Set items
Number of
Set item Description occupied
points
• Set the target value (SV).
• PID instruction does not change the contents of setting.
Target value • Caution on using the auto tuning (limit cycle method)
S1 1
(SV) If the target value for auto tuning is different from the target value for PID control,
it is necessary to set a value including the bias value first, and then store the
actual target value when the auto tuning flag turns OFF.
Measured
S2 This is the input value in PID control loop. 1
value (PV)
1) Auto tuning: In the case of limit cycle method
Twenty-nine devices are occupied from the head device specified in S3 . 29
2) Auto tuning: In the case of step response method
S3 Parameter*1 a) Operation setting (ACT): When bits 1, 2 and 5 are not all "0"
Twenty-five devices are occupied from the head device specified in S3 .
25
b) Operation setting (ACT): When bits 1, 2 and 5 are all "0"
Twenty devices are occupied from the head device specified in S3 . 20
1) In case of PID control (normal processing)
Before driving PID instruction, the user should set the initial output value.
After that, the operation result is stored.
2) Auto tuning: In the case of limit cycle method
Output value
D During auto tuning, the ULV or LLV value is output automatically. 1
(MV)
When auto tuning is finished, the specified MV value is set.
3) Auto tuning: In the case of step response method
Before driving PID instruction, the user should set the initial output value.
During auto tuning, PID instruction does not change the MV output.
*1. When auto tuning is not used, the number of points is the same as the number in the step
response method are occupied.

3. List of parameters S3 to S3 +28

Set item Setting Value Remarks
It cannot be shorter than the operation
S3 Sampling time (Ts) 1 to 32767 (ms)
cycle.
0: Forward operation,
bit0 Operation direction
1: Backward operation
0: Input variation alarm is invalid.
bit1
1: Input variation alarm is valid.
0: Output variation alarm is invalid. Do not set to ON bit 2 and bit 5 at the same
bit2
1: Output variation alarm is valid. time.
bit3 Not available
Operation 0: Auto tuning is not executed.
S3 +1
setting (ACT) bit4 1: Auto tuning is executed.
0: Upper and lower limits of output
value are not valid. Do not set to ON bit 2 and bit 5 at the same
bit5
1: Upper and lower limits of output time.
value are valid.
0: Step response method
bit6 Select the auto tuning mode.
1: Limit cycle method
bit7 to bit15 Not available
When "0" is set, the input filter is not
S3 +2 Input filter constant (α) 0 to 99 (%)
provided.
S3 +3 Proportional gain (KP) 1 to 32767 (%)
When "0" is set, it is handled as "\" (no
S3 +4 Integral time (TI) 0 to 32767 (× 100 ms)
integration).
When "0" is set, the derivative gain is not
S3 +5 Derivative gain (KD) 0 to 100 (%)
provided.
When "0" is set, the derivative operation is
S3 +6 Derivative time (TD) 0 to 32767 (× 10 ms)
not executed.

496
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.9 FNC 88 – PID / PID Control Loop

11
Set item Setting Value Remarks

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
S3 +7
: These devices are occupied for internal processing in PID control loop. Do not change the data.
S3 +19
Input variation
S3 +20*1 (incremental) alarm set 0 to 32767 It is valid when bit 1 is set to "1" in S3 +1 12
value for the operation setting (ACT).

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Input variation
It is valid when bit 1 is set to "1" in S3 +1
S3 +21*1 (decremental) alarm set 0 to 32767
value for the operation setting (ACT).

Output variation It is valid when bit 2 is set to "1" and bit 5 is

(incremental) alarm set
value
0 to 32767 set to "0" in S3 +1 for the operation 13
setting (ACT).

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
S3 +22*1
It is valid when bit 2 is set to "0" and bit 5 is
Output upper limit set value −32768 to 32767 set to "1" in S3 +1 for the operation
setting (ACT).
Output variation It is valid when bit 2 is set to "1" and bit 5 is
(decremental) alarm set
value
0 to 32767 set to "0" in S3 +1 for the operation 14
setting (ACT).

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
S3 +23*1
It is valid when bit 2 is set to "0" and bit 5 is
Output lower limit set value −32768 to 32767 set to "1" in S3 +1 for the operation
setting (ACT).
0: Input variation (incremental) is It is valid when bit 1 is set to "1" or bit 2 is set
bit0
not exceeded.
1: Input variation (incremental) is to "1" in S3 +1 for the operation setting 15
(ACT).

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
exceeded.
0: Input variation (decremental) is
not exceeded.
bit1
1: Input variation (decremental) is
exceeded.
S3 +24*1 Alarm output
0: Output variation (incremental) is 16
not exceeded.
bit2

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1: Output variation (incremental) is
exceeded.
0: Output variation (decremental) is
not exceeded.
bit3
1: Output variation (decremental) is
exceeded. 17
The setting below is required when the limit cycle method is used (when bit 6 is set to "ON" in the operation setting (ACT)).

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
PV value threshold Set it according to the fluctuation of
S3 +25
(hysteresis) width (SHPV) the measured value (PV).
Output value upper limit Set the maximum value (ULV) of
S3 +26
(ULV) the output value (MV). They are occupied when bit 6 is set to "ON

S3 +27
Output value lower limit Set the minimum value (LLV) of the (limit cycle method)" in the operation setting
(ACT).
18
(LLV) output value (MV).
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

Wait setting from end of

S3 +28 tuning cycle to start of PID −50 to 32717%
control (Kw)

*1. S3 +20 to S3 +24 are occupied when any bit 1, 2 or 5 is set to "1" in S3 +1 for operation
setting (ACT). 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

497
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 16 External FX Device – FNC 80 to FNC 89
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 16.9 FNC 88 – PID / PID Control Loop

Cautions
1. When using two or more PID instructions
Two or more PID instructions can be executed at the same time. (There is no limitation in the number of
loops.) However, make sure that S3 , D and other operands specified in each instruction are different
to each other.

2. Number of devices occupied for parameters starting from S3

1) In the limit cycle method
- Twenty-nine devices are occupied from the head device specified in S3 .
2) In the step response method
- Operation setting (ACT): When bits 1, 2 and 5 are not all "0"
Twenty-five devices are occupied from the head device specified in S3 .
- Operation setting (ACT): When bits 1, 2 and 5 are all "0"
Twenty devices are occupied from the head device specified in S3 .

3. When specifying a device in the latched area backed up against power failure
For the output value (MV) in the PID instruction, specify a data register (D) outside the latched area.

Program example
When specifying a data register in the latched area, make sure to clear the latched (backed up) contents
when the PLC mode is set to RUN using the following program.
Program example
M8002
RST D***
Initial pulse

Data register number in the latched area specified in D

Error
When an operation error occurs, the special auxiliary relay M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in
the special data register D8067.
→ For the error code, refer to Section 37.4.

498
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 17 Data Transfer 2 – FNC100 to FNC109
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

11

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
17. Data Transfer 2 – FNC100 to FNC109
FNC100 to FNC109 provide an instruction for executing complicated processing for fundamental applied 12
instructions and for executing special processing.

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

100 – 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
101 –

Section
102 ZPUSH ZPUSH D Batch Store of Index Register
17.1 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Section
103 ZPOP ZPOP D Batch POP of Index Register
17.2

104 –
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
105 –

160 –
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
107 –

108 –
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
109 –

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

499
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 17 Data Transfer 2 – FNC100 to FNC109
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 17.1 FNC102 – ZPUSH/Batch Store of Index Register

17.1 FNC102 – ZPUSH/Batch Store of Index Register

Outline
This instruction temporarily batch-stores the present value of the index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7.
For restoring the present value of temporarily batch-stored index registers, use ZPOP (FNC103) instruction.
→ For ZPOP (FNC103) instruction, refer to Section 17.2.

1. Instruction format
FNC 102 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
ZPUSH P 3 steps ZPUSH
Continuous
Operation −
ZPUSHP Pulse (Single)
Operation
−

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Head device number batch-storing the present value of the index registers V0 to
V7 and Z0 to Z7
D D : Number of times of batch-storage 16-bit binary
D +1 to D +16 × Number of times of batch-storage: Batch-stored data
storage destination

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

D 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (ZPUSH/ZPUSHP)
Command
input FNC102
D
ZPUSH

1) The contents of the index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7 are batch-stored temporarily to D and later.
When the contents of index registers are batch-stored, the number of times of batch-storage D is
incremented by "1".
2) For restoring the batch-stored data, use ZPOP (FNC103) instruction.
Use ZPUSH (FNC102) and ZPOP (FNC103) instruction as a pair.
3) By specifying a same device to D , ZPUSH (FNC102) and ZPOP (FNC103) instructions can be used
in the nest structure.
In this case, the occupied points are added by "16" after D every time ZPUSH (FNC102) instruction is
executed. Secure in advance sufficient area for the number of the next structure.

500
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 17 Data Transfer 2 – FNC100 to FNC109
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 17.1 FNC102 – ZPUSH/Batch Store of Index Register

11
4) The figure below shows the data structure batch-stored in D and later.

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
· When the nest structure is not used Batch- · When the nest structure is used Batch-
Index register stored data Index register stored data
[1] ZPUSH *1 *1
Z0 D +0 Z0 [1] ZPUSH D +0
instruction
V0 Number of times +1 Z0 V0 instruction +1 Z0
Z1 of batch-storage
D is
+2 V0 Z1
Number of times
of batch-storage 1st nesting +2 V0 12
V1 +3 Z1 V1 D :0→1 Number of +3 Z1
incremented by "1". 16 points

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
times of
Z2 +4 V1 Z2 batch- +4 V1
[4] ZPOP for 1
V2 +5 Z2 storage +5 Z2

...
instruction nesting
[2] ZPOP Number of times D =1
+6 V2 Z7
...

...

...
instruction of batch-storage
Z7 Number of times of V7 D :→0 +15 Z7
...

...
V7 batch-storage +15 Z7 +16 V7
D is
decremented by
+16 V7
[2] ZPUSH instruction
Number of times
of batch-storage 2nd nesting
+17 Z0 13
D :1→2 +18 V0

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
"1". Number of
times of +19 Z1
batch-
[3] ZPOP instruction storage +20 V1
Number of times of D =2
*1 Number of times of batch-storage

...

...
batch-storage
D :2→1
14
Related instruction

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Instruction Description
Restores the index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7 which were batch-stored temporarily by the
ZPOP(FNC103)
ZPUSH (FNC102) instruction.

15
Cautions

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
• When not using the nest structure, clear the number of batch-storage times D before executing
ZPUSH (FNC102) instruction.
• When using the nest structure, clear the number of batch-storage times D before executing ZPUSH
(FNC102) instruction the first time.
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When the range of points used after D in ZPUSH (FNC102) instruction exceeds the corresponding
device range (error code: K6706) 17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
• When the number of batch-storage times D stores a negative value while the ZPUSH (FNC102)
instruction is executed (error code: K6706)

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

501
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 17 Data Transfer 2 – FNC100 to FNC109
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 17.1 FNC102 – ZPUSH/Batch Store of Index Register

Program example
In the program shown below, the contents of the index registers Z0 to Z7 and V0 to V7 before execution of
subroutine program are batch-stored in D0 and later when index registers are used in the subroutine after the
pointer P0.
M8002
RST D0

X005 FNC 12
K5 V0
MOVP
X005 FNC 12
K10 V0
MOVP

X000 V0
Y000

X000 FNC 01 P0
CALL

FNC 06
FEND
Label
P0 M8000 FNC102 D0
RUN monitor ZPUSH

X006 FNC 12
K5 V0
MOVP
X006 FNC 12 Program using index
K10 V0
MOVP registers
X030
T0

D100V0
M8000
FNC103
V0
ZPOP

FNC 02
SRET

END

502
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 17 Data Transfer 2 – FNC100 to FNC109
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 17.2 FNC103 – ZPOP/Batch POP of Index Register

11
17.2 FNC103 – ZPOP/Batch POP of Index Register

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction restores the contents of the index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z8 which were batch-stored
temporarily by ZPUSH (FNC102) instruction.
12
→ For ZPUSH (FNC102) instruction, refer to Section 17.1

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1. Instruction format
FNC 103 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
ZPOP P 3 steps ZPOP
Continuous
Operation − 13
ZPOPP Pulse (Single) −

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Head device number temporarily batch-storing the contents of the index registers
V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
D D : Number of times of batch-storage 16-bit binary
D +1 to D +16 × Number of times of batch-storage: Batch-stored data
storage destination

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

D 3 3

16
Explanation of function and operation

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1. 16-bit operation (ZPOP/ZPOPP)
→ For the function and operation, refer also to Section 17.1.
Command
input FNC103
ZPOP
D 17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1) The contents of the index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7 which were batch-stored temporarily to D
and later are restored to the original index registers. When the contents of the index registers are
restored, the number of times of batch-storage D is decremented by "1".
2) For temporarily batch-storing the data, use ZPUSH (FNC102) instruction. 18
Use ZPUSH (FNC102) and ZPOP (FNC103) instruction as a pair.
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

Related instruction
Instruction Description
ZPUSH(FNC102) Temporarily batch-stores the present value of the index registers V0 to V7 and Z0 to Z7.
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When the number of times of batch-storage (D) stores "0" or a negative value while ZPOP (FNC103)
instruction is executed (error code: K6706) 20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

Program example
→ For a program example, refer to Section 17.1.

503
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

18. Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139

FNC110 to FNC119, FNC120 to FNC129 and FNC130 to FNC139 provide instructions for conversion,
comparison, arithmetic operations, square root operation, trigonometry, etc. for floating point operations.

FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

Section
110 ECMP ECMP S1 S2 D Floating Point Compare
18.1

Section
111 EZCP EZCP S1 S2 S D Floating Point Zone Compare
18.2

Section
112 EMOV EMOV S D Floating Point Move
18.3

113 – –

114 – –

115 – –

Floating Point to Character String Section

116 ESTR ESTR S1 S2 D Conversion 18.4

Character String to Floating Point Section

117 EVAL EVAL S D Conversion 18.5

Floating Point to Scientific Notation Section

118 EBCD EBCD S D Conversion 18.6

Scientific Notation to Floating Point Section

119 EBIN EBIN S D Conversion 18.7

Section
120 EADD EADD S1 S2 D Floating Point Addition
18.8

Section
121 ESUB ESUB S1 S2 D Floating Point Subtraction
18.9

Section
122 EMUL EMUL S1 S2 D Floating Point Multiplication
18.10

Section
123 EDIV EDIV S1 S2 D Floating Point Division
18.11

Section
124 EXP EXP S D Floating Point Exponent
18.12

Section
125 LOGE LOGE S D Floating Point Natural Logarithm
18.13

Section
126 LOG10 LOG10 S D Floating Point Common Logarithm
18.14

Section
127 ESQR ESQR S D Floating Point Square Root
18.15

Section
128 ENEG ENEG D Floating Point Negation
18.16

504
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

11
FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Section
129 INT INT S D Floating Point to Integer Conversion
18.17

Section
130 SIN SIN S D Floating Point Sine
18.18 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Section
131 COS COS S D Floating Point Cosine
18.19

Section
132 TAN TAN S D Floating Point Tangent
18.20

Section 13
133 ASIN ASIN S D Floating Point Arc Sine
18.21

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Section
134 ACOS ACOS S D Floating Point Arc Cosine
18.22

Section
135 ATAN ATAN S D Floating Point Arc Tangent
18.23 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Floating Point Degrees to Radians Section
136 RAD RAD S D Conversion 18.24

Floating Point Radians to Degrees Section

137 DEG DEG S D Conversion 18.25
15
138 – –

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
139 – –

16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

505
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.1 FNC110 – ECMP / Floating Point Compare

18.1 FNC110 – ECMP / Floating Point Compare

Outline
This instruction compares two data (binary floating point), and outputs the result (larger, same or smaller) to
three single bit devices.
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.

1. Instruction format

FNC 110 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D ECMP P Continuous
− 13 steps DECMP Operation
DECMPP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Device number storing binary floating point data to be compared Real number
S2 Device number storing binary floating point data to be compared (binary)*1

Head bit device number to which the comparison result is output (Three devices
D Bit
are occupied.)

*1. When a constant (K or H) is specified, it is automatically converted from binary into binary floating
point (real number) when the instruction is executed.

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 S2 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 S2 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 S1 3

S1: "D….b" is available only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs, and cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z).
S2: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 32-bit operation (DECMP and DECMPP)
The comparison value [ S1 +1, S1 ] is compared with the comparison source [ S2 +1, S2 ] as
floating point data, and either bit among D , D +1 and D +2 turns ON according to the result
(smaller, same or larger).

506
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.1 FNC110 – ECMP / Floating Point Compare

11
• When a constant (K or H) is specified as [ S1 +1, S1 ] or [ S2 +1, S2 ], it is automatically

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
converted from binary into binary floating point (real number) when the instruction is executed.
Command
input FNC110
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
DECMP

D‚ Turns ON in the case of 12

" [ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ] > [ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ ] ".

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D ‚ +1 Turns ON in the case of
" [ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ] = [ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ ] ".

D ‚ +2 Turns ON in the case of

" [ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ] < [ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ ] ". 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Even if the command input turns OFF and DECMP instruction is not executed, D ‚ to D ‚ +2 hold the status
before the please rewrite this command input turned OFF.

Caution 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
1. Number of occupied devices
Three devices are occupied from D ( D , D +1 and D +2).
Make sure that these devices are not used for any other purpose.

15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

507
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.2 FNC111 – EZCP / Floating Point Zone Compare

18.2 FNC111 – EZCP / Floating Point Zone Compare

Outline
This instruction compares data (binary floating point) with two values (one zone), and outputs the comparison
result to three single bit devices.
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.

1. Instruction format

FNC 111 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D EZCP P Continuous
− 17 steps DEZCP Operation
DEZCPP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Data register number storing binary floating point data to be compared
Real number
S2 Data register number storing binary floating point data to be compared
(binary)*1
S Data register number storing binary floating point data to be compared
Head bit device number to which the comparison result is output (Three devices
D Bit
are occupied.)

*1. When a constant (K or H) is specified, it is automatically converted from binary into binary floating
point (real number) when the instruction is executed.

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 S 3

S: "D….b" cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z).

508
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.2 FNC111 – EZCP / Floating Point Zone Compare

11
Explanation of function and operation

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. 32-bit operation (DEZCP and DEZCPP)
The comparison values [ S1 +1, S1 ], [ S2 +1, S2 ] are compared with the comparison source
[ S +1, S ] as floating point data, and either bit among D , D +1, and D +2 turns ON
according to the result (smaller, same or larger). 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
• When a constant (K or H) is specified as [ S1 +1, S1 ], [ S2 +1, S2 ], or [ S +1, S ], it is
automatically converted into binary floating point when the instruction is executed.
Command
input FNC 111 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ S‚ D‚
EDZCP
D‚ Turns ON in the case of
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
" [ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ] > [ S ‚ +1, S ‚ ] ".

D ‚ +1 Turns ON in the case of

" [ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ] ≤ [ S ‚ +1, S ‚ ] ≤ [ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ ] ".

D ‚ +2 Turns ON in the case of

" [ S ‚ +1, S ‚ ] > [ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ ] ". 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Even if the command input turns OFF and DEZCP instruction is not executed, D ‚ to D ‚ +2 hold the status
before the command input turned OFF.

15
Cautions

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
1. Number of occupied devices
Three devices are occupied from D ( D , D +1 and D +2).
Make sure that these devices are not used for any other purpose.
16
2. Comparison values [ S1 +1, S1 ] and [ S2 +1, S2 ]

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Make sure that two comparison values have the following relationship:
[ S1 +1, S1 ] ≤ [ S2 +1, S2 ]
In the case of "[ S1 +1, S1 ] > [ S2 +1, S2 ]", the value [ S2 +1, S2 ] is regarded as [ S1 +1,
S1 ] value during comparison.
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

509
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.3 FNC112 – EMOV / Floating Point Move

18.3 FNC112 – EMOV / Floating Point Move

Outline
This instruction transfers binary floating point data.
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.

1. Instruction format

FNC 112 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D EMOV P − 9 steps DEMOV
Continuous
Operation
− DEMOVP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Binary floating point data (transfer source) or device number storing data
Real number (binary)
D Device number receiving floating point data

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 S 3 3

D 3 3 S 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 32 bit operation (DEMOV and DEMOPV)
The contents (binary floating point data) of the transfer source [ S +1, S ] are transferred to [ D +1,
D ]. A real number (E) can be directly specified as S .
Command S ‚ +1 S‚ D ‚ +1 D‚
input FNC112 S‚ D‚ Transfer
DEMOV
4.23542 4.23542

Binary floating point Binary floating point

(real number) (real number)

Program examples
1. In the program example shown below, a real number stored in D11 and D10 is transferred to
D1 and D0 when X007 turns ON
X007
FNC112 D10 D0
DEMOVP D11 D10 D1 D0
36.475 36.475
END

2. In the program shown below, a real number "-1.23" is transferred to D11 and D10 when X007
turns ON
X007
FNC112 E−1.23 D10
DEMOVP D11 D10
−1.23 −1.23
END

510
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.4 FNC116 – ESTR / Floating Point to Character String Conversion

11
18.4 FNC116 – ESTR / Floating Point to Character String Conversion

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction converts binary floating point data into a character string (ASCII codes) having a specified
number of digits.
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
On the other hand, STR (FNC200) instruction converts binary data into a character string (ASCII codes).
→ For a character string, refer to Section 5.3.
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.
→ For STR (FNC200) instruction, refer to Section 26.1.

1. Instruction format 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
FNC 116 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D ESTR P − Continuous
13 steps DESTR Operation
− DESTRP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Binary floating point data to be converted or device storing data Real number (binary)
Head device number storing the display specification of a numeric value to be
S2 16-bit binary
converted
D Head device number storing converted character string Character string
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V
Unit
Z Modify K H
stant Number ter String
E "…" P
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
S1 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

17
Explanation of function and operation

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
1. 32-bit operation (DESTR and DESTRP)
The contents (binary floating point data) of [ S1 +1, S1 ] are converted into a character string according
to the contents specified by S2 , S2 +1 and S2 +2, and then stored to devices D and later. A real
number can be directly specified as S1 . 18
Command
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

input FNC116 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
DESTR

• The data after conversion varies depending on the display specification stored in S2 .
0: Decimal point
format
The data after conversion varies 19
S2 ‚ 1: Exponent depending on the display
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

format specification stored in S2 ‚ .

Total number of
S2 ‚ +1 digits 2 to 24 can be set.
Number of digits
S2 ‚ +2 of decimal part

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

511
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.4 FNC116 – ESTR / Floating Point to Character String Conversion

2. In the case of decimal point format

Decimal point
S2 ‚ format b15 b8 b7 b0
Total number of ASCII code in "(specified
S2 ‚ +1 digits total number of digits - 1)"th ASCII code for sign
D‚
Number of digits digit
S2 ‚ +2 of decimal part
ASCII code in "(specified ASCII code in "(specified
D ‚ +1 total number of digits - 3)"th total number of digits - 2)"th
digit digit

ASCII code in "(specified ASCII code for decimal point

D ‚ +2 total number of digits - 5)"th (.)
digit (decimal part) (2EH)
Sign
ASCII code in "(specified ASCII code in "(specified
D ‚ +3 total number of digits - 7)"th total number of digits - 6)"th
S1 ‚ +1 S1 ‚ digit (decimal part) digit (decimal part)

D ‚ +4 0000H

Binary floating point

(real number) 0000H is automatically stored at the end of the
character string.

• The total number of digits which can be specified by S2 +1 is as follows (24 digits maximum):
When the number of digits of the decimal part is "0", Total number of digits ≥ 2
When the number of digits of the decimal part is any value other than "0", Total number of digits ≥ (Number
of digits of decimal part + 3)
• The number of digits of the decimal part which can be specified by S2 +2 is from 0 to 7.
However, the following must be satisfied, "Number of digits of decimal part ≤ (Total number of digits - 3)"

For example, when the total number of digits is "8", the number of digits of the decimal part is "3", and
"-1.23456" is specified, data is stored in D and later as shown below:
Total
S2 ‚ 0 number
of digits Number of
S2 ‚ +1 8 digits of
decimal part
b15 b8 b7 b0
S2 ‚ +2 3
D‚ 20H(space) 2DH(-)

D ‚ +1 31H(1) 20H(space)
1 2 3 5
D ‚ +2 32H(2) 2EH(.)

Sign D ‚ +3 35H(5) 33H(3)

S1 ‚ +1 S1 ‚ D ‚ +4 0000H

−1.23456
0000H is automatically stored at the end of the
Binary floating point character string.
(real number)

• The character string data after conversion is stored in the devices D and later as shown below:
- For the sign, "20H (space)" is stored when the binary floating point data is positive, and "2DH (-)" is
stored when the data is negative.
- If the decimal part of the binary floating point data cannot be accommodated in the number of digits of
the decimal part, low-order digits of the decimal part are rounded.
0: Decimal point
S2 ‚ format Total
8 (Total number of
number of
S2 ‚ +1 digits) digits
2 (Number of digits
S2 ‚ +2 of decimal part) 1 2 3 4 5 6

Low-order
S1 ‚ +1 S1 ‚ digits of Rounded.
decimal part
−1.23456

512
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.4 FNC116 – ESTR / Floating Point to Character String Conversion

11
- When the number of digits of the decimal part is set to any value other than "0", "2EH (.)" is

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
automatically stored in "specified number of digits of decimal part + 1"th digit.
When the number of digits of the decimal part is "0", "2EH (.)" is not stored.
0: Decimal point
S2 ‚ format Total
number of
S2 ‚ +1
8 (Total number of
digits) digits 12
2 (Number of digits

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
S2 ‚ +2 of decimal part) 1 2 3

Low-order digits of decimal

S1 ‚ +1 S1 ‚ part
Automatically added.
−1.23456

- When the total number of digits subtracted by the digits for sign, decimal point and decimal part is larger 13
than the integer part of the binary floating point data, "20H (space)" is stored between the sign and the

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
integer part.

S2 ‚ 0 Total
number of
S2 ‚ +1 8 digits

S2 ‚ +2 2
14
1 2 3

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Low-order digits of decimal
S1 ‚ +1 S1 ‚ part
"20H (space)" is stored.
−1.23456

- "00H" or "0000H" is automatically stored at the end of the converted character string.
15
3. In the case of exponent format

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
b15 b8 b7 b0
ASCII code in "(specified
D‚ total number of digits - 1)"th ASCII code for sign
S2 ‚ Exponent format
digit

S2 ‚ +1
Total number of
digits
D ‚ +1
ASCII code for decimal point
(.) (2EH)
ASCII code in "(specified
total number of digits - 2)"th
16
Number of digits digit
S2 ‚ +2

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
of decimal part
ASCII code in "(specified ASCII code in "(specified
D ‚ +2 total number of digits - 5)"th total number of digits - 4)"th
digit (decimal part) digit (decimal part)
E ASCII code in "(specified ASCII code in "(specified
D ‚ +3 total number of digits - 7)"th total number of digits - 6)"th
Sign (integer part) Sign (exponent part)
digit (decimal part) digit (decimal part)
17
ASCII code of sign
D ‚ +4 45H(E)

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
(exponent part)
S1 ‚ +1 S1 ‚ Automatically
added.
ASCII code in "(specified ASCII code in "(specified
D ‚ +5 total number of digits - total number of digits -
11)"th digit (exponent part) 10)"th digit (exponent part)
Binary floating point
(real number) D ‚ +6 0000H
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

0000H is automatically stored at the end of the

character string.

• The total number of digits which can be specified by S2 +1 is as follows (24 digits maximum):
When the number of digits of the decimal part is "0" Total number of digits ≥ 6
When the number of digits of the decimal part is any value other than "0" Total number of digits ≥ (Number 19
of digits of decimal part + 7)
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

513
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.4 FNC116 – ESTR / Floating Point to Character String Conversion

• The number of digits of the decimal part which can be specified by S2 +2 is from 0 to 7.
However, the following must be satisfied, "Number of digits of decimal part ≤ (Total number of digits - 7)"

For example, when the total number of digits is "12", the number of digits of the decimal part is "4", and
"-12.34567" is specified, data is stored in D and later as shown below:

S2 ‚ 1 Total number
of digits b15 b8 b7 b0
S2 ‚ +1 12
Number of D‚ 20H space 2DH(-)
digits of
S2 ‚ +2 4 decimal
part D ‚ +1 2EH(.) 31H(1)

D ‚ +2 33H(3) 32H(2)
1 2 3 4 6E+ 0 1 D ‚ +3 36H(6) 34H(4)
Fixed to 2 digits
D ‚ +4 2BH(+) 45H(E)
Sign (integer part) Sign (exponent part)
D ‚ +5 31H(1) 30H(0)
S1 ‚ +1 S1 ‚
D ‚ +6 0000H
−12.34567

Binary floating point 0000H is automatically stored at the end of the

(real number) character string.

• The character string data after conversion is stored in the devices D and later as shown below:
- For the sign of the integer part, "20H (space)" is stored when the binary floating point data is positive,
and "2DH (-)" is stored when the data is negative.
- The integer part is fixed to 1 digit.
"20H (space)" is stored between the integer part and the sign.

S2 ‚ 1 Total number of digits (12)

S2 ‚ +1 12 Fixed to 1 digit

S2 ‚ +2 4 1 2 3 4 6E+ 0 1

S1 ‚ +1 S1 ‚ "20H (space)" is stored.

−12.34567

- If the decimal part of the binary floating point data cannot be accommodated in the number of digits of
the decimal part, low-order digits of the decimal part are rounded.

S2 ‚ 1

S2 ‚ +1 12 Total number of digits (12)

S2 ‚ +2 4 1 2 3 4 6 6 7E+ 0 1

Number of digits of Cut by rounding.

S1 ‚ +1 S1 ‚ decimal part (4)
−12.34567

- When the number of digits of the decimal part is set to any value other than "0", "2EH (.)" is
automatically stored in "specified number of digits of decimal part + 1"th digit.
When the number of digits of the decimal part is "0", "2EH (.)" is not stored.

S2 ‚ 1

S2 ‚ +1 12 Total number of digits (12)

S2 ‚ +2 4 1 2 3 4 6E+ 0 1

Number of digits of
S1 ‚ +1 S1 ‚ decimal part (4)
−12.34567 Automatically added.

- For the sign of the exponent part, "2BH (+)" is stored when the exponent is positive, and "2DH (-)" is
stored when the exponent is negative.

514
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.4 FNC116 – ESTR / Floating Point to Character String Conversion

11
- The exponent part is fixed to 2 digits.

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
When the exponent part is 1 digit, "30H (0)" is stored after the sign of the exponent part.

S2 ‚ 1 Total number of digits (12)

S2 ‚ +1 12 Fixed to 2 digits.

S2 ‚ +2 4 1 2 3 4 6E+ 0 1
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
S1 ‚ +1 S1 ‚ "30H (0)" is stored.
−12.34567

- "00H" or "0000H" is automatically stored at the end of the converted character string.
13
Related instructions

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Instruction Description
EVAL (FNC117) Converts a character string (ASCII codes) into binary floating point data.
STR (FNC200) Converts binary data into a character string (ASCII codes).
VAL (FNC201) Converts a character string (ASCII codes) into binary data. 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When S1 is not located within the following range (error code: K6706) 15
0, ±2−126 ≤ S1 < ±2128

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
• When the format specified by S2 is any value other than "0" or "1" (error code: K6706)
• When the total number of digits specified by S2 +1 is not located within the following range (error code:
K6706)
In the case of decimal point format:
When the number of digits of the decimal part is "0", Total number of digits ≥ 2
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
When the number of digits of the decimal part is any value other than "0", Total number of digits ≥
(Number of digits of decimal part + 3)
In the case of exponent format:
When the number of digits of the decimal part is "0", Total number of digits ≥ 6
When the number of digits of the decimal part is any value other than "0", Total number of digits ≥
(Number of digits of decimal part + 7) 17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
• When the number of digits of the decimal part specified by S2 +2 is not located within the following
range (error code: K6706)
In the case of decimal point format: Number of digits of decimal part ≤ (Total number of digits - 3)
In the case of exponent format: Number of digits of decimal part ≤ (Total number of digits - 7)
• When the devices storing a character string specified by
code: K6706)
D exceeds the allowable device range (error
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

• When the conversion result exceeds the specified total number of digits (error code: K6706)

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

515
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.4 FNC116 – ESTR / Floating Point to Character String Conversion

Program examples
1) In the program example shown below, the contents (binary floating point data) of R0 and R1 are
converted according to the contents specified by R10 to R12, and then stored to D0 and later when X000
turns ON
X000
FNC116 R0 R10 D0
DESTRP

END

Conversion b15 b8 b7 b0
R10 0 format
Total number Total number D0 20H(space) 20H(space)
R11 7 of digits of digits
Number of digits D1 2EH(.) 30H(0)
R12 3 of decimal part 0 0 3 3
D2 33H(3) 30H(0)
Space Number of
R1 R0 digits of D3 00H 33H(3)
decimal part
0.0327457
00H is automatically stored at
the end of the character string.

2) In the program shown below, the contents (binary floating point data) of R0 and R1 are converted
according to the contents specified by R10 to R12, and then stored to D10 and later when X000 turns ON
X000
FNC116 R0 R10 D10
DESTRP

END

1 (exponent Conversion
R10 format) format
Total number Total number
R11 12 of digits of digits
Number of digits
R12 4 of decimal part 3 2 7 4 6E 0 2

Space Number of digits

R1 R0 of decimal part b15 b8 b7 b0
0.0327457 D10 20H(space) 20H(space)

D11 2EH(.) 33H(3)

D12 37H(7) 32H(2)

D13 36H(6) 34H(4)

D14 2DH(-) 45H(E)

D15 32H(2) 30H(0)

D16 0000H

0000H is automatically stored at the

end of the character string.

516
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.5 FNC117 – EVAL / Character String to Floating Point Conversion

11
18.5 FNC117 – EVAL / Character String to Floating Point Conversion

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction converts a character string (ASCII codes) into binary floating point data.
On the other hand, the VAL (FNC201) instruction converts a character string (ASCII codes) into binary data.
12
→ For a character string, refer to Section 5.3.

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.
→ For VAL (FNC201) instruction, refer to Subsection 26.2.

1. Instruction format
13
FNC 117 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
D EVAL P − Continuous
9 steps DEVAL Operation
− DEVALP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data 14
Operand Type Description Data Type

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Head device number storing character string data to be converted into binary
S Character string
floating point data
D Head device number storing converted binary floating point data Real number (binary)

3. Applicable devices 15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
16
D 3 3 3 3

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Explanation of function and operation
1. 32-bit operation (EVAL and EVALP)
A character string stored in S and later is converted into binary floating point, and stored to [ D +1, 17
D ].

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Command
input FNC117
S‚ D‚
DEVAL

A specified character string may be in the decimal point format or exponent format. A character string in
either format can be converted into binary floating point data.
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

b15 b8 b7 b0
S‚ ASCII code for 1st character ASCII code for sign
D ‚ +1 D‚
S ‚ +1 ASCII code for 3rd character ASCII code for 2nd character

S ‚ +2 ASCII code for 5th character ASCII code for 4th character 19
Binary floating point
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

S ‚ +3 ASCII code for 7th character ASCII code for 6th character
(real number)
S ‚ +4 00H

Indicates the end of the character string.

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

517
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.5 FNC117 – EVAL / Character String to Floating Point Conversion

a) In the case of decimal point format

b15 b8 b7 b0
S‚ 31H(1) 2DH(-)
D ‚ +1 D‚
S ‚ +1 30H(0) 2EH(.)
−1.07812
S ‚ +2 38H(8) 37H(7)
32H(2) 31H(1) Binary floating point
S ‚ +3 (real number)
S ‚ +4 00H

1 0 7 8 1 2

b) In the case of exponent format

b15 b8 b7 b0
S‚ 20H(space) 2DH(-)

S ‚ +1 2EH(.) 31H(1)
D ‚ +1 D‚
S ‚ +2 32H(2) 33H(3)
−1.3201E+10
S ‚ +3 31H(1) 30H(0)
2BH(+) 45H(E) Binary floating point
S ‚ +4 (real number)
S ‚ +5 30H(0) 31H(1)

S ‚ +6 00H

1 3 2 0 1E+ 1 0

• When a character string to be converted into binary floating point specified by S has 7 digits or more
excluding the sign, decimal point and exponent part, the conversion result may contain rounding error.
a) In the case of decimal point format
b15 b8 b7 b0
S‚ 20H(space) 2DH(-)

S ‚ +1 31H(1) 20H(space)

S ‚ +2 33H(3) 2EH(.) D ‚ +1 D‚
S ‚ +3 31H(1) 30H(0) −1.30156
S ‚ +4 36H(6) 35H(5) Up to 6 digits are securely
equivalent.
S ‚ +5 31H(1) 38H(8)
Binary floating point
S ‚ +6 00H 32H(2) (real number)

1 3 0 1 5 6 8 1 2

Rounded.

518
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.5 FNC117 – EVAL / Character String to Floating Point Conversion

11
b) In the case of exponent format

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
b15 b8 b7 b0
S‚ 20H(.) 2DH(-)

S ‚ +1 2EH(.) 31H(1)

S ‚ +2 35H(5) 33H(3)
D ‚ +1 D‚
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
S ‚ +3 33H(3) 30H(0) −1.35034E−2
S ‚ +4 31H(1) 34H(4) Up to 6 digits are
securely equivalent.
S ‚ +5 45H(E) 32H(2)
Binary floating point
(real number)
S ‚ +6 30H(0) 2DH(-)
13
00H 32H(2)

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
1 3 5 0 3 4 1 2E 0 2

Rounded.

• When "2BH (+)" is specified as the sign in the floating point format or when the sign is omitted, a character
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
string is converted into a positive value.
When "2DH (-)" is specified as the sign, a character string is converted into a negative value.
• When "2BH (+)" is specified as the sign in the exponent format or when the sign is omitted, a character
string is converted into a positive exponent.
When "2DH (-)" is specified as the sign, a character string is converted into a negative exponent.
• When "20H (space)" or "30H (0)" exists between numbers except the first "0" in a character string specified
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
by S , "20H" or "30H" is ignored during conversion.
b15 b8 b7 b0
S‚ 20H(space) 2DH(-)

S ‚ +1 31H(1) 30H(0) D ‚ +1 D‚ 16
S ‚ +2 32H(2) 2EH(.) −1.231

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
S ‚ +3 31H(1) 33H(3)
Binary floating point
(real number)
S ‚ +4 00H

0 1 2 3 1
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Ignored.

• When "30H (0)" exists between a number and "E" in a character string in the exponent format, "30H" is
ignored during conversion.
b15 b8 b7 b0
20H(space) 2DH(-)
18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

2EH(.) 31H(1)
34H(4) 30H(0) D ‚ +1 D‚
33H(3) 35H(5) −1.0453E+3
2BH(+) 45H(E) 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

33H(3) 30H(0)
00H

1 0 4 5 3E+ 0 3

Ignored.
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

• A character string can consist of up to 24 characters.

"20H (space)" and "30H (0)" in a character string are counted as one character respectively.

519
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.5 FNC117 – EVAL / Character String to Floating Point Conversion

Related devices
→ For the use methods of the zero, borrow and carry flags, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Description
Device Name
Condition Operation
The conversion result is true "0".
M8020 Zero flag The zero flag M8020 turns ON.
(The mantissa part is "0".)
The absolute value of the conversion The value of D is the minimum value (2−126) of 32-
M8021 Borrow flag
result is less than "2−126". bit real numbers and the borrow flag M8021 turns ON.
The absolute value of the conversion The value of D is the maximum value (2128) of 32-
M8022 Carry flag 128
result is not less than "2 ". bit real numbers and the carry flag M8022 turns ON.

Related instructions
Instruction Description
ESTR (FNC116) Converts binary floating point data into a character string (ASCII codes).
STR (FNC200) Converts binary data into a character string (ASCII codes).
VAL (FNC201) Converts a character string (ASCII codes) into binary data.

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When any character other than "30H (0)" to "39H (9)" exists in the integer part or decimal part (error code:
K6706)
• When "2EH (.)" exists in two or more positions in a character string specified by S (error code: K6706)
• When any character other than "45H (E)", "2BH (+)" or "2DH (-)" exists in the exponent part, or when two or
more exponent parts exist (error code: K6706)
• When "00H" does not exist in the corresponding device range starting from S (error code: K6706)
• When the number of characters after S is "0" or more than "24" (error code: K6706)

Program examples
1) In the program example shown below, a character string stored in R0 and later is converted into binary
floating point, and stored to D0 and D1 when X000 turns ON
X000
FNC117 R0 D0
DEVALP

END

b15 b8 b7 b0
R0 20H(space) 2DH(-)

R1 31H(1) 30H(0)

R2 32H(2) 2EH(.) D1 D0
−1.23452
R3 34H(4) 33H(3)

R4 32H(2) 35H(5)

R5 00H 31H(1)

0 1 2 3 4 5 2 1

Ignored. Rounded.

520
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.5 FNC117 – EVAL / Character String to Floating Point Conversion

11
2) In the program shown below, a character string stored in D10 and later is converted into binary floating

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
point, and stored to D100 and D101 when X000 turns ON
X000
FNC117 D10 D100
DEVALP

END 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
b15 b8 b7 b0
D10 20H(space) 20H(space)

D11 2EH(.) 31H(1)

33H(3) 32H(2)
13
D12
D101 D100

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
D13 35H(5) 34H(4) 1.2345E−2
D14 2DH(-) 45H(E)

D15 32H(2) 30H(0)

D16 00H 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
1 2 3 4 5E 0 2

Ignored. Rounded.

Operations at overflow, underflow and zero

Condition Operation
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
The absolute value of the
conversion result is less than The value of D is the minimum value (2−126) of 32-bit real numbers and the borrow
−126 flag M8021 turns ON.
"2 ".
The absolute value of the
The value of D is the maximum value (2128) of 32-bit real numbers and the carry
conversion result is not less than
"2 128
".
flag M8022 turns ON. 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
The conversion result is true "0".
The zero flag M8020 turns ON.
(The mantissa part is "0".)

17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

521
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.6 FNC118 – EBCD / Floating Point to Scientific Notation Conversion

18.6 FNC118 – EBCD / Floating Point to Scientific Notation Conversion

Outline
This instruction converts binary floating point into scientific notation.
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.

1. Instruction format

FNC 118 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D EBCD P Continuous
− 9 steps DEBCD Operation
DEBCDP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Data register number storing binary floating point Real number (binary)
Real number
D Data register number storing converted scientific notation
(decimal)

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 32-bit operation (DEBCD and DEBCDP)
Binary floating point stored in [ S +1, S ] is converted into scientific notation, and transferred to
[ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC118
S‚ D‚ [ S ‚ +1, S ‚ ] → [ D ‚ +1, D‚ ]
DEBCD
Binary floating point Scientific notation

High order Low order

b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Before
execution Exponent part (8 bits) Mantissa part (23 bits)
Sign (1 bit)

S ‚ +1 S‚

After execution

High order Low order

b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
After
execution Exponent part Mantissa part

D ‚ +1 D‚

D ‚ +1
D‚
× 10

522
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.6 FNC118 – EBCD / Floating Point to Scientific Notation Conversion

11
Caution

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
1. Handling of floating point
In floating point operations, all data is handled in binary floating point.
Because binary floating point is difficult to understand (requiring a dedicated monitoring method), it is
converted into scientific notation so that monitoring can be easily executed by peripheral equipment.
GX Developer and GOT have the function to directly monitor and display binary floating point.
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

523
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.7 FNC119 – EBIN / Scientific Notation to Floating Point Conversion

18.7 FNC119 – EBIN / Scientific Notation to Floating Point Conversion

Outline
This instruction converts scientific notation stored in devices into binary floating point.
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.

1. Instruction format

FNC 119 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D EBIN P 9 steps DEBIN
Continuous
− Operation
DEBINP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Real number
S Data register number storing scientific notation data
(decimal)
D Data register number storing converted binary floating point. Real number (binary)

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 32-bit operation (DEBIN and DEBINP)
Scientific notation stored in [ S +1, S ] is converted into binary floating point, and transferred to
[ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC119
S‚ D‚ [ S ‚ +1, S ‚ ] → [ D ‚ +1, D‚ ]
DEBIN
Scientific notation Binary floating point
High order Low order
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Before
execution Exponent part Mantissa part

S ‚ +1 S‚

S ‚ +1
S‚
× 10
After execution

High order Low order

b31 b30 b29 b28 b27 b26 b25 b24 b23 b22 b21 b20 b19 b18 b17 b16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
After
execution Exponent part (8 bits) Mantissa part (23 bits)
Sign (1 bit)

D ‚ +1 D‚

524
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.7 FNC119 – EBIN / Scientific Notation to Floating Point Conversion

11
Program example

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
By DEBIN instruction, a numeric value containing the decimal point can be directly converted into binary
floating point.

Example: Converting "3.14" into binary floating point

3.14 = 314 × 10−2 (scientific notation) 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
X002
FNC 12 K314 D0 K314 → D0 [D1]
MOVP
314 × 10−2
FNC 12 [D0]
K -2 D1 K -2 → D1
MOVP

(D1,D0) → (D11,D10)
13
FNC119 D0 D 10

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
DEBIN 314 × 10−2 Binary floating point

→ For program examples of floating point operations, refer to Section 12.10.

14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

525
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.8 FNC120 – EADD / Floating Point Addition

18.8 FNC120 – EADD / Floating Point Addition

Outline
This instruction executes addition of two binary floating point data.
→ For program examples of floating point operations, refer to Section 12.10.
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.
→ For flag operations, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.

1. Instruction format

FNC 120 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D EADD P Continuous
− 13 steps DEADD Operation
DEADDP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Word device number storing binary floating point data used in addition
Real number
S2 Word device number storing binary floating point data used in addition
(binary)*1
D Data register number storing the addition result

*1. When a constant (K or H) is specified, it is automatically converted into binary floating point (real
number) when the instruction is executed.

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 S 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 S 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 S 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 32-bit operation (DEADD and DEADDP)
Binary floating point data [ S2 +1, S2 ] is added to binary floating point data [ S1 +1, S1 ], and the
addition result in the binary floating point format is transferred to [ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC120
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ [ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ] + [ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ ] → [ D ‚ +1, D ‚ ]
DEADD
Binary floating point Binary floating point Binary floating point

When a constant (K or H) is specified as [ S1 +1, S1 ] or [ S2 +1, S2 ], it is automatically converted

into binary floating point.
Command
input FNC120
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ [ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ] + [ K2346 ] → [ D ‚ +1, D ‚ ]
DEADD
Binary floating point Automatically Binary floating point
converted into binary
floating point

Caution
1. When a same device is specified
The same device number can be specified in [ S1 +1, S1 ],[ S2 +1, S2 ] and [ D +1, D ].
In this case, note that the addition result changes in every operation cycle when the continuous operation
type instruction (DEADD) is used.

526
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.9 FNC121 – ESUB / Floating Point Subtraction

11
18.9 FNC121 – ESUB / Floating Point Subtraction

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction executes subtraction of two binary floating point data.
→ For program examples of floating point operations, refer to Section 12.10.
12
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
→ For flag operations, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.

1. Instruction format

FNC 121 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
13
D ESUB P Continuous
− 13 steps DESUB

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Operation
DESUBP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type 14
Word device number storing binary floating point data used in subtraction

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
S1
Real number
S2 Word device number storing binary floating point data used in subtraction
(binary)*1
D Data register number storing the subtraction result

*1. When a constant (K or H) is specified, it is automatically converted into binary floating point (real
number) when the instruction is executed. 15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
S1 3 3 S 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 S 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 S 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs. 17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Explanation of function and operation
1. 32-bit operation (DESUB and DESUBP)
Binary floating point data [ S2 +1, S2 ] is subtracted from binary floating point data [ S1 +1, S1 ], and
the subtraction result in the binary floating point format is transferred to [ D +1, D ].
Command
18
input
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

FNC121
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ [ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ] − [ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ ] → [ D ‚ +1, D ‚ ]
DESUB
Binary floating point Binary floating point Binary floating point

When a constant (K or H) is specified as [ S1 +1, S1 ] or [ S2 +1, S2 ], it is automatically converted

into binary floating point.
Command
input
19
FNC121
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ [ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ] − [ ] → [ D ‚ +1, D ‚ ]
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

K2346
DESUB
Binary floating point Automatically Binary floating point
converted into binary
floating point

Caution
1. When a same device is specified 20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

A same device number can be specified in [ S1 +1, S1 ],[ S2 +1, S2 ] and [ D +1, D ].
In this case, note that the subtraction result changes in every operation cycle when the continuous operation
type instruction (DESUB) is used.

527
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.10 FNC122 – EMUL / Floating Point Multiplication

18.10 FNC122 – EMUL / Floating Point Multiplication

Outline
This instruction executes multiplication of two binary floating point data.
→ For program examples of floating point operations, refer to Section 12.10.
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.

1. Instruction format

FNC 122 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D EMUL P Continuous
− 13 steps DEMUL Operation
DEMULP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Word device number storing binary floating point data used in multiplication
Real number
S2 Word device number storing binary floating point data used in multiplication
(binary)*1
D Data register number storing the multiplication result

*1. When a constant (K or H) is specified, it is automatically converted into binary floating point (real
number) when the instruction is executed.

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 S 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 S 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 S 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 32-bit operation (DEMUL and DEMULP)
Binary floating point data [ S1 +1, S1 ] is multiplied by binary floating point data [ S2 +1, S2 ], and
the multiplication result in the binary floating point format is transferred to [ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC122 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ [ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ] × [ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ ] → [ D ‚ +1, D ‚ ]
DEMUL
Binary floating point Binary floating point Binary floating point

When a constant (K or H) is specified as [ S1 +1, S1 ] or [ S2 +1, S2 ], it is automatically converted

into binary floating point.
Command
input FNC122 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ [ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ] × [ K100 ] → [ D ‚ +1, D ‚ ]
DEMUL
Binary floating point Automatically Binary floating point
converted into binary
floating point

528
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.11 FNC123 – EDIV / Floating Point Division

11
18.11 FNC123 – EDIV / Floating Point Division

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction executes division of two binary floating point.
→ For program examples of floating point operations, refer to Section 12.10.
12
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
→ For flag operations, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.

1. Instruction format

FNC 123 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
13
D EDIV P Continuous
− 13 steps DEDIV

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Operation
DEDIVP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
S1 Word device number storing binary floating point data used in division
Real number
S2 Word device number storing binary floating point data used in division
(binary)*1
D Data register number storing binary floating point data obtained by division

*1. When a constant (K or H) is specified, it is automatically converted into binary floating point (real
number) when the instruction is executed.
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
S1 3 3 S 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 S 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 S 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs. 17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Explanation of function and operation
1. 32-bit operation (DEDIV and DESDIVP)
Binary floating point data [ S1 +1, S1 ] is divided by binary floating point data [ S2 +1, S2 ], and the
division result in the binary floating point format is transferred to [ D +1, D ]. 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

Command Dividend Divisor

input FNC123
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ [ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ] ÷ [ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ ] → [ D ‚ +1, D ‚ ]
DEDIV Binary floating point Binary floating point Binary floating point

When a constant (K or H) is specified as [ S1 +1, S1 ] or [ S2 +1, S2 ], it is automatically converted

into binary floating point. 19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

Command Dividend Divisor

input FNC123
S1 ‚ K100 D‚ [ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ] ÷ [ K100 ] → [ D ‚ +1, D ‚ ]
DEDIV Binary floating point Automatically Binary floating point
converted into binary
floating point

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

529
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.12 FNC124 – EXP / Floating Point Exponent

18.12 FNC124 – EXP / Floating Point Exponent

Outline
This instruction executes exponential operation whose base is "e (2.71828)".
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.

1. Instruction format

FNC 124 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D EXP P − 9 steps DEXP
Continuous
Operation
− DEXPP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Head device number storing binary floating point data used in exponential
S
operation. Real number (binary)
D Head device number storing the operation result.

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 32-bit operation (DEXP and DEXPP)
The exponent of [ S +1, S ] is calculated, and the operation result is stored to [ D +1, D ].
A real number can be directly specified as S .
Command
input
FNC124 S‚ D‚
DEXP

• In the exponential operation, the base (e) is set to "2.71828".

S ‚ +1 S‚ D ‚ +1 D‚

e Binary floating point

(real number)
Binary floating point
(real number)

Error
An operation error occurs in the following case; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in
D8067.
• When the operation result is outside the following range (error code: K6706)
2−126 ≤ | Operation result | < 2128

530
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.12 FNC124 – EXP / Floating Point Exponent

11
Program example

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
In the program example shown below, the exponential operation is executed for a value set in the 2-digit BCD
format in X020 to X027, and the operation result is stored in the binary floating point format to D0 and D1
when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC 19 K2X20 D20 Data used in the exponential operation is input ([1]). 12
BIN

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC224 The range of the value to be operated is checked.
D20 K88 M0
LD > (Refer to 1) in "Points" below.)
M0
FNC 49 The input data is converted into binary floating point
D20 D10
FLT (real number) ([2]).
13
FNC124 D10 D0 The exponential operation is executed ([3]).

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
DEXP

END

Operation when "13" is specified in X020 to X027

14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
[1] D20 [2] Conversion into [3]
Conversion binary floating point Exponential
X027 X020 into binary b15 b0 (real number) D11 D10 operation D1 D0
1 3 13 13 442413.4
BCD value BIN FLT Binary floating point EXP Binary floating point
Binary value (real number) value (real number) value
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Points

1) The operation result becomes less than "2128" when the BCD value set in X020 to X027 is "88" or less
because of "loge2128 = 88.7".
If a value "89" or more is set, an operation error occurs. To prevent this operation error, when a value
more than "89" is set, M0 is set to ON so that the exponential operation is not executed. 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
2) Conversion from natural logarithm into common logarithm
In the CPU, operations are executed in natural logarithm.
For obtaining a value in common logarithm, specify a common logarithm value divided by "0.4342945" in
[ S +1, S ].

X 17
10X= e 0.4342945

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

531
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.13 FNC125 – LOGE / Floating Point Natural Logarithm

18.13 FNC125 – LOGE / Floating Point Natural Logarithm

Outline
This instruction executes the natural logarithm operation.
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.

1. Instruction format

FNC 125 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D LOGE P − 9 steps DLOGE
Continuous
Operation
− DLOGEP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Head device number storing binary floating point data used in the natural
S
logarithm operation Real number (binary)
D Head device number storing the operation result

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 32-bit operation (DLOGE and DLOGEP)
Natural logarithm [logarithm whose base is "e (2.71828)"] of [ S +1, S ] is calculated, and the operation
result is stored to [ D +1, D ]. A real number can be directly specified as S .
Command S ‚ +1 S‚ D ‚ +1 D‚
input
FNC125
S‚ D‚ loge
DLOGE

Binary floating point Binary floating point

(real number) (real number)

• Only a positive value can be set in [ S +1, S ]. (The natural logarithm operation cannot be executed
for a negative value.)

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When a negative value is specified in S (error code: K6706)
• When "0" is specified in S (error code: K6706)

532
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.13 FNC125 – LOGE / Floating Point Natural Logarithm

11
Program example

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
In the program example shown below, natural logarithm of "10" set in D50 is calculated, and stored to D30
and D31 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC 12 Data used in the natural logarithm operation is set
K10 D50
MOV ([1]). 12
The data to be used is converted into binary floating

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC 49 D50 D40
FLT point (real number) ([2]).

FNC125 D40 D30 The natural logarithm operation is executed ([3]).

DLOGE

END 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
D50 [2] Conversion into
binary floating point [3] Logarithm
[1] b15 b0 (real number) D41 D40 operation D31 D30
10 10 10 2.302585
MOV Binary value FLT Binary floating point
(real number) value
LOGE Binary floating point
(real number) value 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

533
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.14 FNC126 – LOG10 / Floating Point Common Logarithm

18.14 FNC126 – LOG10 / Floating Point Common Logarithm

Outline
This instruction executes the common logarithm operation.
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.

1. Instruction format

FNC 126 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D LOG10 P − 9 steps DLOG10
Continuous
Operation
− DLOG10P Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Head device number storing binary floating point data used in the common
S
logarithm operation Real number (binary)
D Head device number storing the operation result

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 32-bit operation (DLOG10 and DLOG10P)
Common logarithm [logarithm whose base is "10"] of [ S +1, S ] is calculated, and the operation result
is stored to [ D +1, D ]. A real number can be directly specified as S .
Command S ‚ +1 S‚ D ‚ +1 D‚
input FNC126
S‚ D‚ log10
DLOG10

Binary floating point Binary floating point

(real number) (real number)

• Only a positive value can be set in [ S +1, S ]. (The common logarithm operation cannot be
executed for a negative value.)

Errors
An operation error occurs in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored
in D8067.
• When a negative value is specified in S (error code: K6706)
• When "0" is specified in S (error code: K6706)

534
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.14 FNC126 – LOG10 / Floating Point Common Logarithm

11
Program example

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
In the program example shown below, common logarithm of "15" set in D50 is calculated, and stored to D30
and D31 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC 12 Data used in the common logarithm operation is set
K15 D50
MOV ([1]). 12
The data to be used is converted into binary floating

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC 49 D50 D40
FLT point (real number) ([2]).

FNC126 D40 D30 The common logarithm operation is executed ([3]).

DLOG10

END 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
D50 [2] Conversion into
binary floating point [3] Logarithm
[1] b15 b0 (real number) D41 D40 operation D31 D30
10 15 15 1.176091
MOV Binary value FLT Binary floating point
(real number) value
DLOG10 Binary floating point
(real number) value 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

535
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.15 FNC127 – ESQR / Floating Point Square Root

18.15 FNC127 – ESQR / Floating Point Square Root

Outline
This instruction obtains the square root of binary floating point.
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.

1. Instruction format

FNC 127 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D ESQR P 9 steps DESQR
Continuous
− Operation
DESQRP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Word device number storing binary floating point data whose square root is
S Real number
calculated
(binary)*1
D Data register number storing the square root of binary floating point data

*1. When a constant (K or H) is specified, it is automatically converted into binary floating point (real
number) when the instruction is executed.

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 S 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 S 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 32-bit operation (DESQR and DESQRP)
The square root of [ S1 +1, S1 ] is calculated (in the binary floating point operation), and the result is
transferred to [ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC127
S‚ D‚ [ S ‚ +1, S ‚ ] → [ D ‚ +1, D ‚ ]
DESQR Binary floating point Binary floating point

Related device
→ For the zero flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Device Name Description
M8020 Zero flag Turns ON when the operation result is true "0".

Error
The contents of [ S1 +1, S1 ] are valid only when a positive value is set. When a negative value is set,
the operation error flag M8067 turns ON, and the instruction is not executed.

536
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.16 FNC128 – ENEG / Floating Point Negation

11
18.16 FNC128 – ENEG / Floating Point Negation

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction inverts the sign of binary floating point (real number) data.
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1. Instruction format

FNC 128 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D ENEG P − 5 steps DENEG
Continuous

13
Operation
− DENEGP Pulse (Single)
Operation

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
D Head device number storing binary floating data whose sign is to be inverted Real number (binary)
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
15
D 3 3 3 3

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
Explanation of function and operation
1. 32-bit operation (DENEG and DENEGP)
The sign of binary floating point stored in [ D +1, D ] is inverted, and the negation result is stored to 16
[ D +1, D ].

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Command
input FNC128
D‚
DENEG

Program example
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
In the program example shown below, the sign of floating point data stored in D100 and D101 is inverted, and
the negation result is stored to D100 and D101 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC128 D100
DENEGP
18
END
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

D101 D100 D101 D100

1.2345 −1.2345

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

537
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.17 FNC129 – INT / Floating Point to Integer Conversion

18.17 FNC129 – INT / Floating Point to Integer Conversion

Outline
This instruction converts binary floating point data into a binary integer which is a normal data format inside
PLCs (binary floating point → binary integer).
→ For program examples of floating point operations, refer to Section 12.10.
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.

1. Instruction format

FNC 129 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D INT P 5 steps INT Continuous
9 steps DINT
Continuous
Operation Operation
INTP Pulse (Single) DINTP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Data register number storing binary floating point data to be converted into a
S Real number (binary)
binary integer
D Data register number storing a converted binary integer 16- or 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 S 3

D 3 3 S 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (INT and INTP)
Binary floating point stored in [ S +1, S ] is converted into a binary integer, and transferred to D .
Command
input FNC129
S‚ D‚ S ‚ +1, S ‚ → D‚
INT Binary floating 16-bit binary integer
point The decimal part is cut.

Instruction for inverse conversion

The inverse conversion is executed by FLT (FNC 49) instruction.
→ For FLT (FNC 49) instruction, refer to Section 12.10.

2. 32-bit operation (DINT and DINTP)

Binary floating point stored in [ S +1, S ] is converted into a binary integer, and transferred to
[ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC129
S‚ D‚ S ‚ +1, S ‚ → D ‚ +1, D ‚
DINT Binary floating 32-bit binary integer
point The decimal part is cut.

Instruction for inverse conversion

The inverse conversion is executed by DFLT (FNC 49) instruction.
→ For FLT (FNC 49) instruction, refer to Section 12.10.

538
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.17 FNC129 – INT / Floating Point to Integer Conversion

11
Related devices

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
→ For the methods of zero, borrow and carry flags, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Device Name Description
M8020 Zero flag Turns ON when the operation result is 0
M8021 Borrow flag Turns ON when the conversion result is cut in the decimal part.
12
Turns ON when the operation result is outside the range from −32768 to 32767

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
M8022 Carry flag (in 16-bit operation) or from −2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 (in 32-bit operation) and
overflow occurs. (The operation result is not reflected.)

Caution
1. Caution in the operation 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
• Values after the decimal point are rounded.

14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

539
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.18 FNC130 – SIN / Floating Point Sine

18.18 FNC130 – SIN / Floating Point Sine

Outline
This instruction obtains the sine value of an angle (in radians).
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.

1. Instruction format

FNC 130 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D SIN P 9 steps DSIN
Continuous
− Operation
DSINP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Device number storing an angle (in radians) in binary floating point
Real number (binary)
D Device number storing the sine value in binary floating point

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 32-bit operation (DSIN and DSINP)
A value of angle (binary floating point) specified in [ S +1, S ] is converted into the sine value, and
transferred to [ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC130 [ S ‚ +1, S ‚ ] RAD → [ D ‚ +1, D ‚ ] SIN
S‚ D‚ Binary floating point Binary floating point
DSIN

Value in radians (Value in degrees × π /180)

S‚ S ‚ +1 S‚ Binary floating point

D‚ D ‚ +1 D‚ Sine value
Binary floating point

540
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.18 FNC130 – SIN / Floating Point Sine

11
Program example

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
X001
FNC 12 K 45 D 0 (K45) → (D 0)
MOVP An angle is selected by the inputs
X002 X001 and X002.
FNC 12
MOVP
K 90 D 0 (K90) → (D 0) 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
M8000 (D 0) → (D5, D4) Binary floating point
FNC 49 D0 D 4
RUN FLTP value
monitor (π/180) → (D21, D20)
FNC123 K31415926 K1800000000 D 20
DEDIV Binary floating point

FNC122 (D5, D4) Degrees × (π/180) → (D31, D30) Radians 13

D 4 D 20 D 30 Binary floating point

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
DEMUL

S‚ D‚
FNC130 (D31, D30) RAD → (D101, D100) SIN
D 30 D100 Binary floating point
DSIN
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

541
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.19 FNC131 – COS / Floating Point Cosine

18.19 FNC131 – COS / Floating Point Cosine

Outline
This instruction obtains the cosine value of an angle (in radians).
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.

1. Instruction format

FNC 131 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D COS P 9 steps DCOS
Continuous
− Operation
DCOSP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Device number storing an angle (in radians) in binary floating point
Real number (binary)
D Device number storing the cosine value in binary floating point

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 32-bit operation (DCOS and DCOSP)
A value of angle (binary floating point) specified in [ S +1, S ] is converted into the cosine value, and
transferred to [ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC131 [ S ‚ +1, S ‚ ] RAD → [ D ‚ +1, D ‚ ] COS
S‚ D‚
DCOS Binary floating point Binary floating point

Value in radians (Value in degrees × π /180)

S‚ S ‚ +1 S‚ Binary floating point

D‚ D ‚ +1 D‚ Cosine value
Binary floating point

542
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.20 FNC132 – TAN / Floating Point Tangent

11
18.20 FNC132 – TAN / Floating Point Tangent

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction obtains the tangent value of an angle (in radians).
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1. Instruction format

FNC 132 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D TAN P 9 steps DTAN
Continuous
−
13
Operation
DTANP Pulse (Single)
Operation

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Device number storing an angle (in radians) in binary floating point
Real number (binary) 14
D Device number storing the tangent value in binary floating point

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and
Type
System User Digit Specification System User
Unit
Index
stant Number ter String
Pointer
15
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1. 32-bit operation (DTAN and DTANP)
A value of angle (binary floating point) specified in [ S +1, S ] is converted into the tangent value, and
transferred to [ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC132
S‚ D‚
[ S ‚ +1, S ‚ ] RAD → [ D ‚ +1, D ‚ ] TAN
Binary floating point Binary floating point
17
DTAN

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Value in radians (Value in degrees × π /180)
S‚ S ‚ +1 S‚ Binary floating point

Tangent value
18
D‚ D ‚ +1 D‚
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

Binary floating point

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

543
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.21 FNC133 – ASIN / Floating Point Arc Sine

18.21 FNC133 – ASIN / Floating Point Arc Sine

Outline
This instruction executes the SIN−1 (arc sine) operation.
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.

1. Instruction format

FNC 133 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D ASIN P − 9 steps DASIN
Continuous
Operation
− DASINP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Head device number storing a sine value used in the SIN−1 (arc sine) operation.
Real number (binary)
D Head device number storing the operation result

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 32-bit operation (DASIN and DASINP)
An angle is obtained from the sine value stored in [ S +1, S ], and stored to [ D +1, D ].
A real number can be directly specified as S .
Command
input FNC133 S‚ D‚
DASIN

S ‚ +1 S‚ D ‚ +1 D‚
SIN−1

Binary floating point Binary floating point

(real number) (real number)

• The sine value stored in [ S +1, S ] can be set within the range from −1.0 to +1.0.
• The angle (operation result) stored in [ D +1, D ] is expressed in radians (from −π/2 to π/2).
For conversion between radians and degrees, refer to RAD (FNC136) and DEG (FNC137) instructions.
→ For RAD (FNC136) instruction, refer to Section 18.24.
→ For DEG (FNC137) instruction, refer to Section 18.25.

Error
An operation error is caused in the following case; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When a value specified in S is outside the range from −1.0 to +1.0 (error code: K6706)

544
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.21 FNC133 – ASIN / Floating Point Arc Sine

11
Program example

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
In the program example shown below, the SIN−1 value of data (binary floating point) stored in D0 and D1 is
calculated, and the angle is output in 4-digit BCD to Y040 to Y057 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC133 The angle (in radians) is calculated by the SIN−1
DASIN
D0 D10
operation ([1]). 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC137 The value in radians is converted into the value in
D10 D20
DDEG degrees ([2]).

FNC129 The angle expressed in binary floating point (real

D20 D30
INT number) is converted into an integer (binary) ([3]).

FNC 18 D30 K4Y40

The angle expressed in integer (binary) is output to 13
BCD the display unit ([4]).

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
END

Operation when "0.5" is stored in D0 and D1

14
[1]

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Conversion
by SIN−1
D1 D0 operation D11 D10
0.5 0.5235988
Binary floating point DASIN Binary floating point
(real number) value (real number) value
[2] Conversion into degrees 15
DDEG

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
[3]
Conversion D30 [4] BCD
D21 D20 into binary b15 b0 operation Y057 Y040
30 30 0 0 3 0
Binary floating point
(real number) value
INT Binary
value
BCD BCD
value 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

545
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.22 FNC134 – ACOS / Floating Point Arc Cosine

18.22 FNC134 – ACOS / Floating Point Arc Cosine

Outline
This instruction executes the COS−1 (arc cosine) operation.
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.

1. Instruction format

FNC 134 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D ACOS P − 9 steps DACOS
Continuous
Operation
− DACOSP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Head device number storing a cosine value used in the COS−1 (arc cosine)
S
operation Real number (binary)
D Head device number storing the operation result

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 32-bit operation (DACOS and DACOSP)
An angle is obtained from the cosine value stored in [ S +1, S ], and stored to [ D +1, D ].
A real number can be directly specified as S .
Command
input FNC134
S‚ D‚
DACOS

S ‚ +1 S‚ D ‚ +1 D‚
−1
COS

Binary floating point Binary floating point

(real number) (real number)

• The cosine value stored in [ S +1, S ] can be set within the range from −1.0 to +1.0.
• The angle (operation result) stored in [ D +1, D ] is expressed in radians (from 0 to π).
For conversion between radians and degrees, refer to RAD (FNC136) and DEG (FNC137) instructions.
→ For RAD (FNC136) instruction, refer to Section 18.24.
→ For DEG (FNC137) instruction, refer to Section 18.25.

Error
An operation error is caused in the following case; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When a value specified in S is outside the range from −1.0 to +1.0 (error code: K6706)

546
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.22 FNC134 – ACOS / Floating Point Arc Cosine

11
Program example

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
In the program example shown below, the COS−1 value of data (binary floating point) stored in D0 and D1 is
calculated, and the angle is output in 4-digit BCD to Y040 to Y057 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC134 The angle (in radians) is calculated by the COS−1
DACOS
D0 D10
operation ([1]). 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC137 The value in radians is converted into the value in
D10 D20
DDEG degrees ([2]).

FNC129 The angle expressed in the binary floating point (real

D20 D30
INT number) is converted into an integer (binary) ([3]).

FNC 18 D30 K4Y40

The angle expressed in integer (binary) is output to 13
BCD the display unit ([4]).

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
END

Operation when "0.5" is stored in D0 and D1

14
[1]

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Conversion
by COS−1
D1 D0 operation D11 D10
0.5 1.047198
Binary floating point DACOS Binary floating point
(real number) value (real number) value
[2] Conversion into degrees 15
DDEG

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
[3]
Conversion D30 [4] BCD
D21 D20 into binary b15 b0 operation Y057 Y040
60 60 0 0 6 0
Binary floating point
(real number) value
INT Binary
value
BCD BCD
value 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

547
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.23 FNC135 – ATAN / Floating Point Arc Tangent

18.23 FNC135 – ATAN / Floating Point Arc Tangent

Outline
This instruction executes the TAN−1 (arc tangent) operation.
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.

1. Instruction format

FNC 135 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D ATAN P − 9 steps DATAN
Continuous
Operation
− DATANP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Head device number storing a tangent value used in the TAN−1 (arc tangent)
S
operation Real number (binary)
D Head device number storing the operation result

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 32-bit operation (DATAN and DATANP)
An angle is obtained from the tangent value stored in [ S +1, S ], and stored to [ D +1, D ].
A real number can be directly specified as S .
Command
input FNC135
S‚ D‚
DATAN

S ‚ +1 S‚ D ‚ +1 D‚
−1
TAN

Binary floating point Binary floating point

(real number) (real number)

• The angle (operation result) stored in [ D +1, D ] is expressed in radians (from −π/2 to +π/2).
For conversion between radians and degrees, refer to RAD (FNC136) and DEG (FNC137) instructions.
→ For RAD (FNC136) instruction, refer to Section 18.24.
→ For DEG (FNC137) instruction, refer to Section 18.25.

548
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.23 FNC135 – ATAN / Floating Point Arc Tangent

11
Program example

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
In the program example shown below, the TAN−1 value of data (binary floating point) stored in D0 and D1 is
calculated, and the angle is output in 4-digit BCD to Y040 to Y057 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC135 The angle (in radians) is calculated by the TAN−1
DATAN
D0 D10
operation ([1]). 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC137 The value in radians is converted into the value in
D10 D20
DDEG degrees ([2]).

FNC129 The angle expressed in binary floating point (real

D20 D30
INT number) is converted into an integer (binary) ([3]).

FNC 18 D30 K4Y40

The angle expressed in integer (binary) is output to 13
BCD the display unit ([4]).

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
END

Operation when "1" is stored in D0 and D1

14
[1]

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Conversion
by TAN−1
D1 D0 operation D11 D10
1 0.785398
Binary floating point DATAN Binary floating point
(real number) value (real number) value
[2] Conversion into degrees 15
DDEG

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
[3]
Conversion D30 [4] BCD
D21 D20 into binary b15 b0 operation Y057 Y040
45 45 0 0 4 5
Binary floating point
(real number) value
INT Binary
value
BCD BCD
value 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

549
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.24 FNC136 – RAD / Floating Point Degrees to Radians Conversion

18.24 FNC136 – RAD / Floating Point Degrees to Radians Conversion

Outline
This instruction converts a value in degrees into a value in radians.
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.

1. Instruction format

FNC 136 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D RAD P − 9 steps DRAD
Continuous
Operation
− DRADP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Head device number storing a value in degrees to be converted into a value in
S
radians Real number (binary)
D Head device number storing a value in radians acquired by conversion

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 32-bit operation (DRAD and DRADP)
The unit of [ S +1, S ] is converted from degrees into radians, and the operation result is stored to
[ D +1, D ].
A real number can be directly specified as S .
Command
input FNC136
S‚ D‚
DRAD

S ‚ +1 S‚ D ‚ +1 D‚
° rad

Binary floating point Binary floating point

(real number) (real number)

• The conversion from degrees into radians is executed as follows:

π
Radians = Degrees ×
180

550
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.24 FNC136 – RAD / Floating Point Degrees to Radians Conversion

11
Program example

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
In the program example shown below, a 4-digit BCD value set in degrees in X020 to X037 is converted into a
binary floating point value in radians, and stored to D20 and D21 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC 19 K4X20 D0 Angle to be converted into radians is input ([1]).
BIN 12
The input angle is converted into binary floating

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC 49 D0 D10
FLT point (real number) ([2]).

FNC136 The angle is converted from degrees into radians

D10 D20
DRAD ([3]).

END 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Operation when "120" is specified in X020 to X037

[1] [2] Conversion into [3]

Conversion
X037 X020 into binary b15
D0
b0
binary floating point
(real number) D11 D10
Conversion
into radians D21 D20 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
0 1 2 0 120 120 2.094395 ...
BCD BIN Binary FLT DRAD
value value

15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

551
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.25 FNC137 – DEG / Floating Point Radians to Degrees Conversion

18.25 FNC137 – DEG / Floating Point Radians to Degrees Conversion

Outline
This instruction converts a value in radians into a value in degrees.
→ For handling of floating point, refer to Subsection 5.1.3.

1. Instruction format

FNC 137 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D DEG P − 9 steps DDEG
Continuous
Operation
− DDEGP Pulse (Single)
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Head device number storing a value in radians to be converted into a value in
S
degrees Real number (binary)
D Head device number storing a value in degrees acquired by conversion

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 32-bit operation (DDEG and DDEGP)
The unit of [ S +1, S ] is converted from radians into degrees, and the operation result is stored to
[ D +1, D ].
Command S ‚ +1 S‚ D ‚ +1 D‚
input FNC137
S‚ D‚ rad °
DDEG

Binary floating point Binary floating point

(real number) (real number)

• The conversion from radians into degrees is executed as follows:

180
Degrees = Radians ×
π

552
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 18 Floating Point – FNC110 to FNC139
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 18.25 FNC137 – DEG / Floating Point Radians to Degrees Conversion

11
Program example

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
In the program example shown below, a binary floating point value set in radians in D20 and D21 is converted
into a BCD value in degrees, and stored to Y040 and Y057 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC137 A value in radians is converted into a value in
D20 D10
DDEG degrees ([1]). 12
The angle in binary floating point (real number) is

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC129 D10 D0
INT converted into an integer ([2]).

FNC 18 The converted integer is output to the display unit

D0 K4Y40
BCD ([3]).

END 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Operation when "1.435792" is specified in D20 and D21
[2]
[1] Conversion [3]
D21 D20
Conversion
into degrees D11 D10
into binary
value b15
D0 Conversion
b0 into BCD Y057 Y040 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
1.435792 82.26482 82 0 0 8 2
Binary floating point DDEG Binary floating point INT Binary BCD BCD
value (real number) value (real number) value value

15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

553
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

19. Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149

FNC140 to FNC149 provide instructions for executing complicated processing for fundamental applied
instructions and for executing special processing.

FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

Section
140 WSUM WSUM S D n Sum of Word Data
19.1

Section
141 WTOB WTOB S D n WORD to BYTE
19.2

Section
142 BTOW BTOW S D n BYTE to WORD
19.3

Section
143 UNI UNI S D n 4-bit Linking of Word Data
19.4

Section
144 DIS DIS S D n 4-bit Grouping of Word Data
19.5

145 −

146 −

Section
147 SWAP SWAP S Byte Swap
19.6

148 −

Section
149 SORT2 SORT2 S m1 m2 D n Sort Tabulated Data 2
19.7

554
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.1 FNC140 – WSUM / Sum of Word Data

11
19.1 FNC140 – WSUM / Sum of Word Data

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction calculates the sum of consecutive 16-bit or 32-bit data.
When calculating the addition data (sum value) in units of byte (8 bits), use the CCD (FNC 84) instruction.
12
→ For CCD (FNC 84) instruction, refer to Section 16.5.

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
1. Instruction format

FNC 140 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D WSUM P 7 steps WSUM Continuous
Operation 13 steps DWSUM
Continuous
Operation 13
WSUMP Pulse (Single) DWSUMP Pulse (Single)

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
S Head device number storing data whose sum is calculated 16- or 32-bit binary
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
D Head device number storing sum 32- or 64-bit binary
n Number of data (0 < n) 16- or 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices

Oper-
Bit Devices Word Devices Others 15
Special Con- Real Charac-

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3 3

D
n
3 3 3 3
3 3
3 3
3 3
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Explanation of function and operation
1. 16-bit operation (WSUM and WSUMP)
The sum of "n" 16-bit data starting from S is stored as 32-bit data in [ D +1, D ]. 17
Command

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
input
FNC140 S‚ D‚ n
WSUM

S ‚ +0 K4444
K3333
+1
+2 K1234 "n"
Sum of
"n" data [ ‚ +1, D ]‚
D
18
+3 K-5426 points
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

(n = 6) K13911
+4 K326
+5 K10000

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

555
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.1 FNC140 – WSUM / Sum of Word Data

2. 32-bit operation (DWSUM and DWSUMP)

The sum of "n" 32-bit data starting from [ S +1, S ] is stored as 64-bit data in [ D +3, D +2,
D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC140 S‚ D‚ n
DWSUM

[ S ‚ +1, S ‚ ] K32767000
[ S ‚ +3, S ‚ +2] K6000 Sum of
"n"
[ S ‚ +5, S ‚ +4] K35392000 "n" data [ D ‚ +3, D ‚ +2, D ‚ +1, D ‚ ]
points
[ S ‚ +7, S ‚ +6] K-11870000 (n = 5) K68640000
[ S ‚ +9, S ‚ +8] K12345000

Related instruction
Instruction Description
Check code
CCD (FNC 84)
Calculates the sum of 16-bit data in units of byte (8 bits) and the horizontal parity.

Caution
In the 32-bit operation, the acquired sum is 64-bit data. FX3U and FX3UC PLCs cannot handle 64-bit data.
When the sum is within the numeric range of 32-bit data (K-2,147,483,648 to K2,147,483,647), however,
FX3U and FX3UC PLCs can handle the low-order 32 bits of 32-bit data as the sum while ignoring the high-
order 32 bits.

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When "n" points starting from S are outside the specified device range (error code: K6706)
• When "n" is smaller than or equivalent to "0" (error code: K6706)
• When D are outside the specified device range. (error code: K6706)

Program example
In the program shown below, the sum of 16-bit data stored in D10 to D14 is stored in [D101, D100].
X010 D10 K4500
FNC140 D10 D100 K5
WSUMP D11 K2500 WSUMP
D12 K-3276 instruction [D101,D100]
D13 K6780 K14948
END
D14 K4444

556
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.2 FNC141 – WTOB / WORD to BYTE

11
19.2 FNC141 – WTOB / WORD to BYTE

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction separates consecutive 16-bit data in byte units (8 bits).
12
1. Instruction format

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC 141 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

WTOB P WTOB Continuous −

7 steps Operation
WTOBP Pulse (Single) −
Operation
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
S Head device number storing data to be separated in byte units

D Head device number storing result of separation in byte units 16-bit binary 14
n Number of byte data to be separated (0 ≤ n)

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and
Type
System User Digit Specification System User
Unit
Index
stant Number ter String
Pointer
15
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3
16
Explanation of function and operation

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1. 16-bit operation (WTOB and WTOBP)
1) "n/2" 16-bit data stored in S and later is separated into "n" bytes, and stored in "n" devices starting
from D as shown below.
Command
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
input FNC141 S‚ D‚ n
WTOBP
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S ‚ +0 High-order byte Low-order byte D ‚ +0 00H Low-order byte
+1 High-order byte Low-order byte +1 00H High-order byte
+2 00H Low-order byte 18
...

...

* +3 00H "n" bytes

+n/2 High-order byte Low-order byte High-order byte
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139
...

...

* When "n" is an odd number, "n/2" is +n-2 00H Low-order byte

rounded up. +n-1 00H High-order byte
When "n" is "5", for example, " S ‚
"00H" is stored.
+3" is used.
19
2) "00H" is stored in the high-order byte (8 bits) of each device ( D and later) storing the separated byte
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

data.

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

557
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.2 FNC141 – WTOB / WORD to BYTE

3) When "n" is an odd number, only the low-order byte (8 bits) of the final separation source device is
regarded as the target data as shown in the figure below.
For example, when "n" is "5", the data from S to the low-order byte (8 bits) of S +2 is stored in
D to D +4.
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S ‚ +0 12H 39H D ‚ +0 00H 39H
+1 56H 78H +1 00H 12H
When "n"
+2 FEH DCH +2 00H 78H is "5"
+3 00H 56H
It is ignored when
"n" is "5". +4 00H DCH

"00H" is stored.
4) When "n" is "0", WTOB instruction is not executed.

Related instruction
Instruction Description
BTOW (FNC142) Combines the low-order 8 bits (low-order byte) of consecutive 16-bit data.

Caution
Devices storing the separation source data can overlap devices storing the separated data.
When "n" is an odd number, however, the high-order byte (8 bits) of the final separation source device is
overwritten and erased.
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S ‚ =D12 32H 31H D ‚ =D12 00H 31H
D13 34H 33H D13 00H 32H
When "n"
D14 36H 35H D14 00H 33H is "5"
"36H" is ignored when "n" is "5". D15 00H 34H
Because D14 is also used in the D16 00H 35H
separation result destination devices D
and later, "36H" is erased and
overwritten. "00H" is stored.

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When the separation source devices S to S +n/2 are outside the specified device range (error
code: K6706)
When "n" is an odd number, the number of a rounded up value decides the number of devices. (error
code: K6706)
• When the separated data destination devices D to D +n-1 are outside the specified device range
(error code: K6706)

Program example
In the program shown below, the data stored in D10 to D12 is separated in byte units, and stored in D20 to
D25.
X000
FNC141 D10 D20 K6
WTOBP

END

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
D10 FDH 58H D20 00H 58H
D11 57H E2H D21 00H FDH
D12 34H 44H D22 00H E2H 6 bytes
D23 00H 57H
D24 00H 44H
D25 00H 34H

"00H" is stored.

558
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.3 FNC142 – BTOW / BYTE to WORD

11
19.3 FNC142 – BTOW / BYTE to WORD

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction combines the low-order 8 bits (low-order byte) of consecutive 16-bit data.
12
1. Instruction format

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC 142 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

BTOW P BTOW Continuous −

7 steps Operation
BTOWP Pulse (Single) −
Operation
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
S Head device number storing data to be combined in byte units

D Head device number storing data acquired by combination in byte units 16-bit binary 14
n Number of byte data to be combined (0 ≤ n)

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and
Type
System User Digit Specification System User
Unit
Index
stant Number ter String
Pointer
15
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3
16
Explanation of function and operation

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
1. 16-bit operation (BTOW and BTOWP)
1) The low-order byte (8 bits) of "n" 16-bit data starting from S is combined, and stored in "n/2" devices
starting from D as shown below.
Command
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
input FNC142 S‚ D‚ n
BTOWP
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S ‚ +0 1st byte data D ‚ +0 2nd byte 1st byte
+1 2nd byte data +1 4th byte 3rd byte
"n" +2 3rd byte data 18
...

...

bytes +n/2 *
"n"th byte "n-1"th byte
...

...

Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

+n-1 "n"th byte data

* When "n" is an odd number,
The high-order byte is ignored. refer to "3)" below

2) The high-order byte (8 bits) of each combination source 16-bit data ( S and later) is ignored.
19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

559
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.3 FNC142 – BTOW / BYTE to WORD

3) When "n" is an odd number, "00H" is stored in the high-order byte (8 bits) of the final one among the
combination result destination devices as shown below.
For example, when "n" is "5", the low-order byte (8 bits) of S to S +4 is stored in D to
D +2, and "00H" is stored in the high-order byte (8 bits) of D +2.

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S ‚ +0 ABH 12H D ‚ +0 34H 12H
+1 CDH 34H +1 78H 56H
When
"n" is +2 EFH 56H +2 00H 9AH
"5" +3 ABH 78H
When "n" is "5",
+4 CDH 9AH "00H" is stored.
The high-order bytes is ignored.

4) When "n" is "0", the BTOW instruction is not executed.

Related instruction
Instruction Description
WTOB (FNC141) Separates consecutive 16-bit data in byte units (8 bits).

Caution
Devices storing the combination source data may be equivalent to devices storing the combined data.
After combination, however, the high-order byte (8 bits) of the combination source data stored in the devices
used for the combination destination data is erased and overwritten with the data acquired by combining the
high-order byte (8 bits).
b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S ‚ =D11 ABH 12H D ‚ =D10 34H 12H
D12 CDH 34H D11 78H 56H
When D13 EFH 56H D12 BCH 9AH
"n" is D14 ABH 78H D13 EFH 56H
"6" D15 CDH 9AH D14 ABH 78H
D16 EFH BCH D15 CDH 9AH
D16 EFH BCH
The high-order bytes is ignored.
It is not changed.
Because these combination source devices are
also used for the combination destination, "ABH"
and "CDH" are erased and overwritten.

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When the combination source devices S to S +n-1 are outside the specified device range (error
code: K6706)
• When the combined data destination devices D to D +n/2 are outside the specified device range
(error code: K6706)
When "n" is an odd number, the number of a rounded up value decides the numer of devices. (error code:
K6706)

560
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.3 FNC142 – BTOW / BYTE to WORD

11
Program example

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
In the program shown below, the low-order byte (8 bits) data stored in D20 to D25 is combined, and stored in
D10 to D12.
X000
FNC142 D20 D10 K6
BTOWP 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
END

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
D20 00H 78H D10 12H 78H
D21
6 bytes D22
31H
36H
12H
49H
D11
D12
55H
31H
49H
67H
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
D23 44H 55H
D24 48H 67H
D25 49H 31H

The high-order bytes is ignored.

14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

561
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.4 FNC143 – UNI / 4-bit Linking of Word Data

19.4 FNC143 – UNI / 4-bit Linking of Word Data

Outline
This instruction combines the low-order 4 bits of consecutive 16-bit data.

1. Instruction format

FNC 143 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

UNI P UNI Continuous −

7 steps Operation
UNIP Pulse (Single) −
Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
S Head device number storing data to be combined

D Device number storing combined data 16-bit binary

Number of data to be combined (0 to 4, When "n" is "0", UNI instruction is not
n
executed.)

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (UNI/UNIP)
1) The low-order 4 bits of "n" 16-bit data starting from S are combined, and stored in D as shown
below.
Command
input FNC143 S‚ D‚ n
UNIP

b15 b4 b3 b0
S ‚ +0 Low-order 4 bits
"n" 1 Low-order 4 bits
points 2 Low-order 4 bits b15 b12b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0
3 Low-order 4 bits D‚

Ignored Combined data

2) Specify a number 1 to 4 in "n".

In the case of "n = 0", UNI instruction is not executed.

562
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.4 FNC143 – UNI / 4-bit Linking of Word Data

11
3) In the case of "1 ≤ n ≤ 3", the high-order {4 × (4-n)} bits of D are set to "0".

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
For example, when "n" is "3", the low-order 4 bits of S to S +2 are stored in b0 to b11 of D ,
and the high-order 4 bits of D are set to "0".

S ‚ +0
b15 b4 b3 b0
Low-order 4 bits 12
+1 Low-order 4 bits b15 b12b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
+2 Low-order 4 bits D‚ 0 0 0 0

Ignored Combined data When "n" is "3", b12

to b15 are set to "0".
13
Related instruction

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Instruction Description
DIS (FNC144) Separates 16-bit data in 4-bit units.

Errors 14
An operation error occurs in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
in D8067.
• When S to S +n are outside the specified device range (error code: K6706)
• When "n" is outside the range from "0 to 4" (error code: K6706)
15
Program example

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
In the program below, the low-order 4 bits of D0 to D2 are combined and stored in D10 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC143 D0 D10 K3
UNIP

END
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
b15 b4 b3 b0 b15 b12b11 b4 b3 b0
D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 D10 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1
D1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
D2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Combined data Because "n" is "K3",
they are set to "0".

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

563
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.5 FNC144 – DIS / 4-bit Grouping of Word Data

19.5 FNC144 – DIS / 4-bit Grouping of Word Data

Outline
This instruction separates 16-bit data into 4 bit units.

1. Instruction format

FNC 144 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

DIS P DIS Continuous −

7 steps Operation
DISP Pulse (Single) −
Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
S Device number storing data to be separated

D Head device number storing separated data 16-bit binary

Number of data to be separated (0 to 4) (When "n" is "0", DIS instruction is not
n
executed.)

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (DIS and DISP)
1) 16-bit data stored in S is separated in 4-bit units, and stored in D as shown below.
Command
input FNC144 S‚ D‚ n
DISP

b15 b12b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0 b15 b4 b3 b0

S‚ D ‚ +0 Low-order 4 bits
+1 Low-order 4 bits "n"
+2 Low-order 4 bits points
+3 Low-order 4 bits

They are set to Data storage area

"0".

2) Specify a number 1 to 4 in "n".

In the case of "n = 0", DIS instruction is not executed.
3) High-order 12 bits of "n" devices starting from D are set to "0".

Related instruction
Instruction Description
UNI (FNC143) Combines low-order 4 bits of 16-bit data.

564
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.5 FNC144 – DIS / 4-bit Grouping of Word Data

11
Errors

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
An operation error occurs in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored
in D8067.
• When D to D +n are outside the specified device range (error code: K6706)
• When "n" is outside the range from "0 to 4" (error code: K6706) 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Program example
In the program below, D0 is separated into 4 bit units and stored in D10 to D13 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC144 D0 D10 K4
DISP 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
END

b15 b12b11 b8 b7 b4 b3 b0 b15 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

D10 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 D10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
D11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
D12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
D13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0

They are set to "0". Data storage

area
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

565
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.6 FNC147 – SWAP / Byte Swap

19.6 FNC147 – SWAP / Byte Swap

Outline
This instruction swaps the high-order 8 bits and low-order 8 bits of a word device.

1. Instruction format

FNC 147 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D SWAP P 3 steps SWAP Continuous
5 steps DSWAP
Continuous
Operation Operation
SWAPP Pulse (Single) DSWAPP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
Word device whose high-order 8 bits and low-order 8 bits are swapped for each
SS1 ‚ 16- or 32-bit binary
other

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

SS1 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (SWAP and SWAPP)
High-order 8 bits and low-order 8 bits are swapped for each other.
Command S‚
input FNC147 S‚ High-order 8 bits Low-order 8 bits
SWAPP

2. 32-bit operation (DSWAP and DSWAPP)

High-order 8 bits and low-order 8 bits are swapped for each other in each word device.
Command S ‚ +1 S‚
input
FNC147 S‚ High-order 8 bits Low-order 8 bits , High-order 8 bits Low-order 8 bits
DSWAPP

Caution
• When the continuous operation type instruction is used, swapping is executed in each operation cycle.
This instruction works in the same way as the extension function of the XCH (FNC 17) instruction.

566
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.7 FNC149 – SORT2 / Sort Tabulated Data 2

11
19.7 FNC149 – SORT2 / Sort Tabulated Data 2

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction sorts a data table consisting of data (lines) and group data (columns) based on a specified
group data (column) sorted by line in either ascending or descending order. This instruction stores the data
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
(lines) in serial devices facilitating the addition of data (lines).
On the other hand, the SORT (FNC 69) instruction stores the group data (columns) in serial devices, and
sorts a table in ascending order only.
→ For SORT (FNC 69) instruction, refer to Section 14.10.

1. Instruction format 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
FNC 149 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D SORT2 11 steps SORT

Continuous
21 steps DSORT2
Continuous
Operation Operation

2. Set data
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Operand type Description Data type
S Head device number storing the data table [which occupies m1 × m2 points]
m1 Number of data (lines) [1 to 32]
m2 Number of group data (columns) [1 to 6]
Head device number storing the operation result [which occupies m1 × m2 points]
16- or 32-bit binary
15
D

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
n Column number of group data (column) used as the basis of sorting [1 to m2]

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
and System User Digit Specification System User
Special
Index
Con- Real Charac-
Pointer
16
Unit stant Number ter String

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3
m1 3 3 3 3
m2
D 3 3
3 3
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
n 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (SORT2) 18
In the data table (sorting source) having (m1 x m2) points from S , data lines are sorted in the ascending
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

or descending order based on the group data in column No. "n", and the result is stored in the data table
(occupying m1 x m2 points) from D .
→ For operation examples, refer to Page 523.
Command
input FNC149 S m1 m2 D n
19
SORT2
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

Instruction execution complete flag

M8029
Instruction execution complete
M{{ flag for SORT2 instruction

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

567
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.7 FNC149 – SORT2 / Sort Tabulated Data 2

The data table configuration is explained in an example in which the sorting source data table has 3 lines and
4 columns (m1 = K3, m2 = K4). For the sorting result data table, understand S as D .
Number of groups (m2 = K4)
Column No. 1 2 3 4
Line No. Control number Height Weight Age
1 S S +1 S +2 S +3
Number
of data 2 S +4 S +5 S +6 S +7
(m1 = 3)
3 S +8 S +9 S +10 S +11

• Set the sorting order by setting M8165 to ON or OFF.

Sorting order
M8165=ON Descending order
M8165=OFF Ascending order

• When the command input turns ON, data sorting is started. Data sorting is completed after "m1" scans,
and the instruction execution complete flag M8029 is set to ON.
→ For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.

2. 32-bit operation (DSORT2)

In the data table (sorting source) having (m1 × m2) points from [ S +1, S ], data lines are sorted in the
ascending or descending order based on the group data in the column No. "n", and the result is stored in the
data table (sorting result) having (m1 × m2) points from [ D +1, D ].
→ For operation examples, refer to Page 523.
Command
input FNC149 S m1 m2 D n
DSORT2

Instruction execution complete flag

M8029
Instruction execution complete
M{{ flag for SORT2 instruction

The data table configuration is explained in an example in which the sorting source data table has 3 lines and
4 columns (m1 = K3, m2 = K4). For the sorting result data table, understand S as D .
Number of groups (m2 = K4)
Column No. 1 2 3 4
Line No. Control number Height Weight Age
1 [ S +1, S ] [ S +3, S +2] [ S +5, S +4] [ S +7, S +6]
Number
of data 2 [ S +9, S +8] [ S +11, S +10] [ S +13, S +12] [ S +15, S +14]
(m1 = 3)
3 [ S +17, S +16] [ S +19, S +18] [ S +21, S +20] [ S +23, S +22]

• Set the sorting order by setting M8165 to ON or OFF.

Sorting order
M8165=ON Descending order
M8165=OFF Ascending order

• When a data register D or extension register (R) is used for "m1", the data length is 32 bits.
For example, when "m1" is specified in D0, "m1" is 32-bit data stored in [D1, D0].
• When the command input turns ON, data sorting is started. Data sorting is completed after "m1" scans,
and the instruction execution complete flag M8029 is set to ON.
→ For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.

568
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.7 FNC149 – SORT2 / Sort Tabulated Data 2

11
3. Operation examples

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
When the instruction is executed with "n = K2 (column No. 2)" and "n = K3 (column No. 3)" for the following
sorting source data, the operations shown below result.
The operation examples below indicate 16-bit operations. In the case of 32-bit operation, construct the data
table with 32-bit binary data.
It is recommended to put a serial number such as a control number in the first column so that the original line
number can be estimated based on the contents.
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
Sorting source data
Number of groups (m2 = K4)
Column No. 1 2 3 4
Line No. Control number Height Weight Age
13
S S +1 S +2 S +3

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
1
1 150 45 20
S +4 S +5 S +6 S +7
2
2 180 50 40
Number
of data 3
S
3
+8 S
160
+9 S
70
+10 S
30
+11
14
(m1 = 5)

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
S +12 S +13 S +14 S +15
4
4 100 20 8
S +16 S +17 S +18 S +19
5
5 150 50 45
15
1) Sorting result when the instruction is executed with "n = K2 (column No. 2)"

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
(in the case of ascending order)
Column No. 1 2 3 4
Line No. Control number Height Weight Age
D D +1 D +2 D +3
1
4 100 20 8
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
D +4 D +5 D +6 D +7
2
1 150 45 20
D +8 D +9 D +10 D +11
3
5 150 50 45
D +12 D +13 D +14 D +15
17
4

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
3 160 70 30
D +16 D +17 D +18 D +19
5
2 180 50 40

2) Sorting result when the instruction is executed with "n = K3 (column No. 3)"
(in the case of descending order) 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

Column No. 1 2 3 4
Line No. Control number Height Weight Age
D D +1 D +2 D +3
1
3 160 70 30

2
D +4 D +5 D +6 D +7 19
2 180 50 40
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

D +8 D +9 D +10 D +11
3
5 150 50 45
D +12 D +13 D +14 D +15
4
1 150 45 20 20
D +16 D +17 D +18 D +19
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

5
4 100 20 8

569
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 19 Data Operation 2 – FNC140 to FNC149
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 19.7 FNC149 – SORT2 / Sort Tabulated Data 2

Related devices
→ For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Device Name Description
M8029 Instruction execution complete Turns ON when data sorting is completed.
Sorts data in the descending order when set to ON.
M8165 Descending order
Sorts data in the ascending order when set to OFF.

Related instruction
Instruction Description
Sort tabulated data
This instruction sorts a data table consisting of data (lines) and group data (columns) based on
SORT (FNC 69)
a specified group data (column) sorted by line in ascending order. This instruction stores the
group data (columns) in serial devices.

Cautions
• Do not change the contents of operands and data during operation.
• To execute SORT2 instruction again, set the command input to OFF once, then ON again.
• Limitation in number of SORT2 instructions
Up to two SORT2 instructions can be simultaneously driven in a program.
• Writing during RUN is disabled for a circuit block including SORT2 instruction.
• When the same device is specified in S and D
The source data is overwritten with the data acquired by sorting.
Pay close attention not to change the contents of S until execution of SORT2 instruction is completed.
• Ensure that the sorted data does not overlap with the source data.

D10 D30 D10 D30

Source Data Source Data

D2 D22 D20 D40

Sorted Data Sorted Data

D10 D30 D10 D30

Source Data Source Data

D10 D30 D35 D55

Sorted Data Sorted Data

D50 D70
Source Data

D20 D40
Sorted Data

570
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

11

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
20. Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159
FNC150 to FNC159 provide positioning instructions using the built-in pulse output function of the PLC. 12
→ For details, refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual.

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

Section
150 DSZR DSZR S1 S2 D1 D2 DOG Search Zero Return
20.1

Section
13
151 DVIT DVIT S1 S2 D1 D2 Interrupt Positioning

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
20.2

Section
152 TBL TBL D n Batch Data Positioning Mode
20.3

153 − − 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
154 − −

Section
155 ABS ABS S D1 D2 Absolute Current Value Read
20.4
15
Section

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
156 ZRN ZRN S1 S2 S3 D Zero Return
20.5

Section
157 PLSV PLSV S D1 D2 Variable Speed Pulse Output
20.6

158 DRVI DRVI S1 S2 D1 D2 Drive to Increment

Section
20.7
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Section
159 DRVA DRVA S1 S2 D1 D2 Drive to Absolute
20.8

Caution on writing during RUN

During RUN, avoid writing while any positioning control instruction (FNC150, FNC151, or FNC156 to 17
FNC159) is executed (that is, while pulses are output).

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
If program write is executed during RUN to a circuit block including a target instruction below while pulses are
being output, the PLC executes the operation shown below.
PLC operation when writing excuted during RUN while instruction is
Target instruction
executed
DSZR (FNC150) 18
Decelerates and stops pulse output.
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

DVIT (FNC151)
TBL (FNC152) Disables writing during RUN.
ZRN (FNC156) Decelerates and stops pulse output.
During operation with
Decelerates and stops pulse output.
PLSV (FNC157)
acceleration/deceleration*1
19
During operation without
Immediately stops pulse output.
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

acceleration/deceleration
DRVI (FNC158)
Decelerates and stops pulse output.
DRVA (FNC159)

*1. Only available for FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver.2.20 or later and FX3G PLC.
20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

571
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.1 FNC150 – DSZR / Dog Search Zero Return

20.1 FNC150 – DSZR / Dog Search Zero Return

Outline
This instruction executes a zero return, and aligns the mechanical position with a present value register inside
the PLC.
In addition, this instruction enables the following functions not supported by the ZRN (FNC156) instruction:
• DOG search function
• Zero return by the near-point (dog) signal and zero-phase signal
It is not possible, however, to count the zero-phase signal and then determine the zero point.
→ For explanation of the instruction, refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual.
→ For cautions on using special high speed output adapters,
refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual.

1. Instruction format

FNC 150 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

DSZR 9 steps DSZR Continuous

−
Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
S1 Device number for near-point signal (dog)

S2 Input number for zero-phase signal

Bit
D1 Device number (Y) from which pulses are to be output

D2 Device number to which rotation direction signal is output

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 S1 3
S
S2 3
2
S
D1 3
3
S
D2 3 3 S1 3
4

S1 : "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not
available.
S2 : Specify X000 to X007.
S3 : Specify Y000, Y001 or Y002*1 transistor output from the main unit, or specify Y000, Y001, Y002*3 or
Y003*3 from a high-speed output special adapter*2.
*1. Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.
*2. High-speed output special adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC.
*3. To use Y002 and Y003 with a high-speed output special adapter, connected a second high-
speed output special adapter.
Points
• When using a relay output type FX3U PLC, a special high speed output adapter is required.
• Outputs of special high speed output adapters work as differential line drivers.

572
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.1 FNC150 – DSZR / Dog Search Zero Return

11
S4 : When using a special high speed output adapter for the pulse output destination in an FX3U PLC, the

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
rotation direction signal must be used by the following table output.
When using a built-in transistor output for the pulse output destination in an FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC, the
rotation direction signal must use transistor output.
Special high speed output adapter No. Pulse output Rotation direction output

No. 1 (1st unit)

D1 =Y000 D2 =Y004 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D1 =Y001 D2 =Y005

D1 =Y002 D2 =Y006
No. 2 (2nd unit)
D1 =Y003 D2 =Y007

Explanation of function and operation 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Command
input FNC150 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D1 ‚ D2 ‚
DSZR

Caution on writing during RUN 14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
During RUN, avoid writing while the DSZR (FNC150) instruction is executed (that is, while a pulse is output).
Note that if writing is executed during RUN to a circuit block including the FNC150 instruction while pulses are
output, the PLC decelerates and stops pulse output.

Function change depending on the version

The function of FNC150 instruction is changed depending on the version as shown in the table below.
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
→ For explanation of the instruction and the contents of function change,
refer to the Positioning Control Edition.
Applicable version
Item Outline of function
FX3G FX3U FX3UC

Ver.1.00 Ver.2.20 Ver.2.20

Clear signal output When a special auxiliary relay corresponding to D1 is set to ON, 16
destination the clear signal output destination is changed to an output number

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
or later or later or later
specification function specified by a special data register corresponding to D .

17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

573
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.2 FNC151 – DVIT / Interrupt Positioning

20.2 FNC151 – DVIT / Interrupt Positioning

Outline
This instruction executes one-speed interrupt constant quantity feed.
→ For explanation of the instruction, refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual.
→ For cautions on using special high speed output adapters,
refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual.

1. Instruction format

FNC 151 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D DVIT 9 steps DVIT Continuous
17 steps DDVIT Continuous
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
*1
S1 Number of output pulses (incremental address) after interrupt
16- or 32-bit binary
S2 Output pulse frequency*2

D1 Device number (Y) from which pulses are to be output

Bit
D2 Device number to which rotation direction signal is output

*1. Setting range: −32768 to +32767 (except 0) in 16-bit operation

−999,999 to +999,999 (except 0) in 32-bit operation
*2. Setting range: 10 to 32767 Hz in 16-bit operation
Following range in 32-bit operation
Pulse output destination Setting range
FX3U PLC Special high speed output adapter 10 to 200,000 (Hz)
FX3U/FX3UC PLC Main unit (transistor output) 10 to 100,000 (Hz)

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
S
D1 3
1
S
D2 3 3 S3 3
2

S1 : Specify Y000, Y001 or Y002 transistor output from the main unit, or specify Y000, Y001, Y002*2 or
Y003*2 from a high-speed output special adapter*1.
*1. High-speed output special adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC.
*2. To use Y002 and Y003 with a high-speed output special adapter, connected a second high-
speed output special adapter.
Points
• When using a relay output type FX3U PLC, a special high speed output adapter is required.
• Outputs of special high speed output adapters work as differential line drivers.

574
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.2 FNC151 – DVIT / Interrupt Positioning

11
S2 : When using a special high speed output adapter for the pulse output destination in an FX3U PLC, the

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
rotation direction signal must be used by the following table output.
When using a built-in transistor output for the pulse output destination in an FX3U/FX3UC PLC, the
rotation direction signal must use transistor output.
Special high speed output adapter No. Pulse output Rotation direction output

No. 1 (1st unit)

D1 =Y000 D2 =Y004 12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
D1 =Y001 D2 =Y005

D1 =Y002 D2 =Y006
No. 2 (2nd unit)
D1 =Y003 D2 =Y007

S3 : "D….b" cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z). 13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Explanation of function and operation
Command
input FNC151 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D1 ‚ D2 ‚
DVIT
14

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
Caution on writing during RUN
During RUN, avoid writing while the DVIT (FNC151) instruction is executed (that is, while a pulse is output).
Note that if writing is executed during RUN to a circuit block including the FNC151 instruction while pulses are
output, the PLC decelerates and stops pulse output.
15
Function change depending on the version

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
The functions of FNC151 instruction are changed depending on the version as shown in the table below.
→ For explanation of the instruction and the contents of function change,
refer to the Positioning Control Edition.
Applicable version
FX3U FX3UC
Item Outline of function
16
When M8336 is set to ON, the interrupt input signal corresponding to

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
Y000 to Y003 is changed to an input number (X000 to X007)
Ver.2.20 or Ver.1.30 or Interrupt input signal
specified by D8336.
later later specification function
When using a transistor output in the main unit, Y003 cannot be
specified.
When "8" is specified by D8336 to the interrupt input signal
corresponding to Y000 to Y003 and M8336 is set to ON, the interrupt
17
input signal is changed to a special auxiliary relay. When this

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
changed special auxiliary relay is set to ON from OFF in an input
Ver.2.20 or Ver.2.20 or
User interrupt mode interrupt program, the PLC starts the interrupt operation. When this
later later
function is used, however, the logic of the interrupt input cannot be
inverted.
In addition, when using a transistor output in the main unit, Y003
cannot be specified. 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

575
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.3 FNC152 – TBL / Batch Data Positioning Mode

20.3 FNC152 – TBL / Batch Data Positioning Mode

Outline
This instruction executes one specified table operation from the data table set in GX Developer (Ver.8.23Z or
later).
→ For explanation of the instruction, refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual.
→ For cautions on using special high speed output adapters,
refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual.
Instruction Description
*1 Interrupt positioning
DVIT (FNC151)
PLSV (FNC157) Variable speed pulse output
DRVI (FNC158) Drive to increment
DRVA (FNC159) Drive to absolute

*1. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

1. Instruction format

FNC 152 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D TBL − 17 steps DTBL Continuous
Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
D Device number (Y) from which pulses are to be output Bit
n Table entry number [1 to 100] to be executed 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
S
D
1
n 3 3

S1 : Specify Y000, Y001 or Y002*1 transistor output from the main unit, or specify Y000, Y001, Y002*3 or
Y003*3 from a high-speed output special adapter*2.
*1. Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.
*2. High-speed output special adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC.
*3. To use Y002 and Y003 with a high-speed output special adapter, connected a second high-
speed output special adapter.
Points
• When using a relay output type FX3U PLC, a special high speed output adapter is required.
• Outputs of special high speed output adapters work as differential line drivers.

Explanation of function and operation

Command
input FNC152 D‚ n
DTBL

Caution on writing during RUN

Writing is disabled to a circuit block including the TBL (FNC152) instruction during RUN.

576
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.4 FNC155 – ABS / Absolute Current Value Read

11
20.4 FNC155 – ABS / Absolute Current Value Read

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Outline
This instruction reads the absolute position (ABS) data when the Mitsubishi servo amplifier (equipped with the
absolute position detection function) MR-H, MR-J2(S), or MR-J3 is connected. The data is converted into a
12

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
pulse when being read.
→ For explanation of the instruction, refer to the Positioning Control Edition.

1. Instruction format

FNC 155 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
13
D ABS − 13 steps DABS Continuous

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type 14
Head device number inputting absolute (ABS) data output signal sent from servo

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
S amplifier
Three points are occupied from S .
Bit
Head device number outputting absolute (ABS) data control signal to servo
D1 amplifier
Three points are occupied from D1 . 15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
D2 Device number storing absolute (ABS) data (32-bit value) 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
and System User Digit Specification System User
Special
Unit
Index
Con- Real Charac-
stant Number ter String
Pointer 16
Type

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 S2 3
S
D1 3 3 S2 3
1
D2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S3 3 3 3 17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
S1: Specify a transistor output.
S2: "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
S3: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

18
Command
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

input FNC155 S‚ D1 ‚ D2 ‚
DABS

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

577
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.5 FNC156 – ZRN / Zero Return

20.5 FNC156 – ZRN / Zero Return

Outline
This instruction executes a zero return, and aligns the mechanical position with a present value register inside
the PLC.
When the dog search function is required, use DSZR (FNC150) instruction.
→ For explanation of the instruction, refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual.
→ For cautions on using special high speed output adapters,
refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual.

1. Instruction format

FNC 156 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D ZRN 9 steps ZRN Continuous
17 steps DZRN Continuous
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
S1 Initial zero return speed*1
16- or 32-bit binary
S2 Creep speed [10 to 32767 Hz]

S3 Device number for near-point signal (dog)

Bit
D Device number (Y) from which pulses are to be output

*1. Setting range: 10 to 32767 Hz for 16-bit operation

Following range for 32-bit operation
Pulse output destination Setting range
FX3U PLC Special high speed output adapter 10 to 200,000 (Hz)
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC Main unit (transistor output) 10 to 100,000 (Hz)

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S3 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S3 3 3 3 3 3

S3 3 3 3 3 S1 3
S
D 3
2

S1 : "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not
available.
S2 : Specify Y000, Y001 or Y002*1 transistor output from the main unit, or specify Y000, Y001, Y002*3 or
Y003*3 from a high-speed output special adapter*2.
*1. Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.
*2. High-speed output special adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC.
*3. To use Y002 and Y003 with a high-speed output special adapter, connected a second high-
speed output special adapter.
Points
• When using a relay output type FX3U PLC, a special high speed output adapter is required.
• Outputs of special high speed output adapters work as differential line drivers.
S3 : This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

578
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.5 FNC156 – ZRN / Zero Return

11
Explanation of function and operation

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
Command
input FNC156 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ S3 ‚ D‚
ZRN

12
Caution on writing during RUN

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
During RUN, avoid writing while the ZRN (FNC156) instruction is executed (that is, while pulses are output).
Note that if writing is executed during RUN to a circuit block including the FNC156 instruction while pulses are
output, the PLC decelerates and stops pulse output.

Function change depending on the version 13

The function of FNC156 instruction is changed depending on the version as shown in the table below.

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
→ For explanation of the instruction and the contents of function change,
refer to the Positioning Control Edition.
Applicable version
Item Outline of function
FX3G FX3U FX3UC

Clear signal output When a special auxiliary relay corresponding to D is set to ON,
14
Ver.1.00 Ver.2.20 Ver.2.20

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
destination the clear signal output destination is changed to an output number
or later or later or later
specification function specified by a special data register corresponding to D .

15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

579
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.6 FNC157 – PLSV / Variable Speed Pulse Output

20.6 FNC157 – PLSV / Variable Speed Pulse Output

Outline
This instruction outputs variable speed pulses with an assigned rotation direction.
→ For explanation of the instruction, refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual.
→ For cautions on using special high speed output adapters,
refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual.

1. Instruction format

FNC 157 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D PLSV 9 steps PLSV Continuous
17 steps DPLSV Continuous
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
*1 16- or 32-bit binary
S1 Device number for output pulse frequency

D1 Device number (Y) from which pulses are to be output

Bit
D2 Device number to which rotation direction signal is output

*1. Setting range: −32768 to −1, +1 to +32767 (except 0) Hz for 16-bit operation
Following range for 32-bit operation
Pulse output destination Setting range
FX3U PLC Special high speed output adapter −200,000 to −1, +1 to 200,000 (Hz)
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC Main unit (transistor output) −100,000 to −1, +1 to 100,000 (Hz)

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S4 3 3 3 3 3
S
D1 3
1
S
D2 3 3 S3 3
2

S1 : Specify Y000, Y001 or Y002*1 transistor output from the main unit, or specify Y000, Y001, Y002*3 or
Y003*3 from a high-speed output special adapter*2.
*1. Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.
*2. High-speed output special adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC.
*3. To use Y002 or Y003 with a high-speed output special adapter, connected a second high-speed
output special adapter.
Points
• When using a relay output type FX3U PLC, a special high speed output adapter is required.
• Outputs of special high speed output adapters work as differential line drivers.

580
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.6 FNC157 – PLSV / Variable Speed Pulse Output

11
S2 : When using a special high speed output adapter for the pulse output destination in an FX3U PLC, the

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
rotation direction signal must be used by the following table output.
When using a built-in transistor output for the pulse output destination in an FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC, the
rotation direction signal must use transistor output.

Special high speed output adapter No. Pulse output Rotation direction output 12
D1 =Y000 D2 =Y004

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
No. 1 (1st unit)
D1 =Y001 D2 =Y005

D1 =Y002 D2 =Y006
No. 2 (2nd unit)
D1 =Y003 D2 =Y007

S3 : "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
available.
S4 : This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

Command
input
14
FNC157 S1 ‚ D1 ‚ D2 ‚

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
PLSV

Caution on writing during RUN

During RUN, avoid writing while PLSV (FNC157) instruction is executed (that is, while pulses are output).
Note that if writing is executed during RUN to a circuit block including FNC157 instruction while pulses are
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
output, the PLC executes the operation shown below.
PLC operation when writing is excuted during RUN while
instruction is executed
During operation with acceleration/deceleration*1 Decelerates and stops pulse output.
During operation without acceleration/deceleration Immediately stops pulse output. 16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
*1. Only available for FX3U/FX3UC PLC Ver.2.20 or later and FX3G PLC.

Function change depending on the version

The function of the FNC157 instruction is changed depending on the version as shown in the table below.
→ For explanation of the instruction and the contents of function change,
refer to the Positioning Control Edition.
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109
Applicable version
Item Outline of function
FX3G FX3U FX3UC

Acceleration/ When M8338 is set to ON, the PLC accelerates or decelerates up to

Ver.1.00 Ver.2.20 Ver.2.20
deceleration S1 in the acceleration or deceleration time corresponding to
or later or later or later
operation function D1 if S1 changes. 18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

581
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.7 FNC158 – DRVI / Drive to Increment

20.7 FNC158 – DRVI / Drive to Increment

Outline
This instruction executes one-speed positioning by incremental drive. The movement distance from the
present position can be specified with a positive or negative sign.
→ For explanation of the instruction, refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual.
→ For cautions on using special high speed output adapters,
refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual.

1. Instruction format

FNC 158 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D DRVI 9 steps DRVI Continuous
17 steps DDRVI Continuous
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
S1 Number of output pulses (relative address)*1
16- or 32-bit binary
S2 Output pulse frequency*2

D1 Device number (Y) from which pulses are to be output

Bit
D2 Device number to which rotation direction signal is output

*1. Setting range: −32768 to +32767 (except 0) for 16-bit operation

−999,999 to +999,999 (except 0) for 32-bit operation
*2. Setting range: 10 to 32767 Hz for 16-bit operation
Following range for 32-bit operation
Pulse output destination Setting range
FX3U PLC Special high speed output adapter 10 to 200,000 (Hz)
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC Main unit (transistor output) 10 to 100,000 (Hz)

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S4 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S4 3 3 3 3 3
S
D1 3
1
S
D2 3 3 S3 3
2

S1 : Specify Y000, Y001 or Y002*1 transistor output from the main unit, or specify Y000, Y001, Y002*3, or
Y003*3 from a high-speed output special adapter*2.
*1. Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.
*2. High-speed output special adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC.
*3. To use Y002 or Y003 with a high-speed output special adapter, connected a second high-speed
output special adapter.
Points
• When using a relay output type FX3U PLC, a special high speed output adapter is required.
• Outputs of special high speed output adapters work as differential line drivers.

582
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.7 FNC158 – DRVI / Drive to Increment

11
S2 :When using a special high speed output adapter for the pulse output destination in an FX3U PLC, the

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
rotation direction signal must be used by the following table output.
When using a built-in transistor output for the pulse output destination in an FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC, the
rotation direction signal must use transistor output.

Special high speed output adapter No. Pulse output Rotation direction output 12
D1 =Y000 D2 =Y004

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
No. 1 (1st unit)
D1 =Y001 D2 =Y005

D1 =Y002 D2 =Y006
No. 2 (2nd unit)
D1 =Y003 D2 =Y007

S3 : "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
available.
S4 : This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

Command
input
14
FNC158 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D1 ‚ D2 ‚

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
DRVI

Caution on writing during RUN

During RUN, avoid writing while DRVI (FNC158) instruction is executed (that is, while pulses are output).
Note that if writing is executed during RUN to a circuit block including FNC158 instruction while pulses are
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
output, the PLC decelerates and stops pulse output.

16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

583
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.8 FNC159 – DRVA / Drive to Absolute

20.8 FNC159 – DRVA / Drive to Absolute

Outline
This instruction executes one-speed positioning by absolute drive. The movement distance from the zero
point can be specified.
→ For explanation of the instruction, refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual.
→ For cautions on using special high speed output adapters,
refer to the Positioning Control Edition manual.

1. Instruction format

FNC 159 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D DRVA 9 steps DRVA Continuous
17 steps DDRVA Continuous
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
S1 Number of output pulses (absolute address)*1
16- or 32-bit binary
S2 Output pulse frequency*2

D1 Device number (Y) from which pulses are to be output

Bit
D2 Device number to which rotation direction signal is output

*1. Setting range: −32768 to +32767 for 16-bit operation

−999,999 to +999,999 for 32-bit operation
*2. Setting range: 10 to 32767 Hz for 16-bit operation
Following range for 32-bit operation
Pulse output destination Setting range
FX3U PLC Special high speed output adapter 10 to 200,000 (Hz)
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC Main unit (transistor output) 10 to 100,000 (Hz)

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S4 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S4 3 3 3 3 3
S
D1 3
1
S
D2 3 3 S3 3
2

S1 : Specify Y000, Y001 or Y002*1 transistor output from main unit, or specify Y000, Y001, Y002*3 or
Y003*3 from a high-speed output special adapter*2.
*1. Y002 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLC.
*2. High-speed output special adapters can be connected only to FX3U PLC.
*3. To use Y002 or Y003 with a high-speed output special adapter, connected a second high-speed
output special adapter.
Points
• When using a relay output type FX3U PLC, a special high speed output adapter is required.
• Outputs of special high speed output adapters work as differential line drivers.

584
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 20 Positioning Control – FNC150 to FNC159
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 20.8 FNC159 – DRVA / Drive to Absolute

11
S2 : When using a special high speed output adapter for the pulse output destination in an FX3U PLC, the

Shift
Rotation and
FNC30-FNC39
rotation direction signal must be used by the following table output.
When using a built-in transistor output for the pulse output destination in an FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLC, the
rotation direction signal must use transistor output.

Special high speed output adapter No. Pulse output Rotation direction output 12
D1 =Y000 D2 =Y004

Data Operation
FNC40-FNC49
No. 1 (1st unit)
D1 =Y001 D2 =Y005

D1 =Y002 D2 =Y006
No. 2 (2nd unit)
D1 =Y003 D2 =Y007

S3 : "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not
13

Processing
High Speed
FNC50-FNC59
available.
S4 : This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

Command
input
14
FNC159 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D1 ‚ D2 ‚

Instruction
Handy
FMC60-FNC69
DRVA

Caution on writing during RUN

During RUN, avoid writing while DRVA (FNC159) instruction is executed (that is, while pulses are output).
Note that if writing is executed during RUN to a circuit block including FNC159 instruction while pulses are
15

Device
External FX I/O
FNC70-FNC79
output, the PLC decelerates and stops pulse output.

16

Device
External FX
FNC80-FNC89
17

Transfer 2
Data
FNC100-FNC109

18
Floating Point
FNC110-FNC139

19
Operation 2
Data
FNC140-FNC149

20
Control
Positioning
FNC150-FNC159

585
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

21. Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169

FNC160 to FNC169 provide operation and comparison instructions for the time data.
These instructions can set the time of the real time clock built in a PLC, and converts the format of the time
data.

FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

Section
160 TCMP TCMP S1 S2 S3 S D RTC data compare
21.1

Section
161 TZCP TZCP S1 S2 S D RTC data zone compare
21.2

Section
162 TADD TADD S1 S2 D RTC data addition
21.3

Section
163 TSUB TSUB S1 S2 D RTC data subtraction
21.4

Section
164 HTOS HTOS S D Hour to second conversion
21.5

Section
165 STOH STOH S D Second to hour conversion
21.6

Section
166 TRD TRD D Read RTC data
21.7

Section
167 TWR TWR S Set RTC data
21.8

168 − −

Section
169 HOUR HOUR S D1 D2 Hour Meter
21.9

586
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.1 FNC160 – TCMP / RTC Data Compare

21
21.1 FNC160 – TCMP / RTC Data Compare

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction compares the comparison time with the time data, and turns ON or OFF bit devices according
to the comparison result.
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
1. Instruction format

FNC 160 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

TCMP P TCMP Continuous −

11 steps
TCMPP
Operation
Pulse (Single)
Operation
− 23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
S
S1 ‚ Specifies "hour" of the comparison time [setting range: 0 to 23].
Specifies "minute" of the comparison time [setting range: 0 to 59].
16-bit binary
16-bit binary
24
S2

Others
FNC181-FNC189
S3 Specifies "second" of the comparison time [setting range: 0 to 59]. 16-bit binary
Specifies "hour" of the time data (hour, minute, and second).
S 16-bit binary
(Three devices are occupied.)
Turns ON or OFF according to the comparison result.
D (Three devices are occupied.)
Bit
25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P 26
S
S1 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3 3 3

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3 3 3

S3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3 3 3

S 3 3 3 3 S2 3

SD2 ‚ 3 3 3 S1 3 27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
S1: "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
S2: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

587
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.1 FNC160 – TCMP / RTC Data Compare

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (TCMP)
The comparison time (hour, minute, and second) stored in S1 , S2 , and S3 is compared with the
time data (hour, minute, and second) stored in S , S +1, and S +2. Three devices starting from
D turn ON or OFF according to the comparison result.
Command
input
FNC160 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ S3 ‚ S‚ D‚
TCMP

D‚ S1 ‚ (hour) S‚ (hour)
Turns ON in the case of " S2 ‚ (minute) > S ‚ +1(minute) "
S3 ‚ (second) S‚ +2(second)

S1 ‚ (hour) S‚ (hour)
D ‚ +1
Turns ON in the case of " S2 ‚ (minute) = S ‚ +1(minute) "
S3 ‚ (second) S‚ +2(second)

D ‚ +2 S1 ‚ (hour) S‚ (hour)
Turns ON in the case of " S2 ‚ (minute) < S ‚ +1(minute) "
S3 ‚ (second) S‚ +2(second)

↑
Even if the command contact turns OFF from ON and TCMP instruction is not
executed, D ‚ , D ‚ +1 and D ‚ +2 hold the status before the command
contact turned OFF.

Cautions
1) Number of occupied devices
Three devices are occupied respectively by S and D .
Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine.
2) When utilizing the time (hour, minute, and second) of the real time clock built in a PLC
Read the values of special data registers by TRD (FNC166) instruction, and then specify those word
devices as the operands.

Program example
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ S3 ‚ S‚ D‚
X000
FNC160 K10 K30 K50 D0 M0
TCMP
10:30:50
D0 (hour)
M0
Turns ON in the case of "10:30:50 > D1 (minute) "
S1 ‚ : Specifies "hour" of the comparison
D2 (second)
time.
S2 ‚ : Specifies "minute" of the
M1 D0 (hour)
comparison time.
Turns ON in the case of "10:30:50 = D1 (minute) " : Specifies "second" of the comparison
S3 ‚
D2 (second) time.
S‚ : Specifies "hour" of the time data.
M2 D0 (hour)
S ‚ +1 : Specifies "minute" of the time data.
Turns ON in the case of "10:30:50 < D1 (minute) "
S ‚ +2 : Specifies "second" of the time data.
D2 (second)

↑ D ‚ , D ‚ +1, D ‚ +2
: Three bit devices turn ON or OFF
Even if X000 is OFF and TCMP instruction is not executed, M0 to
according to the comparison result.
M2 hold the status before X000 turned OFF.

588
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.2 FNC161 – TZCP / RTC Data Zone Compare

21
21.2 FNC161 – TZCP / RTC Data Zone Compare

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction compares two comparison time (comparison time zone) with the time data, and turns ON or
OFF the specified bit devices according to the comparison results.
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
1. Instruction format

FNC 161 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

TZCP P TZCP Continuous −

9 steps
TZCPP
Operation
Pulse (Single)
Operation
− 23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
Specifies "hour" of the lower limit comparison time (hour, minute, and second).
S
S1 ‚ (Three devices are occupied.)
16-bit binary 24

Others
FNC181-FNC189
Specifies "hour" of the upper limit comparison time (hour, minute, and second).
S2 16-bit binary
(Three devices are occupied.)
Specifies "hour" of the time data (hour, minute, and second).
S 16-bit binary
(Three devices are occupied.)
Turns ON or OFF according to the comparison result.
D (Three devices are occupied.)
Bit
25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P 26
S
S1 ‚ 3 3 3 3 S2 3

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
S2 3 3 3 3 S2 3

S 3 3 3 3 S2 3

SD2 ‚ 3 3 3 S1 3

S1: "D….b" is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
S2: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

589
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.2 FNC161 – TZCP / RTC Data Zone Compare

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (TZCP)
The lower limit and upper limit comparison time (hour, minute, and second) are compared with the time data
(hour, minute, and second) stored in three devices S , S +1, and S +2. Three devices starting
from D turn ON or OFF according to the comparison result.
Command
input This instruction compares the
FNC161 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ S‚ D‚ comparison time zone specified by two
TZCP
points with the time data.

D‚ S1 ‚ (hour) S‚ (hour)
Turns ON in the case of " S1 ‚ +1(minute) > S‚ +1(minute) ".
S1 ‚ +2(second) S ‚ +2(second)

D ‚ +1 S1 ‚ (hour) S‚ (hour) S2 ‚ (hour)

Turns ON in the case of " S1 ‚ +1(minute) ≤ S‚ +1(minute) ≤ S2 ‚ +1(minute) ".
S1 ‚ +2(second) S ‚ +2(second) S2 ‚ +2(second)

D ‚ +2 S‚ (hour) S2 ‚ (hour)
Turns ON in the case of " S‚ +1(minute) > S2 ‚ +1(minute) ".

↑
S ‚ +2(second) S2 ‚ +2(second)

Even if the command contact turns OFF from ON and TZCP instruction is not executed, D‚ ,
D ‚ +1 and D ‚ +2 hold the status before the command contact turned OFF.

Cautions
1) Number of occupied devices
Three devices are occupied respectively by S1 , S2 , S3 , and D .
Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine.
2) When utilizing the time (hour, minute, and second) of the real time clock built in a PLC
Read the values of special data registers by TRD (FNC166) instruction, and then specify those word
devices as the operands.

590
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.2 FNC161 – TZCP / RTC Data Zone Compare

21
Program example

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ S‚ D‚
X000
FNC161 D 20 D 30 D0 M3
TZCP
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
D20 (hour) D0 (hour)
M3
Turns ON in the case of " D21 (minute) > D1 (minute) ".
D22 (second) D2 (second)

M4 D20 (hour) D0 (hour) D 30 (hour)

23
Turns ON in the case of " D21 (minute) ≤ D1 (minute) ≤ D 31 (minute) ".

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
D22 (second) D2 (second) D 32 (second)

M5 D0 (hour) D 30 (hour)
Turns ON in the case of " D1 (minute) > D 31 (minute) ".
D2 (second) D 32 (second) 24
↑

Others
FNC181-FNC189
Even if X000 is OFF and TZCP instruction is not executed, M0
to M2 hold the status before X000 turned OFF.

S1 ‚ , S1 ‚ +1 and S1 ‚ +2 : Specify the lower limit of the comparison time zone in "hour", "minute" and "second. 25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
S2 ‚ , S2 ‚ +1 and S2 ‚ +2 : Specify the upper limit of the comparison time zone in "hour", "minute" and "second.

S‚ , S ‚ +1 and S ‚ +2 : Specify the time data in "hour", "minute" and "second.

D‚ , D ‚ +1 and D ‚ +2 : Turn ON or OFF according to the comparison result.

The setting range of "hour" is from 0 to 23. 26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
The setting range of "minute" is from 0 to 59.
The setting range of "second" is from 0 to 59.

27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

591
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.3 FNC162 – TADD / RTC Data Addition

21.3 FNC162 – TADD / RTC Data Addition

Outline
This instruction executes addition of two time data, and stores the addition result to word devices.

1. Instruction format

FNC 162 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

TADD P TADD Continuous −

7 steps Operation
TADDP Pulse (Single) −
Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
Specifies "hour" of the time data (hour, minute, and second) used in addition.
S
S1 ‚ 16-bit binary
(Three devices are occupied.)
Specifies "hour" of the time data (hour, minute, and second) used in addition.
S2 16-bit binary
(Three devices are occupied.)
Stores the addition result (hour, minute, and second) of two time data. (Three
D 16-bit binary
devices are occupied.)

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S
S1 ‚ 3 3 3 3 S 3

S2 3 3 3 3 S 3

SD2 ‚ 3 3 3 3 S 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (TADD)
The time data (hour, minute, and second) stored in S2 , S2 +1, and S2 +2 is added to the time data
(hour, minute, and second) stored in S1 , S1 +1, and S1 +2, and the addition result (hour, minute,
and second) is stored in D , D +1, and D +2.
Command
input ( S1 ‚ , S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ +2)+( S2 ‚ , S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ +2)
FNC162 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
TADD →( D ‚ , D ‚ +1, D ‚ +2)

S1 ‚ (hour) S2 ‚ (hour) D‚ (hour) The setting range of "hour" is from 0 to 23.

S1 ‚ +1(minute) + S2 ‚ +1(minute) → D ‚ +1(minute) The setting range of "minute" is from 0 to 59.
S1 ‚ +2(second) S2 ‚ +2(second) D ‚ +2(second) The setting range of "second" is from 0 to 59.

• When the operation result exceeds 24 hours, the carry flag turns ON, and the value simply acquired by
addition subtracted by 24 hours is stored as the operation result.
• When the operation result becomes "0" (0:0:0), the zero flag turns ON.

592
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.3 FNC162 – TADD / RTC Data Addition

21
Cautions

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
1) Number of occupied devices
Three devices are occupied by S1 , S2 and D respectively.
Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine.
2) When utilizing the time (hour, minute, and second) of the real time clock built in a PLC
Read the values of special data registers using the TRD (FNC166) instruction, and then specify those
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
word devices as the operands.

Program example
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
X000
FNC162 ( D10 ,D11 ,D12)+(D20 ,D21 ,D22) 23
D 10 D 20 D 30
TADD → ( D30 ,D31,D32)

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
S1 ‚ 10 (hour) S2 ‚ 3 (hour) D‚ 13 (hour)
S1 ‚ +1 30 (minute) + S2 ‚ +1 10 (minute) → D ‚ +1 40 (minute)
S1 ‚ +2 10 (second) S2 ‚ +2 5 (second) D ‚ +2 15 (second) 24

Others
FNC181-FNC189
10:30:10 3:10:5 13:40:15

When the operation result exceeds 24 hours

S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
18 (hour) 10 (hour) 4 (hour) ← 18+10=28(≥24) 25
10 (minute) + 20 (minute) → 30 (minute)

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
30 (second) 5 (second) 35 (second)

18:10:30 10:20:5 4:30:35

26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

593
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.4 FNC163 – TSUB / RTC Data Subtraction

21.4 FNC163 – TSUB / RTC Data Subtraction

Outline
This instruction executes subtraction of two time data, and stores the subtraction result to word devices.

1. Instruction format

FNC 163 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

TSUB P TSUB Continuous −

7 steps Operation
TSUBP Pulse (Single) −
Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
Specifies "hour" of the time data (hour, minute, and second) used in subtraction.
S
S1 ‚ 16-bit binary
(Three devices are occupied.)
Specifies "hour" of the time data (hour, minute, and second) used in subtraction.
S2 16-bit binary
(Three devices are occupied.)
Stores the subtraction result (hour, minute, and second) of two time data. (Three
D 16-bit binary
devices are occupied.)

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S
S1 ‚ 3 3 3 3 S 3

S2 3 3 3 3 S 3

SD2 ‚ 3 3 3 3 S 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (TSUB)
The time data (hour, minute, and second) stored in S2 , S2 +1, and S2 +2 is subtracted from the time
data (hour, minute, and second) stored in S1 , S1 +1, and S1 +2, and the subtraction result (hour,
minute, and second) is stored in D , D +1, and D +2.

Command
input ( S1 ‚ , S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ +2)−( S2 ‚ , S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ +2)
FNC163 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
TSUB → ( D ‚ , D ‚ +1, D ‚ +2)

S1 ‚ (hour) S2 ‚ (hour) D‚ (hour) The setting range of "hour" is from 0 to 23.

S1 ‚ +1 (minute) − S2 ‚ +1 (minute) → D ‚ +1 (minute) The setting range of "minute" is from 0 to 59.
S1 ‚ +2 (second) S2 ‚ +2 (second) D ‚ +2 (second) The setting range of "second" is from 0 to 59.

When the operation result is smaller than 0 hour, the borrow flag turns ON, and the value simply acquired by
subtraction added by 24 hours is stored as the operation result.
When the operation result becomes "0" (0:0:0), the zero flag turns ON.

594
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.4 FNC163 – TSUB / RTC Data Subtraction

21
Cautions

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
1) Number of occupied devices
Three devices are occupied by S1 , S2 and D respectively.
Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine.
2) When utilizing the time (hour, minute, and second) of the real time clock built in a PLC
Read the values of special data registers using TRD (FNC166) instruction, and then specify those word
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
devices as the operands.

Program example
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
X000
FNC163 D 10 D 20 D 30 ( D10, D11, D12) − (D20, D21, D22)
23
TSUB → ( D30, D31, D32)

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
D 10 10 (hour) D 20 3 (hour) D 30 7 (hour)
D 11 30 (minute) − D 21 10 (minute) → D 31 20 (minute)
24
D 12 10 (second) D 22 5 (second) D 32 5 (second)

Others
FNC181-FNC189
10:30:10 3:10:5 7:20:5

When the operation result is smaller than "00:00:00"

S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
5 (hour) 18 (hour) 11 (hour) ← 5−18=−13 (<0)
25
− →

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
20 (minute) 10 (minute) 10 (minute)
40 (second) 5 (second) 35 (second)

5:20:40 18:10:5 11:10:35

26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

595
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.5 FNC164 – HTOS / Hour to Second Conversion

21.5 FNC164 – HTOS / Hour to Second Conversion

Outline
This instruction converts the time data in units of "hour, minute, and second" into data in units of "second".

1. Instruction format

FNC 164 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D HTOS P 5 steps HTOS Continuous
9 steps DHTOS
Continuous
Operation Operation
HTOSP Pulse (Single) DHTOSP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
Head device number storing the time data (hour, minute and second) before
SS1 ‚ 16-bit binary
conversion
D Device number storing the time data (second) after conversion 16- or 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

SS1 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

SD2 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (HTOS and HTOSP)
The time data (hour, minute, and second) stored in S , S +1, and S +2 is converted into data in
units of "second", and stored to D .
Command
input FNC164 S‚ D‚
HTOS

D‚
S‚ hour (0 to 9)
S ‚ +1 minute (0 to 59) second
S ‚ +2 second (0 to 59)

For example, when "4 hours 29 minutes 31 seconds" is specified, the operation is as follows:
D‚
S‚ 4
S ‚ +1 29 16171
S ‚ +2 31

596
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.5 FNC164 – HTOS / Hour to Second Conversion

21
2. 32-bit operation (DHTOS and DHTOSP)

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
The time data (hour, minute, and second) stored in S , S +1, and S +2 is converted into data in
units of "second", and stored to D +1, D .
Command
input FNC164
DHTOS
S‚ D‚
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
D ‚ +1 D‚
S‚ hour (0 to 32767)
S ‚ +1 minute (0 to 59) second
S ‚ +2 second (0 to 59) 23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
For example, when "35 hours 10 minutes 58 seconds" is specified, the operation is as follows:
D ‚ +1 D‚
S‚ 35
S ‚ +1 10 126658
S ‚ +2 58
24

Others
FNC181-FNC189
Error
An operation error is caused in the following case; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When the data of S , S + 1 or S + 2 is outside the allowable range (error code: K6706)
25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Program example
In the program shown below, the time data read from the real time clock built in a PLC is converted into data
in units of "second", and stored to D100 and D101 when X020 turns ON.
X020 26
FNC166 D10

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
TRD

FNC164 D13 D100

DHTOS

END
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Operation
• Clock data reading operation by TRD (FNC166) instruction

Real time
clock
D10 2004 Year
28
D11 1 Month
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

D12 31 Day
D13 20 Hour Clock data
D14 21 Minute Time data

D15 23 Second
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

D16 6 Day of week

• Conversion operation into "second" by DHTOS (FNC164) instruction

D13 20 D101,D100
30
D14 21 73283
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

D15 23

597
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.6 FNC165 – STOH / Second to Hour Conversion

21.6 FNC165 – STOH / Second to Hour Conversion

Outline
This instruction converts the time data in units of "second" into data in units of "hour, minute, and second".

1. Instruction format

FNC 165 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D STOH P 5 steps STOH Continuous
9 steps DSTOH
Continuous
Operation Operation
STOHP Pulse (Single) DSTOHP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
SS1 ‚ Device number storing the time data (second) before conversion 16- or 32-bit binary
Head device number storing the time data (hour, minute and second) after
D 16-bit binary
conversion

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

SS1 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

SD2 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (STOH and STOHP)
The time data in units of "second" stored in S is converted into data in units of "hour, minute, and
second", and stored to D , D +1, and D +2 (hour, minute, and second).
Command
input FNC165 S‚ D‚
STOH

S‚
D‚ Hour (0 to 9)
Second (0 to 32767) D ‚ +1 Minute (0 to 59)

D ‚ +2 Second (0 to 59)

For example, when "29,011 seconds" is specified, the operation is as follows:

S‚
D‚ 8
29011 D ‚ +1 3
D ‚ +2 31

598
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.6 FNC165 – STOH / Second to Hour Conversion

21
2. 32-bit operation (DSTOH and DSTOHP)

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
The time data in units of "second" stored in S +1 and S is converted into data in units of "hour,
minute, and second", and stored to three devices D , D +1, and D +2 (hour, minute, and second).
Command
input FNC165
DSTOH
S‚ D‚
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
S ‚ +1 S‚
D‚ Hour (0 to 32767)
Second (0 to 117964799) D ‚ +1 Minute (0 to 59)

D ‚ +2 Second (0 to 59)
23
For example, when "45,325 seconds" is specified, the operation is as follows:

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
S ‚ +1 S‚
D‚ 12
45325 D ‚ +1 35
D ‚ +2 25
24

Others
FNC181-FNC189
Error
An operation error is caused in the following case; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is store
in D8067.
• When the data of S is outside the allowable range (error code: K6706)
25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Program example
In the program shown below, the time data in units of "second" stored in D0 and D1 is converted into data in
units of "hour, minute, and second", and stored to D100, D101, and D102 when X020 turns ON.
X020
FNC165
DSTOH
D0 D100 26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
END

Operation
• Converting the data in second into the data in hour, minute and second using STOHP instruction
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
(when "40,000 seconds" is specified by D1 and D0)

D100 11
D1,D0 40000 D101 6

D102 40 28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

599
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.7 FNC166 – TRD / Read RTC data

21.7 FNC166 – TRD / Read RTC data

Outline
This instruction reads the clock data of the real time clock built in a PLC.

1. Instruction format
FNC 166 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

TRD P 3 steps TRD Continuous

Operation
TRDP Pulse (Single) −
Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
Specifies the head device number storing the clock data.
D 16-bit binary
(Seven devices are occupied.)

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

SD2 ‚ 3 3 3 3 S 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (TRD)
The clock data stored in D8013 to D8019 of the real time clock built in a PLC is read in the following format,
and stored to D to D +6.
Command
input FNC166 This instruction reads the real time clock data in a PLC, and transfers it to
D‚
TRD seven data registers.

Device Item Clock data Device Item

D8018 Year
0 to 99
(lower two digits) → D0 Year

D8017 Month 1 to 12 → D1 Month

→
Special data register

D8016 Day 1 to 31 D2 Day

D8015 Hour 0 to 23 → D3 Hour

D8014 Minute 0 to 59 → D4 Minute

D8013 Second 0 to 59 → D5 Second

D8019 Day of week

0 (Sunday) to
6 (Saturday) → D6 Day of week

Caution
1. Number of occupied devices
Seven devices are occupied by D .
Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine.

600
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.8 FNC167 – TWR / Set RTC data

21
21.8 FNC167 – TWR / Set RTC data

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction writes the clock data to the real time clock built in a PLC.
22
1. Instruction format

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
FNC 167 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

TWR P 3 steps TWR Continuous

Operation
TWRP Pulse (Single) −
Operation
23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type
Specifies the head device number to which the clock data is written.
S 16-bit binary
(Seven devices are occupied.)
24
3. Applicable devices

Others
FNC181-FNC189
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 S 3
25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

The clock data stored in
Command
S to S +6 is written to D8013 to D8019 for the real time clock built in a PLC.
26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
input FNC167 S‚
TWRP

27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

601
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.8 FNC167 – TWR / Set RTC data

- D8018 (year data) can be converted into the 4-digit mode. (Refer to the program example shown later.)
Device Item Clock data Device Item

D 10 Year
0 to 99
(lower two digits) → D8018 Year

D 11 Month 1 to 12 → D8017 Month

Special data register

Time data to be set

D 12 Day 1 to 31 D8016 Day

D 13 Hour 0 to 23 → D8015 Hour

D 14 Minute 0 to 59 → D8014 Minute

D 15 Second o to 59 → D8013 Second

D 16 Day of week
0 (Sunday) to
6 (Saturday) → D8019 Day of week

- When TWR (FNC167) instruction is executed, the clock data of the real time clock is immediately
changed. Accordingly, transfer the clock data several minutes ahead to S to S +6 in advance,
and then execute FNC167 instruction when the accurate time has come.
- When setting the clock data (time) using this instruction, it is not necessary to control the special
auxiliary relay M8015 (time stop and time setting).
- If a numeric value indicating impossible date/time is set, the clock data is not changed.
Set the correct clock data, and then write it.

Caution
1. Number of occupied devices
Seven devices are occupied by S .
Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine.

602
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.8 FNC167 – TWR / Set RTC data

21
Program example

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
1. Example of setting the clock data (time)
In the program example shown below, the real time clock is set (to 15:20:30 on Tuesday, April 25, 2001).

X000
FNC 12 K1 D0 Year (lower two digits) 22
MOV

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
FNC 12 K4 D1 Month
MOV

FNC 12 K25 D2 Day

MOV
23
FNC 12 K15 D3 Hour

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
MOV

FNC 12 K20 D4 Minute

MOV

FNC 12
MOV
K30 D5 Second
24

Others
FNC181-FNC189
FNC 12 K2 D6 Day of week
MOV

FNC167 The current value of the built-in

D0
TWR real time clock is updated.
X001
M8017
The current value is 25
corrected by ±30 seconds.

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
• The shaded area indicates the set value of each item.
• When setting the time, it is recommended to set the time to several minutes ahead in advance, and then
set X000 to ON when the accurate time is reached. The set time is then immediately written to the real 26
time clock, and the clock data is updated.

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
• Every time X001 is set to ON, the current time can be corrected by ±30 seconds.
• When handling the year in the 4-digit mode, add the following program.
D8018 will specify the 4-digit year mode in the second scan and later after the PLC mode is changed to
RUN.
27
M8002

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
FNC 12 K2000 D8018
Initial pulse MOV

- A PLC is normally operating in the 2-digit year mode. When the above instruction is executed and
"K2000 (fixed value)" is transferred to D8018 (year) in only one operation cycle after the PLC mode was
changed to RUN, the year mode is switched to the 4-digit mode. 28
- Execute this program every time the PLC mode is changed to RUN. Even if "K2000" is transferred, only
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

the display format is changed to the 4-digit year mode. The current date and time are not affected.
- In the 4-digit year mode, the set values "80 to 99" correspond to "1980 to 1999", and "00 to 79"
correspond to "2000 to 2079".
Examples:
"80" indicates 1980. "99" indicates 1999. "00" indicates 2000. "79" indicates 2079.
29
• When the data access unit FX-10DU-E/20DU-E/25DU-E is connected, select the 2-digit year mode. If the
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

4-digit year mode is selected, the year is not correctly displayed in the current version of the FX-10DU-E/
20DU-E/25DU-E.
Note that the clock is changed to the 2-digit year mode when the clock is set from the FX-10DU-E/20DU-E/
25DU-E while the PLC is operating in the 4-digit year mode.

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

603
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.9 FNC169 – HOUR / Hour Meter

21.9 FNC169 – HOUR / Hour Meter

Outline
This instruction measures the ON time of the input contact in units of hour.

1. Instruction format

FNC 169 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D HOUR 7 steps HOUR Continuous 13 steps DHOUR Continuous

Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand type Description Data type

SS1 ‚ Time after which D2 is set to ON (unit: hour) 16- or 32-bit binary
Current value (unit: hour) (latched (battery backed) type data register latched
S
D11 ‚ 16- or 32-bit binary
(battery backed))
D2 Head device number to which alarm is output 16- or 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

SS1 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S2 3 3 3 3 3

S
D11 ‚ 3 3 3

S
D22 ‚ 3 3 3 S1 3

S1: D….b is available only in FX3U and FX3UC PLCs. However, index modifiers (V and Z) are not available.
S2: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation
Command When the accumulated ON time of the command input
input FNC169 exceeds the time stored in S , D2 is set to ON.
S‚ D1 ‚ D2 ‚
HOUR The current value less than one hour is stored in D1 +1
(unit: second).
S : Time after which D2 is set to ON
Specify a value in units of hour.
D1 : Current value in units of hour
D1 + 1 : Current value less than one hour (unit: second)
D2 : Alarm output destination
It turns ON when the current value D1 exceeds the time specified in S .

• Specify a latched (battery backed) type data register as D1 so that the current value data can be
continuously used even after the PLC turns OFF.
If a general type data register is used, the current value data is cleared when the power of the PLC is
turned OFF or when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN.
• Even after the alarm output D2 turns ON, the measurement is continued.
• When the current value D1 reaches the maximum value of 16-bit data, the measurement is stopped.
For continuing the measurement, clear the current value stored in D1 and D1 +1.

604
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 21 Real Time Clock Control – FNC160 to FNC169
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 21.9 FNC169 – HOUR / Hour Meter

21
2. 32-bit operation

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Command
input FNC169 S‚ D1 ‚ D2 ‚
DHOUR

[ S +1, S ] : Time after which D2 is set to ON

Specify the high-order side in S1 +1, and the low-order side in S1 .
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
[ D1 +1, D1 ] : Current value in units of hour
The high-order side is stored in D1 +1, and the low-order side is stored in D1 .
D1 +2 : Current value less than one hour (unit: second)
D2 : Alarm output destination
It turns ON when the current value [ D1 +1, D1 ] exceeds the time specified in S . 23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
• Specify a latched (battery backed) type data register as D1 so that the current value data can be
continuously used even after the PLC turns OFF.
If a general data type register is used, the current value data is cleared when the power of the PLC is
turned OFF or when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN.
• Even after the alarm output D2 turns ON, the measurement is continued. 24
• When the current value [ D1 +1, D1 ] reaches the maximum value of 32-bit data, the measurement is

Others
FNC181-FNC189
stopped.
For continuing the measurement, clear the current value stored in D1 to D1 +2.

Caution
25
Number of occupied devices

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Two (16-bit operation) or three (32-bit operation) devices are occupied by D1 .
Make sure that these devices are not used in other controls for the machine.

Program example
In the program example shown below, when the accumulated X000 ON time exceeds 300 hours, Y005 turns 26
ON.

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
The current value less than one hour is stored in D201 in units of second.
S‚ D1 ‚ D2 ‚
X000
FNC169 K300 D 200 Y005
HOUR
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
S : Time after which D2 is set to ON
Specify a value in units of hour.
D1 : Current value in units of hour
D1 +1 : Current value less than one hour (unit: second)
D2 : Alarm output destination 28
It turns ON when the current value D1 exceeds the time specified in S .
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

(In this example, it turns ON when the current value becomes 300 hours 1 second.)

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

605
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 22 External Device – FNC170 to FNC179
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

22. External Device – FNC170 to FNC179

FNC170 to FNC179 provide conversion instructions for gray codes used in absolute type rotary encoders and
instructions dedicated to analog blocks.

FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

Section
170 GRY GRY S D Decimal to Gray Code Conversion
22.1

Section
171 GBIN GBIN S D Gray Code to Decimal Conversion
22.2

172 − −

173 − −

174 − −

175 − −

Section
176 RD3A RD3A m1 m2 D Read form Dedicated Analog Block
22.3

Section
177 WR3A WR3A m1 m2 S Write to Dedicated Analog Block
22.4

178 − −

179 − −

606
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 22 External Device – FNC170 to FNC179
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 22.1 FNC170 – GRY / Decimal to Gray Code Conversion

21
22.1 FNC170 – GRY / Decimal to Gray Code Conversion

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction converts a binary value into a gray code, and transfers it.
22
1. Instruction format

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
FNC 170 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D GRY P 5 steps
GRY Continuous
9 steps
DGRY Continuous
Operation Operation
GRYP Pulse (Single) DGRYP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Conversion source data or word device storing conversion source data 16- or 32-bit binary

D Word device storing data after conversion 16- or 32-bit binary 24

Others
FNC181-FNC189
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P 25
S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3

S:This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation 26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
1. 16-bit operation (GRY and GRYP)
Command
input This instruction converts and transfers data from
FNC170 S‚ D‚
GRY the source (binary) to the destination (gray code).
27
When S ‚ is K1234 and D ‚ is K3Y10

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
b15 b0
BIN 1234 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0

Y23 Y20 Y17 Y10 28

GRY 1234 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

- S can store a value from 0 to 32767.

2. 32-bit operation (DGRY and DGRYP)

- A binary value can be converted into a gray code of up to 32 bits. 29
- S can store a value from 0 to 2,147,483,647.
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

Caution
The data conversion speed depends on the scan time of the PLC.

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

607
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 22 External Device – FNC170 to FNC179
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 22.2 FNC171 – GBIN / Gray Code to Decimal Conversion

22.2 FNC171 – GBIN / Gray Code to Decimal Conversion

Outline
This instruction converts a gray code into a binary value, and transfers it.

1. Instruction format

FNC 171 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D GBIN P 5 steps
GBIN Continuous
9 steps
DGBIN Continuous
Operation Operation
GBINP Pulse (Single) DGBINP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Conversion source data or word device storing conversion source data 16- or 32-bit binary

D Word device storing data after conversion 16- or 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (GBIN and GBINP)
Command
input
FNC171 This instruction converts and transfers data from
S‚ D‚
GBIN the source (gray code) to the destination (binary).

When S ‚ is K3X000 and D ‚ is D10

X13 X10 X7 X0
GRY 1234 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1

b15 b0
D10 BIN 1234 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0

- This instruction can be used for detecting an absolute position by a gray code type encoder.
- S can store a value from 0 to 32,767.

2. 32-bit operation (DGBIN and DGBINP)

- A gray code can be converted into a binary value of up to 32 bits.
- S can store a value from 0 to 2,147,483,647.

Caution
When an input relay (X) is specified as S , the response relay will be “Scan time of PLC + Input filter
constant”.
The input filter value in X000 to X017*1 can be converted using the REFF (FNC51) instruction or D8020 (filter
adjustment) so that the delay caused by the filter constant is eliminated.
*1. X000 to X007 in FX3G PLCs

608
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 22 External Device – FNC170 to FNC179
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 22.3 FNC176 – RD3A / Read form Dedicated Analog Block

21
22.3 FNC176 – RD3A / Read form Dedicated Analog Block

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction reads an analog input value from the analog block FX0N-3A or FX2N-2AD.
22
1. Instruction format

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
FNC 176 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
RD3A P 7 steps
RD3A Continuous
Operation
RD3AP Pulse (Single) −
Operation 23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Special block number
m1 ‚ - FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC (D, DSS) PLC: K0 to K7 16-bit binary
- FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) : K1 to K7 24
m2 ‚ Analog input channel number 16-bit binary

Others
FNC181-FNC189
D Word device storing the read data 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices

Oper-
Bit Devices Word Devices
Special Con- Real
Others
Charac-
25
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
m1 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
m2 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
Explanation of function and operation
1. 16-bit operation (RD3A)
Command
input
FNC176
27
m1‚ m2‚ D‚

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
RD3A

m1 ‚ : Special block number

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC (D, DSS) PLC : K0 to K7
FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) : K1 to K7 (K0 indicates the built-in CC-Link/LT master.)
m2 ‚ : Analog input channel number 28
FX0N-3A*1 : K1 (ch 1) or K2 (ch 2)
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

FX2N-2AD : K21 (ch 1) or K22 (ch 2)

D : Read data
A value read from the analog block is stored.
FX0N-3A*1 : 0 to 255 (8 bits)
FX2N-2AD : 0 to 4095 (12 bits)
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

*1. The FX0N-3A is available only for the FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

609
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 22 External Device – FNC170 to FNC179
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 22.4 FNC177 – WR3A / Write to Dedicated Analog Block

22.4 FNC177 – WR3A / Write to Dedicated Analog Block

Outline
This instruction writes a digital value to the analog block FX0N-3A*1 or FX2N-2DA.

1. Instruction format

FNC 177 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
WR3A P 7 steps
WR3A Continuous
Operation
WR3AP Pulse (Single) −
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Special block number
m1 ‚ - FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC (D, DSS) PLC: K0 to K7 16-bit binary
- FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) : K1 to K7
m2 ‚ Analog output channel number 16-bit binary
S Data to be written or word device storing data to be written 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
m1 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
m2 ‚ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (WR3A)
Command
input
FNC177 m1‚ m2‚ S‚
WR3A

m1 ‚ : Special block number

FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC (D, DSS) PLC : K0 to K7
FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2) : K1 to K7 (K0 indicates the built-in CC-Link/LT master.)
m2 ‚ : Analog output channel number
FX0N-3A*1 : K1 (ch 1)
FX2N-2DA : K21 (ch 1) or K22 (ch 2)
S : Data to be written
Specify a value output to the analog block.
FX0N-3A*1 : 0 to 255 (8 bits)
FX2N-2DA : 0 to 4095 (12 bits)
*1. The FX0N-3A is available only for the FX3U and FX3UC PLCs.

610
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 23 Introduction of Alternate Instructions – FNC180
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 23.1 Instruction correspondence table

21

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
23. Introduction of Alternate Instructions – FNC180
22
23.1 Instruction correspondence table

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
Outline
EXTR instruction is provided for FX2N and FX2NC PLCs.
For FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC PLCs equipped with the built-in inverter communication function, dedicated 23
instructions shown below are provided. (EXTR instruction is not provided.)

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Instruction correspondence table

FX2N/FX2NC FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Description

EXTR K10 → FNC270 IVCK Inverter status check 24
→

Others
FNC181-FNC189
EXTR K11 FNC271 IVDR Inverter drive
EXTR K12 → FNC272 IVRD Inverter parameter read
EXTR K13 → FNC273 IVWR Inverter parameter write
– FNC274 IVBWR*1 Inverter parameter block write

*1. This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs. 25

→ For details, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

611
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

24. Others – FNC181 to FNC189

FNC181 to FNC189 provide instructions for generating random numbers, executing CRC data operations,
and processing data in high speed counter operations.

FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

181 – –

Section
182 COMRD COMRD S D Read device comment data
24.1

183 – –

Section
184 RND RND D Random Number Generation
24.2

185 – −

Section
186 DUTY DUTY n1 n2 D Timing pulse generation
24.3

187 – −

Section
188 CRC CRC S D n Cyclic Redundancy Check
24.4

Section
189 HCMOV HCMOV S D n High speed counter move
24.5

612
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.1 FNC182 – COMRD / Read Device Comment Data

21
24.1 FNC182 – COMRD / Read Device Comment Data

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction reads the comment data for registered devices written to the PLC by programming software
such as GX Developer.
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
1. Instruction format

FNC 182 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

COMRD P COMRD Continuous −

5 steps
23
Operation
COMRDP Pulse (Single) −
Operation

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Device number for which comment to be read is registered Device name
24
D Head device number storing read comment Character string

Others
FNC181-FNC189
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and
Type
System User Digit Specification System User
Unit
Index
stant Number ter String
Pointer
25
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation 26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
1. 16-bit operation (COMRD and COMRDP)
1) The comment registered for device S is read, and stored in ASCII code in D and later.
Command
input FNC182
COMRDP
S‚ D‚
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
b15 b8 b7 b0
D ‚ +0 ASCII code of 2nd character ASCII code of 1st character
+1 ASCII code of 4th character ASCII code of 3rd character
Comment of device specified in S ‚ +2 ASCII code of 6th character ASCII code of 5th character 16
+3 ASCII code of 8th character ASCII code of 7th character characters
can be 28
.......

...

ASCII code of 14th character ASCII code of 13th character stored.

Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

+7 ASCII code of 16th character ASCII code of 15th character

+8 0000H

- When M8091 is OFF, "0000H" is written to the device following the final character.
- When M8091 is ON, the device following the final character does not change.
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

613
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.1 FNC182 – COMRD / Read Device Comment Data

For example, when the comment of S is "LineNo.1Start", it is stored in D and later as shown
below.
b15 b8 b7 b0
D ‚ +0 69H(i) 4CH(L)
Comment of S ‚ +1 65H(e) 6EH(n)
LineNo.1Start +2 6FH(o) 4EH(N)
+3 31H(1) 2EH(.)
+4 74H(t) 53H(S)
+5 72H(r) 61H(a)
+6 20H(space) 74H(t)
+7 20H(space) 20H(space)
+8 0000H
- When M8091 is OFF, "0000H" is written to the next device following the final character.
- When M8091 is ON, the device following the final character does not change.

2) The final device of D is as follows depending on the ON/OFF status of M8091.

ON/OFF status Contents of processing
M8091 = OFF When M8091 is OFF, "0000H" is written to in the device following the final character.
M8091 = ON When M8091 is ON, the device following the final character does not change.

Related device
Device Name Description
M8091 Output character number selector signal Refer to the above explanation.

Caution
• Specify a device number in device S for which a comment is registered in the PLC.
If a comment is not registered for the device S , "20H" (space) is stored in D and later for the
number of characters in the comment (16 half-width characters).

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When a comment is not registered for the device S (error code: K6706)
• When the range of points used from D for the comment exceeds the corresponding device range
(error code: K6706)

614
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.1 FNC182 – COMRD / Read Device Comment Data

21
Program example

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
In the program shown below, the comment "Target Line A" registered to D100 is stored in ASCII code in D0
and later when X010 is set to ON. And since M8091 is OFF "0000H" is written to the device following the last
character.
X010
RST M8091 22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
FNC182 D100 D0
COMRDP

END
23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
b15 b8 b7 b0
D0 61H(a) 54H(T)
D1 67H(g) 72H(r)
Comment of D100 D2 74H(f) 65H(e)
Target Line A D3 4CH(L) 20H(space)
D4 6EH(n) 69H(i) 24
D5 20H(space) 65H(e)

Others
FNC181-FNC189
D6 20H(space) 41H(A)
D7 20H(space) 20H(space)
D8 0000H

25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

615
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.2 FNC184 – RND / Random Number Generation

24.2 FNC184 – RND / Random Number Generation

Outline
This instruction generates random numbers.

1. Instruction format

FNC 184 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
RND P RND Continuous ⎯
3 steps Operation
RNDP Pulse (Single) ⎯
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
D Head device number storing a random number 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (RND and RNDP)
This instruction generates a pseudo-random number within the range from 0 to 32767, and stores it as a
random number to D .
In the pseudo-random number sequence, the source value of a random number is calculated at every time,
and this instruction calculates a pseudo-random number using the source value.
Command
input
FNC 184 D‚
RND

Pseudo-random number calculation equation:

(D8311, D8310) = (D8311, D8310) *1 × 1103515245 + 12345.....(1)
D = “([D8311, D8310]>>16)&<logical product>00007FFFh”
*1. To (D8311, D8310), write a non-negative value (0 to 2,147,483,647) only once when the PLC mode
switches from STOP to RUN.
[K1 is written to (D8311, D8310) as the initial value when the power is restored.]

616
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.2 FNC184 – RND / Random Number Generation

21
Program example

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
In the program example shown below, a random number is stored to D100 every time X010 turns ON.
When the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN, the time data converted into seconds and added by the
value “(Year + Month) × Day” is written to D8311 and D8310.
M8002
FNC166
TRD
D0 The clock data is read. 22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
FNC164 D3 D14 Data in hour, minute and second → Data in second
DHTOS
FNC 20 D0 D1 D10
ADD
FNC 23 D10 D2 D12
The data in second is added by the value “(Year +
Month) × Day”, and written to D8311 and D8310.
23
MUL

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
FNC 20 D14 D12 D8310
DADD
X010
FNC184 D100
RNDP

END
24

Others
FNC181-FNC189
25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

617
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.3 FNC186 – DUTY / Timing Pulse Generation

24.3 FNC186 – DUTY / Timing Pulse Generation

Outline
This instruction generates the timing signal whose one cycle corresponds to the specified number of
operation cycles.

1. Instruction format

FNC 186 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

DUTY 7 steps DUTY Continuous

−
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
n1 Number of scans (operation cycles) to remain ON [n1 > 0]
16-bit binary
n2 Number of scans (operation cycles) to remain OFF [n2 > 0]
D Timing clock output destination Bit

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
n1 3 3 3 3 3 3
n2 3 3 3 3 3 3

D S 3

S: Specify either one among M8330 to M8334.

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (DUTY)
1) The timing clock output destination D is set to ON and OFF with the ON duration for "n1" scans and
OFF duration for "n2" scans.
Command
input FNC186 n1 n2 D‚
DUTY

Timing clock output OFF ON

destination D ‚ "n1" scans "n2" scans

Timing clock output 0

destination "n1+n2" scans

2) Specify either one among M8330 to M8334 as the timing clock output destination device D .

618
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.3 FNC186 – DUTY / Timing Pulse Generation

21
3) The counted number of scans is stored in either one among D8330 to D8334 in accordance with the

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
timing clock output destination device D .
The counted number of scans stored in either one among D8330 to D8334 is reset when the counted
value reaches "n1+n2" or when the command input (instruction) is set to ON.
Timing clock output destination device Scan counting device
M8330
D
D8330
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
M8331 D8331
M8332 D8332
M8333 D8333
M8334 D8334

4) When the command input is set to ON, the operation is started. The timing clock output destination 23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
device D is set to ON or OFF by END instruction.
Even if the command input is set to OFF, the operation is not stopped.
In the STOP mode, the operation is suspended. When the power of the PLC is turned OFF, the operation
is stopped.
5) When "n1" and "n2" are set to "0", the device D is set to the following status: 24
n1/n2 status D ON/OFF status

Others
FNC181-FNC189
n1 = 0, n2 ≥ 0 D Fixed to OFF
n1 > 0, n2 = 0 D Fixed to ON

Related devices 25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Device Name Description
M8330 Timing clock output 1
M8331 Timing clock output 2
M8332 Timing clock output 3 Timing clock output in DUTY (FNC186) instruction
M8333 Timing clock output 4 26
M8334 Timing clock output 5

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
Counted number of scans for Counted number of scans for timing clock output 1 in DUTY (FNC186)
D8330
timing clock output 1 instruction
Counted number of scans for Counted number of scans for timing clock output 2 in DUTY (FNC186)
D8331
timing clock output 2 instruction

D8332
Counted number of scans for
timing clock output 3
Counted number of scans for timing clock output 3 in DUTY (FNC186)
instruction
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Counted number of scans for Counted number of scans for timing clock output 4 in DUTY (FNC186)
D8333
timing clock output 4 instruction
Counted number of scans for Counted number of scans for timing clock output 5 in DUTY (FNC186)
D8334
timing clock output 5 instruction

Caution
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

• DUTY (FNC186) instruction can be used up to 5 times (points).

It is not permitted, however, to use the same timing clock output destination device D for two or more
DUTY (FNC186) instructions.

Errors 29
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

stored in D8067.
• When "n1" and/or "n2" is less than "0" (error code: K6706)
• When any device other than M8330 to M8334 is set to D (error code: K6705)
30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

619
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.3 FNC186 – DUTY / Timing Pulse Generation

Program example
In the program shown below, when X000 is set to ON, M8330 is set to ON for 1 scan and OFF for 3 scans.
X000
FNC186 K1 K3 M8330
DUTY

END

X000 OFF ON

M8330 OFF ON
1 scan 3 scans

3
2
D8330 1 1
current value 0 0

620
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.4 FNC188 – CRC / Cyclic Redundancy Check

21
24.4 FNC188 – CRC / Cyclic Redundancy Check

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This CRC instruction calculates the CRC (cyclic redundancy check) value which is an error check method
used in communication.
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
In addition to CRC value, there are other error check methods such as parity check and sum check. For
obtaining the horizontal parity value and sum check value, CCD (FNC 84) instruction is available.
CRC instruction uses “X16 + X15 + X2 + 1” as a polynomial for generating the CRC value (CRC-16).
→ For CCD instruction (check code), refer to Section 16.5.

1. Instruction format 23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
FNC 188 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
CRC P CRC Continuous ⎯
7 steps Operation
CRCP Pulse (Single) ⎯
Operation

24
2. Set data

Others
FNC181-FNC189
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Head device number storing data for which the CRC value is generated

D Device number storing the generated CRC value 16-bit binary

n
Number of 8-bit (1-byte) data for which the CRC value is generated or the device
number storing the number of data
25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V
Unit
Z Modify K H
stant Number ter String
E "…" P
26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
S S S S S 3 3 3 3 3 3

D S S S 3 3 3 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3

S: Make sure to specify four digits (K4…{{{) when specifying the digits of a bit device. 27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Explanation of function and operation
1. 16-bit operation
CRC value is generated for “n” 8-bit data (unit: byte) starting from a device specified in S , and stored to
D . 28
The 8-bit conversion mode and 16-bit conversion mode are available in this instruction, and the mode can be
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

switched by turning ON or OFF M8161. For the operation in each mode, refer to the following pages.
“X16 + X15 + X2 + 1” is used as a polynomial for generating the CRC value (CRC-16).
Command
input
FNC188
CRC
S‚ D‚ n 29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

621
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.4 FNC188 – CRC / Cyclic Redundancy Check

16-bit conversion mode (while M8161 is OFF)

In this mode, the operation is executed for high-order 8 bits (1 byte) and low-order 8 bits (1 byte) of a device
specified in S .
The operation result is stored to one 16-bit device specified in D .
M8000
M8161 16-bit conversion mode
Command
input
FNC188 S‚ n
D‚
CRC

Example: S = D100
D = D0
n= 6
Contents of target data
Device
8 bits 16 bits
Low-order byte Low-order bits of D100 01H
S 0301H
High-order byte High-order bits of D100 03H
Low-order byte Low-order bits of D101 03H
S +1 0203H
Device storing data for High-order byte High-order bits of D101 02H
which the CRC value is Low-order byte Low-order bits of D102 00H
generated S +2 1400H
High-order byte High-order bits of D102 14H
–
...

...

Low-order byte
S +n/2-1 –
High-order byte
Device storing the Low-order byte Low-order bits of D0 E4H
D 41E4H
generated CRC value High-order byte High-order bits of D0 41H

622
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.4 FNC188 – CRC / Cyclic Redundancy Check

21
8-bit conversion mode (while M8161 is ON)

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
In this mode, the operation is executed only for low-order 8 bits (low-order 1 byte) of a device specified by
S .
With regard to the operation result, low-order 8 bits (1 byte) are stored to a device specified by D , and
high-order 8 bits (1 byte) are stored to a device specified by D +1.
M8000
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
M8161 8-bit conversion mode
Command
input
FNC188 n
S‚ D‚
CRC

23
Example: S = D100

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
D = D0
n= 6
Device Contents of target data
S Low-order byte Low-order bits of D100 01H

S +1 Low-order byte Low-order bits of D101 03H

24

Others
FNC181-FNC189
S +2 Low-order byte Low-order bits of D102 03H
Device storing data for Low-order byte Low-order bits of D103 02H
S +3
which the CRC value is
generated S +4 Low-order byte Low-order bits of D104 00H

S +5 Low-order byte Low-order bits of D105 14H 25

–
...

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
S +n-1 Low-order byte –

Device storing the D Low-order byte Low-order bits of D0 E4H

generated CRC value Low-order byte Low-order bits of D1 41H
D +1
26
2. Related device

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
Related device Description
ON CRC instruction operates in the 8-bit mode.
M8161*1
OFF CRC instruction operates in the 16-bit mode.

*1. Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP.
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Caution
In this instruction, “X16 + X15 + X2 + 1” is used as a polynomial for generating the CRC value (CRC-16).
There are many other standard polynomials for generating the CRC value. Note that the CRC value
completely differs if an adopted polynomial is different.

Reference: Major polynomials for generating the CRC value

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

Name Polynomial
CRC-12 12 11 3 2
X +x +X +X +X+1
CRC-16 X16 + X15 + X2 + 1
CRC-32 X32 + X26 + X23 + X22 + X16 + X12 + X11 + X10 + X8 + X7 + X5 + X4 + X2 + X + 1
29
CRC-CCITT X16 + X12 + X5 + 1
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

623
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.4 FNC188 – CRC / Cyclic Redundancy Check

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When any digits other than 4 digits are specified as S or D in digit specification of bit device (error
code: K6706)
• When n is outside the allowable range (1 to 256) (error code: K6706)
• When a device specified by S +n-1 or D +1 is outside the allowable range (error code: K6706)

Program example
In the program example shown below, the CRC value of the ASCII code “0123456” stored in D100 to D106 is
generated and stored to D0 when M0 turns ON.

1. In the case of 16-bit mode

M8000
M8161 16-bit conversion mode

M0
FNC188 D100 D0 K7
CRC

Contents of data
Target data
Low-order byte 30H
D100 3130H
High-order byte 31H
Low-order byte 32H
D101 3332H
Device storing data for which High-order byte 33H
CRC value is generated Low-order byte 34H
D102 3534H
High-order byte 35H
Low-order byte 36H
D103 3736H
– –
Device storing generated CRC Low-order byte CFH
D0 2ACFH
value High-order byte 2AH

2. In the case of 8-bit mode

M8000
M8161 8-bit conversion mode

M0
FNC188 D100 D0 K7
CRC

Contents of target data

D100 Low-order byte 30H
D101 Low-order byte 31H
D102 Low-order byte 32H
Device storing data for which the
D103 Low-order byte 33H
CRC value is generated
D104 Low-order byte 34H
D105 Low-order byte 35H
D106 Low-order byte 36H
Device storing the generated CRC D0 Low-order byte CFH
value D1 Low-order byte 2AH

624
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.5 FNC189 – HCMOV / High Speed Counter Move

21
24.5 FNC189 – HCMOV / High Speed Counter Move

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction updates the current value of a specified high speed counter or ring counter.
The function of this instruction varies depending on the PLC version.
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
1. Instruction format

FNC 189 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D HCMOV ⎯ 13 steps DHCMOV

Continuous

23
Operation
⎯ ⎯

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
counter*1
S
Device number of high speed counter or ring
source
handled as transfer
32-bit binary
24

Others
FNC181-FNC189
D Device number handled as transfer destination
Specification to clear the current value of high speed counter or ring counter*1
n 16-bit binary
(transfer source) after transfer [clear (K1), no clear (K0)]

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S S S

D 3 3 26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
n 3 3

S: Only high speed counters (C235 to C255) and ring counters (D8099 and D8398)*1 can be specified.

Explanation of function and operation

27
1. 32-bit operation (DHCMOV)

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Command
input
FNC189 S D n
DHCMOV

• The current value of a high speed counter or ring counter specified in S is transferred to [ D +1, 28
D ].
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

Device S [ D +1, D ] after instruction is executed

High speed counter C235 to C255 Current value of high speed counter S →[ D +1, D ]
D8099 → D
D8099
Ring counter *1 "0" is stored in D +1. 29
D8398 Current value of [D8399, D8398] → [ D +1, D ]
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

• After transfer, the current value of the high speed counter or ring counter is processed as shown in the
table below depending on the set value of "n":
"n" set value Operation
K0 (H0) Does not clear the current value (no processing). 30
K1 (H1) Clears the current value to "0".
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

*1. Ring counters (D8099 and D8398) cannot be specified in FX3UC PLCs before Ver.2.20.

625
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.5 FNC189 – HCMOV / High Speed Counter Move

2. High speed counter current value update timing and the effect of DHCMOV instruction
1) High speed counter current value update timing
When a pulse is input to an input terminal for a high speed counter (C235 to C255), the high speed
counter executes up-counting or down-counting.
If the current value of a high speed counter is handled in an applied instruction such as the normal MOV
instruction, the current value is updated at the timing shown in the table below. As a result, it is affected
by the program scan time.
Current value update timing
Hardware counter When OUT instruction for the counter is executed
Software counter Every time a pulse is input

By using DHCMOV instruction, the current value can be updated and transferred when it is executed.
2) Effect of DHCMOV instruction
• By using both input interrupt and DHCMOV instruction, the current value of a high speed counter can
be received at the rising edge or falling edge of an external input (at reception of input interrupt).
→ Refer to the Program example 2.
• When DHCMOV instruction is used just before a comparison instruction (CMP, ZCP or comparison
contact instruction), the latest value of a high speed counter is used in comparison.The following points
must be kept in mind when using the DHCMOV command.
- When the current value of a high speed counter is compared using CMP, ZCP or comparison
contact instruction (not using a designated high speed counter comparison instruction), a hardware
counter does not change into a software counter.
→ For the condition in which a hardware counter is handled as a software counter,
refer to Subsection 4.7.9.
- When the number of high speed software counter comparison instructions is reduced, the total
frequency limitation is decreased.
→ For the limitation in software counters by the total frequency,
refer to Subsection 4.7.10.
- When it is necessary to execute comparison and change an output contact (Y) as soon as the
current value of a high speed counter changes, use a desighnated high speed counter comparison
instruction (HSCS, HSCR or HSZ).
- DHCMOV instruction can be used as many times as necessary.

626
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.5 FNC189 – HCMOV / High Speed Counter Move

21
Cautions

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
When programming DHCMOV instruction in an input interrupt program, the following points should be
observed.
For assignment of pointers for input interrupt and inputs, refer to the table shown in 5) below.
1) Program EI (FNC 04) and FEND (FNC 06) instructions in the main program. They are necessary to
execute an input interrupt program. 22
→ For EI (FNC 04) and FEND (FNC 06) instructions, refer to Section 8.5 and Section 8.6.

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
2) When programming DHCMOV instruction in the 1st line in an input interrupt program, make sure to use
the pattern program shown below.
Make sure to use the command contact M8394.
I……… M8394
FNC189 S D n
Pattern program for using the
DHCMOV instruction in an interrupt
23
DHCMOV program

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Program to be processed as input
interrupt

24
FNC 03

Others
FNC181-FNC189
IRET

3) If two or more DHCMOV instructions are used in one input interrupt program, only the first instruction (just
after the interrupt pointer) is executed when the interrupt is generated.
The rest of the interrupt, including additional DHCMOV instructions, is executed according to normal
interrupt processing.
25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Do not use M8394 as the command contact for the DHCMOV instructions following the first.

I301 M8394 When the input X003 turns from OFF

FNC189 S D n to ON (that is, when input interrupt is
DHCMOV accepted):
M8000 S → [ D +1, D ]
FNC189
DHCMOV
S ' D ' n' When this instruction is executed in 26
interrupt program:

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
FNC 03 S ' → [ D ' +1, D ' ]
IRET

4) It is not permitted to use DHCMOV instruction for the same counter in two or more input interrupt
programs. 27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
I000 M8394
FNC189 C236 D0 K0
DHCMOV

FNC03 28
Same counter IRET
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

I200 M8394
FNC189 C236 D2 K1
DHCMOV
FNC03
IRET
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

627
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.5 FNC189 – HCMOV / High Speed Counter Move

5) While input interrupts are disabled by the interrupt disable flags (shown in the table below), DHCMOV
instructions are not executed when they are placed inside a corresponding interrupt.
Input number corresponding to interrupt
Interrupt disable flag Corresponding interrupt pointer
pointer
M8050*1 I000,I001 X000
M8051*1 I100,I101 X001
M8052*1 I200,I201 X002
M8053*1 I300,I301 X003
M8054*1 I400,I401 X004
M8055*1 I500,I501 X005

*1. Cleared when the PLC mode is changed from RUN to STOP.
6) If an input interrupt is generated while input interrupts are disabled by something other than the interrupt
disable flags M8050 to M8055 (after execution of DI instruction and before execution of EI instruction),
DHCMOV instruction is immediately executed, but execution of the interrupt program is held. The
interrupt program will be executed after EI instruction is executed and interrupts are enabled.

Function change depending on the version

The function of FNC189 instruction changes depending on the version as shown in the table below.
Applicable version
Item Outline of function
FX3U FX3UC
Ver.2.20 or Ver.2.20 or
Target device Ring counter (D8099 and D8398) can be specified in S .
later later

Error
An operation error occurs in the following case; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored in
D8067.
• When a device specified in S or [ D +1, D ] is outside the allowable range (error code: K6705)

Program examples
1. Program example 1
In the program example below, the current value of the high speed counter C235 is compared in each
operation cycle, and then the output Y000 is set to ON if the current value is "K500" or more (when the current
value of C235 is not cleared).
The current value of C235 is
M8000
FNC189 1
transferred to D1 and D0.
C235 D0 K0* (The current value of C235 is not
DHCMOV cleared.)
FNC238 D0 K500 In the case of "(D1, D0) ≥ K500",
Y000
DAND>= Y000 is set to ON.

END

*1. K0: The current value of the high speed counter is not cleared when DHCMOV instruction is executed.
K1: The current value of the high speed counter is cleared when DHCMOV instruction is executed.

628
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 24 Others – FNC181 to FNC189
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 24.5 FNC189 – HCMOV / High Speed Counter Move

21
2. Program example 2

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
In the program example shown below, the current value of C235 is transferred to D201 and D200, and the
current value of C235 is cleared when X001 turns from OFF to ON.

0 EI
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
FEND
M8394 ‚ When X001 turns from OFF to ON, the
FNC189
I101
DHCMOV
C235 D200 K1*1 interrupt program from I101 to IRET is
executed. 23
‚ The current value of C235 is

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
transferred to D201 and D200.
(The current value of C235 is cleared
IRET to “0”.)

*1. K0: The current value of the high speed counter is not cleared when DHCMOV instruction is executed. 24
K1: The current value of the high speed counter is cleared when DHCMOV instruction is executed.

Others
FNC181-FNC189
25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

629
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

25. Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199

FNC190 to FNC199 provide instructions for adding, subtracting and comparing block data.

FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

190 – –

191 – –

Section
192 BK+ BK+ S1 S2 D n Block Data Addition
25.1

Section
193 BK– BK- S1 S2 D n Block Data Subtraction
25.2

Section
194 BKCMP= BKCMP= S1 S2 D n Block Data Compare S1 = S2
25.3

Section
195 BKCMP> BKCMP> S1 S2 D n Block Data Compare S1 > S2
25.3

Section
196 BKCMP< BKCMP< S1 S2 D n Block Data Compare S1 < S2
25.3

Section
197 BKCMP<> BKCMP<> S1 S2 D n Block Data Compare S1 ≠ S2
25.3

Section
198 BKCMP<= BKCMP<= S1 S2 D n Block Data Compare S1 ≤ S2
25.3

Section
199 BKCMP>= BKCMP>= S1 S2 D n Block Data Compare S1 ≥ S2
25.3

630
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.1 FNC192 – BK+ / Block Data Addition

21
25.1 FNC192 – BK+ / Block Data Addition

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction adds binary block data.
22
1. Instruction format

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
FNC 192 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D BK+ P 9 steps
BK+ Continuous
17 steps
DBK+ Continuous
Operation Operation
BK+P Pulse (Single) DBK+P Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Head device number storing addition data

S2 Added constant or head device number storing addition data

16- or 32-bit binary 24
D Head device number storing operation result

Others
FNC181-FNC189
n Number of data

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
and System User Digit Specification System User
Special
Index
Con- Real Charac-
Pointer
25
Unit stant Number ter String

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 26
n 3 3 3 3

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
Explanation of function and operation
1. 16-bit operation (BK+ and BK+P)
Command 27
input
FNC192

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ n
BK+

1) "n" 16-bit binary data starting from S2 are added to "n" 16-bit binary data starting from S1 , and the
operation result is stored in "n" points starting from D .
b15 b0 b15 b0 b15 b0 28
S1‚ +0 K1234 S2‚ +0 K4000 D‚ +0 K5234
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

+1 K4567 +1 K1234 +1 K5801

+2 K-2000 "n" +2 K-1234 "n" +2 K-3234 "n"
points + points points
+(n-2) K-1234 +(n-2) K5000 +(n-2) K3766
+(n-1) K4000 +(n-1) K4321 +(n-1) K8321
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

2) A (16-bit) constant from -32768 to +32767 can be directly specified in S2 .

b15 b0 b15 b0
S1‚ +0 K1234 D‚ +0 K5555
+1 K4567 +1 K8888
+2 K-2000 "n"
points + S2‚ K4321 +2 K2321 "n"
points 30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

+(n-2) K-1234 +(n-2) K3087

+(n-1) K4000 +(n-1) K8321

631
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.1 FNC192 – BK+ / Block Data Addition

2. 32-bit operation (DBK+ and DBK+P)

Command
input
FNC192 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ n
DBK+P

1) "2n" 32-bit binary data starting from [ S2 +1, S2 ] are added to "2n" 32-bit binary data starting from
[ S1 +1, S1 ], and the operation result is stored in "2n" points starting from [ D +1, D ].
b31 b0 b31 b0
[ S1‚ +1, S1‚ ] K1234 [ S2‚ +1, S2‚ ] K4000
[ S1‚ +3, S1‚ +2] K40000 [ S2‚ +3, S2‚ +2] K1234
[ S1‚ +5, S1‚ +4] K-2000 "n" [ S2‚ +5, S2‚ +4] K-1234 "n"
points + points
[ S1‚ +2n-3, S1‚ +2n-4] K-1234 [ S2‚ +2n-3, S2‚ +2n-4] K5000
[ S1‚ +2n-1, S1‚ +2n-2] K4000 [ S2‚ +2n-1, S2‚ +2n-2] K4321
b31 b0
[ D‚ +1, D‚ ] K5234
[ D‚ +3, D‚ +2] K41234
[ D‚ +5, D‚ +4] K-3234 "n"
points
[ D‚ +2n-3, D‚ +2n-4] K3766
[ D‚ +2n-1, D‚ +2n-2] K8321

2) A (32-bit) constant from -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 can be directly specified in [ S2 +1, S2 ].

b31 b0
[ S1‚ +1, S1‚ ] K1234
[ S1‚ +3, S1‚ +2] K40000
[ S1‚ +5, S1‚ +4] K-2000 "n"
points + [ S2‚ +1, S2‚ ] K4321
[ S1‚ +2n-3, S1‚ +2n-4] K-1234
b31 b0
[ S1‚ +2n-1, S1‚ +2n-2] K4000
[ D‚ +1, D‚ ] K5555
[ D‚ +3, D‚ +2] K44321
[ D‚ +5, D‚ +4] K2321 "n"
points
[ D‚ +2n-3, D‚ +2n-4] K3087
[ D‚ +2n-1, D‚ +2n-2] K8321

Related instruction
Instruction Description
BK- (FNC193) Subtracts binary block data.

Caution
1) When underflow or overflow occurs in the operation result, the following processing is executed. At this
time, the carry flag does not turn ON.
- In the case of 16-bit operation
K32767(H7FFF) + K2(H0002) → K-32767(H8001)
K-32768(H8000) + K-2(HFFFE) → K32766(H7FFE)

- In the case of 32-bit operation

K2,147,483,647(H7FFFFFFF) + K2(H00000002) → K-2,147,483,647(H80000001)
K-2,147,483,648(H80000000) + K-2(HFFFFFFFE) → K2,147,483,646(H7FFFFFFE)

632
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.1 FNC192 – BK+ / Block Data Addition

21
Errors

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When "n" ("2n" in 32-bit operation) devices starting from S1 , S2 , and/or D exceed the
corresponding device range (error code: K6706)
22
• When "n" ("2n" in 32-bit operation) devices starting from S1 overlap "n" ("2n" in 32-bit operation)

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
devices starting from D (error code: K6706)
• When "n" ("2n" in 32-bit operation) devices starting from S2 overlap "n" ("2n" in 32-bit operation)
devices starting from D (error code: K6706)

Program example
23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
In the program shown below, the specified number of data stored in D150 to D0 are added to the specified
number of data stored in D100 to D0 when X020 is set to ON, and the operation result is stored in D200 and
later.
X020
FNC192
BK+
D100 D150 D200 D0 When D0 is "4" 24

Others
FNC181-FNC189
END

b15 b0 b15 b0 b15 b0

D100
D101
6789
7821
D150
D151
1234
2032
D200
D201
8023
9853
25
+

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
D102 5432 D152 -3252 D202 2180
D103 3520 D153 -1000 D203 2520
D0 4

26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

633
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.2 NFC193 – BK– / Block Data Subtraction

25.2 NFC193 – BK– / Block Data Subtraction

Outline
This instruction subtracts binary block data.

1. Instruction format
FNC 193 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D BK− P 9 steps
BK− Continuous
17 steps
DBK− Continuous
Operation Operation
BK−P Pulse (Single) DBK−P Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Head device number storing subtraction data

S2 Subtracted constant or head device number storing subtraction data

16- or 32-bit binary
D Head device number storing operation result
n Number of data

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (BK- and BK-P)
Command
input FNC193 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ n
BK-P

1) "n" 16-bit binary data starting from S2 are subtracted from "n" 16-bit binary data starting from S1 ,
and the operation result is stored in "n" points starting from D .
b15 b0 b15 b0 b15 b0
S1‚ +0 K8765 S2‚ +0 K1234 D‚ +0 K7531
+1 K8888 +1 K5678 +1 K3210
+2 K9325 "n" +2 K9876 "n" +2 K-551 "n"
points − points points
+(n-2) K5000 +(n-2) K4321 +(n-2) K679
+(n-1) K4352 +(n-1) K4000 +(n-1) K352

2) A (16-bit) constant from -32768 to +32767 can be directly specified in S2 .

b15 b0 b15 b0
S1‚ +0 K8765 D‚ +0 K-115
+1 K8888 +1 K8
+2 K9325 "n" +2 K445 "n"
points − S2‚ K8880
points
+(n-2) K5000 +(n-2) K-3880
+(n-1) K4352 +(n-1) K-4528

634
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.2 NFC193 – BK– / Block Data Subtraction

21
2. 32-bit operation (DBK- and DBK-P)

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Command
input FNC193 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ n
DBK-P

1) "2n" 32-bit binary data starting from [ S2 +1, S2 ] are subtracted from "2n" 32-bit binary data starting 22
from [ S1 +1, S1 ], and the operation result is stored in "2n" points starting from [ D +1, D ].

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
b31 b0 b31 b0
[ S1‚ +1, S1‚ ] K8765 [ S2‚ +1, S2‚ ] K1234
[ S1‚ +3, S1‚ +2] K8888 [ S2‚ +3, S2‚ +2] K5678
[ S1‚ +5, S1‚ +4] K9325 "n"
points −
[ S2‚ +5, S2‚ +4] K9876 "n"
points 23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
[ S1‚ +2n-3, S1‚ +2n-4] K50000 [ S2‚ +2n-3, S2‚ +2n-4] K4321
[ S1‚ +2n-1, S1‚ +2n-2] K4352 [ S2‚ +2n-1, S2‚ +2n-2] K4000
b31 b0
[ D‚ +1, D‚ ] K7531
[ D‚ +3, D‚ +2]
[ D‚ +5, D‚ +4]
K3210
K-551 "n"
24
points

Others
FNC181-FNC189
[ D‚ +2n-3, D‚ +2n-4] K45679
[ D‚ +2n-1, D‚ +2n-2] K352

2) A (32-bit) constant from -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647 can be directly specified in [ S2 +1, S2 ].

25
b31 b0

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
[ S1‚ +1, S1‚ ] K8765
[ S1‚ +3, S1‚ +2] K8888
[ S1‚ +5, S1‚ +4] K9325 "n"
points − [ S2‚ +1, S2‚ ] K8880
[ S1‚ +2n-3, S1‚ +2n-4]
[ S1‚ +2n-1, S1‚ +2n-2]
K50000
K4352
b31 b0 26
[ D‚ +1, D‚ ] K-115

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
[ D‚ +3, D‚ +2] K8
[ D‚ +5, D‚ +4] K445 "n"
points
[ D‚ +2n-3, D‚ +2n-4] K41120
[ D‚ +2n-1, D‚ +2n-2] K-4528
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Related instruction
Instruction Description
BK+ (FNC192) Adds binary block data.
28
Caution
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

1) When underflow or overflow occurs in the operation result, the following processing is executed. At this
time, the carry flag does not turn ON.
- In the case of 16-bit operation
K-32768(H8000) – K2(H0002) → K32766(H7FFE) 29
K32767(H7FFF) – K-2(HFFFE) → K-32767(H8001)
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

- In the case of 32-bit operation

K-2,147,483,648(H80000000) – K2(H00000002) → K2,147,483,646(H7FFFFFFE)
K2,147,483,647(H7FFFFFFF) – K-2(HFFFFFFFE) → K-2,147,483,647(H80000001)
30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

635
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.2 NFC193 – BK– / Block Data Subtraction

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When "n" ("2n" in 32-bit operation) devices starting from S1 , S2 , and/or D exceed the
corresponding device range (error code: K6706)
• When "n" ("2n" in 32-bit operation) devices starting from S1 overlap "n" ("2n" in 32-bit operation)
devices starting from D (error code: K6706)
• When "n" ("2n" in 32-bit operation) devices starting from S2 overlap "n" ("2n" in 32-bit operation)
devices starting from D (error code: K6706)

Program example
In the program shown below, the constant "8765" is subtracted from the data stored in D100 to D102 when
X010 is set to ON, and the operation result is stored in D200 and later.
X010
FNC193 D100 K8765 D200 K3
BK-P

END

b15 b0 b15 b0
D100 K12345 b15 b0 D200 K3580
D101 K8701 − K8765 D201 K-64
D102 K3502 D202 K-5263

636
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.3 FNC194~199 – BKCMP=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Block Data Compare

21
25.3 FNC194~199 – BKCMP=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Block Data Compare

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
These instructions compare block data in the comparison condition set in each instruction.
22
1. Instruction format

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
FNC 194 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D BKCMP= P 9 steps
BKCMP= Continuous
17 steps
DBKCMP= Continuous
Operation Operation
BKCMP=P Pulse (Single) DBKCMP=P Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
FNC 195 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D BKCMP> P 9 steps
BKCMP> Continuous
17 steps
DBKCMP> Continuous
Operation Operation
BKCMP>P Pulse (Single) DBKCMP>P Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

FNC 196 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 24
D BKCMP< P BKCMP< Continuous DBKCMP< Continuous

Others
FNC181-FNC189
9 steps Operation 17 steps Operation
BKCMP<P Pulse (Single) DBKCMP<P Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

FNC 197 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D BKCMP<> P 9 steps
BKCMP<>
BKCMP<>P
Continuous
Operation 17 steps
DBKCMP<>
DBKCMP<>P
Continuous
Operation 25
Pulse (Single) Pulse (Single)

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Operation Operation

FNC 198 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D BKCMP<= P 9 steps
BKCMP<= Continuous
17 steps
DBKCMP<= Continuous
Operation Operation
BKCMP<=P Pulse (Single) DBKCMP<=P Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation 26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
FNC 199 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D BKCMP>= P 9 steps
BKCMP>= Continuous
17 steps
DBKCMP>= Continuous
Operation Operation
BKCMP>=P Pulse (Single) DBKCMP>=P Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

27
2. Set data (common among FNC194 to FNC199)

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Comparison value of device number storing comparison value
16- or 32-bit binary
S2 Head device number storing comparison source data

D Head device number storing comparison result Bit 28

Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

n Number of compared data 16- or 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices (common among FNC194 to FNC199)

Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
and
Type
System User Digit Specification System User
Special
Unit
Index
Con- Real Charac-
stant Number ter String
Pointer 29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 S 3
n 3 3 3 3
30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

S: "D….b" cannot be indexed with index registers (V and Z).

637
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.3 FNC194~199 – BKCMP=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Block Data Compare

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (BKCMP=, >, <, <>, <=, >= / BKCMP=P, >P, <P, <>P, <=P, and >=P)
1) "n" 16-bit binary data starting from S1 are compared with "n" 16-bit binary data starting from S2 ,
and the comparison result is stored in "n" points starting from D .
Command *1 The number out of 194 to 199 is put in "OOO".
input FNCOOO*1 *2 The symbol out of "=", ">", "<", "<>", "<=", or
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ n ">=" corresponding to the FNC No. is put in ….
BKCMP…*2

Comparison result
S1‚ +0 K1234 S2‚ +0 K5321 D‚ +0 OFF(0)
+1 K5678 +1 K3399 +1 ON(1)
*3
+2 K5000 "n" +2 K5678 "n" +2 OFF(0) "n"
points > points points
+n-2 K7777 +n-2 K6543 +n-2 ON(1)
+n-1 K4321 +n-1 K1200 +n-1 ON(1)
*3 An operation example of BKCMP>
(FNC195) instruction is shown here.

2) A constant can be directly specified in S1 .

Comparison result
S2‚ +0 K32000 D‚ +0 ON(1)
+1 K4321 +1 OFF(0)
*4
+2 K32000 "n" +2 ON(1) "n"
S1‚ K32000 = points points
*4 An operation example of BKCMP= +n-2 K1234 +n-2 OFF(0)
(FNC194) instruction is shown
+n-1 K5678 +n-1 OFF(0)
here.

3) The table below shows the comparison result in each instruction:

Instruction Comparison result ON (1) condition Comparison result OFF (0) condition
BKCMP=(FNC194) S1 = S2 S1 <> S2
BKCMP>(FNC195) S1 > S2 S1 <= S2
BKCMP<(FNC196) S1 < S2 S1 >= S2
BKCMP<>(FNC197) S1 <> S2 S1 = S2
BKCMP<=(FNC198) S1 <= S2 S1 > S2
BKCMP>=(FNC199) S1 >= S2 S1 < S2

4) When the comparison result is ON (1) in all of "n" points starting from D , M8090 (block comparison
signal) turns ON.

638
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.3 FNC194~199 – BKCMP=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Block Data Compare

21
2. 32-bit operation (DBKCMP=, >, <, <>, <=, >= / DBKCMP=P, >P, <P, <>P, <=P, and >=P)

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
1) "n" 32-bit binary data starting from [ S1 +1, S1 ] are compared with "n" 32-bit binary data starting
from [ S2 +1, S2 ], and the comparison result is stored in "n" points starting from [ D +1, D ].
Command *1 The number out of 194 to 199 is put in "OOO".
input FNCOOO*1
DBKCMP…*2
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ n *2 The symbol out of "=", ">", "<", "<>", "<=", or
">=" corresponding to the FNC No. is put in …. 22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
[ S1‚ +1, S1‚ ] K1234 [ S2‚ +1, S2‚ ] K5321
[ S1‚ +3, S1‚ +2] K5678 [ S2‚ +3, S2‚ +2] K3399
*3
[ S1‚ +5, S1‚ +4] K5000 "n" [ S2‚ +5, S2‚ +4] K5678 "n"
points > points
[ S1‚ +2n-3, S1‚ +2n-4] K40000 [ S2‚ +2n-3, S2‚ +2n-4] K6543 23
[ S1‚ +2n-1, S1‚ +2n-2] K4321 [ S2‚ +2n-1, S2‚ +2n-2] K1200

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Comparison result
*3 An operation example of DBKCMP>
(FNC195) instruction is shown here. D‚ +0 OFF(0)
+1 ON(1)
+2 OFF(0) "n"
points 24
+n-2 ON(1)

Others
FNC181-FNC189
+n-1 ON(1)

2) A constant can be directly specified in [ S1 +1, S1 ].

[ S2‚ +1, S2‚ ] K32000 25

[ S2‚ +3, S2‚ +2] K4321

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
*4
[ S2‚ +5, S2‚ +4] K32000 "n"
[ S1‚ +1, S1‚ ] K32000 = points
*4 An operation example of DBKCMP= [ S2‚ +2n-3, S2‚ +2n-4] K1234
(FNC194) instruction is shown here. [ S2‚ +2n-1, S2‚ +2n-2] K5678
Comparison result
D‚ +0 ON(1)
26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
+1 OFF(0)
+2 ON(1) "n"
points
+n-2 OFF(0)
+n-1 OFF(0)
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
3) The table below shows the comparison result for each instruction:
Instruction Comparison result ON (1) condition Comparison result OFF (0) condition
DBKCMP=(FNC194) [ S1 +1, S1 ] = [ S2 +1, S2 ] [ S1 +1, S1 ] ≠ [ S2 +1, S2 ]
DBKCMP>(FNC195) [ S1 +1, S1 ] > [ S2 +1, S2 ] [ S1 +1, S1 ] <= [ S2 +1, S2 ]
28
DBKCMP<(FNC196) [ S1 +1, S1 ]< [ S2 +1, S2 ] [ S1 +1, S1 ] >= [ S2 +1, S2 ]
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

DBKCMP<>(FNC197) [ S1 +1, S1 ] ≠ [ S2 +1, S2 ] [ S1 +1, S1 ] = [ S2 +1, S2 ]

DBKCMP<=(FNC198) [ S1 +1, S1 ] <= [ S2 +1, S2 ] [ S1 +1, S1 ] > [ S2 +1, S2 ]
DBKCMP>=(FNC199) [ S1 +1, S1 ] >= [ S2 +1, S2 ] [ S1 +1, S1 ] < [ S2 +1, S2 ]

4) When the comparison result is ON (1) in all of "n" points starting from [ D +1, D ], the M8090 (block
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

comparison signal) turns ON.

Related device
→ For the block comparison signal use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Device Name Description 30
Turns ON when all comparison results are "ON (1)" in a block data instruction.
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

M8090 Block comparison signal DBKCMP= (FNC194), DBKCMP> (FNC195), DBKCMP< (FNC196), DBKCMP<>
(FNC197), DBKCMP<= (FNC198), and DBKCMP>= (FNC199)

639
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.3 FNC194~199 – BKCMP=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Block Data Compare

Caution
• When using 32-bit counters (including 32-bit high speed counters)
For comparing 32-bit counters and 32-bit high speed counters (C200 to C255), make sure to use an
instruction for 32-bit operation (DBKCMP=, DBKCMP>, DBKCMP<, DBKCMP<>, DBKCMP<=, or
DBKCMP>=).
If an instruction for 16-bit operation (BKCMP=, BKCMP>, BKCMP<, BKCMP<>, BKCMP<=, or BKCMP>=)
is used, an operation error is caused (error code: K6705).

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When the range of "n" ("2n" in 32-bit operation) points starting from S1 and/or S2 exceeds the
corresponding device range (error code: K6706)
• When the range of "n" points starting from D exceeds the corresponding device range (error code:
K6706)
• When data registers starting from D specified as "D….b" overlap "n" ("2n" in 32-bit operation) points
starting from S1 (error code: K6706)
• When data registers starting from D specified as "D….b" overlap "n" ("2n" in 32-bit operation) points
starting from S2 (error code: K6706)
• When a 32-bit counter (C200 to C255) is specified in S1 and/or S2 in 16-bit operation (error code:
K6705)
For comparing 32-bit counters, make sure to use an instruction for 32-bit operation (DBKCMP=,
DBKCMP>, DBKCMP<, DBKCMP<>, DBKCMP<=, or DBKCMP>=).

640
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 25 Block Data Operation – FNC190 to FNC199
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 25.3 FNC194~199 – BKCMP=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Block Data Compare

21
Program example

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
1) In the program shown below, four 16-bit binary data starting from D100 are compared with four 16-bit
binary data starting from D200 by BKCMP= (FNC194) instruction when X020 is set to ON, and the
comparison result is stored in four points starting from M10.
When the comparison result is "ON (1)" in all of the four points starting from M10, Y000 is set to ON.
X020
22
FNC194

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
D100 D200 M10 K4
BKCMP=
M8090
Y000
Block comparison signal

END 23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Comparison
result
D100 K1000 D200 K1000 M10 ON
D101 K2000 D201 K2000 M11 ON
D102 K3000
= D202 K5000 M12 OFF
D103 K4000 D203 K4000 M13 ON 24

Others
FNC181-FNC189
Y000 OFF
(When all of M10 to M13 are ON, Y000 is set to ON.)

2) In the program shown below, the constant K1000 is compared with four data starting from D10 when 25
X010 is set to ON, and the comparison result is stored in b4 to b7 of D0.

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
X010
FNC197 K1000 D10 D0.4 K4
BKCMP<>

END
26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
b15 b7 b4 b0
D0 before
operation 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
D10 K2000
D11 K1000
K1000 <>
D12
D13
K1000
K2222 D0 after
b15 b7 b4 b0 27
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
operation

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

641
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

26. Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209

FNC200 to FNC209 provide instructions for controlling character strings such as linking character string data,
replacing some characters and extracting character string data.

FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

Section
200 STR STR S1 S2 D BIN to Character String Conversion
26.1

Section
201 VAL VAL S D1 D2 Character String to BIN Conversion
26.2

Section
202 $+ $+ S1 S2 D Link Character Strings
26.3

Section
203 LEN LEN S D Character String Length Detection
26.4

Extracting Character String Data from Section

204 RIGHT RIGHT S D n the Right 26.5

Extracting Character String Data from Section

205 LEFT LEFT S D n the Left 26.6

Section
206 MIDR MIDR S1 D S2 Random Selection of Character Strings
26.7

Random Replacement of Character Section

207 MIDW MIDW S1 D S2 Strings 26.8

Section
208 INSTR INSTR S1 S2 D n Character string search
26.9

Section
209 $MOV $MOV S D Character String Transfer
26.10

642
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.1 FNC200 – STR / BIN to Character String Conversion

21
26.1 FNC200 – STR / BIN to Character String Conversion

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction converts binary data into character strings (ASCII codes).
On the other hand, the ESTR (FNC116) instruction converts floating point data into character strings.
22
→ For character strings, refer to Section 5.3.

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
→ For ESTR (FNC116) instruction, refer to Section 18.4.

1. Instruction format

FNC 200 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
23
D STR P 7 steps STR Continuous
13 steps DSTR
Continuous

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Operation Operation
STRP Pulse (Single) DSTRP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type 24
Head device number storing the number of digits of a numeric value to be

Others
FNC181-FNC189
S1 16-bit binary
converted
S2 Device number storing binary data to be converted 16- or 32-bit binary

D Head device number storing converted character string Character string

3. Applicable devices
25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3

27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

643
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.1 FNC200 – STR / BIN to Character String Conversion

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (STR and STRP)
1) All digits (specified by S1 ) of 16-bit binary data stored in S2 are converted into ASCII codes while
the decimal point is added to the position specified by the device storing the number of digits of the
decimal part ( S1 +1), and stored in D and later.
Command
input FNC200 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
STR
b15 b8 b7 b0
Number of all ASCII code in "(Value
digits ASCII code
S1‚ +0 D‚ +0 specifying number of all
indicating sign
digits - 1)"th digit
+1 Number of digits ASCII code in "(Value ASCII code in "(Value
of decimal part +1 specifying number of all specifying number of all For number of
digits - 3)"th digit digits - 2)"th digit all digits
ASCII code in "(Value ASCII code in "(Value
+2 specifying number of all specifying number of all For value
digits - 5)"th digit digits - 4)"th digit stored in S1‚
ASCII code in "(Value ASCII code in "(Value
Sign +3 specifying number of all specifying number of all
digits - 7)"th digit digits - 6)"th digit
+4 0000H
16-bit binary
S2‚ 0000H is automatically stored at
data
the end of a character string.

S1‚ +0 5
+1 1 b15 b8 b7 b0
D‚ +0 31H(1) 2DH(-)
For number of
- 1 2 3 +1 2EH(.) 32H(2) all digits
16-bit binary S1‚ =5
+2 00H 33H(3)
data
S2‚ -123 00H is automatically stored at the
end of a character string.

2) Set the number of all digits S1 in the range from 2 to 8.

3) Set the number of digits of the decimal part S1 +1 in the range from 0 to 5.
Make sure to satisfy "Number of digits of decimal part <= (Number of all digits -3)".
4) 16-bit binary data to be converted stored in S2 should be within the range from -32768 to +32767.
5) Converted character string data is stored in D and later as shown below.
- As the sign, "space" (20H) is stored when the 16-bit binary data stored in S2 is positive, and "-"
(2DH) is stored when the 16-bit binary data stored in S2 is negative.
- When the number of digits of the Number of
all digits 6
decimal part S1 +1 is set to any
value other than "0", the decimal point Number of 2
digits of 1 2 3 4
"." (2EH) is automatically added in decimal part
16-bit Number of digits of
"number of digits of decimal part + 1"th 1234 decimal part
binary data
digit. It is automatically
When the number of digits of the added.
decimal part S1 +1 is set to "0", the
decimal point is not added.
- When the number of digits of the Number of
decimal part S1 +1 is larger than the all digits 6
number of digits of 16-bit binary data Number of 3
digits of 0 0 1 2
stored in S2 , "0" (30H) is decimal part
automatically added, and the data is 16-bit 12 It is automatically
binary data added.
shifted to the right end during
conversion.

644
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.1 FNC200 – STR / BIN to Character String Conversion

21
- When the number of all digits stored in

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Number of
all digits 8
S1 excluding the sign and decimal
point is larger than the number of digits Number of 1
digits of - 1 2 3
of 16-bit binary data stored in S2 , decimal part
"space" (20H) is stored in each digit 16-bit -123 "20H" (space) is
binary data
between the sign and the numeric stored in each digit.
22
value.

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
When the number of all digits stored in S1 excluding the sign and decimal point is smaller than the
number of digits of 16-bit binary data stored in S2 , an error is caused.
- "00H" indicating the end of a character string is automatically stored at the end of a converted character
string.
When the number of all digits is even, "0000H" is stored in the device after the last character. 23
When the number of all digits is odd, "00H" is stored in the high-order byte (8 bits) of the device storing

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
the final character.

2. 32-bit operation (DSTR and DSTRP)

1) All digits (specified by S1 ) of 32-bit binary data stored in [ S2 +1, S2 ] are converted into ASCII
codes while the decimal point is added to the position specified by the device storing the number of digits 24
of the decimal part ( S1 +1), and stored in D and later.

Others
FNC181-FNC189
Command
input FNC200 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
DSTR
b15 b8 b7 b0
Number of all ASCII code in "(Value
S1‚ +0 digits
Number of digits
D‚ +0 specifying number of all
digits - 1)"th digit
ASCII code
indicating sign 25
+1 of decimal part ASCII code in "(Value ASCII code in "(Value

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
+1 specifying number of all specifying number of all
digits - 3)"th digit digits - 2)"th digit
ASCII code in "(Value ASCII code in "(Value
+2 specifying number of all specifying number of all For number of
digits - 5)"th digit digits - 4)"th digit all digits
ASCII code in "(Value ASCII code in "(Value For value
+3 stored in S1‚
26
Sign specifying number of all specifying number of all
digits - 7)"th digit digits - 6)"th digit
ASCII code in "(Value ASCII code in "(Value
S2‚ +1 S2‚ +4

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
specifying number of all specifying number of all
b31 b16 b15 b0 digits - 9)"th digit digits - 8)"th digit
ASCII code in "(Value
S2‚ High-order 16 bits Low-order 16 bits +5 00H specifying number of all
digits - 10)"th digit
32-bit binary data 00H is automatically stored at the
end of a character string.
S1‚ +0
+1
8
3 b15 b8 b7 b0
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
D‚ +0 36H(6) 2DH(-)
+1 34H(4) 35H(5) For number of
- 6 5 4 3 2 1 33H(3) 2EH(.) all digits
+2
S1‚ =8
S2‚ +1 S2‚ +3 31H(1) 32H(2)
32-bit
binary data
-654321 +4 0000H 28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

0000H is automatically stored at

the end of a character string.

2) Set the number of all digits S1 in the range from 2 to 13.

3) Set the number of digits of the decimal part S1 +1 in the range from 0 to 10.
Make sure to satisfy "Number of digits of decimal part <= (Number of all digits -3)". 29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

4) 32-bit binary data to be converted stored in [ S2 +1, S2 ] should be within the range from -
2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647.

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

645
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.1 FNC200 – STR / BIN to Character String Conversion

5) Converted character string data is stored in D and later as shown below.

- For the sign, "space" (20H) is stored when the 32-bit binary data stored in S2 is positive, and "-
(2DH)" is stored when the 32-bit binary data stored in S2 is negative.
- When the number of digits of the Number of
10
decimal part S1 +1 is set to any all digits
value other than "0", the decimal Number of 3
digits of 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
point "." (2EH) is automatically decimal part
32-bit Number of digits of
added in "number of digits of 12345678 decimal part
binary data
decimal part + 1"th digit. It is automatically added.
When the number of digits of the
decimal part S1 +1 is set to "0",
the decimal point is not added.
- When the number of digits of the Number of
all digits 13
decimal part S1 +1 is larger than the
number of digits of 32-bit binary data Number of 10
digits of 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 4 3 2 1
stored in [ S2 +1, S2 ], "0" (30H) is decimal part
automatically added, and the data is 16-bit 54321
binary data
shifted to the right end during It is automatically added.
conversion.
- When the number of all digits stored in
Number of
S1 excluding the sign and decimal all digits 13
point is larger than the number of digits Number of 2
digits of - 5 4 3 2 1 0
of 32-bit binary data stored in [ S2 +1, decimal part
32-bit "20H" (space) is stored in
S2 ], "space" (20H) is stored in each -543210 each digit.
binary data
digit between the sign and the numeric
value.
When the number of all digits stored in S1 excluding the sign and decimal point is smaller than the
number of digits of 32-bit binary data stored in [ S2 +1, S2 ], an error is caused.
- "00H" indicating the end of a character string is automatically stored at the end of a converted character
string.
When the number of all digits is even, "0000H" is stored in the device after the last character.
When the number of all digits is odd, "00H" is stored in the high-order byte (8 bits) of the device storing
the final character.

Related instructions
Instruction Description
Converts binary floating point data into a character string (ASCII codes) with a specified number
ESTR(FNC116)
of digits.
EVAL(FNC117) Converts a character string (ASCII codes) into binary floating point data.
VAL(FNC201) Converts a character string (ASCII codes) into binary data.

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When the number of all digits stored in S1 is outside the following range (error code: K6706)
Setting range
16-bit operation 2 to 8
32-bit operation 2 to 13

• When the number of digits of the decimal part stored in S1 +1 is outside the following range (error code:
K6706)
Setting range
16-bit operation 0 to 5
32-bit operation 0 to 10

646
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.1 FNC200 – STR / BIN to Character String Conversion

21
• When the relationship between the number of all digits stored in S1 and the number of digits of the

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
decimal part stored in S1 +1 does not satisfy the following (error code: K6706)
(Number of all digits -3) ≥ Number of digits of decimal part
• When the number of all digits stored in S1 including the digit for sign and the digit for decimal point is
smaller than the number of digits of the binary data stored in [ S2 +1, S2 ] (error code: K6706) 22
• When the devices D and later storing a character string exceeds the corresponding device range

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
(error code: K6706)

Program example
In the program below, the 16-bit binary data stored in D10 is converted into a character string in accordance
with the digit specification by D0 and D1 when X000 is set to ON, and then stored in D20 to D23. 23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
X000
FNC 12 K12672 D10 Data to be converted is set.
MOVP

FNC 12 K6 D0 The number of all digits is set.

MOVP

FNC 12 The number of digits of the decimal

24
K0 D1 part is set.

Others
FNC181-FNC189
MOVP

FNC200 D0 D10 D20

STRP

END
25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
b15 b8 b7 b0
16-bit binary data D10 12672 " 12672" D20 31H(1) 20H(space)
D21 36H(6) 32H(2)
Number of all digits D0 6 D22 32H(2) 37H(7)
Number of digits of
decimal part
D1 0 D23 0000H
26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

647
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.2 FNC201 – VAL / Character String to BIN Conversion

26.2 FNC201 – VAL / Character String to BIN Conversion

Outline
This instruction converts a character string (ASCII codes) into binary data.
On the other hand, EVAL (FNC117) instruction converts a character string (ASCII codes) into floating point
data.
→ For character strings, refer to Section 5.3.
→ For EVAL (FNC117) instruction, refer to Section 18.5.

1. Instruction format

FNC 201 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
D VAL P 7 steps VAL Continuous
13 steps DVAL
Continuous
Operation Operation
VALP Pulse (Single) DVALP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Head device number storing a character string to be converted into binary data Character string
Head device number storing the number of all digits of the binary data acquired
D1 16-bit binary
by conversion
D2 Head device number storing the binary data acquired by conversion 16- or 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3

D1 3 3 3 3 3

D2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (VAL and VALP)
1) A character string stored in S and later is converted into 16-bit binary data. The number of all digits
of the binary data acquired for conversion is stored in D1 , the number of digits of the decimal part is
stored in D1 +1, and the converted binary data is stored in D2 .
In converting a character string into binary data, the data from S to a device number storing "00H" is
handled as a character string in byte units.
Command
input FNC201 S‚ D1 ‚ D2 ‚
VAL
Number of all
b15 b8 b7 b0 D1‚ +0 digits
S‚ +0 ASCII code of 1st character ASCII code indicating sign +1 Number of digits
of decimal part
+1 ASCII code of 3rd character ASCII code of 2nd character
Integer value in
+2 ASCII code of 5th character ASCII code of 4th character - D2‚ which decimal
ASCII code of 7th character ASCII code of 6th character point is ignored
+3
Sign
1st character
2nd character

7th character

+4 00H
16-bit binary data

It indicates the end of character string.

648
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.2 FNC201 – VAL / Character String to BIN Conversion

21
For example, when a character string "-123.45" is specified in S and later, the conversion result is

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
stored in D1 and D2 as shown below.
b15 b8 b7 b0 D1‚ +0 7
S‚ +0 31H(1) 2DH(-) +1 2

+1 33H(3) 32H(2) 22
+2 34H(4) 2EH( ) - 1 2 3 4 5 D2‚ -12345

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
+3 00H 35H(5)
It indicates the end of the character string.

2) Character string to be converted

a) Number of characters of character string and the numeric range when the decimal point is ignored 23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Description
Number of all characters (digits) 2 to 8
Number of characters (digits) of decimal part 0 to 5 and smaller than "number of all digits -3"
−32768 to +32767
Numeric range when decimal point is ignored
Example: 123.45 → 12345
24
b) Character types used in characters to be converted

Others
FNC181-FNC189
Character type
Positive numeric value "Space" (20H)
Sign
Negative numeric value "–" (2DH)
Decimal point "." (2EH) 25
Number "0" (30H) to "9" (39H)

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
3) D1 stores the number of all digits. The number of all digits indicates the number of all characters
(including the number, sign and decimal point).
4) D1 +1 stores the number of digits of the decimal part. The number of digits of the decimal part indicates
the number of all characters after the decimal point "." (2EH). 26
5) D2 stores 16-bit data (bin) converted from a character string with the decimalpoint ignored.

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
In the character string located in S and later, "space" (20H) and "0" (30H) characters between the
sign and the first number other than "0" are ignored in the conversion to 16-bit binary data.
Number of all Number of all
digits 8 digits 7

- 1 2 3 4 5
Number of digits 2 0 0 0 1 2
Number of digits 4 27
of decimal part of decimal part

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
16-bit binary -12345 16-bit binary 12
Ignored data Sign Ignored data

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

649
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.2 FNC201 – VAL / Character String to BIN Conversion

2. 32-bit operation (DVAL and DVALP)

1) A character string stored in S and later is converted into 32-bit binary data. The number of all digits
of the binary data acquired for conversion is stored in D1 , the number of digits of the decimal part is
stored in D1 +1, and the binary data is stored in [ D2 +1, D2 ].
In conversion from a character string into binary data, the data from S to a device number storing
"00H" is handled as a character string in byte units.
Command
input FNC201 S‚ D1 ‚ D2 ‚
DVAL
Number of all
b15 b8 b7 b0 D1‚ +0 digits
S‚ +0 ASCII code of 1st character ASCII code indicating sign +1 Number of digits
of decimal part
+1 ASCII code of 3rd character ASCII code of 2nd character
D2‚ +1 D2‚
+2 ASCII code of 5th character ASCII code of 4th character - Integer value in
which decimal
+3 ASCII code of 7th character ASCII code of 6th character point is ignored

Sign
1st character
2nd character

12th character
+4 ASCII code of 9th character ASCII code of 8th character

ASCII code of 11th character ASCII code of 10th character 32-bit binary
+5
data
+6 00H ASCII code of 12th character

It indicates the end of character string.

For example, when a character string "-12345.678" is specified in S and later, the conversion result
is stored in D1 and D2 as shown below.
b15 b8 b7 b0
31H(1) 2DH(-) D1‚ +0 10
S‚ +0
+1 3
+1 33H(3) 32H(2)
+2 35H(5) 34H(4)
- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 -12345678
+3 36H(6) 2EH(.)
D2‚ +1 D2‚
+4 38H(8) 37H(7)
+5 00H

2) Character string to be converted

a) Number of characters of character string and the numeric range when the decimal point is ignored
Description
Number of all characters (digits) 2 to 13
Number of characters (digits) of decimal part 0 to 10 and smaller than "number of all digits −3"
−2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
Numeric range when decimal point is ignored
Example: 12345.678 → "12345678"

b) Character types used in characters to be converted

Character type
Positive numeric value "Space" (20H)
Sign
Negative numeric value "–" (2DH)
Decimal point "." (2EH)
Number "0" (30H) to "9" (39H)

3) D1 stores the number of all digits. The number of all digits indicates the number of all characters
(including the number, sign and decimal point).
4) D1 +1 stores the number of digits of the decimal part. The number of digits of the decimal part
indicates the number of all characters after the decimal point "." (2EH).

650
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.2 FNC201 – VAL / Character String to BIN Conversion

21
5) [ D2 +1, D2 ] stores 16-bit data (bin) converted from a character string with the decimal point ignored.

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
For the character string located in S and later, the "space" (20H) and "0" (30H) characters between
the sign and the first number other than "0" are ignored in the conversion to 32-bit binary data.

Total number of digits 12

- 6 5 4 3 2 1
Number of digits after
the decimal point
2 22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
32-bit binary data -654321
Ignored

Total number of digits 11

Number of digits after 8
0 0 0 0 5 4 3 2 1 the decimal point
23
32-bit binary data 54321
Ignored

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Sign

Related instructions
Instruction Description 24
Converts binary floating point data into a character string (ASCII code) with a specified number

Others
FNC181-FNC189
ESTR(FNC116)
of digits.
EVAL(FNC117) Converts a character string (ASCII code) into binary floating point data.
STR(FNC200) Converts binary data into a character string (ASCII code).

Caution 25
Store sign data, "space (20H)" or "- (2DH)", must be stored in the 1st byte (lower order 8 bits of the head

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
device set in S ).
Only the ASCII code data "0 (30H)" to "9 (39H)", "space (20H)" and "decimal point (2EH)" can be stored from
the 2nd byte to the "00H" at the end of the character string in S .
If "- (2DH)" is stored in the 2nd byte or later, an operation error (error code: K6706) occurs.
26
Errors

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When the number of characters of the character string to be converted ( S and later) is outside the
following ranges (error code: K6706) 27
Setting range

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
16-bit operation 2 to 8
32-bit operation 2 to 13

• When the number of characters after the decimal point of the character string to be converted ( S and
later) is outside the following ranges (error code: K6706) 28
Setting range
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

16-bit operation 0 to 5
32-bit operation 0 to 10

• When the relationship between the number of all characters in the character string to be converted ( S
and later) and the number of characters after the decimal point does not satisfy the following (error code: 29
K6706)
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

(Number of all characters -3) ≥ Number of characters after the decimal point
• When the sign is set to any ASCII code other than "space" (20H) and "-" (2DH) (error code: K6706)
• When a digit of a number is set to any ASCII code other than "0" (30H) to "9" (39H) or a decimal point "."
(2EH) (error code: K6706)
• When the decimal point "." (2EH) is set two or more times in the character string to be converted ( S
30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

and later) (error code: K6706)

651
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.2 FNC201 – VAL / Character String to BIN Conversion

• When the binary data acquired by conversion is outside the following range (error code: K6706)
Setting range
16-bit operation −32768 to 32767
32-bit operation −2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647

• When "00H" is not present in the location from S to the final device number (error code: K6706)

Program example
1) In the program below, the character string data stored in D20 to D22 is regarded as an integer value,
converted into a binary value, and stored in D0 when X000 is set to ON.
X000
FNC201 D20 D10 D0
VALP

END

b15 b8 b7 b0
D20 31H(1) 2DH(-) D0 -1654
D21 2EH(.) 36H(6)
D22 34H(4) 35H(5) D10 6 Number of all digits
D23 00H D11 2 Number of digits of decimal part
"00H" is stored here.

2) In the program below, the character string data stored in D20 to D24 is regarded as an integer value,
converted into a binary value, and stored in D0 when X000 is set to ON.
X000
FNC201 D20 D10 D0
DVALP

END

b15 b8 b7 b0 D1 D0
D20 37H(7) 20H(space) D0 7910 0611
D21 31H(1) 39H(9)
D22 30H(0) 30H(0) D10 10 Number of all digits
D23 36H(6) 2EH(.) D11 3 Number of digits of decimal part
D24 31H(1) 31H(1)
D25 00H
"00H" is stored here.

652
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.3 FNC202 – $+ / Link Character Strings

21
26.3 FNC202 – $+ / Link Character Strings

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction links a character string to another character string.
→ For handling of character strings, refer to Section 5.3.
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
1. Instruction format

FNC 202 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
$+ P $+ Continuous ⎯
7 steps
$+P
Operation
Pulse (Single)
Operation
⎯ 23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Head device number storing the link source data (character string) or directly
S1
specified character string 24

Others
FNC181-FNC189
Head device number storing the link data (character string) or directly specified Character string
S2
character string
D Head device number storing the linked data (character string)

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
25
Oper-

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

653
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.3 FNC202 – $+ / Link Character Strings

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation ($+ and $+P)
The character string data stored in S2 and later is linked to the end of the character string data stored in
S1 and later, and the linked data is stored to devices starting from D .
A character string stored in S1 or S2 or later indicates the data from the specified device to the first
"00H" in units of byte.
Command
input
FNC202 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
$+

b15---b8 b7----b0 b15---b8 b7----b0 b15---b8 b7---b0

S1 ‚ 46H(F) 48H(H) S2 ‚ 35H(5) 31H(1) D‚ 46H(F) 48H(H) S1 ‚
S1 ‚ +1 2DH(-) 41H(A) + S2 ‚ +1 39H(9) 33H(3) D ‚ +1 2DH(-) 41H(A) S1 ‚ +1
S1 ‚ +2 00H S2 ‚ +2 00H 41H(A) D ‚ +2 35H(5) 31H(1) S2 ‚
D ‚ +3 39H(9) 33H(3) S2 ‚ +1
D ‚ +4 00H 41H(A) S2 ‚ +2

“00H” is automatically
stored.

• In linking, “00H” indicating the end of a character string specified in S1 is ignored, and a character string
specified in S2 is linked to the last character specified in S1 .
When a character string is linked, “00H” is automatically added at the end.
- When the number of characters after linking is odd, “00H” is stored in the high-order byte of the device
storing the last character.
- When the number of characters after linking is even, “0000H” is stored in the device after the last
character.

Cautions
• When directly specifying a character string, up to 32 characters can be specified (input).
However, this limitation in the number of characters is not applied when a word device is specified in S1
or S2 .
• When the values in both S1 and S2 start from "00H" (that is, when the number of characters is “0”),
"0000H" is stored in D .

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When the number of devices after a device number specified by D is smaller than the number of
devices required to store all linked character strings (that is, when “00H” cannot be stored after all
character strings and the last character) (error code: K6706)
• When the same device is specified in S1 , S2 and D as a device for storing a character string
(error code: K6706)
• When “00H” is not set within the corresponding device range after the device specified by S1 or S2
(error code: K6706)

654
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.3 FNC202 – $+ / Link Character Strings

21
Program example

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
In the program example shown below, a character string stored in D10 to D12 (abcde) is linked to the
character string “ABCD”, and the result is stored to D100 and later when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC202 D10 “ABCD” D100
$+ 22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
END

b15---b8 b7----b0 b15---b8 b7----b0

D10 62H(b) 61H(a) D100
D11 64H(d) 63H(c) + “ABCD” D101
62H(b) 61H(a)
64H(d) 63H(c)
23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
D12 00H 65H(e) D102 41H(A) 65H(e)
D103 43H(C) 42H(B)
D104 00H 44H(D)

“00H” is automatically stored.

24

Others
FNC181-FNC189
25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

655
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.4 FNC203 – LEN / Character String Length Detection

26.4 FNC203 – LEN / Character String Length Detection

Outline
This instruction detects the number of characters (bytes) of a specified character string.
→ For handling of character strings, refer to Section 5.3.

1. Instruction format

FNC 203 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
LEN P LEN Continuous ⎯
5 steps Operation
LENP Pulse (Single) ⎯
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Head device number storing a character string whose length is to be detected Character string

D Device number storing the detected character string length (number of bytes) 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (LEN and LENP)
The length of a character string stored in S and later is detected, and stored to D . Data starting from
S until the first device storing "00H" is handled as a character string in units of byte.
Command
input
FNC203 S‚ D‚
LEN

b15----------b8 b7-------------b0
S‚ 2nd character 1st character
S ‚ +1 4th character 3rd character b15---------------b0
S ‚ +2 6th character 5th character D ‚ Character string
length

S ‚ +n 00H “n”th character

It indicates the end of character string.

For example, when “ABCDEFGHI” is stored in S and later as shown below, K9 is stored to D .
b15----------b8 b7-------------b0
S‚ 42H(B) 41H(A)
S ‚ +1 44H(D) 43H(C) “ABCDEFGHI” b15---------------b0
S ‚ +2 46H(F) 45H(E) D‚ 9

S ‚ +3 48H(H) 47H(G)
S ‚ +4 00H 49H(I)

656
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.4 FNC203 – LEN / Character String Length Detection

21
Caution

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
• This instruction can handle character codes other than ASCII codes, but the character string length is
handled in byte units (8 bits). Accordingly, in the case of character codes in which 2 bytes express 1
character such as shift JIS codes, the length of 1 character is detected as “2”.

Errors 22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When “00H” is not set within the corresponding device range after a device specified by S (error code:
K6706)
• When the detected number of characters is “32768” or more (error code: K6706) 23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Program example
In the program example shown below, the length of a character string stored in D0 and later is output in 4-digit
BCD to Y040 to Y057 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC203 D0 D10 24
LEN

Others
FNC181-FNC189
The length of the character
FNC 18 D10 K4Y40 string is output to the display
BCD unit.

END
25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
b15---b8 b7----b0
D0 49H(I) 4DH(M) Conversion
D1 53H(S) 54H(T) D10 into BCD Y057 to Y040
D2 42H(B) 55H(U) 10 0 0 1 0
D3 53H(S) 49H(I) “MITSUBISHI” BCD BCD value 26
(Characters

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
D4 49H(I) 48H(H)
“ ABC.......”
D5 41H(A) 00H after “00H” are
ignored.)
D6 43H(C) 42H(B)

27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

657
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.5 FNC204 – RIGHT / Extracting Character String Data from the Right

26.5 FNC204 – RIGHT / Extracting Character String Data from the Right

Outline
This instruction extracts a specified number of characters from the right end of a specified character string.
→ For handling of character strings, refer to Section 5.3.

1. Instruction format

FNC 204 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
RIGHT P 7 steps
RIGHT Continuous ⎯
Operation
RIGHTP Pulse (Single) ⎯
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Head device number storing a character string
Character string
D Head device number storing extracted character string
n Number of characters to be extracted 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3

658
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.5 FNC204 – RIGHT / Extracting Character String Data from the Right

21
Explanation of function and operation

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
1. 16-bit operation (RIGHT and RIGHTP)
“n” characters are extracted from the right end (that is, from the end) of the character string data stored in
S and later, and stored to D and later.
If the number of characters specified by “n” is “0”, the NULL code (0000H) is stored to D . 22
When characters are extracted from a character string, “00H" is automatically added at the end of the

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
extracted characters.
- When the number of extracted characters is odd, “00H” is stored in the high-order byte of a device
storing the last character.
- When the number of extracted characters is even, “0000H” is stored in the device after the last
character. 23
Command

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
input
FNC204 S‚ n
D‚
RIGHT

b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0 b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0
S‚
ASCII code for 2nd
character
ASCII code for 1st
character
D‚ ASCII code for “(last ASCII code for “(last
character -n+2)”th character character -n+1)”th character 24
ASCII code for 4th ASCII code for 3rd D ‚ +1

Others
FNC181-FNC189
ASCII code for “(last ASCII code for “(last
S ‚ +1
character character character -n+4)”th character character -n+3)”th character

ASCII code for “(last ASCII code for “(last ASCII code for “(last ASCII code for “(last
character -n+2)”th character character -n+1)”th character character -1)”th character character -2)”th character

ASCII code for “(last ASCII code for “(last

character -n+4)”th character character -n+3)”th character 00H ASCII code for last
character
25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
ASCII code for “(last ASCII code for “(last
character -1)”th character character -2)”th character
ASCII code for last
00H character
26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
In the case of “n = 5”
b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0 b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0
S‚ 42H(B) 41H(A) D‚ 32H(2) 31H(1)
S ‚ +1 44H(D) 43H(C) D ‚ +1 34H(4) 33H(3)
S ‚ +2 46H(F) 45H(E) D ‚ +2 00H 35H(5) 27
S ‚ +3 32H(2) 31H(1) “12345”

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
S ‚ +4 34H(4) 33H(3) ASCII code for 5th character
S ‚ +5 00H 35H(5)
“ABCDEF12345”
ASCII code for 1st character

• A character string stored in S and later indicates data stored in devices from the specified device until
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

"00H" is first detected in byte units.

Cautions
When handling character codes other than ASCII codes, note the following contents:
• The number of characters is handled in byte units (8 bits). Accordingly, in the case of character codes in 29
which 2 bytes express 1 character such as shift JIS codes, the length of 1 character is detected as “2”.
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

• When extracting characters from a character string including character codes in which 2 bytes express 1
character such as shift JIS codes, consider the number of characters to be extracted in units of character
codes for 1 character.
Note that the expected character code is not given if only 1 byte is executed out of a 2-byte character code.
30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

659
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.5 FNC204 – RIGHT / Extracting Character String Data from the Right

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When “00H” is not set within the corresponding device range after a device specified by S (error code:
K6706)
• When “n” exceeds the number of characters specified by S (error code: K6706)
• When the number of devices after a device number specified by D is smaller than the number of
devices required to store extracted “n” characters (that is, when “00H” cannot be stored after all character
strings and the last character) (error code: K6706)
• When “n” is a negative value (error code: K6706)

Program example
In the program example shown below, 4 characters are extracted from the right end of the character string
data stored in R0 and later, and stored to D0 and later when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC204 R0 D0 K4
RIGHTP

END

b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0 b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0
R0 41H(A) 42H(B) D0 45H(E) 30H(0)
R1 31H(1) 32H(2) D1 41H(A) 46H(F)
R2 45H(E) 30H(0) D2 0000H
R3 41H(A) 46H(F) “0EFA”
R4 00H
ASCII code for 4th character
“BA210EFA”
ASCII code for 1st character

660
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.6 FNC205 – LEFT / Extracting Character String Data from the Left

21
26.6 FNC205 – LEFT / Extracting Character String Data from the Left

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction extracts a specified number of characters from the left end of a specified character string.
→ For handling of character strings, refer to Section 5.3.
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
1. Instruction format

FNC 205 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
LEFT P LEFT Continuous ⎯
7 steps
23
Operation
LEFTP Pulse (Single) ⎯
Operation

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Head device number storing a character string
Character string 24
D Head device number storing extracted character string

Others
FNC181-FNC189
n Number of characters to be extracted 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
and System User Digit Specification System User
Special
Index
Con- Real Charac-
Pointer
25
Unit stant Number ter String

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3
26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

661
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.6 FNC205 – LEFT / Extracting Character String Data from the Left

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (LEFT and LEFTP)
“n” characters are extracted from the left end (that is, from the head) of the character string data stored in
S and later and stored to D and later.
If the number of characters specified by “n” is “0”, the NULL code (0000H) is stored to D .
When characters are extracted from a character string, "00H” is automatically added at the end of the
extracted characters.
- When the number of extracted characters is odd, “00H” is stored in the high-order byte of a device
storing the last character.
- When the number of extracted characters is even, “0000H” is stored in the device after the last
character.
Command
input
FNC205 S‚ n
D‚
LEFT

b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0 b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0
ASCII code for 2nd ASCII code for 1st D‚ ASCII code for 2nd ASCII code for 1st
S‚
character character character character
ASCII code for 4th ASCII code for 3rd D ‚ +1 ASCII code for 4th ASCII code for 3rd
S ‚ +1
character character character character

ASCII code for n-1 ASCII code for n-2 ASCII code for n-1 ASCII code for n-2
character character character character
ASCII code for n+1 ASCII code for n 00H ASCII code for n
character character character

00H ASCII code for last

character

In the case of "n = 7" ASCII code for 1st character

b15----------------------b8b7----------------------b0 b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0
S‚ 42H(B) 41H(A) D‚ 42H(B) 41H(A)
S ‚ +1 44H(D) 43H(C) D ‚ +1 44H(D) 43H(C)
S ‚ +2 46H(F) 45H(E) D ‚ +2 46H(F) 45H(E)
S ‚ +3 32H(2) 31H(1) D ‚ +3 00H 31H(1)
S ‚ +4 34H(4) 33H(3) "ABCDEF1"
ASCII code for 7th character
S ‚ +5 00H 35H(5)
"ABCDEF12345"

• A character string stored in S and later indicates data stored in devices from the specified device until
"00H" is first detected in byte units.

Cautions
When handling character codes other than ASCII codes, note the following contents:
• The number of characters is handled in byte units (8 bits). Accordingly, in the case of character codes in
which 2 bytes express 1 character such as shift JIS codes, the length of 1 character is detected as “2”.
• When extracting characters from a character string including character codes in which 2 bytes express 1
character such as shift JIS codes, consider the number of characters to be extracted in units of character
codes for 1 character.
Note that the expected character code is not given if only 1 byte is executed out of a 2-byte character code.

662
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.6 FNC205 – LEFT / Extracting Character String Data from the Left

21
Errors

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When “00H” is not set within the corresponding device range after a device specified by S (error code:
K6706)
22
• When “n” exceeds the number of characters specified by S (error code: K6706)

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
• When the number of devices after a device number specified by D is smaller than the number of
devices required to store extracted “n” characters (that is, when “00H” cannot be stored after all character
strings and the last character) (error code: K6706)
• When “n” is a negative value (error code: K6706)
23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Program example
In the program example shown below, the number of characters which is equivalent to the number stored in
D0 are extracted from the left end of the character string data stored in D100 and later, and stored to R10 and
later when X010 turns ON.
X010
FNC205 D100 R10 D0
24
LEFTP

Others
FNC181-FNC189
END

ASCII code for 1st character

b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0 b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0 25
D100 51H(Q) 53H(S) R10 51H(Q) 53H(S)

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
D101 4EH(N) 4FH(O) R11 4EH(N) 4FH(O)
D102 44H(D) 48H(H) R12 44H(D) 48H(H)
D103 42H(B) 41H(A) R13 0000H
D104 00H “SQONHD”
“SQONHDAB” D0 6 26
ASCII code for 6th character

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

663
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.7 FNC206 – MIDR / Random Selection of Character Strings

26.7 FNC206 – MIDR / Random Selection of Character Strings

Outline
This instruction extracts a specified number of characters from arbitrary positions of a specified character
string.
→ For handling of character strings, refer to Section 5.3.

1. Instruction format

FNC 206 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
MIDR P MIDR Continuous ⎯
7 steps Operation
MIDRP Pulse (Single) ⎯
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Head device number storing a character string
Character string
D Head device number storing extracted character string
Head device number specifying the head position and number of characters to be
extracted
S2 16-bit binary
S2 : Head character position
S2 +1 : Number of characters

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

664
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.7 FNC206 – MIDR / Random Selection of Character Strings

21
Explanation of function and operation

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
1. 16-bit operation (MIDR and MIDRP)
" S2 +1" characters are extracted leftward from the position specified by S2 of the character string data
stored in S1 and later, and stored to D and later.
When characters are extracted from a character string, "00H" is automatically added at the end of the 22
extracted characters.

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
- When the number of extracted characters specified by S2 +1 is odd, "00H" is stored in the high-order
byte of a device storing the last character.
- When the number of extracted characters specified by S2 +1 is even, "0000H" is stored in the device
after the last character.
Command
23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
input
FNC206 S1 ‚ D‚ S2 ‚
MIDR

Target character string (extraction source) Extracted character string

b15-----------------b8b7-------------------b0
1st character
b15------------------b8b7-------------------b0 24
S1 ‚ 42H(B) 41H(A) D‚ 46H(F) 45H(E)

Others
FNC181-FNC189
S1 ‚ +1 44H(D) 43H(C) D ‚ +1 48H(H) 47H(G)
S1 ‚ +2 46H(F) 45H(E) D ‚ +2 00H 49H(I)
S1 ‚ +3 48H(H) 47H(G) 5th character "EFGHI"
S1 ‚ +4 4AH(J) 49H(I) S2 ‚ 25
S1 ‚ +5 00H 4BH(K)

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
5 characters starting from 5th character
"ABCDEFGHIJK"
S2 ‚ +1
S2 ‚ 5
S2 ‚ +1 5

• A character string stored in S1 and later indicates data stored in devices from the specified device until 26
“00H” is first detected in units of byte.

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
• When the number of characters to be extracted specified by S2 +1 is “0”, the extraction processing is
not executed.
• When the number of characters to be extracted specified by S2 +1 is “-1”, the entire character string
stored in S1 and later is stored to D and later. 27
b15-----------------b8 b7-------------------b0 b15-----------------b8b7-------------------b0

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
S1 ‚ 42H(B) 41H(A) D‚ 46H(F) 45H(E)
S1 ‚ +1 44H(D) 43H(C) D ‚ +1 48H(H) 47H(G)
S1 ‚ +2 46H(F) 45H(E) D ‚ +2 4AH(J) 49H(I)
S1 ‚ +3 48H(H) 47H(G) D ‚ +3 00H
“FEGHIJK”
4BH(K)
28
S1 ‚ +4 4AH(J) 49H(I)
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

5th character S2 ‚
S1 ‚ +5 00H 4BH(K)
“ABCDEFGHIJK”
S2 ‚ 5
S2 ‚ +1 -1
29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

665
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.7 FNC206 – MIDR / Random Selection of Character Strings

Cautions
When handling character codes other than ASCII codes, note the following contents:
• The number of characters is handled in byte units (8 bits). Accordingly, in the case of character codes in
which 2 bytes express 1 character such as shift JIS code, the length of 1 character is regarded as 2
characters.
• When extracting characters from a character string including character codes in which 2 bytes express 1
character such as shift JIS codes, consider the number of characters to be extracted in units of character
codes for 1 character.
Note that the expected character code is not given if only 1 byte is executed out of a 2-byte character code.

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When “00H” is not set within the corresponding device range after a device specified by S1 (error code:
K6706)
• When the value specified by S2 +1 exceeds the number of characters specified by S1 (error code:
K6706)
• When the number of characters specified by S2 +1 from the position specified by D exceeds the
device range specified by D (error code: K6706)
• When the number of devices after a device number specified by D is smaller than the number of
devices required to store extracted characters as many as the number specified by S2 +1 (that is, when
“00H” cannot be stored after all character strings and the last character) (error code: K6706)
• When S2 specifies a negative value (error code: K6706)
• When S2 +1 specifies “-2” or less (error code: K6706)
• When S2 +1 specifies a number larger than the number of characters specified by S1
(error code: K6706)

Program example
In the program example shown below, four characters are extracted from the 3rd character from the left end
of the character string data stored in D10 and later, and then stored to D0 and later when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC206 D10 D0 R0
MIDRP

END

3rd character
b15---------------------b8 b7-----------------------b0 b15----------------------b8b7-----------------------b0
D10 41H(A) 42H(B) D0 31H(1) 32H(2)
D11 31H(1) 32H(2) D1 46H(E) 33H(3)
D12 46H(E) 33H(3) D2 0000H
D13 00H 45H(D) “213E”
“BA213ED”
Four characters
starting from 3rd character Extracted characters

R0 3
R1 4

666
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.8 FNC207 – MIDW / Random Replacement of Character Strings

21
26.8 FNC207 – MIDW / Random Replacement of Character Strings

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction replaces the characters in arbitrary positions inside designated character string with a
specified character string.
22
→ For handling of character strings, refer to Section 5.3.

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
1. Instruction format

FNC 207 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
MIDW P 7 steps
MIDW
MIDWP
Continuous
Operation
⎯ 23
Pulse (Single) ⎯

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Head device number storing a character string used in overwriting
24
Character string

Others
FNC181-FNC189
D Head device number storing character string to be overwritten
Head device number specifying the head position and number of characters to be
overwritten
S2 16-bit binary
S2 : Head character position to be overwritten
S2 +1 : Number of characters to be overwritten 25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P 26
S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

667
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.8 FNC207 – MIDW / Random Replacement of Character Strings

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (MIDW and MIDWP)
“ S2 +1” characters are extracted from the left end (that is, the head) of the character string data stored in
S1 and later, and stored to the position specified by S2 and later of the character string data stored in
D and later.
Command
input
FNC207 S1 ‚ D‚ S2 ‚
MIDW
Before execution
b15---------------b8b7-----------------b0 b15---------------b8b7-----------------b0
1st 1st
S1 ‚ 31H(1) 30H(0) character D‚ 42H(B) 41H(A) character
3rd
S1 ‚ +1 33H(3) 32H(2) D ‚ +1 44H(D) 43H(C) character
S1 ‚ +2 35H(5) 34H(4) D ‚ +2 46H(F) 45H(E)
S1 ‚ +3 37H(7) 36H(6) D ‚ +3 48H(H) 47H(G)
S1 ‚ +4 00H 38H(8) D ‚ +4 00H 49H(I)
“012345678” “ABCDEFGHI”
6th character
After execution
Position from the left end in the
S2 ‚ 3 character string stored in D ‚ and later b15---------------b8b7-----------------b0
S2 ‚ +1 6 Number of characters from the left end D‚ 42H(B) 41H(A)
in the character string stored in S1 ‚
3rd
and later D ‚ +1 31H(1) 30H(0) character
D ‚ +2 33H(3) 32H(2)
D ‚ +3 35H(5) 34H(4)
D ‚ +4 00H 49H(I)
“AB012345I”
Six characters starting from 3rd
character (overwritten character string)

• The character string stored in S1 and later or D and later indicates data stored in devices from the
specified device until “00H” is first detected in byte units.
• When the number of characters to be overwritten specified by S2 +1 is “0”, the overwriting processing is
not executed.
• When the number of characters to be overwritten specified by S2 +1 exceeds the last character of the
character string stored in D and later, data is stored up to the last character.
Before execution
b15---------------b8b7-----------------b0 b15---------------b8b7-----------------b0
S1 ‚ 31H(1) 30H(0) 1st D‚ 42H(B) 41H(A)
character
S1 ‚ +1 33H(3) 32H(2) D ‚ +1 44H(D) 43H(C)
5th
S1 ‚ +2 35H(5) 34H(4) D ‚ +2 46H(F) 45H(E) character
S1 ‚ +3 37H(7) 36H(6) D ‚ +3 48H(H) 47H(G)
S1 ‚ +4 00H 38H(8) D ‚ +4 00H 49H(I)
“012345678” “ABCDEFGHI”
8th character
After execution
Position from the left end in the
S2 ‚ 5 character string stored in D ‚ and later b15---------------b8b7-----------------b0
S2 ‚ +1 8 Number of characters from the left end D‚ 42H(B) 41H(A)
in the character string stored in S1 ‚
and later D ‚ +1 44H(D) 43H(C)
5th
D ‚ +2 31H(1) 30H(0) character
D ‚ +3 33H(3) 32H(2)
D ‚ +4 00H 34H(4)
“ABCD01234”
Characters from the 5th character to the last
character are overwritten. Excessive
characters, “35H (5)” to “37H (7)” , are not
stored.

668
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.8 FNC207 – MIDW / Random Replacement of Character Strings

21
• When S2 +1 (the number of characters to be extracted) is “-1”, the entire character string stored in

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
S1 and later is stored to D and later.
2nd
character Before execution
b15---------------b8b7-----------------b0
b15---------------b8b7-----------------b0
1st
42H(B) 41H(A)
1st
character 22
S1 ‚ 31H(1) 30H(0)

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
character D ‚ +1 44H(D) 43H(C)
S1 ‚ +1 33H(3) 32H(2) D ‚ +2 46H(F) 45H(E)
S1 ‚ +2 35H(5) 34H(4) D ‚ +3 48H(H) 47H(G)
S1 ‚ +3 00H D ‚ +4 4AH(J) 49H(I)
Last character
“012345” D ‚ +5 00H 4BH(K) 23
Position from the left end in the “ABCDEFGHIJK”

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
S2 ‚ 2 character string stored in D ‚ and later 2nd
Number of characters from the left end character After execution
S2 ‚ +1 -1
in the character string stored in S1 ‚ b15---------------b8b7-----------------b0
and later
30H(0) 41H(A)
D ‚ +1 32H(2) 31H(1)
D ‚ +2 34H(4) 33H(3)
24

Others
FNC181-FNC189
D ‚ +3 48H(H) 35H(5)
D ‚ +4 4AH(J) 49H(I)
D ‚ +5 00H 4BH(K)
“A012345HIJK”
Six characters from the 2nd 25
character are overwritten.

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Cautions
This instruction can handle character codes other than ASCII codes, but please note the following:
• The number of characters is handled in byte units (8 bits). Accordingly, in the case of character codes in 26
which 2 bytes express 1 character such as shift JIS code, the length of 1 character is regarded as 2

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
characters.
• When overwriting a character string including character codes in which 2 bytes express 1 character such
as shift JIS codes, consider the number of characters to be extracted in units of character codes for 1
character.
Note that the expected character code is not given if only 1 byte is overwritten out of a 2-byte character 27
code.

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When “00H” is not set within the corresponding device range after a device specified by S1 or D 28
(error code: K6706)
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

• When the value specified by S2 exceeds the number of characters of the character string stored in
D and later (error code: K6706)
• When the number of characters specified by S2 +1 exceeds the number of characters specified by
S1 (error code: K6706) 29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

• When S2 specifies a negative value (error code: K6706)

• When S2 +1 specifies “-2” or less (error code: K6706)

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

669
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.8 FNC207 – MIDW / Random Replacement of Character Strings

Program example
In the program example shown below, 4 characters are extracted from the character string data stored in D0
and later, and stored to the 3rd character (from the left end) and later for the character string data stored in
D100 and later when X010 turns ON.
X010
FNC207 D0 D100 R0
MIDWP

END

4th
character Before execution
b15---------------b8b7-----------------b0 b15---------------b8b7-----------------b0
1st 1st
D0 31H(1) 32H(2) D100 53H(S) 55H(U) character
character
3rd
D1 45H(E) 46H(F) D101 59H(Y) 43H(C) character
D2 33H(3) 30H(0) D102 31H(1) 5AH(Z)
D3 00H D103 42H(B) 30H(0)
“21FE03” D104 0000H
R0 3 “USCYZ10B”
R1 4
After execution
b15---------------b8b7-----------------b0
D100 53H(S) 55H(U)
3rd
D101 31H(1) 32H(2) character
D102 45H(E) 46H(F)
D103 42H(B) 30H(0)
D104 0000H
“US21FE0B”

The 1st to 4th characters are stored.

670
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.9 FNC208 – INSTR / Character string search

21
26.9 FNC208 – INSTR / Character string search

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction searches a specified character string within another character string.
22
1. Instruction format

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
FNC 208 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
INSTR P 9 steps
INSTR Continuous ⎯
Operation
INSTRP Pulse (Single) ⎯
Operation
23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Head device number storing a character string Character string

S2 Head device number storing a character string to be searched Character string 24

Head device number storing search result 16-bit binary

Others
FNC181-FNC189
D
n Search start position 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices

Oper-
Bit Devices Word Devices
Special Con- Real
Others
Charac-
25
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
n 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (INSTR and INSTRP)
27
1) The character string stored in S1 and higher is searched for within the character string S2 and

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
higher. The search begins at the "n"th character from the left end (head character) of S2 and the
search result is stored in D . The search result provides the first matching character (located from the
left end (head character)) in S2 .
Command
input FNC208 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ n
28
INSTR
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

Character string to be searched S2‚ Character string S1‚

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S2‚ +0 42H(B) 41H(A) Search is started from S1‚ +0 46H(F) 45H(E)
+1 44H(D) 43H(C) the 3rd character (n = 3). +1 48H(H) 47H(G)
+2 46H(F) 45H(E) Fifth character from +2 00H 29
+3 48H(H) 47H(G) the head character
"EFGH"
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

+4 4AH(J) 49H(I) The position where the

first detected character
+5 00H 4BH(K) is located from the
"ABCDEFGHIJK" head character in the
D‚ 5 character string data
stored in S2‚ .
30
2) When the searched character string is not detected, "0" is stored in D .
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

3) When the search start position "n" is a negative number or "0", search processing is not executed.

671
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.9 FNC208 – INSTR / Character string search

4) A character string can be directly specified in the character string S1 .

Character string to be searched S2‚ Character string S1‚
b15 b8 b7 b0 "AB"
S2‚ +0 32H(2) 31H(1) Search is started from
+1 34H(4) 33H(3) the 3rd character (n = 3).
+2 42H(B) 41H(A) Fifth character from D100 5
+3 36H(6) 35H(5) the head character
+4 42H(B) 41H(A)
+5 00H
"1234AB56AB"

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When the search start position "n" exceeds the number of characters stored in S2 (error code: K6706)
• When "00H (NULL)" is not located within the corresponding device range starting from S1
(error code: K6706)
• When "00H (NULL)" is not located within the corresponding device range starting from S2
(error code: K6706)

Program example
1) In the program example below, the character string "CI23" (D0 and later) is searched from the 5th
character from the left end (head character) of the character string "CI2312CIM" (R0 and later) when
X000 is set to ON. The search result is stored in D100
X000
FNC208 D0 R0 D100 K5
INSTR

END

Character string to be searched R0 Character string D0

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
R0 These characters are not D0
49H(I) 43H(C) searched because the 49H(I) 43H(C)
R1 33H(3) 32H(2) search start position is "5". D1 33H(3) 32H(2)
R2 32H(2) 31H(1) The search source D2 00H
R3 49H(I) 43H(C) character string is searched
from the 5th character. "CI23"
R4 00H 4DH(M)
"CI2312CIM"
D100 0
Because the searched
character string is not
detected, "0" is stored.

672
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.10 FNC209 – $MOV / Character String Transfer

21
26.10 FNC209 – $MOV / Character String Transfer

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction transfers character string data.
→ For handling of character strings, refer to Section 5.3.
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
1. Instruction format

FNC 209 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
$MOV P 5 steps
$MOV Continuous ⎯
23
Operation
$MOVP Pulse (Single) ⎯
Operation

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Directly specified character string (up to 32 characters) or head device number
S
storing character string which is handled as the transfer source Character string
24

Others
FNC181-FNC189
D Head device number storing transferred character string

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
and System User Digit Specification System User
Special
Unit
Index
Con- Real Charac-
stant Number ter String
Pointer 25
Type

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation 26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
1. 16-bit operation ($MOV and $MOVP)
The character string data stored in the device specified by S and later is transferred to the device
specified by D and later.
From the device number specified by S
order byte are transferred at one time.
to a device after that which stores “00H” in its high-order or low-
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Command
input
FNC209 S‚ D‚
$MOV

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

S‚ 2nd character 1st character D‚ 2nd character 1st character

S ‚ +1 4th character 3rd character D ‚ +1 4th character 3rd character

S ‚ +2 6th character 5th character D ‚ +2 6th character 5th character

29
00H “n”th character 00H “n”th character
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

00H indicates the end of

character string.

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

673
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.10 FNC209 – $MOV / Character String Transfer

Even if the device range “ S to S +n” storing the transfer source character string data overlaps the
device range “ D to D +n/2” storing the transferred character string data, transfer is executed.
For example, when a character string stored in D10 to D13 is transferred to D11 to D14, the transfer is
executed as shown below:
Command
input
FNC209 D10 D11
$MOV

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
D10 32H(2) 31H(1) D10 32H(2) 31H(1) ... It is same as the
character string
D11 34H(4) 33H(3) D11 32H(2) 31H(1) before transfer.
D12 36H(6) 35H(5) D12 34H(4) 33H(3)

D13 00H D13 36H(6) 35H(5)

D14 D14 0000H

Caution
When “00H” is stored in the low-order byte of S +n, “00H” is stored to both the high-order byte and low-
order byte of D +n.
Command
input
FNC209 S‚ D‚
$MOV

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
S‚ 42H(B) 41H(A) D‚ 42H(B) 41H(A)

S ‚ +1 44H(D) 43H(C) D ‚ +1 44H(D) 43H(C)

S ‚ +2 45H(E) 00H D ‚ +2 00H 00H

The high-order byte is “00H” is automatically

not transferred. stored in the high-order
byte.

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When “00H” does not exist in the range specified from device S (error code: K6706)
• When the specified character string cannot be stored in devices from the device specified by D to the
last device (error code: K6706)

674
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 26 Character String Control – FNC200 to FNC209
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 26.10 FNC209 – $MOV / Character String Transfer

21
Program example

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
In the program example shown below, character string data stored in D10 to D12 is transferred to D20
through D22.
X000
FNC209 D10 D20
$MOV 22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
END

b15 b8 b7 b0 b15 b8 b7 b0
D10 4DH(M) 2AH(*) D20 4DH(M) 2AH(*) 23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
D11 45H(E) 45H(E) D21 45H(E) 45H(E)

D12 00H D22 0000H

24

Others
FNC181-FNC189
25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

675
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

27. Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219

FNC210 to FNC219 provide instructions for reading last-in data and controlling leftward/rightward shift
instructions with carry.

FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

Section
210 FDEL FDEL S D n Deleting Data from Tables
27.1

Section
211 FINS FINS S D n Inserting Data to Tables
27.2

Section
212 POP POP S D n Shift Last Data Read [FILO Control]
27.3

16-bit data n Section

213 SFR SFR D n Bit Shift Right with Carry 27.4

16-bit data n Section

214 SFL SFL D n Bit Shift Left with Carry 27.5

215 − −

216 − −

217 − −

218 − −

219 − −

676
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.1 FNC210 – FDEL / Deleting Data from Tables

21
27.1 FNC210 – FDEL / Deleting Data from Tables

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction deletes an arbitrary data from a data table.
22
1. Instruction format

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
FNC 210 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
FDEL P 7 steps
FDEL Continuous ⎯
Operation
FDELP Pulse (Single) ⎯
Operation
23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Device number storing deleted data

D Head device number in data table 16-bit binary 24

n Position of deleted data in table

Others
FNC181-FNC189
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and
Type
System User Digit Specification System User
Unit
Index
stant Number ter String
Pointer
25
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3
26
Explanation of function and operation

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
1. 16-bit operation (FDEL and FDELP)
"n"th data is deleted from a data table (stored in D and later), and the deleted data is stored in S .
"n+1"th data and later in the data table are shifted forward one by one, and the number of stored data is
subtracted by "−1". 27
Command

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
input FNC210 S‚ D‚ n
FDELP

Data table Data table

Number of -1 Number of
D‚ +0 5 D‚ +0 4
stored data
+1 5432
When "n" is "2"
+1 5432
stored data 28
+2 3333 +2 4444 Data table
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

Device range used in Data table +3 4444 +3 1234 range

data table (having D‚
+4 1234 +4 5678
data starting
+5 5678 +5 0 "0" is stored.
from D‚ +1)
...

...

...

...

0
Deleted data 29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

S‚ 3333

Caution
• The device range used in a data table should be controlled by the user.
The data table has D data starting from the next device ( D +1) after D indicating the number of 30
stored data.
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

→ Refer to the program example.

677
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.1 FNC210 – FDEL / Deleting Data from Tables

Related instruction
Instruction Description
FINS(FNC211) Inserts data into an arbitrary position in a data table.

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When the table position "n" of the data to be deleted exceeds the amount of data stored (error code:
K6706)
• When the value "n" exceeds the device range of the data table D (error code: K6706)
• When the FNC210 instruction is executed under the condition "n ≤ 0" (error code: K6706)
• When the amount of data stored specified in D is "0" (error code: K6706)
• When the data table range exceeds the corresponding device range (error code: K6706)

Program example
In the program shown below, the 2nd data entry is deleted from the data table stored in D100 to D105, and
the deleted data is stored in D0.
When the amount of data stored is "0", however, the FDEL (FNC210) instruction is not executed. (The device
range used in the data table is D100 to D107).
X010
FNC234 K0 D100 FNC237 D100 K7 FNC210 D0 D100 K2
AND< AND<= FDELP

END

X010:ON

Data table Data table

Amount of -1 Amount of
D100 5 D100 4
data stored data stored
D101 -123 D101 -123
Data D102 4444 D102 3210 Data table
Device range used in table D103 3210 D103 1234 range
data table range D104 1234 D104 5432
D105 5432 D105 0
D106 0 D106 0
D107 0 D107 0

D0 4444 Deleted data

678
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.2 FNC211 – FINS / Inserting Data to Tables

21
27.2 FNC211 – FINS / Inserting Data to Tables

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction inserts data into an arbitrary position in a data table.
22
1. Instruction format

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
FNC 211 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
FINS P 7 steps
FINS Continuous ⎯
Operation
FINSP Pulse (Single) ⎯
Operation
23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Device number storing inserted data

D Head device number in data table 16-bit binary 24

n Data insertion position in table

Others
FNC181-FNC189
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and
Type
System User Digit Specification System User
Unit
Index
stant Number ter String
Pointer
25
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3
26
Explanation of function and operation

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
1. 16-bit operation (FINS and FINSP)
16-bit data S is inserted in "n"th position in a data table (stored in D and later).
"n"th data and later in the data table are shifted backward one by one, and the number of stored data is added
by "1". 27
Command

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
input FNC211 S‚ D‚ n
FINSP

Data table Data table

Number of +1
D‚ +0 3 D‚ +0 4
stored data
+1 5432 +1 5432 28
Data table
+2 1234 +2 4444 Data table
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

range
Device range used in +3 -123 +3 1234 range
data table +4 0 +4 -123
+5 0 +5 0
...

...

...

...

0 0
29
When "n" is "2"
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

S‚ 4444

Caution
• The device range used in a data table should be controlled by the user.
The data table has D data starting from the next device ( D +1) after D indicating the number of
30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

stored data.
→ Refer to the program example.

679
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.2 FNC211 – FINS / Inserting Data to Tables

Related instruction
Instruction Description
FDEL(FNC210) Deletes an arbitrary data entry from a data table.

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When the table position "n" for data insertion exceeds the amount of stored data plus 1(error code: K6706)
• When the value "n" exceeds the device range of the data table D (error code: K6706)
• When FNC211 instruction is executed under the condition "n ≤ 0" (error code: K6706)
• When the data table range exceeds the corresponding device range (error code: K6706)

Program example
In the program shown below, data stored in D100 is inserted into the 3rd position of the data table stored in
D0 to D4.
When the amount of data stored exceeds "7", however, the FINS (FNC211) instruction is not executed. (The
device range used in the data table is D0 to D7).
X010
FNC237 K0 D0 FNC234 D0 K7 FNC211 D100 D0 K3
AND<= AND< FINSP

END

X010:ON

Amount of Data table Data table

+1 Amount of
data stored D0 4 D0 5
data stored
D1 1234 D1 1234
Data D2 4444 D2 4444
table Data table
Device range used in range D3 -123 D3 -3210
range
data table D4 5000 D4 -123
D5 0 D5 5000
D6 0 D6 0
D7 0 D7 0

D100 -3210 When "n" is "3"

680
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.3 FNC212 – POP / Shift Last Data Read [FILO Control]

21
27.3 FNC212 – POP / Shift Last Data Read [FILO Control]

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction reads the last data written by shift write (SFWR) instruction for FILO control.
→ For SFWR (FNC 38) instruction, refer to Section 11.9.
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
1. Instruction format

FNC 212 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
POP P 7 steps
POP Continuous ⎯
23
Operation
POPP Pulse (Single) ⎯
Operation

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Head device number storing first-in data (including pointer data)
24
D Device number storing last-out data

Others
FNC181-FNC189
16-bit binary
Length of data array
n (Add "1" because pointer data is also included.)
2 ≤ n ≤ 512

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
n 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (POP and POPP)
27
Command

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
input
FNC212 S‚ D‚ n
POPP

Data for FILO control

Description
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

S Pointer data (amount of data stored)

S +1
S +2
S +3
Data area 29
...

(First-in data written by shift write (SFWR) instruction)

Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

S +n-3
S +n-2
S +n-1

• Every time the instruction is executed for the word devices S to S +n-1, a device “ S + Pointer 30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

data S ” is read to D . (The last data entry written by the shift write (SFWR) instruction for first-in
first-out control is read to D .) Specify “n” in the range from “2” to “512”.

681
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.3 FNC212 – POP / Shift Last Data Read [FILO Control]

• Subtract “1” from the value of the pointer data S .

Data area
Pointer
S ‚ +n-1 S ‚ +n-2 S ‚ +6 S ‚ +5 S ‚ +4 S ‚ +3 S ‚ +2 S ‚ +1 S‚

In the case of K4

No data area
Pointer
S ‚ +n-1 S ‚ +n-2 S ‚ +6 S ‚ +5 S ‚ +4 S ‚ +3 S ‚ +2 S ‚ +1 S‚ D‚

K4→K3

Related device
→ For the zero flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Device Name Description
M8020 Zero flag Turns ON when the instruction is executed while the pointer S is “0”.

Related instructions
Instruction Description
SFWR(FNC 38) Shift write [for FIFO/FILO control]
SFRD(FNC 39) Shift read [for FIFO control]

Cautions
• When this instruction is programmed in the continuous operation type, the instruction is executed in every
operation cycle. As a result, an expected operation may not be achieved.
Usually, program this instruction in the “pulse operation type”, or let this instruction be executed by a
“pulsed command contact”.
• When the current value of the pointer S is “0”, the zero flag M8020 turns ON and the instruction is not
executed.
Check in advance using a comparison instruction whether the current value of S satisfies “1 ≤ S ≤
n-1”, and then execute this instruction.
• When the current value of the pointer S is “1”, “0” is written to S and the zero flag M8020 turns
ON.

Error
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When S is larger than “n-1” (error code: K6706)
• When S is smaller than “0” (error code: K6706)

682
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.3 FNC212 – POP / Shift Last Data Read [FILO Control]

21
Program example

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Among values stored in D20 input first to D101 to D106, the last value input is stored to D10, and “1” is
subtracted from the number of stored data (pointer D100) every time X000 turns ON.
First-in command
FNC 38 D20 D100 K7
SFWR 22
Last-in read command

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
X000 FNC212 D100 D10 K7
POP

END
23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
When the first-in data are as shown in the table below
Pointer D100 K3
D101 H1234
D102 H5678

Data
D103 HABCD 24
D104 H0000

Others
FNC181-FNC189
D105 H0000
D106 H0000

D20
25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
D100: D100: D100:
First-in command K2→K3 K1→K2 K0→K1

D106 D105 D104 D103 D102 D101 D100

26
H0000 H0000 H0000 HABCD H5678 H1234 K3

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
Last-in read command
X000: OFF→ON
D106 D105 D104 D103 D102 D101 D100 D10

H0000 H0000 H0000 HABCD H5678 H1234 K3→K2 HABCD 27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Do not change

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

683
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.4 FNC213 – SFR / Bit Shift Right with Carry

27.4 FNC213 – SFR / Bit Shift Right with Carry

Outline
This instruction shifts 16 bits stored in a word device rightward by “n” bits.

1. Instruction format

FNC 213 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
SFR P 5 steps
SFR Continuous ⎯
Operation
SFRP Pulse (Single) ⎯
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
D Device number storing data to be shifted
16-bit binary
n Number of times of shift (0 ≤ n ≤ 15)

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (SFR and SFRP)
Command
input
FNC213 D‚ n
SFRP

1) 16 bits stored in a word device D are shifted rightward by “n” bits.

Specify a value in the range from “0” to “15” as “n”.
If “16” or larger value is specified as “n”, 16 bits are shifted rightward by the remainder of “n/16”.
For example, when “n” is set to “18”, 16 bits are shifted rightward by 2 bits (18/16 = 1 ... 2).
2) The ON (1)/OFF (0) status of the “n”th bit (bit “n-1”) in the word device D is transferred to the carry
flag M8022.
3) “0” is set to “n” bits from the most significant bit.
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
D‚ 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0

In the case of “n = 6” Carry flag

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 M8022
D‚ 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1

Become “0”.

684
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.4 FNC213 – SFR / Bit Shift Right with Carry

21
When a bit device is specified by digit specification

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
4°K… bits are shifted according to the data bit specification.
Command
input
FNC213 K3M0 K4
SFRP
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
M11 M8 M7 M4 M3 M0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

Carry flag 23
M8022

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
M11 M8 M7 M4 M3 M0
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Become “0”.

24
Related device

Others
FNC181-FNC189
→ For the carry flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Device Name Description
M8022 Carry flag Shifts the ON/OFF status of bit “n-1”.

Error
25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When a negative value is set to “n” (error code: K6706)

Program example 26
In the program example shown below, the contents of Y010 to Y023 are shifted rightward by the number of

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
bits specified by D0 when X020 turns ON.
X020
FNC213 K3Y010 D0
SFRP

END
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Y23 Y20 Y17 Y14 Y13 Y10
1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
28
D0
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

4
Carry flag
Y23 Y20 Y17 Y14 Y13 Y10 M8022
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Become “0”. 29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

685
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.5 FNC214 – SFL / Bit Shift Left with Carry

27.5 FNC214 – SFL / Bit Shift Left with Carry

Outline
This instruction shifts 16 bits stored in a word device leftward by “n” bits.

1. Instruction format

FNC 214 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition
SFL P 5 steps
SFL Continuous ⎯
Operation
SFLP Pulse (Single) ⎯
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
D Device number storing data to be shifted
16-bit binary
n Number of times of shift (0 ≤ n ≤ 15)

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
n 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (SFL and SFLP)
Command
input
FNC214 D‚ n
SFLP

1) 16 bits stored in a word device D are shifted leftward by “n” bits.

Specify a value in the range from “0” to “15” as “n”.
If “16” or larger value is specified as “n”, 16 bits are shifted leftward by the remainder of “n/16”.
For example, when “n” is set to “18”, 16 bits are shifted leftward by 2 bits (18/16 = 1 ... 2).
2) The ON (1)/OFF (0) status of the “n+1”th bit (bit “n”) in the word device D is transferred to the carry
flag M8022.
3) “0” is set to “n” bits from the least significant bit.

b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

D‚ 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

Carry flag In the case of “n = 8”

M8022 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
1 D‚ 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Become “0”.

686
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 27 Data Operation 3 – FNC210 to FNC219
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 27.5 FNC214 – SFL / Bit Shift Left with Carry

21
When a bit device is specified by digit specification

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
4°K… bits are shifted according to the data of bit specification.
Command
input
FNC214 K2M10 K3
SFL
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
M17 M14M13 M10
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

Carry flag
23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
M8022 M17 M14M13 M12 M10
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

Become “0”.

24
Related device

Others
FNC181-FNC189
→ For the carry flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Device Name Description
M8022 Carry flag Shifts the ON/OFF status of bit “n”.

Error
25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When a negative value is set to “n” (error code: K6706)

Program example 26
In the program example shown below, the contents of Y010 to Y017 are shifted leftward by the number of bits

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
specified by D0 when X020 turns ON.
X020
FNC214 K2Y10 D0
SFLP

END
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
Y17 Y14 Y13 Y10
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

3 D0
Carry flag
M8022 Y17 Y14 Y13 Y12 Y10
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

Become “0”. 29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

687
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

28. Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249

FNC220 to FNC249 provide data comparison instructions which can be handled as contact symbols in
programming such as LD, AND and OR.

FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

220 − −

221 − −

222 − −

223 − −

Section
224 LD= LD= S1 S2 Load Compare S1 = S2
28.1

Section
225 LD> LD> S1 S2 Load Compare S1 > S2
28.1

Section
226 LD< LD< S1 S2 Load Compare S1 < S2
28.1

227 − −

Section
228 LD<> LD<> S1 S2 Load Compare S1 ≠ S2
28.1

Section
229 LD<= LD<= S1 S2 Load Compare S1 <= S2
28.1

Section
230 LD>= LD>= S1 S2 Load Compare S1 >= S2
28.1

231 − −

Section
232 AND= AND= S1 S2 AND Compare S1 = S2
28.2

Section
233 AND> AND> S1 S2 AND Compare S1 > S2
28.2

Section
234 AND< AND< S1 S2 AND Compare S1 < S2
28.2

235 − −

Section
236 AND<> AND<> S1 S2 AND Compare S1 ≠ S2
28.2

Section
237 AND<= AND<= S1 S2 AND Compare S1 <= S2
28.2

Section
238 AND>= AND>= S1 S2 AND Compare S1 >= S2
28.2

688
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

21
FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
239 − −

240 OR= OR Compare S1 = S2

Section
28.3
22
OR= S1 S2

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
Section
241 OR> OR Compare S1 > S2
28.3
OR> S1 S2

23
Section
242 OR<

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
OR Compare S1 < S2
28.3
OR< S1 S2

243 − −

24
Section

Others
FNC181-FNC189
244 OR<> OR Compare S1 ≠ S2
28.3
OR<> S1 S2

Section
245 OR<= OR Compare S1 <= S2
28.3
OR<= S1 S2
25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Section
246 OR>= OR Compare S1 >= S2
OR>= S1 S2 28.3

247 − −
26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
248 − −

249 − −

27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

689
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.1 FNC224~230 – LD =, >, <, <>, <=, >= / Data Comparison

28.1 FNC224~230 – LD =, >, <, <>, <=, >= / Data Comparison

Outline
These instructions compare numeric values, and set a contact to ON when the condition agrees so that an
operation is started.

1. Instruction format

FNC 224 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D LD= 5 steps LD=

Continuous
9 steps LDD= Continuous
Operation Operation

FNC 225 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D LD> 5 steps LD>

Continuous
9 steps LDD> Continuous
Operation Operation

FNC 226 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D LD< 5 steps LD<

Continuous
9 steps LDD< Continuous
Operation Operation

FNC 228 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D LD<> 5 steps LD<>

Continuous
9 steps LDD<> Continuous
Operation Operation

FNC 229 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D LD<= 5 steps LD<=

Continuous
9 steps LDD<= Continuous
Operation Operation

FNC 230 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D LD>= 5 steps LD>=

Continuous
9 steps LDD>= Continuous
Operation Operation

2. Set data (common among FNC224 to FNC230)

Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Device number storing comparison data 16- or 32-bit binary

S2 Device number storing comparison data 16- or 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices (common among FNC224 to FNC230)

Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

690
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.1 FNC224~230 – LD =, >, <, <>, <=, >= / Data Comparison

21
Explanation of function and operation

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
FNC224 to FNC230 are data comparison instructions connected to bus lines.
The contents of S1 are compared with the contents of S2 in the binary format, and a contact becomes
conductive (ON) or non-conductive (OFF) depending on the comparison result.

FNC No. 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction ON condition OFF condition 22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
224 LD= LDD= S1 = S2 S1 ≠ S2
225 LD> LDD> S1 > S2 S1 <= S2
226 LD< LDD< S1 < S2 S1 >= S2
228 LD<> LDD<> S1 ≠ S2 S1 = S2
23
229 LD<= LDD<= S1 <= S2 S1 > S2

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
230 LD>= LDD>= S1 >= S2 S1 < S2

Cautions
1. Negative value 24

Others
FNC181-FNC189
When the most significant bit is "1" in the data stored in S1 or S2 , it is regarded as a negative value in
comparison.
• In the 16-bit operation: bit 15
• In the 32-bit operation: bit 31

2. When using 32-bit counters (including 32-bit high speed counters)

25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Make sure to execute the 32-bit operation (such as "LDD=", "LDD>" and "LDD<") when comparing 32-bit
counters (C200 to C255).
If a 32-bit counter is specified in the 16-bit operation (such as "LD=", "LD>" and "LD<"), a program error or
operation error will occur.

3. Programming of data comparison instructions 26

When programming in GX Developer, symbols "≤" and "≥" cannot be input.

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
Separate "≤" into "<" and "=", and separate "≥" into ">" and "=" in input.
The input procedure is described below:

Operating procedure
a) Display the circuit program edit window, and put the cursor in a position where a data comparison
instruction is to be used.
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
b) Input "Instruction" → "space" → "value or device" → "space" → "value or device".
For an input example, refer to "Instruction input window in GX Developer" shown below.
c) Click the [OK] button.
d) Input other contacts and coil drive units consecutively.

Instruction input window in GX Developer 28

Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

<Input example for 16-bit operation>

29
<Input example for 32-bit operation>
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

691
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.1 FNC224~230 – LD =, >, <, <>, <=, >= / Data Comparison

Program example
S1 ‚ S2 ‚
FNC224 When the current value of the counter C10 is "200", Y010
K200 C10 Y10
LD= is driven.

X001
FNC225 D200 K-30 Y11 When the contents of D200 are "-29" or more and X001 is
SET
LD> ON, Y011 is set.

FNC225 When the contents of the counter C200 are less than
K678493 C200 M50
LDD> "K678,493" or when M3 turns ON, M50 is driven.

M3

692
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.2 FNC232~238 – AND=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison

21
28.2 FNC232~238 – AND=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
These instructions compare numeric values, and set a contact to ON when the condition agrees.
22
1. Instruction format

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
FNC 232 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D AND= 5 steps AND=

Continuous
9 steps ANDD= Continuous
Operation Operation

23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
FNC 233 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D AND> 5 steps AND>

Continuous
9 steps ANDD> Continuous
Operation Operation

FNC 234 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 24

Others
FNC181-FNC189
D AND< 5 steps AND<
Continuous
9 steps ANDD< Continuous
Operation Operation

FNC 236 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D AND<> 5 steps AND<>

Continuous
9 steps ANDD<> Continuous 25
Operation Operation

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
FNC 237 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D AND<= 5 steps AND<=

Continuous
9 steps ANDD<= Continuous
Operation Operation
26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
FNC 238 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D AND>= 5 steps AND>=

Continuous
9 steps ANDD>= Continuous
Operation Operation

27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
2. Set data (common among FNC232 to FNC238)
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Device number storing comparison data 16- or 32-bit binary

S2 Device number storing comparison data 16- or 32-bit binary

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

3. Applicable devices (common among FNC232 to FNC238)

Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
29
S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

693
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.2 FNC232~238 – AND=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison

Explanation of function and operation

FNC232 to FNC237 are data comparison instructions connected to other contacts in series.
The contents of S1 are compared with the contents of S2 in binary format, and a contact becomes
conductive (ON) or non-conductive (OFF) depending on the comparison result.

FNC No. 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction ON condition OFF condition

232 AND= ANDD= S1 = S2 S1 ≠ S2
233 AND> ANDD> S1 > S2 S1 <= S2
234 AND< ANDD< S1 < S2 S1 >= S2
236 AND<> ANDD<> S1 ≠ S2 S1 = S2
237 AND<= ANDD<= S1 <= S2 S1 < S2
238 AND>= ANDD>= S1 >= S2 S1 > S2

Cautions
1. Negative value
When the most significant bit is "1" in the data stored in S1 or S2 , it is regarded as a negative value in
comparison.
• In the 16-bit operation: bit 15
• In the 32-bit operation: bit 31

2. When using 32-bit counters (including 32-bit high speed counters)

Make sure to execute the 32-bit operation (such as "ANDD=", "ANDD>" and "ANDD<") when comparing 32-
bit counters (C200 to C255).
If a 32-bit counter is specified in the 16-bit operation (such as "AND=", "AND>" and "AND<"), a program error
or operation error will occur.

3. Programming of data comparison instructions

When programming in GX Developer, symbols "≤" and "≥" cannot be input.
Separate "≤" into "<" and "=", and separate "≥" into ">" and "=".
The input procedure is described below:

Operating procedure
a) Display the circuit program edit window, and put the cursor in a position where a data comparison
instruction is to be used.
b) Input "Instruction" → "space" → "value or device" → "space" → "value or device".
For an input example, refer to "Instruction input window in GX Developer" shown below.
c) Click the [OK] button.
d) Input other contacts and coil drive units consecutively.

Instruction input window in GX Developer

<Input example for 16-bit operation>

<Input example for 32-bit operation>

694
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.2 FNC232~238 – AND=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison

21
Program example

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
S1 ‚ S2 ‚
X000
FNC232 When X000 is ON and the current value of the counter
K200 C10 Y10
AND= C10 is "200" Y010 is driven.
22
X001 When X001 is OFF and the contents of the data register
FNC236

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
K-10 D0 SET Y11 D0 are not "-10", Y011 is set.
AND<>

X002 When X002 is ON, when the contents of the data registers
FNC233 K678493 D10 M50 D11 and D10 are less than "K678,493", or when M3 turns
ANDD> ON, M50 is driven.
M3
23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
24

Others
FNC181-FNC189
25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

695
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.3 FNC240~246 – OR=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison

28.3 FNC240~246 – OR=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison

Outline
These instructions compare numeric values, and set a contact to ON when the condition agrees.

1. Instruction format
FNC 240 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D OR= 5 steps OR=

Continuous
9 steps ORD= Continuous
Operation Operation

FNC 241 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D OR> 5 steps OR>

Continuous
9 steps ORD> Continuous
Operation Operation

FNC 242 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D OR< 5 steps OR<

Continuous
9 steps ORD< Continuous
Operation Operation

FNC 244 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D OR<> 5 steps OR<>

Continuous
9 steps ORD<> Continuous
Operation Operation

FNC 245 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D OR<= 5 steps OR<=

Continuous
9 steps ORD<= Continuous
Operation Operation

FNC 246 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D OR>= 5 steps OR>=

Continuous
9 steps ORD>= Continuous
Operation Operation

2. Set data (common among FNC240 to FNC246)

Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Device number storing comparison data 16- or 32-bit binary

S2 Device number storing comparison data 16- or 32-bit binary

3. Applicable devices (common among FNC240 to FNC246)

Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3 3 3 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

696
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.3 FNC240~246 – OR=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison

21
Explanation of function and operation

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
FNC240 to 246 are data comparison instructions connected to other contacts in parallel.
The contents of S1 are compared with the contents of S2 in binary format, and a contact becomes
conductive (ON) or non-conductive (OFF) depending on the comparison result.

FNC No. 16-bit instruction 32-bit instruction ON condition OFF condition 22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
240 OR= ORD= S1 = S2 S1 ≠ S2
241 OR> ORD> S1 > S2 S1 <= S2
242 OR< ORD< S1 < S2 S1 >= S2
244 OR<> ORD<> S1 ≠ S2 S1 = S2
23
245 OR<= ORD<= S1 <= S2 S1 > S2

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
246 OR>= ORD>= S1 >= S2 S1 < S2

Cautions
1. Negative value 24

Others
FNC181-FNC189
When the most significant bit is "1" in the data stored in S1 or S2 , it is regarded as a negative value in
comparison.
• In the 16-bit operation: bit 15
• In the 32-bit operation: bit 31

2. When using 32-bit counters (including 32-bit high speed counters)

25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Make sure to execute the 32-bit operation (such as "ORD=", "ORD>" and "ORD<") when comparing 32-bit
counters (C200 to C255).
If a 32-bit counter is specified in the 16-bit operation (such as "ORD=", "OR>" and "OR<"), a program error or
operation error will occur.

3. Programming of data comparison instructions 26

When programming in GX Developer, symbols "≤" and "≥" cannot be input.

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
Separate "≤" into "<" and "=", and separate "≥" into ">" and "=".
The input procedure is described below:

Operating procedure
a) Display the circuit program edit window, and put the cursor in a position where a data comparison
instruction is to be used.
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
b) Input "Instruction" → "space" → "value or device" → "space" → "value or device".
For an input example, refer to "Instruction input window in GX Developer" shown below.
c) Click the [OK] button.
d) Input other contacts and coil drive units consecutively.

Instruction input window in GX Developer 28

Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

<Input example for 16-bit operation>

29
<Input example for 32-bit operation>
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

697
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 28 Data Comparison – FNC220 to FNC249
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 28.3 FNC240~246 – OR=, >, <, < >, <=, >= / Data Comparison

Program example
X001
When X001 turns ON or when the current value of the
Y000
counter C10 is "200", Y000 is driven.
S1 ‚ S2 ‚
FNC240 K200 C10
OR=

X002 M30 When X002 and M30 turn ON or when the contents of the
M60 data registers D101 and D100 are more than "K100,000"
M60 is driven.

FNC246 D100 K100000

ORD>=

698
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

21

Real Time Clock

FNC169
FNC160-
29. Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference 22

External Device
FNC179
FNC170-
250 − −

251 − −

23
252 − −

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
253 − −

254 − −
24

Others
FNC189
FNC181-
255 − −

Section
256 LIMIT LIMIT S1 S2 S3 D Limit Control
29.1

Section
25
257 BAND BAND S1 S2 S3 D Dead Band Control

Block Data
FNC199
FNC190-
29.2

Section
258 ZONE ZONE S1 S2 S3 D Zone Control
29.3

259 SCL SCL S1 S2 D Scaling (Coordinate by Point Data)

Section
29.4 26

Character String
FNC209
FNC200-
Section
260 DABIN DABIN S D Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion
29.5

Section
261 BINDA BINDA S D BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion
29.6
27
− −

Data
FNC219
FNC210-
262

263 − −

264 − − 28
Data
FNC249
FNC220-

265 − −

266 − −
29
Data Table
FNC269
FNC250-

267 − −

268 − −

269 SCL2 SCL2 S1 S2 D Scaling 2 (Coordinate by X/Y Data)

Section 30
29.7
Ex-Device
FNC274
FNC270-

699
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.1 FNC256 – LIMIT / Limit Control

29.1 FNC256 – LIMIT / Limit Control

Outline
This instruction provides the upper limit value and lower limit value for an input numeric value, and controls
the output value using these limit values.

1. Instruction format

FNC 256 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D LIMIT P LIMIT Continuous DLIMIT Continuous

9 steps Operation 17 steps Operation
LIMITP Pulse (Single) DLIMITP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Lower limit value (minimum output value)

S2 Upper limit value (maximum output value)

16- or 32-bit binary
S3 Input value controlled by the upper and lower limit values
Head device number storing the output value controlled by the upper and lower
D
limit values

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

S3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

700
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.1 FNC256 – LIMIT / Limit Control

21
Explanation of function and operation

Real Time Clock

FNC169
FNC160-
1. 16-bit operation (LIMIT and LIMITP)
Depending on how the input value (16-bit binary value) specified by S3 compares to the range between
S1 and S2 , the output value D is controlled.
The output value is controlled as shown below: 22

External Device
FNC179
FNC170-
Command
input
FNC256 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ S3 ‚ D‚
LIMIT

‚In the case of “ S1 ‚ Lower limit value > S3 ‚ Input value” .... S1 ‚ Lower limit value → D ‚ Output value
‚In the case of “ S2 ‚ Upper limit value < S3 ‚ Input value” .... S2 ‚ Upper limit value → D ‚ Output value
23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
‚In the case of “ S1 ‚ Lower limit value ≤ S3 ‚ Input value ≤ S2 ‚ Upper limit value” .... S3 ‚ Input value → D ‚ Output value

Output Output ( D ‚ )
value value S2 ‚ Specified
24

Others
FNC189
FNC181-
Input Input ( S3 ‚ )
value value

S1 ‚ Specified
25
• When controlling the output value using only the upper limit value, set “-32768” to the lower limit value

Block Data
FNC199
FNC190-
specified in S1 .
• When controlling the output value using only the lower limit value, set “32767” to the upper limit value
specified in S2 .

26

Character String
FNC209
FNC200-
27

Data
FNC219
FNC210-

28
Data
FNC249
FNC220-

29
Data Table
FNC269
FNC250-

30
Ex-Device
FNC274
FNC270-

701
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.1 FNC256 – LIMIT / Limit Control

2. 32-bit operation (DLIMIT and DLIMITP)

Depending on how the input value (32-bit binary value) specified by [ S3 +1, S3 ] compares to the range
between [ S1 +1, S1 ] and [ S2 +1, S2 ], the output value [ D +1, D ] is controlled.
Command
input
FNC256 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ S3 ‚ D‚
DLIMIT

S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ S3 ‚ +1, S3 ‚ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ D ‚ +1, D ‚

‚In the case of “Lower limit value > Input value” .................................... Lower limit value → Output value

S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ S3 ‚ +1, S3 ‚ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ D ‚ +1, D ‚

‚In the case of “Upper limit value < Input value” .................................... Upper limit value → Output value

S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ S3 ‚ +1, S3 ‚ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ S3 ‚ +1, S3 ‚ D ‚ +1, D ‚

‚In the case of “Lower limit value ≤ Input value ≤ Upper limit value” .... Input value → Output value

Output Output
value ( D ‚ +1, D ‚ )
value

S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚
Specified
Input
Input value
value
( S3 ‚ +1, S3 ‚ )

S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚
Specified

• When controlling the output value using only the upper limit value, set “-2,147,483,648” to the lower limit
value specified in [ S1 +1, S1 ].
• When controlling the output value using only the lower limit value, set “2,147,483,647” to the upper limit
value specified in [ S2 +1, S2 ].

Error
An operation error is caused when the instruction is executed in the setting status shown below; The error flag
M8067 turns ON, and the error code (K6706) is stored in D8067.
Relationship
16-bit operation S1 ≤ S2
32-bit operation [ S1 +1, S1 ] ≤ [ S2 +1, S2 ]

702
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.1 FNC256 – LIMIT / Limit Control

21
Program examples

Real Time Clock

FNC169
FNC160-
1. Program example 1
In the program example shown below, the BCD data set in X020 to X037 is controlled by the limit values “500”
to “5000”, and the controlled value is output to D1 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC 19 K4X020
22
D0

External Device
FNC179
FNC170-
BIN

FNC256 K500 K5000 D0 D1

LIMIT

END
23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Operation
• In the case of “D0 < 500”, “500” is output to D1. Output (D1)
• In the case of “500 ≤ D0 ≤ 5000”, the value of D0 is output to
D1. 5000 24
• In the case of “D0 > 5000”, “5000” is output to D1. 500

Others
FNC189
FNC181-
Input (D0)
500 5000

25

Block Data
FNC199
FNC190-
2. Program example 2
In the program example shown below, the BCD data set in X020 to X057 is controlled by the limit values
“10000” and “1,000,000”, and the controlled value is output to D11 and D10 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC 19 K8X020 D0 26
DBIN

Character String
FNC209
FNC200-
FNC256 K10000 K1000000 D0 D10
DLIMIT

END
27

Data
FNC219
FNC210-
Operation
• In the case of “(D1, D0) < 10000”, “10000” is output to (D11, Output (D11,D10)
D10).
• In the case of “10000 ≤ (D1, D0) ≤ 1,000,000”, the value of 1,000,000
(D1, D0) is output to (D11, D10). 10000
28
Data
FNC249
FNC220-

• In the case of “(D1, D0) > 1,000,000”, “1,000,000” is output Input (D1,D0)
to (D11, D10). 10000 1,000,000

29
Data Table
FNC269
FNC250-

30
Ex-Device
FNC274
FNC270-

703
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.2 FNC257 – BAND / Dead Band Control

29.2 FNC257 – BAND / Dead Band Control

Outline
This instruction provides the upper limit value and lower limit value of the dead band for an input numeric
value, and controls the output value using these limit values.

1. Instruction format

FNC 257 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D BAND P BAND Continuous DBAND Continuous

9 steps Operation 17 steps Operation
BANDP Pulse (Single) DBANDP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Lower limit value of the dead band (no-output band)

S2 Upper limit value of the dead band (no-output band)

16- or 32-bit binary
S3 Input value controlled by the dead band

D Device number storing the output value controlled by the dead band

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

S3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (BAND and BANDP)
Depending on how the input value (16-bit binary value) specified by S3 compares to the dead band range
between S1 and S2 , the output value D is controlled.
Command
input
FNC257 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ S3 ‚ D‚
BAND

‚In the case of “ S1 ‚ Lower limit value > S3 ‚ Input value” .... S3 ‚ Input value − S1 ‚ Lower limit value → D‚ Output value

‚In the case of “ S2 ‚ Upper limit value < S3 ‚ Input value” .... S3 ‚ Input value − S2 ‚ Upper limit value → D ‚ Output value

‚In the case of “ S1 ‚ Lower limit value ≤ S3 ‚ Input value ≤ S2 ‚ Upper limit value” .................................0 → D ‚ Output value

Output value Output value( D ‚ )

Lower limit value of
dead band Output
( S1 ‚ )
Input
Input value ( S3 ‚ )
value
Output Upper limit value of
( S2 ‚ )
dead band
Output value = 0

704
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.2 FNC257 – BAND / Dead Band Control

21
2. 32-bit operation (DBAND and DBANDP)

Real Time Clock

FNC169
FNC160-
Depending on how the input value (32-bit binary value) specified by [ S3 +1, S3 ] compares to the dead
band range between [ S1 +1, S1 ] and [ S2 +1, S2 ], the output value [ D +1, D ] is controlled.
The output value is controlled as shown below:
Command
input
22
FNC257 S3 ‚

External Device
FNC179
FNC170-
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
DBAND

S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ S3 ‚ +1, S3 ‚ S3 ‚ +1, S3 ‚ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ D ‚ +1, D ‚

‚In the case of “Lower limit value > Input value” ...............Input value − Lower limit value → Output value

S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ S3 ‚ +1, S3 ‚ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚

23
S3 ‚ +1, S3 ‚ D ‚ +1, D ‚

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
‚In the case of “Upper limit value < Input value” ..............Input value − Upper limit value → Output value

S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ S3 ‚ +1, S3 ‚ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ D ‚ +1, D ‚

‚In the case of “Lower limit value ≤ Input value ≤ Upper limit value” ................................ 0 → Output value

Output value Output

24
[ D ‚ +1, D ‚ ]
value

Others
FNC189
FNC181-
Lower limit value of
dead band
[ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ] Output
Input
Input value
value

Output
[ S3 ‚ +1, S3 ‚ ]
25
Upper limit value of

Block Data
FNC199
FNC190-
Output value = 0 dead band [ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ ]

Caution
• When the output value overflows, it is handled as follows: 26
- In the 16-bit operation

Character String
FNC209
FNC200-
The output value is a 16-bit binary value with sign. Accordingly, if the operation result is outside the
range from -32768 to +32767, it is handled as follows:

Lower limit value of dead band S1 ‚ = 10 Output value = -32768-10

Input value S3 ‚ = -32768
= 8000H-AH
= 7FF6H 27
= 32758

Data
FNC219
FNC210-
- In the 32-bit operation
The output value is a 32-bit binary value with sign. Accordingly, if the operation result is outside the
range from -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647, it is handled as follows:

Lower limit value of dead band [ S1 +1, S1 ] = 1000 Output value = -2,147,483,648-1000 28
= 80000000H-000003E8H
Data
FNC249
FNC220-

Input value [ S3 +1, S3 ] = -2,147,483,648 = 7FFFFC18H

= 2,147,482,648

Error
An operation error is caused when the instruction is executed in the setting status shown below; The error flag 29
M8067 turns ON, and the error code (K6706) is stored in D8067.
Data Table
FNC269
FNC250-

Relationship
16-bit operation S1 > S2
32-bit operation [ S1 +1, S1 ] > [ S2 +1, S2 ]
30
Ex-Device
FNC274
FNC270-

705
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.2 FNC257 – BAND / Dead Band Control

Program examples
1. Program example 1
In the program example shown below, the BCD data set in X020 to X037 is controlled by the dead band from
“-1000” to “+1000”, and a controlled value is output to D1 when X000 turns ON.

X000 Output
FNC 19 K4X020 D0
BIN

FNC257 K-1000 K1000 D0 D1

BAND Input

END

Operation
• In the case of “D0 < -1000”, “D0 - (-1000)” is output to D1.
Output
• In the case of “-1000 ≤ D0 ≤ +1000”, “0” is output to D1.
• In the case of “D0 > +1000”, “D0 - 1000” is output to D1.
-1000 0
Input
1000

2. Program example 2
In the program example shown below, the BCD data set in X020 to X057 is controlled by the dead band from
“-10000” to “+10000”, and a controlled value is output to D11 and D10 when X000 turns ON.
Output
X000
FNC 19 K8X020 D0
DBIN

FNC257 K-10000 K10000 D0 D10

DBAND Input

END

Operation
• In the case of “(D1, D0) < -10000”, “(D1, D0) - (-10000)” is
output to (D11, D10). Output
• In the case of “-10000 ≤ (D1, D0) ≤ +10000”, “0” is output to
(D11, D10).
• In the case of “(D1, D0) > +10000”, “(D1, D0) - 10000” is output -10000 0
Input
to (D11, D10). +10000

706
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.3 FNC258 – ZONE / Zone Control

21
29.3 FNC258 – ZONE / Zone Control

Real Time Clock

FNC169
FNC160-
Outline
Depending on how the input value compares to positive or negative, the output value is controlled by the bias
value specified.
22

External Device
FNC179
FNC170-
1. Instruction format

FNC 258 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D ZONE P ZONE Continuous DZONE Continuous

9 steps Operation 17 steps Operation
ZONEP Pulse (Single)
Operation
DZONEP Pulse (Single)
Operation
23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Negative bias value to be added to the input value
24
S2 Positive bias value to be added to the input value

Others
FNC189
FNC181-
16- or 32-bit binary
S3 Input value controlled by the zone

D Head device number storing the output value controlled by the zone

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
25

Block Data
FNC199
FNC190-
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 26

Character String
FNC209
FNC200-
S3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

27
1. 16-bit operation (ZONE and ZONEP)

Data
FNC219
FNC210-
The bias value specified by S1 or S2 is added to the input value specified by S3 , and output to the
device specified by D .
The bias value is added as shown below:
Command
input
FNC258
28
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ S3 ‚ D‚
Data
FNC249
FNC220-

ZONE

‚In the case of “ S3 ‚ Input value < 0” ..... S3 ‚ Input value + S1 ‚ Negative bias value → D ‚ Output value

‚In the case of “ S3 ‚ Input value = 0” ...........................................................................0 → D ‚ Output value

‚In the case of “ S3 ‚ Input value > 0” ..... S3 ‚ Input value + S2 ‚ Positive bias value → D ‚ Output value 29
Data Table
FNC269
FNC250-

Output Output ( D ‚ )
value value
Positive bias value
( S2 ‚ )
Input
value
0 Input ( S3 ‚ )
value 30
Ex-Device
FNC274
FNC270-

Negative bias value

( S1 ‚ )

707
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.3 FNC258 – ZONE / Zone Control

2. 32-bit operation (DZONE and DZONEP)

The bias value specified by [ S1 +1, S1 ] or [ S2 +1, S2 ] is added to the input value specified by
[ S3 +1, S3 ], and output to the device specified by [ D +1, D ].
The bias value is added as shown below:
Command
input
FNC258 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ S3 ‚ D‚
DZONE

S3 ‚ +1, S3 ‚ S3 ‚ +1, S3 ‚ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ D ‚ +1, D ‚

‚In the case of “Input value < 0” ..................................Input value + Negative bias value → Output value

S3 ‚ +1, S3 ‚ D ‚ +1, D ‚
‚In the case of “Input value = 0” ...........................................................................................0 → Output value

S3 ‚ +1, S3 ‚ S3 ‚ +1, S3 ‚ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ D ‚ +1, D ‚

‚In the case of “Input value > 0” ..................................Input value + Positive bias value → Output value
Output
value
Output value [ D ‚ +1, D ‚ ]
Positive bias value
[ S2 ‚ +1, S2 ‚ ]
Input
0 Input value
value
[ S3 ‚ +1, S3 ‚ ]

Negative bias value

[ S1 ‚ +1, S1 ‚ ]

Caution
• When the output value overflows, it is handled as follows:
- In the 16-bit operation
The operation result is a 16-bit binary value with sign. Accordingly, if the output value is outside the
range from -32768 to +32767, it is handled as follows:

Negative bias value S1 ‚ = -100 Output value = -32768+(-100)

= 8000H+FF9CH
Input value S3 ‚ = -32768 = 7F9CH
= 32668

- In the 32-bit operation

The output value is a 32-bit binary value with sign. Accordingly, if the operation result is outside the
range from -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647, it is handled as follows:

Negative bias value [ S1 +1, S1 ] = -1000 Output value = -2,147,483,648+(-1000)

= 80000000H+FFFFFC18H
Input value [ S3 +1, S3 ] = -2,147,483,648 = 7FFFFC18H
= 2,147,482,648

708
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.3 FNC258 – ZONE / Zone Control

21
Program examples

Real Time Clock

FNC169
FNC160-
1. Program example 1
In the program example shown below, the BCD data set in X020 to X037 is controlled by the zone from
“-1000” to “+1000”, and the controlled value is output to D1 when X000 turns ON.
X000
FNC 19 K4X020
22
D0

External Device
FNC179
FNC170-
BIN

FNC258 K-1000 K1000 D0 D1

ZONEP

END
23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Operation
• In the case of “D0 < 0”, “D0 + (-1000)” is output to D1. Output
• In the case of “D = 0”, “0” is output to D1.
• In the case of “D0 > 0”, “D0 + 1000” is output to D1. 24
1000

Others
FNC189
FNC181-
-1000 0
Input
1000
-1000

25

Block Data
FNC199
FNC190-
2. Program example 2
In the program example shown below, the BCD data set in X020 to X057 is controlled by the zone from “-
10000” to “+10000”, and the controlled value is output to D11 and D10 when X000 turns ON.
X000
26
FNC 19 K8X020

Character String
FNC209
FNC200-
D0
DBIN

FNC258 K-10000 K10000 D0 D10

DZONEP

END 27

Data
FNC219
FNC210-
Operation
• In the case of “(D1, D0) < 0”, “(D1, D0) + (-10000)” is output to Output
(D11, D10).
• In the case of “(D1, D0) = 0”, the “0” is output to (D11, D10). 28
Data
FNC249
FNC220-

• In the case of “(D1, D0) > 0”, “(D1, D0) + 10000” is output to 10000
(D11, D10). -10000 0
Input
10000
-10000
29
Data Table
FNC269
FNC250-

30
Ex-Device
FNC274
FNC270-

709
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.4 FNC259 – SCL / Scaling (Coordinate by Point Data)

29.4 FNC259 – SCL / Scaling (Coordinate by Point Data)

Outline
This instruction executes scaling of the input value using a specified data table, and outputs the result.
SCL2 (FNC269) is also available with a different data table configuration for scaling.
→ For SCL2 (FNC269) instruction, refer to Section 29.7.

1. Instruction format

FNC 259 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D SCL P SCL Continuous DSCL Continuous

7 steps Operation 13 steps Operation
SCLP Pulse (Single) DSCLP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Input value used in scaling or device number storing the input value

S2 Head device number storing the conversion table used in scaling 16- or 32-bit binary

D Device number storing the output value controlled by scaling

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

710
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.4 FNC259 – SCL / Scaling (Coordinate by Point Data)

21
Explanation of function and operation

Real Time Clock

FNC169
FNC160-
1. 16-bit operation (SCL and SCLP)
The input value specified in S1 is processed by scaling for the specified conversion characteristics, and
stored to a device number specified in D . Conversion for scaling is executed based on the data table
stored in a device specified in S2 and later. 22
If the output data is not an integer, however, the number in the first decimal place is rounded.

External Device
FNC179
FNC170-
→ For the method to set the conversion table for scaling, refer to the next page.

Command Conversion setting data table for scaling

input Device assignment in
FNC259 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ Set item
setting data table
SCL
Number of coordinate points
23
Y

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
(“5” in the case shown in the left S2
Point 2
figure)
Output Point 5
value X coordinate S2 +1
Point 1
( D‚ ) Point 3 Y coordinate S2 +2

Point 1 Point 4 Point 2

X coordinate S2 +3 24

Others
FNC189
FNC181-
Y coordinate S2 +4
X
Input value ( S1 ‚ ) X coordinate S2 +5
Operation Operation Point 3
error Operation is enabled. error Y coordinate S2 +6
X coordinate S2 +7
Point 4
Y coordinate S2 +8
25

Block Data
FNC199
FNC190-
X coordinate S2 +9
Point 5
Y coordinate S2 +10

2. 32-bit operation (DSCL and DSCLP)

The input value specified in [ S1 +1, S1 ] is processed by scaling for the specified conversion 26
characteristics, and stored to a device number specified in [ D +1, D ]. Conversion for scaling is

Character String
FNC209
FNC200-
executed based on the data table stored in a device specified in [ S2 +1, S2 ] and later.
If the output data is not an integer, however, the number in the first decimal place is rounded.

Command
Conversion setting data table for scaling
input
FNC259 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
Set item
Device assignment in
setting data table
27
DSCL

Data
FNC219
FNC210-
Number of coordinate points
(“5” in the case shown in the left [ S2 +1, S2 ]
Y
Point 2 figure)
X coordinate [ S2 +3, S2 +2]
Output Point 5 Point 1
value
( D‚ ) Point 3
Y coordinate [ S2 +5, S2 +4] 28
X coordinate [ S2 +7, S2 +6]
Data
FNC249
FNC220-

Point 4 Point 2
Point 1 Y coordinate [ S2 +9, S2 +8]
X X coordinate [ S2 +11, S2 +10]
Input value ( S1 ‚ ) Point 3
Operation Operation Y coordinate [ S2 +13, S2 +12]
error Operation is enabled. error
X coordinate [ S2 +15, S2 +14]
29
Point 4
Data Table
FNC269
FNC250-

Y coordinate [ S2 +17, S2 +16]

X coordinate [ S2 +19, S2 +18]
Point 5
Y coordinate [ S2 +21, S2 +20]

30
Ex-Device
FNC274
FNC270-

711
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.4 FNC259 – SCL / Scaling (Coordinate by Point Data)

3. Setting the conversion table for scaling

The conversion table for scaling is set based on the data table stored in a device specified in [ S2 +1,
S2 ] and later.
The data table has the following configuration:
→ For a setting example, refer to the next page.
Device assignment in setting data table
Set item
16-bit operation 32-bit operation
Number of coordinate points S2 [ S2 +1, S2 ]
X coordinate S2 +1 [ S2 +3, S2 +2]
Point 1
Y coordinate S2 +2 [ S2 +5, S2 +4]
X coordinate S2 +3 [ S2 +7, S2 +6]
Point 2
Y coordinate S2 +4 [ S2 +9, S2 +8]
...

...

...

...
X coordinate S2 +2n-1 [ S2 +4n-1, S2 +4n-2]
Point n (last)
Y coordinate S2 +2n [ S2 +4n+1, S2 +4n]

Setting example of the conversion table for scaling

A setting example for the 16-bit operation is shown below.
For the 32-bit operation, set each item using a 32-bit binary value.
In the case of the conversion characteristics for scaling shown in the figure below, set the following data table.
Y
Point 3 Point 6(200,250)
(50,100) Point 7
Point 5 (250,90) Point 8(350,90)
(200,70)
Point 2
(20,30) Point 9
(350,30)
Point 1(5,7) Point 4(200,25) Point 10(400,7)
X

712
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.4 FNC259 – SCL / Scaling (Coordinate by Point Data)

21
Setting the conversion setting data table for scaling

Real Time Clock

FNC169
FNC160-
Setting device and setting contents
Set item When R0 is specified Setting Remarks
in S2 contents
Number of coordinate points S2 R0 K10
22
X coordinate S2 +1 R1 K5

External Device
FNC179
FNC170-
Point 1
Y coordinate S2 +2 R2 K7
X coordinate S2 +3 R3 K20
Point 2
Y coordinate S2 +4 R4 K30
X coordinate S2 +5 R5 K50 23
Point 3

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Y coordinate S2 +6 R6 K100
X coordinate S2 +7 R7 K200
Point 4 When coordinates are specified using three points
Y coordinate S2 +8 R8 K25 in this way, the output value can be set to an
intermediate value.
Point 5
X coordinate S2 +9 R9 K200
In this example, the output value (intermediate 24
Y coordinate S2 +10 R10 K70 value) is specified by the Y coordinate of the point 5.

Others
FNC189
FNC181-
X coordinate R11 K200 If the X coordinate is the same at three points or
S2 +11
Point 6 more, the value at the second point is also output.
Y coordinate S2 +12 R12 K250

X coordinate S2 +13 R13 K250

Point 7
Y coordinate S2 +14 R14 K90 25

Block Data
FNC199
FNC190-
X coordinate S2 +15 R15 K350 When coordinates are specified using two points in
Point 8
Y coordinate S2 +16 R16 K90 this way, the output value is the Y coordinate at the
next point.
X coordinate S2 +17 R17 K350 In this example, the output value is specified by the
Point 9 Y coordinate of the point 9.
Y coordinate R18 K30
S2 +18
26
X coordinate S2 +19 R19 K400

Character String
FNC209
FNC200-
Point 10
Y coordinate S2 +20 R20 K7

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
27

Data
FNC219
FNC210-
• When the Xn data is not set in the ascending order in the data table (error code: K6706)
The data table is searched from the low-order side of device numbers in the data table in the operation.
Accordingly, even if only some Xn data is set in the ascending order in the data table, the instruction is
executed without operation error up to the area of the data table in which the Xn data is set in the
ascending order.
28
• When S1 is outside the data table (error code: K6706)
Data
FNC249
FNC220-

• When the value exceeds the 32-bit data range in the middle of operation (error code: K6706)
In this case, check whether the distance between points is not “65535” or more.
If the distance is “65535” or more, reduce the distance between points.

29
Data Table
FNC269
FNC250-

30
Ex-Device
FNC274
FNC270-

713
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.4 FNC259 – SCL / Scaling (Coordinate by Point Data)

Program example
In the program example shown below, the value input to D0 is processed by scaling based on the conversion
table for scaling set in R0 and later, and output to D10.

Program

M8000
FNC259 D0 R0 D10
SCL

END

Operation
Conversion setting data table for scaling
Y Point 3
(30,100) Setting
Set item Device
contents
Number of coordinate
R0 K6
points
Point 4
Point 2 (40,45) X coordinate R1 K0
Output value Point 1
(10,50) Y coordinate R2 K0
(D10)=35 Point 5
(50,30) X coordinate R3 K10
Point 2
Point 1 Y coordinate R4 K50
(0,0)
X X coordinate R5 K30
Input value(D0)=7 Point 3
Point 6 Y coordinate R6 K100
(60,0)
X coordinate R7 K40
Point 4
Y coordinate R8 K45
X coordinate R9 K50
Point 5
Y coordinate R10 K30
X coordinate R11 K60
Point 6
Y coordinate R12 K0

714
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.5 FNC260 – DABIN / Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion

21
29.5 FNC260 – DABIN / Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion

Real Time Clock

FNC169
FNC160-
Outline
This instruction converts numeric data expressed in decimal ASCII codes (30H to 39H) into binary data.
22
1. Instruction format

External Device
FNC179
FNC170-
FNC 260 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D DABIN P DABIN Continuous DDABIN Continuous

5 steps Operation 9 steps Operation
DABINP Pulse (Single) DDABINP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation
23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Head device number storing data (ASCII codes) to be converted into binary data Character string

D Device number storing conversion result 16- or 32-bit binary 24

Others
FNC189
FNC181-
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P 25

Block Data
FNC199
FNC190-
S 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (DABIN and DABINP)
26

Character String
FNC209
FNC200-
1) Data stored in S to S +2 expressed in decimal ASCII codes (30H to 39H) is converted into 16-bit
binary data, and stored in D .
Command
input FNC260
DABINP
S‚ D‚
27

Data
FNC219
FNC210-
b15 b8 b7 b0
S ‚ +0 ASCII code for 10000's digit Sign data b15 b0
+1 ASCII code for 100's digit ASCII code for 1000's digit D‚
+2 ASCII code for 1's digit ASCII code for 10's digit
16-bit binary data
28
For example, when S to S +2 store ASCII codes expressing "-25108", 16-bit binary data is stored
Data
FNC249
FNC220-

in D as follows:
b15 b8 b7 b0
S ‚ +0 32H(2) 2DH(-) b15 b0
31H(1) 35H(5) -25108
+1
+2 38H(8) 30H(0)
D‚
29
Data Table
FNC269
FNC250-

2) The numeric range of data stored in S to S +2 is from -32768 to +32767.

3) As "sign data" (low-order byte of S ), "20H (space)" is set when the data to be converted is positive,
and "2DH (-)" is set when the data to be converted is negative.
4) An ASCII code for each digit is within the range from 30H to 39H. 30
5) When an ASCII code for each digit is "20H (space)" or "00H (null)", it is handled as "30H".
Ex-Device
FNC274
FNC270-

715
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.5 FNC260 – DABIN / Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion

2. 32-bit operation (DDABIN and DDABINP)

1) Data stored in S to S +5 expressed in decimal ASCII codes (30H to 39H) is converted into 32-bit
binary data, and stored in [ D +1, D ].
Command
input FNC260 S‚ D‚
DDABINP

b15 b8 b7 b0
S ‚ +0 ASCII code for 1,000,000,000's digit Sign data
D ‚ +1 D‚
+1 ASCII code for 10,000,000's digit ASCII code for 100,000,000's digit
b31 b16 b15 b0
+2 ASCII code for 100,000's digit ASCII code for 1,000,000's digit
High-order 16 bits Low-order 16 bits
+3 ASCII code for 1000's digit ASCII code for 10000's digit
+4 ASCII code for 10's digit ASCII code for 100's digit
32-bit data
+5 (Ignored) ASCII code for 1's digit

For example, when S to S +5 store ASCII codes expressing "-1,234,543,210", 32-bit binary data
is stored in [ D +1, D ] as follows:
b15 b8 b7 b0
S ‚ +0 31H(1) 2DH(-)
+1 33H(3) 32H(2)
D ‚ +1 D‚
+2 35H(5) 34H(4)
-1234543210
+3 33H(3) 34H(4)
+4 31H(1) 32H(2)
+5 (Ignored) 30H(0)

2) The numeric range of data stored in S to S +5 is from -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647.

The high-order byte of S +5 is ignored.
3) As "sign data" (low-order byte of S ), "20H (space)" is set when the data to be converted is positive,
and "2DH (-)" is set when the data to be converted is negative.
4) An ASCII code for each digit is within the range from 30H to 39H.
5) When an ASCII code for each digit is "20H (space)" or "00H (NULL)", it is handled as "30H".

Related instructions
Instruction Description
ASCI(FNC 82) Converts hexadecimal codes into ASCII codes.
HEX(FNC 83) Converts ASCII codes into hexadecimal codes.
STR(FNC200) Converts binary data into a character string (ASCII codes).
VAL(FNC201) Converts a character string (ASCII codes) into binary data.
BINDA(FNC261) Converts binary data into decimal ASCII codes (30H to 39H).

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When the sign data stored in S is any value other than "20H (space)" or "2DH (-)" (error code: K6706)
• When an ASCII code for each digit stored in S to S +2(5) is any value other than "30H" to "39H",
"20H (space)", or "00H (NULL)" (error code: K6706)
• When the numeric range of S to S +2(5) is outside the following range (error code: K6706)
Setting range
16-bit operation −32768 to 32767
32-bit operation −2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647

• When S to S +2(5) exceeds the device range (error code: K6706)

716
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.5 FNC260 – DABIN / Decimal ASCII to BIN Conversion

21
Program example

Real Time Clock

FNC169
FNC160-
In the program below, the sign and decimal ASCII codes in five digits stored in D20 to D22 are converted into
a binary value and stored in D0 when X000 is set to ON.
X000
FNC260 D20 D0
DABINP 22

External Device
FNC179
FNC170-
END

b15 b8 b7 b0
D20 20H(space) 2DH(-) D0
D21
D22
32H(2)
36H(6)
20H(space)
37H(7) (It is regarded as
-276
Binary
23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
"- 276" "-00276".) value

24

Others
FNC189
FNC181-
25

Block Data
FNC199
FNC190-
26

Character String
FNC209
FNC200-
27

Data
FNC219
FNC210-

28
Data
FNC249
FNC220-

29
Data Table
FNC269
FNC250-

30
Ex-Device
FNC274
FNC270-

717
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.6 FNC261 – BINDA / BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion

29.6 FNC261 – BINDA / BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion

Outline
This instruction converts binary data into decimal ASCII codes (30H to 39H).

1. Instruction format

FNC 261 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D BINDA P BINDA Continuous DBINDA Continuous

5 steps Operation 9 steps Operation
BINDAP Pulse (Single) DBINDAP Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Device number storing binary data to be converted into ASCII codes 16- or 32-bit binary

D Head device number storing conversion result Character string

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (BINDA and BINDAP)
1) Each digit of 16-bit binary data stored in S is converted into an ASCII code (30H to 39H), and stored
in D and later.
Command
input FNC261 S‚ D‚
BINDAP

b15 b8 b7 b0
D‚ +0 ASCII code for 10000's digit Sign data
b15 b0
+1 ASCII code for 100's digit ASCII code for 1000's digit
S‚
+2 ASCII code for 1's digit ASCII code for 10's digit
+3 0000H or source data M8091=OFF:0000H
16-bit binary data
M8091=ON:Does
not change.

For example, when S stores "-12345", the conversion result is stored in D and later as follows:
b15 b8 b7 b0
D‚ +0 31H(1) 2DH(-)
b15 b0
+1 33H(3) 32H(2)
S‚ -12345
+2 35H(5) 34H(4)
+3 0000H or source data M8091=OFF:0000H
M8091=ON:Does not change.

2) The numeric range of 16-bit binary data stored in S is from -32768 to +32767.
3) The conversion result stored in D is as follows:
a) As "sign data" (low-order byte of D ), "20H (space)" is set when the 16-bit binary data stored in
S is positive, and "2DH (-)" is set when 16-bit binary data stored in S is negative.

718
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.6 FNC261 – BINDA / BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion

21
b) "20H (space)" is stored for "0" on the left side of the effective digits (zero suppression).

Real Time Clock

FNC169
FNC160-
00 325

Effective digits
20H

c) D +3 is set as follows depending on the ON/OFF status of M8091.

22

External Device
FNC179
FNC170-
ON/OFF status Contents of processing
M8091=OFF D +3 is set to "0000H (NULL)".
M8091=ON D +3 does not change.

2. 32-bit operation (DBINDA and DBINDAP) 23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
1) Each digit of 32-bit binary data stored in [ S +1, S ] is converted into an ASCII code (30H to 39H),
and stored in D and later.
Command
input FNC261
DBINDAP
S‚ D‚
b15 b8 b7 b0
24

Others
FNC189
FNC181-
D‚ +0 ASCII code for 1,000,000,000's digit Sign data
+1 ASCII code for 10,000,000's digit ASCII code for 100,000,000's digit
S‚ +1 S‚
+2 ASCII code for 100,000's digit ASCII code for 1,000,000's digit
High-order 16 bits Low-order 16 bits
+3 ASCII code for 1000's digit ASCII code for 10000's digit
+4 ASCII code for 10's digit ASCII code for 100's digit
32-bit binary data
+5 00H or 20H ASCII code for 1's digit 25
M8091=OFF:00H

Block Data
FNC199
FNC190-
M8091=ON:20H

For example, when [ S +1, S ] stores "-12,345,678", the conversion result is stored in D and
later as follows:
b15 b8 b7 b0 26
D‚ +0 20H (space) 2DH(-)

Character String
FNC209
FNC200-
+1 31H(1) 20H (space)
S‚ +1 S‚
+2 33H(3) 32H(2)
-12345678
+3 35H(5) 34H(4)
+4 37H(7) 36H(6)
+5 00H or 20H 38H(8)
M8091=OFF:00H
27

Data
FNC219
FNC210-
M8091=ON:20H

2) The numeric range of 32-bit binary data stored in [ S +1, S ] is from -2,147,483,648 to
+2,147,483,647.
3) The conversion result stored in D is as follows:
28
a) "sign data" (low-order byte of D ) "20H (space)" is set when the 32-bit binary data stored in
Data
FNC249
FNC220-

[ S +1, S ] is positive, and "2DH (-)" is set when 32-bit binary data stored in [ S +1, S ] is
negative.
b) "20H (space)" is stored for "0" on the left side of the effective digits (zero suppression).
00 1 2 0 3 4 5 6 0
29
Effective digits
Data Table
FNC269
FNC250-

20H

c) The high-order byte of D +5 is set as follows depending on the ON/OFF status of M8091.
ON/OFF status Contents of processing
M8091=OFF The high-order byte of D +5 is set to "00H (NULL)." 30
Ex-Device
FNC274
FNC270-

M8091=ON The high-order byte of D +5 is set to "20H (space)."

719
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.6 FNC261 – BINDA / BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion

Related devices
Device Name Description
• For 16-bit operation
- When M8091 is OFF, D +3 is set to "0000H (NULL)."
Output character - When M8091 is ON, D +3 does not change.
M8091
quantity selector signal • For 32-bit operation
- When M8091 is OFF, the high-order byte of D +5 is set to "00H (NULL)."
- When M8091 is ON, the high-order byte of D +5 is set to "20H (space)."

Related instructions
Instruction Description
ASCI(FNC 82) Converts hexadecimal values into ASCII code.
HEX(FNC 83) Converts ASCII code into hexadecimal values.
STR(FNC200) Converts binary data into a character string (ASCII code).
VAL(FNC201) Converts a character string (ASCII code) into binary data.
DABIN(FNC260) Converts numeric data expressed in decimal ASCII code (30H to 39H) into binary data.

Cautions
1. Occupied device points
The table below shows the occupied device points of D for 16-bit operation(BINDA/BINDAP) when
M8091 is ON/OFF and 32-bit operation (DBINDA/DBINDAP).

Occupied Points of D
M8091=ON 3
16-bit operation
M8091=OFF 4
32-bit operation 6

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following case; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When the occupied device point of D storing the ASCII code character string exceeds the
corresponding device rang (error code: K6706).

720
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.6 FNC261 – BINDA / BIN to Decimal ASCII Conversion

21
Program example

Real Time Clock

FNC169
FNC160-
In the program below, 16-bit binary data stored in D1000 is converted into decimal ASCII codes when X000 is
set to ON, and the ASCII codes converted by PR (FNC 77) instruction are output one by one in the time
division method to Y040 to Y051.
By setting to OFF the output character selector signal M8091 and setting to ON PR mode flag M8027, ASCII
codes up to "00H" are output. 22
→ For PR mode flag and PR (FNC 77) instruction, refer to Section 15.8.

External Device
FNC179
FNC170-
X000
RST M8091

SET M8027
23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
FNC261 D1000 D0
BINDAP

FNC 77 D0 Y040
PR

END 24

Others
FNC189
FNC181-
b15 b8 b7 b0
D0 20H (space) 20H (space) PR (FNC 77)
D1000 instruction
D1 31H(1) 35H(5)
5126 Y040 to Y051
D2 36H(6) 32H(2)
16-bit binary
data
D3 0000H
" 5126" is
output. 25

Block Data
FNC199
FNC190-
M8091=OFF

26

Character String
FNC209
FNC200-
27

Data
FNC219
FNC210-

28
Data
FNC249
FNC220-

29
Data Table
FNC269
FNC250-

30
Ex-Device
FNC274
FNC270-

721
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.7 FNC269 – SCL2 / Scaling 2 (Coordinate by X/Y Data)

29.7 FNC269 – SCL2 / Scaling 2 (Coordinate by X/Y Data)

Outline
This instruction executes scaling of the input value using a specified data table, and outputs the result.
SCL (FNC259) is also available with a different data table configuration for scaling.
SCL2 instruction is supported in the FX3UC Series Ver. 1.30 or later.
→ For SCL (FNC259) instruction, refer to Section 29.4.

1. Instruction format

FNC 269 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D SCL2 P SCL2 Continuous DSCL2 Continuous

7 steps Operation 13 steps Operation
SCL2P Pulse (Single) DSCL2P Pulse (Single)
Operation Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Input value used in scaling or device number storing the input value

S2 Head device number storing the conversion table used in scaling 16- or 32-bit binary

D Device number storing the output value controlled by scaling

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

S2 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

722
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.7 FNC269 – SCL2 / Scaling 2 (Coordinate by X/Y Data)

21
Explanation of function and operation

Real Time Clock

FNC169
FNC160-
1. 16-bit operation (SCL2 and SCL2P)
The input value specified in S1 is processed by scaling for the specified conversion characteristics, and
stored to a device number specified in D . Conversion for scaling is executed based on the data table
stored in a device specified in S2 and later. 22
If the output data is not an integer, however, the number in the first decimal place is rounded.

External Device
FNC179
FNC170-
→ For the method to set the conversion table for scaling, refer to the next page.

Command
Conversion setting data table for scaling
input Device assignment in
FNC 269 Set item
S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ setting data table
SCL2
Number of coordinate points
23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Y (“5” in the case shown in the left S2
Point 2 figure)
Output Point 5 Point 1 S2 +1
value
( D‚ ) Point 3 Point 2 S2 +2

Point 4
X coordinate Point 3 S2 +3 24
Point 1

Others
FNC189
FNC181-
Point 4 S2 +4
X
Input value ( S1 ‚ ) Point 5 S2 +5
Operation Operation
error Operation is enabled. Point 1 S2 +6
error
Point 2 S2 +7
Y coordinate Point 3 S2 +8
25

Block Data
FNC199
FNC190-
Point 4 S2 +9
Point 5 S2 +10

2. 32-bit operation (DSCL2 and DSCL2P)

The input value specified in [ S1 +1, S1 ] is processed by scaling for the specified conversion 26
characteristics, and stored to a device number specified in [ D +1, D ]. Conversion for scaling is

Character String
FNC209
FNC200-
executed based on the data table stored in a device specified in [ S2 +1, S2 ] and later.
If the output data is not an integer, however, the number in the first decimal place is rounded.
Conversion setting data table for scaling
Command
input
FNC 269 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚
Set item
Device assignment in
setting data table
27
DSCL2

Data
FNC219
FNC210-
Number of coordinate points
(“5” in the case shown in the left [ S2 +1, S2 ]
Y figure)
Point 2
Point 1 [ S2 +3, S2 +2]
Output Point 5
value
( D‚ ) Point 3
Point 2 [ S2 +5, S2 +4] 28
X coordinate Point 3 [ S2 +7, S2 +6]
Data
FNC249
FNC220-

Point 1 Point 4 Point 4 [ S2 +9, S2 +8]

X Point 5 [ S2 +11, S2 +10]
Input value ( S1 ‚ )
Operation Operation Point 1 [ S2 +13, S2 +12]
error Operation is enabled. error
Point 2 [ S2 +15, S2 +14]
29
Data Table
FNC269
FNC250-

Y coordinate Point 3 [ S2 +17, S2 +16]

Point 4 [ S2 +19, S2 +18]
Point 5 [ S2 +21, S2 +20]

30
Ex-Device
FNC274
FNC270-

723
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.7 FNC269 – SCL2 / Scaling 2 (Coordinate by X/Y Data)

3. Setting the conversion table for scaling

The conversion table for scaling is set based on the data table stored in a device specified in [ S2 +1,
S2 ] and later.
The data table has the following configuration:
→ For a setting example, refer to the next page.
Device assignment in setting data table
Set item
16-bit operation 32-bit operation
Number of coordinate points S2 [ S2 +1, S2 ]
Point 1 S2 +1 [ S2 +3, S2 +2]
Point 2 S2 +2 [ S2 +5, S2 +4]
X coordinate
...

...

...
Point n (last) S2 +n [ S2 +2n+1, S2 +2n]
Point 1 S2 +n+1 [ S2 +2n+3, S2 +2n+2]
Point 2 S2 +n+2 [ S2 +2n+5, S2 +2n+4]
Y coordinate
...

...

...
Point n (last) S2 +2n [ S2 +4n+1, S2 +4n]

724
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.7 FNC269 – SCL2 / Scaling 2 (Coordinate by X/Y Data)

21
Setting example of the conversion table for scaling

Real Time Clock

FNC169
FNC160-
A setting example for the 16-bit operation is shown below.
For the 32-bit operation, set each item using 32-bit binary value.
In the case of the conversion characteristics for scaling shown in the figure below, set the following data table.
Y
Point 3 Point 6(200,250) 22
(50,100) Point 7

External Device
FNC179
FNC170-
Point 5 (250,90) Point 8(350,90)
(200,70)
Point 2
(20,30) Point 9
(350,30)
Point 1(5,7) Point 4(200,25) Point 10(400,7)
X 23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Setting the conversion setting data table for scaling
Setting device and setting contents
Set item When R0 is specified in Setting Remarks
S2 contents 24
Number of coordinate points S2 R0 K10

Others
FNC189
FNC181-
Point 1 S2 +1 R1 K5
Point 2 S2 +2 R2 K20
Point 3 S2 +3 R3 K50

Point 4 S2 +4 R4 K200
25

Block Data
FNC199
FNC190-
Point 5 S2 +5 R5 K200 Refer to *1.
X coordinate
Point 6 S2 +6 R6 K200

Point 7 S2 +7 R7 K250
Point 8 S2 +8 R8 K350
Refer to *2. 26
Point 9 S2 +9 R9 K350

Character String
FNC209
FNC200-
Point 10 S2 +10 R10 K400

Point 1 S2 +11 R11 K7

Point 2 S2 +12 R12 K30

Point 3 S2 +13 R13 K100 27

Data
FNC219
FNC210-
Point 4 S2 +14 R14 K25
Point 5 S2 +15 R15 K70 Refer to *1.
Y coordinate
Point 6 S2 +16 R16 K250

Point 7 S2 +17 R17 K90

28
Point 8 S2 +18 R18 K90
Data
FNC249
FNC220-

Refer to *2.
Point 9 S2 +19 R19 K30

Point 10 S2 +20 R20 K7

*1. When coordinates are specified using three points as shown in the points 4, 5 and 6, the output value
can be set to an intermediate value. 29
In this example, the output value (intermediate value) is specified by the Y coordinate of the point 5.
Data Table
FNC269
FNC250-

If the X coordinate is same at three points or more, the value at the second point is output also.
*2. When coordinates are specified using two points as shown in the points 8 and 9, the output value is
the Y coordinate at the next point.
In this example, the output value is specified by the Y coordinate of the point 9.
30
Ex-Device
FNC274
FNC270-

725
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 29 Data Table Operation – FNC250 to FNC269
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 29.7 FNC269 – SCL2 / Scaling 2 (Coordinate by X/Y Data)

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When the Xn data is not set in the ascending order in the data table (error code: K6706)
The data table is searched from the low-order side of the device numbers in the data table in the operation.
Accordingly, even if only some Xn data is set in the ascending order in the data table, the instruction is
executed without operation error up to the area of the data table in which the Xn data is set in the
ascending order.
• When S1 is outside the data table (error code: K6706)
• When the value exceeds the 32-bit data range in the middle of operation (error code: K6706)
In this case, check whether the distance between points is not “65535” or more.
If the distance is “65535” or more, reduce the distance between points.

Program example
In the program example shown below, the value input to D0 is processed by scaling based on the conversion
table for scaling set in R0 and later, and output to D10.

Program

M8000
FNC 269 D0 R0 D10
SCL2

END

Operation
Conversion setting data table for scaling
Y Point 3 Setting
Set item Device
(30,100) contents
Number of coordinate
R0 K6
points

Point 4 Point 1 R1 K0
Point 2 (40,45) Point 2 R2 K10
Output value (10,50)
(D10)=35 Point 5 Point 3 R3 K30
(50,30) X coordinate
Point 4 R4 K40
Point 1
(0,0) Point 5 R5 K50
X Point 6 R6 K60
Input value(D0)=7 Point 6
(60,0) Point 1 R7 K0
Point 2 R8 K50
Point 3 R9 K100
Y coordinate
Point 4 R10 K45
Point 5 R11 K30
Point 6 R12 K0

726
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC274
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

21

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
30. External Device Communication
(Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC274
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
FNC270 to FNC274 provide instructions for controlling operations and reading/writing parameters while two
or more FREQROL inverters are connected.

FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

270 IVCK IVCK S1 S2 D n Inverter Status Check

Section 23
30.1

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
Section
271 IVDR IVDR S1 S2 S3 n Inverter Drive
30.2

Section
272 IVRD IVRD S1 S2 D n Inverter Parameter Read
30.3
24

Others
FNC181-FNC189
Section
273 IVWR IVWR S1 S2 S3 n Inverter Parameter Write
30.4

Section
274 IVBWR IVBWR S1 S2 S3 n Inverter Parameter Block Write
30.5

25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

727
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC274
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.1 FNC270 – IVCK / Inverter Status Check

30.1 FNC270 – IVCK / Inverter Status Check

Outline
This instruction reads the operation status of an inverter to a PLC using the computer link operation function
of the inverter. Applicable inverters vary depending on the version.
This instruction corresponds to the EXTR (K10) instruction in the FX2N/FX2NC Series.
→ For detailed explanation of the instruction, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.

1. Instruction format

FNC 270 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

IVCK IVCK Continuous ⎯

9 steps Operation
⎯ ⎯

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Inverter station number (K0 to K31)

S2 Inverter instruction code (shown on the next page)

16-bit binary
D Device number storing the read value
n Channel to be used (K1: ch 1, K2: ch 2)*1

*1. Ch2 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLCs.

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 S 3 3 3

S2 3 3 S 3 3 3

D 3 3 3 3 3 S 3
n 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

→ For detailed explanation of the instruction, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.

1. 16-bit operation (IVCK)

The operation status corresponding to the instruction code*1 specified in S2 of an inverter connected to
communication port n whose station number is specified in S1 is read and transferred to D .
Command
input
FNC270 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ n
IVCK

*1. Refer to the instruction code list shown on the next page.
Refer to the pages in the inverter manual on which the computer link function is explained in detail.

728
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC274
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.1 FNC270 – IVCK / Inverter Status Check

21
2. Instruction codes of inverters

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
The table below shows the inverter instruction codes, S2 , along with their functions.
For instruction codes, refer to the pages in the inverter manual where the computer link function is explained
in detail.
Instruction code of Corresponding inverter
inverter S2
Read contents
F700 A700 E700 D700 V500 F500 A500 E500 S500
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
H7B Operation mode 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Output frequency
H6F 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
(number of rotations)
H70 Output current 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
H71
H72
Output voltage
Special monitor
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
–
–
–
23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
H73 Special monitor selection number 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 – –
H74 Abnormal contents 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
H75 Abnormal contents 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
H76 Abnormal contents 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 –
H77 Abnormal contents 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 – 24
Inverter status monitor

Others
FNC181-FNC189
H79 3 3 3 3 – – – – –
(extension)
H7A Inverter status monitor 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Set frequency
H6E 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
(read from EEPROM)
H6D Set frequency (read from RAM) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
3. Related devices
→ For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Number Number
Description Description
ch1 ch2 ch1 ch2
M8029 Instruction execution complete D8063 D8438 Error code of serial communication error 26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
M8063 M8438 Serial communication error D8150 D8155 Response wait time in inverter communication
M8151 M8156 Inverter communicating *1 D8151 D8156 Step number in inverter communication*2
M8152 M8157 Inverter communication error*1 D8152 D8157 Error code of inverter communication error*1
Inverter communication error Latch of inverter communication error
M8153 M8158
latch*1
D8153 D8158
occurrence step*2 27
M8159 IVBWR instruction error*1 D8159 IVBWR instruction error parameter number*2

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
M8154 D8154

*1. Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN.
*2. Initial value: -1

Cautions 28
→ For other cautions, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

• It is not permitted to use the RS (FNC 80)/RS2 (FNC 87) instruction and an inverter communication
instruction (FNC270 to FNC274) for the same port.
• Two or more inverter communication instructions (FNC270 to FNC274) can be driven for the same port at
the same time. 29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

PLC applicable version

The table below shows PLC versions applicable to each inverter.
PLC FREQROL-V500/F500/A500/E500/S500 FREQROL-F700/A700 FREQROL-E700/D700
FX3G Ver.1.10 or later
FX3U Ver.2.20 or later Ver.2.32 or later
30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

FX3UC Ver.1.00 or later Ver.2.20 or later Ver.2.32 or later

729
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC274
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.2 FNC271 – IVDR / Inverter Drive

30.2 FNC271 – IVDR / Inverter Drive

Outline
This instruction writes a inverter operation required control value to an inverter using the computer link
operation function of the inverter.
This instruction corresponds to the EXTR (K11) instruction in the FX2N/FX2NC Series.
→ For detailed explanation of the instruction, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.

1. Instruction format

FNC 271 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

IVDR IVDR Continuous ⎯

9 steps Operation
⎯ ⎯

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Inverter station number (K0 to K31)

S2 Inverter instruction code (shown on the next page)

Set value to be written to the inverter parameter or device number storing the 16-bit binary
S3
data to be set
n Channel to be used (K1: ch 1, K2: ch 2)*1

*1. Ch2 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLCs.

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 S 3 3 3

S2 3 3 S 3 3 3

S3 3 3 3 3 3 3 S 3
n 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

→ For detailed explanation of the instruction, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.

1. 16-bit operation (IVDR)

The control value specified in S3 is written to the instruction code*1 specified in S2 of an inverter
connected to a communication port n whose station number is specified in S1 .
Command
input
FNC271 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ S3 ‚ n
IVDR

*1. Refer to the instruction code list shown on the next page.
Refer to the pages in the inverter manual on which the computer link function is explained in detail.

730
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC274
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.2 FNC271 – IVDR / Inverter Drive

21
2. Instruction codes of inverters

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
The table below shows the inverter instruction codes, S2 , along with their functions.
For instruction codes, refer to the pages in the inverter manual where the computer link function is explained
in detail.
(Hexadecimal Corresponding inverter
instruction code of
Written contents
22
inverter specified in F700 A700 E700 D700 V500 F500 A500 E500 S500

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
S2
HFB Operation mode 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Special monitor selection
HF3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 – –
number

HF9
Operation command
3 3 3 3 – – – – –
23
(extension)

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
HFA Operation command 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Set frequency
HEE 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
(written to EEPROM)
Set frequency
HED
(written to RAM)
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
24
HFD Inverter reset 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Others
FNC181-FNC189
HF4 Abnormal contents all clear 3 3 3 3 – 3 3 3 3
HFC Parameter all clear 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
HFC User clear – – – – – 3 3 – –

3. Related devices 25
→ For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Number Number
Description Description
ch1 ch2 ch1 ch2
M8029 Instruction execution complete D8063 D8438 Error code of serial communication error
M8063 M8438 Serial communication error D8150 D8155 Response wait time in inverter communication
26
M8151 M8156 Inverter communicating*1 D8151 D8156 Step number in inverter communication*2

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
Error code of inverter communication
M8152 M8157 Inverter communication error*1 D8152 D8157
error*1
Inverter communication error Latch of inverter communication error
M8153 M8158 D8153 D8158
latch*1 occurrence step*2
M8154 M8159 IVBWR instruction error*1 D8154 D8159 IVBWR instruction error parameter number*2 27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
*1. Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN.
*2. Initial value: -1

Cautions
→ For other cautions, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual. 28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

• It is not permitted to use the RS (FNC 80)/RS2 (FNC 87) instruction and an inverter communication
instruction (FNC270 to FNC274) for the same port.
• Two or more inverter communication instructions (FNC270 to FNC274) can be driven for the same port at
the same time.
29
PLC applicable version
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

The table below shows PLC versions applicable to each inverter.

PLC FREQROL-V500/F500/A500/E500/S500 FREQROL-F700/A700 FREQROL-E700/D700
FX3G Ver.1.10 or later
FX3U Ver.2.20 or later Ver.2.32 or later
FX3UC Ver.1.00 or later Ver.2.20 or later Ver.2.32 or later
30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

731
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC274
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.3 FNC272 – IVRD / Inverter Parameter Read

30.3 FNC272 – IVRD / Inverter Parameter Read

Outline
This instruction reads an inverter parameter to the PLC using the computer link operation function of the
inverter.
This instruction corresponds to the EXTR (K12) instruction in the FX2N/FX2NC Series.
→ For detailed explanation of the instruction, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.

1. Instruction format

FNC 272 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

IVRD IVRD Continuous ⎯

9 steps Operation
⎯ ⎯

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Inverter station number (K0 to K31)

S2 Inverter parameter number

16-bit binary
D Device number storing the read value
n Channel to be used (K1: ch 1, K2: ch 2)*1

*1. Ch2 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLCs.

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 S 3 3 3

S2 3 3 S 3 3 3

D 3 3 S 3
n 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

→ For detailed explanation of the instruction, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.

1. 16-bit operation (IVRD)

The value of the parameter S2 is read from an inverter connected to a communication port n whose
station number is S1 , and output to D .
Command
input
FNC272 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ D‚ n
IVRD

732
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC274
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.3 FNC272 – IVRD / Inverter Parameter Read

21
2. Related devices

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
→ For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Number Number
Description Description
ch1 ch2 ch1 ch2

M8063
M8029 Instruction execution complete
M8438 Serial communication error
D8063
D8150
D8438 Error code of serial communication error
D8155 Response wait time in inverter communication
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
M8151 M8156 Inverter communicating*1 D8151 D8156 Step number in inverter communication*2
Error code of inverter communication
M8152 M8157 Inverter communication error*1 D8152 D8157
error*1
Inverter communication error Latch of inverter communication error
M8153 M8158
latch*1 D8153 D8158
occurrence step*2 23
M8154 M8159 IVBWR instruction error*1 D8154 D8159 IVBWR instruction error parameter number*2

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
*1. Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN.
*2. Initial value: -1

Cautions 24
→ For other cautions, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.

Others
FNC181-FNC189
• It is not permitted to use the RS (FNC 80)/RS2 (FNC 87) instruction and an inverter communication
instruction (FNC270 to FNC274) for the same port.
• Two or more inverter communication instructions (FNC270 to FNC274) can be driven for the same port at
the same time. 25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
PLC applicable version
The table below shows PLC versions applicable to each inverter.
PLC FREQROL-V500/F500/A500/E500/S500 FREQROL-F700/A700 FREQROL-E700/D700
FX3G Ver.1.10 or later
FX3U Ver.2.20 or later Ver.2.32 or later 26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
FX3UC Ver.1.00 or later Ver.2.20 or later Ver.2.32 or later

27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

733
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC274
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.4 FNC273 – IVWR / Inverter Parameter Write

30.4 FNC273 – IVWR / Inverter Parameter Write

Outline
This instruction writes an inverter parameter of an inverter using the computer link operation function of the
inverter.
This instruction corresponds to the EXTR (K13) instruction in the FX2N/FX2NC Series.
→ For detailed explanation of the instruction, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.

1. Instruction format

FNC 273 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

IVWR IVWR Continuous ⎯

9 steps Operation
⎯ ⎯

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Inverter station number (K0 to K31)

S2 Inverter parameter number

Set value to be written to the inverter parameter or device number storing the 16-bit binary
S3
data to be set
n Channel to be used (K1: ch 1, K2: ch 2)*1

*1. Ch2 is not available in 14-point and 24-point type FX3G PLCs.

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 S 3 3 3

S2 3 3 S 3 3 3

S3 3 3 S 3 3 3
n 3 3

S: This function is supported only in FX3U/FX3UC PLCs.

Explanation of function and operation

→ For detailed explanation of the instruction, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.

1. 16-bit operation (IVWR)

A value specified in S3 is written to a parameter S2 in an inverter connected to a communication port n
whose station number is S1 .
Command
input
FNC273 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ S3 ‚ n
IVWR

734
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC274
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.4 FNC273 – IVWR / Inverter Parameter Write

21
2. Related devices

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
→ For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Number Number
Description Description
ch1 ch2 ch1 ch2

M8063
M8029 Instruction execution complete
M8438 Serial communication error
D8063
D8150
D8438 Error code of serial communication error
D8155 Response wait time in inverter communication
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
M8151 M8156 Inverter communicating*1 D8151 D8156 Step number in inverter communication*2
Error code of inverter communication
M8152 M8157 Inverter communication error*1 D8152 D8157
error*1
Inverter communication error Latch of inverter communication error
M8153 M8158
latch*1 D8153 D8158
occurrence step*2 23
M8154 M8159 IVBWR instruction error*1 D8154 D8159 IVBWR instruction error parameter number*2

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
*1. Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN.
*2. Initial value: -1

Cautions 24
→ For other cautions, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.

Others
FNC181-FNC189
• It is not permitted to use the RS (FNC 80)/RS2 (FNC 87) instruction and an inverter communication
instruction (FNC270 to FNC274) for the same port.
• Two or more inverter communication instructions (FNC270 to FNC274) can be driven for the same port at
the same time. 25
• Cautions on using the password function in the D700 Series.

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
1) When a communication error occurs
When a communication error occurs in an inverter communication instruction, the FX PLC automatically
retries communication up to 3 times*1.
Accordingly, note that the number of times of password reset error displayed in accordance with the
setting of Pr297 may not agree with the actual number of times of password input error as described 26
below when a password reset error occurs in the D700 Series in which "display of the number of times of

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
password reset error"*2 is made valid using Pr297.
Do not execute automatic retry (re-driving of an inverter instruction) using a sequence program when
writing data to Pr297.

Cases in which a password reset error occurs in an inverter communication instruction, and the actual
number of times of reset error in such cases.
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219
- When a wrong password is written to Pr297 due to a password input error
When the writing instruction is executed once, a password reset error occurs 3 times.
- When the password cannot be written correctly to Pr297 due to noise, etc.
A password reset error occurs up to 3 times.
28
2) When registering the password
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

When registering the password in the D700 Series inverter using an inverter communication instruction,
write the password to Pr297, read Pr297, and then confirm that registration of the password is completed
normally*3.
If writing of the password to Pr297 is not completed normally due to noise, etc., the FX PLC automatically
retries writing, and the registered password may be reset by the retry. 29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

*1. The FX PLC executes the first communication, and then retries communication twice (3 time in total).
*2. When "display of the number of times of password reset error" is made valid in the D700 Series using
Pr297 and when a password reset error occurs 5 times, the "reading/writing restriction" cannot be
reset even if the right password is input.
For recovery from this status, it is necessary to all-clear all parameters in the D700 Series. 30
*3. When the value given as a result of reading Pr297 is "0" to "4", registration of the password is
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

completed normally.

735
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC274
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.4 FNC273 – IVWR / Inverter Parameter Write

PLC applicable version

The table below shows PLC versions applicable to each inverter.
PLC FREQROL-V500/F500/A500/E500/S500 FREQROL-F700/A700 FREQROL-E700/D700
FX3G Ver.1.10 or later
FX3U Ver.2.20 or later Ver.2.32 or later
FX3UC Ver.1.00 or later Ver.2.20 or later Ver.2.32 or later

736
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC274
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.5 FNC274 – IVBWR / Inverter Parameter Block Write

21
30.5 FNC274 – IVBWR / Inverter Parameter Block Write

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Outline
This instruction writes parameters of an inverter at one time using the computer link operation function of the
inverter.
22
→ For detailed explanation of the instruction, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
1. Instruction format

FNC 274 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

IVBWR 9 steps
IVBWR Continuous
Operation
⎯ 23
⎯ ⎯

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1 Station number of an inverter (K0 to K31)
24

Others
FNC181-FNC189
S2 Number of parameters in an inverter to be written at one time
16-bit binary
S3 Head device number of a parameter table to be written to an inverter
n Used channel (K1: ch 1, K2: ch 2)

3. Applicable devices 25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3 3 3 3
26
S2 3 3 3 3 3 3

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
S3 3 3 3 3
n 3 3

27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

737
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC274
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.5 FNC274 – IVBWR / Inverter Parameter Block Write

Explanation of function and operation

→ For detailed explanation of the instruction, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.

1. 16-bit operation (IVBWR)

A data table*1 (parameter numbers and set values) specified in S2 and S3 is written to an inverter
connected to a communication port n whose station number is S1 all at once.
Command
input
FNC274 S1 ‚ S2 ‚ S3 ‚ n
IVBWR

*1. The table below shows the data table format.

S2 : Number of parameters to be written
S3 : Head device number of data table
Device Parameter numbers to be written and set values
S3 Parameter number
1st parameter
S3 +1 Set value

S3 +2 Parameter number
2nd parameter
S3 +3 Set value
...

...

...
S3 +2 S2 -4 Parameter number
“ S2 -1”th parameter
S3 +2 S2 -3 Set value

S3 +2 S2 -2 Parameter number
“ S2 ”th parameter
S3 +2 S2 -1 Set value

2. Related devices
→ For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Number Number
Description Description
ch1 ch2 ch1 ch2
M8029 Instruction execution complete D8063 D8438 Error code of serial communication error
M8063 M8438 Serial communication error D8150 D8155 Response wait time in inverter communication
M8151 M8156 Inverter communicating*1 D8151 D8156 Step number in inverter communication*2
Error code of inverter communication
M8152 M8157 Inverter communication error*1 D8152 D8157
error*1
Inverter communication error Latch of inverter communication error
M8153 M8158 D8153 D8158
latch*1 occurrence step*2
M8154 M8159 IVBWR instruction error*1 D8154 D8159 IVBWR instruction error parameter number*2

*1. Cleared when the PLC mode switches from STOP to RUN.
*2. Initial value: -1

Cautions
→ For other cautions, refer to the Data Communication Edition manual.
• It is not permitted to use the RS (FNC 80)/RS2 (FNC 87) instruction and an inverter communication
instruction (FNC270 to FNC274) for the same port.
• Two or more inverter communication instructions (FNC270 to FNC274) can be driven for the same port at
the same time.

738
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 30 External Device Communication (Inverter Communication) – FNC270 to FNC274
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 30.5 FNC274 – IVBWR / Inverter Parameter Block Write

21
Applicable models depending on the PLC version

Control
Real Time Clock
FNC160-FNC169
Available inverter models are added depending on the version, as shown in the table below.
Applicable version
Item Outline of function
FX3U FX3UC

Ver.2.32 or later Ver.2.32 or later

Addition of applicable
models
Mitsubishi FREQROL-E700 Series general-purpose inverters
are supported.
22

External Device
FNC170-FNC179
Addition of applicable Mitsubishi FREQROL-F700/A700 Series general-purpose
Ver.2.20 or later Ver.2.20 or later
models inverters are supported.

23

Instructions
Alternate
FNC180
24

Others
FNC181-FNC189
25

Operation
Block Data
FNC190-FNC199
26

Control
Character String
FNC200-FNC209
27

Operation 3
Data
FNC210-FNC219

28
Comparison
Data
FNC220-FNC249

29
Operation
Data Table
FNC250-FNC269

30
Inverter Comms
Ex-Device
FNC270-FNC274

739
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 31 Data Transfer 3 – FNC275 to FNC279
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

31. Data Transfer 3 – FNC275 to FNC279

FNC275 to FNC279 provide instructions for executing more complicated processing for fundamental applied
instructions and for special processing.

FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

275 –

276 –

277 –

Section
278 RBFM RBFM m1 m2 D n1 n2 Divided BFM Read
31.1

Section
279 WBFM WBFM m1 m2 S n1 n2 Divided BFM Write
31.2

740
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 31 Data Transfer 3 – FNC275 to FNC279
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31.1 FNC278 – RBFM / Divided BFM Read

31
31.1 FNC278 – RBFM / Divided BFM Read

Transfer 3
Data
FNC275-FNC279
Outline
This instruction reads data from continuous buffer memories (BFM) in a special function block/unit over
several operation cycles by the time division method. This instruction is convenient for reading receive data,
32

Processing 2
High Speed
FNC280-FNC289
etc. stored in buffer memories in a special function block/unit for communication by the time division method.
FROM (FNC 78) instruction is also available to read the buffer memory (BFM) data.
→ For FROM (FNC 78) instruction, refer to Section 15.9.

1. Instruction format
33
FNC 278 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

Register
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
RBFM Continuous
11 steps RBFM Operation −

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
34

Programming
SFC•STL
m1 Unit number [0 to 7]
m2 Head buffer memory (BFM) number [0 to 32766]
D Head device number storing data to be read from buffer memory (BFM) 16-bit binary data
n1 Number of all buffer memories (BFM) to be read [1 to 32767]
n2 Number of points transferred in one operation cycle [1 to 32767] 35

Function
Interrupt
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P 36

Special Device
m1 3 3 3 3
m2 3 3 3 3

D S 3 3
n1 3 3 3 3
n2 3 3 3 3 37

Error Code
S: Except special data register (D)

A
Information
Version Up

B
Execution Times

C
Instruction List
Applicable

741
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 31 Data Transfer 3 – FNC275 to FNC279
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31.1 FNC278 – RBFM / Divided BFM Read

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (RBFM)
"n1" buffer memory (BFM) units at location # "m2" in special function unit/block No. "m1" are read to D in
the PLC. While transfering, "n1" is divided by "n2" so n1/n2 buffer memories (rounded up when there is a
remainder) are transferred per scan time
→ For the unit No., buffer memory (BFM) #, cautions, and program example,
refer to Subsection 31.1.1.
Command
input FNC278 Unit No. "m1" PLC
m1 m2 D‚ n1 n2 *1
RBFM Read
BFM#(m2) D‚
M8029
Instruction execution
M{{
complete
M8328 BFM#(m2+n1-1) D‚ +n1-1
Instruction
M……
non-execution *1 "n2" buffer memories are read in
M8329 each operation cycle. Reading is
Instruction execution
MUU executed in "n1/n2" times. ("n1/n2"
abnormally complete
is rounded up if it is not an integer.)

• When the instruction is finished normally, the instruction execution complete flag M8029 turns ON. When
the instruction is finished abnormally, the instruction execution abnormally complete flag M8329 turns ON.
• When RBFM (FNC278) or WBFM (FNC279) instruction is executed in another step for the same unit
number, the instruction non-execution flag M8328 is set to ON, and execution of such an instruction is
paused.
When execution of the other target instruction is complete, the paused instruction resumes.

Related devices
→ For the flag use methods for instruction execution complete and instruction execution
abnormally complete, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Device Name Description
M8029 Instruction execution complete Turns ON when an instruction is finished normally.
Turns ON when RBFM (FNC278) or WBFM (FNC279)
M8328 Instruction non-execution instruction in another step is executed for the same unit
number.
M8329 Instruction execution abnormally complete Turns ON when an instruction is finished abnormally.

Related instructions
Instruction Description
FROM(FNC 78) Read from a special function block
TO(FNC 79) Write to a special function block
WBFM(FNC279) Divided BFM write

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following case; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When the unit number "m1" does not exist (error code: K6708)

742
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 31 Data Transfer 3 – FNC275 to FNC279
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31.1 FNC278 – RBFM / Divided BFM Read

31
31.1.1 Common items between RBFM (FNC278) instruction and WBFM (FNC279)

Transfer 3
Data
FNC275-FNC279
instruction

Specification of unit number of special function block/unit and buffer memory

→ For the connection method of special extension units/blocks, 32
number of connectable units/blocks, and handling of I/O numbers,

Processing 2
High Speed
FNC280-FNC289
refer to the manual of the PLC used and special function block/unit.

1. Unit number "m1" of a special extension unit/block

Use the unit number to specify to which equipment the RBFM/WBFM instruction works.
Setting range: K0 to K7
33
Unit No. 0

Register
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
Built-in Unit Unit Unit
CC-Link/LT No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
FX3UC- I/O Special Special I/O Special
32MT-LT extension extension extension extension extension
(-2)
main unit
block block block block block 34

Programming
SFC•STL
A unit number is automatically assigned to each special extension unit/block connected to the PLC.
The unit number is assigned in the way "No. 0 → No. 1 → No. 2 ..." starting from the equipment nearest the
main unit.
When the main unit is the FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2), the unit number is assigned in the way "No. 1 → No. 2 → No.
3 ..." starting from the equipment nearest to the main unit because the CC-Link/LT master is built into the
FX3UC-32MT-LT(-2).
35

Function
Interrupt
2. Buffer memory (BFM) number "m2"
Up to 32767 16-bit RAM memories are built in a special extension unit/block, and they are called buffer
memories.
The buffer memory number is from "0" to "32766", and the contents are determined according to each special
function unit/block. 36
Setting range: K0 to K32766

Special Device
→ For the contents of buffer memories, refer to the manual of the special function block/unit used.

Cautions
• A watchdog timer error may occur when many numbers of points are transferred in one operation cycle. In
such a case, take either of the following countermeasures: 37

Error Code
- Change the watchdog timer time
By overwriting the contents of D8000 (watchdog timer time), the watchdog timer detection time is
changed (initial value: K200).
When the program shown below is input, the sequence program will be monitored with the new
watchdog timer time.
M8002
A
FNC 12 K300 D8000 Watchdog timer time: 300 ms
Information
Version Up

0
MOV
Initial pulse
Watchdog timer refresh
FNC 07 When WDT (FNC 07) instruction is not programmed, the value
WDT of D8000 becomes valid during END processing.

- Change the number of transferred points "n2" in each operation cycle

Change the number of transferred points "n2" in each operation cycle to a smaller value.
B
Execution Times

C
Instruction List
Applicable

743
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 31 Data Transfer 3 – FNC275 to FNC279
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31.1 FNC278 – RBFM / Divided BFM Read

• Do not stop the driving of the instruction while it is being executed. If driving is stopped, the buffer memory
(BFM) reading/writing processing is suspended, but the data acquired in the middle of reading/writing
processing is stored in D and later and buffer memories (BFM).
Command
input
SET M{{

M{{
FNC278 m1 m2 D‚ n1 n2
RBFM
M8029
RST M{{
Instruction execution complete

• When indexing is executed, the contents of index registers at the begining of execution are used.
Even if the contents of index registers are changed after the instruction, such changes do not affect the
process of the instruction.
• The contents of "n1" devices starting from D change while RBFM (FNC278) instruction is executed.
After execution of the instruction is completed, execute another instruction for "n1" devices starting from
D .

• Do not update (change) the contents of "n1" devices starting from S while WBFM (FNC279) instruction
is executed. If the contents are updated, the intended data may not be written to the buffer memories
(BFM).
• Do not update (change) the contents of "n1" buffer memories (BFM) starting from the buffer memory No.
"m2" while RBFM (FNC278) instruction is executed. If the contents are updated, the intended data may
not be read.

744
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 31 Data Transfer 3 – FNC275 to FNC279
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31.1 FNC278 – RBFM / Divided BFM Read

31
Program example

Transfer 3
Data
FNC275-FNC279
In the example shown below, data is read from and written to the buffer memories (BFM) in the unit No. 2 as
follows:
• When X000 is set to ON, data stored in D100 to D179 (80 points) are written to the buffer memories (BFM)
#1001 to 1080 in the special function block/unit whose unit number is No. 2 by 16 points in each operation
cycle. 32

Processing 2
High Speed
FNC280-FNC289
• When X001 is set to ON, the buffer memories (BFM) #2001 to 2080 (80 points) in the special function
block/unit whose unit number is No. 2 are written to D200 to D279 by 16 points in each operation cycle.

X000 The BFM write start flag is set

SET M0
to ON.
BFM write
start 33
D100 to D179 (80 points) are written to

Register
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
M0 FNC279 K2 K1001 D100 K80 K16 the buffer memories #1001 to 1080 in
WBFM the unit No. 2 (in 5 operation cycles).
BFM write
start M8029
RST M0 The BFM write start flag is set to OFF.
Instruction execution complete
M8328
34
Execution of the WBFM instruction is

Programming
SFC•STL
Y000
waited.
Instruction non-execution
M8329
RST M0 The BFM write start flag is set to OFF.
Instruction execution

X001
abnormally complete
35
SET M5 The BFM read start flag is set to ON.

Function
Interrupt
BFM read
start
M5 The buffer memories #2001 to 2080 (80
FNC278 K2 K2001 D200 K80 K16 points) in the unit No. 2 are read to
RBFM D200 to D279 (in 5 operation cycles).
BFM read
start M8029 36
RST M5 The BFM read start flag is set to OFF.

Special Device
Instruction execution complete
M8328
Execution of the RBFM instruction is
Y001
waited.
Instruction non-execution
M8329
RST M5 The BFM read start flag is set to OFF. 37
Instruction execution

Error Code
abnormally complete
END

A
Information
Version Up

B
Execution Times

C
Instruction List
Applicable

745
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 31 Data Transfer 3 – FNC275 to FNC279
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31.2 FNC279 – WBFM / Divided BFM Write

31.2 FNC279 – WBFM / Divided BFM Write

Outline
This instruction writes data to continuous buffer memories (BFM) in a special function block/unit over several
operation cycles by the time division method. This instruction is convenient for writing send data, etc. to
buffer memories in a special function block/unit for communication by the time division method.
TO (FNC 79) instruction is also available for writing data to the buffer memory (BFM).
→ For TO (FNC 79) instruction, refer to Section 15.10.

1. Instruction format

FNC 279 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

WBFM Continuous
11 steps WBFM Operation −

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
m1 Unit number [0 to 7]
m2 Head buffer memory (BFM) number [0 to 32766]
S Head device number storing data to be written to buffer memory (BFM) 16-bit binary data
n1 Number of all buffer memories (BFM) to be written [1 to 32767]
n2 Number of points transferred in one operation cycle [1 to 32767]

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P
m1 3 3 3 3
m2 3 3 3 3

S S 3 3
n1 3 3 3 3
n2 3 3 3 3

S: Except special data register (D)

746
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 31 Data Transfer 3 – FNC275 to FNC279
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 31.2 FNC279 – WBFM / Divided BFM Write

31
Explanation of function and operation

Transfer 3
Data
FNC275-FNC279
1. 16-bit operation (WBFM)
"n1" word units from S in the PLC are written to buffer memory (BFM) location # "m2" in special function
unit/block No. "m1". While transfering, "n1" is divided by "n2" so n1/n2 words (rounded up when there is a
remainder) are transferred per scan time. 32
→ For the unit No., buffer memory (BFM) No., cautions, and program example,

Processing 2
High Speed
FNC280-FNC289
refer to Subsection 31.1.1.
Command
input FNC278 PLC Unit No. "m1"
m1 m2 S‚ n1 n2 *1
WBFM Write
S‚ BFM#(m2)
M8029
M{{
Instruction execution 33
complete

Register
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
M8328 S‚ +n1-1 BFM#(m2+n1-1)
Instruction
M……
non-execution *1 "n2" points are written in each
M8329 operation cycle. Writing is executed
Instruction execution
MUU in "n1/n2" transfers. ("n1/n2" is
abnormally complete
rounded up if it is not an integer.)
34

Programming
SFC•STL
• When the instruction is finished normally, the instruction execution complete flag M8029 turns ON. When
the instruction is finished abnormally, the instruction execution abnormally complete flag M8329 turns ON.
• When the RBFM (FNC278) or WBFM (FNC279) instruction is executed in another step for the same unit
number, the instruction non-execution flag M8328 is set to ON, and execution of such an instruction is
paused.
When execution of the first target instruction is complete, the paused instruction resumes.
35

Function
Interrupt
Related devices
→ For the flag use methods for instruction execution complete and instruction execution
abnormally complete, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Device Name Description 36
M8029 Instruction execution complete Turns ON when an instruction is finished normally.

Special Device
Turns ON when RBFM (FNC278) or WBFM (FNC279)
M8328 Instruction non-execution
instruction in another step is executed for a same unit number.
M8329 Instruction execution abnormally complete Turns ON when an instruction is finished abnormally.

Related instructions 37

Error Code
Instruction Description
FROM(FNC 78) Read from a special function block
TO(FNC 79) Write to a special function block
RBFM(FNC278) Divided BFM read
A
Errors
Information
Version Up

An operation error is caused in the following case; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When the unit number "m1" does not exist (error code: K6708)

B
Execution Times

C
Instruction List
Applicable

747
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 32 High Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

32. High Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289

FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

High Speed Counter Compare With Section

280 HSCT HSCT S1 m S2 D n Data Table 32.1

281 − −

282 − −

283 − −

284 − −

285 − −

286 − −

287 − −

288 − −

289 − −

748
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 32 High Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 32.1 FNC280 – HSCT / High Speed Counter Compare With Data Table

31
32.1 FNC280 – HSCT / High Speed Counter Compare With Data Table

Transfer 3
Data
FNC275-FNC279
Outline
This instruction compares the current value of a high speed counter with a data table of comparison points,
and then sets or resets up to 16 output devices.
32

Processing 2
High Speed
FNC280-FNC289
1. Instruction format

FNC 280 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

D HSCT ⎯ 21 steps
DHSCT Continuous

⎯ ⎯
Operation
33

Register
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S1
m
Head device number storing the data table
Number of comparison points in data table [1 ≤ m ≤ 128]
16- or 32-bit binary
16-bit binary
34

Programming
SFC•STL
S2 High speed counter number (C235 to C255) 32-bit binary

D Head device number to which the operation status is output Bit

n Number of devices to which the operation status is output [1 ≤ n ≤ 16] 16-bit binary

3. Applicable devices 35

Function
Interrupt
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S1 3 3 3
36
m 3 3

Special Device
S2 S 3

D 3 3 3 3
n 3 3

Only a high speed counter C235 to C255 can be specified in "S". 37

Error Code
Explanation of function and operation
1. 32-bit operation (DHSCT)
The current value of a high speed counter specified in S2 is compared with the data table shown below
which has (3±m) points stored in S1 and later, and the operation output set value (ON or OFF) specified A
in the data table is output to D to D +n-1.
Information
Version Up

Command
input
FNC280 S1 ‚ m S2 ‚ D‚ n
DHSCT

B
Execution Times

C
Instruction List
Applicable

749
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 32 High Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 32.1 FNC280 – HSCT / High Speed Counter Compare With Data Table

Data table used for comparison

Comparison Operation output set value Operation output
Comparison value
point number (SET [1] or RESET [0]) destination
0 S1 +1, S1 S1 +2
1 S1 +4, S1 +3 S1 +5
2 S1 +7 S1 +6 S1 +8
D to D +n-1
...

...

...
m-2 S1 +3m-5, S1 +3m-6 S1 +3m-4
m-1 S1 +3m-2, S1 +3m-3 S1 +3m-1

Operation output setting (SET [1] or RESET [0]) [Up to 16 points]

A 7 1 6
Operation
output setting 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0

Operation output setting When the current value of the high speed counter
= HA716 becomes equivalent to the comparison value, the
operation output setting pattern is output.
In the case of " D‚ = :ON
Y000, n = K10" Y Y Y Y Y Y YYYY :OFF
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

D‚ +n-1 D‚

1) When this instruction is executed, the data table is set as the comparison target.
2) When the current value of the high speed counter, specified in S2 , becomes equivalent to the
comparison value in the data table, the corresponding operation output specified in the data table is
output to D to D +n-1.
If an output (Y) is specified in D , the output processing is executed immediately without waiting for
the output refresh executed by the END instruction.
When specifying an output (Y), make sure that the least significant digit of the device number is “0”.
Examples: Y000, Y010 and Y020
3) Immediately after step 2), “1” is added to the current table counter value D8138.
4) The next comparison point is set as the comparison target data.
5) Steps 2) and 3) are repeated until the current value of the table counter D8138 becomes "m".
When the current value becomes "m", the instruction execution complete flag M8138 turns ON, and the
execution returns to step 1). At this time, the table counter D8138 is reset to "0".
6) When the command contact is set to OFF, execution of the instruction is stopped and the table counter
D8138 is reset to “0”.

750
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 32 High Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 32.1 FNC280 – HSCT / High Speed Counter Compare With Data Table

31
Operation example

Transfer 3
Data
FNC275-FNC279
X010
FNC280 D200 K5 C235 Y010 K3
DHSCT
M8000
FNC 54
DHSCR
K900 C235 C235
32

Processing 2
High Speed
FNC280-FNC289
Comparison data SET/RESET pattern
Comparison Operation
Comparison Table counter D8138
point number Device Device output set
value
value
0 D201,D200 K321 D202 H0001 0↓
33
1 D204,D203 K432 D205 H0007 1↓

Register
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
2 D207,D206 K543 D208 H0002 2↓
3 D210,D209 K764 D211 H0000 3↓
4 D213,D212 K800 D214 H0003 4↓ (Repeated from “0↓”)

34
Current value

Programming
SFC•STL
of C235
900 900
900 800
800 764
675
543
764
543 35

Function
Interrupt
450 432 432
321
321
225

0
Command Time
36
contact

Special Device
X010 OFF
ON

Y010 OFF*1 ON Because DHSCT

instruction is not
executed, the
Y011 OFF*1 ON operation outputs are
not changed by this
37
instruction.

Error Code
*1
Y012 OFF ON

4
HSCT table 3 3
counter 2 2
D8138 0 1 0 1 0

HSCT
A
Information
Version Up

instruction
execution
complete flag
M8138 OFF ON

*1. If this instruction is not executed, no processing is executed for outputs.

In the operation example shown above, the command contact is “OFF”. B
Execution Times

2. Related device
Device Name Description
HSCT(FNC280) instruction
M8138 Turns ON when the operation for the final table No. "m-1" is completed.
execution complete flag
D8138 HSCT(FNC280) table counter Stores the comparison point number handled as the comparison target. C
Instruction List
Applicable

751
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 32 High Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 32.1 FNC280 – HSCT / High Speed Counter Compare With Data Table

Cautions
• This instruction can be executed only once in a program.
If this instruction is programmed two or more times, an operation error is caused by the second instruction
and later, and the instruction will not be executed. (error code: K6765)
• This instruction constructs the data table at the END instruction of the first execution of the instruction.
Accordingly, the operation output works after the second scan and later.
• With regard to DHSCT (FNC280), DHSCS (FNC 53), DHSCR (FNC 54) and DHSZ (FNC 55) instructions,
up to 32 instructions can be executed in one operation cycle. An operation error is caused by the 33rd
instruction and later, and the instruction will not be executed. (error code: K6705)
• If an output (Y) is specified in D , the output processing is executed immediately without waiting for the
output refresh executed by END instruction.
When specifying an output (Y), make sure that the least significant digit of the device number is “0”.
Examples: Y000, Y010 and Y020
• When a high speed counter specified in S2 is indexed with index, all high speed counters are handled
as software counters.
• For this instruction, only one comparison point (one line) is handled as the comparison target at one time.
Processing will not move to the next comparison point until the current counter value becomes equivalent
to the comparison point currently selected as the comparison target.
If the current value of a high speed counter executes up counting using the comparison data table shown
in the operation example on the previous page, make sure to execute the instruction while the current
value of the high speed counter is smaller than the comparison value in comparison point No. 1.
• When the DHSCT instruction is used with a hardware counter (C235, C236, C237, C238, C239, C240,
C244 (OP), C245 (OP), C246, C248 (OP), C251, C253), the hardware counter is automatically switched to
a software counter, and the maximum frequency and total frequency are affected.

Errors
An operation error occurs in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is stored
in D8067.
• When any devices other than high speed counters C235 to C255 are specified in S2 (error code: K6706)
• When the “3m-1”th device from a device specified in S1 exceeds the last number of the device (error
code: K6706)
• When the “n”th device from a device specified in D exceeds the last number of the device (error code:
K6706)
• When this instruction is used two or more times in a program (error code: K6765)
• With regard to DHSCT (FNC280), DHSCS (FNC 53), DHSCR (FNC 54) and DHSZ (FNC 55) instructions,
up to 32 instructions can be executed in one operation cycle. An operation error is caused by the 33rd
instruction and later, and the instruction will not be executed. (error code: K6705)

752
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 32 High Speed Processing 2 – FNC280 to FNC289
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 32.1 FNC280 – HSCT / High Speed Counter Compare With Data Table

31
Program example

Transfer 3
Data
FNC275-FNC279
In the program shown below, the current value of C235 (counting X000) is compared with the comparison
data table set in R0 and later, and a specified pattern is output to Y010 to Y013.
M8000
M8235 C235 is used as an up counter.
32
M8000

Processing 2
High Speed
FNC280-FNC289
C235
K0
FNC 12 H0008 K1Y010 Initial output
MOVP

FNC 54
DHSCR
K400 C235 C235 Ring length: 0 to 400 33

Register
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
FNC280 R0 K5 C235 Y010 K4
DHSCT

END
34

Programming
SFC•STL
Operation example
Comparison data SET/RESET pattern
Comparison Operation
Comparison Table counter D8138
point Device Device output set
value
value 35
0 R1,R0 K100 R2 H0007 0↓

Function
Interrupt
1 R4,R3 K150 R5 H0004 1↓
2 R7,R6 K200 R8 H0003 2↓
3 R10,R9 K250 R11 H0006 3↓
4 R13,R12 K300 R14 H0008 4↓ (Repeated from “0↓”)
36

Special Device
400

300
250 37
200

Error Code
150
100

0
Time A
Y010 OFF ON
Information
Version Up

Y011 OFF ON

Y012 OFF ON
Y013 ON OFF
4
B
3 3
Execution Times

Table
counter 2 2
D8138 0 1 0 1

C
Instruction List
Applicable

753
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition

33. Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299

FNC No. Mnemonic Symbol Function Reference

Section
290 LOADR LOADR S n Load From ER
33.1

Section
291 SAVER SAVER S m D Save to ER
33.2

Section
292 INITR INITR S n Initialize R and ER
33.3

Section
293 LOGR LOGR S m D1 n D2 Logging R and ER
33.4

Section
294 RWER RWER S n Rewrite to ER
33.5

Section
295 INITER INITER S n Initialize ER
33.6

296 − −

297 − −

298 − −

299 − −

754
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.1 FNC290 – LOADR / Load From ER

31
33.1 FNC290 – LOADR / Load From ER

Transfer 3
Data
FNC275-FNC279
Outline
This instruction reads the current values of extension file registers (ER) stored in the attached memory
cassette (flash memory or EEPROM) or EEPROM built into the PLC, and transfers them to extension
32

Processing 2
High Speed
FNC280-FNC289
registers (R) stored in the RAM in the PLC.

1. Instruction format

FNC 290 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

LOADR 5 steps
LOADR Continuous
Operation
⎯ 33
LOADRP Pulse (Single) ⎯

Register
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
Device number of extension register (transfer destination) to which data is to be 34
transferred

Programming
SFC•STL
S
(The extension file register having the same number is handled as the data
transfer source.) 16-bit binary

Number of points to be read (transferred)

n
[FX3G: 1 ≤ n ≤ 24000, FX3U/FX3UC: 0 ≤ n ≤ 32767]

3. Applicable devices
35

Function
Interrupt
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 36
n 3 3 3

Special Device
37

Error Code

A
Information
Version Up

B
Execution Times

C
Instruction List
Applicable

755
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.1 FNC290 – LOADR / Load From ER

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (LOADR and LOADRP)
1) In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
The contents (current values) of extension file registers (ER) stored in a memory cassette (flash memory)
having the same numbers with the extension registers specified by S to S +n-1 are read, and
transferred to the extension registers specified by S to S +n-1 stored in the PLC's built-in RAM.
Command
input
FNC290 S‚ n
LOADRP

Extension file registers (ER) Extension registers (R)

inside memory cassette Read inside built-in RAM
(transfer)
E S‚ S‚
E S ‚ +1 S ‚ +1
E S ‚ +2 S ‚ +2
E S ‚ +3 S ‚ +3

E S ‚ +n-2 S ‚ +n-2
E S ‚ +n-1 S ‚ +n-1

• Reading and transfer are executed in units of device. Up to 32768 devices can be read and
transferred.
• Different from SAVER (FNC291), INITR (FNC292) and LOGR (FNC293) instructions, it is not
necessary to execute this instruction in units of sector.
• If “n” is set to “0”, it is handled as “32768” when the instruction is executed.

756
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.1 FNC290 – LOADR / Load From ER

31
2) In FX3G PLCs

Transfer 3
Data
FNC275-FNC279
a) When a memory cassette is connected
The contents (current values) of extension file registers (ER) stored in a memory cassette (EEPROM)
having the same numbers with the extension registers specified by S to S +n-1 are read, and
transferred to the extension registers specified by S to S +n-1 stored in the PLC's built-in
RAM. 32

Processing 2
High Speed
FNC280-FNC289
Command
input
FNC290 S
n
LOADRP

Extension file registers (ER) Extension registers (R)

inside memory cassette Read
(transfer)
inside built-in RAM 33
E S
S

Register
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
E S
+1 S
+1
E S
+2 S
+2
E S
+3 S
+3
34

Programming
SFC•STL
E S
+n-2 S
+n-2
E S
+n-1 S
+n-1

• Reading and transfer are executed in units of device. Up to 24000 devices can be read and
transferred. 35

Function
Interrupt
b) When a memory cassette is not connected
In the program example below, the contents (current value) of extension file registers (ER) which are
stored in the EEPROM built in the PLC and have the same device numbers as extension registers
S to S +n-1 are read, and transferred to extension registers (R) which are stored in the RAM
built in the PLC and have the device numbers S to S +n-1. 36

Special Device
Command
input
FNC290 S
n
LOADRP

Extension file registers (ER)

inside built-in EEPROM Read
Extension registers (R)
inside built-in RAM 37
(transfer)

Error Code
E S
S

E S
+1 S
+1

E S
+2 S
+2
E S
+3 S
+3
A
Information
Version Up

E S
+n-2 S
+n-2
E S
+n-1 S
+n-1

• Reading and transfer are executed in units of device. Up to 24000 devices can be read and
transferred.
B
Execution Times

C
Instruction List
Applicable

757
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.1 FNC290 – LOADR / Load From ER

Caution
1. Allowable number of writes to the memory
Note the following cautions on access to extension file registers.
• In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
Data can be written to the memory cassette (flash memory) up to 10,000 times.
Every time the INITR (FNC292), RWER (FNC294) or INITER (FNC295) instruction is executed, it is
counted as a write to the memory. Make sure not to exceed the allowable writes.
When a continuous operation type instruction is used, data is written to the memory in every operation
cycle of the PLC. For preventing this, make sure to use a pulse operation type instruction.

Execution of the LOADR (FNC290), SAVER (FNC291) or LOGR (FNC293) instruction is not counted as a
write to the memory. However, it is necessary to initialize the writing target sector before executing the
SAVER (FNC291) or LOGR (FNC293) instruction.
Every time the INITR (FNC292)or INITER (FNC295) instruction is executed, it is counted as a number of
times of writing to the memory. Make sure not to exceed the allowable number of writes.
• In FX3G PLCs
Data can be written to the memory cassette (EEPROM) up to 10,000 times, and to the built-in memory
(EEPROM) up to 20,000 times.
Every time the RWER (FNC294) instruction is executed, it is counted as a write to the memory. Make sure
not to exceed the allowable number of writes.
When a continuous operation type instruction is used, data is written to the memory in every operation
cycle of the PLC. For preventing this, make sure to use a pulse operation type instruction.
Execution of the LOADR (FNC290)instruction is not counted as a write to the memory.

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When the last device number to be transferred exceeds “32767” (error code: K6706)
At this time, devices up to the last one (R32767) are read and transferred.
• When a memory cassette is not connected (error code: K6771)*1
*1. An operation error is not caused in FX3G PLCs because the contents of extension file registers stored
in the EEPROM built in the PLC are read if a memory cassette is not connected.

Program example
In the program example shown below, the contents (current value) of 4000 extension file registers ER1 to
ER4000 inside the memory cassette are read, and transferred to 4000 extension registers R1 to R4000 inside
the built-in RAM.
M0
FNC290 R1 K4000
LOADR

Extension file registers (ER) Extension registers (R)

inside memory cassette inside built-in RAM
Device Current Device Current
number value Read number value
(transfer)
ER1 K100 R1 K100

ER2 K50 R2 K50

ER3 H0003 R3 H0003
ER4 H0101 R4 H0101

ER3999 K55 R3999 K55

ER4000 K59 R4000 K59

758
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER

31
33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER

Transfer 3
Data
FNC275-FNC279
Outline
This instruction writes the current values of extension registers (R) stored in the PLC's built-in RAM to
extension file registers (ER) stored in a memory cassette (flash memory) in units of sector (2048 points).
32

Processing 2
High Speed
FNC280-FNC289
RWER (FNC294) instruction provided in FX3UC PLCs Ver.1.30 or later and FX3U PLCs writes (transfers) only
arbitrary number of points. It is not necessary to execute INITR (FNC292) or INITER (FNC295) instruction
every time when RWER instruction is used.
→ For RWER instruction, refer to Section 33.5.

1. Instruction format 33

Register
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
FNC 291 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

SAVER SAVER Continuous ⎯

7 steps Operation
⎯ ⎯

2. Set data
34

Programming
SFC•STL
Operand Type Description Data Type
Device number of extension register to which data is to be written
S (Only the head device number of a sector of extension registers can be
specified.)
16-bit binary
n Number of points written (transferred) in one operation cycle [0 ≤ n ≤ 2048] 35
D Device number storing the number of already written points

Function
Interrupt
3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and
Type
System User Digit Specification System User
Unit
Index
stant Number ter String
Pointer
36
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

Special Device
S 3 3
n 3 3

D 3 3

37
Explanation of function and operation

Error Code
1. 16-bit operation (SAVER)
The contents (current values) of extension registers (R) specified by S to S +2047 are written
(transferred) to extension file registers (ER) inside a memory cassette (flash memory) having the same
device numbers in “2048/n” operation cycles (“2048/n+1” cycles if there is the remainder). A
While the instruction is being executed, the number of already written points is stored in D .
Information
Version Up

Command
input
FNC291 S‚ n D‚
SAVER
Instruction execution complete flag
M8029
M{{ Instruction execution complete
B
flag for SAVER instruction
Execution Times

C
Instruction List
Applicable

759
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER

Extension registers (R) Extension file registers (ER)

inside built-in RAM memory Write *1 inside memory cassette
(transfer)
S‚ E S‚

S ‚ +1 E S ‚ +1
S ‚ +2 E S ‚ +2

S ‚ +2047 E S ‚ +2047

*1 “n” points are written (transferred) in each operation cycle.

• Extension file registers are written in units of sector (2048 points).

The table below shows the head device number in each sector:
Sector Head device Sector Head device
Written device range Written device range
number number number number
Sector 0 R0 ER0 to ER2047 Sector 8 R16384 ER16384 to ER18431
Sector 1 R2048 ER2048 to ER4095 Sector 9 R18432 ER18432 to ER20479
Sector 2 R4096 ER4096 to ER6143 Sector 10 R20480 ER20480 to ER22527
Sector 3 R6144 ER6144 to ER8191 Sector 11 R22528 ER22528 to ER24575
Sector 4 R8192 ER8192 to ER10239 Sector 12 R24576 ER24576 to ER26623
Sector 5 R10240 ER10240 to ER12287 Sector 13 R26624 ER26624 to ER28671
Sector 6 R12288 ER12288 to ER14335 Sector 14 R28672 ER28672 to ER30719
Sector 7 R14336 ER14336 to ER16383 Sector 15 R30720 ER30720 to ER32767

• If "n" is set to "0", it is handled as "2048" when the instruction is executed.

• When writing (transfer) of 2048 points is finished, execution of the instruction is completed and the
instruction execution complete flag M8029 turns ON.
• The number of already written points is stored in D .

2. Related device
→ For the instruction execution complete flag use method, refer to Subsection 6.5.2.
Device
Name Description
number
When execution of the target instruction is completed, the instruction execution
complete flag M8029 turns ON.
Instruction execution In a program, however, there may be two or more instructions which can use the
M8029
complete flag flag M8029. To avoid confusion, make sure to use the NO contact of this flag
immediately under SAVER instruction so that this flag works only for SAVER
instruction.

Cautions
1. Cautions on writing data to a memory cassette
Memory cassettes adopt flash memory. Note the following contents when writing data to extension file
registers in a memory cassette with the FNC291 instruction.
• It takes about 340ms to write 2048 points. If “n” is set to K0 or K2048, the operation cycle for executing this
instruction becomes longer than about 340ms.
If the operation cycle is severely affected, write data in two or more operation cycles.
When writing data in two or more operation cycles, set “n” in the range from K1 to K1024.

760
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER

31
• Do not abort execution of this instruction in the middle of operation. If execution is aborted, unexpected

Transfer 3
Data
FNC275-FNC279
data may be written to extension file registers.
If execution of this instruction is aborted by turning OFF the power, execute the instruction again using step
2 described below after turning ON the power again.
Write
command
SET M 32

Processing 2
High Speed
FNC280-FNC289
M
FNC295 S
n
INITERP

FNC291 S
n D

SAVER
Instruction execution complete flag
33

Register
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
M8029
RST M

2. Initialization of extension file registers

Execute INITER (FNC295) or INITR (FNC292) instruction to target extension file registers (ER) before
executing SAVER instruction. If SAVER instruction is driven before INITER (FNC295) or INITR (FNC292)
34

Programming
SFC•STL
instruction is executed, an operation error (error code: K6770) may be caused.
To avoid such an operation error, make a program for executing SAVER instruction in the following
sequence:

• When the FX3U/FX3UC PLC is Ver.1.30 or later

[1] When storing data of 2048 extension registers (R) in one sector to
35

Function
Interrupt
extension file registers (ER)
1) Execute INITER (FNC295) instruction to extension file registers (ER) specified as targets in
SAVER instruction.
2) Execute SAVER instruction.

[2] When storing the contents of an arbitrary number of extension registers (R) to extension file 36
registers (ER)

Special Device
Use RWER instruction.
→ For RWER (FNC294) instruction, refer to Section 33.5.

• When the FX3UC PLC is former than Ver.1.30

[1] When storing data of 2048 extension registers (R) in one sector to 37
extension file registers (ER)

Error Code
If the extension registers (R) have data to be stored in extension file registers (ER), use the procedure
[2].
1) Execute INITR (FNC292) instruction to extension registers (R) and extension file registers (ER)
specified as targets in SAVER instruction.
2) Store data to extension registers (R) specified as targets. A
3) Execute SAVER instruction.
Information
Version Up

[2] When storing data of 2048 extension registers (R) in one sector to extension file registers (ER)
1) Temporarily withdraw the data of extension registers (R) specified as targets in SAVER instruction
to data registers or unused 2048 extension registers (R) by using BMOV (FNC 15) instruction.
2) Execute INITR (FNC292) instruction to extension registers (R) and extension file registers (ER) B
specified as targets in SAVER instruction.
Execution Times

3) Return the data of 2048 points temporarily withdrawn in step 1) to extension registers (R) specified
as targets by using BMOV (FNC 15) instruction.
4) Execute SAVER instruction.

C
Instruction List
Applicable

761
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER

3. Allowable number of writes to the memory

Note the following cautions on access to extension file registers.
• Data can be written to the memory cassette (flash memory) up to 10,000 times.
Every time the INITR (FNC292), RWER (FNC294) or INITER (FNC295) instruction is executed, it is
counted as a write to the memory. Make sure not to exceed the allowable number of writes.
When a continuous operation type instruction is used, data is written to the memory in every operation
cycle of the PLC. For preventing this, make sure to use a pulse operation type instruction.
• Execution of the LOADR (FNC290), SAVER (FNC291) or LOGR (FNC293) instruction is not counted as a
write to the memory. However, it is necessary to initialize the writing target sector before executing the
SAVER (FNC291) or LOGR (FNC293) instruction.
Every time the INITR (FNC292)or INITER (FNC295) instruction is executed, it is counted as a write to the
memory. Make sure not to exceed the allowable number of writes.

762
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER

31
Errors

Transfer 3
Data
FNC275-FNC279
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When any device number other than the head device number of a sector of extension file registers is set to
(error code: K6706)
S
32
• When a memory cassette is not connected (error code: K6771)

Processing 2
High Speed
FNC280-FNC289
• When the protect switch of the memory cassette is set to ON (error code: K6770)
• When the collation result after data writing is "mismatch" due to omission of initialization or for another
reason (error code: K6770)
When this error occurs, the current values (data) of extension registers (R) may be lost. To avoid the data
loss, back up the data of extension registers (R) in advance using the following procedure: 33
1)Set the PLC mode to STOP.

Register
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
2)Create a new project in GX Developer.
This step is not necessary if it is alright to overwrite the current project.
3)Read the contents of extension registers (R) to GX Developer.
[1]Select “Online” → “Read from PLC..." to
display the “Read from PLC” window.
34

Programming
SFC•STL
[2]Click “PLC parameter” and “Device data”
FX3U(C)*1
to put a check mark to each of them.
[3]Click [Execute] button to execute reading.
[4]When reading is completed, save the
project.
4)Change the current program inside the PLC to 35
the program shown in “1. Cautions on writing

Function
Interrupt
data to a memory cassette” in “Cautions” on
the previous page.

36

Special Device
*1.For Ver. 8.13P to 8.24A of GX Developer, the PLC
type is FX3UC.
5)To the PLC, write the data which was temporarily withdrawn to GX Developer. 37
[1]Select “Online” → “Write to PLC...” to

Error Code
display the “Write to PLC” window.
[2]Click “PLC parameter” and “MAIN” to put
FX3U(C)*2
a check mark to each of them.
[3]Click [Execute] button to execute writing.
A
Information
Version Up

B
Execution Times

*2.For Ver. 8.13P to 8.24A of GX Developer, the PLC

type is FX3UC. C
6)Change the PLC mode from STOP to RUN, execute the program, and store the data to extension file
Instruction List
Applicable

registers inside the memory cassette.

763
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER

Program examples
1) In the case of FX3UC PLCs Ver. 1.30 or later and FX3U PLCs Ver. 2.20 or later

In the example shown below, only extension registers R10 to R19 (in sector 0) need to be updated in the
extension file registers (ER). When X000 is set to ON, sector 0 (head device R0) is written to the
extension file registers 128 points at a time. (128 points are written in one operation cycle)

Program

X000
SET M0

M0
FNC295 R0 K1 (1)
INITERP

FNC 07
WDTP

FNC291 R0 K128 D0 (2)

SAVER
Instruction execution complete flag
M8029
RST M0

END

Operation

Setting data Setting backup data Setting backup data

Extension registers (R) Extension file registers (ER) Extension file registers (ER)

Device number Current

value Device number Current value Device number Current value

R0 K100 ER0 K100 ER0 HFFFF

R1 K105 ER1 K105 ER1 HFFFF
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
R10 K200 ER10 K300 ER10 HFFFF
Changed data

R11 K215 ER11 K330 (1) ER11 HFFFF (2)

Setting data (A)

R12 K400 ER12 K350 ER12 HFFFF

. . . . INITER . .
. . . . . . SAVER
. . . . instruction . . instruction
R19 K350 ER19 K400 ER19 HFFFF
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
R99 K1000 ER99 K1000 ER99 HFFFF
R100 HFFFF ER100 HFFFF ER100 HFFFF
. . . . . .
Unused

. . . . . .
. . . . . .
R2047 HFFFF ER2047 HFFFF ER2047 HFFFF
To the next page

764
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER

31

Transfer 3
Data
FNC275-FNC279
Setting data Setting backup data
Extension file registers Number of
Extension registers (R) (ER)
already written
Current Current points (D0)
Device number Device number

R0
value
K100 ER0
value
K100
32

Processing 2
High Speed
FNC280-FNC289
R1 K105 ER1 K105
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
R10 K200 ER10 K200
Setting data

Changed data

R11 K215
1st operation
ER11 K215 33
(2) R12 K400 ER12 K400

Register
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
. .
cycle
. .
. . . .
. . . .
SAVER R19 K350 ER19 K350
instruction . . . .
. . . .
. . . .
R99 K1000 ER99 K1000 34

Programming
SFC•STL
R100 HFFFF ER100 HFFFF
. . . .
. . . . K128
. . . .
R127 HFFFF ER127 HFFFF
R128 HFFFF 2nd operation ER128 HFFFF
.
.
.
. cycle
.
. .
.
35
. . . .
Unused

Function
Interrupt
R255 HFFFF ER255 HFFFF K256
R256 HFFFF 3rd to 15th ER256 HFFFF
. . operation . .
. . cycle . .
. . . .
R1919 HFFFF ER1919 HFFFF K1920
36
R1920 HFFFF 16th ER1920 HFFFF

Special Device
. . operation . .
. . cycle . .
. . . .
R2047 HFFFF ER2047 HFFFF K2048

37

Error Code

A
Information
Version Up

B
Execution Times

C
Instruction List
Applicable

765
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER

2) In the case of FX3UC PLCs former than Ver.1.30

In the program example shown below, the changed content settings of the extension registers R10 to
R19 (sector 0) are reflected on extension file registers (ER) when X000 is set to ON. (128 points are
written in one operation cycle.)

Program

X000
SET M0

M0
FNC 15 R0 R30720 K100 (1)
BMOVP

FNC292 R0 K1 (2)
INITRP

FNC 07
WDTP

FNC 15 R30720 R0 K100 (3)

BMOVP

FNC291 R0 K128 D0 (4)

SAVER

Instruction execution complete flag

M8029
RST M0

END

Operation

Setting data Setting backup data Temporarily withdrawn data*1

Extension file registers Unused extension
Extension registers (R) (ER) registers
Device number Current Device number Current Device number Current
value value value
R0 K100 ER0 K100 R30720 K100
R1 K105 ER1 K105 R30721 K105
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
Setting data (A)

R10 K200 ER10 K300 R30730 K200

Changed data

R11 K215 ER11 K330 R30731 K215 (2)

(1)
R12 K400 ER12 K350 R30732 K400
. . . . BMOV . . INITR
. . . . . .
. . . . instruction . . instruction
R19 K350 ER19 K400 R30739 K350
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
R99 K1000 ER99 K1000 R30819 K1000
R100 HFFFF ER100 HFFFF *1 Use unused devices as an
Unused

. . . . area to which data are

. . . .
. . . . temporarily withdrawn.
R2047 HFFFF ER2047 HFFFF To the next page

766
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.2 FNC291 – SAVER / Save to ER

31

Transfer 3
Data
FNC275-FNC279
Setting data Setting backup data Setting data
Extension registers (R) Extension file registers Unused extension registers
(ER)
Device number value Device number Current
Current
value Device number Current
value
R0 HFFFF ER0 HFFFF R0 K100 32

Processing 2
High Speed
FNC280-FNC289
R1 HFFFF ER1 HFFFF R1 K105
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .

Setting data (A)

R10 HFFFF ER10 HFFFF R10 K200

(2) R11 HFFFF ER11 HFFFF (3) R11 K215

(4) 33
R12 HFFFF ER12 HFFFF R12 K400

Register
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
. . . . BMOV . . SAVER
INITR . . . . . .
instruction . . . . instruction . . instruction
R19 HFFFF ER19 HFFFF R19 K350
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
R99 HFFFF ER99 HFFFF R99 K1000 34

Programming
SFC•STL
R100 HFFFF ER100 HFFFF R100 HFFFF
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
R2047 HFFFF ER2047 HFFFF R2047 HFFFF

35

Function
Interrupt
Setting data Setting backup data
Extension registers (R) Extension file registers
(ER) Number of
already written
Device number Current
value
Current
Device number value points (D0)

R0 K100 ER0 K100 36

Special Device
R1 K105 ER1 K105
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
R10 K200 ER10 K200
Setting data
Changed data

R11 K215 ER11 K215

R12 K400
1st operation
ER12 K400
37
cycle
. . . .

Error Code
. . . .
. . . .
R19 K350 ER19 K350
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
R99 K1000 ER99 K1000
A
R100 HFFFF ER100 HFFFF
Information
Version Up

. . . .
. . . . K128
. . . .
R127 HFFFF ER127 HFFFF
R128 HFFFF 2nd operation ER128 HFFFF
. . cycle . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. B
Unused

Execution Times

R255 HFFFF ER255 HFFFF K256

R256 HFFFF 3rd to 15th ER256 HFFFF
. .
operation . .
. . cycle . .
. . . .
R1919 HFFFF ER1919 HFFFF K1920
R1920 HFFFF 16th ER1920 HFFFF
C
. . operation . .
Instruction List
Applicable

. . cycle . .
. . . .
R2047 HFFFF ER2047 HFFFF K2048

767
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.3 FNC292 – INITR / Initialize R and ER

33.3 FNC292 – INITR / Initialize R and ER

Outline
This instruction initializes (to “HFFFF” <K-1>) extension registers (R) in the RAM built in a PLC and extension
file registers in a memory cassette (flash memory) before data logging by LOGR (FNC293) instruction.
In FX3UC PLCs former than Ver.1.30, use this instruction to initialize extension file registers (ER) before
writing data to them using SAVER (FNC291) instruction.
In FX3UC PLCs Ver.1.30 or later and FX3U PLCs, INITER (FNC295) instruction is also provided to initialize (to
"HFFFF" <K-1>) only extension file registers (ER) in a memory cassette (flash memory) in units of sector.
→ For SAVER (FNC291) instruction, refer to Section 33.2.
→ For LOGR (FNC293) instruction, refer to Section 33.4.
→ For INITER (FNC295) instruction, refer to Section 33.6.

1. Instruction format

FNC 292 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

INITR P 5 steps
INITR Continuous
Operation
⎯
INITRP Pulse (Single) ⎯
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
*1
Device number of extension register and extension file register to be initialized
S It is possible to specify only the head device number in a sector of extension
registers. 16-bit binary
Number of sectors of extension registers and extension file registers to be
n
initialized

*1. When a memory cassette is not used, extension file registers (ER) are not initialized.

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3
n 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (INITR and INITRP)
“n” sectors of extension registers in the PLC’s built-in RAM starting from the one specified by S and “n”
sectors of extension file registers in a memory cassette (flash memory) having the same device numbers are
initialized (to “HFFFF” <K-1>).
Initialization is executed in units of sector.
Command
input
FNC292 S‚ n
INITRP

768
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.3 FNC292 – INITR / Initialize R and ER

31
The table below shows the head device number in each sector:

Transfer 3
Data
FNC275-FNC279
Sector Head device Sector Head device
Initialized device range Initialized device range
number number number number
R0 to R2047, R16384 to R18431,
Sector 0 R0 Sector 8 R16384
ER0 to ER2047 ER16384 to ER18431

Sector 1 R2048
R2048 to R4095,
Sector 9 R18432
R18432 to R20479, 32
ER2048 to ER4095 ER18432 to ER20479

Processing 2
High Speed
FNC280-FNC289
R4096 to R6143, R20480 to R22527,
Sector 2 R4096 Sector 10 R20480
ER4096 to ER6143 ER20480 to ER22527
R6144 to R8191, R22528 to R24575,
Sector 3 R6144 Sector 11 R22528
ER6144 to ER8191 ER22528 to ER24575

Sector 4 R8192
R8192 to R10239,
ER8192 to ER10239
Sector 12 R24576
R24576 to R26623,
ER24576 to ER26623
33

Register
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
R10240 to R12287, R26624 to R28671,
Sector 5 R10240 Sector 13 R26624
ER10240 to ER12287 ER26624 to ER28671
R12288 to R14335, R28672 to R30719,
Sector 6 R12288 Sector 14 R28672
ER12288 to ER14335 ER28672 to ER30719

Sector 7 R14336
R14336 to R16383,
ER14336 to ER16383
Sector 15 R30720
R30720 to R32767,
ER30720 to ER32767 34

Programming
SFC•STL
Operation (when a memory cassette is used)
• Extension registers (R) • Extension file registers (ER)
[inside the built-in RAM memory] [inside the memory cassette]

Device number
Current value
Device number
Current value 35
Before execution After execution Before execution After execution

Function
Interrupt
S H0010 HFFFF S H1234 HFFFF

S +1 H0020 HFFFF S +1 H5678 HFFFF

S +2 H0011 HFFFF S +2 H90AB HFFFF

36
...

...
...

...

...

...

Special Device
S +(2048×n)-1 HABCD HFFFF S +(2048×n)-1 HCDEF HFFFF

Caution
1. Initialization of two or more sectors
When a memory cassette is attached, 18 ms is required to initialize one sector.
37

Error Code
(When a memory cassette is not attached, only 1 ms or less is required to initialize one sector.)
When initializing two or more sectors, take either measures shown below.
• Set a large value to the watchdog timer D8000 using the following program
Initial pulse
M8002
FNC 12 K{{{ D8000
A
MOV
Information
Version Up

B
Execution Times

C
Instruction List
Applicable

769
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.3 FNC292 – INITR / Initialize R and ER

Guideline of the watchdog timer set value

A value acquired by the following procedure can be regarded as the guideline of the watchdog timer set
value.
If an acquired value is 200 ms or less, however, it is not necessary to change the watchdog timer set value.
1) Write a program to be executed from GX Developer to the PLC.
[Online]→[Write to PLC...]
2) Set the current value of D8000 (unit: ms) to "1000" using the device test function in GX Developer.
[Online]→[Debug]→[Device test...]→ "Word device/buffer memory" in Device test dialogbox
3) Set the PLC mode to RUN, and execute the program. (Execute this instruction also.)
4) Monitor the maximum scan time D8012 (unit: 0.1ms) using the device batch monitoring function in GX
Developer.
5) Set the watchdog timer to the maximum scan time (D8012) or more.
D8012 stores the maximum scan time in increments of 0.1 ms.
Rough guide to the watchdog timer set value D8000 (unit: ms) is the "value stored in D8012 divided by
10" added by 50 to 100.
• Setting WDT (FNC 07) instruction just before and after INITR instruction as shown below:
Command
input
FNC 07
WDT The watchdog timer is reset.

FNC292 S‚ n
INITR

FNC 07
The watchdog timer is reset.
WDT

If the processing time of the INITR command exceeds 200ms, set the watchdog timer value D8000 (unit: ms)
to the proceessing time or more.

2. Allowable number of writes to the memory

Note the following cautions on access to extension file registers.
• Data can be written to the memory cassette (flash memory) up to 10,000 times.
Every time the INITR (FNC292), RWER (FNC294) or INITER (FNC295) instruction is executed, it is
counted as a write to the memory. Make sure not to exceed the allowable number of writes.
When a continuous operation type instruction is used, data is written to the memory in every operation
cycle of the PLC. For preventing this, make sure to use a pulse operation type instruction.
• Execution of the LOADR (FNC290), SAVER (FNC291) or LOGR (FNC293) instruction is not counted as a
write to the memory. However, it is necessary to initialize the writing target sector before executing the
SAVER (FNC291) or LOGR (FNC293) instruction.
Every time the INITR (FNC292)or INITER (FNC295) instruction is executed, it is counted as a write to the
memory. Make sure not to exceed the allowable number of writes.

Errors
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When any device number other than the head device number of a sector of extension file registers is set to
S (error code: K6706)
• When a device number to be initialized exceeds "32767" (error code: K6706)
In this case, devices up to R32767 (ER32767) are initialized.
• When the protect switch of the memory cassette is set to ON (error code: K6770)

770
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.3 FNC292 – INITR / Initialize R and ER

31
Program example

Transfer 3
Data
FNC275-FNC279
In the program example shown below, the extension registers R0 to R2047 in the sector 0 are initialized.
Note that the extension file registers ER0 to ER2047 are also initialized if a memory cassette is attached.
X000
FNC 07
WDT
32
FNC292 R0 K1

Processing 2
High Speed
FNC280-FNC289
INITR

FNC 07
WDT

END
33

Register
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
• Extension registers (R) [inside the built-in RAM memory]
Current value
Device number
Before execution After execution
R0 H1234 HFFFF
R1 H5678 HFFFF
34

Programming
SFC•STL
R2 H90AB HFFFF
...

...

...

R2047 HCDEF HFFFF

35

Function
Interrupt
36

Special Device
37

Error Code

A
Information
Version Up

B
Execution Times

C
Instruction List
Applicable

771
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.4 FNC293 – LOGR / Logging R and ER

33.4 FNC293 – LOGR / Logging R and ER

Outline
This instruction logs specified devices, and stores the logged data to extension registers (R) in the RAM and
extension file registers (ER) in a memory cassette.

1. Instruction format

FNC 293 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

LOGR P 11 steps
LOGR Continuous
Operation
⎯
LOGRP Pulse (Single) ⎯
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Head device number to be logged*1
m Number of devices to be logged [1 ≤ m ≤ 8000]
D1 Head device number used in logging 16-bit binary
n Number of sectors of devices used in logging [1 ≤ n ≤ 16]
D2 Number of logged data

*1. C200 to C255 cannot be set.

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3 3 3
m 3 3 3

D1 3
n 3 3

D2 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (LOGR and LOGRP)
While the instruction is driven, “m” devices starting from S are logged until “n” sectors of extension
registers (R) starting from D1 and extension file registers (ER) in a memory cassette are filled.
The number of logged data is stored to D2 .
If a memory cassette is not used, data is not written to extension file registers (ER).
Command
input
FNC293 S‚ m D1 n D2 ‚
LOGRP

772
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.4 FNC293 – LOGR / Logging R and ER

31
Logging data format

Transfer 3
Data
FNC275-FNC279
Number of
D1 stored data
Destination storing 1st logging data
to → D1 =m
S ‚ to S ‚ +m-1
D1 +m-1
32
D1 +m

Processing 2
High Speed
FNC280-FNC289
Destination storing 2nd logging data
to → D1 = 2m
S ‚ to S ‚ +m-1
D1 +2m-1
D1 +2m Data writing
Destination storing 3rd logging data
to → D1 = 3m area
D1 +3m-1 1926 × n 33

Register
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
. . . Logging data
. . . storage area
. . . 2048 × n
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
. 34

Programming
SFC•STL
D1 +(1926 × n)-1 Writing position control area
(Every time one word is used in the data
...

writing area, bits are set to OFF (0) from

Data writing
ON (1) in turn from bit 0 of [ D1 +
position control
(1926 × n) -1].
After bit 15 of [ D1 + (1926 × n) -1] is area 35
122 × n

Function
Interrupt
set to OFF (0), bit 0 of the next device
[ D1 + (1926 × n)] is set to OFF (0) in
D1 +(2048 × n)-1 the next logging.

The table below shows the head device number in each sector: 36

Special Device
Sector Head device Sector Head device
Written device range Written device range
number number number number
R0 to R2047, R16384 to R18431,
Sector 0 R0 Sector 8 R16384
ER0 to ER2047 ER16384 to ER18431
R2048 to R4095, R18432 to R20479,
Sector 1 R2048
ER2048 to ER4095
Sector 9 R18432
ER18432 to ER20479 37
R4096 to R6143, R20480 to R22527,

Error Code
Sector 2 R4096 Sector 10 R20480
ER4096 to ER6143 ER20480 to ER22527
R6144 to R8191, R22528 to R24575,
Sector 3 R6144 Sector 11 R22528
ER6144 to ER8191 ER22528 to ER24575
R8192 to R10239, R24576 to R26623,
Sector 4 R8192
ER8192 to ER10239
Sector 12 R24576
ER24576 to ER26623 A
R10240 to R12287, R26624 to R28671,
Information
Version Up

Sector 5 R10240 Sector 13 R26624

ER10240 to ER12287 ER26624 to ER28671
R12288 to R14335, R28672 to R30719,
Sector 6 R12288 Sector 14 R28672
ER12288 to ER14335 ER28672 to ER30719
R14336 to R16383, R30720 to R32767,
Sector 7 R14336 Sector 15 R30720
ER14336 to ER16383 ER30720 to ER32767
B
Execution Times

C
Instruction List
Applicable

773
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.4 FNC293 – LOGR / Logging R and ER

Cautions
1. LOGR instruction
LOGR instruction executes logging in each operation in the continuous operation type.
When logging should be executed only once by one input, use the pulse operation type.

2. Caution on using a memory cassette

Flash memory is adopted in a memory cassette. Make sure to initialize the data storage area in units of
sector before starting logging.
If LOGR instruction is executed without initializing the data storage area, an operation error (error code:
K6770) may be caused.
Logging data storage area initialization
command input
FNC292 *1 *2
D1 ‚ n
INITR

*1 Specify the same device as D1 ‚ in LOGR instruction.

*2 Specify the same number as (n) in LOGR instruction.

3. Allowable number of writes to the memory

Note the following cautions on access to extension file registers.
• Data can be written to the memory cassette (flash memory) up to 10,000 times.
Every time the INITR (FNC292), RWER (FNC294) or INITER (FNC295) instruction is executed, it is
counted as a write to the memory. Make sure not to exceed the allowable number of writes.
When a continuous operation type instruction is used, data is written to the memory in every operation
cycle of the PLC. For preventing this, make sure to use a pulse operation type instruction.
• Execution of the LOADR (FNC290), SAVER (FNC291) or LOGR (FNC293) instruction is not counted as a
write to the memory. However, it is necessary to initialize the writing target sector before executing the
SAVER (FNC291) or LOGR (FNC293) instruction.
Every time the INITR (FNC292)or INITER (FNC295) instruction is executed, it is counted as a write to the
memory. Make sure not to exceed the allowable number of writes.

774
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.4 FNC293 – LOGR / Logging R and ER

31
Errors

Transfer 3
Data
FNC275-FNC279
An operation error is caused in the following cases; The error flag M8067 turns ON, and the error code is
stored in D8067.
• When any device number other than the head device number of a sector of extension file registers is set to
(error code: K6706)
S
32
• While data is written, the remaining area and the data quantity to be written are compared with each other.

Processing 2
High Speed
FNC280-FNC289
If the remaining storage area is insufficient, only a limited amount of data is written. (error code: K6706)
• When the protect switch of the memory cassette is set to ON (error code: K6770)
• When the collation result after data writing is "mismatch" due to omission of initialization or for another
reason (error code: K6770)
When this error occurs, the current values (data) of extension registers (R) may be lost. To avoid the data 33
loss, back up the data of extension registers (R) in advance using the following procedure:

Register
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
1)Set the PLC mode to STOP.
2)Create a new project in GX Developer.
This step is not necessary if it is alright to overwrite the current project.
3)Read the contents of extension registers (R) to GX Developer.
[1]Select "Online" → "Read from PLC..." to
34

Programming
SFC•STL
display "Read from PLC" window.
[2]Click "Parameter" and "Device data" to
FX3U(C)*1
put a check mark next to each of them.
[3]Click [Execute] button to execute reading.
[4]When reading is completed, save the
project. 35

Function
Interrupt
36

Special Device
*1.For Ver. 8.13P to 8.24A of GX Developer, the PLC
type is FX3UC.
37

Error Code

A
Information
Version Up

B
Execution Times

C
Instruction List
Applicable

775
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.4 FNC293 – LOGR / Logging R and ER

4)Change the current program inside the PLC to the program shown in “Cautions on using a memory
cassette” in “Cautions” on the previous page.
5)To the PLC, write the data which was temporarily withdrawn to GX Developer.
[1]Select “Online” → “Write to PLC...” to
display the “Write to PLC” window.
[2]Click “PLC parameter” and “MAIN” to put
FX3U(C)*2
a check mark to each of them.
[3]Click [Execute] button to execute writing.

*2.For Ver. 8.13P to 8.24A of GX Developer, the PLC

type is FX3UC.
6)Change the PLC mode from STOP to RUN, execute the program, and store the data to the extension file
registers inside the memory cassette.

776
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.4 FNC293 – LOGR / Logging R and ER

31
Program example

Transfer 3
Data
FNC275-FNC279
In the program example shown below, D1 and D2 are logged to the area from R2048 to R6143 every time
X001 turns ON.
X001
FNC293 D1 K2 R2048 K2 D100
LOGRP 32

Processing 2
High Speed
FNC280-FNC289
X001 X001
Initial value OFF→ON OFF→ON
1st time 2nd time
R2048 HFFFF H1234 H1234
R2049 HFFFF H5678 H5678 33

Register
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
R2050 HFFFF HFFFF H9ABC
R2051 HFFFF HFFFF H1122 Data writing
R2052 HFFFF HFFFF HFFFF area

Because two words

are used, low-order
two bits are set to
34

Programming
SFC•STL
OFF (0).

R5899 HFFFF HFFFC HFFF0

R5900 HFFFF HFFFF HFFFF
R5901 HFFFF HFFFF HFFFF Because two words
35
are used, low-order Writing position

Function
Interrupt
two bits are set to
OFF (0). control area

R6143 HFFFF HFFFF HFFFF

36

Special Device
D1 H1234 D1 H9ABC
D2 H5678 D2 H1122

D100 H0000 H0002 H0004

37

Error Code

A
Information
Version Up

B
Execution Times

C
Instruction List
Applicable

777
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.5 FNC294 – RWER / Rewrite to ER

33.5 FNC294 – RWER / Rewrite to ER

Outline
This instruction writes the current values of an arbitrary number of extension registers (R) stored in the RAM
in the PLC to extension file registers (ER) stored in a memory cassette (flash memory or EEPROM) or the
EEPROM built into the PLC.
Because RWER (FNC294) instruction is not supported in FX3UC PLCs former than Ver.1.30, use SAVER
(FNC291) instruction instead.
→ For SAVER (FNC291) instruction, refer to Section 33.2.

1. Instruction format

FNC 294 16-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition 32-bit Instruction Mnemonic Operation Condition

RWER P 5 steps
RWER Continuous
Operation
⎯
RWERP Pulse (Single) ⎯
Operation

2. Set data
Operand Type Description Data Type
S Device number of extension register storing data
Number of written (transferred) devices 16-bit binary
n
[FX3G: 1 ≤ n ≤ 24000, FX3U/FX3UC: 0 ≤ n ≤ 32767]

3. Applicable devices
Bit Devices Word Devices Others
Oper-
Special Con- Real Charac-
and System User Digit Specification System User Index Pointer
Unit stant Number ter String
Type
X Y M T C S D….b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R U…\G… V Z Modify K H E "…" P

S 3 3
n 3 3 3

Explanation of function and operation

1. 16-bit operation (RWER)
1) In FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
The contents (current values) of “n” extension registers (R) starting from S are written (transferred) to
extension file registers having the same device numbers in a memory cassette (flash memory).
Command
input
FNC294 S‚ n
RWERP

Extension registers (R) inside Extension file registers (ER)

built-in RAM memory Write *1 inside memory cassette
(transfer)
S‚ E S‚

S ‚ +1 E S ‚ +1

S ‚ +2 E S ‚ +2

S‚ +n-1 E S ‚ +n-1

*1 All points specified by the instruction are written (transferred).

• When “n” is set to “0”, it is handled as “32768” when the instruction is executed.

778
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.5 FNC294 – RWER / Rewrite to ER

31
2) In FX3G PLCs

Transfer 3
Data
FNC275-FNC279
a) When a memory cassette is connected
The contents (current values) of “n” extension registers (R) starting from are written (transferred) to
extension file registers having the same device numbers in a memory cassette (flash memory).

Command
input
FNC290
32
S
n

Processing 2
High Speed
FNC280-FNC289
RWERP

Extension registers (R) inside Extension file registers (ER)

built-in RAM memory Write *1 inside memory cassette
(transfer)
S
E S

33
S
+1 E S
+1

Register
Extension File
FNC290-FNC299
S
+2 E S
+2

S
+n-1 E S
+n-1

*1 All points specified by the instruction are written (transferred).

34

Programming
SFC•STL
b) When a memory cassette is not connected
The contents (current values) of "n" extension registers (R) starting from S are written
(transferred) to extension file registers which are stored in the EEPROM built in the PLC and have the
same device numbers..
Command
35

Function
Interrupt
input
FNC290 S
n
RWERP

Extension registers (R) inside Extension file registers (ER)

built-in RAM memory Write
(transfer)
*1 inside built-in EEPROM 36
S
E S

Special Device
S
+1 E S
+1

S
+2 E S
+2

S
+n-1 E S
+n-1
37

Error Code
*1 All points specified by the instruction are written (transferred).

A
Information
Version Up

B
Execution Times

C
Instruction List
Applicable

779
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers 33 Extension File Register Control – FNC290 to FNC299
Programming Manual - Basic & Applied Instruction Edition 33.5 FNC294 – RWER / Rewrite to ER

Cautions
1. Cautions on writing data to a memory cassette (flash memory) for FX3U/FX3UC PLCs
Memory cassettes adopt flash memory. Note the following contents when writing data to extension file
registers in a memory cassette with the FNC294 instruction.
• Though extension file registers to be written can be specified arbitrarily, writing is executed in units of
sector.
It takes about 47 ms to write one sector. If the extension file registers to be written are located in two
sectors, the instruction execution time will be about 94 ms.
Make sure to change the set value of the watchdog timer D8000 before executing this instruction.
Writing command input
PLS M100

M100
FNC 12 D8000 D200
MOV

FNC 20 D8000 K47 *1 D8000 *1 Number of sectors to be written × 47 ms

ADD

FNC 07
WDT

FNC294 R1000 K100 The contents of R1000 to R1099 in the sector 0 are
RWER written to ER1000 to ER1099.

MOV D200 D8000

FNC 07
WDT

The table below shows the head device number in each sector:
Sector number Device range Sector number Device range
Sector 0 ER0 to ER2047 Sector 8 ER16384 to ER18431
Sector 1 ER2048 to ER4095 Sector 9 ER18432 to ER20479
Sector 2 ER4096 to ER6143 Sector 10 ER20480 to ER22527
Sector 3 ER6144 to ER8191 Sector 11 ER22528 to ER24575
Sector 4 ER8192 to ER10239 Sector 12 ER24576 to ER26623
Sector 5 ER10240 to ER12287 Sector 13 ER26624 to ER28671
Sector 6 ER12288 to ER14335 Sector 14 ER28672 to ER30719
Sector 7 ER14336 to ER16383 Sector 15 ER30720 to ER32767

• Do not turn OFF the power while this instruction is being executed. If the power is turned OFF, execution
of this instruction may be aborted. If execution is aborted, the data may be lost. Make sure to back up the
data before executing this instruction.
→ For the backup method, refer to the next page.

2. Cautions on writing data to a memory cassette (EEPROM) for FX3G PLCs

Memory cassettes adopt the EEPROM. Note the following contents when writing data to extension file
registers in a memory cassette using the FNC294 instruction.
• Do not turn OFF the power while this instruction is being executed. If the power is turned OFF, execution of
this instruction may be aborted. If execution is aborted, the data may be lost. Make sure to back up the
data before executing this instruction.
→ For the backup method, refer to the next page.

780
FX3G/FX3U/FX3UC Series Programmable Controllers